GE Logic 400 User Manual

GE Medical Systems
Technical Publications
2177612-100
Revision 0
LOGIQt 400
Users Manual Volume 1
Copyright
1997 By General Electric Co.
Operating Documentation
Regulatory Requirement
This product complies with regulatory requirements of the following European Directive 93/42/EEC concerning medical devices
GE Medical Systems
GE Medical Systems: Telex 3797371 P.O. Box 414, Milwaukee, Wisconsin 53201 U.S.A. (Asia, Pacific, Latin America, North America) GE Medical SystemsEurope 283 rue de la Minire BP34 78533 BUC Cedex
Revision History
REV
0
DATE
March 6, 1997
REASON FOR CHANGE

Initial Release
PAGE NUMBER
VOLUME 1: Title Page Revision History A and B Table of Contents 1 thru 26 Introduction 1 thru 14 Getting Started 1 thru 58 Safety 1 thru 28 Basic Scan 1 thru 104 B Mode 1 thru 40 Doppler 1 thru 50 M Mode 1 thru 24 Adding Color 1 thru 50 Index 1 thru 16
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

REVISION NUMBER PAGE NUMBER
REVISION NUMBER
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Vascular 1 thru 38 Cardiology 1 thru 152 Index 1 thru 16 VOLUME 3: Title Page Revision History A and B Table of Contents 1 thru 26 Biopsy Procedures 1 thru 22 Probes 1 thru 44 User Maintenance 1 thru 62 Appendices 1 and 2 Bioeffects A-1 thru A-106 System Data B-1 thru B-10 Peripherals C-1 thru C-6 Assistance D-1 thru D-6 Warranties E-1 thru E-4 OB Table Data F-1 thru F-40 Glossary G-1 thru G-36 VCR Operation H-1 thru H-54 Index 1 thru 16
VOLUME 2: Title Page Revision History A and B Table of Contents 1 thru 26 Customizing Your System 1 thru 152 General Meas & Calcs 1 thru 28 Abdomen and Small Parts 1 thru 34 OB/GYN 1 thru 98
LOGIQ 400 User Manual 2177612100 Rev 0
Revision History A
Revision History
Please verify that you are using the latest revision of this document. Information pertaining to this document is maintained on GPC (GE Medical Systems Global Product Configuration). If you need to know the latest revision, contact your distributor, local GE Sales Representative or in the USA call the GE Ultrasound Clinical Answer Center at 1-800-682-5327 or 414-524-5255.
Revision History B
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
VOLUME 1 Title Page Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table of Contents Introduction
System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Attention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prescription Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interference Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Indications for Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indications for Fetal Doppler use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contraindications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LOGIQ 400s Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Improved operator interface and system ergonomics Improved sensitivity and resolution in each imaging mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LOGIQ 400 Option/Feature Availability . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 3
Introduction 3 Introduction 3 Introduction 3 Introduction 3 Introduction 4 Introduction 6 Introduction 6 Introduction 7 Introduction 8 Introduction 8 Introduction 8 Introduction 8
How This Book is Organized . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Manual Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 9
Introduction 9
How to Use This Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Manual Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Finding information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conventions used in this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 11
Introduction 11 Introduction 11 Introduction 12
Getting Started
Preparing the System for Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Local Site Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before the system arrives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Environmental Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Console graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Getting Started 3
Getting Started 3 Getting Started 4 Getting Started 4 Getting Started 5 Getting Started 6
LOGIQ 400 Users Manual 2156967100 Rev 0
Table of Contents 1
Table of Contents
Connecting and Using the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Warm Up Temperature Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power On/Standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Password Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Foot Switch (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External disk drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storage areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjusting the Display Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotate, tilt, raise and lower the monitor . . . . . . . . . . . Brightness and Contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Peripheral/Accessory Connector Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Getting Started 11 Getting Started 12 Getting Started 13 Getting Started 15 Getting Started 17 Getting Started 19 Getting Started 20 Getting Started 21 Getting Started 22 Getting Started 25 Getting Started 26 Getting Started 27 Getting Started 27 Getting Started 28 Getting Started 29 Getting Started 30
Operator Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Panel Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Key Illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Patient Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Probe Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Soft Menu Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Top Menu Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sub Menu Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TGC Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Measurement and Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mode, Display and Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Doppler and CFM Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Defined Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Getting Started 33
Getting Started 33 Getting Started 34 Getting Started 35 Getting Started 36 Getting Started 37 Getting Started 37 Getting Started 38 Getting Started 39 Getting Started 41 Getting Started 44 Getting Started 47 Getting Started 49 Getting Started 50
Relocating The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Moving the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transporting the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Getting Started 53
Getting Started 53 Getting Started 55 Getting Started 57 Getting Started 57
Safety
Precaution Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Icon Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety 3
Safety 3
Hazard Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Icon Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Important Safety Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety 5
Safety 5 Safety 6
Table of Contents 2
Table of Contents
Patient Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related Hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety 7
Safety 7
Equipment and Personnel Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Related Hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety 9
Safety 9
Device Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Label Icon Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Classifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety 11
Safety 11 Safety 13
Acoustic Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controls Affecting Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Best practices while scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Acoustic Output Default Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety 19
Safety 19 Safety 19 Safety 20 Safety 20
Warning Label Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitor Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Console Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defibrillator Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ground Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Regulatory Labels (European Systems) . . . . . . . . . . Regulatory Labels (American Systems) . . . . . . . . . .
Safety 21
Safety 21 Safety 21 Safety 24 Safety 24 Safety 25 Safety 26 Safety 27
Basic Scan
Beginning an Exam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Beginning a New Patient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ID/Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Helpful hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic Scan 3
Basic Scan 3 Basic Scan 4 Basic Scan 10 Basic Scan 11
Reading the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B-Mode Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Acoustic Output Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjusting the Acoustic Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Doppler Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-Mode or Doppler Spectrum Only Display . . . . . . . . . . . Dual Doppler Spectrum Only Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Color Flow Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Other Display Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic Scan 13
Basic Scan 13 Basic Scan 18 Basic Scan 19 Basic Scan 22 Basic Scan 25 Basic Scan 26 Basic Scan 27 Basic Scan 29
Table of Contents 3
Table of Contents
Soft Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Top Menu Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sub Menu Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sub Menu Parameter Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sub Menu Page Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Top Menu Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Probe Name Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-Mode Top Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-Mode Top Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PWD Top Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CWD Top Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CFM Top Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preset Top Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set Up Top Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ECG Top Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Image Archive Option Top Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cine Top Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auto Sequence Top Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Body Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Comment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Measurement (GYN calculation menu) . . . . . . . . . . . Image Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Advanced Cardiac Measurement Option . . . . . . . . . .
Basic Scan 33
Basic Scan 33 Basic Scan 34 Basic Scan 36 Basic Scan 37 Basic Scan 38 Basic Scan 39 Basic Scan 39 Basic Scan 39 Basic Scan 40 Basic Scan 41 Basic Scan 42 Basic Scan 43 Basic Scan 44 Basic Scan 45 Basic Scan 45 Basic Scan 46 Basic Scan 46 Basic Scan 47 Basic Scan 47 Basic Scan 47 Basic Scan 48 Basic Scan 48 Basic Scan 49
Annotating an Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annotation Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Entering/Editing the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying annotation scripts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Comments to an Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Annotation Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing while annotating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Body Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic Scan 51
Basic Scan 51 Basic Scan 53 Basic Scan 54 Basic Scan 55 Basic Scan 56 Basic Scan 57 Basic Scan 58 Basic Scan 58 Basic Scan 59
Zooming an Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Zooming an Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Zoom Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Acoustic Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Zooming an M-Mode Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MultiImage Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic Scan 63
Basic Scan 63 Basic Scan 64 Basic Scan 65 Basic Scan 65 Basic Scan 66 Basic Scan 67 Basic Scan 68
Table of Contents 4
Table of Contents
VCR Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic Scan 69
Basic Scan 69
Freezing an Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Post processing of the image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Freezing an Image (Freeze Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Freezing an Image (Foot Switch option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic Scan 71
Basic Scan 71 Basic Scan 71 Basic Scan 72 Basic Scan 72
Using Cine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cine memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cine functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessing Cine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Cine Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cine Loop Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Side Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cine Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cine Capture (optioncolor images only) . . . . . . . . . . . . Capture Frame (optioncolor images only) . . . . . . . . . . Exiting Cine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Helpful Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ECG/Cine Gauge/Image Tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic Scan 73
Basic Scan 73 Basic Scan 74 Basic Scan 74 Basic Scan 75 Basic Scan 76 Basic Scan 78 Basic Scan 78 Basic Scan 78 Basic Scan 79 Basic Scan 79 Basic Scan 79 Basic Scan 80 Basic Scan 80
Archiving Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optional Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printing an Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B/W Video Page Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Color Video Page Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Video Cassette Recorder (VCR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Laser Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Image Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storage Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Image Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MOD Image Archive (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Archive Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Related Preset Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System ID Entry/Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Media Format (DEFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disk Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storing Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Patient Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Image Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Media Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MO Eject . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic Scan 81
Basic Scan 81 Basic Scan 82 Basic Scan 82 Basic Scan 82 Basic Scan 83 Basic Scan 84 Basic Scan 84 Basic Scan 85 Basic Scan 86 Basic Scan 86 Basic Scan 88 Basic Scan 88 Basic Scan 88 Basic Scan 89 Basic Scan 89 Basic Scan 91 Basic Scan 92 Basic Scan 93 Basic Scan 95 Basic Scan 99 Basic Scan 100 Basic Scan 103
Table of Contents 5
Table of Contents
B-Mode
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Typical Exam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-Mode 3
B-Mode 3
Optimizing the Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Control Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjustments Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-Mode Key Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TGC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B/M Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scan Area Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scan Area Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display Format (Dual) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Focus Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dynamic Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gray Scale Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Focus Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Focus Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frame Averaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Penet. (Penetration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Image Softener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Biopsy Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Color Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tag Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Image Rotate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rejectn (Rejection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B Edge Enhance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-Mode 5
B-Mode 5 B-Mode 5 B-Mode 5 B-Mode 6 B-Mode 8 B-Mode 10 B-Mode 12 B-Mode 13 B-Mode 14 B-Mode 15 B-Mode 16 B-Mode 18 B-Mode 20 B-Mode 22 B-Mode 24 B-Mode 26 B-Mode 28 B-Mode 29 B-Mode 30 B-Mode 31 B-Mode 33 B-Mode 34 B-Mode 35 B-Mode 37 B-Mode 39
Doppler
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Typical Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PW Doppler Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pulsed Wave Doppler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frequencies Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Typical exam protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Continuous Wave Doppler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Typical exam protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Doppler 3
Doppler 3 Doppler 4 Doppler 5 Doppler 5 Doppler 5 Doppler 6 Doppler 8 Doppler 8 Doppler 9
Activating Doppler Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Activating PW Doppler Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Uses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activating CW Doppler Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Doppler 11
Doppler 11 Doppler 12 Doppler 13
Table of Contents 6
Table of Contents
Doppler Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-Mode Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M/D Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Doppler Spectral Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Theta Angle Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CFM/Spectrum Invert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Velocity Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Baseline Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B Pause . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dynamic Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Slant Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wall Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sample Volume Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sweep Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Penet (Penetration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auto Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Color Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tag Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rejectn (Rejection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CFM/PWD Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CFM Shrink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Doppler 15
Doppler 15 Doppler 15 Doppler 16 Doppler 17 Doppler 18 Doppler 19 Doppler 20 Doppler 22 Doppler 23 Doppler 26 Doppler 27 Doppler 28 Doppler 30 Doppler 32 Doppler 34 Doppler 36 Doppler 38 Doppler 40 Doppler 42 Doppler 43 Doppler 44 Doppler 45 Doppler 47 Doppler 49
M-Mode
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Typical Exam Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M-Mode 3
M-Mode 3 M-Mode 3
Optimizing the Timeline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Common Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B/M Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M/D Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Zoom (M-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dynamic Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gray Scale Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rejectn (Rejection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edge Enhance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sweep Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Color Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tag Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M-Mode 5
M-Mode 5 M-Mode 6 M-Mode 8 M-Mode 9 M-Mode 12 M-Mode 14 M-Mode 15 M-Mode 17 M-Mode 19 M-Mode 21 M-Mode 22 M-Mode 23
Table of Contents 7
Table of Contents
Adding Color
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Typical Exam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding Color 3
Adding Color 3 Adding Color 3
Activating Color Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Activating Color Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exiting Color Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding Color 5
Adding Color 5 Adding Color 7 Adding Color 7
Optimizing the Color Flow Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Control Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Common Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Color Doppler Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CFM/Spectrum Invert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Velocity Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Color Flow Baseline Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Color Flow Window Size (Scan Area) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Color Flow Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Slant Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diag Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Color Flow MTI Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frame Average . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Penet. (Penetration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High Resoltn (Resolution) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Color Flow Display Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Color Capture (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Packet Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spatial Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W. E. (Wall Echo) Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Color Flow Velocity Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tag Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding Color 9
Adding Color 9 Adding Color 10 Adding Color 11 Adding Color 12 Adding Color 13 Adding Color 14 Adding Color 15 Adding Color 17 Adding Color 18 Adding Color 20 Adding Color 22 Adding Color 23 Adding Color 25 Adding Color 27 Adding Color 28 Adding Color 30 Adding Color 31 Adding Color 33 Adding Color 35 Adding Color 36 Adding Color 38
CFM/PDI Enhancement (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACE (Adaptive Color Enhancement) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Noise Blanker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Persistence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding Color 39
Adding Color 39 Adding Color 40 Adding Color 41 Adding Color 42
Power Doppler Imaging (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding Color 45
Adding Color 45
Colorized Gray Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Gray Scale Color Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding Color 49
Adding Color 49
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Index 1
Table of Contents 8
Table of Contents
VOLUME 2 Title Page Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table of Contents Customizing Your System
Time Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Time Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customize 3
Customize 3 Customize 3
Index of Preset Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preset Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customize 5
Custom Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameter Menu Command Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing a Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Custom Display Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 1 of 15 (Imaging Parameter 1 Probe Dependent 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 2 of 15 (Imaging Parameter 2 Probe Dependent 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 3 of 15 (Imaging Parameter 3 Probe Dependent 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 4 of 15 (Imaging Parameter 4 Probe Dependent 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 5 of 15 (Imaging Parameter 5 Probe Dependent 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 6 of 15 (Imaging Parameter 6 Probe Dependent 6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 7 of 15 (Imaging Parameter 7 Probe Dependent 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 8 of 15 (Imaging Parameter 8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 9 of 15 (Imaging Parameter 9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 10 of 15 (Imaging Parameter 10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 11 of 15 (Imaging Parameter 11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 12 of 15 (Imaging Parameter 12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 13 of 15 (Imaging Parameter 13) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 14 of 15 (Imaging Parameter 14) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 15 of 15 (Imaging Parameter 15) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customize 15
Customize 15 Customize 16 Customize 19 Customize 21 Customize 22 Customize 26 Customize 30 Customize 33 Customize 38 Customize 42 Customize 44 Customize 48 Customize 52 Customize 55 Customize 60 Customize 65 Customize 67 Customize 71 Customize 73
Table of Contents 9
Table of Contents
System Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Parameters Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 1 of 6 (System Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 2 of 6 (System Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 3 of 6 (System Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 4 of 6 (System Setup Body Pattern) . . . . . . . . . . Page 5 of 6 (System Setup Recording) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 6 of 6 (System Setup User ID and Password) . .
Customize 77
Customize 77 Customize 78 Customize 79 Customize 83 Customize 88 Customize 89 Customize 94 Customize 98
Preset Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preset Program Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 1 of 9 (Application) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 2 of 9 (Application) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 3 of 9 (Application Measurement) . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 4 & 5 of 9 (Application Measurement Sub Menu) Page 6 of 9 (Application Measurement Submenu) . . . Page 7 & 8 of 9 (Application Annotation Library) . . . . . Page 9 of 9 (Application Patient Information) . . . . . . . .
Customize 103
Customize 103 Customize 104 Customize 105 Customize 108 Customize 110 Customize 115 Customize 117 Customize 133 Customize 135
Save Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saving Scan Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customize 137
Exam Applications Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining a User Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Naming a User Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting User Presets and Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recall Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customize 139
Customize 139 Customize 139 Customize 142 Customize 143 Customize 143
User Define Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Programming User Define Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Define Key Program Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Define Lock/Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting User Define Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customize 145
Customize 145 Customize 145 Customize 147 Customize 148 Customize 148
User Data Back-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saving Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customize 149
Customize 149 Customize 149 Customize 150
System ID Entry/Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enter/Display System ID Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customize 151
Table of Contents 10
Table of Contents
General Measurements and Calculations
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Erasing Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Locating measurement controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Measurement Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cursors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gen. Meas/Calcs 3
Gen. Meas/Calcs 3 Gen. Meas/Calcs 3 Gen. Meas/Calcs 4 Gen. Meas/Calcs 5 Gen. Meas/Calcs 6 Gen. Meas/Calcs 6
B-Mode Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Distance Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circumference/Area (Ellipse) Measurement . . . . . . . . . . Circumference/Area (Trace) Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . Echo Level Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Peak Velocity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TAMAX (Manual or Auto Trace) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Slope/Time Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Time Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tissue depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Time Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Depth Difference with Time Interval and Slope . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gray Scale Echo Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Velocity point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gen. Meas/Calcs 7
Gen. Meas/Calcs 7 Gen. Meas/Calcs 9 Gen. Meas/Calcs 11 Gen. Meas/Calcs 13 Gen. Meas/Calcs 15 Gen. Meas/Calcs 15 Gen. Meas/Calcs 16 Gen. Meas/Calcs 18 Gen. Meas/Calcs 19 Gen. Meas/Calcs 21 Gen. Meas/Calcs 22 Gen. Meas/Calcs 23 Gen. Meas/Calcs 24 Gen. Meas/Calcs 25 Gen. Meas/Calcs 25 Gen. Meas/Calcs 25 Gen. Meas/Calcs 25 Gen. Meas/Calcs 26
Doppler Mode Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gen. Meas/Calcs 15
M-Mode Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gen. Meas/Calcs 21
CFM B-Mode Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gen. Meas/Calcs 25
Table of Contents
Abdomen and Small Parts
General Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Abdom/Small Parts 3
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Measuring Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Volume Calculation Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Measuring Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Measuring Stenosis Ratio (% stenosis) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ellipse method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trace method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Measuring S/D Ratio, RI, A/B Ratio or PI . . . . . . . . . . . . . Measuring heart rate (HR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Time averaged maximum velocity (TAMAX) measurement method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Measuring the Max PG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Calculation of Max PG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Measuring the Mean PG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Calculation of Mean PG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Measuring cardiac output (CO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic CO calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Measuring stroke volume ratio (SV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic SV calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Measuring heart rate (HR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Measuring flow volume (FV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Time averaged maximum velocity (TAMAX) measurement method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Measuring flow volume output (FVO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Helpful hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Calculation Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Abdom/Small Parts 3 Abdom/Small Parts 3 Abdom/Small Parts 4 Abdom/Small Parts 6 Abdom/Small Parts 7 Abdom/Small Parts 9 Abdom/Small Parts 9 Abdom/Small Parts 12 Abdom/Small Parts 14 Abdom/Small Parts 16 Abdom/Small Parts 18 Abdom/Small Parts 19 Abdom/Small Parts 20 Abdom/Small Parts 21 Abdom/Small Parts 22 Abdom/Small Parts 23 Abdom/Small Parts 25 Abdom/Small Parts 26 Abdom/Small Parts 27 Abdom/Small Parts 28 Abdom/Small Parts 28 Abdom/Small Parts 30 Abdom/Small Parts 30 Abdom/Small Parts 30 Abdom/Small Parts 31 Abdom/Small Parts 33
Urology Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Abdom/Small Parts 33
OB/GYN
Exam Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OB/GYN 3
OB/GYN 3
Fetal Doppler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Doppler Mode for Fetal Exams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indications for Fetal Doppler use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contraindications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OB/GYN 5
OB/GYN 5 OB/GYN 5 OB/GYN 5
Table of Contents
Acoustic Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prudent use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Concerns surrounding fetal exposure . . . . . . . . . . . . Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OB/GYN 7
OB/GYN 7 OB/GYN 7 OB/GYN 7 OB/GYN 7 OB/GYN 7
OB Measurements and Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB Format Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB Measurement Soft Menus and Formulas . . . . . . . . . . Tokyo University Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Osaka University Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . USA Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . European Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Other OB Calculation Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GS Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User-Programmed Calculations (Tables) . . . . . . . . . . Measuring S/D (D/S) Ratio, A/B Ratio, RI or PI . . . . Time averaged maximum velocity (TAMAX) . . . . . . . Fetal Heart Rate Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Helpful Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OB/GYN 9
OB/GYN 9 OB/GYN 9 OB/GYN 10 OB/GYN 10 OB/GYN 13 OB/GYN 16 OB/GYN 21 OB/GYN 24 OB/GYN 29 OB/GYN 29 OB/GYN 31 OB/GYN 33 OB/GYN 34 OB/GYN 36
OB Summary Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting an Exam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB Report Page Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB Report Page 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB Report Page 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing the Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recording Summary Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OB/GYN 37
OB/GYN 37 OB/GYN 38 OB/GYN 39 OB/GYN 42 OB/GYN 45 OB/GYN 46
Anatomical Survey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Programmed Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OB/GYN 47
OB/GYN 47 OB/GYN 48 OB/GYN 49
OB Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB Graph Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB Graph Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing OB Graph Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OB/GYN 51
OB/GYN 51 OB/GYN 52 OB/GYN 52 OB/GYN 54
Table of Contents
Fetal Trend Management (software option) . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storing Patient Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Storage Estimations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Media Selection Preset Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saving Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Growth Trending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . List ID Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . List ID Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data List Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data List Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OB/GYN 57
OB/GYN 57 OB/GYN 57 OB/GYN 58 OB/GYN 58 OB/GYN 59 OB/GYN 63 OB/GYN 64 OB/GYN 65 OB/GYN 72 OB/GYN 73
Basic OBMultigestational (software option) . . . . . .

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Patient Entry Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Entering Fetus Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Distinguishing Each Fetus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Measurements/Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change the Number of Fetuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Number Increase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Number Decrease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Report Page Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB Graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fetal Trend Management (Multigestational Option) . . . . Save Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data List Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OB/GYN 75
OB/GYN 75 OB/GYN 75 OB/GYN 75 OB/GYN 76 OB/GYN 76 OB/GYN 77 OB/GYN 77 OB/GYN 77 OB/GYN 78 OB/GYN 79 OB/GYN 81 OB/GYN 82 OB/GYN 82
Data Management Center (DMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operational Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operational Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transferring OB Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Patient Data Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Send Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Transferred . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OB/GYN 83
OB/GYN 83 OB/GYN 83 OB/GYN 84 OB/GYN 84 OB/GYN 85 OB/GYN 87 OB/GYN 87 OB/GYN 87 OB/GYN 87 OB/GYN 88
GYN Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ovarian Length, Height, and Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Uterine Length, Height, and Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Endometrium Thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Doppler Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Resistive index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Helpful Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OB/GYN 89
OB/GYN 89 OB/GYN 89 OB/GYN 92 OB/GYN 93 OB/GYN 95 OB/GYN 95 OB/GYN 96
Table of Contents
GYN Summary Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GYN Report Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GYN Calculation Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OB/GYN 97
OB/GYN 97 OB/GYN 98
Vascular
Exam Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vascular 3
Vascular 3 Vascular 3
Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting an Exam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vascular calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Carotid Artery Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Measuring ECA, CCA, Bifurc and ICA . . . . . . . . . . . . Measuring RT (LT) ICA/CCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Measuring S/D Ratio, RI, A/B Ratio or PI . . . . . . . . . Measuring Stenosis Ratio (% stenosis) . . . . . . . . . . . Measuring Heart Rate (HR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Time Averaged Maximum Velocity (TAMAX) . . . . . . . . . . Helpful Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vascular 5
Vascular 5 Vascular 5 Vascular 6 Vascular 7 Vascular 8 Vascular 9 Vascular 12 Vascular 14 Vascular 19 Vascular 21 Vascular 21
Vascular Summary Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying the Summary Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing the Summary Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printing the Summary Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vascular Calculation Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vascular 23
Vascular 23 Vascular 23 Vascular 25 Vascular 25 Vascular 26
Advanced Vascular (software option) . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Menu Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Report Page Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Advanced Vascular Report Page 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Advanced Vascular Report Page 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Advanced Vascular Report Page 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Venous Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Observations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vascular Calculation Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vascular 27
Vascular 27 Vascular 27 Vascular 30 Vascular 30 Vascular 32 Vascular 33 Vascular 34 Vascular 35 Vascular 35 Vascular 36 Vascular 36 Vascular 37
Table of Contents
Cardiology
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSA Calculation Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oriental Formula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Occidental Formula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cardiology 3
Cardiology 3 Cardiology 4 Cardiology 6 Cardiology 6 Cardiology 6
Basic Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cubed and Teichholz Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bullet and Modified Simpsons Rule Methods . . . . . . . . . Single and Bi Plane Ellipsoid Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LV Calculation Formulas (Cubed Method) . . . . . . . . . . . . LV Calculation Formulas (Teichholz Method) . . . . . . . . . . LV Calculation Formulas (Bullet Method) . . . . . . . . . . . . . LV Calculation Formulas (Modified Simpsons Rule Method) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LV Calculation Formulas (Single Plane Ellipsoid Method) LV Calculation Formulas (Bi Plane Ellipsoid Method) . . .
Cardiology 7
Cardiology 7 Cardiology 13 Cardiology 22 Cardiology 31 Cardiology 32 Cardiology 33 Cardiology 34 Cardiology 35 Cardiology 36
Additional Cardiology Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Volume Calculation Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Measuring the % stenosis (stenosis ratio) . . . . . . . . . . . . PHT (Pressure Half Time) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MVA (Mitral Valve Area) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ET (Ejection Time) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Measuring the Max PG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Calculation of Max PG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Measuring the Mean PG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Calculation of Mean PG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S/D Ratio, RI, A/B Ratio, PI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heart Rate and TAMAX Auto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cardiology 37
Cardiology 37 Cardiology 38 Cardiology 40 Cardiology 41 Cardiology 43 Cardiology 48 Cardiology 49 Cardiology 50 Cardiology 52 Cardiology 53 Cardiology 54 Cardiology 55 Cardiology 56 Cardiology 56
Table of Contents
ECG (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Physio Sweep Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ECG Sub Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ECG Lead Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sync Selectn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ref Scan (Reference Scan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ECG Wave, PCG Wave, AUX Wave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ECG Gain, PCG Gain, AUX Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ECG Positn, PCG Positn, AUX Positn (Position) . . . . . . ECG/Cine Gauge/Image Tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cardiology 57
Cardiology 57 Cardiology 58 Cardiology 58 Cardiology 59 Cardiology 60 Cardiology 61 Cardiology 62 Cardiology 63 Cardiology 65 Cardiology 66 Cardiology 67 Cardiology 68 Cardiology 69
Advanced Cardiac Calculations (AMCAL option) . .

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Measurement Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequence Philosophy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Re-measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Determination of Systole and Diastole . . . . . . Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auto Trace Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Continous M-Mode Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Advanced Cardiac Calculations Measurement Menus . . AMCAL Sub Menus (First Layer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AMCAL Sub Menus (Second Layer)Automatic Determination of Systole/Diastole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AMCAL Sub Menus (Second Layer)Manual Determination of Systole/Diastole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cardiac Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customizing Measurement Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pop up Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . New Measurement Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auto Sequence Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Advanced Cardiac Specification Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LV Calculation Formulas (Cubed Method) . . . . . . . . . . . . LV Calculation Formulas (Teichholz Method) . . . . . . . . . . LV Calculation Formulas (Bullet Method) . . . . . . . . . . . . . LV Calculation Formulas (Modified Simpsons Rule Method) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LV Calculation Formulas (Single Plane Ellipsoid Method) LV Calculation Formulas (Bi Plane Ellipsoid Method) . . . LV Calculation Formulas (Gibson Method) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cardiology 71
Cardiology 71 Cardiology 72 Cardiology 72 Cardiology 73 Cardiology 73 Cardiology 73 Cardiology 75 Cardiology 75 Cardiology 76 Cardiology 76 Cardiology 77 Cardiology 79 Cardiology 79 Cardiology 80 Cardiology 94 Cardiology 103 Cardiology 104 Cardiology 105 Cardiology 106 Cardiology 108 Cardiology 108 Cardiology 109 Cardiology 111 Cardiology 113 Cardiology 115 Cardiology 117 Cardiology 119 Cardiology 121
Table of Contents
B-Mode Analysis Parasternal Long Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . B-Mode Analysis Parasternal Short Axis (PSAX-AV) . B-Mode Analysis Parasternal Short Axis (PSAX-MV) . B-Mode Analysis Parasternal Short Axis (PSAX-PAP) B-Mode Analysis Apical 4 Chamber (AP-4CH) . . . . . . B-Mode Analysis Apical 2 Chamber (AP-2CH) . . . . . . M-Mode Analysis Left/Right Ventricle (M-LV/RV) . . . . . M-Mode Analysis Mitral Valve (M-MV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-Mode Analysis Aortic Valve (M-AV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-Mode Analysis Pulmonic Valve (M-PV) . . . . . . . . . . . M-Mode Analysis Tricuspid Valve (M-TV) . . . . . . . . . . . Doppler Analysis Mitral Valve (D-MV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Doppler Analysis Aortic Valve (D-AV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Doppler Analysis Pulmonic Valve (D-PV) . . . . . . . . . . . Doppler Analysis Tricuspid Valve (D-TV) . . . . . . . . . . . . Advanced Cardiac Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standard Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . List Type Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select Reports (SRP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cardiology 123 Cardiology 124 Cardiology 125 Cardiology 126 Cardiology 127 Cardiology 130 Cardiology 131 Cardiology 133 Cardiology 134 Cardiology 135 Cardiology 136 Cardiology 137 Cardiology 139 Cardiology 141 Cardiology 143 Cardiology 145 Cardiology 145 Cardiology 147 Cardiology 149 Cardiology 149
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Index 1
Table of Contents
VOLUME 3 Title Page Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table of Contents Biopsy Procedures
Special Concerns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Precautions Concerning the Use of Biopsy Procedures Accessories and Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Required supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering replacement supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Biopsy 3
Biopsy 3 Biopsy 4 Biopsy 4 Biopsy 4
Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Biopsy Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BX-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Needle Guide Type Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E721 Type Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Biopsy Guide Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed Needle Guide Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Post Biopsy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E721 Probe Biopsy Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Post Biopsy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Biopsy Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Biopsy 5
Biopsy 5 Biopsy 6 Biopsy 7 Biopsy 9 Biopsy 10 Biopsy 10 Biopsy 15 Biopsy 15 Biopsy 16 Biopsy 16 Biopsy 19 Biopsy 20 Biopsy 21
Probes
Probe Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ergonomics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting and Disconnecting a Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting a probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Care and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storing probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transporting probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Environmental Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Probes 3
Probes 3 Probes 4 Probes 7 Probes 8 Probes 11 Probes 11 Probes 12 Probes 12 Probes 12 Probes 12 Probes 12
Table of Contents
Probe Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handling precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electrical shock hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mechanical hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special handling instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Probe handling and infection control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Probe Cleaning Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disinfecting probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coupling gels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Planned Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Probes 13 Probes 13 Probes 13 Probes 14 Probes 14 Probes 15 Probes 16 Probes 19 Probes 22 Probes 22
Probe Discussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Probe naming conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Curved Array (Convex) Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C364 (CBF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C386 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C551 (CAE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C721 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E721 (MTZ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linear Array Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I739 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L764 (LH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T739 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LA39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sector Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S220 (W) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S222 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S317 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S611 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B510 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CWD Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CWD2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CWD5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Probes 23
Probes 23 Probes 23 Probes 24 Probes 25 Probes 26 Probes 27 Probes 28 Probes 29 Probes 30 Probes 31 Probes 32 Probes 33 Probes 34 Probes 35 Probes 36 Probes 37 Probes 38 Probes 39 Probes 40 Probes 41 Probes 42 Probes 43 Probes 43 Probes 44
Table of Contents
User Maintenance
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Maintenance 3
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Who To Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trouble images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . To Store a Trouble Image to the Hard Drive . . . . . . . To Save Trouble Images to MOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . To Load Trouble Images from MOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . To Display Trouble Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loose cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Error Message Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation Error Message Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation Guide Message Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Warning Message Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Probe Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessing Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Test 1 (reduced) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Pattern Black & White . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Pattern Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Pattern Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Typical Tests to Perform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frequency of tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Phantoms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Baselines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Periodic Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Axial distance measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lateral distance measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Axial resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lateral resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Penetration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contrast resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gray Scale photography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up a Record Keeping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Record Keeping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Maintenance 3 User Maintenance 4 User Maintenance 6 User Maintenance 7 User Maintenance 7 User Maintenance 8 User Maintenance 12 User Maintenance 12 User Maintenance 13 User Maintenance 14 User Maintenance 15 User Maintenance 16 User Maintenance 20 User Maintenance 22 User Maintenance 23 User Maintenance 23 User Maintenance 24 User Maintenance 25 User Maintenance 26 User Maintenance 27 User Maintenance 27 User Maintenance 29 User Maintenance 30 User Maintenance 31 User Maintenance 32 User Maintenance 34 User Maintenance 34 User Maintenance 35 User Maintenance 36 User Maintenance 37 User Maintenance 38 User Maintenance 40 User Maintenance 41 User Maintenance 43 User Maintenance 45 User Maintenance 47 User Maintenance 48 User Maintenance 49 User Maintenance 50 User Maintenance 50 User Maintenance 50
Operator Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Maintenance 23
Quality Assurance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Maintenance 29
Table of Contents
System Care and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Maintenance 53
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Weekly Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Other Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning the air filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Planned Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Maintenance 53 User Maintenance 53 User Maintenance 54 User Maintenance 55 User Maintenance 59 User Maintenance 59 User Maintenance 61
Appendices
Bioeffects
Concerns Surrounding the Use of Diagnostic Ultrasound Thermal Bioeffect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mechanical Bioeffect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operator Awareness and Actions to Minimize Bioeffect Tissue characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Acoustic output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operator intervention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Implementing ALARA Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clinical instructions for fetal use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Efficacy of Fetal Doppler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Suggested Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variance studies for fetal Doppler measurements . . . . . Training and User Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Acoustic Output Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maximum output summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B510 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CWD2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CWD5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C364 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C386 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C551 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C721 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E721 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I739 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L764 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LA39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S220 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S222 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S317 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S611 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T739 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Summary of system control settings that yield maximum output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bioeffects A1 Bioeffects A2 Bioeffects A3 Bioeffects A4 Bioeffects A5 Bioeffects A6 Bioeffects A8 Bioeffects A10 Bioeffects A11 Bioeffects A14 Bioeffects A16 Bioeffects A18 Bioeffects A19 Bioeffects A20 Bioeffects A20 Bioeffects A20 Bioeffects A20 Bioeffects A21 Bioeffects A21 Bioeffects A21 Bioeffects A22 Bioeffects A22 Bioeffects A23 Bioeffects A23 Bioeffects A24 Bioeffects A24 Bioeffects A25 Bioeffects A25 Bioeffects A26 Bioeffects A26 Bioeffects A27 Bioeffects A27 Bioeffects A28 Bioeffects A29
Table of Contents
Maximum Thermal Indices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B510 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C364 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C386 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C551 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C721 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E721 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I739 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L764 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LA39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S220 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S222 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S317 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S611 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T739 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CWD2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CWD5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Key to Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Measurement Precision and Uncertainty . . . . . . . . . . . . . Acoustic Output Display Operation and Accuracy . . . . . Endnotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IEC Acoustic Output Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Key to Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B510 Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C364 Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C386 Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C551 Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C721 Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E721 Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I739 Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L764 (LH) Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546L Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739L Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LA39 Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S220 (W) Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S222 Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S317 Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S611 Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T739 Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CWD2 Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CWD5 Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bioeffects A33 Bioeffects A33 Bioeffects A35 Bioeffects A37 Bioeffects A39 Bioeffects A41 Bioeffects A43 Bioeffects A45 Bioeffects A47 Bioeffects A49 Bioeffects A51 Bioeffects A53 Bioeffects A55 Bioeffects A57 Bioeffects A59 Bioeffects A61 Bioeffects A63 Bioeffects A65 Bioeffects A65 Bioeffects A66 Bioeffects A67 Bioeffects A67 Bioeffects A68 Bioeffects A69 Bioeffects A69 Bioeffects A71 Bioeffects A73 Bioeffects A75 Bioeffects A77 Bioeffects A79 Bioeffects A81 Bioeffects A83 Bioeffects A85 Bioeffects A87 Bioeffects A89 Bioeffects A91 Bioeffects A93 Bioeffects A95 Bioeffects A97 Bioeffects A99 Bioeffects A101 Bioeffects A103 Bioeffects A105
Table of Contents
System Data
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LOGIQ 400 Clinical Measurement Accuracy . . . . . . . . Basic Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LOGIQ 400 Clinical Calculation Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . Fetal age measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PV and Cardiac Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gynecological . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Data B1 System Data B3 System Data B3 System Data B5 System Data B6 System Data B7 System Data B8 System Data B10 Peripherals C1 Peripherals C1 Peripherals C2 Peripherals C2 Peripherals C4 Peripherals C5 Peripherals C6 Peripherals C6 Assistance D1 Assistance D1 Assistance D1 Assistance D1 Assistance D2 Assistance D2 Assistance D2 Assistance D3 Assistance D4 Assistance D4 Assistance D5 Assistance D5 Assistance D5 Assistance D6 Assistance D6 Assistance D6 Warranties E1 Warranties E1 Warranties E1 Warranties E3 Warranties E4 Warranties E4 Warranties E4
Peripherals
Peripheral Listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Peripheral Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Black/White Video Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Color Video Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-VHS Video Cassette Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Video Signal Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assistance
Clinical Questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Literature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Supplies/Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disinfectant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Civco Biopsy Starter Kits (includes bracket) . . . . . . . Multi-Angle Brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Biopsy Replacement Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ultrasound Probe and Cord Sheath Sets . . . . . . . . . Physio Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Patient Electrodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warranties
Scope and Duration of Warranties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product warranties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Patent and copyright warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Warranty Exclusions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exclusive Warranty Remedies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product warranties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Patent and copyright warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents
OB Tables
List of OB Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB Tables F1 Glossary G1 VCR Operation H1 VCR Operation H1 VCR Operation H1 VCR Operation H1
Glossary
List of terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Video Cassette Recorder Operating Instructions

Operating Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cassette tapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VTRPB function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction of VCR Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Remote Control Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frameforward search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variablespeed search function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tape search function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Image search function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saving of data to be searched . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Playback with measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Image processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VCR Operation H3
VCR Operation H3 VCR Operation H3 VCR Operation H3 VCR Operation H4 VCR Operation H4 VCR Operation H4 VCR Operation H4 VCR Operation H4
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applicable VCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prohibition of modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prevention of Electromagnetic Interference . . . . . . . Operation of the VCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VCR Operation H5
VCR Operation H5 VCR Operation H5 VCR Operation H5 VCR Operation H5 VCR Operation H6 VCR Operation H6 VCR Operation H6 VCR Operation H6
Setting Up the VCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

VCR Part Names and Functions/Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . Part Names and Functions of the VCR Front Panel Part Names and Functions of the VCR Rear Panel . Connecting the VCR to the LOGIQ 400 . . . . . . . . . Setting up the LOGIQ 400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VCR Operation H7
VCR Operation H7 VCR Operation H7 VCR Operation H10 VCR Operation H12 VCR Operation H13
Table of Contents
Starting the VCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VCR Operation H15
VCR Start-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Status Icon Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tape insertion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Pause/Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start-Up Final Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VCR Status Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VCR Counter Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VCR Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Registering a New Tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking the scan mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inserting a tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recording ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . New Tape Registration Complete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recording Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Registering a new patient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recording audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recording Complete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ejecting the tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Playback Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VCR playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stopping playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Playback with Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Precautions for playback with measurements . . . . . Advanced Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Image search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tape Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saving/Reading the Data to be Searched . . . . . . . . . . . . Saving the data to be searched . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reading the data to be searched . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation Guide/Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A List of Problems and How To Troubleshoot Them . . . . Helpful hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VCR Operation H15 VCR Operation H15 VCR Operation H16 VCR Operation H16 VCR Operation H17 VCR Operation H17 VCR Operation H18 VCR Operation H19 VCR Operation H19 VCR Operation H20 VCR Operation H20 VCR Operation H25 VCR Operation H25 VCR Operation H25 VCR Operation H26 VCR Operation H26 VCR Operation H27 VCR Operation H29 VCR Operation H29 VCR Operation H29 VCR Operation H30 VCR Operation H30 VCR Operation H31 VCR Operation H31 VCR Operation H31 VCR Operation H32 VCR Operation H33 VCR Operation H34 VCR Operation H35 VCR Operation H35 VCR Operation H40 VCR Operation H45 VCR Operation H45 VCR Operation H46 VCR Operation H47 VCR Operation H48 VCR Operation H51 VCR Operation H53
Recording/Playback/Image Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VCR Operation H29
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VCR Operation H47
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Index 1
Introduction
System Overview How This Book is Organized How to Use This Book
This section provides a basic description of the LOGIQ 400 systems features and benefits. It explains how this User Manual is organized and how to use the special features of this manual.
Introduction 1
Introduction
This page left blank intentionally.
Introduction 2
System Overview
Attention
Read and understand all instructions in this manual before attempting to use the LOGIQ 400 system. Keep this Users Manual with the equipment at all times. Periodically review the procedures for operation and safety precautions.
. .
Prescription Device
For USA Only Caution: United States law restricts this device to sale or use by or on the order of a physician.
System Components
Refer to the Service Manual (2127661) for the LOGIQ 400 system components.
Interference Caution
CAUTION
Do not use the following devices near this equipment. Use of these devices near this equipment could cause this equipment to malfunction. DEVICES NOT TO BE USED NEAR THIS EQUIPMENT Devices which intrinsically transmit radio waves such as: Cellular phone, radio transceiver, mobile radio transmitter, radio-controlled toys, etc. Keep power to these devices turned off when near this equipment. Medical staff in charge of this equipment is required to instruct technicians, patients and other people who may be around this equipment to fully comply with the above regulaion.
Introduction 3
System Overview
Introduction
The LOGIQ 400 digital Ultrasound System is a high performance ultrasound imaging system, intended for general purpose applications. The system provides image generation in B-Mode, M-Mode, Pulsed, CW and Color Flow Doppler, and Color M-Mode with all transducer types. Digital architecture allows maximum flexibility of all scanning modes and transducer types, throughout the full spectrum of operating frequencies. All transducers are precise solid state array devices, allowing electronically controlled imaging with Phased Array Sector, Convex, Micro-convex and Steered Linear probes. Use of solid state digital designs allows a wide variety of scan parameters to be optimized including focusing, scan control, spatial resolution, temporal resolution and contrast resolution. The result is consistent generation of finely detailed anatomical resolution with excellent dynamic contrast tissue range and penetration. LOGIQ 400 also features newly integrated specialized processing for Flow Data acquisition. Doppler information is displayed with low noise and clean spectral content to optimize measurements of important flow parameters. Selected probes can operate in Multifrequency Mode in order to Optimize Resolution in B-Mode and Sensitivity to flow in Doppler and Color Flow Modes. The system display processor is highly versatile to produce the optimal set of imaging parameters and display formats without compromising important diagnostic information. Comprehensive graphical displays allow rapid and easy placement of Doppler sample volumes. In Color Flow Mode, combined B-Mode and Color Flow images can be steered independently so that optimal positioning is available in both modes.
Introduction 4
System Overview
Introduction (contd)
Versatile, yet easy to use, the LOGIQ 400 system combines a wide variety of state-of-the-art operator features without complicating operation. The operator can customize all set-up parameters for a given mode, probe or clinical application. Operator controls have been placed in a logical clinical format. Two simultaneous probe connections allow rapid switching electronically between probes without delaying the examination. The LOGIQ 400 System provides a total imaging solution for todays diverse ultrasound department needs, with investment security through reliable upgrades, application enhancements, and complete product support from GE.
Introduction 5
System Overview
General Indications for Use

The LOGIQ 400 is a general purpose ultrasound imaging system intended for use in the dynamic evaluation of soft tissue and vascular diseases in the following areas:
S S S S S S S S S S
Head Neck Chest Abdomen Pelvis Male reproductive organs Female reproductive organs Limbs/Extremities Pregnant uterus Cardiac
Indications for Fetal Doppler use

The LOGIQ 400 system can be used for fetal examination in Pulsed Wave Doppler, Color Flow Doppler, and Color M-Mode for the diagnosis of:
S S
Structural fetal cardiac anomalies for high-risk patients. Intrauterine growth retardation (IUGR) for high-risk patients with one or more of the following known or suspected conditions:
S S S S S S
Multiple pregnancy Maternal hypertension Hydrops Diabetes Lupus Placenta abnormality
Introduction 6
System Overview
Contraindications
The system is NOT intended for use in the following areas: Ophthalmic use (or any use causing the acoustic beam to pass through the eye). Pulsed Wave Doppler, Continuous Wave Doppler, Color Flow Doppler, and Color M-Mode are not intended for routine fetal examination or screening nor are they intended for fetal examination in a low-risk population. The use of Doppler, even at minimal output levels, in fetal examination must be adjunctive with conventional fetal echocardiography and other clinical diagnostic methods, for high risk patients only.
Introduction 7
System Overview
LOGIQ
t 400s Features
The LOGIQ 400 digital ultrasound system offers the following enhanced features:
Improved operator interface and system ergonomics

The LOGIQ 400 has been designed to streamline users workflow, especially by:
S S S
Creating intuitive user controls and prompts Grouping controls by mode or functionality Making the controls easy to recognize by touch
Assures users that with little effort and minimum time they can produce a complete exam with consistently high quality images. The sonographer can comfortably have full reach of all controls making the system easy to learn in order to perform a quality exam on any patient.
Improved sensitivity and resolution in each imaging mode

Benefits the user with improved acquisition and presentation of images and biometric information.
LOGIQt 400 Option/Feature Availability

ITEM Cine Memory (frames) Image Memory Image Archive VTR Playback (VTRPB) VCR Heading Function CFM, PWD, PDI Cardiac Calcs Color System 32 Standard (160 option) B-Mode 48 images Option (with VTRPB) Option Available Available (PDI option) Option B/W System 8 Standard (no option) B-Mode 1 (no M or B+B) Not Available Not Available Not Available Not Available Option (No Doppler Measurements)
Introduction 8
How This Book is Organized

Manual Content
The LOGIQ 400 User Manual is organized to provide the information needed to start scanning right away. Detailed information is also provided for more time-intensive studies.
S
Introductory material. These sections give an overview of the system to help the operator start scanning as soon as possible.
S S S
Getting Started. How to prepare the system for use and a map of the control layout. Safety. Important information concerning the safe operation of the LOGIQt 400 system. Basic Scan. How to perform a basic scan.
Image optimization. These sections detail how to improve image, trace, or spectrum information and how to optimize the use of color.
S S S S
B-Mode. How to optimize B-Mode images. Doppler Mode. How to optimize Doppler information. M-Mode. How to optimize the M-Mode timeline. Color. How to apply Color Flow to an image and how to colorize image, Doppler, and timeline information.
Customizing your system. Shows how to customize the system for your particular institution, clinic, or exam type.
Introduction 9
How This Book is Organized
Manual Content (contd)

S
Medical speciality analysis. Shows how to do characteristic measurements and supplemental information useful in performing studies.
S S S S S
General Measurements and Calculations. Emphasis on basic measurements for each mode. OB/GYN. Emphasis on obstetric/gynecological calculations and reports. Vascular. Emphasis on Doppler spectrum calculations and reports. Cardiology. Emphasis on left ventricular measurements and reports. Biopsy Procedures. Emphasis on using biopsy guidelines and performing a biopsy.
Probes. Provides intended uses, specifications, care and maintenance, and biopsy capability instructions for each probe. User Maintenance. Provides information concerning error messages, user diagnostics, quality assurance, and system care. Appendices. The appendices provide additional useful information.
S S S S S S S S
Bioeffects. System specifications. Peripheral maintenance. Customer Assistance. Warranties. OB Table Data. Glossary of Ultrasound terms. VCR Operation.
Introduction 10
How to Use This Book

Manual Format
Information has been arranged and provided to help find information easily and quickly.
Finding information
Tables of Contents Tabs Headers/Footers Locate topics in the main table of contents. Chapter tabs are provided. The chapters title, section name, and page number appear on the outer corners of every page. Information is grouped on one page per topic, where possible. Related diagrams are on the same page or the facing page, where applicable. See also page references that are noted. Provides specialized information. Meant for frequent and easy reference. Extensive tool that presents ideas, topics, terms, titles, headings, and cross references. Also, use it to find all entries of a like topic throughout the manual. The glossary is intended to help learn new terms, to decipher acronyms, and to associate LOGIQ 400s terminology with commonly-used industry terms.
Topics
References Appendices Index
Glossary
Introduction 11

Conventions used in this manual
The following conventions have been used: 2-Column layout The right column contains text; the left column contains headers and graphics to highlight the text.
Graphics
Graphics provide a visual guide to the text when possible. Turn rotary knobs to the left (counter clockwise) and right (clockwise).
Press a key to activate a function or change a parameter.
Move the Trackball around with the palm of a hand or fingertips.
Move TGC slidepots to the left and right.
Introduction 12

Notes References Icons Notes are set in italics. References to other chapters appear in italics. Various icons highlight safety issues.
.
Hints
DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION
Indicates precautions or prudent use recommendations that should be used in the operation of the ultrasound system. Scanning hints help save time.
Hints
Introduction 13

Introduction 14
Getting Started
Preparing the System for Use Operator Controls Relocating The System
This section gives more details on how features of the system are used to prepare for scanning. It briefly explains each operator control on the keyboard, monitor and chassis.
Getting Started 1
Getting Started
Getting Started 2
Preparing the System for Use
Introduction
Only qualified physicians or sonographers should perform ultrasound scanning on human subjects for medical diagnostic reasons. Request training, if needed. Do not attempt to install the system alone. General Electric, Affiliate, or Distributor Field Engineers and Application Specialists will install and setup the system. Perform regular preventive maintenance. Refer to User Maintenance 53 for maintenance instructions. Maintain a clean environment. Turn off the system circuit breaker before cleaning the unit. Refer to User Maintenance 54 for cleaning instructions. Never set liquids on the unit to ensure that liquid does not drip into the control panel or unit. Ensure that unauthorized personnel do not tamper with the unit.
Getting Started 3
Local Site Requirements

In order to properly install the system, certain hardware must be in place and operational within the room where the console is used.
Before the system arrives

Ensure that the following is provided for the new system:
S
A separate power outlet with a 15 amp circuit breaker for 120 VAC (USA) or 10 amp circuit breaker for 220240 VAC (Europe, Latin America). Take precautions to ensure that the console is protected from electromagnetic interference. Precautions include:
S
Operate the console at least 15 feet away from motors, typewriters, elevators, and other sources of strong electromagnetic radiation. Operation in an enclosed area (wood, plaster or concrete walls, floors and ceilings) help prevent electromagnetic interference. Special shielding may be required if the console is to be operated in the vicinity of Radio broadcast equipment.
NOTICE
This medical equipment is approved, in terms of the prevention of radio wave interference, to be used in hospitals, clinics and other institutions which are environmentally qualified. The use of this equipment in an inappropriate environment may cause some electronic interference to radios and televisions around the equipment. Proper handling of this equipment is required in order to avoid such trouble according to the operator and service manuals. This equipment can be used in residential areas only under the supervision of physicians or qualified technicians.
Getting Started 4

Environmental Requirements
The system should be operated, stored, or transported within the parameters outlined below.
Operational Temperature Humidity Pressure

10_- 40_ C 50_- 104_ F 30-85% non-condensing 700-1060hPa
Storage
Transport
Table 1. System Environmental Requirements
Getting Started 5

Console graphics
The following are illustrations of the console:
LOGIQ
Illustration 1. LOGIQ
t 400 System (right side view)

2. Black & White monitor
1.
Color monitor
Getting Started 6

Console graphics (contd)
LOGIQ 400
Task Light Switch Task Light
VCR Microphone Release Button to raise and lower the video monitor
B/W Video Page Printer (optional)
Physiological Input Panel (optional)

!
ECG
Air Filter accessed from front and back of system

PCG
Aux
.
t
t 400 System with color monitor (front view)
NOTE: A third probe connector is optional.
Getting Started 7

LOGIQ 400
Release Button to raise and lower the video monitor B/W Video Page Printer (optional)
Physiological Input Panel (optional)

!
ECG

PCG
Aux
Illustration 3. Basic B/W Console Front View
Getting Started 8

Swivel Lock on Video Monitor Arm

Pivot Lock
Pull
Free
Cable Access Door
t 400 System with color monitor (back view)

1 ON
ON
OFF
Getting Started 9

LOGIQ
Cable Clipper for Probe Cable (Optional)
t 400 System (left side view)
1. 2.
Color monitor Black & White monitor
Getting Started 10
Connecting and Using the System

To connect the system to the electrical supply: 1. Ensure that the wall outlet is of the appropriate type. 2. Make sure that the power switch is turned off. 3. Unwrap the power cable. Make sure to allow sufficient slack in the cable so that the plug is not pulled out of the wall if the system is moved slightly. 4. Push the power plug securely into the wall outlet.
WARNING
To avoid risk of fire, the system power must be supplied from a separate, properly rated outlet. See Local Site Requirements, Before the system arrives on Getting Started 4 for rating information. The system is supplied with an attachment plug. Under no circumstances should this plug be altered, changed, or adapted to a configuration rated less than specified. Never use an extension cord or adapter plug. To help assure grounding reliability, connect to a hospital grade or hospital only grounded power outlet.
Plug
Outlet
Plug
Outlet
120 VAC, 1000 VA Plug and Outlet Configuration (USA)
220240 VAC, 1000 VA Plug and Outlet Configuration (Europe)
Illustration 6. Example Plug and Outlet Configurations
Getting Started 11

Warm Up Temperature Chart
Environment In order for the LOGIQ 400 to operate well, its environment must not harm it. Care must be taken when it is transported or stored. Either its operational environment must be constantly maintained or the unit must be turned off.
Temperature Operational Storage Transport (for

less than 16 hours) Table 2. Warm Up Temperature Chart
Humidity
30 to 85% non-condensing 30 to 90% non-condensing 30 to 90% non-condensing
10_ to 40_ C (50_ to 104_ F) 10_ to 60_ C (14_ to 140_ F) 40_ to 60_ C (40_ to 140_ F)
System Acclimation Time After being transported, the unit may be very cold or hot. If this is the case, allow the unit to acclimate before turned on. It requires one hour for each 2.5_ increment its temperature is below 10_ C or above 40_ C.
_C _F
hours
60 140 8 5 41 2
55 131 6 0 32 4
50 122 4 5 23 6
45 113 2 10 14 8
40 104 0 15 5 10
35 95 0 20 4 12
30 86 0 25 13 14
25 77 0 30 22 16
20 68 0 35 31 18
15 59 0 40 40 20
10 50 0
_C _F
hours
Table 3. System Acclimation Time Chart
Getting Started 12

Power On/Standby CAUTION
The Power/Standby switch is located on the front of the console next to the Probe Connectors. Press the top portion of this switch to turn the power on. The circuit breaker, on the rear of the unit, must also be in the on position (see Getting Started 19).
LOGIQ 400
On
Off/Standby
Illustration 7. Location of Power Button
Getting Started 13

Power On/Standby (contd)
After powering on the system, the following happens:
S S
The monitor and console power indicator light up. The system is initialized. During this time:
S S S
Two beeps sound during the sequence. All lighted buttons on the keyboard light. System diagnostics run. Its status is reflected on the monitor by the graphics in Illustration 8.
Start of diagnostic run
4
21363192
4
21363192
4
Version 3.10
4
Version 3.10
4
Version 3.10
End of diagnostic run
Illustration 8. Power Up Graphic Sequence
Getting Started 14
. .
Power On/Standby (contd)

NOTE: If errors occur, an error message appears at the bottom of the screen. See User Maintenance, Troubleshooting for more information.
Hints
S S
If problems occur, freeze the image and take a picture for reference. This will help if there is a need to call for service. Probes are initialized for immediate operation.
NOTE: If no probes are connected, the system goes into standby mode.
Peripheral devices are activated on power up. After initialization has been completed, the system is in B-Mode and ready for imaging. Refer to Basic Scan for scanning instructions.
Password Protection
A maximum of eight personal IDs and associated passwords can be preset in the LOGIQ 400 (see Customize 98). If IDs and passwords have been entered and the Password Ask parameter is on, the following occurs in the power up sequence:
S S S S S
The message USERID:__________ appears in the middle of the start up sequence. Type in a User ID and press Return. Keyboard lights go out. The message PASSWORD:__________ is highlighted. Type in the password that corresponds to the User ID and press Return.
Getting Started 15

Password Protection (contd)
4
USER ID : PASSWORD: Version 3.10
Illustration 9. System Startup Screen with Password Ask on
If the correct User ID/Password is entered, the system continues with the power up sequence. If an incorrect User ID/Password is entered, the system allows four additional attempts. After the fifth incorrect entry, the message LOG IN INCORRECT appears. The power up sequence will not continue. The system must be turned off, then on, to begin again.
NOTE: If User ID/Passwords are registered and the Password Ask function is off, press Return at the ID__________ prompt. The system continues the power up sequence.
Getting Started 16

Power Off
When switching off the system:
S
Move the ON, OFF/STAND-BY switch to the OFF position. The message WARNING: NOW STARTING THE POWER OFF PROCESS appears at the bottom of the display. The LOGIQt 400 will take a few seconds to save current scan parameter data in the temporary files to the hard drive before turning the power off. During this time a message flashes on the screen:
Do not pull Power Cable. Do not turn off Breaker.

Pulling the power cable or turning off the circuit breaker, while the hard drive is working, may corrupt the system operating software on the hard drive. If the system has not turned off five minutes after pressing the power switch off:
S
Listen for hard drive activity OR Monitor the hard drive activity light which is located above probe port number two. See Illustration 10 for location.
If the hard drive activity light is not lit or flashing, the circuit breaker on the bottom of the power supply can be used to turn off the system. Do NOT turn off the circuit breaker while the hard disk activity light is on or flashing.
Getting Started 17

Power Off (contd)
Hard Drive Activity Light
Illustration 10. Hard Drive Activity Light Location

S
Disconnect the probes. Clean or sanitize all probes as necessary. Store them in their shipping cases to avoid damage.
If daily maintenance is to be performed, turn off the circuit breaker in the back of the system.
Getting Started 18

Circuit breaker
1 ON
The Circuit Breaker is located on the back of the console, at the bottom of the system. On supplies main power to all internal systems. Off removes main power from all internal systems. The circuit breaker automatically shuts off power to the system in case of a power overload. If a power overload occurs: 1. Turn off all peripheral devices. 2. Turn off the Main Power Switch to the console. 3. Reactivate the Circuit Breaker switch.
OFF
The Circuit Breaker switch should stay in the On position; DO NOT hold the switch in the On position. If the Circuit Breaker switch remains On, follow the Power On procedure previously described.
NOTE: If the Circuit Breaker switch does not remain in the On position or trips again: 1. Disconnect the Power Cable. 2. Call Service immediately. DO NOT attempt to use the system.
Illustration 11. Location of Circuit Breaker

circuit breaker
1 ON 0 OFF
ON
Getting Started 19

Power cord
When storing or moving the system: 1. Turn the system power switch OFF. 2. Turn the Circuit Breaker OFF. 3. Unplug the Power Cord. 4. Loop the cord around the handle on the back of the system or wrap the cord in a bundle and store it behind the rear storage panel. To prevent damage to the Power Cord, DO NOT pull excessively on the cord or make sharp bends while wrapping.
Handle
Storage behind door
Illustration 12. Location of Storage Area
Getting Started 20

1 ON
ON
OFF

Foot Switch (option)
Freeze An optional multi-functional Foot Switch may be used in parallel with or as an alternative to the Freeze and Record 1 controls to:
S
Freeze a real-time image (left switch). Send an image to the hard copy device (right switch).
Record Foot Switch
Only use the recommended foot switch. The Foot Switch connection is located at the back of the console on the left-hand side of the back panel. Store the Foot Switch in the storage compartment located at the front of the console, below the keyboard.
Foot switch connector behind accessory panel door
Store Foot switch here

1 ON 0 OFF
ON
Illustration 13. Foot Switch Storage and Connectors
Getting Started 21
LOGIQ 400

Probes
Only use approved probes. All imaging probes can be plugged into any of the two standard probe ports. (Third probe port is optional) For more information Connecting Refer to Probes for more information.
Probes can be connected at any time, regardless of whether the console is powered on or off. To connect a probe: 1. Place the probes carrying case on a stable surface and open the case. 2. Carefully remove the probe and unwrap the probe cord.
CAUTION
3. DO NOT allow the probe head to hang free. Impact to the probe head could result in irreparable damage. 4. Turn the connector locking handle counter clockwise. 5. Align the connector with the probe port and carefully push into place.
Illustration 14. Probe Connector Panel
Getting Started 22

Probes (contd)
6. Turn the connector locking handle clockwise to secure the probe connector. 7. Carefully position the probe cord so that it is free to move and is not resting on the floor.
lock
unlock
Illustration 15. Connecting a Probe (Shown with optional third probe port)
Disconnecting
Probes can be disconnected at any time, regardless of whether the console is powered on. However, the probe should not be selected as the active probe To disconnect a probe: 1. Move the probe locking handle counterclockwise. 2. Pull the probe and connector straight out of the probe port. 3. Carefully slide the probe and connector away from the probe port and around the right side of the keyboard. 4. Ensure the cable is free. 5. Be sure that the probe head is clean before placing the probe in its storage box.
Getting Started 23

Storing It is recommended that all probes be stored in the carrying case provided. To store a probe: 1. First place the probe connector into the carrying case. 2. Carefully wind the cable into the carrying case. 3. Carefully place the probe head into the carrying case. DO NOT use excessive force or impact the probe head. Activating To activate a probe: Press the Probe Select key that corresponds to the probe port to which the desired probe is connected.
Illustration 16. Probe Select Keys
NOTE: CWD is planned as an option.

The probe activates in the currently selected operating mode. The probes default settings for the mode and selected application are used automatically. The LED (light emitting diode) for the active probe will be lighted.
Getting Started 24

Activating (contd) Probe Name Menu If the Display Probe Name preset in the Setup/System Parameters page one is ON, a list of names for the probes that are attached to the system can be displayed by pressing the Probe Select key once. The desired probe can then be selected from the soft menu or by pressing the Probe Select key until the desired probe LED is lit. Press the Mode Top Menu key to exit the probe name display.
Illustration 17. Probe Name Menu
Deactivating
When deactivating the probe, the probe is automatically placed in standby mode. To deactivate a probe:
"A
S S S S
Press the Freeze key. Gently wipe the excess gel from the face of the probe. Carefully slide the probe around the right side of the keyboard, toward the probe holder. Ensure that the probe is placed gently in the probe holder.
External disk drive

The external MOD drive is a 3.5 inch 128MB/230MB MOD drive located below the keyboard. It can be used to perform:
S S S
Software upgrades Image archiving (option) Service diagnostics
Getting Started 25

Storage areas
Several convenient storage areas are provided within the console as shown by the shaded areas in Illustration 18:
S S S
A compartment located on the right side of the console to store coupling gel, sheaths, etc. A molded storage area located above the alphanumeric keyboard can be used for convenient access to coupling gel bottle, writing utensils, etc. A storage area in the front of the console to store the foot switch and probe cables.
LOGIQ 400 LOGIQ
Storage
Illustration 18. Storage Areas
Getting Started 26
Adjusting the Display Monitor

Adjust the display in the following ways:
.
CAUTION
S S
Rotate, tilt, raise and lower the monitor Adjust Brightness and Contrast
Display controls are located behind the control panel cover under the display screen.
NOTE: Monitor degaussing (demagnetizing) is done automatically when the system is turned on.
Rotate, tilt, raise and lower the monitor

The monitor position can be adjusted for easy viewing.
S S S S
The monitor can be rotated around its central pivot point. The monitor can be tilted for the optimum viewing angle. The monitor arm can swing forward or backwards. The monitor arm can be raised or lowered for the best viewing height.
Movement of the monitor swing arm or height adjustment requires the release of the locking mechanism. After an adjustment is made, ensure that the mechanism is locked to prevent unexpected motion. When moving the LOGIQ 400 system, lower the monitor to its lowest possible position to improve stability.
Illustration 19. Monitor Movement (color monitor)
Getting Started 27

Brightness and Contrast
Adjusting the monitors contrast and brightness is one of the most important factors for proper image quality. If these controls are set incorrectly, the Gain, TGC, Dynamic Range and even Acoustic Output may have to be changed more often than necessary to compensate. The proper setup displays a complete gray scale. The lowest level of black should just disappear into the background and the highest white should be bright, but not saturated. To adjust the Brightness and Contrast: 1. Turn on the LOGIQ 400 and display a gray scale image with a variety of echo levels. 2. Access the Brightness/Contrast controls by pushing on the top center of the control panel door, located under the display screen. 3. Push Brightness and Contrast slidepots to minimum (to the left). 4. Increase the Brightness until the background or monitor raster is just one shade above black. 5. Increase the Contrast to display the complete or desired range of gray shades.
Generally speaking, do not change the controls once they have been set. Once set, the display then becomes the reference for the hard copy device(s).
NOTE: After readjusting the monitors Contrast and Brightness, readjust all preset and peripheral settings.
Brightness
Contrast
Brightness
Contrast
Illustration 20. Brightness and Contrast
Getting Started 28

Speakers
Stereo audio is provided by speakers located on the sides of the Color Monitor. Stereo audio is provided as a standard feature and useful for the following:
S S S
Audio Doppler operation (left side is blood flow away/ right side is blood flow toward) Audio playback of videotaped scan sessions Error notification Speakers
toward
away
Illustration 21. Color Monitor Speakers
Getting Started 29
Peripheral/Accessory Connector Panel

LOGIQ 400 peripherals and accessories can be properly connected using the rear connector panel located behind the rear door. Only the B/W Page Printer (Sony UP-890MD/CE) can be connected to the front accessory panel. Located on the B/W or Color panel are video input and output connections, audio input and output, camera expose connectors, foot switch connector, power connectors and control connections for VCR, printer, MIC and service tools.
Includes front printer panel
220240V 1.0A Max.

Black/White
Illustration 22. Peripheral/Accessory Connector Panel
Getting Started 30

100V 2.5A Max. 120V 2.0A Max.
Color
Peripheral/Accessory Connector Panel (contd)

CAUTION
Each outer (case) ground line of peripheral/accessory connectors are Earth Grounded. Signal ground lines are Not Isolated, except the Service Port. All of the signal lines (including the signal ground) of the Service Port are Isolated.
Service
Illustration 23. Service Port
CAUTION
Use only approved probes, peripherals or accessories.
Refer to the Service Manual (2127661) for more information about Peripherals/Accessories and their connections.
Getting Started 31

Getting Started 32
Operator Controls
Control Panel Map
f
/ ?
J"
" A
" A
Illustration 24. Control Panel
This section is a map of all user controls. For in-depth information on using the controls, refer to the Basic Scan, B-Mode, Doppler, M-Mode, and Color Flow chapters. Controls are grouped together for ease of use:
S
t
Patient Information. These controls are used at the start of a new patient study to erase previous patient information or edit current patient data.
Getting Started 33
Operator Controls
Control Panel Map (contd)

S
Probe Controls. These controls activate one of the two probes attached to the system. A third probe port is optional. Soft Menu Control Keys. These controls are used to access mode or operation specific parameters or software. The menu is displayed on the monitor. TGC Controls. These controls are used to adjust the Time Gain Compensation applied to the received signal. Measurements and Annotations. These controls are used to make specified measurements on the image or to annotate the image display. Mode, Display and Record. These controls are used to designate display modes, image orientation, gain, freeze, record (print) and image memory manipulation. Doppler and Color Flow Controls. These controls are used to adjust the B/W Doppler spectrum as well as the Color Doppler display. User Define. The function of these controls can be defined by the user. Keyboard. The keyboard is used for patient data entry, image annotation, VCR controls and other special functions.
S S
S S
Key Illumination
Some panel keys have an LED (Light Emitting Diode) to their left indicating when that function is active. Active keys will have the LED illuminated. Inactive keys will have the LED illumination turned off. The keys that have LEDs are: Comment, Measurement, Zoom, Body Pattern, M/D Cursor, Scan Area and Probe Select.
Getting Started 34
Operator Controls
Patient Information
Illustration 25. Patient Information Keys
The New Patient key should be pressed prior to the start of each patient study. A preset parameter can be set to prompt the user if they wish to erase all patient data or not. Enter patient data with the alphanumeric keyboard.
.
CAUTION
The Soft Menu automatically defaults to the last exam preset top menu when New Patient is pressed. A diagnostic region can be selected from the preset sub menus to provide a suitable starting point for system scan parameters.
NOTE: After a specific time interval the Soft Menu defaults to the B Top Menu.
The ID/Name key functions the same as the New Patient key except it does NOT erase previous patient data (i.e. measurements, calculations, etc.) This key would typically be used to edit patient information without changing the current system status. To avoid patient identification errors, always verify the identification with the patient. Make sure the correct patient identification appears on all screens and hard copy prints.
Getting Started 35
Operator Controls
Probe Controls
Illustration 26. Probe Select Keys
A probe is activated by pressing the Probe Select key. The appropriate ports LED (light emitting diode) to the left of the key is lit. There are two standard probe ports available on the front of the LOGIQ 400. A third probe port is optional.
For Probe Name Menu operation, see Getting Started 25.
The second key is used to select (activate) the dedicated continuous wave Doppler (CWD) probe. CWD Mode, split crystal or Doppler-only CW probes are options available on the LOGIQ 400.
Getting Started 36
Operator Controls
Soft Menu Control
Illustration 27. Soft Menu Control Keys
The Soft Menu is displayed on the monitor. The Soft Menu Controls manipulate that display. The display is divided into top menu selections and sub menu selections.
Top Menu Organization

The Top Menu Select key toggles the soft menu display on/off or returns to the top menu display from a sub menu. The default selection is the far left side top menu or the last selection made prior to deactivating the soft menu display. One page of its sub menus is automatically displayed when the top menu is selected by an up/down arrow from the Sub Menu Select keys.
Illustration 28. Top Menu Organization
Getting Started 37
Operator Controls
Soft Menu Control (contd)

Sub Menu Select keys turn on a sub menu, move through the sub menu selections and pages, change sub menu values or turn on/off sub menu selections. The up/down arrow keys turn on the sub menu. The left/right arrow keys move through the menu selections and pages. The up/down arrow keys change the highlighted selection value or turn the sub menu selection on/off.
Sub Menu Organization

Refer to Illustration 29. The top row shows the top menu selected B and the number of pages available 1 of 4. The second row are the parameter selections available. Below each parameter selection is a value or up/down arrows that may indicate increase/decrease or on/off.
Illustration 29. B Sub Menu Organization
Getting Started 38
Operator Controls
TGC Controls
Illustration 30. TGC Controls
The TGC controls are used to vary the gain of the received echoes at a specific depth. These controls compensate for echo attenuation as depth increases.
Getting Started 39
Operator Controls
TGC Controls (contd)

In Zoom the TGC adjusts automatically if the TGC Depth Remap preset, on Custom Display page 8, is set to ON. When a depth change is made, TGC is rescaled to affect the new depth range. Each TGC pot is proportionally scaled across the display depth range as illustrated below.
0 cm 2 cm 4 cm 6 cm 8 cm 10 cm 12 cm 14 cm < >
0 cm 3 cm 6 cm 9 cm 12 cm 15 cm 18 cm 20 cm < >
20%
20%
Illustration 31. Time Gain Compensation
Getting Started 40
Measurement and Annotation
Illustration 32. Measurement and Annotation Controls
This group of controls performs various functions related to making measurements, annotating and adjusting the image information. The Comment key enables the image text editor and displays the annotation library soft menu. After the Comment key is pressed, text can be added through the Soft Menu comment library or by typing comments from the alphanumeric keyboard. Turning off the cursor can be done by pressing the Set key. Pressing the Clear key will erase all comments. When the comment function is active the LED (Light Emitting Diode) to the left of the key will be lighted.
Getting Started 41
Operator Controls
Measurement and Annotation (contd)

The Body Pattern key displays the pattern on the screen and cycles through the 16 selections available from the default package selected. See Customize 89 to program a body pattern package and Customize 105 to select a default body pattern package. When the body pattern function is active the LED (Light Emitting Diode) to the left of the key is lighted. If desired, press the Top Menu Select key to display the body pattern sub menu. The M/D Cursor key enables Trackball control of the M-Mode or Doppler cursor line (not angle correction) or the CFM window in real-time Color Flow Mode. When the M/D cursor function is active the LED (Light Emitting Diode) to the left of the key is lighted. The Scan Area key enables Trackball control of the B-Mode image area size and position in B/W, the CFM window size and position in Color mode and the Zoomed area size and position in Zoom. Refer to Basic Scan 63, B-Mode 12, B-Mode 13 and Adding Color 15 for more details. When the scan area function is active the LED (Light Emitting Diode) to the left of the key is lighted. The Measurement key is used in all types of basic measurements, including distance, circumference/area, ellipse, etc. Press the Top Menu Select key to display the measurement soft menu for the current exam category. When the measurement function is active the LED (Light Emitting Diode) to the left of the key is lighted.
Getting Started 42
Operator Controls
Measurement and Annotation (contd)

The Ellipse keys are used to activate the ellipse measurement function after the first distance measurement has been set. It also toggles which cursor is the movable cursor during the ellipse adjustment.
The Set key is used for various functions, but is generally used to fix or finish an operation (i.e. to fix a measurement cursor or exit scan area size/position in B-Mode and zoom). The Clear key is generally used to erase or exit functions such as annotations/comments, measurements and zoom. This will return the system to the basic mode top menu. Press the Zoom key to activate the zoom function. Adjust the size with the Zoom Size knob. Press the Clear key to cancel the zoom function and the Set key to fix the zoom magnification. This knob is used to control the zoom size with the zoom function in real-time or rotate the probe position indicator in the body pattern function.
Zoom Size Rotation
The Trackball is used with almost every key function in this group. Trackball control depends on the last key function pressed.
Getting Started 43
Operator Controls
Mode, Display and Record
" A
Illustration 33. Mode, Display, and Record Controls
This group of controls provides various functions relating to the display mode, display orientation, image recording/ saving, freeze, gain and cine scroll. The Mode Controls select the desired display mode or combinations of display modes. During dual display modes the L and R keys activate the Left or Right displayed image.
Getting Started 44
Operator Controls
Mode, Display and Record (contd)

The Depth knob controls the image display depth. Clockwise rotation decreases display depth. Counterclockwise rotation increases display depth.
Increase
Decrease
Illustration 34. Depth Control Adjustment
The Reverse key toggles the left/right orientation of the scan image.
The Image Memory key stores the current frozen displayed image in system image memory. Maximum number of B-Mode images is 8. Maximum number of Timeline images is 4. All images are erased when the New Patient key is pressed or there is a loss of system power. The Image Recall key displays the last image stored in memory. Press the Top Menu Select key to display the image memory sub menu. After pressing Top Menu Select, select the desired image from the sub menu for display.
Getting Started 45
Operator Controls
Mode, Display and Record (contd)

The Record 1 and Record 2 keys are used to activate the designated recording device (i.e. video page printer, multi-image camera, or image archive option). This will print, film or store the current displayed image.
The Freeze key is used to stop the acquisition of ultrasound data and freeze the image in system memory.
"A
Pressing Freeze a second time continues live image acquisition.
This control performs a dual function. During live B-Mode, it controls the gain of the displayed echoes. During B/M- and M-Mode, it controls the gain of the displayed timeline echoes. During B/M-Mode, B-Mode gain can be controlled by the Doppler/CFM Angle Control. The gain value displayed on the monitor is: B-Mode M-Mode B/M-Mode B-Mode Gain M-Mode Gain M-Mode Gain
When the image is frozen it controls scrolling forwards and backwards through the cine loop images in temporary storage.
Getting Started 46
Operator Controls
Doppler and CFM Controls
Illustration 35. Doppler and CFM Controls
The controls in this group are specific to Doppler or Color Flow Doppler imaging. This control adjusts the audio volume output to the speakers.
The Gain control adjusts the receive gain of the signal for the selected mode, Doppler or CFM.
Turn this control to adjust the pulsed Doppler angle correction to be parallel to the flow of blood in the sample area. The M/D Cursor key controls the enabling or disabling of the angle correction control. The M/D Cursor key disables Trackball control, B-Mode image area size and position and CFM window size and position. The Angle knob controls B-Mode gain in all modes except Doppler.
Getting Started 47
Operator Controls
Doppler and CFM Controls (contd)

The Spectrum Invert key is used in B/W Doppler to invert the polarity of the Doppler spectrum display. During CFM processing this key will reverse the color assignments (i.e. red/blue blue/red). Pressing the Velocity Scale up arrow key will increase the displayed velocity scale. Pressing the down arrow key decreases the velocity scale.
Pressing the Baseline Shift up arrow key raises the baseline of the display vertically. Pressing the down arrow key decreases or lowers the baseline of the display. While in B-Mode only, Baseline Shift can be used to change Focus Position. The B Pause key is used to pause or activate the B-Mode image area when in Doppler, B, or M-Modes. The function of the B-Pause key is set by the parameter PWD Alternative Scan found in Set Up/Custom Display page 4.
Getting Started 48
Operator Controls
User Defined Keys
Illustration 36. User Defined Keys
These keys can be programmed through the Set Up/User Define function to perform almost any desired soft menu, keyboard or front panel control function.
Getting Started 49
Operator Controls
Keyboard
f
/ ?
J "
Illustration 37. Keyboard
The keyboard has standard alphanumeric keys available along with some special functions. The Cursor Home key brings the alphanumeric cursor to the very upper left corner of the available field. The Escape key is used to exit or cancel specified functions or modes. Control is used in conjunction with other keys to activate special keyboard functions. Back Space is used to delete previous characters while annotating.
Return is used to move to the next line of annotation.
Getting Started 50
Operator Controls
Keyboard (contd)
Tab is used to move forward or backwards through the text one word at a time, or eight characters at a time.
Red
Red Shift is used to activate the special characters highlighted in red on the keys to the right side of the keyboard. See Basic Scan 57 for details. Blue Shift activates the VCR controls on the keyboard for the approved Sony SVO9500MD. The keys can be used to control the Microphone, Stop, Play, Record and Pause functions. The External Video key displays VCR video on the monitor.
Blue
J "
When Blue Shift is activated and the VCR is in play mode, the left/right arrow keys control searching reverse or forward. The up/down arrow keys control shifting backwards/forwards one frame at a time while the VCR is paused.
If the VCR is not in play mode, the left/right arrow keys will cause the VCR to rewind or fast forward.
Caps Lock locks all alpha characters in the upper case mode.
Getting Started 51
Operator Controls
Getting Started 52
Relocating The System

Moving the System
When moving or transporting the system, follow the precautions below to ensure the maximum safety for people, the system, and other equipment. Before moving the system: 1. All cables from off-board peripheral devices (IIE camera, external printer, VTR, etc.) must be disconnected from the console. 2. Ensure that no loose items are left on the console. 3. Wrap the consoles power cable securely as suggested in Getting Started 20.
4. Connect all probes to be used while off site. Ensure that probe cables are out of the way from the wheels and not protruding beyond the console.
NOTE: If more than two (2) probes are intended to be used, store the additional probes securely in the front storage area.
5. Store all other probes in their original cases or in soft cloth or foam to prevent damage. 6. Store sufficient gel, optical disks, and other essential accessories in the provided space. 7. Adjust the monitor to its lowest position possible. Ensure that the monitor arm is locked in place. 8. Unlock the front wheels.
Getting Started 53
Relocating the System
Moving the System (contd)
. .
CAUTION
When moving the system: 1. Take extra care when moving the system long distances and on inclines. Ask for help if necessary.
NOTE: Wheel chair ramps are usually less than five degrees.
Avoid ramps that are steeper than ten degrees to avoid tipping over the system. Utilize additional care and personnel when moving on steep incline (>5) or loading into a vehicle for transport. 2. Always use the rear handle grips to move the system.
NOTE: DO NOT attempt to move the console using any cables or fixtures, such as the probe connectors.
3. Use the brake, located on the bottom of the system in the front, when necessary. 4. Do not let the system strike walls or door frames. 5. Use extra care when crossing door or elevator thresholds. 6. Once the destination is reached, lock the wheels. The system weighs approximately 145 kg (320 lbs). To avoid possible injury and equipment damage:
S S S
Be sure the pathway is clear. Limit movement to a slow careful walk. Use two or more persons to move the system on inclines or long distances.
Getting Started 54
Transporting the System

Use extra care when transporting the system using vehicles. In addition to the instructions used when moving the system (refer to Getting Started 53), do the following: 1. Only use vehicles that are designed for transport of the LOGIQ 400 system.
2. Load and unload the system to a vehicle parked on a level surface. 3. Ensure that the transporting vehicle can handle the weight of the system plus the passengers. 4. Ensure that the load capacity of the lift (a minimum of 145 kg [320 lbs] is recommended) is capable of handling the weight of the system. 5. Ensure that the lift is in good working order. 6. Secure the system while it is on the lift so that it cannot roll. Use either wood chocks, restraining straps, or other similar types of constraints. Do not attempt to hold it in place by hand.
NOTE: Strap the system below its handle so that the system does not break loose.
Never ride on the lift with the system. A persons weight coupled with the weight of the system may exceed the load capacity of the lift. 7. Employ two to three persons to load and unload safely from a vehicle.
WARNING
Getting Started 55
Transporting the System (contd)
8. Load the unit aboard the vehicle carefully and over its center of gravity. Keep the unit still and upright.
NOTE: Do not lay the unit down.

9. Ensure that the system is firmly secured while inside the vehicle. Any movement, coupled with the weight of the system, could cause it to break loose. 10. Secure system with straps or as directed otherwise to prevent motion during transport. 11. Prevent vibration damage by driving cautiously. Avoid unpaved roads, excessive speeds, and erratic stops or starts.
Getting Started 56
. .
Wheels
Examine the wheels frequently for any obvious defects that could cause them to break or bind. The front wheels swivel, pivot, and lock. The back wheels swivel and pivot but do not lock.
Front wheels Back wheels
NOTE: For the USA version console, the back wheels do not pivot.
Setting the lock

To engage the wheel lock: Press down on the lock pedal (located at the front of the wheels). The pedal remains depressed. To release the lock: Press down on the pedal again. The pedal returns to its normal position.
Getting Started 57

Getting Started 58
Safety
Precaution Levels Hazard Symbols Patient Safety Equipment and Personnel Safety Device Labels Acoustic Output Warning Label Locations
This section is important in order to become familiar with precaution levels and hazard symbols used in this manual and on the system. It explains patient, system and personnel safety concerns. The controls that affect acoustic output levels are shown in table form.
Safety 1
Safety
Safety 2
Precaution Levels
Icon Description
Various levels of safety precautions may be found on the equipment and different levels of concern are identified by one of the following flag words which precede the precautionary statement.
DANGER
Indicates that a specific hazard is known to exist which through inappropriate conditions or actions will cause:
S S
WARNING
Severe or fatal personal injury Substantial property damage.
Indicates that a specific hazard is known to exist which through inappropriate conditions or actions may cause:
S S
CAUTION
Severe personal injury Substantial property damage.
Indicates that a potential hazard may exist which through inappropriate conditions or actions will or can cause:
.
t
S S S S S S
Minor injury Property damage.
Indicates precautions or prudent use recommendations that should be used in the operation of the ultrasound system, specifically: Use of the ultrasound system as a prescription device, under the order of a physician Maintaining an optimum system environment Using this Manual Notes to emphasize or clarify a point.
Safety 3
Precaution Levels
Safety 4
Hazard Symbols
Icon Description
Potential hazards are indicated by the following icons: Potential Hazard
S
Icon
Usage
S
Source
Biological Hazard
Patient/user infection due to contaminated equipment. Electrical microshock to patient, e.g., ventricular fibrillation initiated. Electrical macroshock to patient/ user. Console, accessories or optional storage devices fall on patient, user, or others. Collision with persons or objects results in injury while maneuvering or during system transport. Injury to user from moving the console. Patient injury or tissue damage from ultrasound radiation.
Cleaning and care ISO 7000 instructions No. 0659 Sheath and glove guidelines Probes ECG Connections to back panel
Electrical Hazard
S S S
Moving Hazard
S S S
Moving Using brakes Transporting
Acoustic Output Hazard
ALARA, the use of acoustic output following the as low as reasonably achievable principle
Table 4. Potential Hazards
Safety 5
Hazard Symbols
Icon Description (contd)

Icon Potential Hazard
S
Usage
S
Source
Explosion Hazard
Risk of explosion if used in the presence of flammable anesthetics. Patient/user injury or adverse reaction from fire or smoke. Patient/user injury from explosion and fire. Console failure, erratic operation or output error due to RF interference.
Flammable anesthetic
Smoke & Fire Hazard
S S
Replacing fuses Outlet guidelines
Non Ionizing Radiation
RF
IEC 878 No. 03-04
Table 4. Potential Hazards (contd)
Important Safety Considerations

The following sections (Patient Safety, and Equipment and Personnel Safety) are intended to make the equipment user aware of particular hazards associated with the use of this equipment and the extent to which injury can occur if precautions are not observed. Additional precautions may be provided throughout the manual. The equipment user is obligated to be familiar with these concerns and avoid conditions that could result in injury.
Safety 6
Patient Safety
Related Hazards
WARNING
The concerns listed can seriously affect the safety of patients undergoing a diagnostic ultrasound examination. Always include proper identification with all patient data and verify the accuracy of the patients name or ID numbers when entering such data. Make sure correct patient ID is provided on all recorded data and hard copy prints. Identification errors could result in an incorrect diagnosis. Equipment malfunction or incorrect settings can result in measurement errors or failure to detect details within the image. The equipment user must become thoroughly familiar with the equipment operation in order to optimize its performance and recognize possible malfunctions. Applications training is available through the local GE representative. Added confidence in the equipment operation can be gained by establishing a quality assurance program. Damaged probes or improper use and manipulation of intracavitary probes can result in injury or increased risk of infection. Inspect probes often for sharp, pointed, or rough surface damage that could cause injury or tear protective barriers. Never use excessive force when manipulating intracavitary probes. Become familiar with all instructions and precautions provided with special purpose probes.
Patient identification
Diagnostic information
Mechanical hazards
Safety 7
Patient Safety
Related Hazards (contd)

Electrical Hazard
A damaged probe can also increase the risk of electric shock if conductive solutions come in contact with internal live parts. Inspect probes often for cracks or openings in the housing and holes in and around the acoustic lens or other damage that could allow liquid entry. Become familiar with the probes use and care precautions outlined in Probes. Ultrasound energy, even at diagnostic levels, is capable of damaging sensitive tissues if adequate precautions are not followed. The wrong combination of equipment settings, probe positioning, and tissue type can result in injury. Please become thoroughly familiar with equipment controls that affect acoustic output levels as well as the output display. Acoustic output concerns and their potential bioeffects are discussed in Appendix A. Follow the principle of as low as reasonably achievable (ALARA) when scanning a patient. During each ultrasound examination, the clinical user is expected to weigh the medical benefit of the diagnostic information obtained against the risk of potential harmful effects. Once an optimal image is achieved the need for increasing acoustic output or prolonging the exposure cannot be justified. Training It is recommended that all users receive proper training in applications before performing them in a clinical setting. Please contact the local GE representative for training assistance. ALARA training is provided by GE Application Specialists.
Safety 8
Equipment and Personnel Safety

Related Hazards
WARNING
This equipment contains dangerous voltages that are capable of serious injury or death. There are no user serviceable components inside the console. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel only.
DANGER
The concerns listed below can seriously affect the safety of equipment and personnel during a diagnostic ultrasound examination. Risk of explosion if used in the presence of flammable anesthetics. To avoid injury:
S
Explosion Hazard Electrical Hazard
Do not remove protective covers. No user serviceable parts are inside. Refer servicing to qualified service personnel. To assure adequate grounding, connect the attachment plug to a reliable (hospital grade) grounding outlet (having ). equalization conductor Do not place liquids on or above the console. Spilled liquid may contact live parts and increase the risk of shock.
Smoke The system must be supplied from an adequately rated & Fire electrical circuit. The capacity of the supply circuit must be Hazard as specified in Chapter 3 of the LOGIQt 400 Service
Manual.
Safety 9
Equipment and Personnel Safety
Related Hazards (contd)

Biological For patient and personnel safety, beware of biological Hazard hazards while performing invasive procedures. To avoid the
risk of disease transmission:
S
Use protective barriers (gloves and probe sheaths) whenever possible. Follow sterile procedures when appropriate. Thoroughly clean probes and reusable accessories after each patient examination and disinfect or sterilize as needed. Refer to Probes for probe use and care instructions. Follow all infection control policies established by your office, department or institution as they apply to personnel and equipment.
CAUTION
Devices containing latex may cause severe allergic reaction in latex sensitive individuals. USA customers should refer to the FDAs March 29, 1991 Medical Alert on latex products.
Safety 10
Device Labels
Label Icon Description
The following table describes the purpose and location of safety labels and other important information provided on the equipment. Label/Icon
Identification and Rating Plate
S S S S
Purpose/Meaning
Manufacturers name and address Date of manufacture Model and serial numbers Electrical ratings (Volts, Amps, phase, and frequency)
Location
Rear of console near power inlet
Type/Class Label IP Code (IPX1)
Used to indicate the degree of safety or protection. Indicates the degree of protection provided by the enclosure per IEC 529. IPX1 indicates drip proof. Equipment Type BF (man in the box symbol) IEC 878-02-03 indicates B Type equipment having a floating applied part. Equipment Type CF (heart in the box symbol) IEC 878-02-05 indicate equipment having a floating applied part having a degree of protection suitable for direct cardiac contact. Foot Switch
Probe connectors and PCG connector ECG connector and surgical probes
Device Listing/ Certification Labels DANGER Risk of explosion used in...
Laboratory logo or labels denoting conformance with industry safety standards such as UL or IEC. The system is not designed for use with flammable anesthetic gases. CAUTION The equilateral triangle is usually used in combination with other symbols to advise or warn the user. Table 5. Label Icons
Rear of console
Rear of console Various
Safety 11
Device Labels
Label Icon Description (contd)

Label/Icon Purpose/Meaning Location
ATTENTION Consult accompanying Various documents is intended to alert the user to refer to the operator manual or other instructions when complete information cannot be provided on the label. CAUTION Dangerous voltage (the lightning flash with arrowhead) is used to indicate electric shock hazards. Mains OFF Indicates the power off position of the mains power switch. Mains ON Indicates the power on position of the mains power switch. Various
Rear of system, adjacent to mains switch Rear of system, adjacent to mains switch
ON Indicates the power on position of Adjacent to the power switch. On-Off/Standby CAUTION: This Power Switch DOES NOT Switch ISOLATE Mains Supply. Off/Standby Indicates the power off/standby position of the power switch. CAUTION: This Power Switch DOES NOT ISOLATE Mains Supply. Equipotentiality Indicates the terminal to Rear of console be used for connecting equipotential conductors when interconnecting (grounding) with other equipment. CAUTION: This is only for FUNCTIONAL GROUNDING, NOT PROTECTIVE EARTH. Adjacent to On-Off/Standby Switch
Table 5. Label Icons (contd)
Safety 12
Device Labels
Classifications
Type of protection against electric shock Class I Equipment (*1) Degree of protection against electric shock Type BF Equipment (*2) (Except ECG) Type CF Equipment (*3) (ECG Only) Ordinary Equipment Continuous Operation
*1. Class I EQUIPMENT

EQUIPMENT in which protection against electric shock does not rely on BASIC INSULATION only, but includes an earth ground. This additional safety precaution prevents exposed metal parts from becoming LIVE in the event of an insulation failure.
*2. Type BF EQUIPMENT

TYPE B EQUIPMENT with an F-TYPE APPLIED PART TYPE B EQUIPMENT: EQUIPMENT providing a specified degree of protection against electric shock, with particular regard to allowable LEAKAGE CURRENT. Normal Mode Patient leakage current Less than 100 mA Single fault condition Less than 500 mA
*3. Type CF EQUIPMENT

EQUIPMENT providing a degree of protection higher than that for TYPE BF EQUIPMENT against electric shock particularly regarding allowable LEAKAGE CURRENTS, and having an F-TYPE APPLIED PART. Normal Mode Patient leakage current Less than 10 mA Single fault condition Less than 50 mA
Safety 13
Device Labels
*4. EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility)
4.1 EMC Performance All types of electronic equipment may characteristically cause electromagnetic interference with other equipment, either transmitted through air or connecting cables. The term EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility) indicates the capability of equipment to curb electromagnetic influence from other equipment and at the same time not affect other equipment with similar electromagnetic radiation from itself. This product is designed to fully comply with the EN6060112 (IEC60112) in medical electric equipment EMC regulations. Proper installation following the service manual is required in order to achieve the full EMC performance of the product. The product must be installed as stipulated in 4.2, Notice upon Installation of Product. In case of issues related to EMC, please call your service personnel.
CAUTION
Do not use the following devices near this equipment. Use of these devices near this equipment could cause this equipment to malfunction. DEVICES NOT TO BE USED NEAR THIS EQUIPMENT Devices which intrinsically transmit radio waves such as: Cellular phone, radio transceiver, mobile radio transmitter, radio-controlled toys, etc. Keep power to these devices turned off when near this equipment. Medical staff in charge of this equipment is required to instruct technicians, patients and other people who may be around this equipment to fully comply with the above regulaion.
Safety 14
Device Labels
4.2 Notice upon Installation of Product 1. Use either power supply cords provided by GE Medical Systems or ones designated by GE Medical Systems. Products equipped with a power source plug should be plugged into the fixed power socket which has the protective grounding conductor. Never use any adaptor or converter to connect with a power source plug (i.e. three-prong-to-two-prong converter). 2. Locate the equipment as far away as possible from other electronic equipment. 3. Be sure to use only the cables provided by or designated by GE Medical Systems. Connect these cables following the installation procedures (i.e. wire power cables separately from signal cables). 4. Lay out the main equipment and other peripherals following the installation procedures described in the Option Installation manuals. 4.3 General Notice 1. Designation of Peripheral Equipment Connectable to This Product. The equipment indicated in Appendix CPeripherals, List of Optional Peripherals, can be hooked up to the product without compromising its EMC performance. Avoid using equipment not designated in the list. Failure to comply with this instruction may result in poor EMC performance of the product. 2. Notice against User Modification The user should never modify this product. User modifications may cause degradation in EMC performance. Modification of the product includes: a. Changes in cables (length, material, wiring, etc.) b. Changes in system installation/layout c. Changes in system configuration/components d. Changes in securing system parts (cover open/close, cover screwing)
Safety 15
Device Labels
4.3 General Notice (contd) 3. Operate the system with all covers closed. If a cover is opened for some reason, be sure to shut it before starting/resuming operation. Operating the system with any cover open may affect EMC performance.
*5. Patient Environmental Devices

Power Cables with Protective Earth Peripheral Device (1) B/W Video Printer Signals I/O Port Power In Front Panel Signals I/O Port Power Out Rear Panel Peripheral Devices (1) VCR (2) B/W Video Printer (3) Color Video Printer (4) B/W Polaroid Camera (5) Color Polaroid Camera Signals I/O Port Signals I/O Port Power Out NonImaging Probes Imaging Probes Power In Imaging Probes Probe Ports Power Cables with Protective Earth Signals I/O Port Probe Adaptor InSite Modem Signals I/O Port ECG Cable PCG Sensor PhysioSignal Input Panel Foot Switch Connector Power Line Telephone Line Power In Foot Switch Power Cable with Protective Earth
Illustration 38. Patient Environmental Devices
Safety 16
Power Line (AC~) Ground Line
Device Labels
*5. Patient Environmental Devices (contd)

NOTE: Peripheral devices listed may be attached to the LOGIQ 400, however, all are not capable of being mounted onto the console. Contact the distributor, affiliate or sales representative for approved peripherals.
5.1 Acceptable Devices The devices shown in Illustration 38 are specified to be suitable for use within the PATIENT ENVIRONMENT. Please refer to Service Manual (2127661), the User Manual AppendixC Peripherals and AppendixD Assistance for more details.
CAUTION
Do not connect any probes or accessories without approval by GE. Those listed in the AppendixC Peripherals and AppendixD Assistance have been tested and verified to be compatible with the LOGIQ 400 system.
5.2 Unapproved Devices
CAUTION
The user takes All Responsibility for connecting unapproved devices. If devices are connected without the approval of GE, the warranty will be INVALID. Any device connected to the LOGIQ 400 must conform to one or more of the requirements listed below: 1. IEC 50, IEC 65, IEC 335, IEC 348, IEC 414, IEC 820, IEC 950, IEC 10101, ISO 7767, ISO 8185, ISO 8359 or IEC 6011. 2. The devices shall be connected to PROTECTIVE EARTH (GROUND).
Safety 17
Device Labels
Safety 18
Acoustic Output
Controls Affecting Output
The potential for producing mechanical or thermal bioeffects is influenced by the controls listed below (refer to Safety 20). Direct. The Acoustic Output default preset control (Custom Display page 1, see Customize 25) has the most significant effect on Acoustic Output. Indirect. Indirect effects may occur when adjusting the controls listed on Safety 20. Always observe the output display for possible effects.
Best practices while scanning
Hints
Raise the Acoustic Output only after attempting image optimization with controls that have no affect on Acoustic Output, such as Gain and TGC.
NOTE: Refer to the Optimization section of the Mode chapters for a complete discussion of each control.
Be sure to have read and understood control explanations for each Mode intended to be used before attempting to adjust the Acoustic Output control or any control that can affect Acoustic Output. Use the minimum necessary output to get the best diagnostic image or measurement during an examination. Begin the exam with the probe that provides an optimum focal depth and penetration.
WARNING
Safety 19
Acoustic Output
Controls Mode
All
Control
Affect
Default Setting
The middle setting is a factory preset determined to be a reasonable setting for all exams. Use presets to set the output preferred by scan mode and exam combination. Off. Probe-dependent operator preset. Probe-dependent system preset. Off. Off. Application-dependent system preset. Application-dependent operator preset. Low. Off. Off.
Acoustic Output Direct. Significant
B B/M/CFD B/M
Focus Comb Depth (FOV) Focal Zone Position and Number Scan Area M Cursor
Indirect. Minor Indirect. Minor Indirect. Minor
B/CFD Doppler Doppler
Indirect. Indirect. Minor
Doppler Sample Indirect. Minor Volume Gate Length Velocity Scale Freq. Hi/Low Scan Area Zoom Indirect. Minor Indirect. Minor Indirect. Minor Indirect. Minor
Doppler PWD/CFD CFD B/M / CFD
Table 6. Controls Affecting Acoustic Output
Acoustic Output Default Levels

In order to assure that an exam does not start at a high output level, the LOGIQ 400 initiates scanning at a reduced or default output level. The reduced level takes effect when the system is powered on, a new patient is entered or when changing exam categories. Factory exam category default settings are: Abdomen OB GYN Cardio Vasc Urology Small Pts 64% 64% 64% 64% 80% 56% 64%
Safety 20
Warning Label Locations

Overview
LOGIQ 400 warning labels are provided in seven different languages. Each message is provided in English, Japanese, German, French, Italian, Portuguese and Spanish.
Monitor Labels
For service personnel, a temporary label is placed on the monitor face to warn not to move the monitor support arm without the monitor attached. Illustration 40 shows the actual label.
LOGIQ 400
Push Open
Illustration 39. Temporary Label Location
This label is removed after installation of the monitor.
Safety 21
Monitor Labels (contd)
Illustration 40. Temporary Warning Label
Two caution labels are found on the back of the monitor. One warns to only move the console with the monitor in its lowest position; the second warns not to push the console from the side. Illustration 42 shows the actual labels.
Illustration 41. Caution Labels on Back of Monitor
Safety 22
Monitor Labels (contd)
Illustration 42. Lower Monitor Cautions
Safety 23
Console Labels
Labels found on the back and side of the console will either be translated to the seven languages or be specific to the region.
Defibrillator Caution
LOGIQ
Illustration 43. Defibrillator Label Location
Safety 24

Ground Point
Illustration 44. Signal Ground Point Location and Label
CAUTION
This is only for FUNCTIONAL GROUNDING, NOT PROTECTIVE EARTH.

Safety 25

Regulatory Labels (European Systems)
Illustration 45. Regulatory Label Location (European)
Safety 26

Regulatory Labels (American Systems)
Illustration 46. Regulatory Label Location (Americas)
Safety 27

Safety 28
Basic Scan
Beginning an Exam Reading the Display Soft Menu Annotating an Image Zooming an Image VCR Operations Freezing an Image Using Cine Archiving Images
The section Getting Started described the basic physical elements of the LOGIQ 400 system as well as the keyboard controls.
This section describes basic elements of the system and its displays common to all types or modes of scanning. The basic elements include:
S S S S S S S S
Patient information entry Display formats Soft Menu function and displays Image annotation Zoom Image recording Cine Image archival
Basic Scan 1
Basic Scan
Basic Scan 2
Beginning an Exam
Introduction
Begin an exam by entering new patient information. Pressing the New Patient key clears all patient data, annotations, measurements, and calculation summary report pages from the systems memory. The system defaults to B-Mode. A patient data entry menu is displayed on the monitor. The operator should enter as much information as possible, such as:
S S S S S
Exam category Patient name Patient ID Comments Other patient demographic information
The patients name and ID number is retained with each patients image and transferred with each image during archiving or hard copy printing.
Basic Scan 3
Beginning an Exam
Beginning a New Patient

The New Patient key should be pressed at the beginning of each patient study. Pressing this key automatically erases all patient data, annotations, measurements, calculations and summary report pages.
NOTE: Oper ID and Ref MD will not be erased.

The Soft Menu defaults to the last top menu selected when New Patient is pressed. After a specific time interval the Soft Menu defaults to the B top menu. The Patient Entry Menu appears on the display monitor.
Illustration 47. Patient Entry Menu
The first Data Entry field is presented in reversed display, with the selected cursor in position for the first character to be entered.
Basic Scan 4
Beginning an Exam
Beginning a New Patient (contd)
S S
There are 7 examination categories to choose from: Radiology/Abdominal, Obstetrics, Gynecology, Cardiology, Vascular, Urology and Small Parts. The category should be selected before the start of the examination. Use the Trackball to move to the exam category selection. Input the appropriate number. As a result, the patient information input menu changes when the selected CATEGORY appears in reversed display. Information pertinent to the selected exam category appears in an abbreviated menu. Input the patient name (29 characters maximum). Press Return or use the Trackball to move the reversed cursor. Input ID number (14 characters maximum). Press Return or use the Trackball to move the reversed cursor. Input any desired note (30 characters maximum). Press Return or use the Trackball to move the reversed cursor to the next desired input edit. Input the desired Oper ID (four digits maximum).
S S S S S S S
NOTE: Patient Name, Patient ID, Notes, Oper ID, Ref MD, and Comments are common to all exam category menus. The Patient Name and Patient ID will appear on the image screen. All other information is automatically entered into appropriate exam report pages. Information in the Exam Category patient entry menus is considered necessary for that type of exam. Fill in all information possible.
S S S
The display units of measure for items such as weight or height can be selected from the Set Up/Preset program menu page 9. Choose the priority and unit of measure on this Preset Menu page. Input Ref MD (16 characters maximum). Input comment field (2 lines of 50 characters each).
Basic Scan 5
Beginning an Exam
Beginning a New Patient (contd)
. . .
When all patient data entries have been completed, highlight Exit and press Return or the New Patient key.
NOTE: If patient information needs to be edited or the exam category changed, use the ID Name key. Pressing ID Name allows for modification of the Patient Entry Menus without erasing accumulated patient images, measurements, annotations, calculations and summary reports.
The following are examples of the exam category patient entry menus: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: RAD/ABDOMEN OBSTETRICS GYNECOLOGY CARDIOLOGY VASCULAR UROLOGY SMALL PARTS
NOTE: Patient age entry information (years, months, weeks, days) is selected in Set Up/Preset Program page 9, Display Unit Age. Patient height is Display Unit Height and Patient weight is Display Unit Weight. Choose the unit values that are to appear on the patient entry menu.
BBT is a pregnancy origin data selection choice that appears in the Tokyo University, Osaka University and European OB formats only. LMP, EDC and GA are the only choices in the USA version. For OB and GYN patient entry menus, if the Multigestational option is installed, Fetus Number: will appear to the right of Ref. MD:. If more than one fetus, enter the correct number of fetuses.
NOTE: In the case of multiple gestation, if the Multigestational option is not installed, each fetus must be scanned separately. Re-enter the patients information for each fetus. BBT will not appear on the USA version menu.
It is possible to read patient data from a PC (personal computer) into the LOGIQ 400 Patient Entry Menu. See OB/GYN 87 for details.
Basic Scan 6
Beginning an Exam
Radiology/Abdominal Exam Menu
Illustration 48. Rad/Abdomen Exam Menu
Obstetrics Exam Menu
Illustration 49. Obstetrics Exam Menu
Basic Scan 7
Beginning an Exam
Gynecology Exam Menu
Illustration 50. Gynecology Exam Menu
Cardiology Exam Menu
Illustration 51. Cardiology Exam Menu
Basic Scan 8
Beginning an Exam
Vascular Exam Menu
Illustration 52. Vascular Exam Menu
Urology Exam Menu
Illustration 53. Urology Exam Menu
Basic Scan 9
Beginning an Exam
Small Parts Exam Menu
Illustration 54. Small Parts Exam Menu
ID/Name
Use the ID/Name key to enter or replace patient data without changing the current status of the system. One common reason might be to change the exam category. Pressing ID/Name enables the Patient Entry Menu. Use the Trackball or Arrow keys to move around the menu entry lines. Return moves the entry cursor to the next line. No other function can be started until ID/Name is completed. To complete the ID/Name process, press ID/Name a second time or move the highlighted cursor to Exit and press Return.
Basic Scan 10
Beginning an Exam
Helpful hints
Hints
If power is lost during the ID/Name function, any data that was added or modified will not be saved. Patient information/setup is saved to the system hard drive at power off only if the System Parameters (page 1) preset Power On Status is set to Keep Latest.. The setup is then returned to its power down state when power is turned on. The following rules apply when filling in the New Patient menu:
S S S
Press Caps Lock to type uppercase letters. Press Caps Lock again to type lowercase letters. Press Back Space to erase characters and correct errors. To change information, press Return or use the Trackball to move to the field, then type over the existing information with correct information. Press Return to move to the next field. Use the Trackball to move the reversed cursor to the desired item. When pressing Return at the last data entry field, the system returns to real-time scanning. Standard keyboard keys repeat when held down. To start over, press New Patient. Remember, user and factory-defined presets are dependent upon the exam category selected when filling in the New Patient menu.
S S S S S
Basic Scan 11
Beginning an Exam
Basic Scan 12
Reading the Display

B-Mode Display
The LOGIQ 400 offers a wide variety of display formats. Each format shows the operator valuable information relating to patient data and system scan parameters.
The following illustrates the basic B-Mode display and the information that can be expected with this format. The remaining modes and combinations of modes will highlight information that is different for that particular display.
NOTE: Timeline formats (M-Mode and Doppler) available for display are enabled on the Set Up/Custom Display screen menus. First, choose the Side/Side, or Top/Bottom display style on Custom Display page 10, Timeline Format. The choice is Side/Side or Top/Bottom. The two styles cannot be mixed. Second, make the M-Mode format Enable/Disable selections on Custom Display page 10. Make the Doppler format Enable/Disable selections on Custom Display page 11.
Basic Scan 13
Reading the Display
B-Mode Display (contd)
Basic Scan 14

Illustration 55. B-Mode Display Format
Reading the Display
B-Mode Display
Patient Name ID
Description, Format, Values

A maximum of 29 alphanumeric characters. Input at Patient Entry Menu. Patient identification number. A maximum of 14 alphanumeric characters. Input at Patient Entry Menu. Todays date according to the system settings. Can be preset to display as MM/DD/YR, DD/MM/YR, or YR/MM/DD. Displays the current time during normal operation. Can be preset to a 12 or 24 hour clock. Displays the frame acquisition time when in Cine Mode. Shows the name of the hospital or institution. A maximum of 34 alphanumeric characters. Input at Set Up/System Parameters page 1. Gestational Age for OB patients. Calculated from LMP input from Patient Entry Menu. GA (LMP) = ##W#D The acoustic power output percentage is preceeded by a P and then a number from 0100. PP is the indication for penetration mode on. The first P is penetration mode for B-Mode. The second P is penetration mode for Doppler. NP is the indication that penetration mode is off. Probe name or designation of the active probe. GE is the marker used for scan orientation. This should coincide with the probe orientation marking on the probe body. This marker can be turned off in Set Up/Custom Display page 8. Table 7. B-Mode Display Explanation
Date
Time
Hospital Name
GA
Acoustic Output Percentage Penetration Mode On/Off
Probe Probe Orientation GE or
Basic Scan 15
Reading the Display
Graphic Display
Gray Scale Color Scale

Shows the B-Mode Gray Scale assignment. In Color Mode, the right half shows the Color Scale assignment. Table 8. B-Mode Display Explanation
Basic Scan 16
Reading the Display
Graphic Display
FR/Cine

Shows display acquisition frame rate. ###Hz (Real-time) Can be turned off by a parameter in Set Up/Custom Display page 8. In Cine Mode it shows the display playback frame number. CN### (Frozen) Shows the display depth in cm. ##cm Dual Mode: ##cm## Dynamic Range shows the range over which echo intensities are converted to gray scale. Displayed in dB. DR## Dual Mode: ##DR## Displays the overall B-Mode or M-Mode Receive Gain. G## Dual Mode: ##G## Shows the body pattern selected for scan orientation. Indicates the video tape location shown as: ##:##:## VTR status indication shows the current operational status of the VTR. A two digit indication of the TV Frame count during VTR playback. Table 9. B-Mode Display Explanation
Depth
DR
Gain
Body Pattern VTR Counter
""
TV Counter
Basic Scan 17
Reading the Display
Acoustic Output Display

Displayed in the lower right corner of the screen, this is intended to keep the user informed of the potential bioeffects that can result when the Acoustic Output is increased. Refer to the Bioeffects section in Appendix A. The Acoustic Output display shows MI (Mechanical Index) while in B-Mode. When other modes are selected TIS, TIB or TIC are displayed. The Set Up/Custom Display menu page 8 will determine which value (TIS, TIB or TIC) is displayed.
Basic Scan 18

Graphic Display
Soft Menu Area Measurements

Displays the Top Menu and selected Sub Menus in this area. Lines of image measurement data are displayed in this area. The format and value depends on the type of measurement. The bottom line fills first and scrolls up as additional information is obtained. System generated messages are displayed on this line (i.e. error messages) Heart Rate is displayed here in beats per minute. ###BPM (Requires ECG input) Acoustic Output display for MI (Mechanical Index) or TI (Thermal Index). The larger one is displayed. If both are less than 0.4, the message TI=<0.4 is displayed. Table 10. B-Mode Display Explanation
Operator Messages HR A Output
Reading the Display

Acoustic Output Display (contd)
Display increments are 0.2 for values of one or less and 1.0 for values greater than one. Display accuracy for MI is 50% to +50%. Display accuracy for TI is 50% to +100%. Index values less than 0.4 are not displayed.
Acoustic Output Index Display Function
Operation Mode
Other
B Only
Display MI (Mechanical Index) Value
TIS
Setup/Custom Display page 8 Selection
TIC
TIB
Display TIS (Soft Tissue Thermal Index) Value
Display TIB (Bone Thermal Index) Value
Display TIC (Cranial Bone Thermal Index) Value
NOTE: *For all Index Values, if the calculated value is less than 0.4 then Display will be < 0.4.
Illustration 56. Acoustic Output Display Selection
Adjusting the Acoustic Output

The initial acoustic output may be preset within the range of 0% and 100% in Set Up/Custom Display page 1. Acoustic power settings are available for B/M and D/CFM/PDI with the following presets:
S S
Acoustic Power B/M [%] Acoustic Power D/CFM/PDI [%]
Basic Scan 19
Reading the Display
Basic Scan 20

Illustration 57. B-Mode Display Format
(0 cm) (1 cm) (5 cm) (10 cm)
(0 cm) (1 cm)
(5 cm)
(10 cm)
Scale markers are presented along the right side of the display as large marks every 5cm and small marks every 1cm.
Reading the Display
The TGC curve displays the relative position of the TGC slide pots compared to their depth. This display can be turned on or off in the Set Up/Custom Display Menu page 8.
The number displayed next to the probe orientation symbol is the zoom or scroll depth starting point for the image displayed.
Basic Scan 21
Reading the Display
Doppler Display
The following information displays on the Doppler Mode image:
Basic Scan 22

Illustration 58. 1/2 B-Mode plus 1/2 D-Mode Display
Reading the Display
Doppler Display (contd)

The following additional parameters are displayed when in Doppler Mode.
Graphic Display
Doppler Frequency (D) Pulse Repetition Frequency (R) Wall Filter (WV) (WF)

The Doppler frequency value is displayed in MHz (MegaHertz). Displays the Doppler Pulse Repetition frequency in KHz (KiloHertz). The Wall Filter velocity value is displayed in m/sec (meters per second) or Hz (frequency). WV### Dual Mode: ###WV### Sample Volume (Length) is displayed in mm. SV## Dual Mode: ##SV## Indicates the Doppler Angle in Q (degrees) between the Doppler Mode cursor and angle correction indicator. q## Dual Mode: ##q## Doppler signal gain is displayed as a two digit number. Table 11. Doppler Mode Display Format
Sample Volume (Length) (SV)

q (Angle)
D.G
Basic Scan 23
Reading the Display
Doppler Display (contd)
Graphic Display
SPEC INV

SPEC INV is displayed to indicate that the spectrum display is inverted from the prescribed norm. The Doppler velocity scale is displayed in meters per second. The forward velocity is displayed above the spectrum while the reverse velocity is displayed below. When the spectrum is inverted, the velocity scale readings also invert. Three speeds: Slow (4 second sweep). Major marker = 1 second; minor marker = 0.5 second. Medium (2 second sweep). Major marker = 1 second; minor marker = 0.5 second. Fast (1 second sweep). Major marker = 1 second; minor marker = 0.5 second. Table 12. Doppler Mode Display Format
D. Velocity
Time Scale
Basic Scan 24
Reading the Display
M-Mode or Doppler Spectrum Only Display

The following information is displayed on the M-Mode or Doppler mode spectrum image:

Illustration 59. M-Mode or Doppler Spectrum Only Display Format
Basic Scan 25
Reading the Display
Dual Doppler Spectrum Only Display
Basic Scan 26

Illustration 60. Dual D-Mode Display Format
NOTE: Dual M-Mode format is not currently available.
Reading the Display
Color Flow Display

The following information displays on the Color Flow Mode image:
CG
FR/Cine

Illustration 61. Color Flow Mode Graphic Display
Basic Scan 27
Reading the Display
Color Flow Display (contd) Graphic Display

Velocity Scale
Raises/lowers the velocity scale on the color bar. Displayed in cm/m per second or Hz. Color Scale Displays the selected velocity, velocity & variance, power, or velocity & power map. CFM Area Cursor Color displays only in this sector. Press the Scan Area key to toggle between cursor size and position control. Size this window using the Trackball. Position this window via the Trackball. MTI Filter Color Threshold Marker Units (V or F) Color Gain (CG) Displays on the Color Flow bar as a black area surrounding the baseline. The color display threshold based on the B-Mode gray scale level. Indicates the unit of measure. Velocity (V) in meters per second or Frequency (F) in KHz. Displays the Color Receive Gain value from 0 to 31. CG## Dual Mode: ##CG##
Table 13. Color Flow Mode Display Format
Basic Scan 28
Reading the Display
Other Display Formats

Other possible display formats are:
D R WV SV q Angle DG FR/Cine Depth DR Gain

Time Scale
Illustration 62. Top/Bottom B Mid Preset

Time Scale
Illustration 63. Top/Bottom B Large Preset
Basic Scan 29
Reading the Display
Other Display Formats (contd)
FR/Cine Depth DR Gain
Basic Scan 30

Illustration 64. Top/Bottom B Small Preset

Illustration 65. Dual B-Mode Display Format
Reading the Display
Other Display Formats (contd)
FR/Cine Depth DR Gain
Illustration 66. Zoom with Reference Mode Display Format

Zoom Depth

SPEC INV D velocity SPEC INV D velocity
Time Scale
M(D)
M(D)
D velocity
D velocity
Illustration 67. Dual Format
Basic Scan 31
Reading the Display

Basic Scan 32
Soft Menu
Introduction
Additional functionality, not available as a control or key on the front panel, can be found via the Soft Menus. Different soft menus appear depending on the mode, special function or calculation package selected. The Soft Menu is displayed on the monitor and is controlled by the Top Menu Select and Sub Menu Select keys.
LOGIQ 400
Push Open
Illustration 68. Soft Menu Display and Keys
Basic Scan 33
Soft Menu
Top Menu Organization

There are seven basic top menu selections. Pressing the Top Menu Select key automatically displays the mode default Sub Menu. Press Top Menu Select again to display the Top Menu shown in Illustration 69.
Illustration 69. Mode Default Top Menu (page one)

S
Mode Default Menu is the current highest priority active mode. The five possibilities are B, M, PWD, CWD and CFM. Preset is for user programmable application parameter preset selections. Set Up enables the system customization sub menus. ECG is used to adjust the ECG waveform and ECG synchronized scanning. Archive is used with the Image Archive Option for storing images to MOD. AutoSequence displays the user programmed measurement sequences. CINE is used when the image is frozen for review of the accumulated image data.
S S S S S S
Cycle through the available top menu selections by pressing the Sub Menu Select left or right arrow keys. When the desired Top Menu is highlighted, press the Sub Menu Select up or down arrow keys to display the sub menus.
Basic Scan 34
Soft Menu
Top Menus (contd)

A preset parameter can be used to automatically display the sub menus for the four functions listed below. If this parameter is turned off, press the Top Menu Select key in order to display the specific sub menu for the following four selections:
S S S
Body Pattern displays the available graphic selections in the sub menu area. Comment displays the available selections from the comment library. Measurement displays the available measurements suitable for the current exam category, image format or individual user sequences. Image Recall displays information pertaining to images temporarily stored in system memory.
NOTE: While in a sub menu, to return to the Top Menu, press the Top Menu Select key.
Basic Scan 35
Soft Menu
Sub Menu Organization
Different Sub Menus are displayed according to the Top Menu category selected. Each selection or parameter in the Sub Menus relates directly to the Top Menu selected.
Note: Details for each Sub Menu or Sub Menu selection can be found when that mode or top menu selection is discussed in other chapters of this manual.
A Sub Menu display consists of four basic parts: 1. Top Menu Selected. 2. Sub Menu page indicator. Current Sub Menu page/Available Sub Menu pages. Illustration 70 shows that page one of four is displayed. 3. Sub Menu parameters selections. The active one is highlighted. 4. Sub Menu parameter value, change or on/off indication. For on/off indications, this area of the soft menu is highlighted when the parameter is turned on. 1 2
3 4
Illustration 70. B-Mode Sub Menu Page Display
Basic Scan 36
Soft Menu
Sub Menu Organization (contd)

Sub Menu Parameter Change
Cycle through the available Sub Menu parameter selections on the page displayed by pressing the Sub Menu Select left or right arrow keys. The Sub Menu parameter selection will wrap around if the highlighted parameter is on the right end of the menu and the Sub Menu Select right arrow key is pressed. The same applies to the left side parameter and the Sub Menu Select left arrow key. Refer to Illustration 71.
Illustration 71. Sub Menu Page Wrap Around
Make changes to or turn on/off the highlighted parameter by using the Sub Menu Select up or down arrow keys.
Basic Scan 37
Soft Menu
Sub Menu Page Change
To change from one Sub Menu page to another, use the Sub Menu Select arrow keys. To move to the Next Sub Menu page, press the following Sub Menu Select keys:
S S S
Left and Right arrow keys simultaneously Up arrow key and Left arrow key simultaneously Up arrow key and Right arrow key simultaneously.
To move to the Previous Sub Menu page, press the following Sub Menu Select keys:
S S
Down arrow key and Left arrow key simultaneously Down arrow key and Right arrow key simultaneously.
Basic Scan 38
Soft Menu
Top Menu Displays

The following illustrations show examples of the available sub menu displays found on the system:
Probe Name Menu
Illustration 72. Probe Name Menu
M-Mode Top Menu
Illustration 73. M-Mode Sub Menu (page 1 of 2)
Illustration 74. M-Mode Sub Menu (page 2 of 2)
Basic Scan 39
Soft Menu
B-Mode Top Menu
Illustration 75. B-Mode Sub Menu (page 1 of 4)
Basic Scan 40
Soft Menu
PWD Top Menu
Illustration 79. PWD Sub Menu (page 1 of 3)
Basic Scan 41
Soft Menu
CWD Top Menu
Illustration 82. CWD Sub Menu (page 1 of 3)
Basic Scan 42
Soft Menu
CFM Top Menu
Illustration 85. CFM Sub Menu (page 1 of 3)
Basic Scan 43
Soft Menu
Preset Top Menu
Illustration 88. Preset (User) Sub Menu (page 1 of 3)
Illustration 89. Preset (Factory) Sub Menu (page 2 of 3)
Illustration 90. Preset Sub Menu (page 3 of 3)
Basic Scan 44
Soft Menu
Set Up Top Menu
Illustration 91. Set Up Sub Menu (page 1 of 1)
ECG Top Menu
Illustration 92. ECG Sub Menu (page 1 of 3)
Basic Scan 45
Soft Menu
Image Archive Option Top Menu
Illustration 95. Image Archive Sub Menu (page 1 of 1)
Cine Top Menu
Illustration 96. Cine Sub Menu (page 1 of 2)
Illustration 97. Cine Sub Menu (page 2 of 2)
Basic Scan 46
Soft Menu
Auto Sequence Top Menu
Illustration 98. Auto Sequence Sub Menu (page 1 of 1)
Body Pattern
Illustration 99. Body Pattern Sub Menu
Comment
Illustration 100. Comment Library Sub Menu
Basic Scan 47
Soft Menu
Measurement (GYN calculation menu)
Illustration 101. Typical Measurement Sub Menu
Image Recall
Illustration 102. Image Recall Sub Menu
NOTE: The number of images that can be saved for recall will depend on the LOGIQ 400 model and availability of the extended memory option.
Basic Scan 48
Soft Menu
Advanced Cardiac Measurement Option
Illustration 103. Advanced Cardiac Measurement Option Sub Menu (page 1 of 4)
Basic Scan 49
Soft Menu
Basic Scan 50
Annotating an Image
Introduction
The annotation keyboard is always active. Upon starting a new patient or power up, the underscore cursor appears in the modes home position. Comments may be typed in at the non-blinking cursor.
Underscore Cursor or Block
Illustration 107. Annotation Cursor in Home Position
Annotations are input in type-over, not insert, mode. Be careful not to write over text when editing.
Basic Scan 51
Annotating an Image
All annotations are permanently retained with the image. However, annotations are erased at power down or when Clear or New Patient are pressed. In addition, the displays home position can be changed (preferred annotation area) for each display so that all subsequent annotations begin in the same spot. Cursor Home: Established in Set Up/Preset Program page 1, the cursor returns to the upper left part of the screen or the user specified position. A new cursor home position is established by placing the cursor in the desired position and pressing Ctrl and M. The new cursor position is placed in the Preset Program values. Pressing the Comment key assigns the trackball function to controlling the cursor. To display the annotation library automatically when the Comment key is pressed, select the preset CRT Auto Display Comment, which is found on Set Up/Preset Program page one, to ON. If this preset is set to OFF, press the Top Menu Select key to display the annotation library. To end the Comment/Library annotation function, press Clear. Comments will be erased. Comment Clear Key Function is a parameter found in the Set Up/Preset Program page 1. This parameter can be set to erase all comments on the screen or just the comment line the cursor is on. With the line selection, the second time Clear is pressed, all comments will be erased. Measurement Clear Operation is a parameter found in the Set Up/Preset Program page 3. This parameter can be set to have only measurements erased with the Clear key or measurements and comments.
Basic Scan 52
Annotating an Image
The Trackball and Keyboard Arrow keys are used to move the cursor to the desired position on the image. When the blinking cursor is in the desired position, comments may be typed in or a selection can be made from the annotation library.
The Set key is used to end the Comment/Library function.
The Tab key will move the cursor to the right every eight characters or to the next word depending on the preset parameter. See Basic Scan 53 for more details.
Shift and Tab moves the cursor in the same manner but to the left.
Annotation Library
To reduce the amount of time spent annotating an image, store often-used annotations in the Annotation (Comment) Library. These scripts can be up to 20 characters in length. As many as 24 scripts can be saved for each user application preset within each exam category. Library scripts for each preset are entered in the Preset/ Set Up menu. See Customizing Your System for details.
Basic Scan 53
Annotating an Image
Entering/Editing the Library
Access the Annotation Library by selecting Set Up/Preset Program. Pages 7 and 8 of the Preset Program menus will be the 24 annotation library selections. Use the Trackball to move the arrow cursor to the desired Annotation Library location number.
NOTE: Remember the first eight selections will appear on sub menu page 1. Annotation Library 9 to 16 will be on sub menu page 2. Annotation Library 17 to 24 will be on sub menu page 3.
Press Set. The 20 character space for that library location will be in reverse video. Add or edit the desired script. Select the next library location and press Set. Continue until all additions or edits are complete. To save all entries and edits, Trackball to the SAVE selection and press Set. The system prompt will read overwrite existing data? Y or N. Press Y to rewrite and save data. Press N to program a new annotation library. To avoid saving unwanted changes (all current changes), select RESET and press Set.
Basic Scan 54
Annotating an Image
Displaying annotation scripts
To review the Comment Library scripts: Press Comment. The Library menu for the designated exam category appears. Use the Sub Menu Select arrow keys to cycle through the three pages of scripts available.
Illustration 108. Comment Library Sub Menu Display
The Library Sub Menu display shows the first 14 characters of each script.
Hints
Print a hard copy of these codes from the Set Up/Preset Program Menus if there are several operators in the department. There is a space following all programmed annotations. Example: PANCREAS_ Type in the eight most used scripts first, so that they appear on the first Sub Menu page.
Basic Scan 55
Annotating an Image
Adding Comments to an Image

To annotate an image:
Type comments where the cursor is currently located (the displays home position) or use the Trackball/Arrow keys to place the annotation cursor in the desired location before typing. Press Return to move to the next line.
NOTE: Annotations wrap to the next line when they are within one character of the right margin.
The word wrap starts one line below the start of that annotation. Annotations appear on all prints, photos, and VCR recordings.
WORD WRAP
WORD WRAP
Before
After
Illustration 109. Next Line Word Wrap
If the cursor appears at the right edge of the lowest line, or a word cannot be completed in the lower right corner, word wrap cannot be executed. To annotate an image using the Library:
S S S S S
Basic Scan 56
Press Comment. If the comment sub menu does not appear on the screen, press the Top Menu Select key. Move the annotation cursor to the desired start position using the Trackball/Arrow keys. Use the Sub Menu Select arrow keys, as necessary, to display the desired page and script. Press the Sub Menu Select up or down arrow keys to write the library script starting at the position of the cursor. The same word wrap principles apply for library scripts as typed comments.
Annotating an Image
Special Annotation Keys

Some special annotation symbols can be used by activating the Blue Shift or Red Shift keys. Red Shift does not function while Blue Shift is active. The Blue Shift and Red Shift keys act as a lock function (similar to the Caps Lock key). Activating Blue Shift will cause the arrow, female and male symbols to be printed on the screen during the comment function when the keys shown in Illustration 110 are pressed.
Illustration 110. Blue Shift Keys
The Red Shift key enables the special symbols shown in red on the keyboard.
S S S
The red symbols shown in the lower right portion of a key will print when the Red Shift is active. The red symbols shown in the upper half of a key will print if the normal shift key is held down while the Red Shift is active. Red symbols can be used in any language, but can only be used with the proper designated letters.
Illustration 111. Red Shift Keys
Basic Scan 57
Annotating an Image
Editing Annotations
On screen annotations can be revised. Revision can be accomplished by adding or deleting text, or completely removing all annotations by pressing Clear.
Editing while annotating
Backspace over any error(s) made. Blank spaces take the place of the letter(s) that was there. Continue typing the annotation after backspacing over all incorrect letters.
NOTE: Text does not adjust automatically.

To delete previous character(s):
S S S S S
Press Backspace as many times as necessary to make the deletion. Retype the annotation from the point where backspacing was stopped. Position the cursor and type over existing text.
To move through the text eight characters at a time: Press Tab to move to the right (Preset Keyboard Tab = Normal). Press Shift and Tab to move to the left.
To move through the text a word at a time:
.
Basic Scan 58
S S
Press Tab to move to the right (Preset Keyboard Tab = Word) Press Shift and Tab to move to the left.
NOTE: The Tab selection is found on page one of the Set Up/System Parameter menus.
Annotating an Image
Body Patterns
An additional way to annotate the image display is with body patterns. Body patterns are a simple graphic of a portion of the anatomy that is frequently scanned. This body pattern is generally displayed in the lower left corner of the screen. Its placement can vary with the format of the display. Along with the body part graphic is a marker that illustrates the probe position. This marker can be placed with the Trackball and rotated with the Zoom Size/Rotation control. The body pattern and probe marker can serve as a reference for patient and probe positioning when images are archived.
Probe Orientation Marker
Illustration 112. Body Pattern with Probe Marker
Names of available body patterns can be displayed in the Soft Menu by pressing the Body Pattern key. Body Pattern packages are displayed according to exam category and preset. The eight body pattern packages may be customized to accommodate user preference. The 16 individual body patterns in the eight packages can be changed.
Basic Scan 59
Annotating an Image
Body Patterns (contd)

Use the sub menu arrow keys to select the desired pattern to be displayed. The Set Up/System Parameters menu page 4 allows for the choice of displaying the pattern only during freeze or at all times. Each Body Pattern Package (18) can be customized and the package for each preset selected in the Set Up/System Parameters menus. The Body Pattern Package (18) is selected from the Set Up/Preset Program page 1. Illustration 113 shows the body patterns available to be preset and the order in which they appear in the selection cycle.
Supine
Right Oblique
Left Oblique
Left Decubitus
Neck
Right Oblique Neck
Left Oblique Neck
Mammo
Prone
Right Decubitus
Pregnancy
Right Breech
Left Breech
Vertex Brow Up
Vertex Brow Down
Illustration 113. Body Patterns
Basic Scan 60
Annotating an Image
Antiverted Uterus
Retroflex Uterus
Transverse Uterus
Head
Left Head
Right Head
Back Head
Liver
PLAX
PSAXMitral Valve
PSAXLeft Ventricle
PSAXAortic Valve
Apical 4 Chamber
Apical 2 Chamber
Aortic Arch
Subcostal 4 Chamber
Right Arm
Poster Leg
Anter Leg
Left Arm
Prostate Sagittal Medial
Prostate Sagittal Lateral
Prostate Transverse
Prostate Transverse
Left Vertex
Right Vertex
Breech Brow Up
Breech Brow Down
Breast Left
Breast Right
Illustration 113. Body Patterns (contd)
Basic Scan 61
Annotating an Image
Duodenum
Stomach
Lung
Intestine
Ovary
Hand Back
Hand Palm
Dog Abdomen
Dog Right
Dog Left
Cat Abdomen
Cat Right
Cat Left
Cattle Uterus
Cattle Left
Cattle Right
Horse Uterus
Horse Left
Horse Right
Horse Front
Horse Rear
Blank
Illustration 113. Body Patterns (contd)
NOTE: Refer to Customize 89 for details on programming the contents of each body pattern package. Refer to Customize 105 for details on selecting the body pattern package to be used.
Basic Scan 62
Zooming an Image
Introduction
Zoom is used to magnify an area of interest. A specified zoom Region Of Interest (ROI) is magnified to approximately the size of a full-sized image. The system adjusts all imaging parameters accordingly. Decreasing the size of the ROI increases the magnification factor. Cine and VCR playback images must be frozen to be zoomed.
Basic Scan 63
Zooming an Image
Zooming an Image
To magnify a live image, press Zoom. The zoomed image may appear with a small reference image.
When zooming an image, specify which part of the image is to be zoomed by positioning the ROI using the Trackball. Size the Region Of Interest (ROI) using the Zoom Size control.
NOTE: The zoomed image can be panned around the B-Mode image by moving the Trackball. Measurements can be performed on zoomed images.
Changing the depth does not affect the zoomed image, unless the zoomed area is no longer contained within the new depth. TGC pots within the zoom ROI are active. Gain is decreased by sliding the pot to the left. Gain is increased by sliding the pot to the right. When zoom is exited, the 8 slide pots are reproportioned to the current depth scale.
Basic Scan 64
Zooming an Image
Zoom Methods
The LOGIQ 400 offers two types of zoom capabilities, Acoustic (real-time) Zoom and Display (freeze) Zoom.
Acoustic Zoom
Acoustic Zoom is accomplished while scanning live (real-time). While scanning, press the Zoom key to activate the zoom function.
Rotate the Zoom Size control to the desired magnification. The magnification choices available are: 1.2, 1.5 (default), 2.0, 2.5, 3.0 and 4.0 The default value can be set in Set Up/Custom Display, page 1 Zoom Factor. Use the Trackball to position the zoom region of interest.
Press Clear or Zoom to cancel the zoom function.
Basic Scan 65
Zooming an Image
Display Zoom
Display (freeze) Zoom is accomplished after the image is frozen. This applies to the current image or a Cine image. The magnification factor for Display Zoom is fixed at 2.0. Press Freeze to stop image acquisition.
" A
Press Zoom to activate the zoom function.
Use the Trackball to pan around the image area.
Press Clear or Zoom to cancel the zoom function.
NOTE: If an acoustic zoom image is frozen, display zoom will not function.
Basic Scan 66
Zooming an Image
Zooming an M-Mode Image

If the Zoom key is pressed while in B/M-Mode, only the M-Mode image will be zoomed. Press Zoom to display a magnified M-Mode image and a M-Mode zoom marker in the B-Mode image.
Adjust the Zoom Size control to the desired magnification factor. The six steps are the same as B-Mode.
Use the up/down movement of the Trackball to move the Zoom Markers vertically along the M-Mode cursor. Use the side to side movement of the Trackball to move the M cursor and Zoom cursor throughout the image. Press Clear or Zoom to cancel the zoom function.
NOTE: Display Zoom does not function on a frozen B and M-Mode Timeline Image.
Basic Scan 67
Zooming an Image
MultiImage Zoom
When using the Zoom function in a multiple image display format, a few basic rules apply.
S
Display Zoom (Freeze) can be performed on any or all of the multiple images.
Display Zoom Display Zoom
Illustration 114. Dual Format Display Zoom

S
A frozen acoustic zoom and active acoustic zoom can be displayed simultaneously.
Frozen Acoustic Zoom Acoustic Zoom
Illustration 115. Dual Format Display, Frozen and Active

S
Acoustic Zoom and Display Zoom cannot be mixed on the same display.
Display Zoom
Acoustic Zoom
Illustration 116. Dual Format Display/Acoustic Zoom Unavailable
Basic Scan 68
VCR Operations
Introduction
. . .
An optional video cassette recorder (VCR or VTR) is available for the LOGIQ 400. The optional VCR is S-VHS compatible for improved recording quality.
NOTE: The LOGIQ 400 Black & White system does NOT have VCR Heading Function or VCR Playback capabilities.
The LOGIQ 400 supports remote control of the Sony SVO-9500MD/MDP S-VHS Video Cassette Recorder only. Other VCRs can record and playback video with the LOGIQ 400, however remote control, advanced search functions and auto calibration will not be supported. Control of VCRs other than the Sony SVO-9500MD/MDP must be done by the VCR front panel.
NOTE: Refer to Appendix H and to the manual supplied with the VCR for more information. NOTE: Measurements from VCR Playback video requires the optional VCR measurement playback board for proper operation. This board is not available for the LOGIQ 400 Black & White system.
All explanations of VCR operations assumes that the Sony SVO-9500 is being used. It also assumes that the Heading VCR Playback option is installed.
Basic Scan 69
VCR Operations
CAUTION
The system can keep track of patient and tape information. The system can search a tape for patient images. However, the system CANNOT:
S S
Stop or indicate when it comes to the end of the last study on the tape. Prevent recording over previous studies if record is pressed while positioned in the middle of a study.
Without the Heading VCR Playback option:

S S S
The hard drive does not store patient or tape id information. Auto calibration for playback measurements is not available. Image, Patient and Tape Search functions are not available.
Basic Scan 70
Freezing an Image
Introduction
Freezing a real-time image stops all acquisition of information into system memory. This allows for measurements, annotations, printing or storage into temporary image memory. VCR playback images can also be frozen for similar reasons.
Post processing of the image

The following post processing image parameters can be changed to affect the appearance of a frozen image:
S S S S S S
Display Zoom (x2 only) Reject Color (B Color or CFM Color Maps) Gray Scale Map Selection Image Rotation Color Tag
Basic Scan 71
Freezing an Image
Freezing an Image (Freeze Key)
. .
Foot Switch
To freeze an image:
Press Freeze.
NOTE: If both B- and M-Modes are active, the B-Mode and timeline trace stops immediately. Use the Cine Scroll Control to start CINE review.
To reactivate the image:
Press Freeze again. Deactivating Freeze restarts the B-Mode and timeline after a black and white bar indicating discontinuity is inserted in the timeline (M-Mode Display).
NOTE: Deactivating Freeze erases all measurements and calculations from the display (but not from the report page). Selecting a new probe unfreezes the image.
Freezing an Image (Foot Switch option)

Toggle Freeze on and off by pressing the foot switch.
Basic Scan 72
Using Cine
Introduction
Cine is useful for focusing on images during a specific part of the heart cycle or to find an image before the patient moved or breathed. Cine images are constantly being stored by the system. The standard 8 megabytes of memory stores the most recent data available for playback or manual review via Cine. The amount of time represented depends on the systems frame rate, scan mode, image size and other parameters. Timeline data is continually stored at four times the display width of timeline data (and updates the corresponding B-Mode images). View Cine as a continuous loop via Cine Loop or manually review Cine images frame by frame via the Cine Scroll Control. Data in Cine is available until new data is acquired. Cine is stored in the systems memory and can be transferred to image memory, video page printer, multi-image camera or optional optical disk (MOD).
.
t
An optional 40 megabyte frame memory board is available to increase Cine storage capabilities from the standard 8 megabytes.
NOTE: Standard cine memory for the LOGIQ 400 color system is 32 frames. For the Black & White system it is 8 frames. The 160 frame extended cine option is available for the LOGIQ 400 color system but NOT for the Black & White system.
Basic Scan 73
Using Cine
Cine memory
Cine memory is erased when changing the following:
S S S S S S S
Probe Scan Mode Depth Display format (zoom, dual, rotate) Timeline Sweep Speed (D/M-Modes) Changing the PWD Velocity Scale (spectrum only) Changing the Color Flow Velocity Scale
Cine functionality
Post Processing functions can be performed while in Cine such as:
S S S S S S S S S S
Measurements and calculations Color Baseline shift B Color Color Flow Velocity Tag Color Flow Display Threshold CFM Spectrum Invert Zoom Rejection Gray Scale Maps Edit annotations
Basic Scan 74
Using Cine
Accessing Cine
To access and manually review Cine: 1. Press Freeze.
NOTE: One click of the Cine Scroll knob erases displayed measurements.
2. Rotate the B/M Gain/Cine Scroll knob to activate Cine. 3. Rotate the Cine Scroll dial left (backward) and right (forward) to move through the images in Cine memory. 4. The current frame on the Cine gauge moves and the Cine frame number is displayed on the lower left side of the screen, above the depth.
Cine Gauge
.
t
Current Frame Illustration 117. Cine Gauge Display
NOTE: Cine frame number 0 is the most current image. The higher the Cine frame number, the older the image. Depth, dynamic range, and gain parameters are valid for Cine frame number zero only.
Basic Scan 75
Using Cine
Using Cine Loop

Specify which sections of Cine memory to playback by creating a Cine Loop. To create a Cine Loop: 1. Press Freeze. 2. Rotate the Cine Scroll dial to the desired starting position in Cine memory. Display the Cine Sub Menu by pressing the Top Menu Select key twice and selecting Cine with the Sub Menu Select right or left arrow keys. Display the Cine sub menu by pressing the Sub Menu Select up or down arrow keys.
Illustration 118. Cine Sub Menu
3. Select START FRAME on the Cine Sub Menu.
Illustration 119. Cine Gauge Frame Start
4. Rotate the Cine Scroll dial to the desired ending position in Cine memory. 5. Select END FRAME on the Cine Sub Menu.
Basic Scan 76
Using Cine
Using Cine Loop (contd)
Illustration 120. Cine Gauge Frame End
6. Select REVIEW LOOP on the Cine Sub Menu. Cine Review Loop playback begins right away at the selected speed.
Illustration 121. Cine Loop Operation
NOTE: Cine Loop is not available during Timeline Review.

To deactivate Cine Loop:
S S
Select REVIEW LOOP on the Cine Sub Menu or turn the Cine Scroll knob. This returns to manual Cine review.
To reactivate Cine Loop: Select REVIEW LOOP on the Cine Sub Menu.
Basic Scan 77
Using Cine
Cine Loop Speed
To adjust the speed of viewing Cine Loop playback, access Loop Speed from the Cine Sub Menu page one. Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys, if necessary to display page one and highlight Cine Loop.
NOTE: Cine cannot be viewed faster than real-time.

To increase playback speed, press the Sub Menu Select up arrow key to increase playback speed. Press the Sub Menu Select down arrow key to decrease playback speed.
Illustration 122. Cine Sub Menu Page 1
Side Change
This menu selection is used with B/M (D)-Mode imaging. With Side Change selected, press the Sub Menu Select up or down arrow keys to toggle between B image Cine scroll and Timeline (M/D) Cine scroll.
Cine Gauge
Used to toggle the Cine gauge graphic display on or off.
Basic Scan 78
Using Cine
Cine Capture (optioncolor images only)

The optional Cine Capture is a post processing version of the optional CFM Capture selection in the CFM/PDI sub menu page 2 of 2. Selecting Cine Capture will search through all images between the start frame and end frame and display each peak or the highest velocity. Adjust the start frame and end frame points to limit the image frames used in the process.
Illustration 123. Cine Sub Menu Page 2
Capture Frame (optioncolor images only)

The optional Capture Frame can be used to eliminate specific image frames from the Cine Capture process. Use the Cine Scroll knob to display an image frame to be eliminated, and select Capture Frame. A small mark will be displayed on the Cine gauge. Do this for all images that are not to be included in the Cine Capture process. When all frames to be eliminated are marked, select Cine Capture to display the peak velocity detected color image.
Exiting Cine
To exit Cine, press Freeze.
Basic Scan 79
Using Cine
Helpful Hints Hints

The following hints can help when freezing an image:
S
Color, multi-format or M/D images take up more memory than normal B-Mode. Therefore, less frames of information are available for Cine storage.
ECG/Cine Gauge/Image Tracking

When an ECG waveform is displayed with the cine gauge, an arrow pointer appears above the ECG waveform. As the cine gauge marker is moved with the Cine Scroll control, the arrow above the ECG waveform moves to indicate where on the ECG cycle the displayed image was taken.
Basic Scan 80
Archiving Images
Introduction
The LOGIQ 400 can save scan images to a variety of optional devices. Available archiving options are:
S S S S S
Black/white video page printer Color video page printer Video cassette recorder (VCR or VTR) Optical disk Laser camera Only approved model can be mounted on the console. Not mounted on the console.
How images are recorded depends on the desired destination.

Device VCR Color Video Printer Video Graphic Printer Manufacturer SONY SONY SONY Model SVO-9500MD/MDP UP-1850MD/EPM UP-890MD/CE
Table 14. Suggested Optional Recording Devices
Basic Scan 81
Archiving Images
Optional Peripherals
Optional peripherals enhance the recording capabilities of the LOGIQ 400.
Printing an Image
B/W Video Page Printer
Remote control of the B/W printer is limited to the print function only. Adjustments to print quality are done on the page printer. No status or error messages are available to be displayed on the LOGIQ 400. There is a six second delay built in to the Record key recognition. This eliminates improper operation if the Record key is pressed more than once in rapid succession. To print an image: Press Freeze to stop image acquisition.
"A
. .
Basic Scan 82
NOTE: Remember that Cine Scroll may be used to look at previous image frames to obtain the best image.
Press Record 1 to activate the print function on the standard B/W Video Page Printer.
NOTE: The Record 1 and Record 2 keys can be preset to activate almost any peripheral device. This is done by assigning the key control to the output port to which the peripheral is attached. See Customizing Your System, System Parameters.
For details on the page printer operation, consult the Sony Operator Manual provided with the printer.
Archiving Images
Color Video Page Printer
The color video page printer allows for recording 1 or 4 images on a single sheet of paper in color or Black/White. When the LOGIQ 400 is powered on, the Preset/Set Up selections set the memory mode (1 or 4 images) and the input signal select (RGB, Video, S-Video) on the color printer. All other functions need to be selected at the printer control panels. The Record 1 or Record 2 keys can be programmed in the Preset/Set Up function to activate the print function on the Sony color page printer. One image format: After the Record key is pressed, the image is first stored in printer memory and then printed. Four Image Format: The first, second and third time the Record key is pressed, the image is stored in printer memory. The fourth time the Record key is pressed, the image is stored in printer memory and all four are printed on one sheet.
Basic Scan 83
Archiving Images
Color Video Page Printer (contd)
The color video page printer provides some feedback if there is an error in the print process. The following error messages could be displayed due to color printer problems:
S S S S S
Paper is jamming. Check paper. Check ribbon cassette setting. Check paper cassette setting. No paper. Set paper. Place paper print side up.
For details on the page printer operation, consult the Sony Operator Manual provided with the printer.
Video Cassette Recorder (VCR)

Consult the VCR instructions previously outlined in this section and the VCR operator manual. The Record keys and foot switch can be programmed in the Preset/Set Up menu to activate the Record/Pause function for the VCR.
Laser Camera
The LOGIQ 400 can print images to a Laser Camera for archival. Contact the local Service Representative for details about hook-up and operation.
Basic Scan 84
Archiving Images
Image Memory
The LOGIQ memory.
t 400 has storage space for 8 images in system
This storage is temporary. The images are erased when the New Patient key is pressed or power is turned off. To save images in system memory: Press the Freeze key to stop image acquisition.
"A
Use the Cine Scroll control, if necessary, to display the best image.
Press the Image Memory key. The image is saved to system memory and the number of images currently stored is displayed at the bottom of the screen. If the system memory is full and the Image Memory key is pressed, the system beeps. Pressing Image Memory again deletes the oldest image in system memory and saves the current displayed image. The system gives a Memory Full warning beep each time an image is about to be stored in a full memory.
.
t
NOTE: The LOGIQ 400 Black & White system can only store one (1) B-Mode image in memory. The memory extension option is NOT available for the Black & White System. The Black & White system cannot store M-Mode or Dual B-Mode images.
Basic Scan 85
Archiving Images
Storage Space
Without the optional Cine Memory extension (color system only, not Black & White), the following number of images or proper combination of formats can be saved in memory:
S S S
Single Format Dual Format Timeline Format
8 images 4 images 4 (NTSC) or 3 (PAL)
With the optional Cine Memory extension (color system only, not Black & White), the following number of images or proper combinations of formats can be saved in memory:
S S S
Single Format Dual Format Timeline Format
8 images 8 images 4 (NTSC) or 3 (PAL)
Image Recall
Images stored in system memory can be recalled for review or archival. To recall images stored in system memory:
S
Press the Image Recall key. The last image to be placed into Image Memory is displayed. To display the image memory sub menu, press the Top Menu Select key.
S S
Basic Scan 86
Archiving Images
Image Recall
The Soft Menu contains the display mode and time the images were stored. Use the appropriate Sub Menu Select arrow keys to select the desired image to recall. After the recalled image is displayed, no image post processing can be performed. Only Comment, Measurement, Body Pattern, Clear, Ext Video and Mic functions are available. Press Freeze to continue scanning or press Image Recall to return to the previous system status before Image Recall was initially pressed.
Helpful hints Hints

An exam category dependent preset parameter on the Set Up/Preset Program menu page 1 can be set to automatically display the image recall menu when the Image Recall key is pressed. The parameter is called CRT Menu Auto Display at Image Recall . The following hints can help when archiving images:
S S S S S
Images can be temporarily stored in system memory and recalled for archiving. Images stored in system memory will be lost if the New Patient key is pressed or power is turned off. Images are stored in system memory on a first in, first out basis (maximum 8 images). Retain any peripheral operator manuals for future reference. Use the highest quality videotape possible and record in the slowest speed possible.
Basic Scan 87
Archiving Images
MOD Image Archive (option)

Overview
Image Archive is an option offered for the LOGIQ 400 that gives the user the ability to store and recall scan images using the latest technology, a 3.5 inch Magnetic Optical Disk. This option is NOT available for the LOGIQ 400 Black & White system. The Magnetic Optical Disk (MOD) allows for much faster and greater storage capacity than a Floppy Disk Drive (FDD). A DEFF formatted MOD holds 128 or 230 Megabytes of information (138 images) compared to 1.4 Megabytes (1 image) that may be stored on a high density floppy disk. Along with the increased speed and storage capacity, the user can perform measurements and calculations on images recalled from a MOD. Images recorded as hard copy (film) do not allow for additional measurements at a later date. Images recalled from a MOD have much better resolution than VCR playback images, providing better detail for additional measurements. In addition to the image archive function, the LOGIQ 400 MOD allows for a System Backup disk to be made in the unlikely event of a hard disk failure. System software updates and service diagnostics may also be accomplished much faster.
Archive Functions
The Image Archive option allows the user to perform the following functions:
S S S S S S S
Store Image to MOD Recall Image from MOD Patient File search of MOD MOD Media file search Delete a file from MOD Format the MOD disk Eject the MOD disk from the drive
Basic Scan 88
Archiving Images
Related Preset Parameters
Two selections must be made in the Set Up/Preset Program Sub Menu page 2 that affect image archiving. Image Archive Compression:
S S
No is no DEFF format image compression. Yes is for DEFF format image compression. Storage time for a compressed image is more than double.
NOTE: If image compression is used, images saved by the LOGIQ 400 cannot be read on other TIFF Readers, DEFF devices or the LOGIQ 700. However, they can be read on the LOGIQ 500.
B/W Image & Color Graphics:
S S
B/W is for graphics to be stored as black and white (less storage space required). Color is for graphics to be stored the same color as they are displayed (more storage space required).
System ID Entry/Display
The LOGIQ 400 system ID number is assigned at the factory. A System ID should be unique for a system. A system ID number can be assigned in the range of 00000 to 16383. This number is used by the system when initializing a video tape or MOD (image archive option) for image storage. If there is more than one system at a facility, the ID numbers should be set the same. A scanner will not write to a tape or MOD if the media was initialized on a different scanner (different ID number). To display or enter a System ID number:
S S
Select the Set Up Top Menu. Select Utility from the Set Up Sub Menu.
continued on next page
Basic Scan 89
Archiving Images
System ID Entry/Display (contd)
Illustration 124. Utility Menu
S S S
Enter number 10 (System ID Entry/Display) and press Return. Enter number 1 (ID Entry) or 2 (ID Display) and press Return. Enter an ID number in the range of 0000016383 and press Return. If the ID was displayed, make a mental note or record the number for future reference. Press Ctrl, R simultaneously to exit the Utility menu and return to the previous scan mode.
.
Basic Scan 90
NOTE: Images which are not stored on the GE LOGIQ series systems will not be listed by the patient search function or displayed on a LOGIQ series machine. If there is more than one LOGIQ 400 or LOGIQ 500 in a facility or group of hospitals, each system should have its own unique System ID number. However, the ID numbers can be changed to be the same in order to share image archive disks between systems.
Archiving Images
Media Format (DEFF)
The Archive function is located on the Top Menu display. Press the Top Menu Select key to display the Top Menu. Press the Sub Menu Select up/down arrow keys to display the Archive sub menu. The Archive sub menu is displayed in Illustration 125.
Illustration 125. Archive Sub Menu
Press the Sub Menu Select left/right arrow keys to select and highlight DEFF Format in the sub menu. The following messages are displayed during the disk initialization and formatting process: Do you continue ? (Y/N) Insert the disk and press Y to continue or N to quit. If Y is pressed, Initializing now appears. The disk format function is in progress. The MO (disk) ID and System ID will be written on the disk media. One system can register a maximum of 10,000 disks. If the number of registered disks is greater than 10,000, previously registered disk information will be overwritten in order to register the new disk information.
.
t
To avoid confusion, it is essential that care is taken not to attempt image storage to a previous (old) disk whos MO ID and System ID is not available (IDs have been deleted from the media file).
NOTE: The media list on the Media Search Menu contains both previous (old) and current (new) disk information.
Basic Scan 91
Archiving Images
Disk Verification
In order to protect images from being deleted by other LOGIQ 400 systems, the disk is always verified by the system before it can be used. If the MO disk is not inserted into the drive or an unformatted MO disk is inserted, the following message is displayed: MEDIA IS EITHER UNMOUNTED OR UNFORMATTED When a disk is inserted into a drive, the system first reads the MO (disk ID) and System ID from the media. These two IDs are displayed at the bottom of the monitor while the system verifies that they are registered in the verification list on the system hard drive. There are two types of media that would be recognized by the system: OWNSYSTEM MEDIA The disk is registered (formatted) in this system. Images may be stored, recalled or deleted. The disk is NOT registered in this system. Images may only be recalled. They may NOT be stored or deleted.
OTHERSYSTEM MEDIA
NOTE: If an Other-System Media disk is inserted into the drive and the user attempts to store an image, the following error message is displayed: Mismatched System ID. Insert correct media..
Basic Scan 92
Archiving Images
Storing Images
The Archive function is located on the Top Menu display. Press the Top Menu Select key to display the Top Menu. Press the Sub Menu Select up/down arrow keys to display the Archive sub menu. The Archive sub menu is displayed as shown in Illustration 125 on Basic Scan 91. Press the Sub Menu Select left/right arrow keys to select and highlight Store Image. The following message is displayed during the storage process: In Progress. Please wait.
NOTE: Storing compressed images takes about 30 seconds for B/W and 70 seconds for Color. Uncompressed images take more disk space but only about 30 seconds for color image storage.
Basic Scan 93
Archiving Images
Storing Images (contd)
The following error messages are displayed if the storage function cannot be accomplished:
S
Mismatched System ID. Insert correct media. The disk is not a registered disk. Images can not be stored. The MO is full, change MO. There is not enough space to store additional images on the disk. Use a different disk. Media is locked. The disk has been write protected. Disable the write protection or use another disk. Media is either unmounted or unformatted. The disk is either not formatted or inserted in the drive. Too much data. Store failed. The hard drive capacity of the hard drive to store additional MOD media search data is full. Please backup MOD media search data from the hard drive to a separate MOD before attempting image storage.
S S
Optional Storage method In addition to the Store Image function in the Soft Menu, the Record 1 & 2 keys can be programmed in the Set Up/System Parameter Sub Menu, page 5. By selecting Image Archive for the Record1 B&W/Color or Record2 B&W/Color selection, these keys automatically store the B/W or Color image to MOD when pressed.
Basic Scan 94
Archiving Images
Patient Search
The Archive function is located on the Top Menu display. Press the Top Menu Select key to display the Top Menu. Press the Sub Menu Select up/down arrow keys to display the Archive sub menu. The Archive sub menu is displayed in Illustration 125 on Basic Scan 91. Press the Sub Menu Select left/right arrow keys to select and highlight Patient Search. After a few moments of disk verification, the Image Archive Patient Search Menu is displayed on the monitor as shown in Illustration 126 and Recall : Input file number is displayed in the command region.
Illustration 126. Patient Search Menu
Basic Scan 95
Archiving Images
Search Criteria A specific MOD can be searched for patient files that meet certain criteria. The hard disk data base and backup MODs can also be searched for a list of MODs and files that meet the criteria listed below. Patient Name Patient ID Date Maximum 29 characters Maximum 14 characters Format specified in System Parameters page 1.
Criteria Input Region Both the Patient Search Menu and Media Search Menu have a criteria input region as shown in Illustration 127.
PT NAME : PT ID : DATE (MM / DD / YY) :
Illustration 127. Criteria Input Region
The system defaults to the PT NAME region and that region is highlighted. Use the keyboard to type in the desired name. When the name input is complete, press Return or use the Trackball to move to the PT ID region. Input the Patient ID using the keyboard. When the ID input is complete, press Return or use the Trackball to move to the Date region. Input the desired date. Press Return or use the Trackball to move the cursor out of the criteria input region. The search function starts immediately.
Basic Scan 96
Archiving Images
Criteria Input Region (contd)
Hints
Spaces can be used as a wild card in the date entry. For example: MM/ / / /YY MM/ /YY lists everything for a specific month. lists all in a specific year. lists all within a specific month of a specific year.
If nothing is entered in one or more of the search criteria, a list of files is displayed that match the remaining criteria entered. Searching the MOD The search function is initiated when the Trackball is used to move the highlighted cursor out of the criteria area or the Return key is pressed while in the Date entry area. In a few moments the first 15 files are displayed on the monitor. If the search is not complete, the message: In Progress, Please wait appears at the bottom of the monitor. This message remains until the search process is totally complete.
Hints
In order to perform any other function, the user must wait until the search is complete or press Ctrl, C simultaneously to cancel the search function. If no search criteria was entered by the user, a complete file listing of the entire MOD is executed. Only 15 files are displayed at one time on the monitor.
Basic Scan 97
Archiving Images
Patient Search Menu Commands The commands listed at the bottom of the Patient Search Menu can be used to manipulate the file information displayed. CTRL, N Displays the next page of files. If the last page is displayed and CTRL, N is pressed, the first page of the entire list is displayed. Displays the previous page of files. If the first page is displayed and CTRL, P is pressed, the last page of the entire list is displayed. Recalls an Image from MOD. Locks an image file. A locked file has an asterisk (*) after its file number and cannot be deleted while locked. Unlocks an image file. Erases an unlocked image file from the list. A file must be unlocked before being erased. The image is not deleted from the affected MO.
CTRL, P
CTRL, X CTRL, L
CTRL, U CTRL, D
NOTE: An image file will still be listed in the Media Search Menu even though the file has been deleted from the Patient Search Menu.
CTRL, C CTRL, Q CLEAR Cancels the search process. Changes the current mode to the search criteria input mode. Clears (delete) entered characters.
Basic Scan 98
Archiving Images
Image Recall
During the Image Recall process, from the Patient Search Menu, the message: In progress. Please wait. is displayed; changing modes and inputting scan parameters are not allowed. To quit the recall process, press the Freeze key. The system returns to the previous menu displayed.
Hints
Storage of a recalled image can be accomplished as previously described. A new image is stored on the MOD and the original recalled image remains on the MOD unchanged.
Basic Scan 99
Archiving Images
Media Search
The Image Archive option has the ability to store a file of all registered (OwnSystem) disks on the hard drive. This file consists of MO (disk) ID, Patient Name, Patient ID and Date information. The Media Search function can search this data base and indicate which Disk ID number contains information that meets the search criteria. The media search menu is shown in Illustration 128.
Illustration 128. Media Search Menu
Basic Scan 100
Archiving Images
Media Search Menu Commands The commands listed at the bottom of the Media Search Menu can be used to manipulate the file information displayed. CTRL, N CTRL, P CTRL, C CTRL, Q CTRL, B CLEAR Media Search Messages Messages displayed during the Media Search are similar to those displayed during Store Image, Image Recall and Patient Search. These messages are: In progress. Please Wait. Search failed. MEDIA IS EITHER UNMOUNTED OR UNFORMATTED The following message is displayed when the last page of the media list is displayed on the monitor: Displays the next page of files Displays the previous page of files Cancels the search process Changes the current mode to the search criteria input mode Executes search of media backup MODs Clears (delete) entered characters
.
t
There may be file in Backup Media fits this criteria The user should then search any Media backup disks for desired files.
NOTE: When both NTSC and PAL images are stored on the same MO (disk), the following message is displayed: Incompatible image are not listed up.
Basic Scan 101
Archiving Images
Hard Disk Capacity The capacity of the hard drive to store all media information is limited. When the hard disk has reached its capacity to store media information, the user is asked to make a Backup MOD. The following message is displayed: Too much data. Store failed. The user should perform the Backup function at this time. Media File Recall It is important to note that image files CANNOT be recalled from the media search menu. This function simply gives the user a list of all MO (disk) ID numbers, Patient Names, Patient IDs and Dates that meet the search criteria.
Basic Scan 102
Archiving Images
MO Eject
To eject a disk from the drive, the user must select MO Eject from the Archive sub menu. The Archive function is located on the Top Menu display. Press the Top Menu Select key to display the Top Menu. Press the Sub Menu Select up/down arrow keys to display the Archive sub menu. The Archive sub menu is displayed in Illustration 125 on Basic Scan 91. Press the Sub Menu Select left/right arrow keys to select and highlight MO Eject in the sub menu. The message:
Eject MO from the drive now. is displayed on the monitor. The inserted MO is then ejected from the drive automatically.
NOTE: After a MO is inserted into the drive and the search process is executed from the Patient Search Menu or the Media Search Menu, selecting MO EJECT from the soft menu is the only method to eject the MO. The MO cannot be ejected by the eject button on the front of the drive.
Basic Scan 103
Archiving Images
Basic Scan 104
B-Mode
Introduction Optimizing the Image
This section describes a typical B-Mode exam. It explains controls and Soft Menu selections that can be used to optimize the B-Mode image.
B-Mode 1
B-Mode
B-Mode 2
Introduction
Typical Exam
A typical examination using B-Mode might proceed as follows: 1. Record exam-related patient information. 2. Verify system setup (probes and presets). 3. Position the patient and the console for optimum operator and patient comfort. 4. Perform the scan:
S S
Locate anatomy. Perform a detailed examination of the anatomy/pathology. Optimize parameters for tissue texture and visible window. Add important data to the image such as annotations and biometry. Make measurements and calculations as necessary. Record results such as print hard copies, print summary reports, Cine review/optimize image capture, or dynamic recording (VCR). Collect all the data. Clean and store probes/accessories.
S S S
5. Complete the study:

S S
B-Mode 3
Introduction
B-Mode 4
Optimizing the Image

Control Layout
LOGIQ 400 controls are grouped together for optimum operator convenience. Mode and Display controls are on the lower right side, while Acoustic Output and TGC are on the lower left side.
Adjustments Available
Front Panel controls and Soft Menu selections can be used to optimize the B-Mode image. The following describes each control and selection available.
B-Mode Key Operation

Pressing the B-Mode key while in a combination of other modes will result in the following:
CURRENT MODE RESULTANT MODE
B/PD B/M B/CFM and PD B/CFM and M/CFM B/CFM M/CFM
B B B/CFM B/CFM B B/CFM
B-Mode 5
TGC
Description
TGC amplifies returning signals to correct for the attenuation caused by tissue at increasing depths. The individual eight slide pots correspond to the maximum display depths for each probe.
Accessing/Changing
TGC Slide Pot
To decrease TGC, move the TGC slide pot to the left. To increase TGC, move the TGC slide pot to the right.
Decrease
Increase
Benefits
TGC balances the image so that the density of echoes is the same throughout the image.
B-Mode 6

Values
When display depth is changed, TGC need not be adjusted.
TGC
Slide pot
TGC breakpoints are proportioned to the depth scale.
Half current depth
Current scan depth
Decrease 20 dB
Increase
Illustration 129. Time Gain Compensation
Affects on other controls

In zoom, only the pots that fall within the Zoom ROI are active. When exiting zoom, the slide pots are reproportioned to the selected depth scale.
B-Mode 7
Depth
Description
Depth controls the distance over which the B-Mode images anatomy. Display depth may be changed according to the anatomical size or to the region of interest. Minimum/ maximum values available depend on the probe. Select from 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, and 24 cm for the desired depth.
Accessing/Changing
Turn the rotary encoder to the next depth setting. Imaging and display parameters adjust automatically. To reduce depth (look at a shallower image), turn the Depth rotary encoder clockwise.
To increase depth (look at a deeper image), turn the Depth rotary encoder counterclockwise.
Benefits
Depth adjusts the field of view. Increase the field of view to look at larger or deeper structures; decrease the field of view to look at structures near the skin line.
B-Mode 8

Values
Depth increments vary by probe. Values may be preset for each probe. Depth displays on the monitor in centimeters.

After adjusting the depth, it may be necessary to adjust the TGC, focus, frame rate and edge enhance. Changing depth while scanning clears Cine memory, but not Timeline Replay. A bar is displayed in the timeline at which point it is not possible to scroll past this change.
Bioeffects Acoustic Output Hazard

Increasing the depth tends to decrease the MI and TI because the frame rate slows down.
Hints
Make sure enough space is left below the anatomy of interest to demonstrate shadowing or enhancement.
B-Mode 9
B/M Gain
Description
Gain increases or decreases the amount of echo information displayed in an image. It has the effect of brightening or darkening all displayed echoes at any depth.
Accessing/Changing
.
q
Turn the B/M Gain control to adjust gain. Gain values change depending on the probe; they are not associated with a particular position of the button.
NOTE: It is not possible to change the gain on a frozen image. Changing the gain while in another mode does not affect the B-Mode image gain.
To increase gain, turn the B/M Gain dial clockwise. To decrease gain, turn the B/M Gain dial counterclockwise. The Angle knob controls B-Mode gain in all modes except Doppler.
Benefits
Gain allows for the balance of echo contrast so that cystic structures appear echo-free and reflecting tissue fills in.
Values
Gain displays on the monitor in dB. Gain increments are available every 2 dB within the range of 0 to 98 dB, depending on the selected probe.
B-Mode 10

After adjusting acoustic output, there may be a need to adjust the gain. Generally speaking, if acoustic output increases, the gain may need to decrease; a decrease in acoustic output may require an increase in gain. Gain and TGC interact together. Gain changes overall echo amplification while TGC changes amplification at specific depths.
Bioeffects
Gain has no affect on Acoustic Output. However, with increased Gain, the output level can usually be reduced to produce equivalent image quality.
B-Mode 11
Scan Area Size

Description
Widen or narrow the size of the sector to maximize the images field of view for convex and sector probes. Adjusts color window for linear probes.
Accessing/Changing
To narrow the angle:
S S
Press Scan Area. Move the Trackball toward the left.
To widen the angle:
.
Benefits Values
S S
Press Scan Area (if not already activated). Move the Trackball toward the right.
NOTE: Pressing Scan Area toggles between size and steering control.
Increase the sector width to see a wide anatomical structure, decrease the sector width to have a faster frame rate.
Sector/Convex Probe: Range from 10 to full B width. Linear Probe: Range from 10mm to full B width.

Increasing sector size decreases the frame rate; decreasing sector size increases the frame rate.

As the sector width narrows, the TI tends to increase since the target is being hit more often and the MI may decrease since the peak power is reduced. Observe the output display for possible effects.
B-Mode 12
Scan Area Position

Description
The reduced sector angle can be steered to get more information without moving the probe. Colored markers around the image act as guides while steering the reduced sector angle.
Accessing/Changing
To assign trackball control to the scan area position mode and steer the angle:
S S S
Press Scan Area (adjust scan area size). Press Scan Area again. Move the Trackball to the right or left.
Benefits
Allows the movement of a reduced sector angle laterally. Beneficial in GYN.
Values
Continuous steer within the full maximum probe width.

In scan area position mode, press Scan Area to return trackball control to the scan area sizing mode.
B-Mode 13
Reverse
Description
Reverse controls the horizontal orientation of the image on the screen. It toggles the left/right orientations of the image display.
Accessing/Changing
Simply press the Reverse key to toggle image reverse on or off.
Benefits
The Reverse key allows for changing the orientation of the image display without physically rotating the probe 180.
Values
On or Off. The GE logo at the top of the sector wedge corresponds to the orientation mark on the probe body. Pressing the Reverse key flips the image left/right and switches the GE logo to correspond to the probe mark.
B-Mode 14
Display Format (Dual)

Description
Each scan mode or combinations of modes can be displayed in dual format (side by side images). The Left Image and Right Image keys allow for the dual format to be displayed.
Accessing/Changing
To initiate the dual format display, press the Left Image key. The current display mode will be reduced to the left half of the image area.
.
Benefits Values
Press the Right Image key to activate the same image format on the right half of the image area.
NOTE: When the Left Image key and Right Image key are pressed simultaneously, while in single B-Mode imaging, the dual live image mode is activated.
Allows for viewing two images side-by-side.
System parameter displays relocated for each format.

Other controls only affect the active image.
B-Mode 15
Focus Position
Description
While in B-Mode only, Focus Position can be adjusted using the Baseline Shift key.
Accessing/Changing
Access the Focus Position control while in B-Mode only. To move the focal zone(s) up, press the Focus (Baseline Shift) up arrow key. To move the focal zone(s) down, press the Focus (Baseline Shift) down arrow key.
Benefits
Easy front panel key access. Avoids using soft menu Focus Position selection.
Values
Relative to depth of the display (FOV). Focal point indicators vary with position change up (shallow) or down (deep). Focus Position is pre-processing function.
B-Mode 16

Changing the focus position affects frame rate. The deeper the focus, the slower the frame rate.

Moving the focal zone(s) may affect acoustic output requirements because of concentrating on a specific area of interest. Acoustic output may be decreased with the front panel control if the focal zone is properly placed. Observe the output display for possible effects.
B-Mode 17
Dynamic Range
Description
Dynamic range controls how echo intensities are converted to shades of gray, thereby creating a range of gray scale that can be adjusted.
Illustration 130. B-Mode Sub Menu (Dynamic Range)
Accessing/Changing
Access dynamic range from the B-Mode Sub Menu page one. Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display page one and highlight Dynamic Range. To increase the dynamic range, press the Sub Menu Select up arrow key. To decrease the dynamic range, press the Sub Menu Select down arrow key.
Benefits
Dynamic range is useful for optimizing tissue texture to differentiate between echo levels that are close together. Dynamic range should be adjusted so that the highest amplitude edges appear as white while lowest levels (such as blood) are just visible.
B-Mode 18

Values
The settings cycle in 6 dB steps from 30 dB to 78 dB. Use presets to set the output preferred to any scan mode and exam combination. Dynamic range levels are returned to the preset value when changing the following:
S S S
Application Exam category New patient
Refer to Customizing Your System for preset instructions. Dynamic range is a pre-processing function.

Dynamic range operates only in real-time, not in freeze, Cine, Timeline replay, or VCR playback.
B-Mode 19
Gray Scale Mapping

Description
Gray scale mapping determines how the echo intensity levels received are presented as shades of gray.
Illustration 131. B-Mode Sub Menu (Gray Map)
Accessing/Changing
Access gray scale mapping from the B-Mode Sub Menu page one. Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display page one and highlight Gray Map. To change gray scale mapping, press the up or down Sub Menu Select arrow keys to select the desired map. The selected value is displayed on the Sub Menu.
Benefits
Displays the received echo levels with different weights on specific levels of gray. For example, a certain gray map may enhance mid level echoes over a wider range of grays verses high or low level echoes. Allows for better differentiation between echo levels through gray levels displayed.
B-Mode 20

Values
There are sixteen selections of Gray Scale Mapping. Gray Map is a post-processing function.
B1 B2 B3 B4 B5
B6 B7 B8 B9 B10
INPUT LEVEL
B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16
INPUT LEVEL
INPUT LEVEL
Illustration 132. Gray Scale Map Graphs
B-Mode 21
Focus Number
Description
Focus number changes the number of focal zones so that the beam can be tightened or expanded for a specific area. A graphic caret corresponding to the focal zone position(s) appears on the right edge of the image.
Illustration 133. B-Mode Sub Menu (Focus Number)
Accessing/Changing
Access focus number through the B-Mode Sub Menu page one. Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display page one and highlight Focus Number. To change the focus number, press the up or down Sub Menu Select arrow keys to select the desired number. The selected value is displayed on the Sub Menu.
Benefits
Focus number optimizes the image by increasing the resolution for a specific area.
Values
Choose from 1, 2 or 3 focal zones. Focus Number is a pre-processing function.
B-Mode 22

Changing the focus number affects frame rate. The greater number of focus points, the slower the frame rate.

Adding focal zones tends to increase TI, although it may decrease MI. Observe the output display for possible effects.
B-Mode 23
Focus Position
Description
Focus Position changes the depth at which the selected number of focal zones are optimized. All graphic carets representing focal points will move with a change in focal position.
Illustration 134. B-Mode Sub Menu (Focus Positn)
Accessing/Changing
Access focus position from the B-Mode Sub Menu page one. Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display page one and highlight Focus Positn. Each press cycles to the next focus position setting. To move the focal zone shallower, press the Sub Menu Select up arrow key. To move the focal zone deeper, press the Sub Menu Select down arrow key.
Benefits
Focus position optimizes the image by centering the focal point(s) to the depth of the area of interest.
Values
Relative to depth of the display (FOV). Focal point indicators vary with position change up (shallow) or down (deep). Focus Position is a pre-processing function.
B-Mode 24

Changing the focus position affects frame rate. The deeper the focus, the slower the frame rate.

Moving the focal zone(s) may affect acoustic output requirements because of concentrating on a specific area of interest. Acoustic output may be decreased with the front panel control if the focal zone is properly placed. Observe the output display for possible effects.
B-Mode 25
Frame Averaging
Description
Averages previous frames of image data with the current frame. Frame averaging uses more data points to make up one image. This has the effect of presenting a smoother, softer image.
NOTE: Not available on Cine replay.
Illustration 135. B-Mode Sub Menu (Frame Average)
Accessing/Changing
Access frame average from the B-Mode Sub Menu page two. Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display page two and highlight Frame Average. Each press cycles to the next frame average setting. The selected value is displayed on the Sub Menu. To increase frame averaging, press the Sub Menu Select up arrow key. To decrease frame averaging, press the Sub Menu Select down arrow key.
Benefits
Helps to average out brief, sudden changes in echo intensity information. Could help to filter out low intensity noise.
B-Mode 26

Values
Frame average values are off, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6. Frame average values are returned to the preset value when changing the following:
S S S S
Probe Exam category New Patient Application type.
Frame Averaging is a pre-processing selection.
B-Mode 27
Penet. (Penetration)
Description
In B-Mode, penetration changes the receive filtering to allow more echoes to pass through.
Illustration 136. B-Mode Sub Menu (Penet.)
Accessing/Changing
Access penetration from the B-Mode Sub Menu page two. Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display page two and highlight Penet. Press the Sub Menu Select up or down arrow key to activate penetration. To deactivate, press the Sub Menu Select up or down arrow key again.
Benefits
Allows for an increase in echo intensity without changing gain, TGC or acoustic output.
Values
On or Off. Penetration is a pre-processing selection.

Acoustic output, gain and TGC may be able to be reduced due to increased penetration.
B-Mode 28
Image Softener
Description
B-Mode images may be adjusted for the amount of smoothing applied.
Illustration 137. B-Mode Sub Menu (Image Softner)
Accessing/Changing
Access Image Softener from the B-Mode Sub Menu page two. Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display page two and highlight Image Softner. To toggle the image softener on or off, press the Sub Menu Select up or down arrow key. Each press cycles the image softener on or off.
Benefits
Provides a smoother homogenous image display.
Values
On or Off. Image Softener is a pre-processing function.
B-Mode 29
Color
Description
Color allows for enabling B-Mode image colorization.
Illustration 138. B-Mode Sub Menu (Color)
Accessing/Changing
Access B-Mode color from the B-Mode Sub Menu page two. Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display page two and highlight Color. Press the Sub Menu Select up or down arrow key to activate B-Mode color. To deactivate B-Mode color, press the Sub Menu Select up or down arrow key again.
Benefits
Displaying the gray scale as shades of color may allow for improved differentiation between echo levels.
Values
On or Off. The B-Mode color presented is a selection in the Set Up/ Custom Display menu page 9. There are six color choices. B Color is a post-processing function.
B-Mode 30
Biopsy Lines
Description
This selection enables any electronic biopsy guideline available for the active probe.
Illustration 139. B-Mode Sub Menu (Biopsy Lines)
Accessing/Changing
Access biopsy lines from the B-Mode Sub Menu page two. Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display page two and highlight Biopsy Lines. Press the Sub Menu Select up or down arrow key to enable the guidelines. To disable the guidelines, press the Sub Menu Select up or down arrow key again.
DANGER
When the biopsy guidelines are displayed, the message: Confirm BX type of Bracket is displayed at the bottom of the screen with the angle selected in the Custom Display Menu page 1.
.
t
Ensure that the (M)BX type selected for each probe in each exam category for each preset is the same as the angle selected on the biopsy guide.
NOTE: See Customize 24 or Biopsy 7 for specifics on availability of biopsy guide angles.
B-Mode 31

Benefits
Electronic biopsy guide zone show the expected needle path during insertion.
DANGER
Failure to match the preset to the guide may cause the needle to track a path outside the displayed zone. It is extremely important that when using the adjustable angle biopsy guides, the preset displayed on the screen (which is selected on Custom Display page 1) matches the angle set on the guide.
Values
On or Off.
Press the Measurement key once to display the integrated biopsy depth cursor while the guidelines are present. Use the Trackball to position the depth marker.
B-Mode 32
Color Tag
Description
Color tag enables the colorization of a specific gray scale level range. This causes the specified gray levels to be displayed as a predetermined color in the B-Mode image.
Illustration 140. B-Mode Sub Menu (Color Tag)
Accessing/Changing
Access color tag from the B-Mode Sub Menu page three. Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display page three and highlight Color Tag. Press the Sub Menu Select up or down arrow key to enable the B-Mode color tagging. To disable the color tag function, press the Sub Menu Select up or down arrow key again.
Benefits
Allows for the quick recognition of specific gray levels by colorization.
Values
On or Off. The color and tagging range presented is a selection in the Set Up/Custom Display menu page 9. Color Tag is a post-processing function.
B-Mode 33
Tag Position
Description
Tag Position allows for the movement of the specified color tag range throughout the gray scale displayed.
Illustration 141. B-Mode Sub Menu (Tag Positn)
Accessing/Changing
Access tag position from the B-Mode Sub Menu page three. Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display page three and highlight Tag Positn. If the color tag selection is not enabled when Tag Positn is selected, Color Tag is automatically activated. Press the Sub Menu Select up arrow key to move the color tag up the gray scale range. To move the color tag down the gray scale range, press the Sub Menu Select down arrow key.
Benefits
Allows for setting the color tag to the desired level of gray scale colorization.
Values
Move the color tag up or down the gray scale. Color and size of the tag are determined in the Set Up/Custom Display menu page 8. Tag Position is a post-processing function.
B-Mode 34
Image Rotate
Description
Rotates the single real-time or zoomed B-Mode image in 90 increments.
NOTE: Linear probe images do not rotate.
Illustration 142. B-Mode Sub Menu (Image Rotatn)
Accessing/Changing
Access image rotation from the B-Mode Sub Menu page four. Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display page four and highlight Image Rotatn. The selected value is displayed on the Sub Menu. To rotate the image clockwise, press the Sub Menu Select up arrow key. To rotate the image counterclockwise, press the Sub Menu Select down arrow key.
Benefits
Orient image display for easy reference.
B-Mode 35

Values
The image rotates in 90_ increments in a clockwise and counterclockwise direction. Image Rotation is a post-processing function.
Affects on other controls CAUTION

When reading a rotated image, be careful to observe the probe orientation to avoid possible confusion over scan direction or right/left image reversal.
B-Mode 36
Rejectn (Rejection)
Description
Rejection allows for the elimination of low level echoes from the display. This is generally used to clear noise out of vessels or cysts.
Illustration 143. B-Mode Sub Menu (Rejectn)
Accessing/Changing
Access Rejection from the B-Mode Sub Menu page four. Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display page four and highlight Rejectn. The selected value is displayed on the Sub Menu. Press the Sub Menu Select up arrow key to increase the gray level rejection value displayed. To decrease the gray level rejection value displayed, press Sub Menu Select down arrow key.
Benefits
Allows for the elimination from the display image of low level echoes caused by noise.
B-Mode 37

Values
Off and 2 through 40 in increments of 2. Rejection is a post-processing function.

Rejection affects real-time imaging, frozen or Cine images.
B-Mode 38
B Edge Enhance
Description
B edge enhance brings out subtle tissue differences and boundaries by enhancing the gray scale differences corresponding to the edges of structures.
Illustration 144. B-Mode Sub Menu (Edge Enhance)
Accessing/Changing
Access B edge enhance from the B-Mode Sub Menu page four. Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display page four and highlight Edge Enhance. Each press cycles to the next edge enhance setting. The selected value is displayed on the Sub Menu. To increase edge enhancement, press the Sub Menu Select up arrow key. To decrease edge enhancement, press the Sub Menu Select down arrow key.
Benefits
Edge enhance modifies the B-Mode image by accentuating the interfaces between organs or vessels.
B-Mode 39

Values
The four selections are Off, Low, Mid and High. Edge enhance levels are returned to the preset value when changes are made to the following:
S S S
Refer to Customizing Your System for preset instructions. Edge Enhance is a pre-processing function.

Edge Enhance operates in real-time only, not in Freeze, Cine, or VCR playback.
B-Mode 40
Doppler
Introduction Activating Doppler Mode Doppler Optimization
This section describes the Doppler capabilities of the LOGIQ 400. It outlines a typical Doppler exam for vascular studies. The controls and Soft Menu selections used to optimize a Doppler study are explained.
Doppler 1
Doppler Mode
Doppler 2
Introduction
Typical Use
In Pulsed Wave Doppler (PW or PWD) Mode, energy is transmitted from the ultrasound probe into the patient, as in B-Mode. However, the received echoes are processed to extract the difference in frequency between the transmitted and received signals. Differences in frequencies can be caused by moving objects in the path of the ultrasound signal, such as red blood cells. The resultant signals are presented audibly through the system speakers and graphically on the system display. The X axis of the graph represents time while the Y axis represents the shift in frequency. The Y axis can also be calibrated to represent velocity in either a forward or reverse direction. PW Doppler is typically used for displaying the speed, direction, and spectral content of blood flow at selected anatomical sites. PW Doppler can be combined with B-Mode for rapidly selecting the anatomical site for PW Doppler examinations. This is described under B/M-Mode operation. The site where PW Doppler data is derived appears graphically on the B-Mode image (Sample Volume Gate). The site can be moved anywhere within the B-Mode image.
.
t
NOTE: Doppler Ultrasound in any form is NOT available on the LOGIQ 400 Black & White system.
Doppler 3
Introduction
PW Doppler Display
A typical Doppler display appears in the Reading the Display section of the Basic Scan chapter. Time zero (the start of the trace) appears on the left side of the graph. As time progresses, the trace moves to the right. The baseline of the graph (representing zero velocity, zero frequency shift or no detected flow) appears as a solid line running horizontally across the display. By convention, movement toward the probe is positive and movement away from the probe is negative. Positive frequencies or velocities appear above the baseline. Negative frequencies or velocities appear below the baseline. Typically, blood flow is not uniform but is composed of a mix of blood cells moving at different velocities and in different directions. Thus, the display is composed of a spectrum as gray scale values. Strong signals are displayed as bright shades of gray while weak signals are displayed as darker shades. Information about the Doppler display is automatically written on the screen and updated when scanning parameters are changed. The following can be used:
S S S
Pulsed Wave (PW) Doppler Continuous Wave (CW) Doppler CW Non-Imaging Doppler
This chapter includes:

S S S
A discussion of PW Doppler. Accessing Pulsed and Continuous Wave Doppler Optimizing the Doppler spectrum.
Doppler 4
Introduction
Pulsed Wave Doppler

Definition
Allows examination of blood flow data selectively from a small region called the sample volume. Choose a particular location for the sample volume; however, the range of velocities accurately evaluated is limited due to aliasing that occurs at very high velocities.
Frequencies Used
For reference, Doppler frequencies (with penetration On or Off) are shown according to probe in the table below. PROBE B510 C364/CBF C386 C551/CAE C721 E721/MTZ I739 546L 739L LA39 L764/LH S317 S220/W S222 S611 T739 FREQUENCY (MHz) ON 4.0 2.5 2.5 4.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 4.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 2.5 2.2 2.0 4.0 5.0
Table 15. Doppler/CFM Frequency
OFF 5.0 3.3 3.3 5.0 6.6 6.6 6.6 5.0 6.6 6.6 6.6 2.8 2.5 2.5 5.0 6.6
Doppler 5
Introduction
Typical exam protocol
A typical examination using PW Doppler Mode might proceed as follows: 1. Connect the appropriate probes. Refer to Probes for more probe information. 2. Position the patient for the examination. 3. Press New Patient. Enter the appropriate patient data using the appropriate exam category and worksheet. Refer to the Beginning an Exam section of the Basic Scan chapter. 4. Locate the anatomy to be examined. Get a good B-Mode image. Refer to B-Mode for more information. 5. Engage the pulsed wave Doppler spectrum by pressing PD. 6. Position the sample volume cursor by moving the Trackball left and right. Position the sample volume gate by moving the Trackball up and down. 7. Press PD a second time to display the B-Mode plus spectrum format. 8. Optimize the PW Doppler spectrum, as necessary. Refer to the Optimizing the Spectrum section of this chapter for more information. 9. Sample along the whole length of the vessel. Make sure that the probe is parallel to flow. Listen and look when positioning the sample volume cursor.
Doppler 6
Introduction
Typical exam protocol (contd)
10. Press Freeze to hold the trace in memory and stop imaging. 11. Perform measurements and calculations, as necessary. Refer to the applications chapters in this manual. 12. Record results by pressing Record 1 or Record 2, depending on the setup of the recording devices. The system transfers the displayed image to the selected output device. 13. Press Freeze to resume imaging. 14. Repeat the above procedure until all relevant flow sites have been examined. 15. Replace the probe in its respective holder.
Doppler 7
Introduction
Continuous Wave Doppler

Definition
Allows examination of blood flow data all along the Doppler Mode cursor rather than from any specific depth. Gather samples along the entire Doppler beam for rapid scanning of heart. Range gated CW allows information to be gathered at higher velocity.
.
Steerable Non-Imaging
NOTE: If split crystal is activated, CW is automatically selected.

There are two CW Doppler operating modes: Steerable and Non-Imaging. Allows viewing of the B-Mode image to position the Doppler cursor to the area of interest while viewing the Doppler spectrum (shown below the B-Mode image) and listening to the Doppler audio signal. Works with sector probes only.
Provides only Doppler Spectrum and Audio for ascending/descending aortic arch, other hard-to-get-to spaces or higher velocities. Requires a single CWD probe and connection. Works with CWD probes only (CWD2, CWD5).
Doppler 8
Introduction
Typical exam protocols
Steerable A typical examination using CW Doppler Mode might proceed as follows: 1. Get a good B-Mode image. 2. Press Blue Shift, X keys. Use the Trackball position the sample volume cursor on the full B-Mode image. 3. Engage the CW Doppler spectrum by pressing Blue Shift, X as necessary to display the desire format. Doppler audio can now be heard. Press the B-Pause key to display the soft menu. 4. Reposition the sample volume cursor on the reduced B-Mode image, if necessary, by moving the Trackball left and right. 5. Optimize the CW Doppler spectrum. 6. Perform measurements, as necessary. Refer to the applications chapters in this manual. B-Mode update/pause increases the CW display quality. Non-Imaging A typical examination using Non-Imaging CW Doppler Mode might proceed as follows: 1. Connect the non-imaging probe. 2. Activate CWD Probe by pressing the Single CWD key under Probe Select. 3. Engage the Doppler spectrum by pressing CWD. Doppler audio can now be heard. 4. Adjust the CW Doppler spectrum, as necessary. 5. Perform measurements, as necessary.
Doppler 9
Introduction
Doppler 10
Activating Doppler Mode

Activating PW Doppler Mode
To activate PW Doppler Mode, press the PD key. The Doppler sample line and cursor are displayed.
Press PD a second time and the Doppler spectrum displays along with the B-Mode image.
NOTE: Doppler display formats available depend on the presettable parameters found in the Set Up/Custom Display menus.
Press the Top Menu Select key and the PW Doppler Sub Menu appears:
Illustration 145. PW Doppler Sub Menu (Page 1)
Position and size the sample volume to get a spectrum display. Use the systems audio to listen for when the sample volume is positioned over an area of flow.
Doppler 11
Activating PW Doppler Mode (contd)

To access pages 2 and 3 of the PW Doppler Sub Menu:
S S
Advance to the next sub menu pagepress simultaneously either the left and right arrow keys, the left and up arrow keys or the right and up arrow keys. Move to the previous sub menu pagepress simultaneously either the down and left arrow keys or the down and right arrow keys.
Refer to the Optimizing the Spectrum section of this chapter for more information on these softkey functions. To exit PW Doppler Mode, press B Mode.
Uses
.
Doppler 12
PW Doppler is used to examine blood flow information in the vessels of the legs, arms, abdomen, heart and neck.
NOTE: The Set Up/Preset Program allows the types of B/Doppler display formats to be chosen. Each time the PD key is pressed, it cycles to the next display format enabled in the Set Up/Preset Program.
Activating CW Doppler Mode

To activate CW Doppler Mode, press the Blue Shift, X keys, as necessary. The Doppler spectrum displays along with the B-Mode image (Steerable CW Doppler only, NOT Non-Imaging CW Doppler). The CW Doppler Sub-Menu appears:
Illustration 148. CW Doppler Sub-Menu (Page 1)
To access pages 2 and 3 of the CW Doppler Sub Menu:

S
Advance to the next sub menu pagepress simultaneously either the left and right arrow keys, the left and up arrow keys or the right and up arrow keys. Move to the previous sub menu pagepress simultaneously either the down and left arrow keys or the down and right arrow keys.
Doppler 13
Activating CW Doppler Mode (contd)
Refer to the Optimizing the Spectrum section of this chapter for more information on these softkey functions. To exit CW Doppler Mode, press the B-Mode key.
Doppler 14
Doppler Optimization
Introduction
In order to maximize the quality of information when operating in Doppler Modes, both the control adjustments and scan technique must be considered. This section begins with a detailed description of each control associated with Doppler data acquisition.
.
Control Layout
NOTE: This section discusses the Pulsed Doppler controls and menu selections.
Doppler Mode controls discussed in this section are shown below:
Illustration 151. Doppler/CFM Controls
These functions are specific to pulsed or continuous wave Doppler when that mode is active, as well as color flow.
Doppler 15
B-Mode Controls
Description
Several Front Panel controls affect the B-Mode portion of the display and not the echoes in the Doppler spectrum. These are:
S S S S S S S
TGC Depth B/M Gain Scan Area Size Scan Area Position Reverse Dual Format Keys (L/R)
NOTE: If the scan area size is reduced and the position changed, the Doppler cursor will follow the position change to stay within the displayed scan area.
See B-Mode for details on B-Mode controls.
Doppler 16
M/D Cursor
Description
The M/D Cursor assigns trackball control to the B-Mode Doppler cursor. It also displays and erases the theta angle correction cursor.
Accessing/Changing
Pressing PD automatically assigns trackball control to the B-Mode Doppler cursor. To terminate trackball control of the M/D cursor, press SET.
To reactivate trackball control of the Doppler cursor, press M/D Cursor.
NOTE: Pressing the M/D Cursor key while the trackball is actively controlling the B-Mode Doppler cursor will display the theta angle correction cursor. (Refer to Theta Angle Correction in this chapter for more information.)
Benefits
Allows for repositioning of the Doppler cursors after the trackball has been assigned a different function.
Values
On or Off. The Doppler cursor displays in the center of the screen or changes to the active color if already present.

Terminates trackball control from its current function and assigns it to the Doppler cursor. When angle correction is active, the M/D cursor returns angle correction to zero degrees.
Doppler 17
Audio Volume
Description
Controls Doppler audio output.
.
CAUTION
NOTE: The system automatically unwraps aliased audio.
Accessing/Changing
Pressing PD automatically activates Doppler Audio. The volume is initially set to the Audio Volume % chosen in the Set Up/Custom Display page 11. To increase volume, turn the Audio Volume knob clockwise. To decrease volume, turn the Audio Volume knob counterclockwise. Doppler audio sounds change rapidly, often abruptly. Increase the volume in small steps to avoid startling the patient.
Benefits
An audio representation of the flow within a vessel can be used before activating the spectral trace.
Values
The volume increases/decreases logarithmically, with positive flow through the right channel and negative flow through the left channel.
Doppler 18
Doppler Spectral Gain

Description
Amplifies the overall strength of the echoes being processed in the Doppler spectral trace.
Accessing/Changing
Gain (DG#) values are shown on the left side of the display. The initial gain value is selected in the Set Up/Custom Display menu page 4. To increase gain, turn the Gain knob clockwise. To decrease gain, turn the Gain knob counterclockwise.
Benefits
Fills in or cleans out spectrum information.
Values
0 to 32 in increments of 2. Usually set in the middle of the range.
Bioeffect
Doppler spectral gain has no affect on acoustic output. However, with increased Doppler spectral gain, the output level can usually be reduced to produce an equivalent spectrum image quality.
Doppler 19
Theta Angle Correction

Description
Estimates the flow velocity in a direction at an angle to the Doppler vector by computing the angle between the Doppler vector and the flow to be measured. Estimated flow velocity equals the velocity toward the probe divided by the COSq.
PW Doppler Angle Correction Cursor CW Doppler
Illustration 152. Phased Array Doppler Display with Angle Correct
Accessing/Changing
Flow towards the probe is mapped above the baseline of the spectral display and left speaker. To adjust the angle clockwise relative to the probe face, turn Angle clockwise. To adjust the angle counterclockwise relative to the probe face, turn Angle counterclockwise. Press M/D Cursor to quickly return the angle correction to zero degrees and erase the angle correction cursor from the display.
Doppler 20
Benefits
Optimizes the accuracy of the flow velocity. This is especially useful in vascular studies where it is necessary to measure velocity.
Values
For optimum velocity measurements, the angle of incidence should be less than 20 for cardiac applications. The usual setting is between 45 and 65 for vascular applications. 1 increments from 0 to 80.
Doppler 21
CFM/Spectrum Invert
Description
Vertically inverts the spectrum trace without affecting the baseline position.
Accessing/Changing
To invert the spectrum trace, press CFM/Spect Invert. Forward flow (F) and Reverse flow (R) signs appear on the velocity scale which reverse when the spectrum is inverted. Positive velocities go to the bottom of the spectrum and to the right speaker. A spectral invert graphic appears on the display to indicate that the spectrum has been inverted.
.
Benefits
NOTE: Inverting the spectrum does not affect the baseline position.
If the blood flow is still moving in the same direction after changing the probe angle, the Doppler information may be reversed. It is easy to invert the spectrum instead of reversing the probe orientation.

The polarity of the audio Doppler is also reversed.
Doppler 22
Velocity Scale
Description
Adjusts the velocity scale to accommodate faster/slower blood flow velocities. Adjust the size of the presentation to show a low velocity scale for low flow and a higher velocity scale for high flow. The display updates velocity scale parameters after adjusting the velocity scale.
Accessing/Changing
To increase the velocity scale, press the Velocity Scale up arrow key until the desired scale is reached. To lower the velocity scale, press the Velocity Scale down arrow key until the desired scale is reached.
.
Benefits
NOTE: A bar is inserted in the display with each velocity scale change that cannot be measured across velocity scale changes.
Blood flow information is not cut off due to the effect of aliasing.
Doppler 23
Values
Velocity range is in meters per second or KHz, depending upon preset velocity scale units. Probe Freq. 2.0 2.5 3.3 5.0 6.25 7.5 50 cm/sec 4.5 m/sec 12 cm/sec 3.47 m/sec 6.0 cm/sec 1.76 m/sec 5.0 cm/sec 2.0 m/sec 5.0 cm/sec 1.5 m/sec
Table 16. Velocity Scale Ranges
PW Velocity Scale Range
Steerable CW Velocity Scale Range
Non-Imaging CW Velocity Scale Range 50 cm/sec 7.0 m/sec
1 m/sec 7.0 m/sec
25 cm/sec 3 m/sec
25 cm/sec 3 m/sec
Doppler 24
When raising the velocity scale, the spectrum waveform decreases in size; when lowering the velocity scale, the spectrum waveform increases in size. Changes in the spectrum are relative to changes in the velocity scale, that is, it sizes accordingly.
.
When adjusting the velocity scale, Cine memory is cleared. Velocity scale units change with sample volume size, depth, frame rate and Doppler wall filter.
NOTE: The velocity scale changes when angle correct is changed.
Adjusting this control may cause minor changes in acoustic output. Observe the output display for possible effects.
Doppler 25
Baseline Shift
Description
Changes the spectrum baseline to accommodate higher velocity blood flow. Minimizes aliasing by displaying a greater range of forward flow than reverse flow. With baseline shift, higher velocities in one direction can be displayed without clipping off the peaks. Used as Focus Position control in B-Mode only.
Accessing/Changing
Baseline shift adjusts the point in the spectrum where the velocity trace is at zero. The default baseline can be chosen in the Set Up/Custom Display menu page 13. To shift the baseline up, press the Baseline Shift up arrow key. To shift the baseline down, press the Baseline Shift down arrow key. The baseline is displayed as a solid line running across the spectrum. The baseline is raised and lowered in equal increments, depending on the current Doppler scale factor. The control does not wrap when the maximum baseline shift (in either direction) has been reached. These are non-repeating keys.
Benefits
Unwraps the alias. Rearranges the velocity scale display without changing the velocity scale. Readjusts the positive and negative velocities limit without changing the total velocity range.
Values
75%, 50%, 25%, 0, +25%, +50%, and +75%, with zero being the center of the display, +100% being the top edge of the display and 100% being the bottom edge of the display.
Doppler 26
B Pause
Description
Freezes the B-Mode image while keeping the Doppler spectrum display active.
Accessing/Changing
To pause the B-Mode image, press B Pause. To cancel B-Mode image freezing, press B Pause.
Benefits
The spectrum tracks the Doppler Sample Volume Gate in real-time.
B-Mode pause increases the Doppler display quality.
NOTE: When pressing Freeze while in B Pause and then unfreezing the image, a preset selection will determine if the B Pause key is released or the image remains in B Pause. This is determined by the Set Up/Custom Display menu page 10 Auto B Melt at Unfreeze. The echo level measurement is not available in B Pause. It is only available on a frozen image.
Doppler 27
Dynamic Range
Description
Dynamic range controls how echo intensities are converted to shades of gray, thereby creating a range of gray scale that can be adjusted.
Illustration 153. PW Doppler Mode Sub Menu (Dynamic Range)
Accessing/Changing
Access dynamic range from the PWD Sub Menu page one. Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display page one and highlight Dynamic Range. Each press cycles to the next dynamic range setting. The selected value is displayed on the Sub Menu. To increase the dynamic range, press the Sub Menu Select up arrow key. To decrease the dynamic range, press the Sub Menu Select down arrow key.
Benefits
Doppler 28
Values
The settings cycle in 6 dB steps from 18 dB to 48 dB. Set the default value for PWD dynamic range in the Set Up/Custom Display menu page 4. Dynamic range levels are returned to the preset value when changing the following:
S S S
Application Exam category New patient.
Dynamic range is a pre-processing function.

Dynamic range operates only in real-time, not in freeze, Cine, Timeline replay, or VCR playback.
Doppler 29
Slant Scan
Description
Slant Scan in Doppler imaging is used to control the position of the Doppler cursor for LINEAR PROBES ONLY.
Illustration 154. PW Doppler Mode Sub Menu (Slant Scan)
Accessing/Changing
Access slant scan from the PWD Sub Menu page one. Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display page one and highlight Slant Scan. Press the Sub Menu Select up or down arrow keys to cycle through the left, center or right display of the cursor. The selected value is displayed on the Sub Menu.
+ (Left)
0 (Center)
(Right)
Illustration 155. Slant Scan Cursor Selections
Doppler 30
Accessing/Changing
Illustration 156. B-Mode Display with Slant Selection
When Slant Scan is selected while in a B-Mode display, the B-Mode is not effected. Only the Dopplere cursor will show at a slant.
Benefits
Provides a Doppler cursor suitable for linear probe operation.
Values
+, 0 and . Slant Scan is a pre-processing selection.
Doppler 31
Wall Filter
Description
Removes the low level, low frequency Doppler signal caused by movement of the vessel walls.
Illustration 157. PW Doppler Mode Sub Menu (Wall Filter)
Accessing/Changing
Access wall filter from the PWD Sub Menu page one. Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display page one and highlight Wall Filter. Each press of the Sub Menu Select keys cycles to the next wall filter setting. The selected value is displayed on the Sub Menu. To increase wall filter, press the Sub Menu Select up arrow key. To decrease wall filter, press the Sub Menu Select down arrow key. The wall filter cutoff value displays in cm/s on the softkey, depending on the preset selection. The Wall Filter value can be displayed as velocity or frequency. This selection is made in Setup/Custom Display page 11.
Doppler 32
Benefits
Eliminates unnecessary information. Filters out low level noise above and below the baseline so it cannot be seen or heard on the spectrum.
Values
Values for wall filtering can be displayed as velocity (cm/sec). This choice is made in the Set Up/Custom Display Menu (presets) and is probe/velocity dependent. 1.0, 2.0, 3.0, 5.0, 7.0, 10, 15 or 20 cm/sec. The values could go as high as 50 cm/s depending on the probe and the velocity scale. Wall Filter is a pre-processing function.

Wall filter changes with velocity scale.
Doppler 33
Sample Volume Length

Description
Changes the size of the sample volume gate length.
Illustration 158. PW Doppler Mode Sub Menu (S.V. Length)
Accessing/Changing
Access sample volume length from the PWD Sub Menu page one. Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display page one and highlight S.V. Length. Each press of the Sub Menu Select keys cycles to the next sample volume gate size setting. The selected value is displayed on the Sub Menu. To increase the gate size, press the Sub Menu Select up arrow key. To decrease the gate size, press the Sub Menu Select down arrow key.
.
Benefits
NOTE: Adjustments to the sample volume gate size are made from the center point of the sample volume position. A larger gate will increase the spectral broadening affect to the spectrum.
A smaller gate produces accurate sampling results because it is more sensitive. The gate can be enlarged if there are problems hearing the Doppler audio or for sampling large chambers.
Doppler 34
Values
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 12, 14 and 16 mm. Sample Volume Length is a pre-processing function.

Adjusting this control may cause minor changes in acoustic output. Observe the output display for possible effects.
Doppler 35
Sweep Speed
Description
Sweep Speed changes the speed at which the timeline is updated.
NOTE: Time or distance measurements are not allowed across sweep speed changes.
Illustration 159. PW Doppler Mode Sub Menu (Sweep Speed)
Accessing/Changing
Access sweep speed from the PWD Sub Menu page two. Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display page two and highlight Sweep Speed. Each press of the Sub Menu Select keys cycles to the next sweep speed setting. The selected value is displayed on the Sub Menu. To increase sweep speed, press the Sub Menu Select up arrow key. To decrease sweep speed, press the Sub Menu Select down arrow key.
Benefits
Speed up or slow down the spectrum for analysis to record more or fewer occurrences over time.
Doppler 36
Values
Slow (16 sec), Mid (8 sec), Fast (4 sec) and Very Fast (2 sec). Very Fast is a function in Doppler mode only. Sweep Speed is a pre-processing function.

If more cardiac cycles are seen, the spectrum appears smaller; if less are seen, the spectrum appears larger or more spread out.
Doppler 37
Penet (Penetration)
Description
Penetration can be increased by lowering the operating frequency of the active probe.
Illustration 160. PW Doppler Mode Sub Menu (Penet.)
Accessing/Changing
Access penetration from the PWD Sub Menu page two. Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display page two and highlight Penet. Press the Sub Menu Select up or down arrow key to activate penetration. To deactivate, press the Sub Menu Select up or down arrow key again.
Benefits
Allows for a slight increase in penetration without changing gain or acoustic output.
Values
On or Off. Penetration is a pre-processing function.

Doppler 38
Bioeffects
Decreasing the probe transmitting frequency, without decreasing acoustic output, tends to increase Mechanical and Thermal Index values. However, improved penetration should allow for decreasing patient exposure time.
Probe Frequencies
For reference, Doppler frequencies (with penetration On or Off) are shown according to probe in the table below. PROBE B510 C364/CBF C386 C551/CAE C721 E721/MTZ I739 546L 739L LA39 L764/LH S317 S220/W S222 S611 T739 FREQUENCY (MHz) ON 4.0 2.5 2.5 4.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 4.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 2.5 2.2 2.0 4.0 5.0
Table 17. Doppler/CFM Frequency
OFF 5.0 3.3 3.3 5.0 6.6 6.6 6.6 5.0 6.6 6.6 6.6 2.8 2.5 2.5 5.0 6.6
Doppler 39
Auto Trace
Description
Automatically traces (real-time) the parameter selected in the Set Up/Custom Display Menu page 11. The choices are Peak, Floor, Mean, and Mode.
Illustration 161. PW Doppler Mode Sub Menu (Auto Trace)
Accessing/Changing
Access auto trace from the PWD Sub Menu page two. Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display page two and highlight Auto Trace. To enable auto trace, press the Sub Menu Select up or down arrow key. To disable Auto Trace, press the Sub Menu Select up or down arrow key again. Use the Set Up/Preset Program Top Menu to select the parameter to be traced.
Doppler 40
Benefits
No need to manually trace a selected value.
Values
On or Off. Auto Trace is a post-processing function.
Hints
The best Doppler data is collected when parallel to flow, with orientation also parallel to the anatomic target; whereas, the best B-Mode image data is collected perpendicular to the anatomic target. Therefore, there usually is not both an ideal B-Mode image and ideal Doppler data simultaneously.
Doppler 41
Color
Description
Color allows for enabling pulsed wave Doppler Mode image colorization.
Illustration 162. PW Doppler Mode Sub Menu (Color)
Accessing/Changing
Access color from the PWD Sub Menu page two. Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display page two and highlight Color. Press the Sub Menu Select up or down arrow key to activate PW Doppler color. To deactivate, press the Sub Menu Select up or down arrow key again.
Benefits
Values
On or Off. The PW Doppler color presented is a selection in the Set Up/Custom Display menu page 11. Color is a post-processing function.
Doppler 42
Color Tag
Description
Color tag enables the colorization of a specific gray scale level range. This causes the specified gray levels to be displayed as a predetermined color in the pulsed wave Doppler Mode image.
Illustration 163. PW Doppler Mode Sub Menu (Color Tag)
Accessing/Changing
Access color tag from the PWD Sub Menu page two. Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display page two and highlight Color Tag. Press the the Sub Menu Select up or down arrow key to enable the PWD color tagging. To disable the color tag function, press the the Sub Menu Select up or down arrow key again.
Benefits
Values
On or Off. The color and tagging range presented is determined by the Set Up/Custom Display menu page 11. Color Tag is a post-processing function.
Doppler 43
Tag Position
Description
Tag position allows for the movement of the specified color tag range throughout the gray scale displayed.
Illustration 164. PW Doppler Mode Sub Menu (Tag Positn)
Accessing/Changing
Access tag position from the PWD Sub Menu page two. Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display page two and highlight Tag Positn. If the Color Tag selection is not enabled when Tag Positn is selected, Color Tag is automatically activated. Press the Sub Menu Select up arrow key to move the color tag up the gray scale range. To move the color tag down the gray scale range, press the Sub Menu Select down arrow key.
Benefits
Values
Move the color tag up or down the gray scale. Color and size of the tag is determined in the Set Up/Custom Display menu page 11. Tag Position is a post-processing function.
Doppler 44
Rejectn (Rejection)
Description
Rejection allows for the elimination of low level echoes from the display. This is generally used to clear noise out of vessels or cysts.
Illustration 165. PW Doppler Mode Sub Menu (Rejectn)
Accessing/Changing
Access Rejection from the PWD Sub Menu page three. Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display page three and highlight Rejectn. The selected value is displayed on the Sub Menu. Press the Sub Menu Select up arrow key to increase the gray level rejection value displayed. Press the Sub Menu Select down arrow key to decrease the gray level rejection value displayed.
Benefits
Allows for the elimination from the display image of low level echoes caused by noise.
Doppler 45
Values

Rejection affects real-time imaging, frozen or Cine images.
Doppler 46
CFM/PWD Ratio
Description
CFM/PWD Ratio is active in triplex mode. It is used to set the velocity ratio between PWD and CFM.
Illustration 166. PW Doppler Mode Sub-Menu (CFM/PWD Ratio)
Accessing/Changing
Access CFM/PWD Ratio from the PWD Sub-Menu page three. Press the Sub-Menu Select rocker switch, if necessary, to display page three. The selected ratio is displayed on the Sub-Menu. Press the top of the CFM/PWD Ratio rocker switch to increase the ratio displayed. Press the bottom of the CFM/PWD Ratio rocker switch to decrease the ratio displayed.
Benefits
Used to optimize frame rate in Triplex mode. Without changing CFM or PDI velocity scale, PWD velocity scale can be changed to decrease aliasing.
Doppler 47
Values
Choose from 1/1, 1/2 or 1/4. 1/1 1/2 1/4 CFM and PWD Velocity the same. PWD Velocity twice the CFM Velocity. PWD Velocity four times the CFM Velocity.

Affects display frame rate.
Doppler 48
CFM Shrink
Description
CFM Shrink reduces the CFM window to the size specified in Setup/Custom Display page 4.
Illustration 167. PW Doppler Mode Sub-Menu (CFM Shrink)
Accessing/Changing
Access CFM Shrink from the PWD Sub-Menu page three. Press the Sub-Menu Select rocker switch, if necessary, to display page three. Press the top of the CFM Shrink rocker switch to turn the CFM Shrink function on or off. CFM Shrink can be turned on/off in Setup/Custom Display page 4.
Benefits
Used to optimize frame rate in Triplex mode.
Doppler 49
Values
On Off CFM Window size set by value selected in Setup/Custom Display page 4. CFM window size adjusted by scan area function.

Affects display frame rate.
Doppler 50
M-Mode
Introduction Optimizing the Timeline
M-Mode is intended to provide a display format and measurement capability that represents tissue displacement (motion) occurring over time along a single scan vector. This section describes a typical M-Mode exam. It outlines the front panel controls and Soft-Menu selections used to optimize the M-Mode trace.
M-Mode 1
M-Mode
M-Mode 2
Introduction
Introduction
M-Mode is used to determine patterns of motion for objects within the ultrasound beam. The most common use is for viewing motion patterns of the heart. Be sure to read and understand Acoustic Output considerations for each mode (refer to Safety chapter) before adjusting the Acoustic Output control or any control affecting acoustic output.
Typical Exam Protocol

A typical examination using M-Mode might proceed as follows: 1. Get a good B-Mode image. Survey the anatomy and place the area of interest near the center of the B-Mode image. 2. Press M Mode. The M-Mode cursor/line is displayed in the B-Mode image. 3. Use the Trackball to position the mode cursor over the area to be displayed in M-Mode. 4. Press M Mode a second time to display timeline format. 5. Adjust the Sweep Speed, TGC, Gain and Focus, as needed. 6. Press Freeze to stop the M trace. 7. Make any desired annotations, measurements or calculations. 8. Record the trace to disk or to a hard copy device. 9. Press Freeze to continue imaging. 10. To exit, press B Mode.
M-Mode 3
Introduction
M-Mode 4
Optimizing the Timeline

Common Controls
Description
Since M-Mode is basically a single B-Mode scan vector displayed over time, basic controls that affect the B-Mode display also affect the M-Mode display. TGC and depth affect both the M-Mode and B-Mode displays. Scan area size, scan area position and reverse affect B-Mode only. If the scan area size is reduced and the position changed, the M-Mode cursor will follow the position change to stay within the displayed scan area. The Dual Format Keys (LR) work the same as in dual B-Mode, but display both B-Mode and M-Mode on the left and right side of the screen.
Accessing/Changing
See B-Mode for details on these controls.
M-Mode 5
B/M Gain
Description
Gain increases or decreases the amount of echo information displayed in an image. It has the effect of brightening or darkening all displayed echoes at any depth.
Accessing/Changing
.
q
Turn the B/M Gain control to adjust gain. Gain values change depending on the probe; they are not associated with a particular position of the key.
NOTE: Gain cannot be changed on a frozen image. Changing the gain while in M-Mode does not affect the B-Mode image gain.
To increase gain, turn the B/M Gain dial clockwise. To decrease gain, turn the B/M Gain dial counterclockwise. The Angle knob controls B-Mode gain in all modes except Doppler.
Benefits
Gain allows for the balance of echo contrast so that cystic structures appear echo-free and reflecting tissue fills in.
M-Mode 6

Values
Gain displays on the monitor in dB. Gain increments are available every 2 dB within the range of 0 to 98 dB, depending on the selected probe.

After adjusting the acoustic output, there may be a need to adjust gain. Generally speaking, if acoustic output increases, the gain may need to decrease; a decrease in acoustic output may require an increase in gain. Gain and TGC interact by adding together. Gain changes overall echo amplification while TGC changes amplification at specific depths.
Bioeffects
Gain has no affect on acoustic output. However, with increased gain, the output level can usually be reduced to produce equivalent image quality.
M-Mode 7
M/D Cursor
Description
Entering M-Mode automatically assigns trackball control to the M/D Cursor.
Accessing/Changing
To enable trackball control of the M/D cursor, press the M/D Cursor key. The M-Mode cursor line changes color. To terminate trackball control of the M/D cursor, press Set. The M-Mode cursor line changes color.
Benefits
Allows for repositioning of the M-Mode cursors after the trackball has been assigned a different function.
Values
On or Off. The M-Mode cursor displays in the center of the screen or changes to the active color if already present.

Terminates trackball control from its current function and assigns it to the M-Mode cursor.
M-Mode 8
Zoom (M-Mode)
Description
Acoustic zoom can be accomplished while in M-Mode. The B-Mode reference image does not zoom but the M-Mode display will enlarge. Display (freeze) zoom is not available with M-Mode.
Illustration 168. Zoom (M-Mode) Display
Accessing/Changing
To access zoom while in B/M-Mode, press the Zoom key.
Rotate the Zoom Size control to adjust the size of the zoom area cursors.
M-Mode 9

Accessing/Changing (continued)
Use the Trackball to move the zoom area vertically along the M-Mode cursor line.
Press Set to fix the zoom function and continue scanning.
Press Clear to exit the zoom function.
Benefits
Allows for expanding a region of interest over the entire M-Mode timeline display.
Values
Acoustic zoom has magnification values of 1, 1.2, 1.5, 2, 2.5, 3.0 and 4.0. The default value is set in the Set Up/Custom Display menu page 1.
M-Mode 10

Changes the transmit focal point position when moved vertically.

Moving the focal zone affects acoustic output by bringing the near field closer and by adding focal zones. The amount of increase varies depending on the probe and its frequency. Adding focal zones tends to increase TI, although it may decrease MI. Observe the output display for possible effects.
M-Mode 11
Dynamic Range
Description
Dynamic range controls how echo intensities are converted to shades of gray, thereby creating a range of gray scale that can be adjusted. Adjustments to M-Modes dynamic range affects the M-Mode timeline only.
Illustration 169. M-Mode Sub Menu (Dynamic Range)
Accessing/Changing
Access dynamic range from the M-Mode Sub Menu page one. Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display page one and highlight Dynamic Range. Each press cycles to the next dynamic range setting. The selected value is displayed on the Sub Menu. To increase the dynamic range, press the Sub Menu Select up arrow key. To decrease the dynamic range, press the Sub Menu Select down arrow key.
Benefits
M-Mode 12

Values
The settings cycle in 6 dB steps from 30 dB to 78 dB. The default for M dynamic range is set in the Set Up/Custom Display menu page 3. Dynamic range levels are returned to the preset value when changing the following:
S S S
Probe Exam category New patient
Refer to Customizing Your System for preset instructions. Dynamic range is a pre-processing function.

M dynamic range operates only in real-time, not in freeze, Cine, Timeline replay, or VCR playback.
M-Mode 13
Gray Scale Map

Description
Gray scale mapping determines how the echo intensity levels received are presented as shades of gray.
Illustration 170. M-Mode Sub Menu (Gray Map)
Accessing/Changing
Access gray scale mapping from the M-Mode Sub Menu page one. Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display page one and highlight Gray Map. Press the Sub Menu Select up or down arrow key to select the desired gray scale map. The selected value is displayed on the Sub Menu.
Benefits
Displays the received echo levels with different weights on specific levels of gray. For example, a certain gray map may enhance mid level echoes over a wider range of grays verses high or low level echoes. Allows for better differentiation between echo levels through gray levels displayed.
Values
There are six selections of gray scale mapping. This is a post-processing function.
M-Mode 14
Rejectn (Rejection)
Description
Deletes low level echoes.
Illustration 171. M-Mode Sub Menu (Rejectn)
Accessing/Changing
Access rejection from the M-Mode Sub Menu page one. Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display page one and highlight Rejectn. Each press cycles to the next rejection setting. The selected value is displayed on the Sub Menu. Press the Sub Menu Select up arrow key to increase the gray level rejection value displayed. To decrease the gray level rejection value displayed, press the Sub Menu Select down arrow key.
Benefits
Higher rejection values will remove weak, low level echoes in a displayed image.
M-Mode 15

Values

Rejection functions in real-time, as well as in freeze or Cine.
M-Mode 16
Edge Enhance
Description
Edge enhance brings out subtle tissue differences and boundaries by enhancing the gray scale differences corresponding to the edges of structures. Adjustments to M-Modes edge enhancement affects the M-Mode timeline only.
Illustration 172. M-Mode Sub Menu (Edge Enhance)
Accessing/Changing
Access edge enhance from the M-Mode Sub Menu page one. Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display page one and highlight Edge Enhance. Each press cycles to the next edge enhance setting. The selected value is displayed on the Sub Menu. To increase edge enhancement, press the Sub Menu Select up arrow key. To decrease edge enhancement, press the Sub Menu Select down arrow key.
Benefits
Edge enhance modifies the M-Mode image by accentuating the interfaces between organs or vessels.
M-Mode 17

Values
The four selections are Off, Low, Mid and High. Edge enhance levels are returned to the preset value when changes are made to the following:
S S S
Refer to Customizing Your System for preset instructions. Edge enhance is a pre-processing function.

Edge enhance operates in real-time only, not in freeze, Cine, or VCR playback.
M-Mode 18
Sweep Speed
Description
Sweep speed changes the speed at which the timeline updates across the display.
NOTE: Time or distance measurements are not allowed across sweep speed changes.
Illustration 173. M-Mode Sub Menu (Sweep Speed)
Accessing/Changing
Access sweep speed from the M-Mode Sub Menu page two. Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display page two and highlight Sweep Speed. Each press cycles to the next sweep speed setting. The selected value is displayed on the Sub Menu. To increase sweep speed, press the Sub Menu Select up arrow key. To decrease sweep speed, press the Sub Menu Select down arrow key.
Benefits
Speed up or slow down the timeline in order to view more or fewer occurrences over a period of time. A fast speed shows less cycles but better transition definition. A slow speed shows more cycles but less definition during transitions.
M-Mode 19

Values
Slow (16 sec), Mid (8 sec) and Fast (4 sec). Sweep speed is a pre-processing function.

If more events are seen, the timeline appears smaller; if less events are seen, the timeline appears larger or more spread out.
M-Mode 20
Color
Description
Color allows for enabling M-Mode image colorization.
Illustration 174. M-Mode Sub Menu (Color)
Accessing/Changing
Access M-Mode color from the M-Mode Sub Menu page two. Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display page two and highlight Color. Press the Sub Menu Select up or down arrow key to activate M-Mode color. To deactivate M-Mode color, press the Sub Menu Select up or down arrow key again.
Benefits
Values
On or Off. The M-Mode color presented is a selection in the Set Up/Custom Display menu page 10. Color is a post processing function.
M-Mode 21
Color Tag
Description
Color tag enables the colorization of a specific gray scale level range. This causes the specified gray levels to be displayed as a predetermined color in the M-Mode image.
Illustration 175. M-Mode Sub Menu (Color Tag)
Accessing/Changing
Access color tag from the M-Mode Sub Menu page two. Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display page two and highlight Color Tag. Press the Sub Menu Select up or down arrow key to enable the M-Mode color tagging. To disable the color tag function, press the Sub Menu Select up or down arrow key again.
Benefits
Values
On or Off. The color and tagging range presented is determined by the Set Up/Custom Display menu page 10. Color Tag is a post-processing function.
M-Mode 22
Tag Position
Description
Tag position allows for the movement of the specified color tag range throughout the gray scale displayed.
Illustration 176. M-Mode Sub Menu (Tag Positn)
Accessing/Changing
Access tag position from the M-Mode Sub Menu page two. Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display page two and highlight Tag Positn. Press the Sub Menu Select up arrow key to move the color tag up the gray scale range. To move the color tag down the gray scale range, press the Sub Menu Select down arrow key.
Benefits
Values
Move the color tag up or down the gray scale. Color and size of the tag is determined in the Set Up/Custom Display menu page 10. Tag Position is a post processing function.
M-Mode 23

M-Mode 24
Adding Color
Introduction Activating Color Flow Optimizing the Color Flow Image Power Doppler Imaging Colorized Gray Scale
Doppler Color Flow Mapping is a method for imaging blood flow by displaying flow data (velocity/direction) on a B-Mode Image. Doppler Color Flow allows for a quick qualitative survey concerning the relative velocity and direction of fluid (blood) within the B-Mode Image. This section describes how color flow mapping is used in B-Mode, M-Mode and Doppler spectral display. It explains the controls and Soft Menu selections used to optimize color flow mapping. Power Doppler Imaging and suggested PDI preset values are outlined. This section also describes Colorized Gray Scale on the LOGIQ
t 400.
Adding Color 1
Adding Color
Adding Color 2
Introduction
Overview
Color Flow Doppler or Power Doppler is NOT available on the LOGIQ 400 Black & White system.
Typical Exam
A typical examination using Color Flow Doppler: 1. Follow the same procedure as described under B-Mode to locate the anatomical area of interest. 2. After optimizing the B-Mode image, add Color Flow by pressing CFM. 3. Move the color flow area of interest as close to the center of the image as possible. 4. Optimize the color flow parameters so that a high frame rate can be achieved and appropriate flow velocities are visualized. 5. Press Freeze to hold the image in memory. 6. Record color flow images as necessary. 7. If more definitive information is needed about flow, utilize pulsed or continuous wave Doppler modes.
Adding Color 3
Introduction
Adding Color 4
Activating Color Flow

To activate Color Flow Mapping, press the CFM key (color flow). The key backlights while in Color Flow Mode. The color flow image appears after a short pause. Color Flow Mapping can be used with B-Mode, M-Mode or Doppler Imaging. In all B-Modes, the Color Flow wedge overlays the B-Mode image.
Color Window
Illustration 177. Color Flow Image Window
The Scan Area key and Trackball now control the size and position of the color flow window.
Adding Color 5
Activating Color Flow (contd)

The Color Flow Sub Menu appears:
Illustration 178. Color Flow Sub Menu (page one)
Access pages 2, 3 and 4 of the Color Flow Sub Menu by pressing the Sub Menu Select arrow keys.
Illustration 179. Color Flow Sub Menu (page two)
Illustration 180. Color Flow Sub Menu (page three)
Illustration 181. CFM/PDI Enhancement Option Sub Menu (page four)
Adding Color 6

M-Mode
In M-Mode, the color flow wedge overlays the B-Mode image. The color displayed in the M-Mode is that which is seen along the Doppler line cursor. To activate color flow mode, press CFM (color flow). The key backlights while in the color flow mode. The color flow image appears after a short pause. The Color Map selected for B-Mode applies to M-Mode. The size and position of the color flow window in B-Mode determines the color information displayed in M-Mode.
Exiting Color Flow

To exit Color, press CFM (color flow).
Adding Color 7

Adding Color 8
Optimizing the Color Flow Image

Control Layout
Illustration 182. Color Doppler Controls
Color Flow Mapping is basically Doppler velocity/direction information mapped as a color on top of the gray scale B-Mode (or M-Mode) Image. Keyboard controls used to affect the Doppler spectrum also affect CFM Mode. However, some Soft Menu controls affect only the color processing and display.
Adding Color 9
Common Controls
Description
After initial transmission/reception, CFM processing is generally separate from gray scale processing. Acoustic output affects the transmit power for both B-Mode and Color Flow Mapping signals. TGC, Depth, B/M Gain and Reverse function only on the B-Mode image displayed. The M/D Cursor key is not relevant to CFM scanning; it only affects the Doppler/M-Mode cursor.
Dual format keys (LR) work the same as in dual B-Mode, but display two B-Mode and CFM images on the left and right side of the screen.
NOTE: If L and R keys are pressed simultaneously, both left and right B-Mode images will be active. Pressing CFM will then provide a live B-Mode image on the left and a live B-Mode with CFM on the right.
Accessing/Changing
See B-Mode for details on all controls common or specific to B-Mode.
Adding Color 10
Color Doppler Gain

Description
Amplifies the overall strength of the echoes being processed in the Color Doppler section.
Accessing/Changing
Gain values change depending on the probe; gain is not associated with a particular position of the knob. To increase gain, turn the Gain knob clockwise. To decrease gain, turn the Gain knob counterclockwise.
Benefits
Allows control of the amount of color within a vessel.
Values
The settings range is 32 levels, but values are not displayed on the image monitor. Usually set the dial in the middle, depending on the vessel.

The system automatically adjusts the gain based on the acoustic output.
Bioeffects
Color Doppler gain has no affect on acoustic output. However, with increased color Doppler gain, the output level can usually be reduced to produce an equivalent spectrum image quality.
Adding Color 11
CFM/Spectrum Invert
Description
Allows for viewing blood flow from a different perspective, i.e., red away (negative velocities) and blue toward (positive velocities). Color reverses a real-time or frozen image.
NOTE: Invert reverses the forward/reverse color assignment.
Accessing/Changing
To reverse the color assignment, press CFM/Spect Invert.
Benefits
Allows viewing of blood flow according to personal preference, or display proper color without changing probe orientation.
Values
Invert and non-invert.
Adding Color 12
Velocity Scale
Description
Increases or decreases the Velocity Scale represented by the color bar.
Accessing/Changing
To increase velocity scale, press the Velocity Scale up arrow key until reaching the desired scale. To decrease velocity scale, press the Velocity Scale down arrow key until reaching the desired scale.
Benefits
If blood is flowing at a higher velocity, increase the velocity scale in order to avoid aliasing in the color display.
Values
Velocity scale is displayed in cm per second.

Velocity scale changes frame rate and wall filter. When adjusting velocity scale, Cine memory is cleared.

Changing the velocity scale tends to change the MI. Observe the output display for possible effects.
Adding Color 13
Color Flow Baseline Shift

Description
Minimizes aliasing by reallocating the forward/reverse color velocity scale assignment. For example, it allows a greater portion of the color scale to be assigned to forward flow than to reverse flow. Baseline Shift adjusts the point in the color spectrum where the color velocity is at zero (black).
Accessing/Changing
To adjust the baseline shift, press the Baseline Shift up or down arrow keys. Baseline does not wrap. If the baseline is positioned at the top of the color bar, shifting the baseline again will cause the system to beep.
Benefits
Minimize aliasing during color flow imaging.
Values
Color flow baseline can be shifted to one of 7 proportionately-spaced positions on the color bar. Zero velocity follows the baseline. The total velocity range remains the same.
Adding Color 14
Color Flow Window Size (Scan Area)

Description
Color Flow data is placed on top of the gray scale image in a specific area. This is represented by a sector wedge outline with convex probes or a rectangle with linear probes. The size and position of this color area can be easily adjusted. The Color Flow window is a solid line when position may be adjusted by the Trackball. The Color Flow window is a dotted line when the size (CFM area) may be adjusted by the Trackball.
Accessing/Changing
While in the CFM Mode, press Scan Area once. This assigns trackball control to color window size adjustment. Use the Trackball to adjust the color window size.
S S
Move the Trackball left to close the color window and right to open it. Move the Trackball down to increase and up to decrease the color window vertical size.
.
t
Press Scan Area a second time to assign trackball control to positioning the re-sized window.
NOTE: Pressing Scan Area toggles between trackball control of window size or position.
Pressing Set fixes the color window size and position. Trackball control is returned to its previous assignment.
Adding Color 15

Values
Sector/Convex Probe. Ranges from 10 to full B width. Linear Probe. Ranges from 10mm to full B width.

Narrowing the image size may increase the frame rate, thereby increasing the TI. This change also tends to decrease the MI. Observe the output display for possible effects.
Adding Color 16
Color Flow Maps

Description
Allows for the selection of how Doppler velocities are mapped as color over the gray scale. The Color Bar represents the selected map.
Illustration 183. CFM Mode Sub Menu (CFM Map)
Accessing/Changing
Access CFM maps from the CFM Sub Menu page one. Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display page one and highlight CFM Map. Each press cycles through the CFM map choices. The selected value is displayed on the Sub Menu. Press the up or down Sub Menu Select arrow keys to cycle to the appropriate map choice.
Values
The four color map selections available are assigned in the Set Up/Custom Display page 13. The parameters CFM Color Map 14 can be assigned as Velocity maps (V1 thru V4), Velocity/Turbulence maps (VT1 thru VT4) or Turbulence maps (T1 and T2).
Adding Color 17
Slant Scan
Description
Slant scan in CFM Imaging is used to control the position of the CFM window for LINEAR PROBES ONLY.
Illustration 184. CFM Mode Sub Menu (Slant Scan)
Accessing/Changing
Access slant scan from the CFM Sub Menu page one. Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display page one and highlight Slant Scan. Press the Sub Menu Select up or down arrow keys to cycle through left, center or right displays. The selected value is displayed on the Sub Menu.
+ (Left)
0 (Center)
(Right)
Illustration 185. Color Doppler Window Selections
Adding Color 18

Benefits
Provides a color flow window suitable for linear probe operation.
Values
+ (left), 0 (center) and (right). Slant Scan is a pre-processing function.
Adding Color 19
Diag Mode
Description
Allows for the selection of the best color flow display format. There are four mode sequences available in the Set Up/ Custom Display menu page 13. The four sequences have two or three of the four possible modes. The four methods are:
Adding Color 20
Survey Mode (Svy)The Survey Mode is the default Diag Mode display and is common for each of the two programs. The Survey Mode displays the B/W B-Mode image and has an adjustable, full depth CF wedge that can be steered with the Trackball. Survey/Detail Mode (SvyDtl)The Survey/Detail Mode displays a high resolution color flow window that is half the depth of the B-Mode image. The CF wedge is adjustable horizontally and vertically and can be steered within the full B-Mode image with the Trackball. Map Mode (Map)In the Map Mode, the B-Mode image and the color flow are the same size. The Map Mode offers higher CF frame rates and a full size adjustable CF wedge.
Map/Detail Mode (MapDtl)The Detail Mode shows a high resolution, high frame rate color flow window that is half of the B-Mode depth. The B-Mode and the CF are the same adjustable angle.
Illustration 186. CFM Mode Sub Menu (Diag Mode)

Accessing/Changing
Access Diag Mode from the CFM Sub Menu page one. Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display page one and highlight Diag Mode. Press the Sub Menu Select up or down arrow keys to cycle through the preset sequence. The selected value is displayed on the Sub Menu.
Benefits
Gives the operator a choice of CFM displays to optimize scanning.
Values
Four sequences are available in the Set Up/Custom Display menu page 13: Survey>Map>Map/Detail Survey>Survey/Detail Survey>Survey/Detail>Map Survey/Detail>Map/Detail Diag Mode is a pre-processing function.

Display frame rate could be improved by minimized gray scale B-Mode image size or CFM window size.
Adding Color 21
Color Flow MTI Filter

Description
Filters out low flow velocity color. This minimizes motion artifacts caused from breathing.
Illustration 187. CFM Mode Sub Menu (MTI Filter)
Accessing/Changing
Access MTI filter from the CFM Sub Menu page one. Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display page one and highlight MTI Filter. Each press cycles to the next MTI filter setting. The selected value is displayed on the Sub Menu. To increase MTI filter, press the Sub Menu Select up arrow key. Press the Sub Menu Select down arrow key to decrease MTI filter.
Benefits
Filters out the lowest velocities (colors).
Values
Values are Low, M1, M2, M3, M4 and High. Color Flow MTI Filter is a pre-processing function.
Adding Color 22
Frame Average
Description
Averages color information from previous frames with the current frame.
Illustration 188. CFM Mode Sub Menu (Frame Average)
Accessing/Changing
Access frame average from the CFM Sub Menu page two. Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display page two and highlight Frame Average. Each press cycles to the next frame average. The selected value is displayed on the Sub Menu. To increase frame averaging, press the Sub Menu Select up arrow key. Press the Sub Menu Select down arrow key to decrease frame averaging.
Benefits
Averages out one time events like noise spikes.
Adding Color 23

Values
Off, low, medium and high. Frame Average is a pre-processing function.

Trade off between frame rate and color quality. As the color quality increases, the frame rate decreases and as the frame rate increases, the color quality decreases.
Adding Color 24
Penet. (Penetration)
Description
Penetration can be increased by lowering the operating frequency of the active probe.
Illustration 189. CFM Mode Sub Menu (Penet.)
Accessing/Changing
Access penetration from the CFM Sub Menu page two. Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display page two and highlight Display Thrshld. Press the Sub Menu Select up or down arrow key to activate penetration. To deactivate, press the Sub Menu Select up or down arrow key again.
Benefits
Allows for a slight increase in penetration without changing gain or acoustic output.
Values
On or Off. Penetration is a pre-processing function.

Adding Color 25

Bioeffects
Decreasing the probe transmitting frequency, without decreasing acoustic output, tends to increase Mechanical and Thermal Index values. However, improved penetration should allow for decreasing patient exposure time.
Probe Frequencies
For reference, Color Flow Doppler frequencies (with penetration On or Off) are shown according to probe in the table below. PROBE B510 C364/CBF C386 C551/CAE C721 E721/MTZ I739 546L 739L LA39 L764/LH S317 S220/W S222 S611 T739 FREQUENCY (MHz) ON 4.0 2.5 2.5 4.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 4.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 2.5 2.2 2.0 4.0 5.0
Table 18. CFM Frequency
OFF 5.0 3.3 3.3 5.0 6.6 6.6 6.6 5.0 6.6 6.6 6.6 2.8 2.5 2.5 5.0 6.6
Adding Color 26
High Resoltn (Resolution)

Description
High Resolution provides a quick way to maximize resolution for the CFM display.
Illustration 190 CFM Mode Sub Menu (High Resoltn)
Accessing/Changing
Access High Resoltn from the CFM Sub Menu page two. Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display page two and highlight High Resoltn. To activate or deactivate the high resolution function, press the up or down Sub Menu Select arrow keys.
Benefits
Optimizes CFM color display by changing system parameters to maximize color line density.
Values
When High Resoltn is highlighted in the sub menu display, the function is on. When it is not highlighted, it is off. High Resolution is a pre-processing function.

High Resolution will cause the scan frame rate to decrease.
Adding Color 27
Color Flow Display Threshold

Description
Color flow display threshold is the gray scale level at which the overlay of color information stops. If the display threshold is set at a gray shade percentage of 34, any color information available will be overlaid below 34% of the gray scale map. Color information will not be placed on top of any part of the gray scale greater than 34% of maximum (white).
Illustration 191. CFM Mode Sub Menu (Color Thrshld)
Accessing/Changing
Access color threshold from the CFM Sub Menu page two. Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display page two and highlight Display Thrshld. The selected value is displayed on the Sub Menu. To increase the gray scale threshold, press the Sub Menu Select up arrow key. Press the Sub Menu Select down arrow key to decrease the gray scale threshold.
Adding Color 28

Benefits
Can limit color flow overlay to low level echoes inside vessel walls. Helps minimize color bleeding outside vessel walls.
Values
This is a post processing function. The color threshold can be set on real-time or frozen images. The settings cycle through the following values: 0% to 100% of the gray scale in 3% increments.
Adding Color 29
Color Capture (option)

Description
A software option that displays the highest mean velocity (average velocity) detected over a specific time interval.
NOTE: If a velocity map is selected, the image displays accumulated peak mean velocities. If a variance map is selected, the image displays variance for the accumulated peak mean velocities.
Illustration 192. CFM Mode Sub Menu (Capture)
Accessing/Changing
If available, access Capture from the CFM Sub Menu page two. Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display page two and highlight Capture. The selected value is displayed on the Sub Menu. To increase the capture time interval, press the Sub Menu Select up arrow key. To decrease the capture time interval, press the Sub Menu Select down arrow key.
Benefits
Useful in making slide presentations. Also refer to Basic Scan, Using Cine for post processing Cine Capture and Capture Frame functions.
Values
Off, 0.5, 1, and 2 seconds. Color Capture is a pre-processing function.
Adding Color 30
Packet Size
Description
Controls the number of samples gathered for a single color flow vector.
Illustration 193. CFM Mode Sub Menu (Packet Size)
Accessing/Changing
Access packet size from the CFM Sub Menu page three. Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display page three and highlight Packet Size. The selected value is displayed on the Sub Menu. To increase the packet size, press the Sub Menu Select up arrow key. Press the Sub Menu Select down arrow key to decrease the packet size.
Values
Soft Menu values are SMALL, MID and LARGE.
Benefits
Allows for the improvement of the color sensitivity.
Adding Color 31

Affect on other controls
.
Bioeffect
When the packet size is decreased, the frame rate is increased at the expense of CFM image quality. When the packet size is increased, CFM image quality is improved at the expense of frame rate.
Note: This function doe not work in Color M-Mode or B/CFM with Pulsed Doppler.
Changing packet size may change the TI and/or MI. Observe the output display for possible effects.
Adding Color 32
Spatial Filter
Description
Smooths color information so that it is less grainy. It averages the color information out over time.
Illustration 194. CFM Mode Sub Menu (Spatial Filter)
Accessing/Changing
Access spatial filter from the CFM Sub Menu page three. Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display page three and highlight Spatial Filter. The selected value is displayed on the Sub Menu. To increase the spatial filtering, press the Sub Menu Select up arrow key. Press the Sub Menu Select down arrow key to decrease the spatial filtering.
Values
Off, Low, Mid and High.
Adding Color 33

Benefits
Smooths color information.
Affect on other controls

Affects frame rate. The slower the spatial filter averaging, the faster the frame rate; the higher the spatial filter averaging, the slower the frame rate.
Bioeffect
Changing Spatial Average tends to decrease MI. Observe the output display for possible effects.
Adding Color 34
W. E. (Wall Echo) Cancel

Description
Wall echo cancel eliminates the low velocity echoes caused by the motion of vessel walls.
Illustration 195. CFM Mode Sub Menu (W.E. Cancel)
Accessing/Changing
Access wall echo cancel from the CFM Sub Menu page three. Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display page three and highlight W. E. Cancel. To activate/deactivate the wall echo cancel, press the Sub Menu Select up or down arrow keys.
Benefits
Eliminate low velocity echoes caused by vessel wall motion to help clean up the color Doppler display.
Values
On or Off. Wall Echo is a pre-processing function.
Adding Color 35
Color Flow Velocity Tag

Description
Allows for the assignment of a single color to a range of velocities. Real-time or frozen images may be tagged. Velocity tags can be incorporated into velocity/variance color maps.
NOTE: The tag assignment appears on the color bar for reference.
Illustration 196. CFM Mode Sub Menu (Color Tag)
Accessing/Changing
Access color tag from the CFM Sub Menu page three. Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display page three. To enable the color tag function, press the Sub Menu Select up or down arrow keys.
Adding Color 36

Benefits
Provides the ability to emphasize specific blood flow velocities so that they stand out to the eye.
Values
On/Off.
Color Flow Velocity Tag is a post-processing function.
NOTE: The CFM Tag Width is a parameter that can be preset in the Set Up/Custom Display menu page 13.
Adding Color 37
Tag Position
Description
Tag Position allows for the movement of the specified color tag range throughout the gray scale displayed.
Illustration 197. CFM Mode Sub Menu (Tag Positn)
Accessing/Changing
Access tag position from the CFM Sub Menu page three. Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display page three and highlight Tag Positn. If the Color Tag selection is not enabled when Tag Positn is selected, Color Tag is automatically activated. Press the Sub Menu Select up arrow key to move the color tag up the gray scale range. To move the color tag down the gray scale range, press the Sub Menu Select down arrow key.
Benefits
Values
Move the color tag up or down the gray scale. Color and size of the tag is determined in the Set Up/Custom Display menu page 13. Tag Position is a post-processing function.
Adding Color 38
CFM/PDI Enhancement
(option)
Overview
An option is available to enhance CFM/PDI signal processing. It requires the necessary hardware (Color Processing Board) and software (CFM/PDI Enhancement). When properly installed and activated, the CFM/PDI Enhancement option provides the following additional choices in the CFM/PDI Soft-Menu page 4:
S S S
Adaptive Color Enhancement (ACE) Noise Blanker Persistence
Illustration 198. CFM/PDI Enhancement Option Sub Menu (page four)
Adding Color 39
CFM/PDI Enhancement
ACE (Adaptive Color Enhancement)

Description
Adaptive Color Enhancement (ACE) is designed to reduce color artifact noise. This noise can appear as a flash of color synchronized with the heart beat while scanning the abdomen. The noise may also appear to fill the color window when changing window size/position or when moving the probe. Noise due to value motion in cardiac studies may be considered clutter noise.
Illustration 199. CFM/PDI Enhancement Option Sub Menu (ACE)
Accessing/Changing
The ACE function is only available with the CFM/PDI Enhancement option. Access ACE from the CFM Sub Menu page four. Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys, if necessary, to display page four. Press the Sub Menu Select up arrow key to turn on ACE. Press the Sub Menu Select down arrow key to turn off ACE.
Benefits
Reduces the color artifact noise as described in the description section.
Values
On or Off.
Affects on Other Controls

May have a tendency to reduce frame rate due to increased CFM processor functions.
Adding Color 40
CFM/PDI Enhancement
Noise Blanker
Description
Noise Blanker is intended to reduce the random noise generated due to the increase in Color Gain.
Illustration 200. CFM/PDI Enhancement Option Sub Menu (Noise Blanker)
Accessing/Changing
Access noise blanker from the CFM Sub Menu page four. Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys, if necessary, to display page four. The selected value is displayed on the Sub Menu. To increase the noise blanker, press the Sub Menu Select up arrow key. Press the Sub Menu Select bottom arrow key to decrease the noise blanker.
Benefits
Noise Rejection increases color sensitivity with the ability to use higher color gains. Very effective when observing low velocity blood flow.
Values
OFF LOW MID HIGH No Noise Blanking Minimum Noise Blanking Medium Noise Blanking Maximum Noise Blanking

Allows use of increased Color Gain or equivalent results with less gain.
Adding Color 41
CFM/PDI Enhancement
Persistence
Description
Retains the largest pixel color value until a larger value is detected or preset time has elapsed. When a higher color value for a pixel is detected, that value is retained and the persistence time is reset for that pixel. When the persistence time elapses for that pixel, color is deleted and it returns to gray scale.
Illustration 201. CFM/PDI Enhancement Option Sub Menu (Persistence)
Accessing/Changing
Access persistence from the CFM Sub Menu page four. Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys, if necessary, to display page four. The selected value is displayed on the Sub Menu. To increase persistence, press the Sub Menu Select up arrow key. Press the Sub Menu Select bottom arrow key to decrease persistence.
Benefits
Present a continuous, high sensitivity color image.
Adding Color 42
CFM/PDI Enhancement
Values
OFF SHORT MID HIGH No Persistence Short Persistence time Medium Persistence time Long Persistence time

The activation of the Persistence function will over ride any previous selections made for CFM Capture or CFM Frame Average. When Persistence is deactivated CFM Capture and CFM Frame Average will return to normal operation.
Adding Color 43
CFM/PDI Enhancement
Adding Color 44
Power Doppler Imaging

(option)
Overview
A color flow processing option to the LOGIQ 400 is Power Doppler Imaging or PDI. PDI is a different way of processing the power information from the color flow transmissions by using different color maps and not displaying directional information. Power Doppler is NOT available on the LOGIQ 400 Black & White system.
Description
Power Doppler Imaging is a color flow mapping technique used to map the strength of the Doppler signal rather than the frequency shift or velocity of the signal. Using this technique, the system plots color based on the number of reflectors that are moving, regardless of velocity.
Accessing/Changing
While scanning in the CFM Mode, enable the Blue Shift key (key will be lighted) and press P.
Note: For USA systems, the User Define Key 6 has been locked and programmed to toggle the PDI mode on/off. User Define Key 6 can be reprogrammed for other functions if it is unlocked.
Although remaining in the CFM Mode Top Menu, the system will shift to the PDI presets and color maps.
Values
Only power maps are available in the PDI mode. P1 to P4 are non-topo (power) maps.
Adding Color 45

Only changes between P1 and P2 are post processing functions and do not affect image acquisition controls. Other PDI parameters need to be changed in real-time. Some controls that affect CFM also affect PDI.
Optimizing the PDI Option

Change the following parameters on Custom Display menu page 7 for a Power Doppler specific presets. PDI Color Threshold PDI Threshold Power PDI Target Frame Rate PDI Target Frame Rate Dtl PDI Packet Size Survey PDI Packet Size Map PDI Packet Size Srvy Dtl PDI Packet Size MpDtl PDI Velocity [cm/s] PDI B Gain PDI B High Resolution PDI B Frame Average PDI B Wall Filter PDI M Gain (Delta from B) PDI M Wall Filter PDI ACE PDI Noise Blanker PDI Persistence : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 100 0 LOW LOW LARGE LARGE LARGE LARGE 20 (a range of 10-20 is useful) 20 (user preference) ON OFF (user choice) Low Mid High (user choice
High preferred)
M1 (high frequencies) M4 (low frequencies) 0 M1 (high frequencies) M4 (low frequencies) Option, user choice Option, user choice OPtion, user choice
Adding Color 46

Optimizing the PDI Option
Custom Display menu page 14 also has a few parameters specific to PDI. CFM/PDI Initial Mode PDI B/W Display PDI Default Map PDI Dynamic Range PDI Tag Auto Start PDI Tag Center [%] PDI Tag Width [%] : : : : : : : Choose CFM or PDI for the default mode. On equals transparent mode for P1 and P2 maps. User choice User choice OFF 0 3
Hints
The PDI Velocity choice is a trade-off between low flow detectability and wall motion. The PDI B High Resolution choice is a trade-off between frame rate and color resolution. The PDI B Frame Average choice is a trade-off between a sharper noisy appearance or a smoother less noisey appearance to the image. The activation of the Persistence function will over ride any previous selections made for PDI B Frame Average. When Persistence is deactivated PDI B Frame Average will return to normal operation.
IMPORTANT
.
t
The PDI B Wall Filter choice is made depending on the frequency of the probe.
NOTE: Remember that parameters found on Custom Display page 7 are probe dependent. Set up these parameters for all probes that will be used for PDI. NOTE: Parameters on Custom Display page 14 are effective for all probes.
Adding Color 47

Adding Color 48
Colorized Gray Scale

Gray Scale Color Basics
Each mode selection (except CFM) can display the shades of gray as shades of a color. The system simply maps out the gray levels as hues of a color scale. The gray scale bar changes color and the image display changes accordingly. The color displayed is selected in the Set Up/Custom Display menu. The preset Color Map is chosen separately for B-Mode, M-Mode and Doppler displays. Details on the color map selection are found in Customizing Your System. Colorized gray scale is an on/off selection found in each mode Top Menu. In each mode (B, M and PD), the color selection is found on the Sub Menu page two. Access color from the appropriate modes Sub Menu page two. Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display page two and highlight Color. The Sub Menu Select up and down arrow keys toggle colorized gray scale on or off.
Illustration 202. B-Mode Sub Menu Page 2
Adding Color 49
Colorized Gray Scale

Adding Color 50
Index
Index
Symbols
% Stenosis, Abdom/Small Parts 9, Vascular 14, Cardiology 43 Precision, Bioeffects A67 Prudent Use, OB/GYN 7 S220, Bioeffects A26, Bioeffects A55 S222, Bioeffects A26, Bioeffects A57 S317, Bioeffects A27, Bioeffects A59 S611, Bioeffects A27, Bioeffects A61 Safety, Safety 19 T739, Bioeffects A28, Bioeffects A63 Tables, Bioeffects A20 Acoustic Output Hazard, Safety 8 Acoustic Zoom, Basic Scan 65 Advanced Cardiac Measurement Option, SubMenu, Basic Scan 49 Advanced Vascular, Vascular 27 Menu Selections, Vascular 27 Automatic Determination, Vascular 29 Manual Determination, Vascular 28 Report Page Layout, Vascular 30 Venous Comments, Vascular 34 Air Filter Cleaning, User Maintenance 60 Locating, User Maintenance 59 Removing, User Maintenance 60 ALARA, Bioeffects A10 Angle Calculation, Abdom/Small Parts 7, Cardiology 41 Correction (Theta), Doppler, Doppler 20 Correction Control, Getting Started 47 Annotation, Basic Scan 51 Blue Shift, Basic Scan 57 Clear, Basic Scan 52 CTRL+M, Basic Scan 52 Cursor Home, Basic Scan 52 Editing, Basic Scan 58 Image, Basic Scan 56 Library, Basic Scan 53 Red Shift, Basic Scan 57 Set, Basic Scan 53 Shift+TAB, Basic Scan 53 Special Keys, Basic Scan 57 Tab, Basic Scan 53 Aortic Valve, Cardiology 134, Cardiology 139 Apical 2 Chamber, Cardiology 130 Apical 4 Chamber, Cardiology 127 Application Presets, Defining a User Preset, Customize 139
Numbers
546L, Probes 32 739L, Probes 33
A
Abdomen/Small Parts, Measurements A/B Ratio, Abdom/Small Parts 14 Max PG, Abdom/Small Parts 19 Mean PG, Abdom/Small Parts 21 Pulsatility Index (PI), Abdom/Small Parts 14 Resistance Index (RI), Abdom/Small Parts 14 S/D Ratio, Abdom/Small Parts 14 Accessories Connector Panel, Getting Started 30 Placing an order, Assistance D1 Requesting a catalog, Assistance D1 ACE CFM/PDI Enhancement Option, Adding Color 39 Color Flow, Adding Color 40 Acoustic Output 546L, Bioeffects A24, Bioeffects A51 739L, Bioeffects A24, Bioeffects A49 Adjusting, Basic Scan 19 B510, Bioeffects A20, Bioeffects A33 Best Practices, Safety 19 C364, Bioeffects A21, Bioeffects A35 C386, Bioeffects A21, Bioeffects A37 C551, Bioeffects A22, Bioeffects A39 C721, Bioeffects A22, Bioeffects A41 CWD2, Bioeffects A20, Bioeffects A65 CWD5, Bioeffects A21, Bioeffects A65 Display, Basic Scan 18 E721, Bioeffects A23, Bioeffects A43 Fetal Exposure, OB/GYN 7 General Warning, OB/GYN 7 I739, Bioeffects A23, Bioeffects A45 Key to probe tables, Bioeffects A66 key to probe tables, Bioeffects A69 L764, Bioeffects A25, Bioeffects A47 LA39, Bioeffects A25, Bioeffects A53
LOGIQ 400 User Manual 2156967-100 Rev 0
Index 1
Index
Archive, Image, Basic Scan 81 Audio Speakers, Getting Started 29 VCR Recording, VCR Operation H30 Volume Control, VCR Operation H31 Audio Volume, Getting Started 47 Doppler, Doppler 18 Auto Sequence Programming, Cardiology 108 SubMenu, Basic Scan 47 Top Menu, Basic Scan 47 Auto Trace, Doppler, Doppler 40 Aux Gain, Cardiology 67 Wave, Cardiology 66 SubMenu, Basic Scan 40 Tag Position, B-Mode 34 TGC, B-Mode 6 Top Menu, Basic Scan 40 Typical Exam, B-Mode 3 With Doppler, Doppler 16 BMode Analysis Apical 2 Chamber, Cardiology 130 Apical 4 Chamber, Cardiology 127 Parasternal Long Axis, Cardiology 123 Parasternal Short Axis Aortic Valve, Cardiology 124 Mitral Valve, Cardiology 125 Papillary Muscles, Cardiology 126 B/M Gain, Getting Started 46 BMode, B-Mode 10 MMode, M-Mode 6 B/W Video Page Printer, Basic Scan 82
B
B Pause, Getting Started 48 Doppler, Doppler 27 BMode B/M Gain, B-Mode 10 Biopsy Guidelines, B-Mode 31 Circumference/Area, Gen. Meas/Calcs 11 Color, B-Mode 30 Color Tag, B-Mode 33 Colorized, B-Mode 30 Colorized Gray Scale Color Tag, B-Mode 33 Tag Position, B-Mode 34 Depth, B-Mode 8 Display, Basic Scan 14 Display Format (Dual), B-Mode 15 Distance Measurement, Gen. Meas/Calcs 7 Dual Format, B-Mode 15 Dynamic Range, B-Mode 18 Echo Level Measurement, Gen. Meas/Calcs 13 Edge Enhance, B-Mode 39 Focus Number, B-Mode 22 Focus Position, B-Mode 16, B-Mode 24 Frame Averaging, B-Mode 26 Gray Scale, B-Mode 30 Gray Scale Map, B-Mode 20 Image Rotation, B-Mode 35 Image Softener, B-Mode 29 Measurements, Gen. Meas/Calcs 1 Optimizing the Image, B-Mode 5 Penetration, B-Mode 28 Rejection, B-Mode 37 Reverse, B-Mode 14 Scan Area Position, B-Mode 13 Scan Area Size, B-Mode 12
B510, Probes 42 Backup, User Data, Customize 149 Baseline Shift, Getting Started 48 Color Flow, Adding Color 14 Doppler, Doppler 26 Bi Plane Ellipsoid Method, Cardiology 22, Cardiology 119 Bioeffects Acoustic output, Bioeffects A6 ALARA, Bioeffects A10 Concerns surrounding diagnostic ultrasound, Bioeffects A1 Endnotes, Bioeffects A68 Mechanical, Bioeffects A3 Operator awareness, Bioeffects A4 Thermal, Bioeffects A2 Tissue characteristics, Bioeffects A5 Training and user assistance, Bioeffects A19 Biological Hazard, Safety 5, Safety 10 Biopsy Depth Cursor, B-Mode 32 Guidelines, B-Mode 31 Procedures, Biopsy 1 Accessories & supplies, Biopsy 5 Guide attachment, Biopsy 10 Probes, Biopsy 21 Special concerns, Biopsy 3 Blue Shift, Basic Scan 57 Body Patterns, Getting Started 42, Basic Scan 59 Illustrations, Patterns Available, Basic Scan 60 SubMenu, Basic Scan 47 Bullet Method, Cardiology 13, Cardiology 113
Index 2
Index
C
C364, Probes 25 C386, Probes 26 C551, Probes 27 C721, Probes 28 Calculation, Accuracy, System Data B5 Calculation Formulas Biplane Ellipsoid Method, Cardiology 36 Bullet Method, Cardiology 33 General, Abdom/Small Parts 31 GYN, OB/GYN 98 Left Ventricular, Cardiology 31 Bi Plane Ellipsoid Method, Cardiology 119 Bullet Method, Cardiology 113 Cubed Method, Cardiology 109 Gibson Method, Cardiology 121 Modified Simpsons Rule Method, Cardiology 115 Single Plane Ellipsoid Method, Cardiology 117 Teichholz Method, Cardiology 111 Modified Simpsons Rule Method, Cardiology 34 Single Plane Ellipsoid Method, Cardiology 35 Teichholz Method, Cardiology 32 Vascular, Vascular 26 Advanced, Vascular 37 Calculations Cardiology, Cardiology 37 Erasing, Gen. Meas/Calcs 4 General Instructions, Gen. Meas/Calcs 3 GYN, OB/GYN 1 OB, OB/GYN 1 Urology, Abdom/Small Parts 33 Vascular, Vascular 6 Capture, Color Flow, Adding Color 30 Capture Frame, Basic Scan 79 Cardiac Calculation Formulas Aortic Valve, Cardiology 134, Cardiology 139 Apical 2 Chamber, Cardiology 130 Apical 4 Chamber, Cardiology 127 Left/Right Ventricle, Cardiology 131 Mitral Valve, Cardiology 133, Cardiology 137 Parasternal Long Axis, Cardiology 123 Parasternal Short Axis Aortic Valve, Cardiology 124 Mitral Valve, Cardiology 125 Papillary Muscles, Cardiology 126 Pulmonic Valve, Cardiology 135, Cardiology 141 Tricuspid Valve, Cardiology 136, Cardiology 143 Cardiac Output, Abdom/Small Parts 23 Automatic Calculation, Abdom/Small Parts 25 Cardiology, Cardiology 1 Bi Plane Ellipsoid Method, Cardiology 22
BSA Calculation Methods, Cardiology 6 Bullet Method, Cardiology 13 Calculations, Cardiology 37 Cubed Method, Cardiology 7 ECG, Cardiology 57 Exam Menu, Basic Scan 8 Measurements % Stenosis, Cardiology 43 Angle, Cardiology 41 ET, Cardiology 50 Max PG, Cardiology 52 Mean PG, Cardiology 54 MVA, Cardiology 49 PHT, Cardiology 48 Volume, Cardiology 37 Modified Simpsons Rule Method, Cardiology 13 Overview, Cardiology 3 Single Plane Ellipsoid Method, Cardiology 22 Teichholz Method, Cardiology 7 Care and Maintenance, Cleaning the system Air Filters, User Maintenance 59 Cabinet, User Maintenance 55 Foot Switch, User Maintenance 57 Monitor, User Maintenance 55 Operator control panel, User Maintenance 57 Page Printer, User Maintenance 58 VCR, User Maintenance 57 Caution, Safety 3, Assistance D2 CFM. See Color Flow CFM Shrink, Doppler, Doppler 49 CFM/PDI Enhancement, Adding Color 39 CFM/PWD Ratio, Doppler, Doppler 47 Cine, Basic Scan 77 Accessing, Basic Scan 75 Capture Frame, Basic Scan 79 Cine Capture, Basic Scan 79 Cine Gauge, Basic Scan 78 Cine Guage/Image Tracking, Basic Scan 80 Exiting, Basic Scan 79 Functionality, Basic Scan 74 Helpful Hints, Basic Scan 80 Introduction, Basic Scan 73 Loop Speed, Basic Scan 78 Memory, Basic Scan 74 Side Change, Basic Scan 78 SubMenu, Basic Scan 46 Top Menu, Basic Scan 46 Using Cine Loop, Basic Scan 76 Cine Capture, Basic Scan 79 Cine Scroll, Getting Started 46 Circuit breaker, Getting Started 19 Class I Equipment, Safety 13
Index 3
Index
Cleaning Foot Switch, User Maintenance 57 Monitor, User Maintenance 55 Operator control panel, User Maintenance 57 Page Printer, User Maintenance 58 System cabinet, User Maintenance 55 VCR, User Maintenance 57 Clear, Getting Started 43 Clinical instructions for fetal use, Bioeffects A11 Fetal heart, Bioeffects A13 Umbilical artery, Bioeffects A11 Uterine artery, Bioeffects A12 Color BMode, B-Mode 30 Doppler, Doppler 42 Gray Scale BMode, B-Mode 30 Color Tag, B-Mode 33 Tag Position, B-Mode 34 Basics, Adding Color 49 Doppler, Doppler 42 Color Tag, Doppler 43 Tag Position, Doppler 44 MMode, M-Mode 21 Color Tag, M-Mode 22 Tag Position, M-Mode 23 MMode, M-Mode 21 Color Flow, Adding Color 1 ACE, Adding Color 40 Activating, Adding Color 5 Baseline Shift, Adding Color 14 Capture, Adding Color 30 Color Window, Adding Color 5 Common Controls, Adding Color 10 Control Layout, Adding Color 9 Diag Mode, Adding Color 20 Display, Basic Scan 27 Exiting, Adding Color 7 Frame Average, Adding Color 23 Gain, Adding Color 11 High Resolution, Adding Color 27 MMode, Adding Color 7 Maps, Adding Color 17 Measurements, Gen. Meas/Calcs 1 Mode Distance, Gen. Meas/Calcs 25 Echo Level (Gray Scale), Gen. Meas/Calcs 25 Trace, Gen. Meas/Calcs 25 Velocity Point, Gen. Meas/Calcs 26 MTI Filter, Adding Color 22 Noise Blanker, Adding Color 41 Packet Size, Adding Color 31 Penetration (Penet.), Adding Color 25 Persistence, Adding Color 42 Slant Scan, Adding Color 18 Spatial Filter, Adding Color 33 Spectrum Invert, Adding Color 12 SubMenu, Basic Scan 43, Adding Color 6 Tag Position, Adding Color 38 Threshold, Adding Color 28 Top Menu, Basic Scan 43 Typical Exam, Adding Color 3 Velocity Scale, Adding Color 13 Velocity Tag, Adding Color 36 W.E. Cancel, Adding Color 35 Window, Linear Probe, Adding Color 18 Window Size, Adding Color 15 Color Printer, Troubleshooting, User Maintenance 17 Color Tag BMode, B-Mode 33 Color Flow, Adding Color 36 Doppler, Doppler 43 MMode, M-Mode 22 Color Threshold, Color Flow, Adding Color 28 Color Video Page Printer, Basic Scan 83 Comment, Getting Started 41 Displaying, Basic Scan 55 Editing, Basic Scan 54, Basic Scan 58 Entering, Basic Scan 54 Scripts, Basic Scan 55 SubMenu, Basic Scan 47 Comments, Venous Page, Vascular 34 Console Labels, Safety 24 Contraindications, Doppler, Introduction 7 Control B/M Gain, Getting Started 46 Cine Scroll, Getting Started 46 Depth, Getting Started 45 Gain, Getting Started 47 CFM, Getting Started 47 Doppler, Getting Started 47 Rotation, Getting Started 43 Volume, Getting Started 47 Zoom Size, Getting Started 43 Control Z, VCR Counter Reset, VCR Operation H21 Controls, Getting Started 33 Counter, VCR Display, VCR Operation H19 Coupling Gels, Probes 22
Index 4
Index
Cubed Method, Cardiology 7, Cardiology 109 Cursor Annotation, Basic Scan 51 Biopsy Depth, B-Mode 32 Color Flow Doppler, Adding Color 18 Doppler, Doppler 17 Cursors, Gen. Meas/Calcs 6 Custom Display Presets, Customize 15 Customizing Your System, Customize 1 CWD SubMenu, Basic Scan 42 Top Menu, Basic Scan 42 CWD2, Probes 43 CWD5, Probes 44 Depth, Basic Scan 17 DF, Basic Scan 23 DG, Basic Scan 23 Doppler, Basic Scan 22 Dual Spectrum, Basic Scan 26 Spectrum, Basic Scan 25 Dual BMode Display Format, Basic Scan 30 Dual Format, Basic Scan 31 Dyn, Basic Scan 17 FR/Cine, Basic Scan 17 GA, Basic Scan 15 Gain, Basic Scan 17 Gray Scale, Basic Scan 16 Hospital Name, Basic Scan 15 HR, Basic Scan 18 ID, Basic Scan 15 Image Rotation, B-Mode 35 MMode Dual Spectrum, Basic Scan 26 Spectrum, Basic Scan 25 Measurements, Basic Scan 18 MTI Filter, Basic Scan 28 Operator Messages, Basic Scan 18 Patient Name, Basic Scan 15 PRF, Basic Scan 23 Probe Name, Basic Scan 15 Orientation, Basic Scan 15 Sample Volume Length (SVL), Basic Scan 23 Scale Marker, Basic Scan 20 Scroll Depth, Basic Scan 21 Soft Menu, Basic Scan 33 SPEC INV, Basic Scan 24 TGC Curve, Basic Scan 21 Time, Basic Scan 15 Time Scale, Basic Scan 24 Top/Bottom B Large Preset, Basic Scan 29 Top/Bottom B Mid Preset, Basic Scan 29 Top/Bottom B Small Preset, Basic Scan 30 TV Counter, Basic Scan 17 Units (V or F), Basic Scan 28 Velocity Scale, Basic Scan 28 VTR Counter, Basic Scan 17 VTR Status, Basic Scan 17 Wall Filter (WV), Basic Scan 23 Zoom, Basic Scan 21 with Reference, Basic Scan 31 Display Format (Dual), BMode, B-Mode 15 Display Messages, User Maintenance 14
D
Danger, Safety 3, Safety 9 Defibrillator Caution, Safety 24 Depth, Getting Started 45 BMode, B-Mode 8 Device Labels, Safety 11 Diag Mode, Color Flow, Adding Color 20 Diagnostics, Operator, User Maintenance 23 Accessing, User Maintenance 24 Diastolic/Systolic Ratio (D/S), OB/GYN 31 Disk Drive, Floppy Disk, Getting Started 25 Display, Basic Scan 13 A Output, Basic Scan 18 Acoustic Output %, Basic Scan 15 Angle, Basic Scan 23 BMode, Basic Scan 13 BMode Format, Basic Scan 14 B/W Threshold Marker, Basic Scan 28 Body Pattern, Basic Scan 17 CFM Area Cursor, Basic Scan 28 CG, Basic Scan 28 Color Flow, Basic Scan 27 Color Scale, Basic Scan 16, Basic Scan 28 D. Velocity, Basic Scan 24 Date, Basic Scan 15
Index 5
Index
Doppler Activating CWD, Doppler 13 Activating PWD, Doppler 11 Angle Correction, Getting Started 47, Doppler 20 Audio Volume, Doppler 18 Auto Trace, Doppler 40 B Pause, Doppler 27 BMode Controls, Doppler 16 Baseline Shift, Doppler 26 CFM Shrink, Doppler 49 CFM/PWD Ratio, Doppler 47 Color, Doppler 42 Color Flow, Adding Color 1 Activating, Adding Color 5 Common Controls, Adding Color 10 Control Layout, Adding Color 9 MMode, Adding Color 7 Typical Exam, Adding Color 3 Color Gain, Adding Color 11 Color Tag, Doppler 43 Color Window, Adding Color 5 Colorized Gray Scale, Doppler 42 Color Tag, Doppler 43 Tag Position, Doppler 44 Continuous Wave Definition, Doppler 8 NonImaging, Doppler 8 Steerable, Doppler 8 Contraindications, Introduction 7 Control Layout, Doppler 15 CWD, SubMenus, Doppler 13 Display, Basic Scan 22, Basic Scan 25, Doppler 4 Dual Display, Basic Scan 26 Dynamic Range, Doppler 28 Fetal Exams Contraindications, OB/GYN 5 Indications, OB/GYN 5 Fetal use, Introduction 6 Introduction, Doppler 3 M/D Cursor, Doppler 17 Measurements, Gen. Meas/Calcs 1 Optimization, Doppler 15 Peak Velocity, Gen. Meas/Calcs 15 Penetration, Doppler 38 Pulsed Wave Definition, Doppler 5 Frequencies Used, Doppler 5 PWD SubMenu, Doppler 11 Uses, Doppler 12 Rejection, Doppler 45 Sample Volume Length, Doppler 34 Slant Scan, Doppler 30 Spectral Gain, Doppler 19 Spectrum, Gain, Doppler 19 Spectrum Invert, Doppler 22 Sweep Speed, Doppler 36 Tag Position, Doppler 44 TAMAX, Gen. Meas/Calcs 16 Typical Exam CWD, Doppler 9 PWD, Doppler 6 Typical Use, Doppler 3 Velocity Scale, Doppler 23 Wall Filter, Doppler 32 Doppler Analysis Aortic Valve, Cardiology 139 Mitral Valve, Cardiology 137 Pulmonic Valve, Cardiology 141 Tricuspid Valve, Cardiology 143 Dual, Cardiology 61 Dual Format, BMode, B-Mode 15 Dynamic Range BMode, B-Mode 18 Doppler, Doppler 28 MMode, M-Mode 12
E
E721, Probes 29 ECG, Cardiology 57 Cine Guage/Image Tracking, Basic Scan 80, Cardiology 69 Gain, Cardiology 67 Lead Placement, Cardiology 59 Positn, Cardiology 68 Soft Menu, Cardiology 58 SubMenu, Basic Scan 45 Top Menu, Basic Scan 45 Wave, Cardiology 66 Edge Enhance BMode, B-Mode 39 MMode, M-Mode 17 Electrical Hazard, Safety 5, Safety 8, Safety 9 Ellipse, Getting Started 43 EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility), Safety 14 End Frame, Basic Scan 76 Endometrium Thickness, OB/GYN 93 Equipment Safety, Safety 9 ET (Ejection Time), Cardiology 50 Exam Application Presets, Defining a User Preset, Customize 139 Beginning, Basic Scan 3 Explosion Hazard, Safety 6, Safety 9
Index 6
Index
F
Fetal Doppler, OB/GYN 5 Efficacy, Bioeffects A14 Cardiac anomalies, Bioeffects A14 IUGR, Bioeffects A14 Summary, Bioeffects A15 Suggested guidelines, Bioeffects A16 Methodology, Bioeffects A17 Variance studies, Bioeffects A18 Fetal Growth Trend Data List Management, OB/GYN 72 Growth Trending, OB/GYN 63 List ID Management, OB/GYN 64 Storing Patient Information, OB/GYN 57 Fetal Heart Rate, OB/GYN 34 Fetal Trend Management, OB/GYN 57 Fetal Trend management, Multigestation option, OB/GYN 81 Floppy Disk Drive, Getting Started 25 Focus Number, BMode, B-Mode 22 Position, BMode, B-Mode 16, B-Mode 24 Foot Switch, Getting Started 21 Cleaning, User Maintenance 57 Frame Averaging BMode, B-Mode 26 Color Flow, Adding Color 23 Freeze, Getting Started 46, Basic Scan 71 Foot Switch, Basic Scan 72
Stroke Volume Ratio (SV), Abdom/Small Parts 26 TAMAX, Abdom/Small Parts 18, Abdom/Small Parts 30 Urology. See General Calculations Volume, Abdom/Small Parts 3 General Measurements, Gen. Meas/Calcs 1 Gestational Sac (GS), OB/GYN 29 Gibson Method, Cardiology 121 Gray Scale Colorized BMode, B-Mode 30 Color Tag, B-Mode 33 Tag Position, B-Mode 34 Basics, Adding Color 49 Doppler, Doppler 42 Color Tag, Doppler 43 Tag Position, Doppler 44 MMode, M-Mode 21 Color Tag, M-Mode 22 Tag Position, M-Mode 23 MMode, M-Mode 14 Map, BMode, B-Mode 20 Ground Point, Safety 25 GS, OB Measurements, OB/GYN 29 Guidelines, Biopsy, BMode, B-Mode 31 GYN Calculation Formulas, OB/GYN 98 Exam Menu, Basic Scan 8 Exam Preparation, OB/GYN 3 Measurements, OB/GYN 89, OB/GYN 92 Endometrium Thickness, OB/GYN 93 Ovarian Height, OB/GYN 89 Ovarian Length, OB/GYN 89 Ovarian Width, OB/GYN 89 RI, OB/GYN 95 Uterine Height, OB/GYN 92 Uterine Length, OB/GYN 92 Uterine Width, OB/GYN 92 Summary Report, Layout, OB/GYN 97
G
Gain CFM, Getting Started 47 Color Doppler, Adding Color 11 Doppler, Getting Started 47 General Calculations % Stenosis, Abdom/Small Parts 9 Angle, Abdom/Small Parts 7 Cardiac Output (CO), Abdom/Small Parts 23 CFM Mode, Velocity Point. See General Calculations Heart Rate (HR), Abdom/Small Parts 16, Abdom/Small Parts 28, Abdom/Small Parts 29, Abdom/Small Parts 30 Radiology/Abdomen. See General Calculations Small Parts. See General Calculations
H
Hazard Acoustic Output, Safety 5 Symbols, Safety 5 Heart Rate (HR), Abdom/Small Parts 16, Abdom/Small Parts 28, Abdom/Small Parts 29, Abdom/Small Parts 30, OB/GYN 34, Vascular 19
Index 7
Index
High Resolution, Color Flow, Adding Color 27 HR, OB/GYN 34, Vascular 19 Set, Getting Started 43 Soft Menu, Getting Started 37 Spectrum Invert, Getting Started 48 User Define, Getting Started 49 Velocity Scale, Getting Started 48 Zoom, Getting Started 43 Keyboard, Getting Started 33, Getting Started 50 Back Space, Getting Started 50 Blue Shift, Getting Started 51 Caps Lock, Getting Started 51 Control, Getting Started 50 Cursor Home, Getting Started 50 Escape, Getting Started 50 Red Shift, Getting Started 51 Return, Getting Started 50 Tab, Getting Started 51
I
I739, Probes 31 ID/Name, Getting Started 35, Basic Scan 10 Illumination, key, Getting Started 34 Image Annotation, Basic Scan 51, Basic Scan 56 Archiving, Basic Scan 81 Freeze, Basic Scan 71 Memory, Basic Scan 85 Printing B/W Video Page Printer, Basic Scan 82 Color Video Page Printer, Basic Scan 83 Recall, Basic Scan 86 Rotation, BMode, B-Mode 35 Softener, BMode, B-Mode 29 Image Archive Option SubMenu, Basic Scan 46 Top Menu, Basic Scan 46 Image Memory, Getting Started 45 Image Recall, Getting Started 45, Basic Scan 86 SubMenu, Basic Scan 48 Index of Presets, Customize 5 Information, Requesting, Assistance D1
L
L764, Probes 34 LA39, Probes 36 Labels, Icon Description, Safety 11 Laser Camera, Basic Scan 84 Leakage Current, Safety 13 Left Ventricular, Calculation Formulas, Cardiology 31 Bi Plane Ellipsoid Method, Cardiology 119 Bullet Method, Cardiology 113 Cubed Method, Cardiology 109 Gibson Method, Cardiology 121 Modified Simpsons Rule Method, Cardiology 115 Single Plane Ellipsoid Method, Cardiology 117 Teichholz Method, Cardiology 111 Left/Right Ventricle, Cardiology 131 Library, Annotation, Basic Scan 53 Entering/Editing, Basic Scan 54 Locatn (Location), OB/GYN 30 LOGIQ 500 Back view, Getting Started 9 Features, Introduction 8 Front view, Getting Started 7 General Indications for Use, Introduction 6 Left side view, Getting Started 6 Moving, Getting Started 54 Relocating, Getting Started 53 Right side view, Getting Started 10 Transporting, Getting Started 55 Wheels, Setting the Lock, Getting Started 57 Loop, Cine, Basic Scan 76 Loop Speed, Basic Scan 78
K
Key B Pause, Getting Started 48 Baseline Shift, Getting Started 48 Body Pattern, Getting Started 41 Clear, Getting Started 43 Comment, Getting Started 41 Ellipse, Getting Started 43 Freeze, Getting Started 46 ID/Name, Getting Started 35 Illumination, Getting Started 34 Image Memory, Getting Started 45 Image Recall, Getting Started 45 M/D Cursor, Getting Started 41 Measurement, Getting Started 42 Mode, Getting Started 44 New Patient, Getting Started 35, Getting Started 45 Probe Controls, Getting Started 36 Record 1, Getting Started 46 Record 2, Getting Started 46 Reverse, Getting Started 45 Scan Area, Getting Started 41
Index 8
Index
LT Bifurc, Vascular 8 LT CCA, Vascular 8 LT ECA, Vascular 8 LT ICA, Vascular 8 LT ICA/CCA, Vascular 9 Mean PG, Abdom/Small Parts 21, Cardiology 54 Abdomen/Small Parts Calculations, Abdom/Small Parts 21 Automatic Calculation, Abdom/Small Parts 22 Cardiology Calculations, Cardiology 54 Measurement, Getting Started 42 Accuracy, System Data B3 Cursors, Gen. Meas/Calcs 6 Key, Gen. Meas/Calcs 6 Measurement Pressed, SubMenu, Basic Scan 48 Measurements Abdomen/Small Parts A/B Ratio, Abdom/Small Parts 14 Pulsatility Index (PI), Abdom/Small Parts 14 Resistance Index (RI), Abdom/Small Parts 14 S/D Ratio, Abdom/Small Parts 14 BMode Circumference/Area, Gen. Meas/Calcs 11 Distance, Gen. Meas/Calcs 7 Echo Level, Gen. Meas/Calcs 13 Bi Plane Ellipsoid Method, Cardiology 22 Bullet Method, Cardiology 13 Calculations, Gen. Meas/Calcs 4 Cardiology % Stenosis, Cardiology 43 Angle, Cardiology 41 ET, Cardiology 50 MVA, Cardiology 49 PHT, Cardiology 48 Volume, Cardiology 37 Color Flow Distance, Gen. Meas/Calcs 25 Echo Level (Gray Scale), Gen. Meas/Calcs 25 Trace, Gen. Meas/Calcs 25 Velocity Point. See General Calculations Controls, Gen. Meas/Calcs 5 Cubed Method, Cardiology 7 Doppler Peak Velocity, Gen. Meas/Calcs 15 TAMAX, Gen. Meas/Calcs 16 General, Gen. Meas/Calcs 1 General Instructions, Gen. Meas/Calcs 3 GYN, OB/GYN 1, OB/GYN 89, OB/GYN 92 Endometrium Thickness, OB/GYN 93 Ovarian Height, OB/GYN 89 Ovarian Length, OB/GYN 89 Ovarian Width, OB/GYN 89 RI, OB/GYN 95 Uterine Height, OB/GYN 92 Uterine Length, OB/GYN 92 Uterine Width, OB/GYN 92 MMode Depth Difference, Gen. Meas/Calcs 24 Time, Gen. Meas/Calcs 19, Gen. Meas/Calcs 23 Tissue Depth, Gen. Meas/Calcs 22
M
MMode, M-Mode 1, M-Mode 5 B/M Gain, M-Mode 6 Color, M-Mode 21 Color Flow, Adding Color 7 Color Tag, M-Mode 22 Colorized Gray Scale, M-Mode 21 Color Tag, M-Mode 22 Tag Position, M-Mode 23 Depth Difference, Gen. Meas/Calcs 24 Display, Basic Scan 25 Dual Display, Basic Scan 26 Dynamic Range, M-Mode 12 Edge Enhance, M-Mode 17 Gray Scale, M-Mode 14 Introduction, M-Mode 3 M/D Cursor, M-Mode 8 Measurements, Gen. Meas/Calcs 1 Optimizing, M-Mode 5 Rejection, M-Mode 15 Sub Menu, Basic Scan 39 Sweep Speed, M-Mode 19 Tag Position, M-Mode 23 Time, Gen. Meas/Calcs 19, Gen. Meas/Calcs 23 Tissue Depth, Gen. Meas/Calcs 22 Top Menu, Basic Scan 39 Typical Exam, M-Mode 3 Zoom, Basic Scan 67, M-Mode 9 MMode Analysis Aortic Valve, Cardiology 134 Left/Right Ventricle, Cardiology 131 Mitral Valve, Cardiology 133 Pulmonic Valve, Cardiology 135 Tricuspid Valve, Cardiology 136 M/D Cursor, Getting Started 42, Getting Started 47 Doppler, Doppler 17 MMode, M-Mode 8 Maintenance, User Maintenance 53 Cleaning the Air Filters, User Maintenance 59 User, User Maintenance 1 Who to Contact, User Maintenance 4, User Maintenance 5 Max PG, Abdom/Small Parts 19, Cardiology 52 Automatic Calculation, Abdom/Small Parts 20, Cardiology 53 Cardiology Calculations, Cardiology 52 General Calculations, Abdom/Small Parts 19
Index 9
Index
Measurements Modified Simpsons Rule Method, Cardiology 13 OB, OB/GYN 1 D/S Ratio, OB/GYN 31 GS, OB/GYN 29 Hints, OB/GYN 36 HR, OB/GYN 34 Locatn, OB/GYN 30 Pulsatility Index (PI), OB/GYN 31 Resistance Index (RI), OB/GYN 31 S/D Ratio, OB/GYN 31 TAMAX Auto, OB/GYN 33 Radiology/Abdomen. See General Calculations Single Plane Ellipsoid Method, Cardiology 22 Small Parts. See General Calculations Teichholz Method, Cardiology 7 Urology. See General Calculations Vascular, Vascular 5 A/B Ratio, Vascular 12 Heart Rate, Vascular 19 Pulsatility Index (PI), Vascular 12 Resistance Index (RI), Vascular 12 RT(LT) Bifurc, Vascular 8 RT(LT) CCA, Vascular 8 RT(LT) ECA, Vascular 8 RT(LT) ICA, Vascular 8 RT(LT) ICA/CCA, Vascular 9 S/D Ratio, Vascular 12 Volume, Cardiology 37 Memory Cine, Basic Scan 74 Image, Basic Scan 85 Storage Space, Basic Scan 86 Image Recall, Basic Scan 86 Mic, VCR Operation H30 Mitral Valve, Cardiology 133, Cardiology 137 Mode, Controls, Getting Started 44 Modified Simpsons Rule Method, Cardiology 13, Cardiology 115 Monitor Adjustment Brightness, Getting Started 28 Contrast, Getting Started 28 Position, Getting Started 27 Cleaning, User Maintenance 55 Labels, Safety 21 Moving Hazard, Safety 5 MTI Filter, Color Flow, Adding Color 22 Multi Image Camera, Troubleshooting, User Maintenance 18 Multigestation Basic OB option, OB/GYN 75 Change Number of Fetuses, OB/GYN 77 Distinguishing each Fetus, OB/GYN 76 Fetal Trend Management, OB/GYN 81 Measurements/Calcs, OB/GYN 76 OB Graph, OB/GYN 79 Patient Entry Menu, OB/GYN 75 Report Page Layout, OB/GYN 78 MVA (Mitral Valve Area), Cardiology 49
N
New Patient, Getting Started 35, Basic Scan 3, Basic Scan 4 Exam Category, Basic Scan 6 Patient Entry Menu, Basic Scan 4 Rad/Abdomen, Basic Scan 7 Cardiology, Basic Scan 8 Gynecology, Basic Scan 8 Obstetrics, Basic Scan 7 Small Parts, Basic Scan 10 Urology, Basic Scan 9 Vascular, Basic Scan 9 Noise Blanker, Color Flow, Adding Color 41 NonIonizing Radiation, Safety 6
O
OB, OB/GYN 37 Anatomical Survey, OB/GYN 47 Editing, OB/GYN 48 User Programmed Features, OB/GYN 49 Data Management Center (DMC), OB/GYN 83 Exam Menu, Basic Scan 7 Exam Preparation, OB/GYN 3 Fetal Trend Management. See Fetal Growth Trend Formulas European Version, OB/GYN 22 Osaka University Method, OB/GYN 14 Other Available Formulas, OB/GYN 24 Tokyo University Method, OB/GYN 11 USA Version, OB/GYN 16 Graph, OB/GYN 51 Changing Selection, OB/GYN 54 Selection, OB/GYN 52 Measurements D/S Ratio, OB/GYN 31 GS, OB/GYN 29 Hints, OB/GYN 36 HR, OB/GYN 34 Locatn, OB/GYN 30 Pulsatility Index (PI), OB/GYN 31 Resistance Index (RI), OB/GYN 31 S/D Ratio, OB/GYN 31 Soft Menu, OB/GYN 10 TAMAX Auto, OB/GYN 33
Index 10
Index
OB Summary Report, OB/GYN 37 Editing, OB/GYN 45 European Version Layout, OB/GYN 40 Osaka University Layout, OB/GYN 41 Recording, OB/GYN 46 USA Version Layout, OB/GYN 39 Table Data, OB Tables F1 OB Format Selection, OB/GYN 9 OFD, Measurement from HC, OB/GYN 39 Operator intervention, Bioeffects A8 Optimizing, BMode, B-Mode 5 OvH, OB/GYN 91 OvL, OB/GYN 91 OvW, OB/GYN 91 Ovarian Height, OB/GYN 90, OB/GYN 91 Length, OB/GYN 90, OB/GYN 91 Width, OB/GYN 90, OB/GYN 91 Penet., Color Flow, Adding Color 25 Penetration BMode, B-Mode 28 Doppler, Doppler 38 Peripherals, Peripherals C1 Black/White Video Printer, Peripherals C2 Color Video Printer, Peripherals C4 Connector Panel, Getting Started 30 SVHS Video Cassette Recorder, Peripherals C5 Persistence, Color Flow, Adding Color 42 Personnel Safety, Safety 9 PHT (Pressure Half Time), Cardiology 48 Physio Sweep Speed, Cardiology 58 Planned Maintenance, User Maintenance 61 Post Processing BMode Color, B-Mode 30 Color Tag, B-Mode 33 Gray Scale Map, B-Mode 20 Tag Position, B-Mode 34 Color Flow Color Tag, Adding Color 36 Color Threshold, Adding Color 28 Map, Adding Color 17 Packet Size, Adding Color 31 Spatial Filter, Adding Color 33 Tag Position, Adding Color 38 W.E. Cancel, Adding Color 35 Doppler Color, Doppler 42 Color Tag, Doppler 43 Tag Position, Doppler 44 Image Rotation, B-Mode 35 MMode Color, M-Mode 21 Color Tag, M-Mode 22 Gray Scale Map, M-Mode 14 Rejection, M-Mode 15 Tag Position, M-Mode 23 Rejection BMode, B-Mode 37 Doppler, Doppler 45 Power, Getting Started 11 Circuit Breaker, Getting Started 19 Connection, Getting Started 11 Cord, Getting Started 20 Off, Getting Started 17 On/Standby, Getting Started 13 Power Doppler Imaging, Adding Color 45
P
Packet Size Affect on frame rate, Adding Color 32 Color Flow, Adding Color 31 Page Printer, Cleaning, User Maintenance 58 Parasternal Long Axis, Cardiology 123 Parasternal Short Axis Aortic Valve, Cardiology 124 Mitral Valve, Cardiology 125 Papillary Muscles, Cardiology 126 Password, Protection at Power Up, Getting Started 15 Patient Entry Menu, Basic Scan 4 Cardiology, Basic Scan 8 Gynecology, Basic Scan 8 Obstetrics, Basic Scan 7 Rad/Abdomen, Basic Scan 7 Small Parts, Basic Scan 10 Urology, Basic Scan 9 Vascular, Basic Scan 9 Patient Safety, Safety 7 PCG Gain, Cardiology 67 Wave, Cardiology 66 PDI, Adding Color 45 Optimizing, Adding Color 46, Adding Color 47
Index 11
Index
PreProcessing BMode Dynamic Range, B-Mode 18 Edge Enhance, B-Mode 39 Frame Averaging, B-Mode 26 Image Softener, B-Mode 29 Color Flow Capture, Adding Color 30 Diag Mode, Adding Color 22 Frame Average, Adding Color 23 High Resolution, Adding Color 27 Penetration (Penet.), Adding Color 25 Doppler, Dynamic Range, Doppler 28 MMode Dynamic Range, M-Mode 12 Edge Enhance, M-Mode 17 Precaution Levels, Safety 3 Preset SubMenu, Basic Scan 44 Top Menu, Basic Scan 44 Preset Index, Customize 5 Preset Parameters, Customize 1, Customize 15, Customize 77, Customize 103 Changing a Parameter, Customize 19 Menu Command Lines, Customize 17 Save Values, Customize 137 Top Menu, Defining a User Preset, Customize 139 Preset Program, Customize 103 Printing, Images, Basic Scan 82 Probe, Getting Started 22, Probes 1 546L, Probes 32 739L, Probes 33 Activating, Getting Started 24 Application, Probes 7 B510, Probes 42 Biopsy Guidelines, B-Mode 31 Body Pattern Marker, Basic Scan 59 C364, Probes 25 C386, Probes 26 C551, Probes 27 C721, Probes 28 Care and Maintenance, Probes 12 Cleaning, Probes 15 Connecting, Getting Started 22, Probes 11 Controls, Getting Started 36 Coupling Gels, Probes 22 Curved Array (Convex), Probes 24 CWD2, Probes 43 CWD5, Probes 44 Deactivating, Getting Started 25 Description, Probes 23 Disconnecting, Getting Started 23, Probes 11 Disinfecting, Probes 19 Dual Frequency Operation, Penetration, B-Mode 28, Doppler 38 E721, Probes 29 Environmental Requirements, Probes 12 I739, Probes 31 Immersion Levels, Probes 17 L764, Probes 34 LA39, Probes 36 Labelling, Probes 4 Linear Color Flow Window, Adding Color 18 Doppler Cursor, Doppler 30 Linear Array, Biopsy guide zone, Probes 30 Naming Conventions, Probes 23 Orientation Marker, Basic Scan 59 Planned Maintenance, Probes 22 S220, Probes 38 S222, Probes 39 S317, Probes 40 S611, Probes 41 Safety, Probes 13 Coupling gels Applying, Probes 22 Precautions, Probes 22 Sector, biopsy guideline, Probes 37 Special Handling Instructions, Probes 14 Specifications, Probes 8 Storing, Getting Started 24 T739, Probes 35 Probe Name Menu, Basic Scan 39 Pulmonic Valve, Cardiology 135, Cardiology 141 Pulsatility Index (PI), Abdom/Small Parts 14, OB/GYN 31, Vascular 12 PWD See also Doppler SubMenu, Basic Scan 41 Top Menu, Basic Scan 41
Index 12
Index
Q
Quality Assurance, User Maintenance 29 Baselines, User Maintenance 34 Checklist, User Maintenance 51 Frequency of tests, User Maintenance 31 Introduction, User Maintenance 29 Periodic checks, User Maintenance 34 Phantoms, User Maintenance 32 Record keeping, User Maintenance 50 Results, User Maintenance 35 System setup, User Maintenance 36 Test descriptions, User Maintenance 37 Axial distance measurement, User Maintenance 38 Axial resolution, User Maintenance 41 Contrast resolution, User Maintenance 48 Functional resolution, User Maintenance 47 Gray scale photography, User Maintenance 49 Lateral distance measurement, User Maintenance 40 Lateral resolution, User Maintenance 43 Penetration, User Maintenance 45 Typical tests, User Maintenance 30
RI, OB/GYN 95 Rotation, Getting Started 43 BMode Image, B-Mode 35 RT Bifurc, Vascular 8 RT CCA, Vascular 8 RT ECA, Vascular 8 RT ICA, Vascular 8 RT ICA/CCA, Vascular 9
S
S220, Probes 38 S222, Probes 39 S317, Probes 40 S611, Probes 41 Safety, Safety 1 Acoustic Output, Safety 19 BF Equipment, Safety 13 CF Equipment, Safety 13 Class I Equipment, Safety 13 EMC, Safety 14 Equipment and personnel safety Explosion hazard, Safety 9 Smoke and fire hazard, Safety 9 Hazard Symbols, Icon Description, Safety 5 Labels, Icon Description, Safety 11 Leakage Current, Safety 13 Patient Diagnostic Information, Safety 7 Identification, Safety 7 Mechanical Hazards, Safety 7 Patient safety Acoustic Output hazard, Safety 8 Diagnostic information, Safety 7 Electrical hazard, Safety 8 Mechanical hazards, Safety 7 Patient identification, Safety 7 Training, ALARA, Safety 8 Precaution Levels, Icon Description, Safety 3 Safety hazards, defined, Safety 5 Safety 6 Safety icons, defined, Safety 3 Warning Label, Location, Safety 21 Sample Volume Length, Doppler, Doppler 34 Save Values, Customize 137 Scan Area, Getting Started 42 Color Flow Window Size, Adding Color 15 Position, BMode, B-Mode 13 Size, BMode, B-Mode 12 Service, Requesting, Assistance D1 Set, Getting Started 43
R
R Delay, Cardiology 65 Rad/Abdomen, Exam Menu, Basic Scan 7 Radiology/Abdomen Calculations. See General Calculations Measurements. See General Calculations Record 1, Getting Started 46, Basic Scan 82, Basic Scan 83 Record 2, Getting Started 46, Basic Scan 82, Basic Scan 83 Recording, Audio, VCR Operation H30 Red Shift, Basic Scan 57 Ref Scan, Cardiology 63 Regulatory Labels Americas Systems, Safety 27 European Systems, Safety 26 Rejection BMode, B-Mode 37 Doppler, Doppler 45 MMode, M-Mode 15 Resistance Index (RI), Abdom/Small Parts 14, OB/GYN 31, OB/GYN 95, Vascular 12 Reverse, Getting Started 45 BMode, B-Mode 14 Review Loop, Basic Scan 77
Index 13
Index
SetUp SubMenu, Basic Scan 45 Top Menu, Basic Scan 45 Single, Cardiology 60 Single Plane Ellipsoid Method, Cardiology 22, Cardiology 117 Site Requirements, Getting Started 4 Slant Scan Color Flow, Adding Color 18 Doppler, Doppler 30 Small Parts Calculations. See General Calculations Exam Menu, Basic Scan 10 Measurements. See General Calculations Smoke & Fire Hazard, Safety 6, Safety 9 Smoothing, BMode, Image Softener, B-Mode 29 Soft Key, Basic Scan 33 Soft Menu, Basic Scan 33 BMode Biopsy Guidelines, B-Mode 31 Color, B-Mode 30 Color Tag, B-Mode 33 Dynamic Range, B-Mode 18 Edge Enhance, B-Mode 39 Focus Number, B-Mode 22 Focus Position, B-Mode 24 Frame Averaging, B-Mode 26 Gray Scale Map, B-Mode 20 Image Rotation, B-Mode 35 Image Softener, B-Mode 29 Penetration, B-Mode 28 Rejection, B-Mode 37 Tag Position, B-Mode 34 Color Flow ACE, Adding Color 40 Color Capture, Adding Color 30 Color Flow Map, Adding Color 17 Color Tag, Adding Color 36 Color Threshold, Adding Color 28 Diag Mode, Adding Color 20 Frame Average, Adding Color 23 High Resolution, Adding Color 27 MTI Filter, Adding Color 22 Noise Blanker, Adding Color 41 Packet Size, Adding Color 31 Penet., Adding Color 25 Persistence, Adding Color 42 Slant Scan, Adding Color 18 Spatial Filter, Adding Color 33 Tag Position, Adding Color 38 W.E. Cancel, Adding Color 35 Control Panel, Getting Started 37 Doppler Auto Trace, Doppler 40 CFM Shrink, Doppler 49 CFM/PWD Ratio, Doppler 47 Color, Doppler 42 Color Tag, Doppler 43 Dynamic Range, Doppler 28 Penetration, Doppler 38 Rejection, Doppler 45 Sample Volume Length, Doppler 34 Slant Scan, Doppler 30 Sweep Speed, Doppler 36 Tag Position, Doppler 44 Wall Filter, Doppler 32 MMode Color, M-Mode 21 Color Tag, M-Mode 22 Dynamic Range, M-Mode 12 Edge Enhance, M-Mode 17 Gray Scale Map, M-Mode 14 Rejection, M-Mode 15 Sweep Speed, M-Mode 19 Tag Position, M-Mode 23 Software Option Cardiology, Cardiology 1 OB, OB/GYN 1 Vascular, Vascular 1 Spatial Average, Affect on frame rate, Adding Color 34 Spatial Filter, Color Flow, Adding Color 33 Speakers, Getting Started 29 Spectral Gain, Doppler, Doppler 19 Spectrum Doppler, Display, Basic Scan 25 Gain, Doppler, Doppler 19 Invert, Getting Started 48, Doppler 22 Color Flow, Adding Color 12 MMode, Display, Basic Scan 25 Start Frame, Basic Scan 76 Stenosis Ratio. See % Stenosis Storage areas, Getting Started 26 Stroke Volume, Abdom/Small Parts 26 Automatic Calculation, Abdom/Small Parts 27
Index 14
Index
SubMenu, Basic Scan 33, Basic Scan 36 Advanced Cardiac Measurement Option, Basic Scan 49 Auto Sequence, Basic Scan 47 BMode, Basic Scan 40 Body Patterns, Basic Scan 47 Cine, Basic Scan 46 Color Flow, Basic Scan 43 Comment, Basic Scan 47 CWD, Basic Scan 42 ECG, Basic Scan 45 Image Archive Option, Basic Scan 46 Image Recall, Basic Scan 48 MMode, Basic Scan 39 Measurement Pressed, Basic Scan 48 Preset, Basic Scan 44 PWD, Basic Scan 41 Select, Basic Scan 37 Setup, Basic Scan 45 Summary Report GYN, Layout, OB/GYN 97 OB, OB/GYN 37 Vascular Displaying, Vascular 23 Editing, Vascular 25 Sweep Speed Doppler, Doppler 36 MMode, M-Mode 19 Sync Selectn, Cardiology 62 System Care, User Maintenance 53 Specifications, System Data B1 System Parameters, Preset Parameters, Customize 77 Systolic/Diastolic Ratio (S/D), Abdom/Small Parts 14, OB/GYN 31, Vascular 12 TGC, Getting Started 39 BMode, B-Mode 6 TGC Curve, Disable, Basic Scan 21 Time Adjustment, Customize 3 Timeline, Common Controls, M-Mode 5 Top Menu, Basic Scan 33 Auto Sequence, Basic Scan 47 BMode, Basic Scan 40 Cine, Basic Scan 46 Color Flow, Basic Scan 43 CWD, Basic Scan 42 ECG, Basic Scan 45 Image Archive Option, Basic Scan 46 Mode Default Menu, Basic Scan 34 Preset, Basic Scan 44 PWD, Basic Scan 41 Select, Basic Scan 34 SetUp, Basic Scan 45 Top Menu Select, Getting Started 37 Trackball, Getting Started 43 Tricuspid Valve, Cardiology 136, Cardiology 143 Troubleshooting, User Maintenance 3 Color printer, User Maintenance 17 Display Messages, User Maintenance 14 Multi Image Camera, User Maintenance 18 Operation Error Message, User Maintenance 16 System Error Message, User Maintenance 15 VCR, User Maintenance 18 Warning Message, User Maintenance 22 Type BF Equipment, Safety 13 Type CF Equipment, Safety 13
U
Urology Calculations, Abdom/Small Parts 33 Exam Menu, Basic Scan 9 User Data Backup, Customize 149 Defined Keys, Getting Started 49 Programming, Customize 145 Programmed Calculations, Tables, OB/GYN 29 Tables, OB/GYN 29 UtH, OB/GYN 92 UtL, OB/GYN 92 UtW, OB/GYN 92
T
T739, Probes 35 Tag Position BMode, B-Mode 34 Color Flow, Adding Color 38 Doppler, Doppler 44 MMode, M-Mode 23 TAMAX, Vascular 21 Measurement Method, OB/GYN 33 TAMAX Auto, Abdom/Small Parts 18, Abdom/Small Parts 30, Vascular 21 Teichholz Method, Cardiology 7, Cardiology 111
Index 15
Index
Uterine Height, OB/GYN 92 Length, OB/GYN 92 Width, OB/GYN 92 Velocity Scale, Getting Started 48 Color Flow, Adding Color 13 Doppler, Doppler 23 Venous, Comments Page, Vascular 34 Video Cassette Recorder. See VCR
V
Vascular, Vascular 1 Advanced, Calculation Formulas, Vascular 37 Advanced option, Vascular 27 Calculation Formulas, Vascular 26 Calculations, Vascular 6 Carotid Artery Measurements, Vascular 7 Exam Menu, Basic Scan 9 Exam Preparation, Vascular 3 Measurements, Vascular 5 A/B Ratio, Vascular 12 Heart Rate, Vascular 19 Pulsatility Index (PI), Vascular 12 Resistance Index (RI), Vascular 12 RT(LT) Bifurc, Vascular 8 RT(LT) CCA, Vascular 8 RT(LT) ECA, Vascular 8 RT(LT) ICA, Vascular 8 RT(LT) ICA/CCA, Vascular 9 S/D Ratio, Vascular 12 Summary Report Displaying, Vascular 23 Editing, Vascular 25 Vascular Calculations, % Stenosis, Vascular 14 VCR, Basic Scan 69 Basic Recording, Audio, VCR Operation H30 Cleaning, User Maintenance 57 Counter Display, VCR Operation H19 Counter Reset, Control Z, VCR Operation H21 Velocity Ratio (A/B), Abdom/Small Parts 14, Vascular 12
Volume, Getting Started 47, Abdom/Small Parts 3, Cardiology 37 Doppler Audio, Doppler 18 VTR. See VCR
W
W.E. Cancel, Color Flow, Adding Color 35 Wall Filter, Doppler, Doppler 32 Warning, Safety 3, Safety 9, Peripherals C1 Label Locations, Safety 21 Warranties Duration, Warranties E1 Scope, Warranties E1 Wheels, Getting Started 57 Word Wrap, Basic Scan 56
Z
Zoom, Getting Started 43 Display Format, Basic Scan 31 Introduction, Basic Scan 63 MMode, Basic Scan 67, M-Mode 9 Methods Acoustic Zoom, Basic Scan 65 Display, Basic Scan 66 MultiImage, Basic Scan 68 Size, Getting Started 43
Index 16
GE Medical Systems
2177612-100
Revision 0
LOGIQt 400
Copyright
GE Medical Systems
Revision History
REV
0
DATE
March 6, 1997
REASON FOR CHANGE

Initial Release
PAGE NUMBER

REVISION NUMBER
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Revision History A
Revision History
Revision History B
Customizing Your System

Time Adjustment Index of Preset Parameters Custom Display System Parameters Preset Program Exam Applications Presets User Define Keys User Data Back-up
This section explains the powerful user customizing capabilities of the LOGIQ 400. If desired, the user can set a personal default value for nearly every system parameter available. This includes the initial settings of all soft menus, body patterns, annotation library, user OB tables, calculation sequences, summary report formats, and much more.
The LOGIQ
t 400 parameters can be exam category, mode or probe dependent.
The index of parameters allows for a quick reference in finding a particular preset. Presets are divided into Custom Display, System Parameter, and Preset Program Menus.
Customize 1
Customizing Your System

Customize 2
Time Adjustment
Overview
The system clock for the LOGIQ 400 is set by service personnel to the local time during the installation process. If any other time adjustment is needed during the year, the clock can be changed in the Set Up/Utility Menu.
Time Adjustment
To adjust the system clock:
S S
Select the Set Up Top Menu. From the Set Up Sub-Menus, select Utility. The Utility Menu appears as shown in Illustration 203.
Customize 3
Time Adjustment
Time Adjustment (contd)
Enter menu number 1 or 01 (Time Adjustment) in the Utility Menu and press Return. The Time Adjustment Menu appears as shown in Illustration 204.
Illustration 204. Time Adjustment Menu
NOTE: Time is changed by adjusting the current time a maximum of plus or minus 12 hours.
S S S S
To Advance (add) the time, type in the number of hours and minutes to add to the currently displayed time. HH:MM is the format to use. To Retard (subtract) the time, type a minus sign () then the hours and minutes to be subtracted from the currently displayed time. HH:MM is the format to use. Press Return. This completes the time adjustment and the Utility Menu reappears with the new time displayed. Press the Ctrl and R keys simultaneously to exit the Utility menu and return to the previous scan mode.
The 12 hour display format has no am/pm indicator. The date will change at noon if the set time is 12 hours off.
Customize 4
Index of Preset Parameters

Overview
LOGIQ 400 presets provide the user with a powerful tool to customize initial system operation for a particular exam type. The organization structure of the presets in the system is as follows:
S
Within each of the seven exam categories to choose from in the patient entry menu, there are eight user programmable and up to eight factory applications presets. Parameters used in these presets are divided into three groups: Preset Program, Custom Display, and System Parameters. Changes to System Parameters affect all applications presets in all exam categories. These are the only parameters that affect factory presets. Nothing else can be changed in factory presets by the user. User programmable application presets can also be affected by parameters found in Preset Program and Custom Display. These parameters can customize the preset within an exam category or every user preset within an exam category. For additional flexibility, the first seven pages of the Custom Display parameters are specific to the probe in use.
Decreased setup time and increased productivity can be accomplished by establishing an application preset for types of studies that are frequently performed by customizing all parameters to values that are normally used at the start of an exam. This index provides a list of all parameters alphabetically. It references where to find the parameter on the system menus and where to find parameter information in this manual.
Customize 5
Overview (contd)
Each parameter may be affected by a change in exam category, user preset, or probe. Each parameter description in this section is coded to show how it is affected. The codes are as follows: EC UP P R Exam Category dependent User Preset dependent Probe dependent Reset to preset value with new patient selection.
Customize 6
Preset Index
A
Acoustic Power B/M (%) [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu page 1, Customize 25 Acoustic Power D/CFM/PDI (%) [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu page 1, Customize 25 Add 1 Week to EDD [EC], Preset Program menu page 3, Customize 113 Annotation Library 124 [EC, UP], Preset Program pages 7 & 8, Customize 134 Audio Tone Equalizer [EC], Custom Display menu page 8, Customize 51 Auto B Melt at Unfreeze [EC, UP], Custom Display menu page 10, Customize 56 Auto Focus Control [EC], Custom Display menu page 8, Customize 49 AUX Auto Display [EC], Custom Display menu page 15, Customize 75 AUX Gain [EC, R], Custom Display menu page 15, Customize 75 AUX Position [EC, R], Custom Display menu page 15, Customize 75 Average Activity [EC], Preset Program menu page 3, Customize 111 Average Number [EC], Preset Program menu page 3, Customize 112
B Format B Single [EC], Custom Display menu page 9, Customize 53 B Frame Average [EC, UP, P], Custom Display menu page 2, Customize 27 B Gain [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu page 2, Customize 26 B Gray Scale Map [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu page 2, Customize 28 B Image Softener [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu page 2, Customize 27 B Penetration [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu page 2, Customize 27 B Rejection [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu page 2, Customize 29 B Scale Mark [EC], Custom Display menu page 9, Customize 54 B Softener Level [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu page 2, Customize 27 B Tag Auto Start [EC, R], Custom Display menu page 9, Customize 53 B Tag Center (%) [EC, R], Custom Display menu page 9, Customize 53 B Tag Width (%) [EC, R], Custom Display menu page 9, Customize 53 B Target Frame Rate [EC, UP, P], Custom Display menu page 2, Customize 29 B Video Inverse [EC], Custom Display menu page 9, Customize 54 B&W Printer Exposure Min Interval [sec], System Parameters menu page 5, Customize 97 B&W Printer Exposure Pulse Length [msec], System Parameters menu page 5, Customize 97 B/W Image & Color Graphics [EC], Preset Program menu page 2, Customize 109 Body Pattern Copy to Active Side, System Parameters menu page 4, Customize 93 Body Pattern Package [EC, UP], Preset Program menu page 1, Customize 105 Body Pattern Package 18, System Parameters menu page 4, Customize 89 Body Pattern Probe Change Erase, System Parameters menu page 4, Customize 93 Body Pattern Probe Mark Preset [EC, UP], Preset Program menu page 1, Customize 105 Body Pattern Unfreeze Erase, System Parameters menu page 4, Customize 93 BSA Type, System Parameters menu page 2, Customize 84
B
B Angle/Width (deg. mm) [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu page 2, Customize 29 B Color Auto Start [EC, R], Custom Display menu page 9, Customize 52 B Color Map [EC, UP], Custom Display menu page 9, Customize 53 B Dynamic Range [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu page 2, Customize 26 B Edge Enhance [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu page 2, Customize 27 B Far Field Mode [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu page 2, Customize 28 B Focus Combi Number [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu page 2, Customize 29 B Focus Dual Marker [EC, UP], Custom Display menu page 9, Customize 52 B Format B Dual [EC], Custom Display menu page 9, Customize 53
Customize 7
C
Cardiac Calculation, Preset Program menu page 6, Customize 132 Cardiac Measurement Choices [EC, UP], Preset Program menu page 4 & 5, Customize 116 CFM ACE [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu page 6, Customize 43 CFM B Angle/Width (deg/mm) [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu page 5, Customize 41 CFM B Frame Average [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu page 5, Customize 40 CFM B Gain [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu page 5, Customize 40 CFM B High Resolution [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu page 5, Customize 40 CFM B Wall Filter [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu page 5, Customize 41 CFM Base Line (%) [EC, R], Custom Display menu page 13, Customize 70 CFM Capture Interval (s) [EC, R], Custom Display menu page 13, Customize 68 CFM Color Map 1 [EC], Custom Display menu page 13, Customize 69 CFM Color Map 2 [EC], Custom Display menu page 13, Customize 69 CFM Color Map 3 [EC], Custom Display menu page 13, Customize 69 CFM Color Map 4 [EC], Custom Display menu page 13, Customize 69 CFM Color Threshold [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu page 5, Customize 38 CFM M Gain (Delta from B) [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu page 6, Customize 42 CFM M Wall Filter [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu page 6, Customize 42 CFM Noise Blanker [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu page 6, Customize 43 CFM Packet Size Map [EC, UP, P], Custom Display menu page 5, Customize 40 CFM Packet Size MpDtl [EC, UP, P], Custom Display menu page 5, Customize 40 CFM Packet Size SrvyDtl [EC, UP, P], Custom Display menu page 5, Customize 40 CFM Packet Size Survey [EC, UP, P], Custom Display menu page 5, Customize 40 CFM Persistance [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu page 6, Customize 43
CFM Tag Auto Start [EC, R], Custom Display menu page 11, Customize 69 CFM Tag Center (cm/s) [EC, R], Custom Display menu page 14, Customize 69 CFM Tag Width (cm/s) [EC, R], Custom Display menu page 13, Customize 70 CFM Target Frame Rate [EC, UP, P], Custom Display menu page 5, Customize 39 CFM Target Frame Rate Dtl [EC, UP, P], Custom Display menu page 5, Customize 39 CFM Threshold Turbulence [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu page 5, Customize 39 CFM Threshold Velocity [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu page 5, Customize 38 CFM Velo Dynamic Range [EC, UP], Custom Display menu page 13, Customize 68 CFM Velocity (cm/s) [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu page 5, Customize 40 CFM Wall Echo Canceller [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu page 5, Customize 39 CFM/PDI Focus Depth (%) [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu page 5, Customize 41 CFM/PDI Initial Mode [EC. R], Custom Display menu page 14, Customize 71 CFM/PDI Initial Sequence [EC], Custom Display menu page 13, Customize 69 CFM/PDI Sequence [EC, UP], Custom Display menu page 13, Customize 68 CFM/PDI Shrink Angle/Width (deg, mm) [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu page 4, Customize 36 CFM/PDI Shrink in Triplex [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu page 4, Customize 36 CFM/PDI Spatical Filter [EC, UP, P], Custom Display menu page 5, Customize 39 CFM/PDI Start Depth (mm) [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu page 5, Customize 41 CFM/PDI Vertical Size (mm) [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu page 5, Customize 41 CFM/PWD Ratio in Triplex [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu page 4, Customize 36 Cine Gauge Auto Display [EC], Custom Display menu page 8, Customize 50 Cine Speed [EC, R], Custom Display menu page 8, Customize 50 Circ/Area Method [EC], Preset Program menu page 3, Customize 111 Col Applcat, System Parameters menu page 2, Customize 87 Col Aux, System Parameters menu page 2, Customize 87
Customize 8

Col Back Gnd, System Parameters menu page 2, Customize 85 Col Comment, System Parameters menu page 2, Customize 86 Col Dop Trac, System Parameters menu page 2, Customize 87 Col Imag Crs, System Parameters menu page 2, Customize 86 Col Mes Crs, System Parameters menu page 2, Customize 86 Col Moving, System Parameters menu page 2, Customize 87 Col Scale, System Parameters menu page 2, Customize 86 Col Sys Inf, System Parameters menu page 2, Customize 86 Color Printer Memory, System Parameters menu page 5, Customize 96 Color Printer Signal, System Parameters menu page 5, Customize 96 Color Printer Type, System Parameters menu page 5, Customize 95 Comment Clear Key Function [EC], Preset Program menu page 1, Customize 106 Comment Erase at Display Change [EC], Preset Program menu page 1, Customize 106 Comment Home Position Horizontal [EC, R], Preset Program menu page 1, Customize 106 Comment Home Position Vertical [EC, R], Preset Program menu page 1, Customize 106 CRT Menu Auto Display at Body Pattern [EC], Preset Program menu page 1, Customize 107 CRT Menu Auto Display at Comment [EC], Preset Program menu page 1, Customize 107 CRT Menu Auto Display at Image Recall [EC], Preset Program menu page 1, Customize 107 CRT Menu Auto Display at Measurement [EC], Preset Program menu page 1, Customize 107 CRT Menu Auto Erase Interval, System Parameters menu page 1, Customize 82 CUA Selection Reset on New Patient, System Parameters menu page 1, Customize 81 CWD Base Line (%) [EC, R], Custom Display menu page 13, Customize 67 CWD Dynamic Range [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu page 4, Customize 37 CWD Gain [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu page 4, Customize 36 CWD Gray Scale Map [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu page 4, Customize 37 CWD Nonaliasing mode [EC, R], Custom Display menu page 13, Customize 68 CWD Rejection [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu page 4, Customize 37 CWD Velocity (cm/s) [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu page 4, Customize 37 CWD Wall Filter (cm/s) [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu page 4, Customize 37
D
D Audio to Speaker [EC], Custom Display menu page 11, Customize 64 D Audio Volume (%) [EC, R], Custom Display menu page 11, Customize 64 D Color Auto Start [EC, R], Custom Display menu page 11, Customize 61 D Color Map [EC, UP], Custom Display menu page 11, Customize 61 D Format (Side/Side, Full) [EC], Custom Display menu page 11, Customize 62 D Image Processing [EC], Custom Display menu page 12, Customize 65 D Mode Full B+ Cursor [EC], Custom Display menu page 11, Customize 62 D Mode Full D [EC], Custom Display menu page 11, Customize 64 D Mode Side/Side B Large [EC], Custom Display menu page 11, Customize 63 D Mode Side/Side B Small [EC], Custom Display menu page 11, Customize 63 D Mode Top/Bottom B Large [EC], Custom Display menu page 11, Customize 63 D Mode Top/Bottom B Mid [EC], Custom Display menu page 11, Customize 63 D Mode Top/Bottom B Small [EC], Custom Display menu page 11, Customize 64 D Realtime Auto Trace [EC, R], Custom Display menu page 11, Customize 61 D Realtime Trace Method [EC, R], Custom Display menu page 11, Customize 61 D Tag Auto Start [EC, R], Custom Display menu page 11, Customize 61 D Tag Center (%) [EC, R], Custom Display menu page 11, Customize 62 D Tag Width (%) [EC, R], Custom Display menu page 11, Customize 62 D Time Resolution [EC], Custom Display menu page 11, Customize 66 D Type for Wall Filter [EC], Custom Display menu page 12, Customize 60
Customize 9

D Video Inverse [EC], Custom Display menu page 11, Customize 64 D/CFM Scale Mark [EC], Custom Display menu page 11, Customize 60 Date Format, System Parameters, System Parameters menu page 1, Customize 79 Delay Trigger Source, System Parameters menu page 2, Customize 84 Diag Category, System Parameters, System Parameters menu page 1, Customize 80 Diastole/Systole Determination [EC], Preset Program menu page 3, Customize 113 Display EDD with GA Value [EC], Preset Program menu page 3, Customize 113 Display Height 13 [EC], Preset Program menu page 9, Customize 136 Display Probe Name, System Parameters menu page 1, Customize 82 Display TGC Curve [EC], Custom Display menu page 9, Customize 51 Display Unit Age 14 [EC], Preset Program menu page 9, Customize 135 Display Unit Weight 12 [EC], Preset Program menu page 9, Customize 136 Displayed TI [EC], Custom Display menu page 8, Customize 49 EFBW Form (Europe), System Parameters menu page 2, Customize 85 EFBW Form (Tokyo), System Parameters menu page 2, Customize 85 End Systole Period from Prior Edge [EC, UP], Preset Program menu page 3, Customize 114 Enter Depth [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu page 1, Customize 22 External Video Signal, System Parameters menu page 5, Customize 95
F
Focus Depth (mm) [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display, Custom Display menu page 1, Customize 22 Frame Rate Display [EC], Custom Display menu page 8, Customize 51
H
Heart Rate Method [EC], Preset Program menu page 3, Customize 111 Hospital Name, System Parameters menu page 1, Customize 79
I
ID/Name Prohibition After Measurement, System Parameters menu page 2, Customize 84 Image Archive Compression [EC], Preset Program menu page 2, Customize 109 Image Back Color [EC, UP], Custom Display menu page 8, Customize 50 Image Gamma (%) [EC, UP], Custom Display menu page 8, Customize 49 Image Mode [EC, R], Custom Display menu page 8, Customize 48 Image Reverse [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu page 1, Customize 23 Image Rotation [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu page 1, Customize 23 Insite Access Enable, System Parameters menu page 1, Customize 81
E
ECG Audio Beat Sound [EC, R], Custom Display menu page 15, Customize 74 ECG Audio Beat Sound Tone [EC], Custom Display menu page 15, Customize 74 ECG Auto Display [EC], Custom Display menu page 15, Customize 73 ECG Gain [EC, R], Custom Display menu page 15, Customize 73 ECG Heart Rate Display [EC], Custom Display menu page 15, Customize 74 ECG Position [EC, R], Custom Display menu page 15, Customize 74 ECG R Delay 1 (ms) [EC, UP, R], Custom Display menu page 15, Customize 74 ECG R Delay 1 to 2 (ms) [EC, UP, R], Custom Display menu page 15, Customize 74 Echo Level Method [EC], Preset Program menu page 3, Customize 111
K
Keyboard Tab, System Parameters menu page 1, Customize 81
Customize 10
L
Language, System Parameters menu page 1, Customize 80 Length Unit [EC], Preset Program menu page 3, Customize 110
M Tag Center (%) [EC, R], Custom Display menu page 10, Customize 57 M Tag Width (%) [EC, R], Custom Display menu page 10, Customize 57 M Video Inverse [EC], Custom Display menu page 10, Customize 59 Mask Image [EC], Preset Program menu page 3, Customize 112 Mask Image Characters, System Parameters menu page 2, Customize 83 Maskline Record, System Parameters menu page 5, Customize 97 Measurement Clear Operation [EC], Preset Program menu page 3, Customize 114 Measurement Menu B [EC, UP], Preset Program menu page 6, Customize 129 Measurement Menu CFM [EC, UP], Preset Program menu page 6, Customize 129 Measurement Menu D [EC, UP], Preset Program menu page 6, Customize 129 Measurement Menu M [EC, UP], Preset Program menu page 6, Customize 129 Media Selection for Fetal Trend [EC], Preset Program menu page 3, Customize 114
M
M Color Auto Start [EC, R], Custom Display menu page 10, Customize 56 M Color Map [EC, UP], Custom Display menu page 10, Customize 56 M Dynamic Range [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu page 3, Customize 31 M Edge Enhance [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu page 3, Customize 31 M Format (Side/Side, Full) [EC], Custom Display menu page 10, Customize 57 M Gain (Delta from B) [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu page 3, Customize 31 M Gray Scale Map [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu page 3, Customize 32 M Mode FULL B + Cursor [EC], Custom Display menu page 10, Customize 57 M Mode Full M [EC], Custom Display menu page 10, Customize 59 M Mode Side/Side B Large [EC], Custom Display menu page 10, Customize 57 M Mode Side/Side B Small [EC], Custom Display menu page 10, Customize 58 M Mode Simul PD Activity [EC], Custom Display menu page 10, Customize 56 M Mode Top/Bottom B Large [EC], Custom Display menu page 10, Customize 58 M Mode Top/Bottom B Mid [EC], Custom Display menu page 10, Customize 58 M Mode Top/Bottom B Small [EC], Custom Display menu page 10, Customize 58 M Peak Hold [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu page 3, Customize 32 M Penetration [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu page 3, Customize 31 M Rejection [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu page 3, Customize 32 M Scale Mark [EC], Custom Display menu page 10, Customize 59 M Tag Auto Start [EC, UP], Custom Display menu page 10, Customize 56
N
Needle Guide Type [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu page 1, Customize 24
O
OB Report Format, System Parameters menu page 2, Customize 84 Operation Error Beep, System Parameters menu page 1, Customize 81
P
Password 18, System Parameters menu page 6, Customize 100 Password Ask, System Parameters menu page 6, Customize 98 PCG Auto Display [EC], Custom Display menu page 15, Customize 75 PCG Filter, System Parameters menu page 2, Customize 84 PCG Gain [EC, R], Custom Display menu page 15, Customize 75 PCG Position [EC, R], Custom Display menu page 15, Customize 75
Customize 11

PDI ACE [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu page 7, Customize 47 PDI B Frame Average [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu page 7, Customize 46 PDI B Gain [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu page 7, Customize 46 PDI B High Resolution [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu page 7, Customize 46 PDI B Wall Filter [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu page 7, Customize 46 PDI B/W Display [EC], Custom Display menu page14, Customize 71 PDI Color Threshold [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu page 7, Customize 44 PDI Default Map [EC], Custom Display menu page 14, Customize 72 PDI Dynamic Range [EC, UP], Custom Display menu page 14, Customize 72 PDI M Gain (Delta from B) [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu page 7, Customize 46 PDI M Wall Filter [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu page 7, Customize 46 PDI Noise Blanker [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu page 7, Customize 47 PDI Packet Size Map [EC, UP, P], Custom Display menu page 7, Customize 45 PDI Packet Size MpDtl [EC, UP, P], Custom Display menu page 7, Customize 45 PDI Packet Size SrvyDtl [EC, UP, P], Custom Display menu page 7, Customize 45 PDI Packet Size Survey [EC, UP, P], Custom Display menu page 7, Customize 45 PDI Persistance [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu page 7, Customize 47 PDI Tag Auto Start [EC, R], Custom Display menu page 14, Customize 72 PDI Tag Center (cm/s) [EC, R], Custom Display menu page 14, Customize 72 PDI Tag Width (cm/s) [EC, R], Custom Display menu page 14, Customize 72 PDI Target Frame Rate [EC, UP, P], Custom Display menu page 7, Customize 45 PDI Target Frame Rate Dtl [EC, UP, P], Custom Display menu page 7, Customize 45 PDI Threshold Power [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu page 7, Customize 44 PDI Velocity (cm/s) [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu page 7, Customize 45 PDI/PWD Ratio in Triplex [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu page 4, Customize 36 Physio Sweep Speed on B [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu page 3, Customize 31 Plug 1BW, System Parameters menu page 5, Customize 96 Plug 2CLR, System Parameters menu page 5, Customize 96 Port A, System Parameters menu page 5, Customize 97 Port B, System Parameters menu page 5, Customize 97 Power on Memory Test, System Parameters menu page 1, Customize 82 Power on Status, System Parameters menu page 1, Customize 82 Probe Direction Mark Display [EC], Custom Display menu page 8, Customize 51 PWD Alternative Scan [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu page 4, Customize 35 PWD Base Line (%) [EC, R], Custom Display menu page 13, Customize 67 PWD Dynamic Range [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu page 4, Customize 34 PWD Gain [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu page 4, Customize 34 PWD Gray Scale Map [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu page 4, Customize 34 PWD Rejection [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu page 4, Customize 35 PWD Sample Volume (mm) [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu page 4, Customize 34 PWD Velocity (cm/s) [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu page 4, Customize 35 PWD Wall Filter (cm/s) [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu page 4, Customize 35 PWD/CFM/PDI Penetration [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu page 4, Customize 33 PWD/CFM/PDI Slant Auto Start [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu page 4, Customize 34
R
R Delay Time of End Systole Prior Edge [EC, UP], Preset Program menu page 3, Customize 113 Record 1 B&W, System Parameters menu page 5, Customize 94 Record 1 Color, System Parameters menu page 5, Customize 94 Record 2 B&W, System Parameters menu page 5, Customize 95
Customize 12

Record 2 Color, System Parameters menu page 5, Customize 95 Report, System Parameters menu page 5, Customize 95 Report Cursor Blink, System Parameters memu page 1, Customize 80 Report Cursor Type, System Parameters menu page 1, Customize 80 Report Format [EC], Preset Program menu page 6, Customize 117 Report Video Inverse to Printer, System Parameters menu page 5, Customize 94 Trackball Function at Freeze [EC], Preset Program menu page 1, Customize 106
U
User Define Key No 1, System Parameters menu page 3, Customize 88 User Define Key No 2, System Parameters menu page 3, Customize 88 User Define Key No 3, System Parameters menu page 3, Customize 88 User Define Key No 4, System Parameters menu page 3, Customize 88 User Define Key No 5, System Parameters menu page 3, Customize 88 User Define Key No 6, System Parameters menu page 3, Customize 88 User ID 18, System Parameters menu page 6, Customize 99 User Table Editor, Preset Program menu page 6, Customize 120
S
Sequence 18 [EC], Preset Program menu page 4, Customize 124 Setup Blue Back Start, System Parameters menu page 2, Customize 83 Skip New Patient Y/N Ask [EC], Preset Program menu page 9, Customize 135 Standby Time (min), System Parameters menu page 1, Customize 81 Standoff Setting [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu page 1, Customize 24 System Error Erase Interval, System Parameters menu page 1, Customize 82
V
VCR Play Audio [EC], Preset Program menu page 2, Customize 109 VCR Play Audio Volume (%) [EC, R], Preset Program menu page 2, Customize 109 VCR Rec Audio Doppler [EC], Preset Program menu page 2, Customize 108 VCRPB Calib Method [EC, R], Preset Program menu page 3, Customize 111
T
TA Max Auto [EC], Preset Program menu page 3, Customize 112 TGC Depth Remap [EC], Custom Display menu page 8, Customize 50 Time Format, System Parameters, System Parameters menu page 1, Customize 80 Time Unit [EC], Preset Program menu page 3, Customize 110 Timeline Format [EC], Custom Display menu page 10, Customize 55 Timeline Sweep Method [EC], Custom Display menu page 10, Customize 55 Timeline Sweep Speed [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu page 3, Customize 30
Z
Zoom Auto Start [EC, UP, P], Custom Display menu page 1, Customize 23 Zoom Factor [EC, UP, P, R], Custom Display menu page 1, Customize 23 Zoom Reference [EC, UP, P], Custom Display menu page 1, Customize 23 Zoom Reference Update [EC, UP], Custom Display menu page 8, Customize 49
Customize 13

Customize 14
Custom Display
Overview
Custom Display in the Set Up Top Menu is fifteen pages of preset parameters that are exam category/preset name dependent. The first seven pages are detailed further because they are probe dependent within the exam category and preset name. The last eight pages detail mode-specific items for the exam category/preset name.
Illustration 205. Set Up Sub Menus (Custom Display)
A brief description of each preset parameter and the choices available for that preset follows.
NOTE: If it is necessary to quickly return to page one of the Custom Display Sub Menus, press Ctrl and 1 simultaneously. Refer to Index of Presets, Overview for the key to the codes used to describe each parameters affect.
Customize 15
Custom Display
Parameter Menu Command Lines

An example of a Custom Display parameter menu is shown in Illustration 206.
Illustration 206. Custom Display Menu
The top protected lines show the date, time, hospital name and active probe. The next four lines provide information about the menu displayed plus commands to manipulate the menu pages and parameters.
Customize 16
Custom Display
Command line one
This line shows the parameter categories available with the current one highlighted. The categories listed are:
S S S S
User Param is not active at this time. System Param has six pages of programmed parameters. Preset Program has nine pages of programmable parameters. Custom Display has fifteen pages of programmable parameters.
Command line two

This line shows the exam category and application preset name.
Command line three

This line shows the menu page displayed (1/15 is page one of fifteen). PRIOR will display the previous menu page. NEXT will display the following menu page. CONTENTS will show a summary of all Custom Display pages.
S S
Use the Trackball to place the arrow cursor on PRIOR or NEXT. Press Set to change menu pages.
Customize 17
Custom Display
Command line four
This line lists four commands that affect the parameters in the category displayed. They are: SAVE use the Trackball to place the arrow cursor over SAVE. Press Set. The system displays an overwrite prompt. Pressing Y followed by Return overwrites the old data with the values changed. Pressing N followed by Return prompts the operator to make a new user preset. if parameters were changed after the SAVE function was used, RESET will return those parameters to the saved values. Trackball the arrow cursor to RESET and press Set. DELETE is used to erase the currently displayed user preset. Factory presets cannot be erased. Trackball the arrow cursor to DELETE and press Set. EXIT returns the system to the last scan mode. Parameter changes will only be temporary if they were not saved before exiting.
RESET
Customize 18
Custom Display
Changing a Parameter
To change a parameter value: Trackball the arrow cursor to the desired parameter.
Press Set to highlight the choice. If the parameter lists several values, Trackball the arrow cursor to the desired value and press Set. If the parameter needs the value to change, use the Ellipse up or down arrow keys to increase or decrease the value. When the desired value is selected or changed, Trackball the arrow cursor to SAVE.
Press Set. A prompt at the bottom of the screen asks: Overwrite Existing Data? y or n .
.
t
Press y to save the new values for the preset displayed. Press n and the prompt Input User Preset Number (18) appears. Enter the desired number.
NOTE: If no is selected to overwrite current data, the system is asking to make a new user application preset. The eight available spaces are displayed by selecting the preset top menu.
Customize 19
Custom Display
Changing a Parameter (contd)

To customize the name of the new preset (18): Trackball to the preset name in command line two.
Press Set. Type in the personalized preset name.
Trackball to Save.
Press Set. All parameter data is saved as a new preset.
Hints
S S S S
Parameters on all of the menu pages can be customized before selecting Save. Parameter changes will be lost if Save is not selected. A maximum of eight user application presets can be saved. Only a change in System Parameters will affect factory presets.
Customize 20
Custom Display
Custom Display Contents
Illustration 207. Custom Display Contents Page
The custom display contents page shows a summary of the seventeen menu pages. Note that the first seven pages of presets are probe dependent as well as category/preset dependent like the last eight pages. Trackball the cursor to the desired page and press Set.
Customize 21
Custom Display
Page 1 of 15 (Imaging Parameter 1 Probe Dependent 1)
Illustration 208. Custom Display Page 1
Enter Depth
EC, UP, P, R
Choose the desired default display depth for the probe indicated. 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22 or 24 cm.
Focus Depth [mm]
EC, UP, P, R
Choose the desired default focus depth for the probe indicated. 1 to 240 mm in 1 mm increments.
Customize 22
Custom Display
Image Rotation EC, UP, P, R
Choose the desired default image orientation. 0 (N) 90 (W) 180 (S) 270 (E) Normal top to bottom orientation. 90 left to right orientation. Inverted bottom to top orientation. 270 right to left orientation.
Image Reverse
EC, UP, P, R
Choose the default to initially have image reverse on or off (left-right orientation). Off On Image reverse off. Image reverse on.
Zoom Auto Start
EC, UP, P
Choose to automatically place the image into the zoom mode after a probe selection change. The amount of zoom is set by Zoom Factor. The presence of a reference image is set by Zoom Reference. Off On No auto zoom at probe change. Auto zoom mode at probe change.
Zoom Reference
EC, UP, P
Choose to have the zoom reference image available or not available as the default. Off On No reference image in zoom. Reference image available in zoom.
Zoom Factor
EC, UP, P, R
Choose the default zoom factor for the read (freeze) zoom. Choose 1.0, 1.2, 1.5, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0 or 4.0.
Customize 23
Custom Display
Standoff Setting EC, UP, P, R
Choose a setting for the type of probe standoff, if used, for the 739L or L764 (LH) probes. When any other probe is selected the preset is Not Available. Choose Off WP CPL No standoff Water Path Couplant
Needle Guide Type
EC, UP, P, R
Choose the type of biopsy guide angle to be displayed for the attachment used (desired target depth) with each probe listed in the table below. For additional information, see Biopsy 7. Depth in cm at Center Channel FixedAngle MultiAngle BX-3 8.0 7.0 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a 8.0 n/a MBX-1 4.0 4.0 n/a 4.0 4.0 n/a n/a n/a 4.0 n/a MBX-2 6.0 5.5 n/a 6.0 5.5 n/a n/a n/a 6.0 n/a MBX-3 8.0 7.0 n/a 8.0 7.0 n/a n/a n/a 8.0 n/a
Probe C364/CBF C551/CAE C721 C386 546L L764/LH 739L LA39 S317 T739
BX-1 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a 2.0 2.0 1.5 n/a 2.0
BX-2 n/a n/a 3.0 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
Table 19. Biopsy Guide Attachment Selection
Customize 24
Custom Display
Needle Guide Type DANGER EC, UP, P, R (contd)
Failure to match the preset to the guide may cause the needle to track a path outside the displayed lines. It is extremely important that when using the adjustable angle biopsy guides, the preset displayed on the screen (which is selected on Custom Display page 1) matches the angle set on the guide, otherwise the needle will not follow the displayed guide zone which could result in repeated biopsies or patient injury. When the E721 probe is attached and active, the needle guide type selection choices are:
S S
TV0 Reusable metal guide with a 0 degree offset angle. TR5 Civco disposable guide with a 5 degree offset angle.
Acoustic Power B/M [%] EC, UP, P, R

Set the initial percentage of acoustic power to be used when in B- or B/M-Modes. Choose from 0 to 100% in 10% increments.
Acoustic Power D/CFM/PDI [%]
EC, UP, P, R
Set the initial percentage of acoustic power to be used when in Doppler, Color Flow or Power Doppler imaging modes. Choose from 0 to 100% in 10% increments.
Customize 25
Custom Display
B Gain
EC, UP, P, R
Choose the default gain value for B-Mode. Enter a value from 0 to 98 in 2 digit increments. The maximum value is probe dependent and may not reach 98.
B Dynamic Range
EC, UP, P, R
Choose the default dynamic range value for B-Mode. Enter a value from 30 to 78 in 6 digit increments.
Customize 26
Custom Display
B Edge Enhance EC, UP, P, R
Choose the default edge enhancement value for B-Mode. Choose Off, Low, Mid or High.
B Image Softener
EC, UP, P, R
Choose to have the image softener function default for B-Mode on or off. Off On No image softener as default. Image softener on as default.
B Softener Level
EC, UP, P, R
If the image softener for B-Mode is enabled, choose the default level for the softener. Low, Mid or High.
B Frame Average
EC, UP, P
Choose the default value for frame averaging in B-Mode. Off (no frame averaging), 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6.
B Penetration
EC, UP, P, R
Choose to have the default for penetration, using the lower probe frequency, for B-Mode on or off. Off On Use higher probe frequency. Use lower probe frequency.
Customize 27
Custom Display
B Far Field Mode EC, UP, P, R
Choose from two types of far field signal processing for an application and probe. This parameter is available only when the penetration mode is on and supports only the C364/CBF and C551/CAE probes. Choose A or B type signal processing.
B Gray Scale Map
EC, UP, P, R
Choose the default gray scale map for B-Mode. Choose 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9,10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15 or 16.
B1 B2 B3 B4 B5
B6 B7 B8 B9 B10
INPUT LEVEL
B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16
INPUT LEVEL
INPUT LEVEL
Illustration 210. Gray Scale Map Graphs
Customize 28
Custom Display
B Rejection EC, UP, P, R
Choose the default level for rejection in B-Mode. Enter 0 to 40 in 1 digit increments.
B Focus Combi Number
EC, UP, P, R
Choose the default number of focus points in B-Mode. Choose 1, 2 or 3.
B Angle/Width [deg, mm]
EC, UP, P, R
Choose the amount of the scan angle to display as a default for B-Mode. The amount or degrees available depends on the probe.
B Target Frame Rate
EC, UP, P
Choose the default value for B-Mode frame rate. Low Mid High Low frame rate, better resolution. Mid range frame rate and resolution. Higher frame rate, less resolution.
Customize 29
Custom Display
Timeline Sweep Speed
EC, UP, P, R
Choose the default value for the timeline (M-Mode and Doppler spectrum) sweep speed. Choose Slow Mid Fast Very-Fast* 16 microseconds per pixel 8 microseconds per pixel 4 microseconds per pixel 2 microseconds per pixel
* Works with Doppler only, not M-Mode or M/D-Modes.
Customize 30
Custom Display
Physio Sweep Speed on B EC, UP, P, R
Choose the default value for the physio signal sweep speed displayed on the B-Mode image. Choose Slow Mid Fast 16 microseconds per pixel 8 microseconds per pixel 4 microseconds per pixel
M Gain (Delta from B)
EC, UP, P, R
Choose the default value for M-Mode gain difference from the B-Mode Gain. Enter 98 to 98 in 2 digit increments.
M Dynamic Range
EC, UP, P, R
Choose the default value for M-Mode dynamic range. Enter from 30 to 78 in 6 digit increments.
M Edge Enhance
EC, UP, P, R
Choose the default level for M-Mode edge enhancement. Off, Low, Mid or High.
M Penetration
EC, UP, P, R
Choose to have the default for penetration for M-Mode on or off. Off On Use higher probe frequency. Use lower probe frequency.
Customize 31
Custom Display
M Gray Scale Map EC, UP, P, R
Choose a default gray scale map for M-Mode. Enter 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 or 10.
M Rejection
EC, UP, P, R
Choose the default rejection level for M-Mode. Enter 0 to 40 in 2 digit increments.
M Peak Hold
EC, UP, P, R
Choose to initially enable or disable the peak value hold function for M-Mode. Off On No peak hold function as default. Peak hold function as default.
Customize 32
Custom Display
PWD/CFM/PDI Penetration
EC, UP, P, R
Choose to have the default for penetration, using the lower probe frequency, for pulsed Doppler, color flow mapping and power Doppler imaging modes on or off. Off On Use higher probe frequency. Use lower probe frequency.
Customize 33
Custom Display
PWD/CFM/PDI Slant Auto Start EC, UP, P, R
Choose the default position of the slant scan window. Off Other-Side Marker-Side Vertical (no slant) Slanted away from the probe orientation mark Slanted toward the probe orientation mark
PWD Gain
EC, UP, P, R
Choose the default gain value for pulsed Doppler Mode. Enter 0 to 32 in 2 digit increments.
PWD Dynamic Range
EC, UP, P, R
Choose the default dynamic range value for pulsed Doppler Mode. Enter 18 to 48 in 6 digit increments.
PWD Sample Volume [mm]
EC, UP, P, R
Choose the default pulsed Doppler sample volume cursor size (in millimeters). Choose 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 12, 14 or 16.
PWD Gray Scale Map
EC, UP, P, R
Choose the default gray scale map for the pulsed Doppler Mode. Choose 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 or 10.
Customize 34
Custom Display
PWD Rejection EC, UP, P, R
Choose the default level for rejection in the pulsed Doppler Mode. Choose from 0 to 40 in 2 digit increments.
PWD Velocity [cm/s]
EC, UP, P, R
Choose the default value for the velocity scale in pulsed Doppler Mode. Enter 10 to 1000 in 10 digit increments.
PWD Wall Filter [cm/s]
EC, UP, P, R
Choose the default value for the wall filter for pulsed Doppler Mode. Choose from 0.3, 0.5, 0.7,1.0, 1.5, 2.0, 3.0, 5.0, 7.0, 10, 15, 20, 30 or 50. Use the Ellipse up or down arrow keys to change the value.
PWD Alternative Scan
EC, UP, P, R
Choose the action of the B-Pause key while in PWD Mode. On Pressing B-Pause toggles between B-Mode frozen/PWD real-time or B-Mode real-time/ PWD frozen. Pressing B-Pause freezes or unfreezes the B-Mode image only.
Off
Customize 35
Custom Display
CFM/PWD Ratio in Triplex EC, UP, P, R
Choose the velocity ratio between the CFM display and Pulsed Doppler. 1/1 1/2 1/4 Same velocity display. Pulsed Doppler velocity 2 times CFM. Pulsed Doppler velocity 4 times CFM.
PDI/PWD Ratio in Triplex
EC, UP, P, R
Choose the velocity ratio between the PDI display and Pulsed Doppler. 1/1 1/2 1/4 Same velocity display. Pulsed Doppler velocity 2 times PDI. Pulsed Doppler velocity 4 times PDI.
CFM/PDI Shrink in Triplex
EC, UP, P, R
Choose to turn CFM/PDI shrink function on or off. Allows for shrinking of the CFM/PDI window to a specified value to improve frame rate.
CFM/PDI Shrink Angle/Width [deg, mm]
EC, UP, P, R
Choose the shrink value for the CFM/PDI window in degrees for convex and sector probes or millimeters for linear probes.
CWD Gain
EC, UP, P, R
Choose the default gain value for continuous wave Doppler Mode. Enter 0 to 32 in 2 digit increments.
Customize 36
Custom Display
CWD Dynamic Range EC, UP, P, R
Choose the default dynamic range value for continuous wave Doppler Mode. Enter 18 to 48 in 6 digit increments.
CWD Gray Scale Map
EC, UP, P, R
Choose the default gray scale map for the continuous wave Doppler Mode. Choose 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 or 10.
CWD Rejection
EC, UP, P, R
Choose the default level for rejection in the continuous wave Doppler Mode. Choose from 0 to 40 in 2 digit increments.
CWD Velocity [cm/s]
EC, UP, P, R
Choose the default value for the velocity scale in continuous wave Doppler Mode. Enter 10 to 1000 in 10 digit increments.
CWD Wall Filter [cm/s]
EC, UP, P, R
Choose the default value for the wall filter for continuous wave Doppler Mode. Choose from .3, .5, .7,1.0, 1.5, 2.0, 3.0, 5.0, 7.0, 10, 15, 20, 30 or 50. Use the Ellipse Rocker Switch to change the value.
Customize 37
Custom Display
CFM Color Threshold
EC, UP, P, R
Choose a priority level for B-Mode display during CFM mode. The higher the number, the greater the emphasis on CFM Mode (color) verses B-Mode (gray scale). Choose 0 to 100 in 1 digit increments.
CFM Threshold Velocity
EC, UP, P, R
Choose the level above which color will no longer be used to display velocity. Choose from 0 to 25 in 1 digit increments.
Customize 38
Custom Display
CFM Threshold Turbulence EC, UP, P, R
Choose the level above which color will no longer be used to display turbulence. Choose from 0 to 100 in 1 digit increments.
CFM Wall Echo Canceller
EC, UP, P, R
Choose to initially have the wall echo cancel function on or off. Off On No wall echo cancel function. Wall echo cancel function enabled.
CFM/PDI Spatial Filter
EC, UP, P
Choose the desired amount of averaging between color pixels. Off Low Mid High No spatial filtering. Low spatial filtering. Medium spatial filtering. Maximum spatial filtering.
CFM Target Frame Rate
EC, UP, P
Choose the desired frame rate range while in CFM mode. Low Mid High Low frame rate for CFM. Medium frame rate for CFM. High frame rate for CFM.
CFM Target Frame Rate Dtl
EC, UP, P
Choose the desired frame rate range while in the Detail (Dtl) Mode of CFM presentation. Low Mid High Low frame rate for CFM Detail Mode. Medium frame rate for CFM Detail Mode. High frame rate for CFM Detail Mode.
Customize 39
Custom Display
CFM Packet Size Survey, Map, SrvyDtl and MpDtl EC, UP, P
Choose the default packet size for each CFM diagnostic mode display. This will be for Survey Mode, Map Mode, Survey-Detail Mode and Map-Detail Mode.
.
CFM B Gain
Small Mid Large
Small packet size. Medium packet size. Large packet size.
NOTE: The higher the packet size, the better the color presentation but with a slower frame rate.
CFM Velocity [cm/s]
EC, UP, P, R
Choose the default CFM velocity scale in centimeters per second. Choose from 0 to 1000 in 10 digit increments.
EC, UP, P, R
Choose the default B-Mode gain setting while in CFM Mode. Choose from 0 to 31 in 1 digit increments.
CFM B High Resolution
EC, UP, P, R
Choose to initially have the high resolution function in CFM Mode on or off. Off On No high resolution function. High resolution enabled.
CFM B Frame Average
EC, UP, P, R
Choose the level of frame averaging for B-Mode while in CFM. Off Low Mid High No B-Mode frame averaging. Low frame averaging. Medium frame averaging. High frame averaging.
Customize 40
Custom Display
CFM B Wall Filter EC, UP, P, R
Choose the default level of wall filtering for B-Mode while in CFM. Choose from Low, M1, M2, M3, M4 and High.
CFM B Angle/Width [deg, mm]
EC, UP, P, R
Choose the default B-Mode angle or width of the display while in CFM. Choose from 1 to 124 in one digit increments. Maximum is determined by the probe type.
CFM/PDI Start Depth
[mm]
EC, UP, P, R
Set the start depth of the CFM/PDI window area. Choose the depth in millimeters ranging from 0 to 230.
CFM/PDI Vertical Size [mm]
EC, UP, P, R
Set the vertical size of the CFM/PDI window. Choose the size in millimeters ranging from 10 to 240.
CFM/PDI Focus Depth [%]
EC, UP, P, R
Set the desired depth of the focal zone in CFM/PDI Mode window. Choose a percentage ranging from 0 to 100.
Customize 41
Custom Display
CFM M Gain (Delta from B)
EC, UP, P, R
Choose the default level for M-Mode gain while in CFM. Choose from 31 to 31 in 1 digit increments.
CFM M Wall Filter
EC, UP, P, R
Choose the default level for the M-Mode Wall Filter while in CFM Mode. Choose from Low, M1, M2, M3, M4, or High.
Customize 42
Custom Display
CFM ACE EC, UP, P, R
Adaptive Color Enhancement - Reduces clutter noise or color flash Choose ON or OFF as the default setting
CFM Noise Blanker
EC, UP, P, R
Reduces random color noise. Choose: OFF, LOW, MID or HIGH
CFM Persistence
EC, UP, P, R
Retains highest color pixel value for a specified period of time or until a higher value is detected. Choose: OFF, SHORT, MID or HIGH
Customize 43
Custom Display
PDI Color Threshold
EC, UP, P, R
Choose a priority level for B-Mode display during PDI mode. The higher the number, the greater the emphasis on B-Mode verses PDI Mode. Choose 0 to 100 in 1 digit increments.
PDI Threshold Power
EC, UP, P, R
Set the threshold value (%) at which power information will start to be displayed. Set from 0 to 50 percent. Example: Setting = 20% Power values less than 20% will not be displayed. They will be set to the background color. Only power values over 20% will be displayed as color.
Customize 44
Custom Display
PDI Target Frame Rate EC, UP, P
Choose the desired frame rate range while in PDI mode. Low Mid High Low frame rate for PDI. Medium frame rate for PDI. High frame rate for PDI.
PDI Target Frame Rate Dtl
EC, UP, P
Choose the desired frame rate range while in the Detail (Dtl) Mode of PDI presentation. Low Mid High Low frame rate for PDI Detail Mode. Medium frame rate for PDI Detail Mode. High frame rate for PDI Detail Mode.
PDI Packet Size Survey, Map, SrvyDtl and MpDtl
EC, UP, P
Choose the default packet size for each PDI diagnostic mode display. This will be for Survey Mode, Map Mode, Survey-Detail Mode and Map-Detail Mode.
.
PDI Velocity [cm/s]
Small Mid Large
Small packet size. Medium packet size. Large packet size.
NOTE: The higher the packet size the better the color presentation but with a slower frame rate.
EC, UP, P, R
Choose the default PDI velocity scale in centimeters per second. Choose from 0 to 1000 in 10 digit increments.
Customize 45
Custom Display
PDI B Gain EC, UP, P, R
Choose the default B-Mode gain setting while in PDI Mode. Choose from 0 to 31 in 1 digit increments.
PDI B High Resolution
EC, UP, P, R
Choose to initially have the high resolution function in PDI Mode on or off. Off On No high resolution function. High resolution enabled.
PDI B Frame Average
EC, UP, P, R
Choose the level of frame averaging for B-Mode while in PDI. Off Low Mid High No B-Mode frame averaging. Low frame averaging. Medium frame averaging. High frame averaging.
PDI B Wall Filter
EC, UP, P, R
Choose the default level of wall filtering for B-Mode while in PDI. Choose from Low, M1, M2, M3, M4 and High.
PDI M Gain (Delta from B)
EC, UP, P, R
Choose the default level for M-Mode gain while in PDI. Choose from 31 to 31 in 1 digit increments.
PDI M Wall Filter
EC, UP, P, R
Choose the default level for the M-Mode Wall Filter while in PDI Mode. Choose from Low, M1, M2, M3, M4, or High.
Customize 46
Custom Display
PDI ACE EC, UP, P, R
Adaptive Color Enhancement - Reduces clutter noise or color flash Choose ON or OFF as the default setting
PDI Noise Blanker
EC, UP, P, R
Reduces random color noise. Choose: OFF, LOW, MID or HIGH
PDI Persistence
EC, UP, P, R
Retains highest color pixel value for a specified period of time or until a higher value is detected. Choose: OFF, SHORT, MID or HIGH
Customize 47
Custom Display
Page 8 of 15 (Imaging Parameter 8)
Image Mode
EC, R
Choose the default imaging mode for this preset. B B/B B/M B/D CFM-B CFM-B/B CFM-B/M CFM-B/D B-Mode only Dual B-Mode B- and M-Modes B- and Doppler Modes B-Mode with Color Flow B-Mode with Color Flow and B-Mode B- and M-Modes with Color Flow B- and Doppler Modes with Color Flow
Customize 48
Custom Display
Displayed TI EC
Choose the type of thermal index display. TIS TIC TIB Thermal Index Soft Tissue Thermal Index Cranial Bone Thermal Index Bone
Image Gamma [%]
EC, UP
Choose the level of gamma correction applied to the image during photography. Choose from 50 to 200 in 5 digit increments.
Auto Focus Control
EC
Choose to have the focus control follow depth changes as a percent of depth or have the focus depth be a fixed value. On Focus is a percent of the current depth (Focus Pos % Depth preset) until changed by focus position. Focus is at a fixed depth until changed by focus position control (Focus Depth [mm] Preset).
Off
Zoom Reference Update
EC, UP
Choose to update timing of reference image in Zoom. Off 0.5s, 1.0s, or 2.0s No zoom reference update. Update at time interval selected.
Customize 49
Custom Display
TGC Depth Remap EC
Choose to have the TGC graphic recomputed and displayed when parameters are changed. Off On No TGC remap with change. TGC remap with change.
Cine Gauge Auto Display
EC
Choose to have the Cine gauge initially displayed when Cine is activated. Off On Cine gauge not displayed. Cine gauge displayed.
Cine Speed
EC, R
Choose the default Cine loop playback speed. Choose 1, 1/2, 1/4, 1/8 or 1/16.
Image Back Color
EC, UP
Choose the image area background color. Choose from: BLK GR1 GR2 GR3 DRD BDX GGR DGR Black 10% Gray 20% Gray 30% Gray Dark Red Bordeaux Red Green Gray Dark Green
Customize 50
Custom Display
Frame Rate Display EC
Choose to enable or disable the frame rate display on the screen. Off On Frame Rate not displayed. Frame Rate displayed.
Probe Direction Mark Display
EC
Choose to turn the display of the probe direction marker on or off. Off On No probe direction marker. Probe direction marker is displayed.
Audio Tone Equalizer
EC
Choose the desired type of audio output response Flat 1 2 3 Flat 1 2 3 Normal setting Reduced high tones, increased mid tones Reduced high tones, increased mid/low tones Reduced high tones, increased mid tones Bass 0db 0db 2db 0db Mid 0db 2db 2db 4db Treble 0db -4db -2db -2db
Display TGC Curve
EC
Choose to turn the TGC Curve display on or off for both large and small image format.
Customize 51
Custom Display
B Focus Dual Marker
EC, UP
Choose to display focus markers on both dual B-Mode images or just to the right side of the right image. Off On Only one focus marker is displayed. Focus markers will be displayed to the right of both the right and left images.
B Color Auto Start
EC, R
Choose to have B color (colorized gray scale) initially on or off. Off On B color is off initially. B color is on initially.
Customize 52
Custom Display
B Color Map EC, UP
Choose a B color default map from six possibilities. Choose 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6.
B Tag Auto Start
EC, R
Choose to have B color tag initially on or off. Off On B color tag is initially off. B color tag is initially on.
B Tag Center [%]
EC, R
Choose the center point of the B color tag window as a default. Choose from 0 to 100%. A percentage of the entire displayed B color window (colorized gray scale).
B Tag Width [%]
EC, R
Choose a default for the desired B color tag width. Choose from 0 to 100% for the B color window size.
B Format B Single
EC
Choose a default display size for a single B-Mode image. Large or small. The TGC curve is displayed only during B-Format B Single Small.
B Format B Dual
EC
Choose a default display size for a dual B-Mode image. Large or small.
Customize 53
Custom Display
B Scale Mark EC
Choose as a default what the scale markers will represent in B-Mode. Depth/Width Depth Comb Depth and width marks. Depth marks only. Combination mode.
B Video Inverse
EC
Choose as a default how to display B-Mode video. Off On White on black. Black on white.
Customize 54
Custom Display
Timeline Sweep Method
EC
Choose as a default between two types of timeline presentations. Scroll Moving-Bar Continuous update at edge of the screen. Timeline is updated by a bar moving across the screen.
Timeline Format
EC
Choose as a default how the timeline (M-Mode or Doppler spectrum) will be displayed. Only one type of display format is available at one time. Side/Side Top/Bottom B-Mode on left half of the display and the timeline on the right half. B-Mode on the top of the display and the timeline across the bottom.
Customize 55
Custom Display
Auto B Melt at Unfreeze EC, UP
When the B Pause function is used to freeze B-Mode while in B/M or B/D, the preset sets the default to have the B-Mode image remain paused when the system is unfrozen. Off On B-Mode remains paused at unfreeze. B-Mode exits pause condition at unfreeze.
M Mode Simul PD Activity
EC
Choose as a default to have the ability to display simultaneous M-Mode and pulsed Doppler spectrum. Off On No simultaneous M and PD display. Simultaneous display capable.
M Color Auto Start
EC, R
Choose to have M color (colorized gray scale) initially on or off. Off On M color is off initially. M color is on initially.
M Color Map
EC, UP
Choose a M color default map from six possibilities. Choose 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6.
M Tag Auto Start
EC, R
Choose to have M color tag initially on or off. Off On M color tag is initially off. M color tag is initially on.
Customize 56
Custom Display
M Tag Center [%] EC, R
Choose the center point of the M color tag window as a default. Choose from 0 to 100%. A percentage of the entire displayed M color window (colorized gray scale).
M Tag Width [%]
EC, R
Choose a default for the desired M color tag width. Choose from 0 to 100% for the M color window size.
M Format (Side/Side, Full)
EC
Choose the default size for the M-Mode display format when it is full screen or side by side. Side/Side must be selected for Timeline Format on Set Up/Custom Display page 10 in order to display this format. Choose large or small.
M Mode FULL B + Cursor
EC
Choose to enable or disable the full B plus M-Mode cursor display format. Off On Disabled Enabled
M Mode Side/Side B Large
EC
Choose to have the large B-Mode (left side) and M-Mode (right side) format enabled or disabled. Side/Side must be selected for Timeline Format on Set Up/Custom Display page 10 in order to display this format. Off On Disabled Enabled
Customize 57
Custom Display
M Mode Side/Side B Small EC
Choose to have the small B-Mode (left side) and M-Mode (right side) format enable or disabled. Side/Side must be selected for Timeline Format on Set Up/Custom Display page 10 in order to display this format. Off On Disabled Enabled
M Mode Top/Bottom B Large
EC
Choose to have the large B-Mode (top) and M-Mode (bottom) format enabled or disabled. Top/Bottom must be selected for Timeline Format on Set Up/Custom Display page 10 in order to display this format. Off On Disabled Enabled
M Mode Top/Bottom B Mid
EC
Choose to have the medium size B-Mode (top) and M-Mode (bottom) format enabled or disabled. Top/Bottom must be selected for Timeline Format on Set Up/Custom Display page 10 in order to display this format. Off On Disabled Enabled
M Mode Top/Bottom B Small
EC
Choose to have the small size B-Mode (top) and M-Mode (bottom) format enabled or disabled. Top/Bottom must be selected for Timeline Format on Set Up/Custom Display page 10 in order to display this format. Off On Disabled Enabled
Customize 58
Custom Display
M Mode Full M EC
Choose to have the full screen M-Mode format enabled or disabled. Off On Disabled Enabled
M Scale Mark
EC
Choose the method to display scale markers in M-Mode. Time/Depth Time Time horizontal and depth vertical. Time horizontal only.
M Video Inverse
EC
Choose the display video type for the M-Mode portion of the display. Off On White on black (inverse off). Black on white (inverse on).
Customize 59
Custom Display
D/CFM Scale Mark
EC
Choose the default value for the scale markers in Doppler with color flow. Velo Frq Velo/Frq Frq/Velo Velocity Frequency Velocity/Frequency Frequency/Velocity
D Type for Wall Filter
EC
Choose the type of wall filter display while in Doppler. Velo Freq Velocity Frequency
Customize 60
Custom Display
D Realtime Auto Trace EC, R
Choose to initially have the auto trace function during real-time Doppler on or off. Off On No Real-time trace function. Real-time trace function enabled.
D Realtime Trace Method
EC, R
Choose the value that will be traced during real-time Doppler. Peak Floor Mean Mode Peak or highest values. Bottom or lowest values. Average values. Brightest echo trace.
D Color Auto Start
EC, R
Choose to have D color (colorized gray scale) initially on or off. Off On D color is off initially. D color is on initially.
D Color Map
EC, UP
Choose a D color default map from six possibilities. Choose 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6.
D Tag Auto Start
EC, R
Choose to have D color tag initially on or off. Off On D color tag is initially off. D color tag is initially on.
Customize 61
Custom Display
D Tag Center [%] EC, R
Choose the center point of the D color tag window as a default. Choose from 0 to 100%. A percentage of the entire displayed D color window (colorized gray scale).
D Tag Width [%]
EC, R
Choose a default for the desired D color tag width. Choose from 0 to 100% for the D color window size.
D Format (Side/Side, Full)
EC
Choose the default Doppler display size for the side by side or full Doppler formats. Side/Side must be selected for Timeline Format on Set Up/Custom Display page 10 in order to display this format. Choose large, small or very-small.
D Mode Full B + Cursor
EC
Choose to have the full B-Mode plus Doppler cursor format display enabled or disabled. Off On No full B plus Doppler cursor. Full B plus Doppler cursor available.
Customize 62
Custom Display
D Mode Side/Side B Large EC
Choose to have the large B-Mode (left side) and Doppler (right side) format enabled or disabled. Side/Side must be selected for Timeline Format on Set Up/Custom Display page 10 in order to display this format. Off On No large B plus side by side Doppler. Large B plus side by side Doppler available.
D Mode Side/Side B Small
EC
Choose to have the small B-Mode (left side) and Doppler (right side) format enabled or disabled. Side/Side must be selected for Timeline Format on Set Up/Custom Display page 10 in order to display this format. Off On No small B plus side by side Doppler. Small B plus side by side Doppler available.
D Mode Top/Bottom B Large
EC
Choose to have the large B-Mode (top) and Doppler spectrum (bottom) format enabled or disabled. Top/Bottom must be selected for Timeline Format on Set Up/Custom Display page 10 in order to display this format. Off On No large B (top) plus Doppler (bottom). Large B (top) plus Doppler (bottom) available.
D Mode Top/Bottom B Mid
EC
Choose to have the medium B-Mode (top) and Doppler spectrum (bottom) format enabled or disabled. Top/Bottom must be selected for Timeline Format on Set Up/Custom Display page 10 in order to display this format. Off On No medium B (top) plus Doppler (bottom). Medium B (top) plus Doppler (bottom) available.
Customize 63
Custom Display
D Mode Top/Bottom B Small EC
Choose to have the small B-Mode (top) and Doppler spectrum (bottom) format enabled or disabled. Top/Bottom must be selected for Timeline Format on Set Up/Custom Display page 10 in order to display this format. Off On No small B (top) plus Doppler (bottom). Small B (top) plus Doppler (bottom) available.
D Mode Full D
EC
Choose to have the full screen Doppler spectrum format enabled or disabled. Off On No full screen Doppler spectrum. Full screen Doppler spectrum available.
D Audio to Speaker
EC
Choose the default type of Doppler audio to be sent to the speakers. Stereo MonoF MonoR Forward & Reverse signals separate. Forward signals only. Reverse signals only.
D Audio Volume [%]
EC, R
Choose the default percentage value for the Doppler volume to the speakers. Choose from 0 to 100% in 4 digit steps.
D Video Inverse
EC
Choose the default type of video used to display the Doppler spectrum. Off On White on black. Black on white.
Customize 64
Custom Display
D Image Processing
EC
Choose the desired type of Doppler spectrum image processing. Black Holes Filling Normal Smoothing Reduce the noise in the Doppler spectrum by filling in vertically. Standard Processing. No additional filtering to reduce noise. Reduce the noise in the Doppler spectrum by filling in vertically and horizontally.
Customize 65
Custom Display
D Time Resolution EC
Choose the amount of emphasis to be placed on Doppler time resolution as compared to frequency resolution. 1 2 3 4 Time resolution much greater than frequency resolution. Time resolution slightly greater than frequency resolution. Frequency resolution slightly greater than time resolution. Frequency resolution much greater than time resolution.
Customize 66
Custom Display
PWD Base Line [%]
EC, R
Choose the default percentage value for forward pulsed Doppler spectrum display. Choose from 75% to +75% in 25% increments (0 is 50% forward and 50% reverse).
CWD Base Line [%]
EC, R
Choose the default percentage value for forward continuous wave Doppler spectrum display. Choose from 75% to +75% in 25% increments (0 is 50% forward and 50% reverse).
Customize 67
Custom Display
CWD Non-aliasing mode EC, R
Choose how to process the CWD signal for aliasing. Off On Non-aliasing mode off Increase signal to noise ratio to reduce aliasing
CFM Capture Interval [s]
EC, R
Choose the default value (time) for the CFM capture interval. Off 1/2 1 2 ECG No time interval update. Update at .5 second intervals. Update at 1 second intervals. Update at 2 second intervals. Update synchronized with ECG signal.
CFM Velo Dynamic Range
EC, UP
Choose the default value for the CFM velocity dynamic range display. Choose from 10 to 100 in 10 digit increments.
CFM/PDI Sequence
EC, UP
Use the ellipse rocker switch to choose the default diagnostic mode sequence for Color Flow Mapping or Power Doppler Imaging. Srvy>Mp>MpDtl Srvy>SrvyDtl SrvyDtl>MpDtl Srvy>SrvyDtl>Map Refer to Adding Color 20. Survey, map and map/detail. Survey and survey/detail. Survey/detail and map/detail. Survey, survey/detail and map.
Customize 68
Custom Display
CFM/PDI Initial Sequence EC
Choose the initial default diagnostic mode for Color Flow Mapping or Power Doppler Imaging. Choose survey, map, survey/detail or map/detail. Refer to Adding Color 20.
CFM Color Map 1, 2, 3 and 4
EC
Choose the default color map type for each of the four selection positions in the CFM mode. Choose map V 1, 2, 3 or 4. (velocity) Choose map VT 1, 2, 3 or 4. (velocity/turbulence) Choose map T 1 or 2. (turbulence)
CFM Tag Auto Start
EC, R
Choose to initially have the CFM tag on or off. Off On CFM tag is initially off. CFM tag is initially on.
CFM Tag Center [cm/s]
EC, R
Choose the default center point in cm/sec for the CFM color tag window. Choose from 0 to 500.
Customize 69
Custom Display
CFM Tag Width [cm/s] EC, R
Choose the default width in cm/sec for the CFM color tag window. Choose from 0 to 1000.
CFM Base Line [%]
EC, R
Choose a default baseline for the CFM color map. Choose 75, 50, 25, 0, 25, 50 or 75. 75 0 75
Illustration 222. Color Scale Example
Customize 70
Custom Display
CFM/PDI Initial Mode
EC, R
Choose the default mode for color CFM or PDI. CFM PDI Regular CFM mode. Power Dopper Imaging mode.
PDI B/W Display
EC
This parameter turns on or off the transparent mode that affects Power Maps 1 and 2 only. Off On PDI transparent mode off. PDI transparent mode on.
Customize 71
Custom Display
PDI Default Map EC, R
Choose the default power map for the PDI mode. Topography maps are not available. P1 P2 Orange/Purple power map Gray Scale power map
PDI Dynamic Range
EC, UP
Choose the default value for the Power Doppler dynamic range display. Choose from 10 to 100 in 10 digit increments.
PDI Tag Auto Start
EC, R
Choose to initially have the PDI tag on or off. Off On PDI tag is initially off. PDI tag is initially on.
PDI Tag Center [cm/s]
EC, R
Choose the default center point in cm/sec for the PDI color tag window. Choose from 0 to 500.
PDI Tag Width [cm/s]
EC, R
Choose the default width in cm/sec for the PDI color tag window. Choose from 0 to 1000.
Customize 72
Custom Display
ECG Auto Display
EC
Choose to have the ECG waveform initially displayed on the monitor. Off On ECG not automatically displayed. ECG automatically displayed.
ECG Gain
EC, R
Choose the default value for ECG gain. Choose from 20 to +10 in 2 digit increments.
Customize 73
Custom Display
ECG Position EC, R
Choose the default value for the ECG display position (horizontal). Choose from 50 to +50 in 5 digit increments.
ECG Heart Rate Display
EC
Choose to have the heart rate, calculated from the ECG input, initially displayed on the monitor. Off On No heart rate displayed. Heart rate displayed.
ECG R Delay 1 [ms]
EC, UP, R
Choose the default value in milliseconds for the R wave Delay 1. Choose from 0 to 2000 in 5 digit increments.
ECG R Delay 1 to 2 [ms]
EC, UP, R
Choose the default value in milliseconds for the R wave delay between Delay 1 and Delay 2. Choose from 0 to 2000 in 5 digit increments.
ECG Audio Beat Sound
EC, R
Choose as a default to represent the ECG input as an audio tone. Off On No ECG audio tone. ECG represented as a tone.
ECG Audio Beat Sound Tone
EC
Choose as a default the type of tone to be used to represent the ECG input. Choose tone-1, tone-2 or tone-3.
Customize 74
Custom Display
PCG Auto Display EC
Choose to have the PCG input initially displayed on the monitor. Off On PCG not automatically displayed. PCG automatically displayed.
PCG Gain
EC, R
Choose the default value for PCG gain. Choose from 10 to +10 in 2 digit increments.
PCG Position
EC, R
Choose as a default the horizontal position of the PCG waveform on the display. Choose from 50 to +50 in 5 digit increments.
AUX Auto Display
EC
Choose to have the auxiliary signal input initially displayed on the monitor. Off On Auxiliary signal not displayed. Auxiliary signal automatically displayed.
AUX Gain
EC, R
Choose the default gain value for the auxiliary input signal. Choose from 10 to +10 in 2 digit increments.
AUX Position
EC, R
Choose as a default the horizontal position of the auxiliary waveform on the display. Choose from 50 to +50 in 5 digit increments.
Customize 75
Custom Display
Customize 76
System Parameters
Overview
System Paramtr (parameters) in the Set Up Top Menu is six pages of preset parameters that when set, are the same for all exam categories and preset names. Changing system parameters also affects these values found in factory default presets. Generally, these items are common to modes, probes, formats and applications.
Illustration 225. Setup Sub Menu (System Parameters)
A brief description of each preset parameter and the choices available for that preset follows.
.
t
If a more detailed explanation of the preset choice is required, it will immediately follow the brief description of the preset.
NOTE: If it is necessary to quickly return to page one of the System Parameters Sub Menus, press Ctrl and 1 simultaneously.
A description of the parameter menu command lines and instructions from customizing parameters is found on Customize 16.
Customize 77
System Parameters
System Parameters Contents
Illustration 226. System Parameters Contents Page
The System Parameters Contents page shows a summary of the six menu pages. Trackball the cursor to the desired page and press Set.
Customize 78
System Parameters
Page 1 of 6 (System Setup)
Illustration 227. System Parameters Page 1
Hospital Name
Enter the desired hospital or facility name. This appears at the top of all display screens and report pages. Maximum of 34 alphanumeric characters.
Date Format
Choose the desired presentation format for all dates displayed. Year/Month/Day Month/Day/Year Day/Month/Year
Customize 79
System Parameters
Time Format
Choose the desired presentation format for all time graphics displayed. 24 H 12 H 24 hour clock 12 hour clock
Language
Choose the desired language for all displayed graphics. English, French, German, Spanish or Italian.
Diag Category
Choose the desired default diagnostic category. Rad/Abd Obst Gyne Card Vasc Urol SmlPts Radiology/Abdomen Obstetrical Gynecology Cardiology Vascular Urology Small Parts
Report Cursor Blink

Choose to have the report cursor blinking or solid. Off On Not Blinking Blinking
Report Cursor Type

Choose the style of report cursor desired. Underscore Block
Customize 80
System Parameters
CUA Selection Reset on New Patient
Choose to reset all Composite Ultrasound Age flags on the OB Report pages to yes when New Patient is selected. Off On Do not reset on New Patient. Reset on New Patient.
Insite Access Enable

Choose to turn on or off the capability to access remote diagnostics via telephone line. Off On Remote diagnostics disabled. Remote diagnostics enabled.
Keyboard Tab
Choose the comment cursor movement desired when using the Tab key. Normal Word Eight character spaces. Next word (after a space).
Operation Error Beep

Choose to disable the audio error beep or set the volume of the tone that is heard when a keystroke error is made. Off Low Loud No error beep. Low volume beep on error. High volume beep on error.
Standby Time [min]

The system can be set to go into stand-by mode if no keyboard activity is sensed for a specific period of time. 5, 10, 15, 30, 45, 60 minutes or INF (infinity-never)
Customize 81
System Parameters
Power on Memory Test
Choose to turn on or off the system memory test operation at power up. Off On Do not run test. Run test.
.
Power on Status
NOTE: Selecting ON will cause a 0.5 second delay in the power on time of the LOGIQ 400.
Choose to reset exam/system parameters at power up or set to the parameters saved when power was turned off. Keep-Latest Reset Set to latest values. Reset to system defaults.
System Error Erase Interval

Set the time that a system error message will be displayed on the monitor before it is erased. 0.1, 1, 10 minutes or infinity. Infinity is until the next error occurs.
CRT Menu Auto Erase Interval [sec]

Set the time in seconds that the Top or Sub Menus will be displayed on the monitor before they are automatically erased. Choose from 5, 10, 15, 20 seconds or infinity.
Display Probe Name

Choose to display the names of the probes attached to the console in the soft menu when an available Probe Select key is pressed. Off On Do not display Probe Names. Display Probe Names.
Customize 82
System Parameters
Setup Blue Back Start

Choose to display a color for the background of the preset menus. Off On Background is transparent. Display a colored background.
Mask Image Characters

Choose to mask (disable) the graphic characters on the image display. Off On Graphics displayed. Graphics not displayed.
Customize 83
System Parameters
PCG Filter
Choose the desired level of PCG (Physiological Signal) filtering. Low Mid1 Low level filtering. Medium level filtering.
Delay Trigger Source

Choose the source for the cardiac trigger delay. ECG AUX Electrocardiogram input. Auxiliary signal input.
ID/Name Prohibition After Measurement

Choose to be able to use the ID/Name Key to change patient information after a measurement has been taken or lockout the use of the ID/Name key after a measurement is taken. Off On ID/Name Key functional after measurement. ID/Name Key not functional after measurement.
BSA Type
Choose the formula used to calculate Body Surface Area. Oriental Occidental Asian formula. USA formula.
OB Report Format
Choose the format for calculation and display of OB measurements. Tokyo Osaka USA Europe Tokyo University Method. Osaka University Method. United States Method. European Method.
Customize 84
System Parameters
EFBW Form (Europe)
Choose the method for calculating estimate fetal birth weight for the European method. Shep/Wars Rich/Berk Hadlock German Merz Shepherd/Warshoff Method. Richards/Berkowitz Method. Hadlock Method. German Accepted Method. German Method
EFBW Form (Tokyo)

Choose the formula to be used for calculating the estimate fetal birth weight for the Tokyo method. Tokyo TokyoS1 TokyoS2 TokyoS3 Tokyo University Tokyo Sinozuka EFW1 Tokyo Sinozuka EFW2 Tokyo Sinozuka EFW3
Col BackGnd
Choose the color for the background of Preset and Patient Entry menus displayed on the monitor. Color options are: BLK Black GRY Gray ULB Ultramarine Blue BLU Blue PWB Periwinkle Blue MGR Moss Green MNK Mink MRN Maroon
Customize 85
System Parameters
Col Sys Inf
Choose the color for all alphanumeric system information displayed on the monitor. Color options are: WHT White YLW Yellow GRN Green LGR Light Green PBL Pale Blue PNK Baby Pink RED Vermilion YOR Yellow Orange
Col Imag Crs

Choose the color for the image characters on the display (Probe Orientation, Zoom Depth, and Image Recall graphics). See color options under Col Sys Inf on Customize 86.
Col Scale
Choose the color for the scale markers on the display. See color options under Col Sys Inf on Customize 86.
Col Comment
Choose the color for comments and annotations entered on the display. See color options under Col Sys Inf on Customize 86.
Col Mes Crs

Choose the color for the fixed measurement cursor on the display. See color options under Col Sys Inf on Customize 86.
Customize 86
System Parameters
Col Applcat
Choose the color for completed measurement information displayed on the monitor. See color options under Col Sys Inf on Customize 86.
Col Moving
Choose a color for the active movable cursor on the display. See color options under Col Sys Inf on Customize 86.
Col Aux
Choose a color for all auxiliary signal information displayed on the monitor (ECG, AUX, and PCG). See color options under Col Sys Inf on Customize 86.
Col Dop Trac

Choose a color for the Doppler Spectrum Trace function. See color options under Col Sys Inf on Customize 86.
Customize 87
System Parameters
User Define Key No. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6

Choose to be able to lockout the ability to reprogram a user define key sequence once it has been saved. Unlock Lock Key may be reprogrammed. Key may NOT be reprogrammed until it is set to unlock.
Customize 88
System Parameters
Page 4 of 6 (System Setup Body Pattern)
Body Pattern Package 18

Choose up to 16 body patterns (2 sub menu pages) for each of the 8 packages. Eight custom body pattern packages are then available for selection to be displayed in the Set Up/ Preset Program Menus, page one. An illustration of each body pattern available is shown on Basic Scan 60. To select the body pattern package to be used for each user preset within an exam category, refer to Customize 105.
Customize 89
System Parameters
Body pattern package (18) customization Choose the Set Up Top Menu, then choose System Paramtr (system parameters) from the Set Up Sub Menu and go to page 4. Use the Trackball to move the arrow cursor to the word Submenu of the desired body pattern package number to be customized.
Press Set. The body pattern selection Sub Menu appears.
Illustration 231. Initial Body Pattern Sub Menu
The rectangle in the display represents space for two rows of body patterns (two Sub Menu display pages). There is a space for eight body patterns in each row. Use the Trackball to move the arrow cursor to a desired body pattern location.
Press Set. A box appears around a Body Pattern or blank space if no pattern is programmed.
(continued)
Customize 90
System Parameters
Body pattern package (18) customization (contd)
Illustration 232. Adding Body Patterns
Use the Ellipse up or down arrow keys to cycle through the body pattern choices.
When the desired body pattern is displayed, use the Trackball and Zoom Size/Rotation knob to position the probe orientation marker to the desired default position on the body pattern.
.
t
Press Set to complete the selection for that menu position.
NOTE: As many as sixteen selections (two rows of eight) can be made for each body pattern package.
Customize 91
System Parameters
Body Pattern Deletion Use the Trackball to position the arrow cursor over the pattern to be deleted.
Press Set. A box appears around the Body Pattern.
Use the Ellipse up or down arrow keys to cycle to the blank body pattern selection.
Press Set to record a blank space for that body pattern location.
Customize 92
System Parameters
Body Pattern Probe Change Erase
Choose to erase the displayed body pattern when a probe is changed or have the body pattern remain after a probe change. Off On Body pattern remains. Body pattern is erased.
Body Pattern Unfreeze Erase

Choose to erase the body pattern when the system exits the freeze function or have the body pattern remain after unfreeze. Off On Body pattern remains. Body pattern is erased.
Body Pattern Copy To Active Side

Choose to have the selected body pattern copied to the active side during dual format displays. Off On Do not copy to active side. Copy to active side.
Customize 93
System Parameters
Page 5 of 6 (System Setup Recording)
Report Video Inverse to Printer

Send calculation summary report video to the print device in inverse (reverse) video. Off On Do not send inverse video to the printer. Send inverse video to the printer.
Record 1 B&W or Color

Choose the type of device to be controlled by the Record 1 key for black and white or color images. Use the Ellipse up or down arrow keys to cycle through the selections. Black and White Polaroid Camera, Color Polaroid Camera, Black and White Printer, Color Printer, Multi Image Camera, Image Archive or Computer.
Customize 94
System Parameters
Record 2 B&W or Color
Choose the type of device to be controlled by the Record 2 key for black and white or color images. Use the Ellipse up or down arrow keys to cycle through the selections. Black and White Polaroid Camera, Color Polaroid Camera, Black and White Printer, Color Printer, Multi Image Camera, Image Archive or Computer.
Report
Choose the type of device that will be used to print the calculation summary report pages. Black and White Polaroid Camera, Color Polaroid Camera, Black and White Printer, Color Printer, Multi Image Camera or Image Archive.
External Video Signal

Choose the type of video signal, from an external source, that is being put into the LOGIQ 400. S-Video RGB Col-Comp Two component video. Red, green, blue and sync. Composite color signal.
Color Printer Type

Choose the type of color printer (option) that is attached to the LOGIQ 400. UP3030 UP1850 UP1850P Sony UP-3030MD. Sony UP-1800/UP-1850. Sony UP1850P.
Customize 95
System Parameters
Color Printer Memory
Choose how printer memory will be divided and thus how the color print will be formatted. Single QuadFrm QuadFrmls One picture per sheet. Four pictures per sheet with frame. Four pictures per sheet without frame.
Color Printer Signal

Choose the type of video signal being sent to the color printer. RGB Video S-Video Red, green, blue and sync. Composite Video. Two component video.
Plug 1BW
Choose which device has its record/expose cable connected to plug one. B&WPrnt B&WPola ColPola Black and white video page printer. Black and white Polaroid camera. Color Polaroid camera.
Plug 2CLR
Choose which device has its record/expose cable connected to plug two. B&WPrnt B&WPola ColPola Black and white video page printer. Black and white Polaroid camera. Color Polaroid camera.
Customize 96
System Parameters
Port A/B
Choose the type of device that has a remote control cable connected to VCR/printer ports A and B. Off MIC VCR ColPrnt Computer No connection. Multi Image Camera. Video Cassette Recorder. Color Printer. Data Management Center Computer
Maskline Record
Mask or hide the operator message area on the display during the record function. Off On Message will not show during record. Message will be displayed during record.
B&W Printer Exposure Pulse Length [msec]

Set the exposure pulse length needed to trigger the B&W printer print function. Choose from 50 to 500 ms in 50 ms intervals.
B&W Printer Exposure Min Interval [sec]

Set the minimum interval in seconds between B&W printer exposure capabilities. Choose from 1 to 10 in 0.5 sec intervals.
Customize 97
System Parameters
Page 6 of 6 (System Setup User ID and Password)
Password Ask
Choose to use the password security option at power up by asking for the user ID and password to be typed in. Off On Do not ask for the password. Ask for the password.
.
Customize 98
NOTE: Refer to Getting Started 15 for usage of the password function.
System Parameters
4
USER ID : PASSWORD: Version 3.10
Illustration 235. System Startup Screen with Password Ask on
User ID 18
As many as eight user ID codes can be entered into the system parameters. These can be used for security purposes. When used with an accompanying password, user ID establishes limited access to the system at power up. Maximum of eight alphanumeric characters for each user ID.
Customize 99
System Parameters
Password 18
As many as eight passwords can be entered to correspond with the eight user ID codes. These must be used when password ask is on. Maximum of eight alphanumeric characters for each password.
.
Selecting an ID Entering a Password
Initially, User ID Codes are blank. A User ID must be entered before a password can be recorded.
S S S
Select the desired User ID number on page 6 of the Set Up/System Parameter Menu, by moving the arrow cursor over the User ID number and press Set. The User ID entry area is highlighted. Type in a maximum of 8 characters for the User ID. Press Return. The User ID is now recorded and displayed on the System Parameter Menu.
Once a User ID is established or changed, a password can be entered.
.
Customize 100
S S S
Move the arrow cursor to the desired password and press Set. Type in the new password. Press Return. Type in the new password a second time for re-confirmation. Press Return.
NOTE: The password function is upper and lower case sensitive. The Password function is not active unless Password Ask in page five of system parameter menu is set to On.
System Parameters
Changing/Deleting a Password To change or delete a password:
S S S S
Move the arrow cursor to the desired password and press Set. In the highlighted password area, type the old password. Press Return. To change a password, type in the new characters. Press Return. To delete a password, type in eight spaces. Press Return. Type the new password or eight spaces a second time for confirmation. Press Return.
The password is now changed or deleted. Changing/Deleting a User ID To change or delete a User ID:
S S S
Move the arrow cursor to the desired User ID and press Set. Input the old password. Press Return. Type in the new User ID to change or type in spaces to delete the User ID. Press Return.
The User ID is now changed or deleted.
NOTE: If the User ID is deleted (all spaces), the corresponding password is also deleted. If no password is selected with the User ID, the ID can be changed or deleted directly. There is no requirement to enter the old password.
Customize 101
System Parameters
Customize 102
Preset Program
Overview
Preset Program in the Set Up top menu is nine pages of preset parameters that are generally considered application parameters. They are exam category and preset name dependent. Special features in the Preset Program Sub Menus are:
S S S S S
Annotation Library script designation Summary report display format editing User programmable OB table editing Calculation sequence programming Mode measurement menu customizing.
Illustration 236. Set Up Top Sub Menus (Preset Program)
A brief description of each preset parameter and the choices available for that preset follows. (Refer to Index of Preset Parameters, Overview for key to parameter codes.)
.
t
If a more detailed explanation of the preset choice is required, it will immediately follow the brief description of the preset.
NOTE: If it is necessary to quickly return to page one of the Preset Program Sub Menus, press Ctrl and 1 simultaneously.
A description of the parameter menu command lines and instructions from customizing parameters is found on Customize 16.
Customize 103
Preset Program
Preset Program Contents
Illustration 237. Preset Program Contents Page
The Preset Program Contents pages shows a summary of the nine menu pages. Trackball the cursor to the desired page and press Set.
Customize 104
Preset Program
Page 1 of 9 (Application)
Illustration 238. Preset Program Page 1
Body Pattern Probe Mark Preset
EC, UP
Choose to enable/disable the preset position of the probe marker graphic with the body pattern. Off On Do not use the preset position. Use the preset position.
Body Pattern Package
EC, UP
Choose one of the 8 customized body pattern packages to be displayed with the current application preset. Body pattern package 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8. Refer to Customize 89 for details on programming the contents of each body pattern package.
Customize 105
Preset Program
Comment Erase at Display Change EC
Choose to erase all comments when a change is made in scan mode. Off On Do not erase at mode change. Erase at mode change.
Comment Home Position Horizontal
EC, R
Choose a point on the horizontal axis for the comment cursor home position. Enter 1 to 56 in 1 digit increments.
Comment Home Position Vertical
EC, R
Choose a point on the vertical axis for the comment cursor home position. Enter 1 to 26 in 1 digit increments.
Comment Clear Key Function
EC
Choose to erase all comments with the Clear key or just the line of comments that the cursor is on. All Line Erase all comments on the screen. Erase the comments on the cursor line. The second time Clear is pressed, all comments will be erased.
Trackball Function at Freeze
EC
Choose the function assigned to the Trackball when the image is frozen. No Measure Comment Body No function assigned. Trackball assigned to the measurement function. Trackball assigned to the comment function. Trackball assigned to the body pattern function.
Customize 106
Preset Program
CRT Menu Auto Display at Measurement EC
Choose to have the measurement sub menu appear on the CRT automatically when the Measurement key is pressed. Off On Press the Top Menu Select key to display the sub menu. Sub menu is automatically displayed when the Measurement key is pressed.
CRT Menu Auto Display at Comment
EC
Choose to have the comment sub menu appear on the CRT automatically when the Comment key is pressed. Off On Press the Top Menu Select key to display the sub menu. Sub menu is automatically displayed when the Comment key is pressed.
CRT Menu Auto Display at Body Pattern
EC
Choose to have the body pattern sub menu appear on the CRT automatically when the Body Pattern key is pressed. Off On Press the Top Menu Select key to display the sub menu. Sub menu is automatically displayed when the Body Pattern key is pressed.
CRT Menu Auto Display at Image Recall
EC
Choose to have the image recall sub menu appear on the CRT automatically when the Image Recall key is pressed. Off On Press the Top Menu Select key to display the sub menu. Sub menu is automatically displayed when the Image Recall key is pressed.
Customize 107
Preset Program
Page 2 of 9 (Application)
VCR Rec Audio Doppler
EC
Choose the format for audio recording in Doppler mode on the VCR. Stereo DopL/VoiceR Right/left channel separation. Doppler on left channel and voice on the right channel.
Customize 108
Preset Program
VCR Play Audio EC
Choose how to playback VCR recorded audio. Stereo MonoL MonoR Left and right separation. Left speaker only. Right speaker only.
VCR Play Audio Volume [%]
EC, R
Choose the default or initial percentage of volume level for VCR playback audio. Enter 0 to 100 in 4 digit increments.
Image Archive Compression
EC
Choose to compress the image archive data or not. No Yes No data compression. Data compression for the DEFF format.
NOTE: If image compression is used, images saved by the LOGIQ 400 cannot be read on other TIFF Readers, DEFF devices or the LOGIQ 700. However, they can be read on the LOGIQ 500.
B/W Image & Color Graphics
EC
Choose to archive the image graphics as black and white or color. B/W Color Black and White Graphics. Color graphics as displayed on the monitor.
Customize 109
Preset Program
Page 3 of 9 (Application Measurement)
Time Unit
EC
Choose the unit of display for all time measurements. ms sec milliseconds. seconds.
Length Unit
EC
Choose the unit of display for all length (distance) measurements. mm cm millimeters. centimeters.
Customize 110
Preset Program
Circ/Area Method EC
Choose the method to be used for circumference/area measurements. Trace Ellipse Circle 2 Dist Diameter Manually trace with the Trackball. Ellipse method. Circle method. Two diameter (distance) method. Single distance method.
Echo Level Method
EC
Choose the size of the echo level measurement box cursor. Box 3mm Box 5mm Box 7mm 3mm x 3mm box. 5mm x 5mm box. 7mm x 7mm box.
Heart Rate Method
EC
Choose the method for measuring heart rate. Auto Manual Automatic. Manual.
VCRPB Calib Method
EC, R
Choose the default method for VCR playback calibration. Auto Manual Automatic Calibration. Manual Calibration.
Average Activity
EC
Choose to enable or disable the calculation summary report page measurement averaging function. Off On Measurement averaging off. Measurement averaging on.
Customize 111
Preset Program
Max Velocity (Advanced Vascular)
This selection is used with the Advanced Vascular option only (LOGIQ 400 MD). When turned on it overrides the Average Activity preset to cause the Advanced Vascular report page to display maximum velocity rather than latest or average. Off On No effect on averaging activity Max Velocity displayed on report page.
Average Number
EC
Choose how many measurements will be used in the averaging function. Enter 1, 2 or 3.
Mask Image
EC
Choose to put the measurement/calculation results in a colored box over the image or just the graphic characters over the image. Off On Graphics are placed on top of the image. Graphics are placed in a colored box on top of the image.
TA Max Auto
EC
Choose to enable or disable the automatic measurement of TAMAX (Time Averaged Maximum). Off On Automatic off. Automatic on.
Customize 112
Preset Program
Add 1 Week to EDD EC
Choose to add an additional week to the displayed estimated date of delivery. Off On Do Not add 1 week. Add one week to the calculated EDD.
Display EDD with GA Value
EC
Choose to display or not to display the estimated EDD. Off On Do Not display EDD with GA. Display EDD with GA.
Diastole/Systole Determination
EC
Used with Advanced Cardiac Calculation option. Determine if measurement is systole or diastole automatically from the measurements relationship to the ECG wave. Manual Auto Automatic determination disabled. Automatic determination enabled.
R Delay Time of End Systole Prior Edge
EC, UP
Used with automatic determination of systole/diastole in the Advanced Cardiac Calculation option. Sets the delay time on the ECG wave to ensure systole will be properly determined. Use the Ellipse up or down arrow keys to enter a number between 0 and 2000 msecs.
Customize 113
Preset Program
End Systole Period from Prior Edge EC, UP
Used with Automatic determination of Systole/Diastole in the Advanced Cardiac Calculation option. Sets the delay time on the ECG wave to ensure diastole will be properly determined. Use the Ellipse up or down arrow keys to enter a number between 0 and 2000 msecs.
Media Selection for Fetal Trend
EC
Used with the Fetal Growth Trend option. Sets the media to be used to store patient data. The hard drive has a much limited capacity. HD MO System Hard Drive. Magnetic Optical Disk (removeable).
Measurement Clear Operation
EC
When Clear is pressed, decide if it will erase measurements only or measurements and comments. Meas.only withComment Erase only measurements not comments. Erase measurements and comments simultaneously.
Customize 114
Preset Program
Page 4 & 5 of 9 (Application Measurement Sub Menu)
Illustration 241. Preset Program Pages 4 and 5
Customize 115
Preset Program
Cardiac Measurement Choices EC, UP
Used with Advanced Cardiac Calculation option. Determine if the measurement will be used in the automatic M-Mode calculation sequence. Off On Automatic measurement callout will NOT be made. Automatic measurement callout WILL be made.
Customize 116
Preset Program
Page 6 of 9 (Application Measurement Submenu)
Report Format
EC
If the current exam category has an associated summary report page, select this menu option to change the vertical (y) position of the measurement elements on the report page. The elements that can be edited depend on each report page.
Advanced Report Formatting The LOGIQ 400 allows for user control of each exam category summary report measurement display format. Except for the protected 5 lines of each report page (that has hospital and patient information) and the bottom area for calculations and comments, the vertical position (y) of the measurements can be customized by the user. Factory default items can be deleted or user desired items added.
Customize 117
Preset Program
Example report format change Exam Category: OB OB measurements are limited to changes in the vertical position (y) on the report page. To change the position of a measurement: From Set Up/Preset Program Menu page 6, use the Trackball to place the arrow cursor over Report Format and press Set. The report format editor screen appears.
Illustration 243. Report Format Editor
Use the Trackball or Return to position the highlighted area over the Ypos of the measurement to be changed. Type the new position number.
(continued)
Customize 118
Preset Program
Example report format change (contd) Use the Trackball to highlight any additional positions to be changed.
When all changes are complete, highlight Save and press Set.
To exit the Report Format Editor and return to the Set Up/ Preset Program Menu, highlight Exit and press Set. To Add or Delete a measurement: Enter the Report Format Editor in the same manner as To change the position. Use the Trackball to highlight the desired measurement name (to delete or change) or highlight a blank area (to add).
. .
t
To delete a name, type in all spaces. To change a name, type over the current name. To add a name, type in the new name.
NOTE: When adding or changing a measurement name, it must contain two important elements:
S S
Measurement type. For example, GS, BPD, CRL, HC. Authors name. The authors name must appear in parentheses, for example (Hadlock), (Hellman).
Highlight Save and press Set to record all changes.
Highlight Exit and press Set to return to the Set Up/Preset program menu.
NOTE: If two measurement names are placed in the same position, an error message appears. More than 1 Measurement Field Name at the SAME Ypos.
Customize 119
Preset Program
User Table Editor
If the factory preset OB tables are not suitable, the user can input data for five OB tables. The titles given to these tables appear as selections in the OB Calculations Soft Menu when displayed. To program a user table Select the Set Up Sub Menu.
Illustration 244. Set Up Top Menu
Select Preset Program from the Set Up Sub Menu. The preset program selections are displayed over the image on the monitor. Use the Trackball to place the arrow cursor over User Table Editor.
Press Set to display the User Table Programming Main Menu.
Customize 120
Preset Program
To program a user table (contd) The User Table Programming main menu appears as shown in Illustration 245.
Illustration 245. User Table Programming
Use the Trackball to place the arrow cursor on the desired table number TBL1 to TBL5.
Press Set to select the desired table. Use the Trackball to place the arrow cursor on the desired table dimension. The choices are Dist (mm) for distance in millimeters, Circ (mm) for circumference in millimeters and Area for area in square millimeters. Press Set when the cursor is over the correct dimension.
Customize 121
Preset Program
To program a user table (contd) Use the Trackball to move the arrow cursor to the title block. Type in the desired table title (maximum 4 characters). Press Return. Type in the authors name (maximum 8 characters). Press Return. Type in any desired notes (maximum 30 characters). Press Return. Type in the minimum or beginning data value for the table (maximum 4 digits). Press Return. Type in the interval value between each table data point (maximum 4 digits). Press Return. The selection Table-Edit should now be highlighted. Press Set.
NOTE: The Return key or Trackball can be used to cycle through the menu selections. To make a choice, press Set.
Customize 122
Preset Program
To enter table values The Table-Edit Menu shown in Illustration 246 allows for adding data, editing data or clearing (deleting) a User Table.
Illustration 246. Table Edit Menu
For each data point, the weeks (2 digits), days (1 digit) and deviation (2 digits) must be entered. The menu choices at the bottom allow: SAVE CLEAR SET UP NEXT-PG EXIT Saves the table in its current form. Clears or deletes the entire table (and title). Returns to the User Table Programming Set Up menu. Goes to the next page to continue data entry. Exits the User Programmable Table function.
.
t
Trackball to one of the above choices and press Set. When exit is selected without doing a Save, all additions or edits are lost. The table reverts to its previous state.
NOTE: If a new table was added, the measurement can be added to the summary report. Follow the instructions under Report Format in the Set Up/Preset program.
Customize 123
Preset Program
Sequence 18 EC (Auto Sequence Programming)
The user can program a maximum of eight calculation sequences with a maximum of eight measurements per sequence. These are labeled Sequence 18 in the Set Up/Preset Program Menu as USERSEQUENCE18 in the Measurement Sub Menu or in the Auto Sequence Top Menu. When Sequence 18 is chosen from the Auto Sequences Top Menu or the Measurement Sub Menu, the system automatically prompts the user through the calculations previously programmed. Program a Sequence Use the Trackball to move the arrow cursor to the desired sequence number (18) on page 6 of the Set Up/Preset Program Menus.
Press Set. The first page of the eight Measurement Sequence Sub Menus is displayed.
Customize 124
Preset Program
Program a User Sequence (contd)
Illustration 247. Measurement Sequence Sub Menu
NOTE: The first row under the Sub Menu title line shows three important items:
************* Measurement Sequence Submenu ***************************** USERSEQUENCE2 8 UNDEFINED NEXT CALC
Illustration 248. Sequence Sub Menu Status Line
is the order in which the measurement or calculation will be made in USERSEQUENCE 2. 1 is first, 2 is second.....8 is last.
8
UNDEFINED is the current measurement in that sequence location. Undefined means it is blank. NEXTCALC allows the user to cycle through the eight pages of measurements and calculations available to be programmed.
Customize 125
Preset Program
Program a User Sequence (contd) Use the Ellipse up or down arrow keys to cycle to the desired usersequence measurement number (18).
Use the Trackball to move the arrow cursor to the desired measurement/calculation.
.
Hints
Move the arrow cursor to Next Calc and press Set if a sub menu page change is necessary. Press Set when the arrow cursor is over the desired measurement/calculation. The newly selected measurement/calculation appears as the current measurement for the highlighted USERSEQUENCE number replacing undefined. Repeat the previous steps as necessary to program additional sequence number locations for any of the 8 user sequences. USERSEQUENCE18 are choices that can be programmed in the Measurement Menus for each mode (B, M, D, and CFM) per exam category. Auto Sequence Top Menu choices are exam category dependent. Sequences programmed in Vascular are not available when the Cardiac exam category is selected. UNDEFINED means no measurement/calculation is in that location. Use UNDEFINED to delete a desired measurement.
Customize 126
Preset Program
Program a User Sequence (contd) To customize the Usersequence/Auto Sequence name: Move theTrackball to the USERSEQUENCE# at the top of one of the eight Calculation menus.
Press Set. Type in the name of the Usersequence. The space available is two lines of seven characters each. Move the Trackball to SAVE.
Press Set.
Customize 127
Preset Program
Performing an Auto Sequence (USERSEQUENCE) Select an Auto Sequence, or a user programmable mode measurement menu selection, the system automatically prompts the user to do the first measurement in the sequence. After the first measurement/calculation is completed, the system automatically prompts the user to do the second measurement in the sequence. This continues until all measurements are completed. Sequence Modification During the Auto Sequence function: Press the Elllipse up arrow key to skip a desired measurement and advance to the next measurement in the sequence. Press the Ellipse down arrow key to skip back to a previous measurement in the sequence. Measurements skipped will appear again at the end of the sequence. This gives the user a second chance to make the measurements prior to exiting the Auto Sequece function.
Customize 128
Preset Program
Measurement Menu B/M/D/CFM EC, UP
.
Organization
Each exam category has a set of factory default measurements/calculations. The four measurement menu modes allow the user to add a maximum of four new pages to the measurement sub menus per exam category per mode within a user application preset. With 8 items per page, a total of 32 measurements/calculations can be added for each exam category in B, M, D, which is distinct and separate from those that can be programmed into CFM-Mode.
NOTE: Measurements and Calculations setup for Measurement Menu B are not transferred to Menu M, D, or CFM. Each one is separate.
There are four pages of space available for the user to add measurements and calculations to an exam category measurement menu. These pages do not appear in the Soft Menu display unless items are placed in the number location of that page.
Illustration 249. Measurement Menu Key Numbers
The spaces available for calculations are called Key Numbers. Key Numbers 1 through 8 are on page 1, 9 through 16 on page 2 etc. (See Illustration 249).
Customize 129
Preset Program
Programming Measurements
Use the Trackball to move the arrow cursor to the desired Measurement Menu (B, M, D, or CFM) on page 6 of the Set Up/Preset Program menus.
Press Set. The last page viewed of the four measurement pages is displayed.
Illustration 250. Measurement Set Up Sub Menu
Customize 130
Preset Program
Programming Measurements (contd)
NOTE: The first row under the sub menu title line shows three important items.
Measurement VFD Softmenu Setup Submenu ******************* ************* KEY NUMBER 1 USERSEQUENCE1 NEXT CALC
Illustration 251. Sequence Sub Menu Status Line
is the position in the soft menu where the measurement for key number one will be displayed.
1
USERSEQUENCE1, or the customized name, is the current measurement sequence in that key number location. NEXTCALC allows the user to cycle through the four pages of measurements and calculations available. Remembering how the key numbers are organized (see Illustration 249), use the Ellipse up or down arrow keys to change to the desired key number. Move the arrow cursor to NEXTCALC and press Set if a sub menu page change is necessary. Press Set when the arrow cursor is over the desired measurement/calculation. The newly selected measurement/calculation appears in the highlighted key number location.
.
t
NOTE: If key number is desired to be empty (blank, deleted), choose UNDEFINED. Factory default measurements/calculations are protected and cannot be changed. Adding authors to a measurement menu does NOT automatically add the measurement to the report page.
Repeat the previous steps to program any key number in any mode menu. Be sure to use the Save function prior to exiting the Calculation menus and the Preset Program menus.
Customize 131
Preset Program
Cardiac Calculation
This sub menu can be used to rearrange the order of the automatic cardiac measurement prompts for the Advanced Cardiac Calculation option. Refer to Cardiology 104 for details on measurement sequence modification.
Customize 132
Preset Program
Page 7 & 8 of 9 (Application Annotation Library)
Illustration 252. Preset Program Pages 7 and 8
Customize 133
Preset Program
Annotation Library 124 EC, UP
Type in the desired (most commonly used) display annotations. There is space for a maximum of 20 characters (numbers, letters and spaces) for each library script. A maximum of 24 annotation library scripts is available per exam cagegory. Simply place the arrow cursor across from the desired annotation library number and press Set. Type the desired script. Press Set to complete the entry.
Customize 134
Preset Program
Page 9 of 9 (Application Patient Information)
New Patient Y/N Ask
EC
In the new patient entry menu, choose to ask to erase all current patient data or not. Off On Do not ask, automatically erase all patient data. Ask to erase data Y/N
Display Unit Age 14
EC
Choose the priority for the units to be used to display patient age. Age 1 is the highest priority. Age 4 is the lowest priority. year month week day nodisp Display age in years Display age in months Display age in weeks Display age in days No display
Customize 135
Preset Program
Display Unit Height 13 EC
Choose the priority to be used for the units to display the patients height. cm inch feet-inch nodisp Centimeters Inches Feet and inches No display
Display Unit Weight 12
EC
Choose the priority to be used for the units to display the patients weight. kg lbs none Kilograms Pounds None
Customize 136
Save Values
Overview
Save Values is a selection in the Set Up Menu that allows for the quick retention of a current system settings and preset parameters. It works like the Save command in the Custom Display, System Parameter or Preset Program sub menus.
Illustration 254. Set Up Top Sub Menus (Save Values)
Saving Scan Values

If at any time during a scan it is felt that the system settings are optimized and should be saved as an Exam Applications Preset, simply select Save Values. The system will start the process of saving all of the current settings as a User Exam Applications Preset. If a factory default applications preset is active when Save Values is selected, the message: Input User Preset Number (1-8) appears at the bottom of the screen. Enter the preset position number 1 through 8. The data is saved and available for recall at the designated preset location.
Customize 137
Save Values
Saving Scan Values (contd)

If a User Preset is active when Save Values is selected, the message: Overwrite existing data Y or N
appears at the bottom of the screen. Choose Y to overwrite data in the current preset location or N to designate a new preset location 1 through 8.
NOTE: See Customize 139 for more details on Exam Applications Presets.
Customize 138
Exam Applications Presets

Overview
The top menu Preset selection will display a maximum of eight factory application preset choices for each exam category. Factory default presets can only be changed by the user using System Parameters. The user may define a maximum of eight user application presets for display on the Preset sub menu which will be designated as page one. Preset parameters that are exam category dependent and available for customization are found in the Preset Program and Custom Display menus described earlier in this chapter. Some parameters are also probe dependent within the application preset. Items found under System Parameters affect each exam category, application preset or probe.
Defining a User Preset

User presets appear on page one of the Preset Sub Menu. They will appear on the Soft Menu Display, as shown in Illustration 255.
Illustration 255. User Preset Configuration
Customize 139
Defining a User Preset (contd)

To define a User Preset (18), first ensure that the system:
S S S
is set to the proper exam category by using New Patient or ID/Name keys is the desired probe connected and activated. has all keyboard controls (mode, depth, gain, etc.) set to the desired values.
Illustration 256. Set Up Top Menu Selection
Select the Set Up Top Menu. From the Set Up Sub Menu, select Custom Display or Preset Program. Make all desired changes to the parameters in the Custom Display and Preset Parameter Sub Menus. Use the Trackball to move the arrow cursor to Save.
Press Set. The message Input User Preset Number (18) appears at the bottom of the monitor. Enter the desired preset number. The Preset Name at the top of the menu now displays the number entered (18).
(continued)
Customize 140
NOTE: If a user application preset was used at the start of the process, the system prompt states: Overwrite Existing Data? y or n Enter y to write over the existing user preset. Enter n to get the message: Input User Preset Number (1-8) and create a new user preset.
Use the Trackball to move the arrow cursor over the Preset Name area.
Press Set. Type in the desired name for the User Preset in the designated exam category. Use the Trackball to move the arrow cursor to Save and press Set. Answer Yes to the question Overwrite existing data? Y or N to save your new User Preset name. All parameters in the Preset Program and Custom Display Menus can now be customized for the new user preset. This preset appears on page one of the Preset Sub Menu for the current exam category.
.
t
NOTE: If new data is not saved, all changes will be lost when another preset or New Patient is selected.
Customize 141

IMPORTANT
STEPS
To complete the User Preset save process, return to the Set Up Sub Menu. Select System Parameters (any page 16). Use the Trackball to move the arrow cursor to SAVE and press Set. Answer Yes to the question Overwrite existing data? Y or N to ensure the new User Preset name is saved.
Naming a User Preset

The Input User Preset Number 1-8 can be replaced with a custom description. To give the user preset a name instead of a number: While in a Custom Display or Preset Program page, use the Trackball to move the arrow cursor over the Preset Name area. Press Set. Type in the desired name for the User Preset in the designated exam category. Use the Trackball to move the arrow cursor to SAVE and press Set. Answer Yes to the question Overwrite existing data? Y or N to save the new User Preset name.
.
Customize 142
IMPORTANT NOTE: To ensure that all parameters and the user preset name are saved by the LOGIQt 400 before exiting the Set Up function:
S S S
select System Parameters, any menu pages 1/6 through 6/6. Trackball to the SAVE function in the System Parameters menu and press Set. IMPORTANT: Answer Y to overwrite existing data again.
These steps are important to ensure that the new user preset name is saved.
Deleting User Presets and Names

Display any Set Up/Custom Display or Preset Program sub menu page.
S S S S S S S
Use the Trackball to move the arrow cursor to the preset name and press Set. Type in the User Preset position number (18) and use the Space Bar to delete the rest of the name. Use the Trackball to move the arrow cursor to Delete menu selection and press Set. Answer Yes to the question. Delete data? Y or N . Select System Parameters, any menu page 16. Trackball to the SAVE function in the System Parameters menu and press Set. Answer Yes to the question Overwrite existing data? Y or N to save the new User Preset name.
The last three steps are important to ensure that the User Preset name is cleared.
Recall Preset
Recall Preset is a selection found on page 3 of the Preset Sub Menu. Recall Preset can be used during an examination to return the majority of the parameters to the latest saved preset values. If front panel and soft menu values were changed while scanning, Recall Preset quickly resets these values. Recall Preset does not recover preset data that was changed with the Save function or was deleted.
Customize 143

Customize 144
User Define Keys

Overview
Six keys in the middle of the right side of the console keyboard may be programmed to duplicate a single keystroke or a sequence of keystrokes.
Illustration 257. User Define Keys
A keystroke is considered to be a press of a key, one movement of a knob or movement of the Trackball. Each of the six User Define Keys can be programmed to duplicate a sequence of 64 keystrokes (maximum).
Programming User Define Keys

S S S S
Access the User Define function by pressing the Set Up Top Menu Selection. Select User Define from the Set Up Sub Menu. Perform the keystroke or sequence of keystrokes to be programmed. When complete, press the desired User Define Key number to record the programming.
Customize 145
User Define Keys

Programming User Define Keys (contd)
S
The system will ask: Save data? Y or N. Press Y on the keyboard to save the user define sequence. Press N to cancel the user define programming function. Press the Top Menu Select key as necessary to return to the previous scan mode.
The next time a programmed User Define Key is pressed, the recorded keystroke or keystroke sequence will be performed by a single key operation.
Hints
Ctrl, 1 If selecting Set Up Top Menu with Custom Display, System Parameter or Preset Program as part of the User Define Sequence, press Ctrl and 1 simultaneously to set the sub menu page to one. Press Set the appropriate number of times to ensure proper movement to the desired sub menu page. Blue Shift, S A pause can be valuable in a User Define Key sequence, especially if it is desired to program a key to toggle functions on/off, between two different settings or between selections. Enable the Blue Shift key and press S to add a pause in the User Define Key programming sequence. With a pause in the user define sequence, the first time the User Define Key is pressed, all steps will be executed up to the pause. The next time the key is pressed, all steps will be executed from the pause to the end (or next pause). This is especially useful in programming toggle functions.
Customize 146
User Define Keys
User Define Key Program Example

The following is a brief example of programming a user define sequence showing the use of Ctrl, 1 and Blue Shift, S. As an example, assume that it is desired to turn the measurement Average Activity on and off. This parameter is in the Set Up/Preset Program menu page 3. Perform the following steps to program a User Define Key to toggle Average Activity:
S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S
Select the Set Up Top Menu. Select/highlight and enable User Define in the Set Up Sub Menu. Select/highlight Preset Program in the Set Up Sub Menu. Press Ctrl, 1 simultaneously (this ensures that the menu page displayed is number one). Press Set twice. Trackball to Average Activity OFF and press Set. Trackball to Exit and press Set. Enable the Blue Shift key (key LED is lighted) and press S. This adds the pause to the sequence. Disable the Blue Shift key (key LED is not lighted). Select/highlight Preset Program in the Set Up Sub Menu. Press Ctrl, 1 simultaneously (this ensures that the menu page displayed is number one). Press Set twice. Trackball to Average Activity ON and press Set. Trackball to Exit and press Set. Press the desired User Define Key number. This ends the programming operation.
Customize 147
User Define Keys
User Define Key Program Example (contd)

The first time the User Define Key is pressed, Average Activity will be set to OFF. The second time the User Define Key is pressed, Average Activity will be set to ON. The third time the User Define Key is pressed, Average Activity will be set to OFF. Each press of the User Define Key toggles the Average Activity setting.
User Define Lock/Unlock

Parameters on the Set Up/System Parameters menu page 3 allow the user to lock a key, keeping it from being deleted or reprogrammed.
Deleting User Define Functions

To delete a User Define Key sequence:
S S S S S
Ensure that the User Define Key to be deleted is unlocked. Select Set Up Top Menu. Select User Define function. Press the User Define Key number to be deleted. Press Y (for Yes) to overwrite current data.
A User Define Key can also be re-programmed by writing over (replacing) the existing sequence.
Customize 148
User Data Back-up

Overview
The Set Up/Utility Menu, option #04 allows the user to back-up (save) all user preset data to MOD. In the event of a system upgrade or catastrophic hard drive failure, the user application presets can be easily loaded back to the system if they have been previously saved to MOD. Once presets have been backed up, the user data back-up should be performed periodically to update any changes that have been made to the user preset parameters.
Saving Presets
Before saving presets, the MOD must first be initialized (formatted) prior to saving user application preset data.
.
t
S S S
Select Set Up/Utility Menu. Select #09 Media Initialize and press Return. Insert a MOD into the drive and press Return.
The system then takes the time to format the MOD (approx. 12 minutes).
NOTE: If presets have already been saved on the MOD, the MOD should be initialized again to ensure that old preset data has been deleted from the MOD.
To save presets:
S S
Enter #04 User Data Backup from the Utility Menu and press Return. Enter # 1 (Save) and press Return.
Customize 149
User Data Backup
Saving Presets (contd)

S S
Set media to drive (ensure the MOD is in the drive) and press Return. Select the exam category name to be saved (0108) or All System & Application Data (09), enter its number and press Return.
The system takes a few minutes to save the selected item to the MOD. A succeed or fail message will be displayed. Eject the MOD, label it and store it in a secure place for future reference.
Loading Presets
To load presets back onto the system:
S S S S S
Type #04 User Data Backup from the Utility Menu and press Return. Type #02 Load and press Return. Set the media to the drive (ensure the MOD is in the drive) and press Return. Select the application destination and press Return. Eject the MOD and store it in a secure place.
The system will take a few minutes to load the presets from the MOD to the system hard drive.
Customize 150
Overview
The LOGIQ 400 system ID number is assigned at the factory. A System ID should be unique for a system. A system ID number can be assigned in the range of 00000 to 16383. This number is used by the system when initializing a video tape or MOD (image archive option) for image storage. If there is more than one system at a facility, the ID numbers should be set the same. A scanner will not write to a tape or MOD if the media was initialized on a different scanner (different ID number).
Enter/Display System ID Number

To display or enter a System ID number:
S S
Select the Set Up Top Menu. Select Utility from the Set Up Sub Menu.
Customize 151
Enter/Display System ID Number (contd)
S S S
Enter number 10 (System ID Entry/Display) and press Return. Enter number 1 (ID Entry) or 2 (ID Display) and press Return. Enter an ID number in the range of 0000016383 and press Return. If the ID was displayed, make a mental note or record the number for future reference. Press Ctrl, R simultaneously to exit the Utility menu and return to the previous scan mode.
.
Customize 152
NOTE: Images which are not stored on the GE LOGIQ series systems will not be listed by the patient search function or displayed on a LOGIQ series machine. If there is more than one LOGIQ 400 or LOGIQ 500 in a facility or group of hospitals, each system should have its own unique System ID number.

Introduction B-Mode Measurements Doppler Mode Measurements M-Mode Measurements CFM B-Mode Measurements
This section describes the General Measurements and Calculations available that are not specific to an exam category or calculation menu. The basic measurements available depend on the mode of operation when the measurement key is pressed.
Gen. Meas/Calcs 1

Gen. Meas/Calcs 2
Introduction
Overview
Measurements and calculations derived from ultrasound images are intended to supplement other clinical procedures available to the attending physician. The accuracy of measurements is not only determined by system accuracy, but also by the use of proper medical protocols by the user. When appropriate, be sure to note any protocols associated with a particular measurement or calculation. Formulas and databases used within the system software that are associated with specific investigators are so noted. Be sure to refer to the original article describing the investigators recommended clinical procedures.
General Instructions
Measurements can be made in all modes and image formats, including real-time, freeze, CINE or VCR playback. The selected application defines the default calculations displayed on the Soft Menu. Measurement values update on the display until the measurement has been completed. Twenty lines of measurements can be displayed on the screen at one time. (This is not likely to be done, but it is possible.) Record all desired measurements displayed on the screen before erasing them. The measurement cursor is not automatically fixed when the Record key is pressed.
Gen. Meas/Calcs 3
Introduction
Erasing Measurements
The following actions erase measurements from the systems memory:
S
Pressing Clear erases all measurements and calculations on the display. Measurements and calculations, however, remain on the report pages. Rotating the Cine Scroll knob erases measurements. Pressing New Patient erases all measurements and calculations on the display and clears the report pages. Unfreezing the image erases measurements from the display only, not from the report pages. Adding a new measurement that exceeds the maximum number of allowable measurements erases the first or oldest measurement.
S S S S
Measurement Clear Operation is a parameter found in the Set Up/Preset Program page 3. This parameter can be set to have only measurements erased with the Clear key or measurements and comments. To edit/delete a measurement from a report page, highlight the measured value, Back Space or Space out the value and press Set to delete.
Gen. Meas/Calcs 4
Introduction
Locating measurement controls
Illustration 259. Locating Measurement Controls
Measurement
Enables specific measurement functions and calculation soft menus. Enables ellipse measurements. Used to move the measurement cursors. Fixes the cursor for measurements or completes the measurement sequence. Erases measuring cursor and measurement data from the display during a measurement sequence. Clears all cursors and measurements from the display when not performing a measurement sequence.
Ellipse Trackball Set
Clear
Gen. Meas/Calcs 5
Introduction
Measurement Key
The following table indicates the types of generic measurements available when the Measurement key is pressed and no specific calculation is chosen. The type of measurement depends on the current scan mode and the number of times the Measurement key is pressed .
MODE
Key Pressed Once Twice Three Times B Distance Ellipse/Circle Trace/Circle Gray Scale Echo Level Doppler (with B) Peak Velocity TAMAX 2 Velocities Slope/Time Interval Time Interval
Table 20. General Measurements by Mode
M (with B) Tissue Depth (Distance) Time Interval Depth Difference Slope/Time Interval
CFM (with B) Distance Ellipse/Circle Trace/Circle Point Velocity
Four Times
Gray Scale Echo Level
Cursors
During the measurement process, the fixed and active cursors are an X symbol. The color of the active and fixed cursors is selected in the Set Up/System Parameter Menu page 2. Once the measurement sequence is complete, the cursor symbol changes to one of the eight shown below. These symbols appear in the sequence shown.
Illustration 260. Measurement Completed Cursors
Gen. Meas/Calcs 6
B-Mode Measurements
Distance Measurement
Distance Measurements are typically made in the B-Mode portion of the image. To make a distance measurement: Press Freeze to stop image acquisition.
"A
Press the Measurement key once to display a cursor on the screen, and to display distance in cm on the bottom part of screen.
Use the Trackball to move the cursor to the measurement start point.
Press Set to fix the measurement start point cursor and to display a second cursor.
Use the Trackball to move the second cursor to the measurement end point.
(continued)
Gen. Meas/Calcs 7
BMode Measurements
Distance Measurement (contd)

Press Measurement to toggle between activating the two cursors for fine adjustment.
NOTE: Press Clear once to erase the second measuring marker and the current data measured and start the measurement again.
Press Set to complete the measurement and fix the Distance value displayed on the bottom part of the screen.
Pressing Clear after the sequence is complete erases all data that has been measured to this point, but not data entered on to report pages.
Gen. Meas/Calcs 8
BMode Measurements
Circumference/Area (Ellipse) Measurement

An ellipse can also be used to measure the circumference and area of an organ. To measure with an ellipse: Press Freeze to stop image acquisition.
"A
Press Measurement to set up the measurement mode. The cursor appears on the display.
Use the Trackball to move the cursor to either end of the major axis of the area to measure.
Press Set to fix the start point cursor.
Use the Trackball to move the second cursor to the major axis measurement end point.
Press the Ellipse up arrow key. An ellipse having an initial circle shape appears.
Use the Trackball to position the ellipse, as necessary, and to size the measured axis.
(continued)
Gen. Meas/Calcs 9
BMode Measurements
Circumference/Area (Ellipse) Measurement (contd)
Press the Measurement key to toggle the activation of the measurement cursors.
Press the Ellipse up arrow key to increase the size of the minor axis.
Press the Ellipse down arrow key to decrease the size of the minor axis.
NOTE: Press Clear once to erase the ellipse and the current data measured. The original cursor is displayed to restart the measurement.
Press Set to complete the ellipse measurement and display the circumference and area.
Pressing Clear a second time exits the measurement function without completing the measurement.
Gen. Meas/Calcs 10
BMode Measurements
Circumference/Area (Trace) Measurement

To trace the circumference of a portion of the anatomy and calculate its area: Press Freeze to stop image acquisition.
"A
Press Measurement twice to display a dot cursor on the screen. The display on the bottom of the screen shows the circumference in cm.
Use the Trackball to move the dot cursor to the measurement start point.
Press Set to change the dot cursor to a cursor.
.
t
Use the Trackball to trace the measurement area. The circumference displayed on the bottom of the screen will change with the tracing.
NOTE: Press Clear to erase the measuring marker and the current data measured and redo the measurement.
Press Set to fix the Circumference value displayed on the bottom of the screen and calculate the area.
Gen. Meas/Calcs 11
BMode Measurements
Circumference/Area (Trace) Measurement (contd)
Press Clear to erase all data that has been measured.
NOTE: When using the trace method, the Zoom Size/Rotation knob can be used to edit the trace line. Turn it clockwise or counterclockwise to erase the line (bit by bit) back from its current point. This erase function is limited to a small portion of the most recent trace.
Gen. Meas/Calcs 12
BMode Measurements
Echo Level Measurement

To make an echo level measurement: Press Freeze to stop image acquisition.
"A
Press Measurement three times to enable the echo level function. A box cursor appears.
Use the Trackball to move the box cursor over the measurement area.
NOTE: Press Clear to erase the measuring marker and the current data measured.
Press Set to fix the Echo value displayed.
Press Clear to erase all data that has been measured.
Gen. Meas/Calcs 13
BMode Measurements
Echo Level Measurement (contd) Hints

S S S
The size of the box cursor can be changed by using the Set Up/Preset Program menu page 3. The box is actual size and will appear to get larger or smaller with changes in depth (scale). The echo level measurement is only available on a frozen image, not on a B-paused image.
Gen. Meas/Calcs 14
Doppler Mode Measurements

Overview
Basic measurement taken in Doppler Mode or the Doppler Spectrum portion of the display are:
S S S S
Peak Velocity
Peak Velocity TAMAX (Trace) Two Velocities with the Slope and Time Interval between them Time Interval.
To measure peak velocity: Press Freeze to stop image acquisition.

"A
Press Measurement. The cursor with a vertical dotted line appears.
Use the Trackball to move the cursor to the desired point of measurement in the Doppler Spectrum.
Press Set to fix the velocity cursor. The velocity measurement in m/s or cm/s will be displayed at the bottom of the screen.
Gen. Meas/Calcs 15

TAMAX (Manual or Auto Trace)
To trace TAMAX: Press Freeze to stop image acquisition.
"A
Press Measurement twice. A dot cursor appears if the default method is manual. A cursor with a vertical dotted line appears if the trace default method is auto.
Use the Trackball to move the cursor to the trace start point in the Doppler spectrum.
Press Set to fix the start point.
If Auto Trace is the default method or TAMAX Auto is on, use the Trackball to position the vertical cursor at the second value (end point).
Press Set. The system automatically fixes both cursors and traces the maximum value between the two points. That value is displayed at the bottom of the screen.
If Manual Trace is the default method, use the Trackball to trace the maximum values of the desired portion of the spectrum.
Press Set to complete the measurement.
Gen. Meas/Calcs 16
TAMAX (Manual or Auto Trace) (contd)

NOTE: When using the manual trace method, the Zoom Size/Rotation knob can be used to edit the trace line. Turn it clockwise or counterclockwise to erase the line (bit by bit) back from its current point. This erase function is limited to a small portion of the most recent trace.
The D Realtime Trace Method can be selected in Set Up Custom Display page 11. The selections available are Peak, Floor, Mean and Mode.
Gen. Meas/Calcs 17

Slope/Time Interval
Two velocity values, the time interval (sec) and slope (m/s2) can be measured by: Press Freeze to stop image acquisition.
"A
Press Measurement three times. A cursor with vertical dotted lines appears.
Use the Trackball to move the end cursor to the measurement end point.
Press Set to complete the measurement. The two peak end point velocities, time interval and slope are displayed.
Gen. Meas/Calcs 18

Time Interval
To measure a horizontal time interval: Press Freeze to stop image acquisition.
"A
Press Measurement four times. A cursor with a vertical dotted line appears when the cursor is in the Doppler spectrum portion of the display.
Press Set to fix the first cursor.
Press Set to complete the measurement. The time interval between the two cursors is displayed at the bottom of the screen.
Gen. Meas/Calcs 19

Gen. Meas/Calcs 20
M-Mode Measurements
Overview
Basic measurements that can be taken in the M-Mode portion of the display are:
S S S
Tissue Depth (Distance) Time Interval Depth Difference with Time Interval and Slope
Gen. Meas/Calcs 21
MMode Measurements
Tissue depth
Tissue depth measurement in M-Mode functions the same as the distance measurement in B-Mode. It measures only vertical distance between points. Scan patient with M-Mode timeline displayed. Press Freeze to stop image acquisition.
"A
Press Measurement once. A cursor with a vertical dotted line appears.
Use the Trackball to move the cursor to the most anterior point to be measured.
Use the Trackball to move the second point to the most posterior point to be measured.
Press Set to complete the measurement. The vertical distance between the two points is displayed at the bottom of the screen.
Gen. Meas/Calcs 22
MMode Measurements
Time Interval
To measure a horizontal time interval: Press Freeze to stop image acquisition.
"A
Press Measurement twice. A cursor with a vertical dotted line appears when the cursor is in the M-Mode portion of the display.
Press Set to complete the measurement. The time interval between the two cursors is displayed at the bottom of the screen.
Gen. Meas/Calcs 23
MMode Measurements
Depth Difference with Time Interval and Slope

To measure depth difference: Press Freeze to stop image acquisition.
"A
Press Measurement three times. With the cursor in the M-Mode timeline area, a cursor with a vertical dotted line is displayed.
Use the Trackball to position the measurement start point.
Use the Trackball to position the measurement end point.
Press Set to complete the measurement. The depth difference, time interval and slope between the two end points is displayed at the bottom of the screen.
Gen. Meas/Calcs 24
CFM B-Mode Measurements

Overview
While in the Color Flow and B-Mode combination, four basic measurements can be taken. They are:
S S S S
Distance Trace (circumference/area) Gray Scale Echo Level Velocity Point
Distance
Distance is measured the same as B/W B-Mode. Refer to Gen. Meas/Calcs 7.
Trace
Circumference and area are measured the same as in B/W B-Mode. Refer to Gen. Meas/Calcs 9.
Gray Scale Echo Level

Gray scale echo level is measured the same as in B/W B-Mode. Refer to Gen. Meas/Calcs 13.
Gen. Meas/Calcs 25
CFM BMode Measurements
Velocity point
This measurement provides an estimate of the average (or mean) velocity at one point in the CFM B-Mode display. This is achieved by calculating the numerical value equivalent to the color at the selected point in the display and adjusting it to the selected flow angle. This procedure cannot be used to determine maximum, minimum or other specific velocity estimates. To measure the velocity at a certain point in the color display: Press Freeze to stop image acquisition.
"A
Press Measurement three times. A cursor appears.
Use the Trackball to move the cursor to the desired portion of the display.
Use the Zoom Size/Rotation control to adjust to the angle of blood flow.
Press Set to complete the measurement and to display the velocity and angle values.
Gen. Meas/Calcs 26
Velocity point (contd)

CAUTION
Potential for misdiagnosis. The CFM B-Mode velocity point measurement only provides an average velocity estimate and should not be used as a substitute for PW Doppler velocity measurement. Use PW Doppler Mode to obtain measurements from specific portions of the Doppler spectrum.
Gen. Meas/Calcs 27

Gen. Meas/Calcs 28

General Calculations (Radiology/Abdomen and Small Parts) Urology Calculations
This section describes the factory default measurements and calculations for the Rad/Abd (Radiology/Abdomen), Small Parts, and Urology exam categories.
Abdom/Small Parts 1

Abdom/Small Parts 2
General Calculations
Overview
The General Calculations Sub Menu can be invoked from the Rad/Abdomen exam category. The calculations available are:
Illustration 261. General Calculations Sub Menu (Page 1)
Measuring Volume
The volume calculation can be made from one, two or three distances, from one distance and an ellipse, from a single ellipse or from two ellipse measurements.
.
t
General Measurements and Calculations details how to make distance and ellipse measurements. IMPORTANT NOTE: When a volume calculation is desired, the necessary measurements or combination of measurements must be made BEFORE selecting VOLUME in the Sub Menu.
Abdom/Small Parts 3
Examples
When a volume calculation is desired: 1. Make one distance measurement. Select VOLUME from the General Calculation Sub Menu. A volume will be calculated using the single distance formula. OR 2. Make two distance measurements. Select VOLUME from the General Calculation Sub Menu. A volume will be calculated using the two distance formula. OR 3. If one ellipse is measured, the formula for a single ellipse will be used to calculate volume. Select VOLUME from the General Calculation Sub Menu.
A volume will be calculated using the two distance formula. OR 4. Make three distance measurements.
NOTE: This should be done in the dual format mode (side by side images). One measurement is usually made in the sagittal plane and two measurements in the axial plane.
Select VOLUME from the General Calculation Sub Menu. A volume will be calculated using the three distance formula. OR
Abdom/Small Parts 4
Measuring Volume (contd)

5. If one distance and an ellipse is measured, the formula for distance/ellipse will be used to calculate volume. Select VOLUME from the General Calculation Sub Menu. A volume will be calculated using the three distance formula. OR 6. If two ellipsoids are measured, the formula for two ellipsoids will be used to calculate volume. Select VOLUME from the General Calculation Sub Menu. A volume will be calculated using the three distance formula. Formulas used in calculations are found in this section.
Hints
S S S S
Volumes are most accurate when measurements are taken in the sagittal and axial scan planes. Use the side by side dual format option to display sagittal and axial plane images simultaneously. Make all necessary measurements before selecting volume. See General Measurements and Calculations for details on the steps to take when doing basic distance and ellipse measurements. An overflow error message (OOR) will occur during a two ellipse, or one ellipse/one distance volume calculation if: the minor (small) axis of the large ellipse is equal to/less than the major (large) axis of the small ellipse (d1), or equal to/less than the single distance measurement (d2). d1 d2
Illustration 262. Volume Calculation Error Possibilities
Abdom/Small Parts 5
Volume Calculation Formulas
Calc Mnemonic Vol Vol Vol Vol Vol Calc Name Volume (spherical) Volume (prolate spheroidal) Volume (prolate spheroidal) Volume (spheroidal) Volume (spheroidal) Input Measurements one distance two distances, d1>d2 one ellipse, d1 major axis, d2 minor axis three distances Formula Vol[ml]=(p/6)xd^3 Vol[ml]= (p/6)xd1xd2^2 Vol[ml]= (p/6)xd1xd2^2 Vol[ml]= (p/6)xd1xd2xd3
one distance d1, one Vol[ml]= ellipse, d2 major (p/6)xd1xd2xd3 axis, d3 minor axis two ellipse, ellipse 1 with axes d1 and d2, ellipse 2 with axes d3 and d4, with |d2d3| |d1d4| and d2>d3 Vol[ml]= (p/6)xd1xd2xd4 (d3 is not used, assuming it is close to d2)
Vol
Volume (spheroidal)
Table 21. Volume Calculation Formulas
Illustration 263. Volume Calculation Examples
Abdom/Small Parts 6
Measuring Angle
This function is intended to measure the angle between two intersecting planes:
Illustration 264. General Calculations Sub Menu (ANGLE)
Select ANGLE from the General Calculations Sub Menu page one. Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display page one and highlight ANGLE. The Angle Calculation Mode is set and a cursor with a vertical dashed line appears. The displayed angle is zero degrees. Use the Trackball to position the line cursor and the Zoom Size/Rotation control to adjust the angle of the line cursor.
Press Set to fix the position of the first cursor.
Use the Trackball to position the second line cursor and the Zoom Size/Rotation control to adjust the angle of the second line cursor. The angle between the two cursors is constantly updated on the display.
(continued)
Abdom/Small Parts 7
Measuring Angle (contd)

If a fine adjustment of the two cursors is needed, press Measurement to toggle which line cursor is active. Adjust the active cursor with the Trackball and Zoom Size/Rotation control. Press Set to complete the angle measurement.
Abdom/Small Parts 8
Measuring Stenosis Ratio (% stenosis)

To calculate percent stenosis in a B-Mode image: Scan the patient to display a B-Mode image of a blood vessel having a stenosis. Press Freeze to acquire a cross sectional view of the vessel.
"A
Press Measurement to activate the measurement function. If necessary press the Top Menu Select key to display the measurement sub menu. The area of the blood vessel can be measured by the ellipse, trace, circle, 2 distance or 1 distance methods. The Set Up/ Preset Program page 3 defines the default method.
CAUTION
When using a distance measurement to calculate area for % stenosis, the measurement should always be taken from a cross sectional view of the vessel. Do NOT take a distance measurement from a longitudinal view for an area calculation. This may lead to an inaccurate assessment of % stenosis.
Ellipse method
Illustration 265. General Calculations Sub Menu (% STENO)
Select % Steno in the General Calculations Sub Menu page one. Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display page one and highlight % Steno. The % stenosis measurement mode is set and a cursor appears.
Abdom/Small Parts 9
Ellipse method (contd)
Measurement of the residual area of the blood vessel is first.
Use the Trackball to move the cursor to the start point of the stenosed region.
Press Set. The start-point cursor is set and an end-point cursor appears.
Use the Trackball to move the end-point cursor to the other end of the long axis of the residual area of the vessel being measured.
Press the Ellipse up arrow key. A circle is displayed. Press the Ellipse up arrow key to increase the ellipse size.
.
(continued)
Press the Ellipse down arrow key to decrease the ellipse size.
NOTE: Use the Measurement key to toggle activation of the measurement cursors. Use the Ellipse arrow keys to adjust the size, if necessary.
Press Set. The calculation of the residual area of the blood vessel (having no stenosis) is complete and the cursor appears again.
Abdom/Small Parts 10
Measurement of the lumen area of the blood vessel is second.
Use the Trackball to move the cursor to the start point on the vessel wall.
Use the Trackball to move the end-point cursor to the other end of the long axis of the vessel being measured.
Press Set to complete the second ellipse and the % Stenosis measurement appears.
Trace method
Select % Steno from the General Calculations Sub Menu page one. Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display page one and highlight % Steno. The % stenosis measurement mode is set and a cursor appears.
Measurement of the residual area of the blood vessel having no stenosis is first.
Press Set. The start-point cursor changes to a cursor and is fixed. An end-point ( ) cursor appears.
Use the Trackball to trace the residual area.
Press Set. The trace start-point and end point are connected to each other and the calculation of the residual area of the blood vessel (having no stenosis) is complete. At the same time, an cursor appears.
Trace method (contd)
S
Use the Trackball to trace the vessel wall.
Press Set. The trace start-point and end point are connected and the measurement of the lumen area of the vessel is complete. The % Stenosis is displayed.
Measuring S/D Ratio, RI, A/B Ratio or PI

To measure the systolic/diastolic ratio, resistance index, velocity ratio and pulsatility index: Scan the patient in B plus Doppler Mode. Press Freeze to stop image acquisition.
"A
Press Measurement to activate the measurement function. If necessary press the Top Menu Select key to display the measurement sub menu. Press Clear to reset measurement operation.
Illustration 266. General Calculations Sub Menu
Select S/D Ratio, RI, A/B Ratio or PI from the General Calculations Sub Menu page two. Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display page two and highlight the desired measurement. A cursor appears.
NOTE: General Calculations Sub Menu page two is composed of Doppler spectrum measurements.
Measuring S/D Ratio, RI, A/B Ratio or PI (contd)

Use the Trackball to move the cursor to the start point on the Doppler waveform. This would be systole for S/D ratio, peak velocity for RI, A velocity for A/B ratio and VMAX for PI.
Press Set to fix the start-point cursor. An end-point cursor appears.
. .
t
Use the Trackball to move the end-point cursor to the end point of the Doppler waveform. This would be diastole for S/D ratio, minimum velocity for RI, B velocity for A/B ratio and VMIN for PI.
NOTE: For the PI calculation, if TAMAX Auto is off, use the Trackball manually to trace the waveform between VMAX and VMIN . If two velocity measurements are made prior to selecting S/D ratio, A/B ratio or RI, the system automatically calculates S/D ratio, A/B ratio or RI from the last two velocity measurements recorded.
Press Set to complete the measurement. The calculation is displayed on the screen.
NOTE: For the PI calculation, if TAMAX Auto is on, the system automatically traces the waveform when Set is pressed to fix VMIN .
Measuring heart rate (HR)

To calculate the Heart Rate: Scan the patient. Press Freeze to stop image acquisition.
"A
Press Measurement to activate the measurement function. If necessary press the Top Menu Select key to display the measurement sub menu.
Illustration 267. General Calculations Sub Menu (HR)
Select HEART RATE from the General Calculations Sub Menu page two. Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display page two and highlight HEART RATE. The Heart Rate calculation mode is set and a cursor appears.
Measuring heart rate (HR) (contd)

Use the Trackball to move the cursor to a point on the Doppler spectrum where the Heart Rate measurement is to start.
Press Set. The start-point cursor is fixed and an end-point cursor appears.
Use the Trackball to move the cursor to the same position on the Doppler waveform, two heartbeats from the start point. See Illustration 268.
Press Set. The HR calculation is complete.
Illustration 268. Two Heart Beat Reference
Time averaged maximum velocity (TAMAX) measurement method

To choose a method to measure the time averaged maximum velocity:
Illustration 269. General Calculation Sub Menu (TAMAX AUTO)
Use the TAMAX, AUTO (Automatic/Manual) Sub Menu selection to choose the method by which the TAMAX trace is made. If TAMAX Auto is highlighted, the maximum velocity envelope is automatically traced between the two velocity points set during the PI measurement. If TAMAX Auto is not highlighted, the operator has to manually trace, with the cursor and Trackball, the maximum velocity envelope between the two points fixed during the PI measurement.
Measuring the Max PG

To measure Max PG (Maximum Pressure Gradient): Scan the patient in Doppler Mode (Spectrum Display). Press Freeze to stop image acquisition.
"A
Illustration 270. General Calculations Sub Menu (Max PG)
Select Max PG from the General Calculations Sub Menu page three. Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display page three and highlight Max PG. A horizontal dotted line cursor appears.
Measuring the Max PG (contd)

Use the Trackball to place the cursor at a peak in the Doppler spectrum waveform.
Press Set to fix the first cursor. A second cursor appears and VMAX is displayed.
Use the Trackball to place the second cursor at the lowest level in the measured Doppler waveform.
Press Set to fix the second cursor. VMIN is displayed. Max PG is calculated and displayed.
Automatic Calculation of Max PG

If TAMAX was previously measured and calculated in Doppler Mode, MAX PG is calculated from the VMAX and VMIN measurements taken for TAMAX when MAX PG is first selected in the General Calculations Sub Menu.
Measuring the Mean PG

To measure Mean PG (Mean Pressure Gradient): Scan the patient in Doppler Mode (Spectrum Display). Press Freeze to stop image acquisition.
"A
Illustration 271. General Calculations Sub Menu (Mean PG)
Select Mean PG from the General Calculations Sub Menu page three. Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display page three and highlight Mean PG. A horizontal dotted line cursor appears in the Doppler spectrum.
Measuring the Mean PG (contd)

Use the Trackball to move the cursor to the waveform trace start point.
If TAMAX AUTO is enabled, a second cursor appears. Use the Trackball to move this cursor to the measurement end point. Press Set to complete the Doppler waveform trace. If TAMAX AUTO is disabled, use the Trackball to trace the Doppler waveform. Press Set to complete the Doppler waveform trace.
Automatic Calculation of Mean PG

If TAMAX was previously measured and calculated in Doppler Mode, Mean PG is calculated from the TAMAX value when Mean PG is first selected in the General Calculations Sub Menu. The waveform is automatically traced. TAMAX and Mean PG are also displayed on the screen.
Measuring cardiac output (CO)

To measure CO (Cardiac Output), a TAMAX (Time Average Maximum) measurement is taken in the Doppler Spectrum. An FCA (Flow Cross Sectional Area) is measured on the vessel in B-Mode. These two measurements are used to calculate SV (Stroke Volume). Finally, a HR (Heart Rate) measurement is taken in the Doppler Spectrum. SV and HR are then used to calculate cardiac output. Scan the patient to display a B-Mode with Doppler spectrum image. Press Freeze to stop image acquisition.
"A
Illustration 272. General Calculations Sub Menu (CO)
Select CO from General Calculation Sub Menu page three. Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display page three and highlight CO. The trace cursor (horizontal dotted line) appears in the Doppler spectrum.
Measuring cardiac output (CO) (contd)

Use the Trackball to move the cursor to the TAMAX measurement start point.
Press Set. The first cursor is fixed and a second is active.
If TAMAX AUTO is enabled, use the Trackball to move the second cursor to the TAMAX measurement end point. Press Set. The waveform maximum velocities are automatically traced and a TAMAX value is displayed. If TAMAX AUTO is disabled, use the Trackball to trace the waveform. Press Set. The trace waveform is fixed and the TAMAX value is displayed. A cross-point cursor appears in the B-Mode image to measure FCA. Use the Trackball to move the cursor to a point on the vessel wall.
Press Set to fix the start point cursor. Use the Ellipse or Trace method to measure the circumference and area of the vessel as described on Abdom/Small Parts 9. Press Set to complete the circumference/area measurement. The FCA (Flow Cross Sectional Area) is displayed. The SV (Stroke Volume) is also computed and displayed from TAMAX and FCA values. A vertical line cursor appears in the Doppler spectrum to measure Heart Rate.
Measuring cardiac output (CO) (contd)

Use the Trackball to locate a start point on the Doppler waveform to measure HR (Heart Rate).
Press Set to fix the start point. The second cursor ( ) appears.
Use the Trackball to move the measurement cursor to the HR end point (one 2beat time interval).
Press Set to complete the HR measurement. The heart rate is displayed. CO (Cardiac Output) is computed from the SV and HR values and is displayed.
Automatic CO calculation
If the following measurements have previously been made in any order, CO (Cardiac Output) automatically calculates when it is selected from the Calculation Sub Menu:
S S S
TAMAX in Doppler Mode Functional Cross Sectional Area in B-Mode (Circumference/Area) Heart Rate in Doppler Mode
Measuring stroke volume ratio (SV)

To measure stroke volume, a TAMAX (Time Averaged Maximum) measurement is taken in the Doppler spectrum. An FCA (Flow Cross Sectional Area) is measured on the vessel in B-Mode. The TAMAX and FCA is then used to calculate SV (Stroke Volume). Scan the patient to display a B-Mode with Doppler spectrum image. Press Freeze to stop image acquisition.
"A
Illustration 273. General Calculations Sub Menu (SV)
Select SV from General Calculation Sub Menu page three. Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display page three and highlight SV. The trace cursor (horizontal dotted line) appears in the Doppler spectrum. Use the Trackball to move the cursor to the TAMAX measurement start point.
(continued)
Measuring stroke volume ratio (SV) (contd)

If TAMAX AUTO is enabled, use the Trackball to move the second cursor to the TAMAX measurement end point. Press Set. The waveform maximum velocities are automatically traced and a TAMAX value is displayed. If TAMAX AUTO is disabled, use the Trackball to trace the waveform. Press Set. The trace waveform is fixed and the TAMAX value is displayed. A cross-point cursor appears in the B-Mode image to measure FCA. Use the Trackball to move the cursor to a point on the vessel wall.
Press Set to fix the start point cursor. Use the Ellipse or Trace method to measure the circumference and area of the vessel as described on Abdom/Small Parts 9. Press Set to complete the circumference/area measurement. The FCA (Flow Cross Sectional Area) is displayed. The SV (Stroke Volume) is also computed and displayed from TAMAX and FCA values.
Automatic SV calculation
If TAMAX was previously measured while in Doppler Mode and the cross sectional area of a vessel was measured while in B-Mode, stroke volume will be automatically calculated from these previously measured values when SV is selected from the General Calculation Sub Menu.

Refer to the procedure found on Abdom/Small Parts 16.
Measuring flow volume (FV)

This measurement is used to measure the flow volume in a vessel on the Doppler spectrum. It is measured in milliliters. When the FV measurement is made, FVO is automatically calculated. To measure flow volume: Scan the patient to display a B-Mode with Doppler spectrum image. Press Freeze to stop image acquisition.
"A
Illustration 274. General Calculations Sub Menu (SV)
Select FV from General Calculation Sub Menu page three. Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display page three and highlight FV. The trace cursor (horizontal dotted line) appears in the Doppler spectrum.
Measuring flow volume (FV) (contd)

Use the Trackball to move the cursor to the start point on the Doppler spectrum.
Use the Trackball to move the cursor to the end point on the Doppler spectrum.
Press Set.
NOTE: If Auto Trace is not selected, trace the desired portion of the spectrum and press Set and use the Trackball to trace the waveform.
The cursor moves to the B-Mode area. Use the Trackball to move the cursor to the start point on the vessel wall.
Press Set to fix the start point cursor. Use the Ellipse or Trace method to measure the circumference and area of the vessel as described on Abdom/Small Parts 9. Press Set to complete the circumference/area measurement. The flow volume (FV) is calculated and displayed in milliliters. The flow volume output (FVO) is also calculated and displayed in milliliters/minute.
Time averaged maximum velocity (TAMAX) measurement method

Refer to the procedure found on Abdom/Small Parts 18.
Measuring flow volume output (FVO)

This measurement is used to measure the flow volume output in a vessel on the Doppler spectrum. It is measured in milliliters/minute. When the FVO measurement is made, FV is automatically calculated. Refer to the FV measurement on Abdom/Small Parts 28 for details.
Helpful hints Hints

The following hints can help when taking a measurement:
S
If PRINT is pressed while making a measurement, the system completes the measurement and sends the data to the report page (unless the VCR is assigned to the PRINT key). Prior to making measurements, use the Cine function, if necessary, to display the best image. Measurements can continue to be made until all measurement/calculation cells are filled. The cells are displayed at the bottom center of the display. Once all measurement/calculation cells are filled on the display, any further measurements will cause the top (first) cell to be erased and the new measurement added last (first in, first out). If there is a series of measurements/calculations that are routinely taken in a specific sequence, the auto sequence feature of the system can be used to program these measurements/calculations to automatically appear on the display in the desired order. Refer to Customize 124 for details on programming an auto sequence.
S S
General Calculation Formulas

Calc Mnemonic MaxPG MeanPG Calc Name Maximum Pressure Gradient Mean Pressure Gradient Input Measurements two Doppler blood flow peak velocities flow velocities from one time marker to another time marker in a Doppler display flow velocities from one time marker to another time marker in a Doppler display and one area two distances and one 2 beat time interval flow velocities from one time marker to another time marker in a Doppler display and one area flow velocities from one time marker to another time marker in a Doppler display and one area two areas (by ellipse, trace, circle or distance) two Doppler blood flow peak velocities and TAMAX two Doppler blood flow peak velocities one 2 beat time interval two Doppler blood flow peak velocities Formula MaxPG[mmHg]=4x(v1^2 v2^2) MeanPG[mmHg]= n 4x (Vi^2)/n i=1 SV[ml]= (sum{Vt^2} from t1 to t2)x a1
SV
Stroke Volume
CO FV
Cardiac Output Flow Volume
CO[1/min]= SVxHR/1000 FV [ml] = (sum{Vt[m/s]} from t1 to t2) x a1[cm^2]
FVO
Flow Volume Output
FVO [ml/min] = FV [ml] / (t2t1) x 60000
% Stenosis PI
Stenosis Ratio Pulsatility Index
% Stenosis= [1(Aresidual/ Alumen)] x 100 PI=(VmaxVmin)/ TAMAX RI=(VmaxVmin)/Vmax HR[BPM]=120[sec]/ 2 beat time [sec] A/B=V1/V2
RI HR A/B Ratio
Resistivity Index Heart Rate (beats/ minute) Velocities Ratio
Table 22. General Calculation Formulas
Urology Calculations
Overview
The Urology Calculations factory default Sub Menu consists of two pages. The calculations available are the same as the first two general menus for Radiology/Abdomen and Small Parts. The two menus are:
Illustration 275. Urology Calculation Menus
Refer to the General Calculations section of this chapter for steps to perform these measurements and calculations.
Urology Calculations
OB/GYN
(Basic OB software option)
Exam Preparation Fetal Doppler Acoustic Output OB Measurements and Formulas OB Summary Reports Anatomical Survey OB Graphs Fetal Trend Management Multigestational Option Data Management Center (DMC) GYN Measurements
.
t
GYN Summary Report

If none of the OB software option are installed, the General Calculation Menu will appear for the OB exam category.
This section discusses the precautions to take during an obstetrical exam. It also illustrates the use of the optional basic OB measurement menus and summary reports provided by the system software for four different regional methods. Basic fetal growth curve graphs are outlined as well as the fetal trend management option. The differences found with the multigestational option are also outlined. The end of this section shows the measurement and report relating to the GYN exam category.
OB/GYN 1
OB/GYN
OB/GYN 2
Exam Preparation
Overview
Prior to an ultrasound examination, the patient should be informed of the clinical indication, specific benefits, potential risks, and alternatives, if any. In addition, if the patient requests information about the exposure time and intensity, it should be provided. Patient access to educational materials regarding ultrasound is strongly encouraged to supplement the information communicated directly to the patient. Furthermore, these examinations should be conducted in a manner and take place in a setting which assures patient dignity and privacy.
S
Prior material knowledge and approval of the presence of nonessential personnel with the number of such personnel kept to a minimum. An intent to share with the parents, either during the examination or shortly thereafter, the information derived. An offer of choice about viewing the fetus. An offer of choice about learning the sex of the fetus, if such information becomes available.
S S S
Ultrasound examinations performed solely to satisfy the familys desire to know the fetal sex, to view the fetus or to obtain a picture of the fetus should be discouraged.
OB/GYN 3
Exam Preparation
OB/GYN 4
Fetal Doppler
Doppler Mode for Fetal Exams
Indications for Fetal Doppler use
The LOGIQ 400 system can be used for fetal examination in Pulsed Wave Doppler, Continuous Wave Doppler, Color Flow Doppler and Color M-Mode for the diagnosis of:
S S
Structural fetal cardiac anomalies (18 weeks gestation to term) for high-risk patients. Intrauterine growth retardation (IUGR) (28 weeks gestation to term) for high-risk patients with one or more of the following known or suspected conditions:
S S S S S S
Multiple pregnancy Maternal hypertension Hydrops Diabetes Lupus Placenta abnormality.
Contraindications
Pulsed Wave Doppler, Continuous Wave Doppler, Color Flow Doppler and Color M-Mode are not intended for routine fetal examination or screening nor are they intended for fetal examination in a low-risk population. The use of Doppler, even at minimal output levels, in fetal examination must be adjunctive with conventional fetal echocardiography and other clinical diagnostic methods, for high risk patients only.
OB/GYN 5
Fetal Doppler
OB/GYN 6
Acoustic Output
Considerations
General warning CAUTION
The LOGIQ 400 system is a multi-use device which is capable of exceeding FDA Pre-enactment acoustic output (spatial peak-temporal average) intensity limits for fetal applications.
Prudent use
It is prudent to conduct an exam with the minimum amount and duration of acoustic output necessary to optimize the images diagnostic value.
Concerns surrounding fetal exposure

Always be aware of the acoustic output level by observing the Acoustic Output Display. Review the Acoustic Output considerations section of Appendix A, namely:
S S S S
Output considerations Clinical instructions for fetal use Efficacy of fetal Doppler Variance studies.
In addition, become thoroughly familiar with the Acoustic Output Display and equipment controls affecting output.
Training
It is recommended that all users receive proper training in fetal Doppler applications before performing them in a clinical setting. Please contact a local sales representative for training assistance.
OB/GYN 7
Acoustic Output
OB/GYN 8
OB Measurements and Formulas

Introduction
Measurements and calculations derived from ultrasound images are intended to supplement other clinical procedures available to the attending physician. The accuracy of measurements is not only determined by the system accuracy, but also by use of proper medical protocols by the user. When appropriate, be sure to note any protocols associated with a particular measurement or calculation. Formulas and databases used within the system software that are associated with specific investigators are so noted. Be sure to refer to the original article describing the investigators recommended clinical procedures. If obstetrics was selected as the exam category on the Patient Entry Menu, the OB Sub Menu may automatically appear when the Measurement key is pressed. If it does not, press the Top Menu Select key.
OB Format Selection
Four types of OB measurements and report pages can be selected from the Set Up/System Parameter Sub Menu page 2. The user may choose to measure and report items based on Tokyo University, Osaka University, USA or European methods.
OB/GYN 9
OB Measurement Soft Menus and Formulas

The factory default measurement menus are shown in Illustration 276 through Illustration 279. The user should be familiar with how to do basic distance and circumference measurements, as described in the Basic Measurements and Calculations chapter in Volume 2 of this manual set.
Tokyo University Method
.
OB/GYN 10
Illustration 276. Tokyo University Sub Menus
NOTE: Tokyo EFBW selection is made in the Set Up/System Parameters menu page 2.

Tokyo University Method (contd)
Calc Mnemonic HR Calc Name Input Measurements Formula HR[BPM]= 120[sec]/ 2beat time[sec] Curve data is available in Appendix F Curve data is available in Appendix F Curve data is available in Appendix F Curve data is available in Appendix F Curve data is available in Appendix F APTD = input Author Reference n/a
Heart Rate one 2 beat time (beats/minute) (Measured manually or automatically) Gestational Sac Crown Rump Length Femur Length one distance
GS
CRL
one distance
Tokyo University Method 1986, 6 by Univ. of Univ Tokyo
FL
one distance
BPD
Biparietal Diameter Length of Vertebra Antero posterior Trunk Diameter Transverse Trunk Diameter Estimated Fetal Body Weight
one distance
LV
one distance
APTD
one distance
TTD
one distance
TTD = input
EFBW
Average of BPD, Average of APTD, Average of TTD and Average of FL
EFBW = 1.07 x BPD^ 3 +3.42 x APTD x TTD x FL
Table 23. OB Calculation FormulasTokyo University Factory Defaults
OB/GYN 11

Tokyo University Method (contd)
Calc Mnemonic CTAR Calc Name Cardio Thoracic Area Ratio Preload Index Input Measurements Formula Author Reference Y.Chiba Fetal Diagn Ther 1990 : 5 : 175 188 Y.Chiba Fetal Diagn Ther 1990 : 5 : 168 174 n/a
four distances or two CTAR = areas (d1 x d2) / (d3 x d4) x 100 or a1 / a2 x 100 two Doppler blood flow velocities PLI = | v1 / v2 |
PLI
EF
Ejection Fraction
two distances on M-Mode (End-diastolic dimension and End-systolic dimension on M-Mode) one Doppler blood flow peak velocities
EF = (1 Ds^3 / Dd^3)
Vmax
Maximum Velocity in descending aorta
Vmax = input
n/a
S/D Ratio A/B Ratio Pl
Systolic / two Doppler blood Diastolic Ratio flow peak velocities Velocities Ratio Pulsatility Index Resistivity Index two Doppler blood flow peak velocities two Doppler blood flow peak velocities and TA_MAX two Doppler blood flow peak velocities
S/D = Vsystolic / Vdiastolic A/B = V1/V2
n/a n/a
Pl = (Vmax Vmin)/ n/a TA_MAX RI = (Vmax Vmin)/ n/a Vmax
RI
Table 23. OB Calculation FormulasTokyo University Factory Defaults (contd)
OB/GYN 12

Osaka University Method
Illustration 277. Osaka University Sub Menus
OB/GYN 13

Osaka University Method (contd)
Calc Mnemonic HR Calc Name Input Measurements Formula HR[BPM]= 120[sec]/ 2beat time[sec] Curve data is available in Appendix F Curve data is available in Appendix F Curve data is available in Appendix F Curve data is available in Appendix F APTD = input Author Reference n/a
Heart Rate one 2 beat time (beats/minute) (Measured manually or automatically) Crown Rump Length Femur Length one distance
CRL
FL
one distance
Osaka University Method 1989, 3 by Univ. of Univ Osaka
BPD
Biparietal Diameter Humerus Length
one distance
HL
one distance
FTA
Fetal Trunk one area Cross Sectional Area Estimated Fetal Body Weight Average of BPD, Average of FTA and Average of FL
EFBW
EFBW=1.25647x BPD^3+3.50655 x FTA x FL+6.3 (<5000g) IUGR=1.229 x BPD^3+3.063 x FTA x FL24.6 Curve data is available in Appendix F
Table 24. OB Calculation FormulasOsaka University Factory Defaults
OB/GYN 14

Osaka University Method (contd)
Calc Mnemonic CTAR Calc Name Cardio Thoracic Area Ratio Preload Index Input Measurements Formula Author Reference Y.Chiba Fetal Diagn Ther 1990 : 5 : 175 188 Y.Chiba Fetal Diagn Ther 1990 : 5 : 168 174 n/a
four distances or two CTAR = areas (d1 x d2) / (d3 x d4) x 100 or a1 / a2 x 100 two Doppler blood flow velocities PLI = | v1 / v2 |
PLI
EF
Ejection Fraction
two distances on M-Mode (Enddiastolic dimension and Endsystolic dimension on M-Mode) one Doppler blood flow peak velocities
EF = (1 Ds^3 / Dd^3)
Vmax
Maximum Velocity in descending aorta
Vmax = input
n/a
S/D Ratio A/B Ratio Pl
Systolic / two Doppler blood Diastolic Ratio flow peak velocities Velocities Ratio Pulsatility Index Resistivity Index two Doppler blood flow peak velocities two Doppler blood flow peak velocities and TA_MAX two Doppler blood flow peak velocities
S/D = Vsystolic/ Vdiastolic A/B = V1/V2
n/a n/a
Pl = (Vmax Vmin)/ n/a TA_MAX RI = (Vmax Vmin)/ n/a Vmax
RI
Table 24. OB Calculation FormulasOsaka University Factory Defaults (contd)
OB/GYN 15

USA Method
Illustration 278. USA Sub Menus
OB/GYN 16

USA Method (contd)
Calc Mnemonic HR Input Measurements Author Reference n/a
Calc Name
Formula HR[BPM]= 120[sec]/2 beat time[sec] GS=(d1+d2+d3)/3 + 3.6225
Heart Rate one 2 beat time (beats/minute) (Measured manually or automatically) Gestational Sac Crown Rump Length three distances
GS
Hellman, A/ OG, 103: 789,1969
CRL
one distance
CRL=1.684969+ Hadlock, 0.315646xd1+ Radiology, 0.049306xd1^2+ 182:501, 1992 0.004057xd1^3+ 0.000120456xd1^4 FL = 3.91 + 0.427 Hadlock et al, (GA) 0.0034 Radiology, (GA)2 152:497501, BPD = 3.08+0.41 1984 (GA) 0.000061 (GA)3 AC = 13.3 + 1.61 (GA) 0.00998 (GA)2 HC = 11.48 + 1.56 (GA) 0.0002548 (GA)3 Longest axis from HC measurement S/D=Vsystolic/ Vdiastolic A/B = V1/V2 PI=(VmaxVmin)/ TAMAX RI=(VmaxVmin)/ Vmax n/a
FL
Femur Length
one distance
BPD
Biparietal Diameter
one distance
AC
Abdominal circumference by Circumference trace, ellipse, circle or two distances Head circumference by Circumference trace, ellipse, circle or two distances Occipito Frontal Diameter HC by ellipse or two distance
HC
OFD
S/D Ratio A/B Ratio PI
Systolic/ two Doppler blood Diastolic Ratio flow peak velocities Velocities Ratio Pulsatility Index Resistivity Index two Doppler blood flow peak velocities two Doppler blood flow peak velocities and TAMAX two Doppler blood flow peak velocities
n/a n/a n/a
RI
n/a
Table 25. OB Calculation Formulas Part 1USA Version Factory Defaults
OB/GYN 17

USA Method (contd)
Calc Mnemonic EFW #1 Input Measurements Average of BPD and Average of AC Author Reference Shepard, AJOG, 142:47, 1982
Calc Name Estimated Fetal Weight
Formula EFW=10^(-1.7492 +0.166*BPD+ (0.046*AC) ((2.646*AC*BPD)/ 1000)) EFW=10^(1.304+ (0.05281*AC)+ (0.1938*FL) (0.004* AC*FL)) EFW=10^(1.335 0.0034*AC*FL)+ (0.0316*BPD)+ 0.0457*AC)+ (0.158* FL) EFW=10^(1.326 (0.00326*AC*FL)) + (0.0170*HC)+ (0.0438*AC)+ (0.158*FL))
EFW #2
Estimated Fetal Weight
Average of FL and Average of AC
HadlockRadiology 150:535, 1984 Hadlock, AJOG, 151:333, 1985
EFW #3
Average of BPD, Average of AC and Average of FL
EFW #4
Average of FL, Average of AC and Average of HC
Hadlock, AJOG, 151:333, 1985
EFW #5
Average of FL, Average of AC, Average of HC and Average of BPD
EFW=10^(1.3596 Hadlock, (0.00386*AC*FL))+ AJOG, (0.0064*HC)+ 151:333, 1985 (0.00061*BPD*AC) + (0.0424*AC)+ (0.174*FL)
Table 25. OB Calculation Formulas Part 1USA Version Factory Defaults (contd)
OB/GYN 18

USA Method (contd)
Calc Mnemonic Calc Name CUA Composite Ultrasound Age Formula 1. CUA=10.85+0.060(HC)(FL)+ 0.670(BPD)+0.1680(AC) 2. CUA=10.58+0.005(HC)^2+0.3635(AC) + 0.02894(BPD)(AC) 3. CUA=10.33+0.031(HC)(FL)+ 0.361(HC)+0.0298(AC)(FL) 4. CUA=11.38+0.07(HC)(FL)+0.98(BPD) 5. CUA=10.61+0.175(BPD)(FL)+ 0.297(AC)+0.71(FL) 6. CUA=10.47+0.442(AC)+0.314(FL)^2 0.0121(FL)^3 7. CUA=11.19+0.07(HC)(FL)+0.263(HC) 8. CUA=10.31+0.012(HC)^2+0.385(AC) 9. CUA=10.5+0.197(BPD)(FL)+0.95(FL)+ 0.73(BPD) 10. CUA=10.32+0.009(HC)^2+1.32(BPD)+ 0.00012(HC)^3 11. CUA=9.57+0.524(AC)+0.122(BPD)^2 12. CUA=10.4+2.256(FL)+0.195(FL)^2 13. CUA=6.8954+2.6345(BPD)+0.008771 (BPD)^3 14. CUA=7.61+0.7645(AC)+0.00393(AC)^2 FL/AC FL/HC FL/BPD Author Reference Sonographic Estimation of Fetal Age and Weight, Hadlock, Radiology Clinics of North America, 1990.
FL/AC FL/HC FL/BPD CI
FL/AC ratio FL/HC ratio FL/BPD ratio Cephalic Index
Hadlock, AJR 141:979, 1983 Hadlock, JUM 3:439, 1984 Hadlock, AJOG 141:759, 1987
BPD/OFD short distance HC/long distance Hadlock, AJR HC 137:83, 1981
Table 26. OB Calculation Formulas Part 2USA Version Factory Defaults
OB/GYN 19

USA Method (contd)
Calc Mnemonic Calc Name HC/AC HC/AC ratio Amniotic Fluid Index HC/AC Formula Author Reference Campbell, BRJ.OG 84:165,1977 Dr. Rutherford/Dr. Phelan, Obstetrics & Gynecology Volume 70, No. 3, Part 1, p. 3536, Sept. 1987. Dr. C. C. Smith, The Female Patient, Volume 15, p. 85-97, March 1990.
AFI*
AFI=AFI1 (distance) + AFI2 (distance) + AFI3 (distance) + AFI4 (distance)
* The skip function using the Ellipse arrow keys is not available for AFI. Table 26. OB Calculation Formulas Part 2USA Version Factory Defaults (contd)
OB/GYN 20

European Method
Illustration 279. European Sub Menus
OB/GYN 21

European Method (contd)
Calc Mnemonic HR Calc Name Input Measurements Formula HR[BPM]= 120[sec]/ 2beat time[sec] Curve data is available in Appendix F Author Reference n/a
Heart Rate one 2 beat time (beats/minute) (Measured manually or automatically) Gestational Sac one distance
GS
Tokyo University Method 1986, 6 by Univ. of Tokyo JEANTY : Radiology, 143 : 513, 1982
CRL
Crown Rump Length Biparietal Diameter
one distance
Curve data is available in Appendix F Curve data is available in Appendix F Curve data is available in Appendix F Curve data is available in Appendix F Curve data is available in Appendix F Curve data is available in Appendix F Curve data is available in Appendix F Known LMP Case: Unknown LMP Case:
BPD
one distance
HC
Head circumference by Circumference trace, ellipse, circle or two distances Abdominal circumference by Circumference trace, ellipse, circle or two distances Femur Length one distance
AC
FL
BD
Binocular Distance Transverse Abdominal Diameter Occipito Frontal Diameter
one distance
TAD
one distance
ERIKSEN
OFD
one distance
Hansmann: Ultraschalldiag nostik in B hilf d Begurtshilfe und Gynakologie 1985
Table 27. OB Calculation FormulasEuropean Version Factory Defaults
OB/GYN 22

European Method (contd)
Calc Mnemonic Ft Calc Name Foot Distance Input Measurements one distance Formula Curve data is available in Appendix F EFW[g] = 10 (1.7288 + 0.09184*BPD + (0.02581* AC) + (0.00011*BPD*A C)) FL/AC FL/BPD Author Reference PARIS
EFW
Average of BPD and Average of AC [cm]
Shepard/ Warsoff
FL/AC FL/BPD
FL/AC ratio FL/BPD ratio
Average of FL and Average of AC Average of FL and Average of BPD Average of BPD and Average of OFD Average of HC and Average of AC Average of FL and Average of Ft Average of BPD and Average of BD two Doppler blood flow peak velocities two Doppler blood flow peak velocities two Doppler blood flow peak velocities and TA_MAX two Doppler blood flow peak velocities
Hadlock, AJR, 141 : 979, 1983 Hadlock, AJOG, 141 : 759, 1987 Hadlock, AJR, 137 : 83, 1981
CI
Cephalic Index HC/AC ratio FL/Ft ratio BD/BPD ratio Diastolic/ Systolic Ratio Velocities Ratio Pulsatility Index Resistivity Index
BPD/OFD short distance HC/long distance HC HC/AC FL/Ft BD/BPD D/S = V diastolic/ Vsystolic A/B = V1/V2 Pl = (Vmax Vmin)/TA_MAX RI = (Vmax Vmin)/Vmax
HC/AC FL/Ft BD/BPD D/S Ratio A/B Ratio Pl
n/a n/a n/a
RI
n/a
Table 27. OB Calculation FormulasEuropean Version Factory Defaults
OB/GYN 23

Other OB Calculation Formulas
Calc Mnemonic BPD Calc Name Biparietal Diameter Femur Length Input Measurements one distance Formula Curve data is available in Appendix F Curve data is available in Appendix F Curve data is available in Appendix F Curve data is available in Appendix F HANSMANN: M and Al : Geburtsch, u, Frauenheilk 39 : 656, 1979 ROBINSON: Robins on and Al: Br J Gynecol, 82 : 702, 1975 PARIS Author Reference CAMPBELL : Kings College Hosp. London (Am.J. (Am J obst gynecol). Oct. 1, 1982
FL
one distance
BD
Binocular Distance Gestational Sac
one distance
GS
one distance
CRL
Crown Rump Length
one distance
Curve data is available in Appendix F Curve data is available in Appendix F Curve data is available in Appendix F Curve data is available in Appendix F Curve data is available in Appendix F Curve data is available in Appendix F Curve data is available in Appendix F
CRL
Crown Rump Length Biparietal Diameter Transverse Abdominal Diameter Femur Length
one distance
BPD
one distance
TAD
one distance
FL
one distance
BPD
Biparietal Diameter
one distance
HC
Head circumference by Circumference trace, ellipse, circle or two distances
SOSTOA: Hospital de la Santa Cruzy San Pablo, servieio de obst. y gynecol.
Table 28. OB Calculation FormulasOther Selections
OB/GYN 24

Other OB Calculation Formulas (contd)
Calc Mnemonic AC Calc Name Input Measurements Formula Curve data is available in Appendix F Curve data is available in Appendix F Curve data is available in Appendix F Curve data is available in Appendix F Curve data is available in Appendix F Curve data is available in Appendix F Curve data is available in Appendix F Curve data is available in Appendix F Curve data is available in Appendix F Curve data is available in Appendix F Curve data is available in Appendix F Hadlock, AJR, 138 : 875, 1982 Hadlock, JUM 1:97, 1982 Hadlock, AJR, 139 : 367, 1982 Hadlock, AJR, 138 : 649, 1982 NELSON Author Reference SOSTOA: Hospital de la Santa Cruzy San Pablo, Pablo servieio de obst. y gynecol.
Abdominal circumference by Circumference trace, ellipse, circle or two distances Femur Length one distance
FL
BD
Binocular Distance Occipito Frontal Diameter Femur Length
one distance
OFD
one distance
FL
one distance
BPD
Biparietal Diameter
one distance
AC
Abdominal circumference by Circumference trace, ellipse, circle or two distances Head circumference by Circumference trace, ellipse, circle or two distances Crown Rump Length Biparietal Diameter Binocular Distance one distance
HC
CRL
BPD
one distance
KURTZ
BD
one distance
BERKOWITZ
Table 28. OB Calculation FormulasOther Selections (contd)
OB/GYN 25

Calc Mnemonic EFW Calc Name Estimated Fetal Weight Input Measurements Formula Author Reference German
Average of BPD and EFW[kg] = Average of TAD [mm] 0.515263 (0.105775*BPD) + (0.000930707* (BPD)2) + (0.0649145*TAD) (0.00020562* (TAD[mm])2) Average of BPD and Average of AC [cm]
EFW
EFW [g] = Shepard : 10 (31.7492 + Richards/ Berkowitz 0.046*AC + 0.166*BPD 0.002646*AC*BP D) EFW [g] = Hadlock, 10 (1.5662 Radiology, 150 : 535, 1984 (0.0108*HC) + (0.0468*AC) + (0.171*FL) + (0.00034*(HC)2) (0.003685*AC*FL )) FL/HC Known LMP Case: Unknown LMP Case: Hadlock, JUM, 3 : 439, 1984 Rempen
EFW
Average of FL, Average of AC and Average of HC [cm]
FL/HC GS
FL/HC ratio Gestational Sac
Average of FL and Average of HC one distance
CRL
Crown Rump Length
one distance
Known LMP Case: Unknown LMP Case:
BPD
Biparietal Diameter
one distance
Known LMP Case: Unknown LMP Case:
OB/GYN 26

Calc Mnemonic BPD Calc Name Biparietal Diameter Crown Rump Length Input Measurements one distance Formula Known LMP Case: Unknown LMP Case: one distance Known LMP Case: Unknown LMP Case: HC [mm = 2.325* (BPD [mm] ^2 + OFD [mm] ^2)^0.5 Known LMP Case: Unknown LMP Case: one distance Known LMP Case: Unknown LMP Case: AC Abdominal one distance Circumference Estimated Fetal Weight Average of BPD Average of AC Known LMP Case: Unknown LMP Case: EFW[g] = 3200.40479 + 157.07186 * AC[cm] + 15.90391 * BPD [cm] Curve data is available in Appendix F Curve data is available in Appendix F Merz, et al., Womens Hospital, University of Mainz Tokyo Shinozuka Method, 1996 Author Reference Hansmann: Ultraschalldiag Ultraschalldiag nostik in Begurtshilfe und Gynakologie 1985
CRL
HC(*1)
Head Average of BIP Circumference Average of FRO Transverse Thorax Diameter Femur Length one distance
ThD
FL
EFW
BPD
Biparietal Diameter
one distance
APTD x Antero TTD (AxT) Posterior Trunk Diameter Transverse Trunk Diameter
two distance
OB/GYN 27

Calc Mnemonic AC Calc Name Input Measurements Formula Curve data is available in Appendix F Curve data is available in Appendix F Curve data is available in Appendix F EFW1 [gram] = 1.07 * BPD^3 + 3.42*APTDxTTD *FL G = [day] , BPD = [cm], FL = [cm], APTDxTTD = [cm2] EFW2 [gram] = 1.07 * BPD^3 + 0.30 * AC^2 * FL G = [day], BPD = [cm], AC = [cm], FL = [cm] EFW3 [gram] = 1.07 * BPD^3 + 2.91*APTDxTTD* LV G = [day], BPD = [cm], LV = [cm], APTDxTTD = [cm2] Curve data is available in Appendix F Curve data is available in Appendix F ASUM D. Robinson et al, 1990.8 ASUM Silva et al 1991.6 Author Reference Tokyo Shinozuka Method, 1996
Abdominal circumference by Circumference trace, ellipse, circle or two distance Femur Length one distance
FL
CRL
Crown Rump Length Estimated Fetal Weight
one distance
EFW1
four distance
EFW2
2 distance and 1 circumference
EFW3
four distance
BPD
Biparietal Diameter Crown Rump Length
one distance
CRL
one distance
AC
Abdominal circumference by Circumference trace, ellipse, circle or two distance
AC (mm) = 56.582 ASUM + 11.402 * (GA2) Deler GA = [week]
OB/GYN 28

GS Measurement
GS Measurement for the Tokyo University and European methods requires only one distance measurement. GS Measurement for the USA method requires three distance measurements obtained from longitudinal and transverse images. The three measurements are anteriorposterior, transverse and longitudinal. It is advantageous to use the dual-image (split screen) feature for this GS measurement.
User-Programmed Calculations (Tables)

User-programmed calculation tables are displayed in the measurement menus only after they are entered by the user. The User Table Editor is found in the Set Up/Preset Program Sub Menu page 6. Refer to Customize 120 on how to define these user selections and program the user tables.
OB/GYN 29

Selecting Locatn (Location)
This choice is used to select one of three locations at which S/D (D/S) ratio, A/B ratio, RI and PI measurements can be taken and recorded on the report page. The locations are numbered 1, 2 and 3 as a default from the factory. However, the user can customize each location designation with a six character name. This customization edit is done in any report page that displays S/D (D/S) Ratio, A/B Ratio, RI or PI. Changes will be permanently saved even after system power down. Up to three measurements can be taken for S/D (D/S) Ratio, A/B Ratio, RI or PI. The latest value or measurement average can be reported. Averaging depends upon the average activity preset selection in Preset Program page 3. To select a location: Scan the patient in B plus Doppler Mode. Press Freeze to stop image acquisition.
"A
Illustration 280. European OB Calculation Sub Menu
Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display page three and highlight Select Locatn. Press the Sub Menu Select up or down arrow keys to change the location number as necessary. Refer to Illustration 280.
OB/GYN 30

Measuring S/D (D/S) Ratio, A/B Ratio, RI or PI
To measure the systolic/diastolic (diastolic/systolic) ratio, a/b ratio, resistance index and pulsatility index: Scan the patient in B plus Doppler Mode. Press Freeze to stop image acquisition.
"A
Select S/D (D/S) RATIO, A/B RATIO, RI or PI from the OB Calculation Sub Menu page three to record this calculation in the OB Summary Report. Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display page three and highlight the desired measurement. A cursor appears. Refer to Illustration 280.
Use the Trackball to move the cursor to the start point on the Doppler waveform. This would be systole for S/D ratio (diastole for a D/S ratio), A velocity for A/B ratio, peak velocity for RI, and VMAX for PI.
(continued)
OB/GYN 31

Measuring S/D (D/S) Ratio, A/B Ratio, RI or PI (contd)
. .
Use the Trackball to move the end-point cursor to the end point of the Doppler waveform. This would be diastole for S/D ratio (systole for a D/S ratio), B velocity for A/B ratio, minimum velocity for RI, and VMIN for PI.
NOTE: For the PI calculation, if TAMAX Auto is off, use the Trackball manually to trace the waveform between VMAX and VMIN . If two velocity measurements are made prior to selecting S/D (D/S) ratio or RI, the system automatically calculates S/D (D/S) ratio or RI from the last two velocity measurements recorded.
Press Set to complete the measurement. The calculation is displayed on the screen and recorded in the OB Summary Report.
OB/GYN 32

Time averaged maximum velocity (TAMAX)
To choose the method to measure the time averaged maximum velocity:
Illustration 281. European OB Calculation Sub Menu (TAMAX)
Use the TAMAX AUTO (Automatic) Soft Menu selection to choose the method by which the TAMAX trace will be made. If TAMAX Auto is highlighted, the maximum velocity envelope will be automatically traced between the two velocity points set during the PI measurement. If TAMAX Auto is not highlighted, the operator will have to manually trace, with the cursor and Trackball, the maximum velocity envelope between the two points fixed during the PI measurement.
OB/GYN 33

Fetal Heart Rate Measurement
The fetal heart rate is typically taken in M-Mode, though it also can be performed in Doppler Mode. It is found on OB Calculation Sub Menu page four. To measure the fetal heart rate: Scan to display a B-Mode image of the fetal heart. Press M-Mode. The M-Mode cursor appears in the B-Image.
Use the Trackball to position the M-Mode cursor over the B-Mode image of the fetal heart.
Press M-Mode a second time. The M-Mode timeline appears on the bottom of the screen (or as designated by the Set Up/Preset menu). Press Freeze to stop image acquisition.
"A
Illustration 282. European OB Calculation Sub Menu (HEART RATE)
OB/GYN 34

Fetal heart rate measurement (contd)
Select HEART RATE from the OB Calculation Sub Menu page four. Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display page four and highlight HEART RATE. A cursor with vertical dotted lines appears.
Use the Trackball to move the cursor to a point on the M-Mode waveform where it is desired to start the Heart Rate measurement.
Use the Trackball to move the end-point cursor to the same point on the M-Mode waveform two heartbeats from the measurement start point. See Illustration 283.
Press Set to complete the measurement. The heart rate appears on the display and is also recorded on the report page.
OB/GYN 35
Helpful Hints Hints

S S
Any measurement can be repeated by selecting that measurement again from the Soft Menu. The system displays several measurements, but the summary report retains only the last three measurements of each type. The three report page measurements can be averaged and the average used in other calculations. This averaging selection is made in the Set Up/Preset Program page 3. Average activity on/off and average number (number of measurements averaged) can be set to the users preference. Other presets on this page that affect OB measurements for the European method are Add 1 week to EDD and Display EDD with GA value. If results are displayed as question marks, the measurement is not within the table range. If there is a series of measurements/calculations that are routinely taken in a specific sequence, the auto sequence feature of the system can be used to program these measurements/calculations to automatically appear on the display in the desired order. Refer to Customize 124 for details on programming an auto sequence.
S S
OB/GYN 36
OB Summary Reports
Starting an Exam
Accurate and complete Summary Report presentation starts at the beginning of the patient exam. Always begin an exam by entering as much new patient information as possible.
NOTE: Refer to the Beginning a New Patient section of Basic Scan for instructions.
After selecting the OB exam type, fill in the following information after PT Name, PT ID, Notes, and Oper ID: 1. AGE. Type the womans age.
2. PREGNANCY Enter 1 for LMP, 2 for BBT (not in USA ORIGIN DATA version), 3 for EDC (EDD in Europe) SELECTION and 4 for GA. . Type in the required information for category selected. 3. GRAVIDA. 4. PARA. 5. AB. 6. ECTOPIC. 7. REF. MD. 8. COMMENT Type the number of pregnancies. Type the number of live births. Type the number of abortions, miscarriages, etc. Type the number of pregnancies outside the uterus. Type the name of the womans physician. Type any pertinent medical history with regard to this pregnancy, e.g., diabetes, bleeding. Press Return after having completed filling in this information.
.
t
9. EXIT
NOTE: If patient information needs to be edited, use the ID/Name key to display the patient entry menu for editing information.
OB/GYN 37
OB Summary Report
OB Report Page Layout

The basic OB Report format consists of two pages for each region available (USA, Europe, Tokyo University and Osaka University). The first page consists of four basic areas. The first, or top portion, is generally patient data that was entered on the patient entry menu at the beginning of the exam. This area cannot be edited. The second is the measurements area. It varies by region format. Generally this area contains measurement titles, the last three measurements made, the measurement average (if averaging is used), estimated gestational age and the ability to choose if the measurement is used in the calculation of the composite age. This area can be edited by deleting measurements, selecting yes/no for composite age or rearranging the vertical location of a measurement using the Report Format Editor in Set Up/Preset Program page 6. The third area is calculations. It varies by region format. These items are results of measurements or patient data entered on the Patient Entry Menu. This area cannot be edited. The fourth area is comments. The same amount of area is available for user comments for each region. The user can edit this area freely. Comments made on page 1 are not reflected on page 2. Therefore, comments on each page can be edited individually.
OB/GYN 38
OB Summary Report
OB Report Page 1
Illustration 284. USA Basic OB Summary Report Page 1
NOTE: When the head circumference (HC) is measured by the ellipse or two distance method, the longer axis will automatically be assigned as the OFD measurement.
<AVG> or <LAST> indicates that the Average or Latest value will be displayed in this column. This depends on the preset, Average Activity, in the Setup/Preset Program menu page 3.
OB/GYN 39
OB Summary Report
OB Report Page 1 (contd)
Illustration 285. European Basic OB Report Page 1
Illustration 286. Tokyo University Basic OB Report Page 1
OB/GYN 40
OB Summary Report
Illustration 287. Osaka University Basic OB Report Page 1
Composite Age Determination The composite fetal age is displayed as CUA (Composite Ultrasound Age) on the USA Report and CGA (Composite Gestational Age) on the European, Tokyo University and Osaka University Reports. The CUA or CGA field can be edited on the report page by the designation Y for yes or N for no.
.
t
Y will include the last measurement or measurement average in the calculation composite age. Changing the CUA/CGA designation to N will exclude the measurement from the composite age calculation. The default value is Y.
NOTE: There is a preset selection on Set Up/System Parameters page one that allows for the resetting of the CUA fields at New Patient selection (Reset on or off).
OB/GYN 41
OB Summary Report
Measurement Edits Measurements on the OB Report Page can only be edited by deletion. After a measurement is deleted, the average or other related calculations will be recomputed and the report page displayed again. Operator Entered Values In the calculations section of the report page, if the value is a result of operator entered data (generally from the patient entry menu) and not measurements, the designation OPE is seen after the calculation name. An example would be EDD (OPE). This means the estimate date of delivery was a value entered by the operator on the patient entry menu. Fetal Weight Estimates The estimated fetal birth weight calculation varies by region. EFW or EFBW is calculated for: USA VersionThe system automatically selects one of the five available formulas based on the measurements taken. Tokyo or European VersionIt is based on the formula selected in the Set Up/System Parameter menu page 2. Osaka University VersionIt is based on a single formula listed on OB/GYN 14.
OB Report Page 2
<AVG> or <LAST> indicates that the Average or Latest value will be displayed in this column. This depends on the preset, Average Activity, in the Setup/Preset Program menu page 3. SITE represents a Doppler site that the user can edit with a maximum of six characters. Factory default labels are 1, 2 and 3.
OB/GYN 42
OB Summary Report
Illustration 288. USA Basic OB Summary Report Page 2
Illustration 289. Basic OB Report Page 2 for Europe, Tokyo University and Osaka University
OB/GYN 43
OB Summary Report
Biophysical Profile A biophysical profile source is available to evaluate the well being of the fetus. The user can rate the fetus with a score of 0, 1 or 2 on the following items:
S S S S S
Movement Tone Breathing Fluid Reactive NST
Rate fetal physical activity Rate fetal heart tone Rate fetal breathing movement Rate fetal amniotic fluid Rate a Reactive Non-Stress Test
A sum of the above five items is then displayed as an overall biophysical profile score. If any value is entered other than 0, 1 or 2 for each of the five items, an error message Invalid, Input a proper data (02) is displayed. HR, PI, RI, S/D Ratio and A/B Ratio The largest portion of page two displays the last three measurements and latest/average value for HR, PI, RI, S/D (D/S) Ratio and A/B Ratio. The last four measurements can be taken at three different sites on the fetus. The factory default for these site fields is 1, 2 and 3. However, the user can freely edit these site fields on the Report Page. For some regions, these site fields may be common between page 1 and page 2. If this is the case, edits on either page are reflected on the other. These edits are remembered after power down. The maximum length of the site field is six characters. The comments section can be edited freely using the alphanumeric keyboard or annotation library. Simply move the highlight cursor into the comment area and press the Comment key. The system is now in the annotation mode. When the highlight cursor leaves the comment area, the system exits the annotation mode. These comments are seperate from those on page 1.
OB/GYN 44
OB Summary Report
USA Only Two items are different on the OB Summary Report page 2 for the USA version. 1. The third line of the top portion will display all of the LMP, GA and EDD data based on the operators input. For example, if LMP was entered: LMP (OPE) mm/dd/yy GA (LMP) ##W#D EDD (LMP) mm/dd/yy will be displayed. 2. Amniotic Fluid Index (AFI) displays the sum of the four measurements and the four individual measurement values.
Editing the Report

Cursor Movement
Movement of the edit cursor on the report page can be accomplished by using the Trackball or the up/down/right/left cursor arrow keys on the keyboard.
Edit Actions
When positioned on a measurement field the Back Space or Space keys will delete the current value in that field. After pressing Back Space or Space, the only options remaining are to press Set or Esc.
.
t
Set deletes the old value. Esc returns the old value to the report page.
NOTE: Any calculations relating to the deleted measurement field are recomputed.
OB/GYN 45
OB Summary Report
Logic Field Edits
The CUA/CGA field requires a Y or N to be entered in either upper or lower case.
When the cursor is positioning in the desired field, press Y or N. Once yes or no has been entered, press Return to record that entry and proceed to the next edit field.
NOTE: Calculations affected are recomputed.
Comment Edits
The comment field consists of two lines with a total of 120 characters. Use normal keyboard functions to type necessary comments. Comments made on each report page are not reflected on the other report pages. Therefore, comments on each page can be edited individually. When finished, press Return to complete the comment edit function. Since this is the last edit field on the report page, the cursor moves to the first edit field.
Recording Summary Reports

The summary report can be saved like any ultrasound image. Once it is displayed on the screen, it can be recorded on the VCR, printed on the B/W or color page printer, photographed by the multi-image camera or stored on a MOD with the Image Archive option.
OB/GYN 46
Anatomical Survey
Overview
The Anatomical Survey page provides a checklist that promotes a thorough routine reporting of OB exams. The header of the page is patient data similar to the corresponding OB Report page. This information can only be edited by using the New Patient or ID Name keys. The third line of the header will be different depending on the type of OB Report Format selected. There are thirteen pre-programmed and a maximum of six user programmer anatomical features.
Illustration 290. Anatomical Survey Page
OB/GYN 47
Anatomical Survey
Editing
When the Anatomical Survey Page is enabled from the OB calculation menu, the highlight cursor appears at the YES/NO field of the first feature on the checklist. Both Yes and No are displayed for all items on the list. The highlight cursor is moved by the Trackball or the up/down/left/right arrow keys. Select yes by pressing Y on the keyboard. When yes is selected, no will be erased. The cursor automatically moves to the comments field. In the comments field, comments can be entered by typing or selecting annotations from the Soft Menu. One line of comments is available for each anatomical feature.
When Return is pressed after comments are completed or when the comments cursor exits the right end of the line, the cursor moves to the yes/no field of the next anatomical feature.
NOTE: Any meaningless entries will display the message: Please select y or n. or Please select n or a.
OB/GYN 48
Anatomical Survey
User Programmed Features

The user can program six anatomical feature fields. The maximum number of characters is 19. To enter a user feature: Trackball the highlight cursor to a User Field. Type in the desired feature name and press Return. The highlight cursor moves to the Yes/No field. Repeat the steps as necessary for any additional feature fields. The entires will be saved and retained even after the system is powered down.
Hints
S S
YES/NO will appear in the IMAGED? column even if there is no entry in the user programmed fields. While in a user programmed field, rolling the Trackball up/down or pressing the up/down arrow keys have no effect on cursor position. Only motion of the Trackball to the left/right or pressing the left/right arrow keys will work.
OB/GYN 49
Anatomical Survey
OB/GYN 50
OB Graphs
Overview
The LOGIQ 400 can display a fetal growth curve graph from data in each measurement table for fetal age. The graphic displays a horizontal scale for gestational weeks and a vertical scale for the measurement value. The curve graphic shows the standard values with two additional curves representing the standard deviation. If information was entered on the patient data entry menu that allows for the estimation of a gestational age, an asterisk (*) is displayed on the graph to show the current status of the fetus relative to the measurement table. The OB graph page also has patient data fields, measurement/calculation data fields and a comment field. The system does not allow any field on the OB graph to be edited.
NOTE: In many cases, the LMP (or any form of estimated gestational age) is required in order to properly compute the OB Graph. Ensure that the LMP is properly entered in the Patient Entry Menu.
OB/GYN 51
OB Graphs
OB Graph Selection
OB Graph is a factory default selection in the measurement menus. Use the Sub Menu Select arrow keys to display page 2 of the factory default sub menus and highlight OB Graph.
Illustration 291. Basic OB Graph Display (Osaka University)
NOTE: The label in the upper left corner of the graph indicates the standard deviation used to plot the graph.
OB Graph Labeling
Table 29 is a summary of the labeling found in the OB Graph for deviation.
OB/GYN 52
OB Graphs
OB Graph Labeling (contd)

Author Hadlock Measurement table BPD, HC, AC, FL CRL EFW Hellman ASUM GS BPD, AC CRL Tokyo TokyoS (Shinozuka) Osaka Hansmann GS, CRL, BPD, FL, LV CRL, BPD, FL, AC, AxT(APTDxTTD), EFW CRL, BPD, FL, HL, FTA, EFBW BPD, CRL, OFD, HC, TThd, FL GS, TAD AC Rempen Campbell GS, CRL, BPD BPD, CRL, FL BD Berkowitz Eriksen Kurtz Nelson Robinson Jeanty BD TAD BPD CRL CRL CRL, BPD, FL, AC, HC BD Paris CRL, BPD, FL, Ft TAD Sostoa BPD, FL, AC, HC BD, OFD User Table USA User Table TOKYO User Table OSAKA User Table Europe Vertical Horizontal Horizontal Vertical Vertical Vertical Vertical Vertical Vertical Vertical Vertical Vertical Vertical Horizontal Horizontal Vertical Vertical Vertical Vertical Deviation Vertical Deviation Label +2SD/2SD No Label +2SD/2SD No Label +2SD/2SD(WEEK) No Label Deviation(WEEK) +1.64SD/1.64SD +1.5SD/1.5SD 95%/5% 90%/10% No Label 95%/5% 90%/10% No Label No Label No Label 90%/10% 90%/10% 90%/10% 90%/10% No Label 90%/10% No Label 90%/10% No Label Deviation(WEEK) Deviation(WEEK) +1.5SD/1.5SD 90%/10%
Table 29. OB Graph Deviation Labeling
OB/GYN 53
OB Graphs
Changing OB Graph Selection

Select OB Graph from the OB Calculation Sub Menu page two or four. Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display page two and highlight OB Graph. After the OB graph has been displayed, the user can change or select which measurement parameter is to be used to display a graph. To change the graph: With the OB graph displayed, CHANGE GRAPH will be in reverse video. Press Return. The graphic is deleted and a measurement selection menu appears.
Illustration 292. European OB Graph Change Selection
OB/GYN 54
OB Graphs
Changing OB Graph Selection (contd)

Use the Trackball to select the desired measurement value. Press Return. The new measurements, calculations and graphic are displayed. To exit the OB Graph display, select OB Graph in the OB Calculation Sub Menu again. OB Graph is not highlighted.
Hints
The user is not allowed to edit any field on the OB Graph display except the Comments section. Comments on the OB Graph page are different from any other OB Report Page. If the user does not enter an estimated gestational age on the Patient Entry Menu screen, the mark (*) indicating the current status of the fetus will not be displayed on the graph.
OB/GYN 55
OB Graphs
OB/GYN 56
Fetal Trend Management

(software option)
Overview
Fetal Trend Management is an option to the LOGIQ 400 OB Calculation package that enhances the users ability to monitor the development of the fetus. If patient data, measurements and calculations are saved during the initial examination, this information can be compared to results of follow up examinations. The OB Graph function can be used to display the current data or combine the current data with past data to show a fetal growth trend.
Storing Patient Information

After an OB examination, the user can save the resultant patient data to two different types of media. The user can save the patient data to the system hard disk. While this offers the convenience of not maintaining removable media, the system hard disks storage capacity is very limited. A Magnetic Optical Disk (MOD) would be the best storage media. Although this removable disk must be maintained by the user, it offers far greater storage capacity. Approximately one years worth of information can be stored on one disk.
OB/GYN 57
Fetal Growth Trend

Data Storage Estimations
If the following standard assumptions are made:
S S S S
Work days/week Patients/day Diagnosis/patient Measurements/patient
= = = =
5 30 5 5
then approximately one years worth of studies can be stored on the hard drive. When hard drive capacity is reached, the message Data is full. Delete needless data is displayed. However, the average MOD can store more than 30 years worth of data using the same assumptions.
Media Selection Preset Parameter

The user must choose the type of media that will store the patient OB information. This is done in the Set Up/Preset Program Sub Menu page 3. The parameter is: Media Selection for Fetal Trend : HD MO
Select HD for the system hard drive (limited storage space) or MOD for a removable magnetic optical disk (much greater storage space).
OB/GYN 58
Fetal Growth Trend

Saving Data
Before the diagnosis is complete, ensure that all patient information such as Name, ID, Ref MD and EDC has been entered. If it has not, use the ID/Name key to enter this necessary information. Select the OB Graph function from the OB Calculation soft menu. Five additional commands are displayed on the OB Graph that relate to the Fetal Trend Management option as shown in Illustration 293. These commands are: LISTID LIST DATA TRENDBOTH TRENDPRESENT SAVE CHANGE GRAPH Displays a list by patient ID number. Displays data for a specified patient. Shows data points on the OB graph based on current and past data. Shows data points on the OB graph based on current data only. Saves Patient information to specified media. Changes the measurement value graphed (performs the same function as in the basic OB calculation package).
OB/GYN 59
Fetal Growth Trend

Saving Data (contd)
Illustration 293. OB Graph Display
Type of Data Saved The type of data that is recorded during the SAVE function is: 1. Date and Time 2. Patient Name and ID 3. Calculated EDC or EDD 4. Measurement Authors Name 5. Measured or Calculated Data
OB/GYN 60
Fetal Growth Trend
Save Command
NOTE: To avoid any trouble in searching later, it is better to have all patient information entered before saving.
Use the Trackball to highlight the SAVE command and press Set. If patient information has been entered, the patient data, measurements and calculations will be saved to the designated media (HD or MOD). If there are similar files in the data list (i.e. same ID but Name and EDC are different), the system displays the Patient List Menu (LIST-ID). The user will have to select the file to which the data will be added. If the user does not input the ID, the system displays the List-Data Menu. The user will then have to input the ID. If the user does not input other patient data, the system displays the List-Data menu. The user will then have to input the patient data.
If more than one candidate is available on the list, the system first displays the Patient List Menu. The user then has to pick the proper file in which the current data will be added.
NOTE: If measurement averaging is turned on, only the average value is saved. If measurement averaging is turned off, only the last measured or calculated value is saved.
OB/GYN 61
Fetal Growth Trend

Save Function Messages If patient information has not been entered, the message displayed is: Input patients information:
If a patient ID number is not entered, the message displayed is: Input ID:
NOTE: The ID number is necessary or the SAVE function CANNOT be accomplished. It is possible to save data without a patient name or EDC but the information displayed with the LISTDATA function is limited.
If all of the data is the same as a file on the data list, the message displayed is: Overwrite existing data? y n. where y replaces the archived file with the new file. n causes the system to do nothing. This cancels the SAVE function request. If the storage media is full, especially in the case of the limited capacity of the hard drive, the message displayed is: Data is full. Delete needless data. Eliminating needless spaces in the data entered will help to conserve storage space.
OB/GYN 62
Fetal Growth Trend
Growth Trending
The default command after the OB Graph is displayed is TRENDPRESENT. This will display an OB Graph for the current author/measurement selected. However, after additional examinations, the user can recall past data and display it with the current data to show a trend in fetal growth. When the user selects the TRENDBOTH command from the OB Graph display, the system automatically searches the storage media and gets the data and displays the OB Trend Graph as shown in Illustration 294.
Illustration 294. OB Trend Graph
The system will search for like data displayed on the OB Graph. If Hadlock BPD is the data displayed, then the current patients Hadlock BPD data is used with the past Hadlock BPD data to display the trend on the graph.
OB/GYN 63
Fetal Growth Trend
Growth Trending (contd.)

If the user wants to trend different author/measurement data, that graph must be displayed first before the TRENDBOTH command is selected. An asterisk (*) is used to show the present data point on the graph while the pound sign (+) is used for all past data points.
List ID Management
The system allows the user to manage the data that was previously stored using the Patient ID List. Choose LISTID from the OB Graph display. The system displays all data found on the storage media. The oldest data will have the first order number. The newest data is displayed on the last page as shown in Illustration 295.
Illustration 295. LISTID Data Display
OB/GYN 64
Fetal Growth Trend

List ID Commands
The commands at the bottom of the ListID page allow the user to perform the following functions: CTRL, N CTRL, P CTRL, A CTRL, L CTRL, D CTRL, S CTRL, M CTRL, K CTRL, C CLEAR Control, K The Control, K function operates like the SAVE command on the OB Graph display. Pressing these two keys simultaneously from the PATIENT LIST MENU display causes the system to save the current patient data. See Storing Patient Information on OB/GYN 57 for details. Control, A The Control, A function is used to control the order in which the LISTID data is displayed. Press Ctrl, A simultaneously. The cursor moves to the number window as shown in Illustration 296. Displays the next page Displays the previous page Allows the user to rearrange the order of the display list Displays the selected patients data list Deletes saved patient data Searches the ID List for desired patient information Allows the user to modify the patient data of a selected file (ie. Name, ID & EDD Saves the current patient data Cancels the current process Clears entered characters
OB/GYN 65
Fetal Growth Trend

Control, A (contd)
[PATIENT LIST MENU] PT NAME : PT ID : EDD (MM / DD / YY) : 95/03/03 NUMBER : NO ID 00001 A1234567890123 00002 B9876543210987 00003 C6754321897653 Arrange : 1ID 2Name 3EDC +RREV PAGE :###/### NAME EDC AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA 95/09/15 BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB 95/09/23 CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC 95/09/28
00015 Z3456188273653 ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ 95/09/13 Ctrl+L:Data List Ctrl+M:Modify Ctrl+N:Next Page Ctrl+D:Delete Ctrl+K:Save Ctrl+P:Prvs Page Ctrl +S:Search Ctrl +C:Cancel Ctrl +A:Arrange CLEAR:Clear entered characters Operator Message Area
Illustration 296. List Arrangement Selections
The following message is displayed: Arrange : 1ID 2Name 3EDC +RREV 1 1R 2 2R 3 3R = = = = = = Rearrange by ID number smallest to largest Rearrange by ID number largest to smallest Rearrange by name A to Z. Rearrange by name Z to A. Rearrange by EDD newest to oldest Rearrange by EDD oldest to newest.
R added to the number selection means reverse order. Type in the number or number/letter for the list display arrangement desired and press Return. The temporary file sort for display begins. The time required depends on the amount of information in the data base.
OB/GYN 66
Fetal Growth Trend

Control, M The Control, M function allows the user to modify the patient data (Name, ID & EDD) on any file in the data base. This will be helpful if the patient information was not entered EXACTLY the same for each exam. Press Ctrl, M simultaneously. The cursor moves to the number window as shown in Illustration 297.
PT NAME : PT ID : EDD (MM / DD / YY) : NUMBER : Modify :
Illustration 297. Modified Data Entry
Type in the number from the list displayed on the screen and press Return. The selected patient information is displayed and the cursor moves to the PT NAME window. Use the Trackball to highlight the desired window and change the necessary information with the alphanumeric keys. Once the Return key is pressed while in the EDD window or the Trackball is used to move the cursor outside of the patient information area, the following message appears: Are you sure to modify the previous data? (y/n) where y means modify the old data and save it. The cursor moves to the PT Name window. n means do nothing. The cursor moves to the PT Name window.
OB/GYN 67
Fetal Growth Trend

Control, M (contd) If the desired modifications will create a file exactly like a current existing file, the following message appears: Same data exists. At this point the user may: #C Combine a selected number data file with the one being modified. The file being modified will be added to the file number selected. This will quit the sub mode operation and return to the previous modification mode.
NOTE: Caution should be used when modifying files so as not to change/delete existing files or create false ones.
OB/GYN 68
Fetal Growth Trend

Control, S The Control, S function allows the user to quickly search the PATIENT LIST MENU data base for a specific patient file. Press Ctrl, S simultaneously. The cursor moves to the PT Name window as shown in Illustration 298.
PT NAME : PT ID : EDD (MM / DD / YY) : NUMBER :
Illustration 298. Search Data Entry
Use the Trackball to highlight the desired window and type the necessary information with the alphanumeric keys. Once the Return key is pressed while in the EDD window or the Trackball is used to move the cursor outside of the patient information area, the search functions begin. When the search has ended, the list is displayed on the screen. If the search ends in failure, the cursor remains at the PT Name window and the following message is displayed: No data exists. Input other information. At the end of the search, the system will beep or the patient information is placed in the windows (Name, ID & EDD) of the file that most closely matches the search criteria.
OB/GYN 69
Fetal Growth Trend

Control, L The Control, L function allows the user to display the data list for a selected patient file. Press Ctrl, L simultaneously. The cursor moves to the number window. Type in the number from the list displayed on the screen and press Return. The data list for the patient selected is displayed on the screen as shown in Illustration 299.
[DATA LIST MENU] PT NAME : 12345678901234567890123456789 PT ID : 12345678901234 EDD (MM / DD / YY) : 12 / 31 / 93 NUMBER : MeasPage :###/### ListPage :###/### 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 No GA MEAS1 MEAS2 MEAS3 MEAS4 MEAS5 MEAS6 MEAS7 MEAS8 UNIT1 UNIT2 UNIT3 UNIT4 UNIT5 UNIT6 UNIT7 UNIT8 AUTH1 AUTH2 AUTH3 AUTH4 AUTH5 AUTH6 AUTH7 AUTH8 123 ##W#D ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.# 123 ##W#D ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.# 123 ##W#D ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.#
123 ##W#D ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.# 123 ##W#D ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.# Ctrl+G: Graph Ctrl+K: Save Ctrl+N: Next Page Ctrl+D: Delete Ctrl +C: Cancel Ctrl+P: Prvs Page Ctrl+B: Backward Page Ctrl+F: Forward Page Operator Message Area
###.# ###.#
Illustration 299. Patient List-Data Menu
Page two of the Data List Menu shows the Number (of studies), Gestational Age (by LMP), Tech ID and Reference MD information.
OB/GYN 70
Fetal Growth Trend

Control, D The Control, D function allows the user to delete specified files from the LISTID data base (HD or MOD). Press Ctrl, D simultaneously. The cursor moves to the number window. Type in the number from the list displayed on the screen and press Return. Before deleting any data, the following message is displayed: Are you sure to delete the data ? (y/n) where y means to proceed with deleting the data. n means do nothing. The data selected is then deleted from the data base. If the user is cleaning up the media, especially in the case of the Hard Drive, the following can be entered instead of a number: # Select AAll PPage Delete selected file numbers Delete ALL files from the media data base. Delete ALL files on the current page displayed.
OB/GYN 71
Fetal Growth Trend
Data List Management

The LISTDATA function allows the user to manage the measurement/calculation data stored in a specific patient file. Choose LISTDATA from the OB Graph or the Control, L function from the LISTID display. The system displays past gestational age data for the same patient criteria displayed on the OB Graph or for the information that was entered in the ListID display. Refer to Illustration 300. The measurement/calculation list order is based on gestational age and cannot be rearranged.
[PATIENT DATA MENU] PT NAME : 12345678901234567890123456789 PT ID : 12345678901234 EDD (MM / DD / YY) : 12 / 31 / 93 NUMBER : MeasPage :###/### ListPage :###/### 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 No GA MEAS1 MEAS2 MEAS3 MEAS4 MEAS5 MEAS6 MEAS7 MEAS8 UNIT1 UNIT2 UNIT3 UNIT4 UNIT5 UNIT6 UNIT7 UNIT8 AUTH1 AUTH2 AUTH3 AUTH4 AUTH5 AUTH6 AUTH7 AUTH8 123 ##W#D ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.# 123 ##W#D ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.# 123 ##W#D ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.#
123 ##W#D ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.# 123 ##W#D ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.# Ctrl+L:Data List Ctrl+M:Modify Ctrl+N:Next Page Ctrl+D:Delete Ctrl+K:Save Ctrl+P:Prvs Page Ctrl +S:Search Ctrl +C:Cancel Ctrl +A:Arrange CLEAR:Clear entered characters Operator Message Area
###.# ###.#
Illustration 300. List-Data Menu
OB/GYN 72
Fetal Growth Trend

Data List Commands
Some functions at the bottom of the data list screen operate the same as those on the LISTID screen: CTRL, N CTRL, P CTRL, D CTRL, K CTRL, C CLEAR Displays the next page Displays the previous page Deletes saved patient data. Saves the current patient data. Cancels the current process Clears entered characters
Functions specific to the LISTID display are: CTRL, F CTRL, B CTRL, G Control, F and Control, B Since only eight measurements/calculations can be displayed on the screen at one time, Control F and Control B allow the user to move to the right and left, respectively, to display additional measurements/calculations. Control, G Control, G enables the OB Graph function for the number of files selected. Press Ctrl, G simultaneously. The cursor moves to the number window. Type in the number from the list displayed on the screen and press Return. The selected OB Graph will be displayed and the TRENDBOTH selection is highlighted. Moves to the right for the displayed page Moves to the left for the displayed page Displays the OB Graph
OB/GYN 73
Fetal Growth Trend

OB/GYN 74
Basic OBMultigestational
(software option)
Overview
The LOGIQ 400 offers an optional calculation package that allows the user to measure and report multiple fetus development. The system is capable of reporting a maximum of four fetuses.
Patient Entry Menu

If the Multigestational Option has been purchased, an extra entry appears on the Patient Entry Menu to the right of RefMD:. This entry is called FETUS NUMBER:. The factory default number is one.
Entering Fetus Number

It is generally during the first exam that the user recognizes a multiple gestation. If during the first exam more than one fetus is imaged, the user can use the ID/Name key to return to the Patient Entry Menu and enter the necessary number of fetuses. For subsequent exams the user enters the correct number of fetuses when the New Patient key is used.
.
t
NOTE: Data Management Center transfer function will not work if the fetus number is greater than one. An error message will appear: Multigestation data transfer is not supported DMC data transfer will function normally if the fetus number is set to one.
OB/GYN 75
Distinguishing Each Fetus

For measurements/calculations and report page displays, the fetuses are labeled A, B, C and D. Each fetus is distinguished on the report pages by its letter and total number of fetuses. For example, a report page could be noted as FETUS:A/3. This is fetus A from a total of 3. Following this fetal number designation, the user can use twelve characters to describe the position and twelve characters to describe placenta location of the fetus. This is displayed as: POS: ############ PLAC: ############
Measurements/Calculations
During measurements/calculations, all measurements are performed on fetus A first. The user then switches to fetus B and performs the same measurements, etc. The user can switch between fetuses by pressing Blue Shift and then N.
NOTE: A fetus change can be accomplished at anytime during the exam. However, the Blue Shift, N function is NOT available while a measurement cursor is active.
After changing to the next fetus, any measurements made will be recorded and reported to the new designated fetus. Any active measurement or calculation not completed will be cancelled when the fetus number is changed.
OB/GYN 76
Change the Number of Fetuses

In the ID/Name function the user can increase or decrease the fetus number or cancel the Multigestational function. This would need to be accomplished due to the demise of a fetus or error in the definition of the fetus number.
Number Increase
If the fetus number is increased, the message: Are you sure to change the number? (y/n) is displayed. y will create the report pages for the new fetus. n returns to the previous number. If a fetus number increase is not available, the message: Data range over. Input proper data. is displayed.
Number Decrease
If the fetus number is decreased because some measurement has already been completed or the fetus number was fixed in a previous exam, the message Are you sure to change the number? (y/n) is displayed. y prompts the user to select which fetus to delete (A, B, C or D). n returns to the previous number. The data of deleted fetuses is deleted for the measurement result window and report pages. If the fetus number is reduced to one, the multigestation function is cancelled. After the decrease in fetus number, there is no need to adjust the IDs (A, B, C or D) of the remaining fetuses. The same ID for the remaining fetuses can be maintained and used.
OB/GYN 77
Report Page Layout

The Multigestational Option adds additional pages to the OB Report displays. Pages one and two of the Multigestational Option appear the same as the Basic OB Reporting package; except, pages one and two will be generated for each fetus. They will have the fetus identifying information between the heading and measurements. The fetal information displayed is: Fetus : $/% POS: ############ PLAC: ############
$ = Fetal ID (A, B, C or D) % = Total number of fetuses The second to last page, depending on the number of fetuses, is a summary of the measurements and calculations found on page one. However, all fetuses (maximum of 4) are dipslayed on this page. Since page one is different by region, page three is also different by region selected (i.e. USA, European, Tokyo University or Osaka University). The last page, depending on the number of fetuses, is a summary that compares all fetuses. The heading is different by region. It contains the following: Fetus Pos: Fluid: Biophys: HR (BPM): AFI (USA Only): Placenta: Membrane: Fetus position. This 12 character string is common between pages 1, 2 and 4. An estimate of the amount of aminotic fluid. Common between pages 2 and 4. Total biophysical profile score from page 2. Heart rate in beats per minute from page 2. Amniotic Fluid Index summary from page 2. Shows location fetus, grade and previa (yes, no or partial) Shows location between fetus to fetus.
OB/GYN 78
OB Graph
With the Multigestational Option, the OB Graph selection includes pages to display graphs for individual fetuses as well as a graph to plot all fetuses simultaneously. For individual fetus reports, the fetus is designated by fetus ID and total number of fetuses (i.e. Fetus: A/3 or Fetus: B/2) Change the fetus pages by moving the highlight cursor to or and press Set.
Illustration 301. OB Graph Multigestational Option (Osaka University Version)
OB/GYN 79
OB Graph (contd)
If all fetuses are displayed simultaneously, different symbols are used to mark each fetus. The symbols are: Fetus A B C D Present
Illustration 302 OB Graph Multigestational Option (Osaka University Version)
Only gestational age, based on operators input, is displayed for simultaneous plotting.
*
OB/GYN 80
Fetal Trend Management (Multigestational Option)

Fetal Trend Management with the Multigestational Option operates much like the basic fetal trend package described earlier. Illustration 303 shows an example of the Multigestational Fetal Trend Graph.
Illustration 303. Fetal Trend Graph Multigestational Option (Hadlock-USA Version)
OB/GYN 81
Save Function
The SAVE command on the trend graph display or Ctrl + K in the Data List display will cause the system to compare the current fetus combination between present and past data. If patient data and fetus number are compatible, the data is saved. If there is any mismatch in data, the message: Incompatible data. Do you save? (y/n) is displayed. y = Saves data as it is n = Cancel save function
Data List Menu

The Data List Menu of fetal trend information is slightly different with the Multigestational Option. Each fetus has its own display page as shown in Illustration 304.
Illustration 304. Multigestational Data List Menu
OB/GYN 82
Data Management Center (DMC)

Overview
The LOGIQ 400 is capable of interfacing with a personal computer (PC). This interface is used to send OB measurement and calculation data from the LOGIQ 400 to the PC for display, processing and evaluation.
Additionally, the LOGIQ 400 can accept patient data from a personal computer (PC) and transfer it to the patient entry menu.
NOTE: Data Management Center transfer function will not work if the fetus number is greater than one with the Multigestation Option. An error message will appear: Multigestation data transfer is not supported DMC data transfer will function normally if the fetus number is set to one.
Operational Setup
The PC must be connected to Port A or B of the LOGIQ 400 by an RS-232C interface cable. Computer must be selected for Port A or B on the Set Up/System Parameters page 5. The Record 1 or Record 2 keys must be assigned to the computer selection. The Record 1 and Record 2 presets are found on Set Up/Systems Parameters page 5.
OB/GYN 83
Data Management Center
Operational Setup
Transferring OB Data
Data transfer from the LOGIQ 400 to the DMC computer (PC) will only occur while operating in the OB Exam category. The user should input all necessary information into the Patient Entry Menu. Scan the patient. Measure and calculate all the desired parameters.
.
OB/GYN 84
Press Record 1 or Record 2, depending on the key assignment. Communication with the PC will start by displaying the message: Communicating with computer now.
NOTE: Normal system operation is suspended during the transfer of data.

When all data has been transferred with no errors, the message Communication was completed is displayed. Refer to the DMC User Manual for processing exam data on the PC.
Error Messages
If an anomaly occurs in the communication or transfer of data between the LOGIQ 400 and the PC, an error message will be displayed on the LOGIQ 400 screen. Possible error messages are:
Message Check Computer. No power. Check Computer. Bad condition. Check Computer. Abnormal response. Check Computer. Checksum Error occurred. Check Computer. No response. Possible Cause PC power is off. Interface cable broken or disconnected. PC is busy. LOGIQ 400 senses the PC cannot accept data.
LOGIQ 400 senses an abnormal response from the PC.
LOGIQ 400 senses an abnormal acknowledgement from the PC after all data has been sent.
LOGIQ 400 senses no

acknowledgement from the computer after all data has been sent.
Cant send data to Computer in this category. System doesnt have option. SYSTEM ERROR: CANNOT COMMUNICATE WITH COMPUTER. This function is not available.
User is trying to send data to the PC in an exam category other than OB. The OB calculation option for the LOGIQ 400 has been turned off. A LOGIQ 400 system error has occurred that will not allow communication with the computer to begin. This function is not available in some situations.
Table 30. Data Management Center Error Messages
OB/GYN 85
Error Messages (contd) Hints
S S S S S S S
Data transfer can only be accomplished in the OB Exam category. Date is always transferred as YearMonthDay. Time is transferred as 24 hour time (i.e. 00:00 to 23:59). Gestational Age Data is always transferred in weeks and days. The LOGIQ 400 can store three values of the same measurement. Only the average of selected measurements will be transferred. The system keyboard is locked out during the transfer of data. Only the Record 1 or Record 2 keys can start the data transfer. The following DMC items are not sent by the LOGIQ 400:
.
OB/GYN 86
S S S S S S S S
Serial No. DateRep TimeRep RepPtName RefMDID History FetusPos FetusSex.
NOTE: Currently, the transfer of multi-fetus information is not compatible with the DMC. If it is desired to use the DMC with multiple fetuses, each fetus should be treated individually by using a unique Patient ID number for each.
Patient Data Input

The PC (personal computer) can be used to read patient data cards and transfer that data to the Patient Entry menu via the DMC serial port connection.
Preparation
Connect the PC and LOGIQ 400 using an isolated RS232C cable and serial ports equivalent to the DMC cabling. Assign Computer to the proper LOGIQ 400 serial port in the Setup/System Parameter Menu page 5. Display the New Patient Entry Menu on the LOGIQ 400.
Send Data
On the PC, read the hospital ID card with patient data and transfer that data to the LOGIQ 400. The transfer starts by displaying the following message on the LOGIQ 400 monitor: Communicating with Computer now. When the reception is complete with no errors, the the following message on the LOGIQ 400 monitor: Communication was Completed. The patient data received is then displayed on the Patient Entry Menu.
Data Transferred
The data items transferred and accepted by the LOGIQ 400 are:
S S S S S
Patient Name Patient ID Number Patient Age Patient Sex Patient Birthday
OB/GYN 87

Error Messages
Refer to Table 30 on OB/GYN 85 for error messages in patient data transfer. If the New Patient Entry Menu is not displayed when the PC tries to send data, the error message: Cant receive data. Return to New Patient Menu. is displayed.
Hints
If data is omitted, only the items sent by the PC will be displayed in the Patient Entry Menu. If both age and birthday are transferred to the LOGIQ 400, the system will use the birth date to calculate the age. All LOGIQ 400 keys cannot be used while the data transfer is in progress.
OB/GYN 88
GYN Measurements
B-Mode
Ovarian Length, Height, and Width
The length, height and width of the left and right ovaries can be measured and recorded on the GYN summary report. Each measurement is a typical distance measurement made on a B-Mode image in the appropriate scan plane. Typically, the height and width are measured on the axial plane while the length is measured on the sagittal plane. To measure ovarian length: Scan the patients right or left ovary in the sagittal plane. Press Freeze to stop image acquisition.
"A
Illustration 306. GYN Calculation Sub Menu (Ovarian)
OB/GYN 89
GYN Measurements
Ovarian Length, Height, and Width (contd)
Select Rt Ov-L or Lt Ov-L from the GYN Calculation Sub Menu page one. Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display page one and highlight the desired measurement. A cursor appears.
Use the Trackball to move the end-point cursor to the measurement end point.
NOTE: If a fine adjustment of the two cursors is desired, press Measurement to toggle which cursor is active and adjust with the Trackball.
Press Set to complete the measurement. The cursor and measured Rt Ov-L or Lt Ov-L value are fixed.
OB/GYN 90
GYN Measurements
Ovarian Length, Height, and Width (contd)
To measure ovarian height and width: Scan the patients right or left ovary in the axial plane. Press Freeze to stop image acquisition.
"A
Press Measurement to activate the measurement function. If necessary press the Top Menu Select key to display the measurement sub menu. Select Rt Ov-H, Rt Ov-W, Lt Ov-H or Lt Ov-W from the GYN Calculation Sub Menu. Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display page one and highlight the desired measurement. A cursor appears.
Follow the distance measurement steps outlined in the ovarian length measurement. All right/left length, height or width measurements are recorded on the GYN Summary Report Page as selected from the GYN Calculation Sub Menu prior to measuring.
OB/GYN 91
GYN Measurements
Uterine Length, Height, and Width
The GYN Calculation Sub Menu page two allows for measurements to be recorded as uterine length (Ut-L), height (Ut-H) or width (Ut-W). Once again, length is typically measured in the sagittal plane while height and width are measured in the axial plane. Scan the patient in the appropriate scan plane. Press Freeze to stop image acquisition.
"A
Illustration 307. GYN Calculation Sub Menu (Uterine)
Select the desired measurement from the GYN Calculation Sub Menu page two (Ut-L, Ut-H or Ut-W). Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display page two and highlight the desired measurement. Follow the distance measurement steps as outlined in ovarian measurements. Measurements are recorded on the GYN Summary Report. The last three measurements of each type can be averaged by the Summary Report Page.
OB/GYN 92
GYN Measurements
Endometrium Thickness
An endometrium thickness measurement is also available on page two of the GYN Calculation Sub Menu. Scan the patient. Press Freeze to stop image acquisition.
"A
Illustration 308. GYN Calculation Sub Menu (Endo)
Select ENDO from the GYN Calculation Sub Menu page two. Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display page two and highlight ENDO. A cursor appears.
OB/GYN 93
GYN Measurements
Endometrium Thickness (contd)
Use the Trackball to move the end-point cursor to the measurement end point.
Press Set to complete the measurement. The measured value is displayed on the screen and recorded on the GYN Report Page.
OB/GYN 94
GYN Measurements
Doppler Mode
Three GYN related measurements can be taken in Doppler Mode and recorded on the GYN Summary Report. These are resistive index measurements for a left ovarian vessel, uterine vessel and right ovarian vessel.
Resistive index
RI measurements are velocity values measured on the Doppler Spectrum for vessels in the ovaries and uterus. They are found on page three of the GYN Calculation Sub Menu. To make GYN Resistive Index measurements: Scan the patient in B-Mode to locate the desired vessel. Press PD to enable the pulsed Doppler mode and place the Doppler cursor in the blood flow of the desired vessel. Press PD a second time to display a Doppler spectrum.
"A
Obtain a good spectrum display of blood flow velocities within the vessel and press Freeze to stop image acquisition.
Press Measurement to activate the measurement function. If necessary press the Top Menu Select key to display the measurement sub menu. Select the desired RI measurement from the GYN Calculation Sub Menu page three. Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display page three and highlight the appropriate measurement.
OB/GYN 95
GYN Measurements
Resistive index (contd)
Illustration 309. GYN Calculation Sub Menu (RI)
Use the Trackball to move the cursor to the peak point of the Doppler waveform where it is desired to start the RI measurement.
Use the Trackball to move the end-point cursor to the diastolic point of the Doppler waveform.
Press Set to complete the measurement. A calculated value is displayed and stored in the GYN Summary Report.
Helpful Hints Hints

If there is a series of measurements/calculations that are routinely taken in a specific sequence, the auto sequence feature of the system can be used to program these measurements/calculations to automatically appear on the display in the desired order. Refer to Customize 124 for details on programming an auto sequence.
OB/GYN 96
GYN Summary Report

GYN Report Layout
Illustration 310. GYN Report Page
The top portion of the report contains patient information entered into the Patient Entry Menu. The middle portion of the report (measurements) shows the last three measurement values made. <AVG> or <LAST> indicates that the Average or Latest value will be displayed in this column. This depends on the preset, Average Activity, in the Setup/Preset Program menu page 3. The calculation section shows Doppler measurements and their average, while the comments area provides two lines of comment data.
OB/GYN 97
GYN Summary Report
GYN Calculation Formulas

Calc Mnemonic
UT-L UT-H UT-W Endo Lt. Ov-L Lt. Ov-H Lt. Ov-W Rt. Ov-L Rt. Ov-H Rt. Ov-W Lt. Ov-RI Calc Name Uterine Length Uterine Height Uterine Width Endometrium Thickness Left Ovarian Length Left Ovarian Height Left Ovarian Width Right Ovarian Length Right Ovarian Height Right Ovarian Width Left Ovarian Vessel Resistive Index Uterine Vessel Resistive Index Right Ovarian Vessel Resistive Index Input Measurements one distance one distance one distance one distance one distance one distance one distance one distance one distance one distance two Doppler blood flow peak velocities two Doppler blood flow peak velocities two Doppler blood flow peak velocities Formula Ut-L[cm or mm]=d1 Ut-H[cm or mm]=d1 Ut-W[cm or mm]=d1 Endo[cm or mm]=d1 Lt. Ov-L[cm or mm]=d1 Lt. Ov-H[cm or mm]=d1 Lt. Ov-W[cm or mm]=d1 Rt. Ov-L[cm or mm]=d1 Rt. Ov-H[cm or mm]=d1 Rt. Ov-W[cm or mm]=d1 Lt. Ov-RI= (VmaxVmin)/Vmax Ut-RI= (VmaxVmin)/Vmax
Ut-RI
Rt. Ov-RI
Rt. Ov-RI= (VmaxVmin)/Vmax
Table 31. GYN Calculation Formulas
OB/GYN 98
Vascular
(software option)
Exam Preparation Measurements Vascular Summary Report
If the Vascular software option is not installed, the General Calculation Menu will appear for that exam category.
This section describes measurements and calculations specific to vascular exams and the vascular software option. It shows how to make vascular measurements and the information available on the Vascular Summary Report.
Vascular 1
Vascular
Vascular 2
Exam Preparation
Introduction
Measurements and calculations derived from ultrasound images are intended to supplement other clinical procedures available to the attending physician. The accuracy of measurements is not only determined by the system accuracy, but also by use of proper medical protocols by the user. When appropriate, be sure to note any protocols associated with a particular measurement or calculation. Formulas and databases used within the system software that are associated with specific investigators are so noted. Be sure to refer to the original article describing the investigators recommended clinical procedures.
General Guidelines
Any measurement can be repeated by selecting that measurement again from the Sub Menu. The system will retain as many as eight measurements, but the summary report retains only the last three measurements of each type. The three report page measurements can be averaged and the average used in other calculations.
Vascular 3
Exam Preparation
Vascular 4
Measurements
Starting an Exam
Always begin an exam by selecting New Patient, which deletes all old patient information, allowing the new patient data to be entered.
Outline
Vascular calculations are intended for use to evaluate peripheral blood vessels such as the carotid artery, femoral artery, etc.
Vascular 5
Measurements
Vascular calculations
Vascular measurements are available on three Sub Menu pages. The Vascular measurements and calculations that can be made from the Sub Menu selections are: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. RT (LT) ECA RT (LT) CCA RT (LT) BIFURC RT (LT) ICA : Right (left) exterior carotid artery velocity : Right (left) common carotid artery velocity : Right (left) carotid artery bifurcation velocity : Right (left) interior carotid artery velocity
RT (LT) ICA/CCA : Right (left) interior carotid artery velocity/common carotid artery velocity ratio TAMAX PI A/B Ratios RI : Time Averaged Maximum (velocity) : Pulsatility Index : Velocity ratios : Resistivity Index : Percent Stenosis : Heart rate in BPM : Systolic velocity/diastolic velocity ratios
6. 7. 8. 9.
10. % Steno 11. Heart Rate 12. S/D Ratios
Vascular 6
Measurements
Carotid Artery Measurements

S S
The following calculations are done in the Doppler spectrum. When operating in B/PD-Mode, display a Doppler spectrum and move the cursor to a Doppler spectrum displayed on the screen. Page one of the Vascular Sub Menu contains measurements for the patients right side. Page two of the Sub Menu contains identical left side measurements.
Vascular 7
Measurements
Measuring ECA, CCA, Bifurc and ICA
To measure the velocity of the blood through the right/left external carotid artery, common carotid artery, carotid artery bifurcation or internal carotid artery: Scan the patient in B-Mode to image the appropriate artery. Press PD and move the Doppler cursor into the desired vessel. Press PD again to display B-Mode plus Doppler spectrum. Scan until the desired Doppler spectrum is displayed. Press Freeze to stop image acquisition.
"A
Illustration 311. Vascular Calculation Sub Menu Pages 1 and 2
Vascular 8
Measurements
Measuring ECA, CCA, Bifurc and ICA (contd)
Select the appropriate measurement from the Vascular Calculation Sub Menu page one or two. Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display the appropriate page and highlight the measurement. The calculation mode is set and a cursor with a vertical dotted line appears.
Use the Trackball to move the cursor to the desired position on the Doppler spectrum.
Press Set. The measurement is completed and recorded on the Vascular Summary Report.
Measuring RT (LT) ICA/CCA

To calculate a velocity ratio between the right (left) interior carotid artery and common carotid artery: Display a B-Mode image of the right or left internal carotid artery. Press PD and move the Doppler cursor into the desired vessel. Press PD again to display B-Mode plus Doppler spectrum. Scan until the desired Doppler spectrum is displayed.
Press Freeze to stop image acquisition.

"A
(continued)
Vascular 9
Measurements
Measuring RT (LT) ICA/CCA (contd)
Press Clear to reset measurement operation.
Illustration 312. Vascular Calculation Sub Menus (ICA/CCA)
Select Rt ICA/CCA from page one or Lt ICA/CCA from page two of the Vascular Calculation Sub Menus. Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display the appropriate page and highlight the desired measurement. The ICA/CCA calculation mode is set and a cursor with a vertical dotted line appears.
Vascular 10
Measurements
Measuring RT (LT) ICA/CCA (contd)
Use the Trackball to move the cursor to the peak point of the interior carotid artery Doppler spectrum with which the ICA/CCA calculation is to be done.
Press Set. The ICA/CCA calculation is set.
"A
Unfreeze the image by pressing Freeze. Image the common carotid artery and press Freeze again.
Press Measurement to activate the measurement function. If necessary press the Top Menu Select key to display the measurement sub menu. Use the Trackball to move the cursor to the peak point (velocity) on the Doppler spectrum of the common carotid artery.
.
t
Press Set. The ICA/CCA calculation is complete and a calculated value be displayed.
NOTE: If ICA and CCA measurements were already made, the ICA/CCA will be automatically calculated from previous measurements.
Vascular 11
Measurements
Measuring S/D Ratio, RI, A/B Ratio or PI
To measure the systolic/diastolic ratio, resistance index, velocity ratio and pulsatility index: Scan the patient in B plus Doppler Mode. Press Freeze to stop image acquisition.
"A
Illustration 313. Vascular Calculation Sub Menu
Select S/D Ratio, RI, A/B Ratio or PI from the Vascular Calculation Sub Menu page three to display this calculation on the screen. Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display page three and highlight the desired measurement. A cursor appears.
Vascular 12
Measurements
Measuring S/D Ratio, RI, A/B Ratio or PI (contd)
Use the Trackball to move the cursor to the start point on the Doppler waveform. This would be systole for S/D ratio, peak velocity for RI, A velocity for A/B ratio and VMAX for PI.
. .
t
Use the Trackball to move the end-point cursor to the end point of the Doppler waveform. This would be diastole for S/D ratio, minimum velocity for RI, B velocity for A/B ratio and VMIN for PI.
NOTE: For the PI calculation, if TAMAX Auto is off, use the Trackball manually to trace the waveform between VMAX and VMIN . If two velocity measurements are made prior to selecting S/D ratio, A/B ratio or RI, the system automatically calculates S/D ratio, A/B ratio or RI from the last two velocity measurements recorded.
Press Set to complete the measurement. The calculation is displayed on the screen.
Vascular 13
Measurements
Measuring Stenosis Ratio (% stenosis)
"A
Press Measurement to activate the measurement function. If necessary press the Top Menu Select key to display the measurement sub menu. The area of the blood vessel can be measured by the ellipse, trace, circle, 2 distance or 1 distance methods. The Set Up/Preset Program page 3 defines the default method.
CAUTION
Ellipse method
Illustration 314. Vascular Calculation Sub Menu (% Steno)
Select % Steno from the Vascular Calculations Sub Menu page three. Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display page three and highlight % Steno. The % stenosis measurement mode is set and a cursor appears.
Vascular 14
Measurements
Use the Trackball to move the end-point cursor to the other end of the long axis of the residual area of the vessel being measured.
.
(continued)
Vascular 15
Measurements
Vascular 16
Measurements
Trace method Select % Steno from the Vascular Calculation Sub Menu page three. Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display page three and highlight % Steno. The % stenosis measurement mode is set and a cursor appears.
Vascular 17
Measurements
S
Vascular 18
Measurements
Measuring Heart Rate (HR)

To calculate the Heart Rate: Scan the patient. Press Freeze to stop image acquisition.
"A
Illustration 315. Vascular Calculation Sub Menu (HR)
Select HEART RATE from the Vascular Calculation Sub Menu page three. Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display page three and highlight HEART RATE. The Heart Rate calculation mode is set and a cursor appears.
Vascular 19
Measurements
Measuring Heart Rate (HR) (contd)

Use the Trackball to move the cursor to a point on the Doppler spectrum where the Heart Rate measurement is to start.
Use the Trackball to move the cursor to the same position on the Doppler waveform, two heartbeats from the start point. See Illustration 268.
Press Set. The HR calculation is complete.
Vascular 20
Measurements
Time Averaged Maximum Velocity (TAMAX)

To choose the method to measure the time averaged maximum velocity:
Illustration 317. Vascular Calculation Sub Menu (TAMAX)
Use the TAMAX, AUTO (Automatic/Manual) Sub Menu selection to choose the method by which the TAMAX trace is made. If TAMAX Auto is highlighted, the maximum velocity envelope is automatically traced between the two velocity points set during the PI measurement. If TAMAX Auto is not highlighted, the operator has to manually trace, with the cursor and Trackball, the maximum velocity envelope between the two points fixed during the PI measurement.
Helpful Hints Hints

Vascular 21
Measurements
Vascular 22
Vascular Summary Report

Introduction
The vascular summary report is structured to automatically display vascular measurements made at specific anatomical sites. An average of the three measurements is also displayed. Calculated ratios are automatically summarized and displayed.
Displaying the Summary Report

The summary report can be displayed at any time during the exam by selecting VASC Report from the Vascular Calculation Sub Menu. Data entered as new patient data is automatically summarized at the top of the summary report. Measurements are summarized below the patient data. Calculations and ratios appear at the bottom of the summary report. To exit the summary report display and resume scanning, select VASC Report from the Sub Menu to deactivate it.
Vascular 23
Displaying the Summary Report (contd)
Illustration 318. Vascular Report Page
Vascular 24
Editing the Summary Report

New patient data cannot be edited. Measurements can be edited by the operator. To edit a measurement: Select VASC REPORT from any page of the Vascular Calculation Sub Menu. Use the Trackball or Return key to move the cursor to the measurement that is to be edited. The measurement can be deleted by pressing the BackSpace or Space bar and then Set. The average measurements, calculations and ratios are automatically updated to reflect the edited values. When editing is complete, select Exit to leave the summary report and resume imaging.
Printing the Summary Report

The summary report can be saved like any image for archival. Simply display the summary report on the screen. The report can then be recorded on video tape, multi-image camera or page printer.
Vascular 25
Vascular Calculation Formulas

Calc Mnemonic RT ECA RT CCA RT BIFURC RT ICA TAMAX Calc Name Right Exterior Carotid Artery Velocity Right Common Carotid Artery Velocity Right Carotid Bifurcation Velocity Right Interior Carotid Artery Velocity Time Averaged Maximum Velocity Input Measurements one Doppler blood flow peak velocity one Doppler blood flow peak velocity one Doppler blood flow peak velocity one Doppler blood flow peak velocity two time marks in a Doppler display Formula RT ECA=v1 [cm/s or m/s] RT CCA=v1 [cm/s or m/s] RT BIFURC=v1 [cm/s or m/s] RT ICA=v1 [cm/s or m/s] TAMAX=sum{Vt} from t1 to t2/(t2t1) [cm/s or m/s]
RT ICA/CCA
Right Interior Carotid Artery two Doppler blood flow RT ICA/ Velocity/Common Carotid peak velocities CCA=VICA/VCCA Artery Velocity Ratio Same as above, for Left Carotid Artery Same as above Same as above
LT ECA, LT CCA, LT BIFURC, LT ICA, LT ICA/CCA A/B Ratio % Stenosis
Velocities Ratio Stenosis Ratio
two Doppler blood flow A/B=V1/V2 peak velocities two areas (by ellipse, trace, circle or distance) two Doppler blood flow peak velocities two Doppler blood flow peak velocities two Doppler blood flow peak velocities and TAMAX two Doppler blood flow peak velocities one 2 beat time interval (measured manually or automatically) % Stenosis= [1(Aresidual/Alumen)] x 100 S/D=Vsystolic/ Vdiastolic D/S=Vdiastolic/ Vsystolic PI=(VmaxVmin)/TAMAX RI=(VmaxVmin)/ Vmax HR[BPM]=120[sec]/ 2beat time[sec]
S/D Ratio (for GEMS-Am & GEMS-A) D/S Ratio (Only for GEMS-E) PI
Systolic Velocity/ DiastolicVelocities Ratio Diastolic Velocity/Systolic Velocities Ratio Pulsatility Index
RI HR
Resistivity Index Heart Rate (beats/minute)
Table 32. Vascular Calculation Formulas
Vascular 26
Advanced Vascular
(software option)
Overview
The Advanced Vascular software option provides increased measurement and reporting capabilities for vascular and venous studies.
Menu Selections
The Advanced Vascular menu selections offer more flexibility than the Basic Software package. In the Advanced Menus, the user can select
S S S
left/right side on menu page one. three Doppler sites on page three. three stenosis sites on page four.
Each Doppler and Stenosis site can be edited (5 characters maximum) on the Vascular Report pages. The menus displayed will depend on the preset for determination of systole/diastole (auto/manual) in the Set Up/ Preset Program page 3 as shown in Illustration 319 and Illustration 320.
Vascular 27
Advanced Vascular
Menu Selections (contd)

1/6 Select Side LEFT 2/6 Lt PICAd Lt PICAs Lt ECAd Lt ECAs Venous Report Carotid Report Lt DICAd Lt DICAs Lt MICAd Lt MICAs Venous Report Carotid Report
3/6 Lt DCCAd Lt DCCAs Lt MCCAd Lt MCCAs Lt PCCAd Lt PCCAs Venous Report Carotid Report
4/6 Lt VERT Lt SUBC Lt ICA /CCAd Lt ICAs /CCAs Venous Report Carotid Report
5/6 Select Locatn 1 6/6 Select Locatn 1 Illustration 319. Vascular Calculation Sub-Menu Manual Determination Systole/Diasatole Lt %Sten HEART RATE Venous Report Carotid Report Lt S/D Ratio Lt RI Lt A/B Ratio Lt PI TAMAX AUTO Carotid Report
Vascular 28
Advanced Vascular
Menu Selections (contd)

1/4 Select Side LEFT 2/4 Lt MCCA Lt PCCA Lt VERT Lt ICA /CCA Lt SUBC Carotid Report Lt DICA Lt MICA Lt PICA Lt ECA Lt DCCA Venous Report Carotid Report
3/4 Select Locatn 1 4/4 Select Locatn 1 Illustration 320. Vascular Calculation Sub-Menu Auto Determination Systole/Diastole Lt %Sten HEART RATE Venous Report Carotid Report Lt S/D Ratio Lt RI Lt A/B Ratio Lt PI TAMAX AUTO Carotid Report
Vascular 29
Advanced Vascular
Report Page Layout

Unlike the Basic Vascular Option, Advanced Vascular offers three report pages.
Advanced Vascular Report Page 1

Page one is a summary of the left and right carotid measurements plus Doppler measurements and % Stenosis at three different sites.
Illustration 321. Vascular Report Page 1
Provisions are made to annotate the vertebral artery in diastole as: A = Antegrade, R = Retrograde or B = Biphasic. The Subclavian Artery can be labelled as: T= Triphasic, B = Biphasic or M = Monophasic. Comments can be added in the Vascular diagram area.
Vascular 30
Advanced Vascular
Advanced Vascular Report Page 1 (contd)
To note one of the three choices for Vert and Subc: Use the Trackball or Arrow keys to place the cursor on top of the desired letter.
Press Set. The desired letter will be placed in brackets (i.e. A<R>B or T B<M>). The user can freely edit the stenosis location names (%A1%%) and Doppler site names (%B1%%). A maximum of five characters can be used for each site name.
Vascular 31
Advanced Vascular
Page two is a list for the left and right sides of the last three calculations with maximum average or latest values for % stenosis and the three designated Doppler sites. Illustration 322 shows an example of the layout for page two.
Vascular 32
Advanced Vascular
Page three is a list of the last three measurements, with the maximum, average, or latest, for the carotid measurements taken in systole/diastole on the left and right sides. Illustration 323 shows an example of the layout for page three.
On pages two and three, the user can choose to display the maximum, average or latest value. The preset Average Activity: OFF/ON in the Set Up/Preset Program menu page 3 controls AVG/LAST. ON = OFF = AVG value LAST value
The preset MAX Velocity (Advanced Vascular) : OFF/ON overrides Average Activity. ON = OFF = MAX value Average Activity selection
Vascular 33
Advanced Vascular
Venous Comments
The Advanced Vascular Option also provides a Venous Comments page to report observations made during an exam. Illustration 324 shows the layout of the Venous Comments page.
Illustration 324. Venous Comment Report Page
Vascular 34
Advanced Vascular
Abbreviations
Abbreviations found on the Venous Comments page designate the following: CFV SFV PROFV PopV PTV PerV GSAPH = = = = = = = Common Femoral Vein Superficial Femoral Vein Profunda Femoris Vein Popliteal Vein Posterior Tibial Vein Peroneal Vein Greater Saphenous Vein
Prefixes found on some abbreviations designate: P M D = = = Proximal Mid Distal
Observations
Observations can be noted for each vein for both the left and right sides. The first section of observations denotes compressability (Comp?) of the vein. The user can note if compression could be accomplished on the vein by designating one of the following: Y = N = P = Yes No Partial
In the second part, the user can comment on observations made during the Doppler study. The user can select one or more of the following designations: Sp Ag = = Spontaneous Augmented Indicates the vein is easily imaged without aids. Velocity signal achieved by distal limb compression or release of proximal limb compression. Indicates the waxing and waning of the velocity signal with respiration.
Ph
Phasicity
Vascular 35
Advanced Vascular
Observations (contd)
Rf Cn Pl = = = Reflux Continuous Pulsatility Indicates reverse or backward venous flow was observed. Indicates no change in velocity signal after compression. Indicates the vein responds to the cardiac cycle and not to the respiratory cycle.
Selecting Abbreviations
In order to select abbreviations on this comment page:
S S S S
Move the highlight cursor to the desired abbreviation and press Set. The abbreviation will be enclosed by brackets < >. To cancel the brackets, move the highlight cursor to the bracketed abbreviation and press Set. The brackets are deleted.
Comments
General Comments can be written at the bottom of each Vascular Report page. The comments are seperate for each page. Individual notes can be entered on each one.
Vascular 36
Advanced Vascular
Vascular Calculation Formulas

Calc Mnemonic Rt DICAd Calc Name Right Distal Interior Carotid Artery Velocity, diastole Right Distal Interior Carotid Artery Velocity, systole Right Mid-Interior Carotid Artery Velocity, diastole Right Mid-Interior Carotid Artery Velocity, systole Right Proximal Interior Carotid Artery Velocity, diastole Right Proximal Interior Carotid Artery Velocity, systole Right Exterior Carotid Artery Velocity, diastole Right Exterior Carotid Artery Velocity, systole Right Distal Common Carotid Artery Velocity, diastole Right Distal Common Carotid Artery Velocity, systole Right Mid-Common Carotid Artery Velocity, diastole Right Mid-Common Carotid Artery Velocity, systole Right Proximal Common Carotid Artery Velocity, diastole Right Proximal Common Carotid Artery Velocity, systole Input Measurements one Doppler blood flow peak velocity one Doppler blood flow peak velocity one Doppler blood flow peak velocity one Doppler blood flow peak velocity one Doppler blood flow peak velocity one Doppler blood flow peak velocity one Doppler blood flow peak velocity one Doppler blood flow peak velocity one Doppler blood flow peak velocity one Doppler blood flow peak velocity one Doppler blood flow peak velocity one Doppler blood flow peak velocity one Doppler blood flow peak velocity one Doppler blood flow peak velocity Formula RT DICAd=v1 [cm/s or m/s] RT DICAs=v1 [cm/s or m/s] RT MICAd=v1 [cm/s or m/s] RT MICAs=v1 [cm/s or m/s] RT PICAd=v1 [cm/s or m/s] RT PICAs=v1 [cm/s or m/s] RT ECAd=v1 [cm/s or m/s] RT ECAs=v1 [cm/s or m/s] RT DCCAd=v1 [cm/s or m/s] RT DCCAs=v1 [cm/s or m/s] RT MCCAd=v1 [cm/s or m/s] RT MCCAs=v1 [cm/s or m/s] RT PCCAd=v1 [cm/s or m/s] RT PCCAs=v1 [cm/s or m/s]
Rt DICAs
Rt MICAd Rt MICAs Rt PICAd
Rt PICAs
Rt ECAd Rt ECAs Rt DCCAd
Rt DCCAs
Rt MCCAd
Rt MCCAs
Rt PCCAd
Rt PCCAs
Table 33. Advanced Vascular Calculation Formulas
Vascular 37
Advanced Vascular
Vascular Calculation Formulas (contd)

Calc Mnemonic Rt ICA/CCAd Rt ICA/CCAs Rt VERT Rt SUBC Rt PI Calc Name Input Measurements Formula
Right Interior Carotid Artery two Doppler blood flow RT XICA/XCCA= Velocity/Common Carotid peak velocities VxICA/VxCCA Artery Velocity Ratio Right Vertebra Artery Velocity, systole Right Subclavian Artery Velocity, systole Right Pulsatility Index one Doppler blood flow peak velocity one Doppler blood flow peak velocity two Doppler blood flow peak velocities and TAMAX two Doppler blood flow peak velocities two Doppler blood flow peak velocities two Doppler blood flow peak velocities RT VERT=v1 [cm/s or m/s] RT SUBC=v1 [cm/s or m/s] Rt PI=(Vmax Vmin)/TAMAX Rt RI=(VmaxVmin)/ Vmax Rt S/D=Vsystolic/ Vdiastolic Rt D/S=Vdiastolic/ Vsystolic
Rt RI Rt S/D Ratio (for GEMS-Am & GEMS-A) Rt D/S Ratio (Only for GEMS-E) Rt A/B Ratio % Stenosis
Right Resistivity Index Right Systolic Velocity/ DiastolicVelocities Ratio Right Diastolic Velocity/ Systolic Velocities Ratio Right side Velocities Ratio Stenosis Ratio
two Doppler blood flow Rt A/B=V1/V2 peak velocities two areas (by ellipse, trace, circle or distance) one 2 beat time interval (measured manually or automatically) two time marks in a Doppler display Same as above % Stenosis= [1(Aresidual/ Alumen)]x100 HR[BPM]=2beat time[sec]/120[sec]
HR
Heart Rate (beats/minute)
TAMAX
Time Averaged Maximum Velocity Same as above, but for Left Carotid Artery
TAMAX=sum{Vt} from t1 to t2/(t2t1) [cm/s or m/s] Same as above
Same as above, but for Left Carotid Artery
Table 33. Advanced Vascular Calculation Formulas (contd)
Vascular 38
Cardiology
(software option)
Introduction Basic Measurements Additional Cardiology Calculations ECG Option Advanced Cardiac Calculations Option
.
t
If the Basic or Advanced Cardiology software option is not installed, the General Calculation Menu will appear for the Cardiology exam category. Doppler Cardiac Calculations are NOT available on the LOGIQ 400 Black & White system.
This section describes the left ventricular measurements and calculations available in the LOGIQ 400 basic cardiology package. These LV measurements can be made by six different methods. ECG Option Menu choices are described as well as the suggested placement of ECG leads. The last part of this section describes the operation of the Advanced Cardiac Calculations (AMCAL) option.
Cardiology 1
Cardiology
Cardiology 2
Introduction
Overview
The basic cardiac calculation option for the LOGIQ 400 offers limited cardiac measurement and calculation capabilities. Analysis of the left ventricle can be performed by six different methods.
S S S S S S
Cubed method Teichholz method Bullet method Modified Simpsons Rule method Single-plane method Biplane ellipsoid method
Cardiology should be the chosen exam category. In all measurements, press Freeze to stop image acquisition of the desired image and press Measurement to activate the measurement function. If necessary press the Top Menu Select key to display the measurement sub menu. Selection of the LV measurement method is made from the initial Cardiac Calculation Sub Menu.
Illustration 325. Cardiac Calculation Sub Menu (LV Measurements)
Once the LV measurement method is chosen, a Sub Menu with the necessary measurement selections appears.
Cardiology 3
Introduction
General Guidelines
Any measurement can be repeated by selecting that measurement again from the Sub Menu. The system retains as many as twenty lines of measurements, but the summary report retains only the last three measurements of each type. The three report page measurements can be averaged and the average used in other calculations.
. .
NOTE: After displaying an LV Summary Report, the calculation method can be changed by moving the highlighted cursor to Change Method and pressing Set.
The current report will be cleared and a method selection menu appears. Use the Trackball to select a new LV method and press Set. After pressing Set the new LV method report is displayed.
NOTE: Once an LV method has been chosen, the system will prompt the User through a sequence of LV measurements to perform.
Cardiology 4
Introduction
General Guidelines (contd)
Illustration 326. Report Page Change Method
Cardiology 5
Introduction
BSA Calculation Methods

The LOGIQ 400 can calculate BSA (Body Surface Area) by two different formulas, depending on the method selected in the Set Up/System Parameter Menu page 2.
Oriental Formula
BSA [m2] = (Height [cm]).03 x (Weight [g])A x 3.207x104 A = 0.7285 0.0188 x log (Weight [g])
Occidental Formula
BSA [m2] = (0.425 x log (Weight [g])+ 0.725 x log (Height [cm]) + 1.8654) x 104
NOTE: 1 inch 1 lb g cm
= 2.54 cm = 453.59243 g = grams = centimeters
Cardiology 6
Basic Measurements
Cubed and Teichholz Methods
The Cubed and Teichholz Methods consist of B-Mode (2D) or M-Mode measurements. Measurements found on the Cubed and Teichholz Methods Sub Menus are: LVIDd LVIDs IVSd IVSs LVPWd LVPWs : : : : : : Left ventricular internal diameter, diastole Left ventricular internal diameter, systole Interventricular septal thickness, diastole Interventricular septal thickness, systole Left ventricle posterior wall thickness, diastole Left ventricle posterior wall thickness, systole
Items calculated and found on the Cubed and Teichholz Methods LV Summary Reports are: HR EdV EsV SV CO EF FS : : : : : : : Heart rate End diastole volume End systole volume Stroke volume Cardiac output Ejection fraction Fractional shortening
Calculation formulas can be found at the end of this section.
B-Mode
M-Mode
Illustration 327. Cubed and Teichholz Methods Measurements
Cardiology 7
Measurements
Measuring LVID, IVS or LVPW
The following LV measurements for the Cubed and Teichholz Methods are basic distance measurements. These measurements are taken from images acquired in diastole and systole. To measure LVID, IVS or LVPW: Scan the patient. Press Freeze or use the ECG trigger option to stop image acquisition in systole or diastole.
"A
Press Measurement to activate the measurement function. If necessary press the Top Menu Select key to display the measurement sub menu. Select the Cubed or Teichholz Method from the Cardiac Calculation LV Sub Menu. Press Clear ONLY if it is desired to disable the systems cardiac auto-measurement sequence.
Illustration 328. Cardiac Calculation Sub Menu
Select the appropriate measurement from the Cardiac Calculation Sub Menu. The distance measurement mode is set and a cursor appears.
Cardiology 8
Measurements
Measuring LVID, IVS or LVPW (contd)
Use the Trackball to move the end-point cursor to the end point.
Press Set. The appropriate measurement is completed, displayed and recorded on the report page.
Cardiology 9
Measurements
Measuring Heart Rate (HR)
To measure heart rate, display an M-Mode image with at least two consecutive heartbeats. Scan the patient. Press Freeze to stop image acquisition.
"A
Press Measurement to activate the measurement function. If necessary press the Top Menu Select key to display the measurement sub menu. Select the Cubed or Teichholz Method from the Cardiac Calculation LV Sub Menu. Press Clear ONLY if it is desired to disable the systems auto-measurement sequence.
Illustration 329. Cardiac Calculation Sub Menu (HEART RATE)
Select HEART RATE from the Cardiac Calculation Sub Menu. The HR measurement mode is set and a cursor appears.
Use the Trackball to move the cursor to a point in the M-Mode image where the HR measurement is to start.
(continued)
Cardiology 10
Measurements
Use the Trackball to move the cursor to the same position on the mode image two heartbeats from the start point. See Illustration 330.
Press Set. The HR measurement is complete.
Cardiology 11
Measurements
Cubed and Teichholz Report Page Displays
Illustration 331. Cubed Report Page Display
Illustration 332. Teichholz Report Page Display
Cardiology 12
Measurements
Bullet and Modified Simpsons Rule Methods

Bullet and Modified Simpsons Rule Methods consist of B-Mode (2D) measurements. Measurements found on the Bullet Method Sub Menu are: LVLd LVLs LVAMd LVAMs : : : : Left ventricular length, diastole Left ventricular length, systole Left ventricular area mitral valve, diastole Left ventricular area mitral valve, systole
Measurements found on the Modified Simpsons Rule Sub Menu are: LVLd LVLs LVAMd LVAMs LVAPd LVAPs : : : : : : Left ventricular length, diastole Left ventricular length, systole Left ventricular area mitral valve, diastole Left ventricular area mitral valve, systole Left ventricular area papillary muscles, diastole Left ventricular area papillary muscles, systole
Items calculated and found on the Bullet and Modified Simpsons Rule Methods LV Report Pages are: HR EdV EsV SV CO EF : : : : : : Heart rate End diastole volume End systole volume Stroke volume Cardiac output Ejection fraction
LVAMd LVLd LVLs
LVAMs
LVAPd
LVAPs
Illustration 333. Bullet and Modified Simpsons Rule Methods Measurements
Cardiology 13
Measurements
Measuring LVL
The following LV measurements for the Bullet and Modified Simpsons Rule Methods are basic distance measurements. These measurements are taken from images acquired in diastole and systole. To measure LVL: Scan the patient. Press Freeze or use the ECG trigger option to stop image acquisition in systole or diastole.
"A
Press Measurement to activate the measurement function. If necessary press the Top Menu Select key to display the measurement sub menu. Select the Bullet or Modified Simpsons Rule Method from the Cardiac Calculation LV Sub Menu. Press Clear ONLY if it is desired to disable the systems cardiac auto-measurement sequence
Bullet Method
Modified Simpsons Rule Method
Illustration 334. Cardiac Calculation Sub Menus
Cardiology 14
Measurements
Measuring LVL (contd)
Cardiology 15
Measurements
Measuring LVAM or LVAP
The following LV measurements for the Bullet and Modified Simpsons Rule Methods are basic circumference area measurements that can be performed by either the ellipse or trace method. These measurements are taken from images acquired in diastole and systole.
NOTE: The default method (ellipse or trace) is designated in the Set Up/Preset program menu page 3.
Bullet Method
Ellipse method Scan the patient. Press Freeze or use the ECG trigger option to stop image acquisition in systole or diastole.
"A
Press Measurement to activate the measurement function. If necessary press the Top Menu Select key to display the measurement sub menu. Select the Bullet or Modified Simpsons Rule Method from the Cardiac Calculation LV Sub Menu. Press Clear ONLY if it is desired to disable the systems cardiac auto-measurement sequence.
Cardiology 16
Measurements
Ellipse method (contd) Select the appropriate measurement from the Cardiac Calculation Sub Menu. The area measurement mode is set and a cursor appears.
Use the Trackball to move the cursor to the measurement start point of the major axis.
Use the Trackball to move the cursor to the other end of the major axis of the region to be measured.
.
t
NOTE: Use the Measurement key to toggle activation of the measurement cursors. Use the Ellipse arrow keys to adjust the size as necessary.
Press Set. The appropriate measurement is computed, displayed and recorded on the report page.
Cardiology 17
Measurements
Trace method Scan the patient. Press Freeze or use the ECG trigger option to stop image acquisition in systole or diastole.
"A
Press Measurement to activate the measurement function. If necessary press the Top Menu Select key to display the measurement sub menu. Select the Bullet or Modified Simpsons Rule Method from the Cardiac Calculation LV Sub Menu. Press Clear ONLY if it is desired to disable the systems cardiac auto-measurement sequence. Select the appropriate measurement from the Cardiac Calculation Sub Menu. The area measurement mode is set and a circle cursor appears. Use the Trackball to move the cursor to the measurement start point.
Use the Trackball to trace the region to be measured.
Press Set. The trace start and end points are connected to each other and the measured value computed, displayed and recorded on the report page.
Cardiology 18
Measurements
"A
Press Measurement to activate the measurement function. If necessary press the Top Menu Select key to display the measurement sub menu. Select the Bullet or Modified Simpsons Rule Method from the Cardiac Calculation LV Sub Menu. Press Clear ONLY if it is desired to disable the systems auto-measurement sequence.
Bullet Method
Illustration 336. Cardiac Calculation Sub Menus (HEART RATE)
Cardiology 19
Measurements
Cardiology 20
Measurements
Bullet and Modified Simpsons Rule Report Page Displays
Illustration 338. Bullet Report Page Display
Illustration 339. Modified Simpsons Rule Report Page Display
Cardiology 21
Measurements
Single and Bi Plane Ellipsoid Methods

Single and Bi Plane Ellipsoid Methods consist of B-Mode (2D) measurements. Measurements found on the Single Plane Ellipsoid Method Sub Menu are: LVLd LVLs LVAd LVAs : : : : Left ventricular length, diastole Left ventricular length, systole Left ventricular area, diastole Left ventricular area, systole
Measurements found on the Bi Plane Ellipsoid Method Sub Menu are: LVMLd LVMLs LVAMd LVAMs LVAd LVAs : : : : : : Left ventricular medial-lateral dimension, diastole Left ventricular medial-lateral dimension, systole Left ventricular area mitral valve, diastole Left ventricular area mitral valve, systole Left ventricular area, diastole Left ventricular area, systole
Items calculated and found on the Single and Bi Plane Ellipsoid Methods LV Report Page are: HR EdV EsV SV CO EF : : : : : : Heart Rate End diastole volume End systole volume Stroke volume Cardiac output Ejection fraction

LVLd LVLs LVMLd LVMLs LVAd LVAs LVAMd LVAMs
Illustration 340. Single and Bi Plane Ellipsoid Methods Measurements
Cardiology 22
Measurements
Measuring LVL or LVML
The following LV measurements for the Single and Bi Plane Ellipsoid Methods are basic distance measurements. These measurements are taken from images acquired in diastole and systole. To measure LVL or LVML: Scan the patient. Press Freeze or use the ECG trigger option to stop image acquisition in systole or diastole.
"A
Press Measurement to activate the measurement function. If necessary press the Top Menu Select key to display the measurement sub menu. Select the Single or Bi Plane Ellipsoid Method from the Cardiac Calculation LV Sub Menu. Press Clear ONLY if it is desired to disable the systems cardiac auto-measurement sequence.
Single Plane Ellipsoid Method
Bi Plane Ellipsoid Method
Cardiology 23
Measurements
Measuring LVL or LVML (contd)
Cardiology 24
Measurements
Measuring LVA or LVAM
The following LV measurements for the Single and Bi Plane Ellipsoid Methods are basic circumference area measurements that can be performed by either the ellipse or trace method. These measurements are taken from images acquired in diastole and systole.
NOTE: The default method (ellipse or trace) is designated in the Set Up/Preset program menu page 3.
Ellipse method Scan the patient. Press Freeze or use the ECG trigger option to stop image acquisition in systole or diastole.
"A
Press Measurement to activate the measurement function. If necessary press the Top Menu Select key to display the measurement sub menu. Select the Single or Bi Plane Ellipsoid Method from the Cardiac Calculation LV Sub Menu. Press Clear ONLY if it is desired to disable the systems cardiac auto-measurement sequence.
Cardiology 25
Measurements
Ellipse method (contd) Select the appropriate measurement from the Cardiac Calculation Sub Menu. The area measurement mode is set and a cursor appears.
Use the Trackball to move the cursor to the measurement start point of the major axis.
Use the Trackball to move the cursor to the other end of the major axis of the region to be measured.
Press Set. The appropriate measurement is computed, displayed and recorded on the report page.
Cardiology 26
Measurements
Trace method Scan the patient. Press Freeze or use the ECG trigger option to stop image acquisition in systole or diastole.
"A
Press Measurement to activate the measurement function. If necessary press the Top Menu Select key to display the measurement sub menu. Select the Single or Bi Plane Ellipsoid Method from the Cardiac Calculation LV Sub Menu. Press Clear ONLY if it is desired to disable the systems cardiac auto-measurement sequence. Select the appropriate measurement from the Cardiac Calculation Sub Menu. The area measurement mode is set and a circle cursor appears. Use the Trackball to move the cursor to the measurement start point.
Use the Trackball to trace the region to be measured.
Press Set. The trace start and end points are connected to each other and the measured value computed, displayed and recorded on the report page.
Cardiology 27
Measurements
"A
Press Measurement to activate the measurement function. If necessary press the Top Menu Select key to display the measurement sub menu. Select the Single or Bi Plane Ellipsoid Method from the Cardiac Calculation LV Sub Menu. Press Clear ONLY if it is desired to disable the systems auto-measurement sequence.
Illustration 343. Cardiac Calculation Sub Menus (HEART RATE)
Cardiology 28
Measurements
Measuring heart rate (HR) (contd)
Cardiology 29
Measurements
Single and Bi Plane Ellipsoid Report Page Displays
Illustration 345. Single Plane Ellipsoid Report Page Display
Illustration 346. Bi Plane Ellipsoid Report Page Display
Cardiology 30
Measurements
LV Calculation Formulas (Cubed Method)

Calc Mnemonic LVIDd Calc Name Left Ventricular Internal Diameter, Diastole Left Ventricular Internal Diameter, Systole Interventricular Septal Thickness, Diastole Interventricular Septal Thickness, Systole Left Ventricle Posterior Wall Thickness, Diastole Left Ventricle Posterior Wall Thickness, Systole End Diastole Volume End Systole Volume Stroke Volume Cardiac Output Input Measurements one distance Formula LVIDd=d1[cm or mm]
LVIDs
one distance
LVIDs=d1[cm or mm]
IVSd
one distance
IVSd=d1[cm or mm]
IVSs
one distance
IVSs=d1[cm or mm]
LVPWd
one distance
LVPWd=d1[cm or mm] LVPWs=d1[cm or mm] EdV[ml]=LVIDd^3 EsV[ml]=LVIDs^3 SV[ml]=EdVEsV CO[1/min]= SVxHR/1000 EF=SV/EdVx100 FS=(1LVIDs/ LVIDd)x100 HR[BPM]=/120 [sec]/ 2 beat time [sec] PHT=t1[ms orsec] MVA[cm^2]= 220/PHT ET=t1[ms or sec]
LVPWs
one distance
EdV EsV SV CO
one distance one distance two distance two distances and one 2 beat time interval two distances two distances one 2 beat time interval one time interval one pressure half time interval one time interval
EF FS HR PHT MVA ET
Ejection Fraction Fractional Shortening Heart Rate (beats/ minute) Pressure Half Time Mitral Valve Area Ejection Time
Table 34. Cubed Method Formulas
Cardiology 31
Measurements
LV Calculation Formulas (Teichholz Method)

Calc Mnemonic LVIDd Calc Name Left Ventricular Internal Diameter, Diastole Left Ventricular Internal Diameter, Systole Interventricular Septal Thickness, Diastole Interventricular Septal Thickness, Systole Left Ventricle Posterior Wall Thickness, Diastole Left Ventricle Posterior Wall Thickness, Systole End Diastole Volume End Systole Volume Stroke Volume Cardiac Output Input Measurements one distance Formula LVIDd=d1[cm or mm]
LVIDs
one distance
LVIDs=d1[cm or mm]
IVSd
one distance
IVSd=d1[cm or mm]
IVSs
one distance
IVSs=d1[cm or mm]
LVPWd
one distance
LVPWd=d1[cm or mm] LVPWs=d1[cm or mm] EdV[ml]=LVIDd^3x7/ (2.4+LVIDd) EsV[ml]=LVIDs^3x7/ (2.4+LVIDs) SV[ml]=EdVEsV CO[1/min]= SVxHR/1000 EF=SV/EdVx100 FS=(1LVIDs/LVIDd) x 100 HR=120[sec]/ 2 beat time[sec] PHT=t1[ms orsec] MVA[cm^2]= 220/PHT ET=t1[ms or sec]
LVPWs
one distance
EdV EsV SV CO
one distance one distance two distances two distances and one 2 beat time interval two distances two distances one 2 beat time interval one time interval one pressure half time interval one time interval
EF FS HR PHT MVA ET
Ejection Fraction Fractional Shortening Heart Rate (beats/ minute) Pressure Half Time Mitral Valve Area Ejection Time
Table 35. Teichholz Method Formulas
Cardiology 32
Measurements
LV Calculation Formulas (Bullet Method)

Calc Mnemonic LVLd LVLs LVAMd LVAMs EdV Calc Name Left Ventricular Length, Diastole Left Ventricular Length, Systole Input Measurements one distance one distance Formula LVLd=d1[cm or mm] LVLs=d1[cm or mm] LVAMd=a1[cm ^2] LVAMs=a1[cm ^2] EdV[ml]=5xLVLd xLVAMd/6
Left Ventricular Area, one area (by ellipse, Mitral Valve, Diastole trace or circle) Left Ventricular Area, one area (by ellipse, Mitral Valve, Systole trace or circle) End Diastole Volume one distance and one area (by ellipse, trace or circle) one distance and one area (by ellipse, trace or circle)
EsV
End Systole Volume
EsV[ml]=5xLVLs xLVAMs/6
SV
Stroke Volume
two distances and SV[ml]=EdVEsV two areas (by ellipse, trace or circle) two distances and CO[1/min]= two areas (by ellipse, SVxHR/1000 trace or circle) and one 2 beat time interval two distances and EF=SV/EdVx100 two areas (by ellipse, trace or circle) one 2 beat time interval one time interval one pressure half time interval one time interval HR[BPM]=120 [sec]/ 2 beat time [sec] PHT=t1[ms orsec] MVA[cm^2]= 220/PHT ET=t1[ms or sec]
CO
Cardiac Output
EF
Ejection Fraction
HR PHT MVA ET
Heart Rate (beats/ minute) Pressure Half Time Mitral Valve Area Ejection Time
Table 36. Bullet Method Formulas
Cardiology 33
Measurements
LV Calculation Formulas (Modified Simpsons Rule Method)

Calc Mnemonic LVLd LVLs LVAMd LVAMs LVAPd Calc Name Left Ventricular Length, Diastole Left Ventricular Length, Systole Input Measurements one distance one distance Formula LVLd=d1[cm or mm] LVLs=d1[cm or mm] LVAMd=a1[cm ^2] LVAMs=a1[cm ^2] LVAPd=a1[cm ^2]
Left Ventricular Area, one area (by ellipse, Mitral Valve, Diastole trace or circle) Left Ventricular Area, one area (by ellipse, Mitral Valve, Systole trace or circle) Left Ventricular Area, one area (by ellipse, Papillary Muscles, trace or circle) Diastole Left Ventricular Area, one area (by ellipse, Papillary Muscles, trace or circle) Systole
LVAPs
LVAPs=a1[cm ^2]
EdV
End Diastole Volume one distance and EdV[ml]=LVLd/3 two areas (by ellipse, x(LVAMd+ (LVAMd+ trace or circle) LVAPd)/2+ LVAPd/3) End Systole Volume one distance and EsV[ml]=LVLs/3 two areas (by ellipse, x(LVAMs+ (LVAMs trace or circle) +LVAPs)/2+LVAPs/3) two distances and four areas (by ellipse, trace or circle) two distances and four areas (by ellipse, trace or circle) and one 2 beat time interval two distances and four areas (by ellipse, trace or circle) one 2 beat time interval one time interval one pressure half time interval one time interval SV[ml]=EdVEsV
EsV
SV
Stroke Volume
CO
Cardiac Output
CO[1/min]= SVxHR/1000
EF
Ejection Fraction
EF=SV/EdVx100
HR PHT MVA ET
HR=120[sec]/ 2 beat time[sec] PHT=t1[ms orsec] MVA[cm^2]= 220/PHT ET=t1[ms or sec]
Table 37. Modified Simpsons Rule Method Formulas
Cardiology 34
Measurements
LV Calculation Formulas (Single Plane Ellipsoid Method)

Calc Mnemonic LVLd LVLs LVAd LVAs EdV Calc Name Left Ventricular Length, Diastole Left Ventricular Length, Systole Input Measurements one distance one distance Formula LVLd=d1[cm or mm] LVLs=d1[cm or mm] LVAd=a1[cm ^2] LVAs=a1[cm ^2]
Left Ventricular Area, one area (by ellipse, Diastole trace or circle) Left Ventricular Area, one area (by ellipse, Systole trace or circle)
End Diastole Volume one distance and EdV[ml]=8/(3 p) two areas (by ellipse, x(LVAd)^2/LVLd trace or circle) End Systole Volume one distance and EsV[ml]=8/(3 p) two areas (by ellipse, x(LVAs)^2/LVLs trace or circle) two distances and four areas (by ellipse, trace or circle) two distances and four areas (by ellipse, trace or circle) and one 2 beat time interval two distances and four areas (by ellipse, trace or circle) one 2 beat time interval one time interval one pressure half time interval one time interval SV[ml]=EdVEsV
EsV
SV
Stroke Volume
CO
Cardiac Output
CO[1/min]= SVxHR/1000
EF
Ejection Fraction
EF=SV/EdVx100
HR PHT MVA ET
HR[BPM]=120 [sec]/ 2 beat time [sec] PHT=t1[ms orsec] MVA[cm^2]= 220/PHT ET=t1[ms or sec]
Table 38. Single Plane Ellipsoid Method Formulas
Cardiology 35
Measurements
LV Calculation Formulas (Bi Plane Ellipsoid Method)

Calc Mnemonic LVMLd Calc Name Input Measurements Formula LVMLd=d1[cm or mm] LVMLs=d1[cm or mm] LVAMd=a1[cm ^2] LVAMs=a1[cm ^2] LVAd=a1[cm ^2] LVAs=a1[cm ^2]
Left Ventricle Medial- one distance Lateral Dimension, Diastole Left Ventricle Medial- one distance Lateral Dimension, Systole Left Ventricular Area, one area (by ellipse, Mitral Valve, Diastole trace or circle) Left Ventricular Area, one area (by ellipse, Mitral Valve, Systole trace or circle) Left Ventricle Area, Diastole Left Ventricle Area, Systole one area (by ellipse, trace or circle) one area (by ellipse, trace or circle)
LVMLs LVAMd LVAMs LVAd LVAs EdV EsV SV

CO
End Diastole Volume one distance and EdV[ml]=8/(3 p) two areas (by ellipse, x(LVAdxLVAMd)/ trace or circle) LVMLd End Systole Volume one distance and EsV[ml]=8/(3 p) two areas (by ellipse, x(LVAsxLVAMs)/ trace or circle) LVMLs two distances and SV[ml]=EdVEsV four areas (by ellipse, trace or circle) two distances and four areas (by ellipse, trace or circle) and one 2 beat time interval two distances and four areas (by ellipse, trace or circle) one 2 beat time interval one time interval one pressure half time interval one time interval CO[1/min]= SVxHR/1000
Stroke Volume
Cardiac Output
EF
Ejection Fraction
EF=SV/EdVx100
HR PHT MVA ET
HR[BPM]=120 [sec]/ 2 beat time [sec] PHT=t1[ms orsec] MVA[cm^2]= 220/PHT ET=t1[ms or sec]
Table 39. Bi Plane Ellipsoid Method Formulas
Cardiology 36
Additional Cardiology Calculations

In addition to the LV calculations found on page one of the Cardiology Calculations Sub Menu, measurements are available on pages 2, 3, and 4 of the Sub Menu. The choices on page 2 are Volume, Angle and % Stenosis. The choices on page 3 are PHT, MVA and ET. Page 4s choices are S/D Ratio, PI, A/B Ratio, RI, Heart Rate, and TAMAX Auto. LV Report appears on all sub menu pages.
Volume
Press Freeze to stop image acquisition.
"A
Press the Measurement key to activate the measurement function. If necessary press the Top Menu Select key to display the measurement sub menu.
Illustration 347. Cardiac Calculation Sub Menu (Volume)
Select VOLUME from the Cardiac Calculation Sub Menu page two. Use the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display page two and highlight VOLUME. The volume calculation can be made from one, two or three distances, from one distance and an ellipse, from a single ellipse or from two ellipse measurements.
General Measurements and Calculations details how to make distance and ellipse measurements.
Cardiology 37
Volume (contd)
IMPORTANT NOTE: When a volume calculation is desired, the necessary measurements or combination of measurements must be made BEFORE selecting VOLUME in the sub menu.
Examples
When a volume calculation is desired: 1. Make one distance measurement. Select VOLUME from the Cardiac Calculation Sub Menu. A volume will be calculated using the single distance formula. OR 2. Make two distance measurements. Select VOLUME from the Cardiac Calculation Sub Menu. A volume will be calculated using the two distance formula. OR 3. If one ellipse is measured, the formula for a single ellipse will be used to calculate volume. Select VOLUME from the Cardiac Calculation Sub Menu.
.
Cardiology 38
A volume will be calculated using the two distance formula. OR 4. Make three distance measurements.
NOTE: This should be done in the dual format mode (side by side images). One measurement is usually made in the sagittal plane and two measurements in the axial plane.
Select VOLUME from the Cardiac Calculation Sub Menu. A volume will be calculated using the three distance formula. OR

Examples (contd)
5. If one distance and an ellipse are measured, the formula for distance/ellipse is used to calculate volume. Select VOLUME from the Cardiac Calculation Sub Menu. A volume will be calculated using the three distance formula. OR 6. If two ellipsoids are measured, the formula for two ellipsoids is used to calculate volume. Select VOLUME from the Cardiac Calculation Sub Menu. A volume will be calculated using the three distance formula. Formulas used in calculations are found in this section.
Hints
S S S S
Volumes are most accurate when measurements are taken in the sagittal and axial scan planes. Use the side by side dual format option to display sagittal and axial plane images simultaneously. Make all necessary measurements before selecting volume. See General Measurements and Calculations for details on the steps to take when doing basic distance and ellipse measurements. An overflow error message (OOR) will occur during a two ellipse, or one ellipse/one distance volume calculation if: the minor (small) axis of the large ellipse is equal to/less than the major (large) axis of the small ellipse (d1), or equal to/less than the single distance measurement (d2). d1 d2
Illustration 348. Volume Calculation Error Possibilities
Cardiology 39

Volume Calculation Formulas
Calc Mnemonic Vol Vol Vol Vol Vol Calc Name Volume (spherical) Volume (prolate spheroidal) Volume (prolate spheroidal) Volume (spheroidal) Volume (spheroidal) Input Measurements one distance two distances, d1>d2 one ellipse, d1 major axis, d2 minor axis three distances Formula Vol[ml]=(p/6)xd^3 Vol[ml]= (p/6)xd1xd2^2 Vol[ml]= (p/6)xd1xd2^2 Vol[ml]= (p/6)xd1xd2xd3
one distance d1, one Vol[ml]= ellipse, d2 major (p/6)xd1xd2xd3 axis, d3 minor axis two ellipse, ellipse 1 with axes d1 and d2, ellipse 2 with axes d3 and d4, with |d2d3| |d1d4| and d2>d3 Vol[ml]= (p/6)xd1xd2xd4 (d3 is not used, assuming it is close to d2)
Vol
Volume (spheroidal)
Table 40. Volume Calculation Formulas
Illustration 349. Volume Calculation Examples
Cardiology 40
Angle
This function is intended to measure the angle between two intersecting planes. Press Freeze to acquire a cross sectional view of the vessel.
"A
Press Measurement to activate the measurement function. If necessary press the Top Menu Select key to activate the measurement sub menu.
Illustration 350. Cardiac Calculation Sub Menu (ANGLE)
Select ANGLE from the Cardiac Calculation Sub Menu page two. Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display page two and highlight ANGLE. The Angle Calculation Mode is set and a dashed line cursor appears. The displayed angle is zero degrees. Use the Trackball to position the line cursor and the Zoom Size/Rotation control to adjust the angle of the line cursor.
Press Set to fix the position of the first cursor.
(continued)
Cardiology 41
Angle (contd)
Use the Trackball to position the second line cursor and the Zoom Size/Rotation control to adjust the angle of the second line cursor. The angle between the two cursors is constantly updated on the display.
If a fine adjustment of the two cursors is needed, press Measurement to toggle which line cursor is active. Adjust the active cursor with the Trackball and Zoom Size/Rotation control. Press Set to complete the angle measurement.
Cardiology 42
Measuring the % stenosis (stenosis ratio)

"A
Press Measurement to activate the measurement function. If necessary press the Top Menu Select key to display the measurement sub menu. The area of the blood vessel can be measured by the ellipse, trace, circle, 2 distance or 1 distance methods. The Set Up/Preset Program page 3 defines the default method.
CAUTION
Ellipse method
Illustration 351. Cardiac Calculation Sub Menu (% STENO)
Select % STENO from the Cardiac Calculations Sub Menu page two. Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display page two and highlight % Steno. The % stenosis measurement mode is set and a cursor appears.
Cardiology 43

Press Set. The start-point cursor is set and an end-point cursor appears. Use the Trackball to move the end-point cursor to the other end of the long axis of the residual area of the vessel being measured.
Cardiology 44

Press the Ellipse up arrow key. An ellipse having the long axis as its diameter is displayed. Press the Ellipse up arrow key to increase the ellipse size.
Press the Ellipse down arrow key size.
to decrease the ellipse
Cardiology 45

Trace method
Select % STENO from the Cardiac Calculation Sub Menu page two. Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display page two and highlight % STENO. The % stenosis measurement mode is set and a cursor appears.
Press Set. The start-point cursor changes to a cursor and is fixed. An end-point cursor appears.
Cardiology 46

S
Press Set. The start-point cursor changes to a cursor and is fixed. An end-point cursor appears.
Cardiology 47
PHT (Pressure Half Time)

A PHT measurement is used to calculate Mitral Valve Area (MVA). The measurement is taken on the Doppler spectral display of the mitral valve.
Illustration 352. PHT Measurement on Mitral Valve Waveform
Scan the patient to display a Doppler spectrum of the mitral valve. Press Freeze to stop image acquisition.
"A
Press Measurement to activate the measurement function. If necessary press the Top Menu Select key to display the measurement sub menu. Select PHT from of the Cardiac Calculation Sub Menu page three. Use the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display page three and highlight PHT.
Illustration 353. Cardiac Calculation Sub Menu (PHT)
Cardiology 48
PHT (Pressure Half Time) (contd)

Use the Trackball to move the first cursor with a horizontal line to the peak of the mitral valve waveform.
Press Set to fix the first cursor and enable the second.
Use the Trackball to move the second cursor with a horizontal line to a point halfway down the mitral valve waveform slope.
Press Measurement to toggle between activation of the two cursors for fine adjustments.
Press Set to complete the PHT measurement.
MVA (Mitral Valve Area)

A Mitral Valve Area is calculated from the pressure half time measurement. If PHT was selected, MVA is also calculated. If MVA is selected, PHT must be measured in order to calculate MVA.
Cardiology 49
ET (Ejection Time)
Ejection time for the left ventricle is the time during which the aortic valve is open. It is measured on a Doppler Spectrum display. The time between the two cursors is ejection time (ET).
Illustration 354. Ejection Time for Aortic Valve
Scan the patient to display a Doppler spectrum of the aortic valve. Press Freeze to stop image acquisition.
"A
Press Measurement to activate the measurement function. If necessary press the Top Menu Select key to display the measurement sub menu. Select ET from of the Cardiac Calculation Sub Menu page three. Use the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display page three and highlight ET.
Illustration 355. Cardiac Calculation Sub Menu (ET)
Cardiology 50
ET (Ejection Time) (contd)

Use the Trackball to move the first cursor with a horizontal line at the opening of the aortic valve.
Press Set to fix the first cursor and enable the second.
Use the Trackball to move the second cursor with a horizontal line at the closing of the aortic valve.
Press Measurement to toggle between activation of the two cursors for fine adjustments.
Press Set to complete the ET measurement.
Cardiology 51
Measuring the Max PG

To measure Max PG (Maximum Pressure Gradient): Scan the patient in Doppler Mode (Spectrum Display). Press Freeze to stop image acquisition.
"A
Illustration 356. Cardiac Calculations Sub Menu (MAX PG)
Select Max PG from the Cardiac Calculations Sub Menu page three. Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display page three and highlight Max PG. A horizontal line cursor appears.
Cardiology 52
Measuring the Max PG (contd)

Use the Trackball to place the cursor at a peak in the Doppler spectrum waveform.
Press Set to fix the first cursor. A second cursor appears and VMAX is displayed.
Use the Trackball to place the second cursor at the lowest level in the measured Doppler waveform.
Press Set to fix the second cursor. VMIN is displayed. Max PG is calculated and displayed.
Automatic Calculation of Max PG

If TAMAX was previously measured and calculated in Doppler Mode, Max PG is calculated from the VMAX and VMIN measurements taken for TAMAX when MAX PG is first selected in the Cardiac Calculation Sub Menu.
Cardiology 53
Measuring the Mean PG

To measure Mean PG (Mean Pressure Gradient): Scan the patient in Doppler Mode (Spectrum Display). Press Freeze to stop image acquisition.
"A
Illustration 357. Cardiac Calculation Sub Menu (MEAN PG)
Select Mean PG from the Cardiac Calculation Sub Menu page three. Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display page three and highlight Mean PG. A horizontal line cursor appears in the Doppler spectrum.
Cardiology 54
Measuring the Mean PG (contd)

Use the Trackball to move the cursor to the waveform trace start point.
If TAMAX AUTO is enabled, a second cursor appears. Use the Trackball to move this cursor to the measurement end point. Press Set to complete the Doppler waveform trace. If TAMAX AUTO is disabled, use the Trackball to trace the Doppler waveform. Press Set to complete the Doppler waveform trace.
Automatic Calculation of Mean PG

If TAMAX was previously measured and calculated in Doppler Mode, Mean PG is calculated from the TAMAX value when Mean PG is first selected in the Cardiac Calculation Sub Menu. The waveform is automatically traced. TAMAX and Mean PG are also displayed on the screen.
Cardiology 55
S/D Ratio, RI, A/B Ratio, PI

Scan the patient in B Plus Doppler Mode. Press Freeze to stop image acquisition.
"A
Illustration 358. Cardiac Calculation Sub Menu Page 4
S/D Ratio, RI, A/B Ratio and PI are accessible from the Cardiac Calculation Sub Menu page four. Use the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display page four and highlight the appropriate selection. S/D Ratio, PI, A/B Ratio and RI are the same procedures as outlined in the Vascular Calculation Sub Menu. Refer to Vascular 12.
Heart Rate and TAMAX Auto

Heart Rate and TAMAX Auto are accessible from the Cardiac Calculation Sub Menu page four (Illustration 358). Heart Rate and TAMAX Auto are the same as those outlined in the Vascular Calculation Sub Menu. Refer to Vascular 19 and Vascular 21, respectively.
Cardiology 56
ECG
(Option)
Overview
A physiological input panel is available for the LOGIQ 400. This panel has inputs for ECG, physiological and auxiliary signals. The ECG Soft Menu controls the signals connected to the Physiological panel. Approved accessory cables provide the proper signals to the Physiological Panel.
!
ECG
PCG
Aux
.
WARNING
Illustration 359. Optional Physiological Input Panel
NOTE: The LOGIQ 400 can calculate heart rate in BPM from the ECG waveform. See Set Up/Custom Display page 15 to turn ECG Heart Rate Display on or off.
Do not use with defibrillator.
Cardiology 57
ECG Option
Physio Sweep Speed

The sweep speed of the physio signal on the B-Mode image can be set independent of the timeline (M-Mode and Doppler) sweep speed. This is accomplished using the preset parameter Physio Sweep Speed on B. It is found on Set Up/Custom Display page 3.
ECG Sub Menu

The three pages of the ECG Sub Menus provide for control of the physiological input signals. In each case, select the proper sub menu page by pressing the Sub Menu Select arrow keys.
Cardiology 58
ECG Option
ECG Lead Placement

The three patient ECG leads are color coded white, black and green. White is connected to the patients right arm, black to the left arm, and green (ground) to the right foot (often placed on the right side of the abdomen). The right arm connection may change if the patient is in the decubitus position. Refer to Illustration 361.
WHITE BLACK
GREEN
Patient in Prone Position
Patient in Decubitus Position
Illustration 361. Common ECG Lead Placement
Once the leads are connected to the patient and the LOGIQ 400, the ECG waveform amplifier needs about 10 seconds to stabilize the waveform on the CRT before adjustments are made.
Cardiology 59
ECG Option
Single
Description
Single updates the B-Mode image at the R1 time. Each time the R1 point is reached on the ECG, PCG, or AUX Waveform, the B-Mode image changes. In between R1 trigger points, the B-Mode image is frozen. The display shows the delay value as S1.
Illustration 362. ECG Sub Menu (Single)
Accessing/Changing
Select Single from the ECG Sub Menu page one. Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display page one and highlight Single. Each press of the Single up or down arrow keys turns the single trigger function on or off.
NOTE: The Trackball can be used to change the value of the active delay.
Benefits
Allows for the acquisition of an image at a specific point in the Cardiac Cycle.
Values
If Single is highlighted, the one-trigger function is on. If Single is not highlighted, the function is off.

If Dual was highlighted when single is pressed, the Dual function is turned off and the Single function turned on.
Cardiology 60
ECG Option
Dual
Description
Dual updates the B-Mode image at the R1 and R2 times. Each time the R1 and R2 points are reached on the ECG, PCG, or Aux waveform, the B-Mode image changes. In between each trigger time, the B-Mode image is frozen.
NOTE: R2 on the ECG will be marked with a vertical dotted line. The display shows the delays as S1 and S2.
Illustration 363. ECG Sub Menu (Dual)
Accessing/Changing
Select Dual from the ECG Sub Menu page one. Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display page one and highlight Dual. Each press of the Dual up or down arrow keys turns the Dual function on or off.
NOTE: The Trackball can be used to change the value of the active delay.
Benefits
Allows for the acquisition of an image at two points in the Cardiac Cycle.
Values
If Dual is highlighted, the two-trigger function is on. If Dual is not highlighted, the two-trigger function is off.

If Single is highlighted when Dual is pressed, the single function is turned off and the Dual function turned on.
Cardiology 61
ECG Option
Sync Selectn
Description
In the Single trigger mode, Sync Selection allows for the choice of triggering on R1 or R2. In the Dual trigger mode, Sync Selection toggles trackball control of the S1 or S2 delays displayed in the upper left corner of the monitor.
Illustration 364. ECG Sub Menu (Sync Selection)
Accessing/Changing
Select Sync Selectn from the ECG Sub Menu page one. Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display page one and highlight Sync Selectn. Each press of the Sync Selectn up or down arrow keys affects the Sync as described above.
Benefits
Provides trackball control of delay and selection of update trigger point.
Values
R1 or R2 trigger select or variable delay adjustment.

Changes trigger point in Single Trigger Mode. Changes Trackball control of delays in Dual Mode.
Cardiology 62
ECG Option
Ref Scan (Reference Scan)

Description
Reference Scan provides the ability to display both an active and trigger updated image simultaneously in the Dual B-Mode display format. Reference Scan functions in the Single trigger Mode only. A real-time image cannot be obtained in Dual Trigger Mode.
Illustration 365. ECG Sub Menu (Ref Scan)
Accessing/Changing
Select Ref Scan from the ECG Sub Menu page one. Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display page one and highlight Ref Scan. Each press of the Ref Scan up or down arrow keys turns Ref Scan on or off if proper conditions exist. In dual image mode, press Left to display a trigger updated image on the left and active image on the right. Press Right to display a trigger updated image on the right and active image on the left.
Cardiology 63
ECG Option
Benefits
Provides the ability to view the real-time image while simultaneously acquiring images at a trigger point on the ECG, PCG or Aux waveform. These images are best recorded on video tape.
Values
The Reference Scan function is on when the Sub Menu selection is highlighted. The function is off when the Sub Menu selection is not highlighted.
NOTE: The real-time image will only update at each trigger point. The image is paused between the trigger points.
Cardiology 64
ECG Option
R Delay
Description
R Delay assigns Trackball Control to the adjustment of the trigger delays for R1(S1) or R2 (S2). The graphic display of the delay is found in the upper left corner of the monitor.
Illustration 366 ECG Sub Menu (R Delay)
Accessing/Changing
Select R Delay from the ECG Sub Menu page one. Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display page one and highlight R Delay. Each press of the R Delay up or down arrow keys turns R Delay on or off.
Benefits
Allows for the easy adjustment of the R1 (S1) or R2 (S2) delays while scanning.
Values
When R Delay is highlighted, the Trackball controls the adjustment of the delays. If R Delay is not highlighted, the delays cannot be adjusted with the Trackball.
.
t
NOTE: R Delay is automatically activated when SINGLE or DUAL trigger modes are selected.
Cardiology 65
ECG Option
ECG Wave, PCG Wave, AUX Wave

Description
These three menu selections provide the ability to turn each waveform on for display on the monitor.
Illustration 367. ECG Sub Menu (ECG WAVE, PCG WAVE, AUX WAVE)
Accessing/Changing
Select the waveform selection (ECG WAVE, PCG WAVE or AUX WAVE) from the ECG Sub Menu page one. Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display page one and highlight the appropriate waveform. Press the up or down arrow keys to activate or deactivate a waveform display.
Benefits
Allows for the choice to display a waveform.
Values
On or Off.
Cardiology 66
ECG Option
ECG Gain, PCG Gain, AUX Gain

Description
Allows for the amplitude control of the ECG, PCG or Auxiliary waveform.
Illustration 368. ECG Sub Menu (ECG Gain, PCG Gain, AUX Gain)
Accessing/Changing
Select the gain selection (ECG Gain, PCG Gain or AUX Gain) from the ECG Sub Menu page two or three. Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display the appropriate page and highlight the appropriate selection. Press the appropriate up arrow key to increase gain. Press the appropriate down arrow key to decrease gain.
Benefits
Allows for amplitude adjustment to compensate for different levels of ECG, PCG or AUX output.
Values
.
t
The PCG & AUX gain can be adjusted from 10 to +10 in 2-digit increments. EGC gain can be adjusted from 20 to +10 in 2-digit increments.
NOTE: ECG, PCG and AUX default gain settings can be changed in the Set Up/Custom Display menu page 15.
Cardiology 67
ECG Option
ECG Positn, PCG Positn, AUX Positn (Position)

Description
Allows for the vertical positioning of the ECG, PCG or Auxiliary waveform on the image display.
Illustration 369. ECG Sub Menu (ECG Positn, PCG Positn, AUX Positn)
Accessing/Changing
Select the position selection from the ECG Sub Menu page two or three. Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to the appropriate page and highlight the appropriate selection. Press the appropriate up arrow key to move the waveform position up. Press the appropriate down arrow key to move the waveform position down.
Benefits
Allows for positioning of the ECG, PCG and AUX waveforms to minimize impact on the scan image. Adjustable to user requirements.
Values
Changes display position of the waveform.
NOTE: ECG, PCG and AUX default positions can be changed in the Set Up/Custom Display menu page 15.
Cardiology 68
ECG Option
ECG/Cine Gauge/Image Tracking

When an ECG waveform is displayed with the cine gauge, an arrow pointer will appear above the ECG waveform. As the cine gauge marker is moved with the Cine Scroll control, the arrow above the ECG waveform will move to indicate where on the ECG cycle the displayed image was taken.
Cardiology 69
ECG Option
Cardiology 70
Advanced Cardiac Calculations

(AMCAL option)
Overview
This option to the LOGIQ 400 provides expanded measurement, calculation and report capabilities to the Left-Ventricular calculations found in the basic cardiac option package. Added to the basic package is the Gibson method of LV calculations. A page of measurements is also added to the cardiac calculation menu. This page varies with scan mode. The scan mode measurement categories are: B-Mode Parasternal Long Axis (PLAX), Parasternal Short Axis (PSAX) Aortic Valve, PSAX Mitral Valve, PSAX Papillary Muscles, Apical 4 chamber, Apical 2 chamber Left/Right Ventricles, Mitral Valve, Aortic Valve, Pulmonic Valve, Tricuspid Valve Mitral Valve, Aortic Valve, Pulmonic Valve, Tricuspid Valve
M-Mode D-Mode
The number and type of measurements vary for each calculation. The formulas used are shown in the calculation specification tables in this chapter.
Cardiology 71
Measurement Sequences
Each of the titles found in the first layer of the cardiac menu consists of a sequence of measurements. The second layer Sub Menu consists of individual measurements/calculations that can be performed in sequence or individually. If the measurements are performed in sequence, the display automatically returns to the first layer menu when all are complete. If the second layer sub menu measurements are performed individually, only those items measured are recorded on the report page.
Sequence Philosophy
The primary philosophy of the cardiac calculation package is for the user to select an item from the first menu layer. The system then prompts the user to perform a series of measurements in sequence. This measurement sequence can be modified by the user if the factory sequence is not satisfactory. This operation should not be confused with the Auto Sequence top menu selection. Items programmed into an auto sequence can consist of first layer sequences as well as individual measurements. Together these form a sequence of measurements and calculations that may be performed automatically.
Hints
If a measurement in a sequence has already been made, it may be skipped. The system will invoke the next measurement in the sequence. Pressing the Ellipse up arrow key skips a measurement in the sequence. Pressing the Ellipse down arrow key moves back to measurements previously skipped. Press the Clear key to quit a sequence at any time. The final calculation result can not be obtained.
Cardiology 72
Re-measurement
Overview
Values obtained during Advanced Cardiac calculations or after a calculation sequence has been completed can be re-measured as long as those measurement results remain displayed on the screen. However, once the measured values are deleted from the display by the CLEAR function or by scrolling off the top of the measurement display area, re-measurement is not possible.
Operation Method
1. Complete the calculation or calculation sequence. 2. Measurements and resultant calculations will be displayed in the designation area. Only those measurements displayed are available for re-measurement. 3. Press the Measurement key and the top of the Ellipse rocker switch. The first measurement available to be re-measured will be highlighted and the name is duplicated at the bottom of the measurement display area. 4. Use the Ellipse rocker switch to select the desired value to re-measure. Calculations and generic measurements are not available to be re-measured and will be skipped in the selection process.
Cardiology 73

Operation Method (contd)
5. Perform the necessary measurement steps for the selected value using the Trackball and Set key. When the Set key is pressed to complete the re-measurement:
S
The resultant value of the selected item and all related calculations will be recalculated and displayed on the screen. The new result will be entered on the report page. The old measurement is deleted from the screen and report page as it is replaced by the new value.
S S
If additional re-measurements need to be performed, repeat the previous steps.
Hints
Each value of an M-Mode continuous sequence can be re-measured separately. If a measurement is selected from the soft-menu during the remeasure process, the re-measurement process is cancelled and the old value is restored. After a re-measurement is complete (fixed), the old graphic is erased and the same cursor symbols are used for the remeasured value. If two or more identical measurement items are displayed in the calculation result area, only the last one supports re-measurement. The re-measurement of Heart Rate is always manual, even though Auto Heart Rate is selected as a preset. There is no automatic compare function for Systole/Diastole. It is not possible to do re-measurements on VCR playback values in Image Memory. Re-measurement is not possible during a calculation sequence. Only after the sequence is compiled. Once cleared or erased, measurements cannot be recalled for re-measurement.
Cardiology 74
Automatic Determination of Systole and Diastole

The system can be programmed to automatically determine the cardiac phase as systole or diastole. The parameter in the Set Up/Preset Program Sub Menu page 3 used to make this selection is: Diastole/Systole Determination : Manual Auto
The auto determination of systole/diastole can be fine tuned using the following parameters also found in Set Up/Preset Program page 3: R Delay Time of End Systole Prior Edge : 02000msec End Systole Period from Prior Edge : 02000msec
Automatic
If Auto is selected, the determination is made by comparing the displayed B-Mode or M/D Mode image frames with the R-point on the ECG wave. Therefore, s for systole and d for diastole is added automatically to the measurement or calculation name. If phase cannot automatically be determined, the system displays the following message: Diastole (d) or Systole (s) ? Entering d or s are the only two acceptable inputs. s Erases the message, recognizes the phase as systole and adds a s to the end of the measurements or calculations. Erases the message, recognizes the phase as diastole and adds a d to the end of the measurements or calculations.
The user will not be able to perform measurements of the opposite phase until the next image change is made.
Cardiology 75

Automatic (contd)
When the measurement phase requested by the system is different than the phase of the cursor position, the following message is displayed: Display ######### image ######### represents the phase opposite of the one just completed. Auto determination of systole/diastole is only available on a frozen image. It cannot be done on a recalled image or one from an external video input.
Manual
If Manual is selected, each measurement has a s or d at the end of its name. The system will not determine the phase or ask the operator to make that determination.
Auto Trace Measurements

Doppler measurement menus (D-AV, D-MV, D-PV and D-TV) each have a selection called Auto Trace. When the user selects Auto Trace, the start point and end point of a measurement is set. After the end point is set, the system traces the waveform and automatically calculates the values as follows: Ao Auto Trace: Calculates: MV Auto Trace: Calculates: PV Auto Trace: Calculates: TV Auto Trace: Calculates: (Set start and end points for FVI-AV) MaxPG, MeanPG, Ejection Time, AccT and DecT (Set start and end points for FVI) MaxPG, MeanPG, Pressure Half Time, MV Area, AccT and DecT (Set start and end points for FVI-AV) MaxPG, MeanPG, AccT and DecT (Set start and end points for FVI) MaxPG, MeanPG, Pressure Half Time, AccT and DecT
Cardiology 76
Continous M-Mode Measurements

When M-Mode measurements can be taken on the same timeline, the system will support a continuous measurement of all values along that line. This can be done because the end point of one measurement is the start point of the next measurement. After the end point of the last measurement is set, keystrokes are reduced by not having to set the next start point.
RVDd IVSd LVIDd
RV IVS LV
LVPWd
LVPW
Illustration 370. Continuous M-Mode Measurements
This type of M-Mode measurements is supported by M-LV/RV, Teichholz, Cubed and Gibson menu selections. After selecting the measurement sequence, use the Trackball to position the first cursor and press Set. The name of the first value appears; use the Trackball to position the cursor at the end of the first measurement and press Set. This is the start point of the next measurement. The name of the next measurement appears; use the Trackball to position the end point of the second measurement and press Set. This process continues until all measurements are taken.
Cardiology 77
Continous M-Mode Measurements (contd) Hints

The Ellipse arrow keys are used to skip measurements or move back to measurements that were skipped. Before the end point is set, uncompleted measurements can be removed by pressing Clear once. That measurement can then be started again. Measurements can be taken in Zoom mode as long as the magnification is not changed during the measurement process. Measurements can be programmed not to appear in the continuous measurement sequence in the Set Up/Preset Program menu pages 4 and 5. If the measurement is set to OFF in the Preset Program menus, it will not appear in the continuous sequence. Additional Set points will have to be made if measurements are skipped in the continuous sequence.
Cardiology 78
Advanced Cardiac Calculations Measurement Menus

The illustrations that follow show the Advanced Cardiac Calculation measurement Sub Menus that are available with the AMCAL option. Each selection in the first layer of Sub Menus will yield a second layer of Sub Menus. This second layer contains measurements and calculations necessary to complete the category or goal selected in the first layer. The illustrations shown are those that result if the determination of systole/diastole is set to Automatic and then Manual.
AMCAL Sub Menus (First Layer)
Illustration 371. First Layer Sub Menus
Cardiology 79

AMCAL Sub Menus (Second Layer)Automatic Determination of Systole/Diastole
Illustration 372. Cubed, Teichholz and Gibson Sub Menus
Cardiology 80

AMCAL Sub Menus (Second Layer)Automatic Determination of Systole/Diastole (contd)
Illustration 373. Bullet Sub Menus
Cardiology 81

Illustration 374. Modified Simpsons Rule Sub Menus
Cardiology 82

Illustration 375. Single Plane Ellipsoid Sub Menus
Cardiology 83

Illustration 376. Biplane Ellipsoid Sub Menus
Illustration 377. PLAX Sub Menus
Cardiology 84

Illustration 378. PSAX-AV Sub Menus
Illustration 379. PSAX-MV Sub Menus
Illustration 380. PSAX-PAP Sub Menus
Cardiology 85

Illustration 381. AP-4CH Sub Menus
Illustration 382. AP-2CH Sub Menus
Cardiology 86

Illustration 383. D-MV Sub Menus
Cardiology 87

Illustration 384. D-AV Sub Menus
Cardiology 88

Illustration 385. D-PV Sub Menus
Cardiology 89

Illustration 386. D-TV Sub Menus
Cardiology 90

Illustration 387. M-LV/RV Sub Menus
Illustration 388. M-MV Sub Menus
Cardiology 91

Illustration 389. M-AV Sub Menus
Illustration 390. M-PV Sub Menus
Cardiology 92

Illustration 391. M-TV Sub Menus
Cardiology 93

AMCAL Sub Menus (Second Layer)Manual Determination of Systole/Diastole
Illustration 392. Cubed, Teichholz and Gibson Sub Menus
Cardiology 94

AMCAL Sub Menus (Second Layer)Manual Determination of Systole/Diastole (contd)
Illustration 393. Bullet Sub Menus
Cardiology 95

Illustration 394. Modified Simpsons Rule Sub Menus
Cardiology 96

Illustration 395. Single Plane Ellipsoid Sub Menus
Cardiology 97

Illustration 396. Biplane Ellipsoid Sub Menus
Illustration 397. PLAX Sub Menus Manual Determination
Cardiology 98

Illustration 398. PSAX-AV Sub Menus Manual Determination
Illustration 399. PSAX-MV Sub Menus Manual Determination
Cardiology 99

Illustration 400. PSAX-PAP Sub Menus Manual Determination
Cardiology 100

Illustration 401. AP-4CH Sub Menus Manual Determination
Cardiology 101

Illustration 402. AP-2CH Sub Menus Manual Determination
Illustration 403. M-LV/RV Sub Menus Manual Determination
Cardiology 102
Cardiac Measurements
Measurements taken in the Advanced Cardiac Calculation option are the same type of measurements taken in the basic package. The user should review and become familiar with how to make measurements as shown in the Basic Measurements/ Calculations and Cardiology chapters in Volume 2 of this manual set. The system will prompt the user for any measurements necessary to complete a selected sequence.
For Black/White systems, Doppler mearsurements and calculations are not available.
Cardiology 103
Customizing Measurement Sequences

The sequence in which the second layer of measurements/calculations is presented may be customized by the user. This is done by using the Set Up/Preset Program Sub-Menu page 6. The selection is called: Cardiac Calculation : Submenu Selecting this preset displays the calculation sequence Set Up menu.
Illustration 404. Calculation Sequence Set Up Menu
Cardiology 104

Pop up Menus
The main menu (B-Mode, M-Mode, etc.) and the sub menu (Aortic Valve, Mitral Valve, etc.) are pop-up menus that provide the ability to quickly display the measurements and their sequence. To display a pop up menu, use the Trackball to move the highlight cursor to the main or sub menu area. Press Set. The pop up menu is displayed. While the pop up menu is displayed, use the up/down Trackball motion or the Up/Down arrow keys to select the desired menu item. Use the Set key to activate the menu choice. Page Numbers The page number area not only shows the Present Page/Total Pages, but this area is used to navigate through the display of available pages. Use the Trackball to move the arrow cursor to highlight the navigation arrows on either side of the page numbers. Press Set to display the previous or next page.
Cardiology 105

New Measurement Sequence
ORDER Command After selecting the desired Main Menu and Sub Menu, the calculations are displayed in the top half of the menu. Use the Trackball to highlight the desired calculation and press Set. Measurement and calculation items are displayed on the bottom half of the menu. The order in which they are executed is shown to their left. To change the order or omit undesired items from the sequence, use the ORDER command. Trackball the highlight cursor to ORDER and press Set. All measurements and calculations on the bottom half of the menu no longer have a number to their left. Use the Trackball to move the highlight cursor to the first measurement to be made in the customized sequence. Press Set. The number one is placed to the left of that item. Use the Trackball to move the highlighted cursor to the second item in the new sequence and press Set. Continue the process until all desired items are designated.
.
Hints
RESET Command
NOTE: Items not designated will be deleted from the sequence.

Use the SAVE command to store the new custom sequence.
S S
The customized sequence is saved until the ORDER command is used to generate a new sequence. Items not designated will not automatically appear as a measurement prompt.
The RESET command resets the measurement sequence to the factory defaults. Prior to resetting, the following message is displayed: Reset? Press ESC to cancel. SET to confirm Set resets the order to factory defaults. Esc causes nothing to happen.
Cardiology 106

SAVE Command The SAVE command will save the changes as the new measurement sequence. Prior to saving, the following message is displayed: Overwrite? Press ESC to cancel. SET to confirm. Set saves the order changes. Esc causes nothing to happen. If the rearrangement process was not completed, the message displayed is: Complete the rearrangement first. EXIT Command If the exit command is selected before choosing, completing or saving the order, the following message is displayed: Quit? Press ESC to cancel. SET to confirm. Set exits from this screen. Esc causes nothing to happen. If a new sequence programming was completed but not saved, the message displayed is: Overwrite? Press ESC to cancel. SET to confirm. Set saves the order changes and exits. Esc causes nothing to happen.
Cardiology 107
Auto Sequence Programming Hints

Advanced Cardiac Specification Tables

The following tables show each first layer menu selection with the measurements and calculations found in its second layer menu. The tables show the mnemonic, a description of that mnemonic (calc name), input measurements required and formula used.
Cardiology 108
LV Calculation Formulas (Cubed Method)
B-Mode
M-Mode
Illustration 405. Cubed Method Measurements
Calc Mnemonic LVIDd
Calc Name Left Ventricular Internal Diameter, Diastole Left Ventricular Internal Diameter, Systole Interventricular Septal Thickness, Diastole Interventricular Septal Thickness, Systole Left Ventricle Posterior Wall Thickness, Diastole Left Ventricle Posterior Wall Thickness, Systole Heart Rate (beats/ minute) Ejection Time
Input Measurements one distance
Formula LVIDd=d1[cm or mm]
LVIDs
one distance
LVIDs=d1[cm or mm]
IVSd
one distance
IVSd=d1[cm or mm]
IVSs
one distance
IVSs=d1[cm or mm]
LVPWd
one distance
LVPWd=d1[cm or mm] LVPWs=d1[cm or mm] HR[BPM]=120 [sec]/ 2 beat time [sec] ET=t1[ms or sec]
LVPWs
one distance
HR ET
one 2 beat time interval one time interval
Table 41. Cubed Method Measurement Formulas
Cardiology 109
LV Calculation Formulas (Cubed Method) (contd)

Calc Mnemonic EdV EsV FS SV EF CO Calc Name End Diastole Volume End Systole Volume Fractional Shortening Stroke Volume Ejection Fraction Cardiac Output Input Measurements one distance one distance two distances two distances two distances two distances and one 2 beat time interval body surface area and SV body surface area and CO two distances & one time interval three distances Formula EdV[ml]=LVIDd^3 EsV[ml]=LVIDs^3 FS=(1LVIDs/ LVIDd)x100 SV[ml]=EdVEsV EF=SV/EdVx100 CO[1/min]= SVxHR/1000 SI[ml/m^2]= SV/BSA CI[ml/min/m^2]= CO/BSA MVCF[circ/s]= (LVIDd-LVIDs)/ (LVIDd x ET) LVM[g]=1.04*[(IVSd+ LVPWd+LVIDd)^3 LVIDd^3]13.6
SI CI MVCF
Stroke Volume Index Cardiac Index Mean Vcf
LVM
Left Ventricle Cardiac Mass
Table 42. Cubed Method Calculation Formulas
Cardiology 110
LV Calculation Formulas (Teichholz Method)
B-Mode
M-Mode
Illustration 406. Teichholz Method Measurements
Calc Mnemonic LVIDd
LVIDs
one distance
LVIDs=d1[cm or mm]
IVSd
one distance
IVSd=d1[cm or mm]
IVSs
one distance
IVSs=d1[cm or mm]
LVPWd
one distance
LVPWd=d1[cm or mm] LVPWs=d1[cm or mm] HR[BPM]=120[sec]/ 2 beat time[sec] ET=t1[ms or sec]
LVPWs
one distance
HR ET
Table 43. Teichholz Method Measurement Formulas
Cardiology 111
LV Calculation Formulas (Teichholz Method) (contd)

Calc Mnemonic EdV EsV FS SV EF CO Calc Name End Diastole Volume End Systole Volume Fractional Shortening Stroke Volume Ejection Fraction Cardiac Output Input Measurements one distance one distance two distances two distances two distances two distances and one 2 beat time interval body surface area and SV body surface area and CO two distances & one time interval three distances Formula EdV[ml]=LVIDd^3x7/ (2.4+LVIDd) EsV[ml]=LVIDs^3x7/ (2.4+LVIDs) FS=(1LVIDs/ LVIDd)x100 SV[ml]=EdVEsV EF=SV/EdVx100 CO[1/min]= SVxHR/1000 SI[ml/m^2]=SV/BSA CI[ml/min/m^2]= CO/BSA MVCF[circ/s]= (LVIDd-LVIDs)/ (LVIDd x ET) LVM[g]=1.04*[(IVSd+ LVPWd+LVIDd)^3 LVIDd^3]13.6
SI CI MVCF
LVM
Table 44. Teichholz Method Calculation Formulas
Cardiology 112
LV Calculation Formulas (Bullet Method)
LVAMd LVLd LVLs
LVAMs
Illustration 407. Bullet Method Measurements
Calc Mnemonic LVLd LVLs LVAMd LVAMs HR
Calc Name Left Ventricular Length, Diastole Left Ventricular Length, Systole
Input Measurements one distance one distance
Formula LVLd=d1[cm or mm] LVLs=d1[cm or mm] LVAMd=a1[cm^2] LVAMs=a1[cm^2] HR[BPM]=120 [sec]/ 2 beat time [sec]
Left Ventricular Area, one area (by ellipse, Mitral Valve, Diastole trace or circle) Left Ventricular Area, one area (by ellipse, Mitral Valve, Systole trace or circle) Heart Rate (beats/ minute) one 2 beat time interval
Table 45. Bullet Method Measurement Formulas
Cardiology 113
LV Calculation Formulas (Bullet Method) (contd)

Calc Mnemonic EdV Calc Name End Diastole Volume End Systole Volume Stroke Volume Input Measurements one distance and one area (by ellipse, trace or circle) one distance and one area (by ellipse, trace or circle) Formula EdV[ml]=5xLVLd xLVAMd/6 EsV[ml]=5xLVLs xLVAMs/6
EsV
SV
two distances and SV[ml]=EdVEsV two areas (by ellipse, trace or circle) two distances and EF=SV/EdVx100 two areas (by ellipse, trace or circle) two distances and CO[1/min]= two areas (by ellipse, SVxHR/1000 trace or circle) and one 2 beat time interval body surface area and SV body surface area and CO SI[ml/m^2]=SV/BSA CI[ml/min/m^2]= CO/BSA
EF
Ejection Fraction
CO
Cardiac Output
SI CI
Stroke Volume Index Cardiac Index
Table 46. Bullet Method Calculation Formulas
Cardiology 114
LV Calculation Formulas (Modified Simpsons Rule Method)
LVAMd LVLd LVLs
LVAMs
LVAPd
LVAPs
Illustration 408. Modified Simpsons Rule Method Measurements
Calc Mnemonic LVLd LVLs LVAMd LVAMs LVAPd
Formula LVLd=d1[cm or mm] LVLs=d1[cm or mm] LVAMd=a1[cm^2] LVAMs=a1[cm^2] LVAPd=a1[cm^2]
Left Ventricular Area, one area (by ellipse, Mitral Valve, Diastole trace or circle) Left Ventricular Area, one area (by ellipse, Mitral Valve, Systole trace or circle) Left Ventricular Area, one area (by ellipse, Papillary Muscles, trace or circle) Diastole Left Ventricular Area, one area (by ellipse, Papillary Muscles, trace or circle) Systole Heart Rate (beats/ minute) one 2 beat time interval
LVAPs
LVAPs=a1[cm^2]
HR
HR[BPM]=120[sec]/ 2 beat time[sec]
Table 47. Modified Simpsons Rule Method Measurement Formulas
Cardiology 115
LV Calculation Formulas (Modified Simpsons Rule Method) (contd)

Calc Mnemonic EdV Calc Name End Diastole Volume End Systole Volume Input Measurements Formula
one distance and EdV[ml]=LVLd/3 x two areas (by ellipse, [LVAMd+ (LVAMd+ trace or circle) LVAPd)/2+ LVAPd/3] one distance and EsV[ml]=LVLs/3 two areas (by ellipse, x(LVAMs+ trace or circle) (LVAMs+LVAPs)/2+ LVAPs/3) two distances and SV[ml]=EdVEsV two areas (by ellipse, trace or circle) two distances and EF=SV/EdVx100 two areas (by ellipse, trace or circle) two distances and CO[1/min]= two areas (by ellipse, SVxHR/1000 trace or circle) and one 2 beat time interval body surface area and SV body surface area and CO SI[ml/m^2]=SV/BSA CI[ml/min/m^2]= CO/BSA
EsV
SV
Stroke Volume
EF
Ejection Fraction
CO
Cardiac Output
SI CI
Table 48. Modified Simpsons Rule Method Calculation Formulas
Cardiology 116
LV Calculation Formulas (Single Plane Ellipsoid Method)

LVLd LVLs LVAd LVAs
Illustration 409. Single Ellipsoid Method Measurements
Calc Mnemonic LVLd LVLs LVAd LVAs HR
Formula LVLd=d1[cm or mm] LVLs=d1[cm or mm] LVAd=a1[cm^2] LVAs=a1[cm^2] HR[BPM]=120 [sec]/ 2 beat time [sec]
Left Ventricular Area, one area (by ellipse, Diastole trace or circle) Left Ventricular Area, one area (by ellipse, Systole trace or circle) Heart Rate (beats/ minute) one 2 beat time interval
Table 49. Single Plane Ellipsoid Method Measurement Formulas
Cardiology 117
LV Calculation Formulas (Single Plane Ellipsoid Method) (contd)

Calc Mnemonic EdV Calc Name Input Measurements Formula
End Diastole Volume one distance and EdV[ml]=8/(3 p) two areas (by ellipse, x(LVAd)^2/LVLd trace or circle) End Systole Volume one distance and EsV[ml]=8/(3 p) two areas (by ellipse, x(LVAs)^2/LVLs trace or circle) two distances and SV[ml]=EdVEsV two areas (by ellipse, trace or circle) two distances and EF[%]=SV/EdVx100 two areas (by ellipse, trace or circle) two distances and CO[1/min]= two areas (by ellipse, SVxHR/1000 trace or circle) and one 2 beat time interval body surface area and SV body surface area and CO SI[ml/m^2]=SV/BSA CI[ml/min/m^2]= CO/BSA
EsV
SV
Stroke Volume
EF
Ejection Fraction
CO
Cardiac Output
SI CI
Table 50. Single Plane Ellipsoid Method Calculation Formulas
Cardiology 118
LV Calculation Formulas (Bi Plane Ellipsoid Method)

LVMLd LVMLs LVAd LVAs LVAMd LVAMs
Illustration 410. Bi Plane Ellipsoid Method Measurements
Calc Mnemonic LVMLd
Calc Name
Input Measurements
Formula LVMLd=d1[cm or mm] LVMLs=d1[cm or mm] LVAMd=a1[cm^2] LVAMs=a1[cm^2] LVAd=a1[cm^2] LVAs=a1[cm^2] HR[BPM]=120 [sec]/ 2 beat time [sec]
Left Ventricle Medial- one distance Lateral Dimension, Diastole Left Ventricle Medial- one distance Lateral Dimension, Systole Left Ventricular Area, one area (by ellipse, Mitral Valve, Diastole trace or circle) Left Ventricular Area, one area (by ellipse, Mitral Valve, Systole trace or circle) Left Ventricle Area, Diastole Left Ventricle Area, Systole Heart Rate (beats/ minute) one area (by ellipse, trace or circle) one area (by ellipse, trace or circle) one 2 beat time interval
LVMLs
LVAMd LVAMs LVAd LVAs HR
Table 51. Bi Plane Ellipsoid Method Measurement Formulas
Cardiology 119
LV Calculation Formulas (Bi Plane Ellipsoid Method) (contd)

Calc Mnemonic EdV Calc Name Input Measurements Formula
End Diastole Volume one distance and EdV[ml]=8/(3 ) two areas (by ellipse, x(LVAdxLVAMd)/ trace or circle) LVMLd End Systole Volume one distance and EsV[ml]=8/(3 ) two areas (by ellipse, x(LVAsxLVAMs)/ trace or circle) LVMLs two distances and SV[ml]=EdVEsV two areas (by ellipse, trace or circle) two distances and EF=SV/EdVx100 two areas (by ellipse, trace or circle) two distances and CO[1/min]= two areas (by ellipse, SVxHR/1000 trace or circle) and one 2 beat time interval body surface area and SV body surface area and CO SI[ml/m^2]=SV/BSA CI[ml/min/m^2]= CO/BSA
EsV
SV
Stroke Volume
EF
Ejection Fraction
CO
Cardiac Output
SI CI
Table 52. Bi Plane Ellipsoid Method Calculation Formulas
Cardiology 120
LV Calculation Formulas (Gibson Method)
B-Mode
M-Mode
Illustration 411. Gibson Method Measurements
Calc Mnemonic LVIDd
LVIDs
one distance
LVIDs=d1[cm or mm]
IVSd
one distance
IVSd=d1[cm or mm]
IVSs
one distance
IVSs=d1[cm or mm]
LVPWd
one distance
LVPWd=d1[cm or mm] LVPWs=d1[cm or mm] HR[BPM]=120 [sec]/ 2 beat time [sec] ET=t1[ms or sec]
LVPWs
one distance
HR ET
Table 53. Gibson Method Measurement Formulas
Cardiology 121
LV Calculation Formulas (Gibson Method) (contd)

Calc Mnemonic EdV Calc Name Input Measurements Formula EdV[ml]=/6 x (LVIDd)^2 x (0.98 x LVIDd + 0.59) EsV[ml]=/6 x (LVIDs)^2 x (1.14 x LVIDs + 4.18) FS=(1LVIDs/ LVIDd)x100 SV[ml]=EdVEsV EF=SV/EdVx100 CO[1/min]= SVxHR/1000 SI[ml/m^2]=SV/BSA CI[ml/min/m^2]= CO/BSA MVCF[circ/s]= (LVIDd-LVIDs)/ (LVIDd x ET) LVM[g]=1.04*[(IVSd+ LVPWd+LVIDd)^3 LVIDd^3]13.6
End Diastole Volume three distances
EsV
End Systole Volume
three distances
FS SV EF CO
Fractional Shortening Stroke Volume Ejection Fraction Cardiac Output
two distances two distances two distances two distances and one 2 beat time interval body surface area and SV body surface area and CO two distances & one time interval three distances
SI CI MVCF
LVM
Table 54. Gibson Method Calculation Formulas
Cardiology 122
B-Mode Analysis Parasternal Long Axis
IVSd LVIDd AOd LVIDs ALSs AOs LADs LVPWd DIASTOLE SYSTOLE
Illustration 412. PLAX Measurements Input Measurements one distance
Calc Mnemonic AOd IVSd LVPWd
Calc Name Aortic Root Dimension, Diastole
Formula AOd=d1[cm or mm] IVSd=d1[cm or mm] LVPWd=d1[cm or mm] LVIDd=d1[cm or mm]
Interventricular Septal one distance Dimension at Diastole Left Ventricular Posterior Wall Thickness, Diastole Left Ventricular Interior Dimension at Diastole one distance
LVIDd
one distance
AOs LVIDs ALSs LADs LVOTs AAs LVOTA HR
Aortic Root one distance Dimension at Systole Left Ventricular Interior one distance Dimension at Systole Aortic Valve Leaflet Seperation, Systole one distance
AOs=d1[cm or mm] LVIDs=d1[cm or mm] ALSs=d1[cm or mm] LADs=d1[cm or mm] LVOTs=d1 [cm or mm] AAs[cm2]= (p/4)x(AOs)2 LVOTA [cm2]= (p/4)x(LVOTs)2 HR[BPM]=120 [sec]/ 2 beat time [sec]
Left Atrial one distance Dimension at Systole LV Outflow Tract Diameter at Systole Aortic Area at Systole LV Outflow Tract Area at Systole Heart Rate (beats/ minute) one distance one distance (AOs) one distance one 2 beat time interval
Table 55. Parasternal Long Axis (PLAX)
Cardiology 123
B-Mode Analysis Parasternal Short Axis (PSAX-AV)
RVOTd PADd AOd DIASTOLE LADMLs SYSTOLE
PADs AOs
Illustration 413. PSAXAV Measurements
Calc Mnemonic AOd PADd RVOTd
Calc Name Aortic Root Dimension, Diastole
Formula AOd=d1[cm or mm] PADd=d1[cm or mm] RVOTd=d1[cm or mm] AOs=d1[cm or mm] PADs=d1[cm or mm] LADML=d1[cm or mm] RVOTs=d1 [cm or mm] RVOTA [cm2]= (/4)x(RVOTs)2 PAAs[cm2]= (/4)x(PADs)2 AAs[cm2]= (/4)x(AOs)2 HR[BPM]=120 [sec]/ 2 beat time [sec]
Pulmonary Artery Di- one distance ameter, Diastole Right Ventricular Outflow Tract Diameter, Diastole one distance
AOs PADs LADML
Aortic Root one distance Dimension at Systole Pulmonary Artery Di- one distance ameter at Systole Left Atrium MedialLateral Diameter at Systole Right Ventricle Outflow Tract Diameter at Systole Right Ventricle Outflow Tract Area at Systole Pulmonary Artery Area at Systole Aortic Area at Systole Heart Rate (beats/ minute) one distance
RVOTs
one distance
RVOTA
one distance
PAAs AAs HR
one distance (PADs) one distance (AOs) one 2 beat time interval
Table 56. Parasternal Short Axis - Aortic Valve (PSAX-AV)
Cardiology 124
B-Mode Analysis Parasternal Short Axis (PSAX-MV)
Calc Mnemonic LVAMd
LVAMs
MVOA
HR
Table 57. Parasternal Short Axis - Mitral Valve (PSAX-MV)

MVOA DIASTOLE
LVAMd
LVAMs SYSTOLE
Illustration 414.PSAXMV Measurements
Calc Name
Input Measurements
Formula LVAMd=a1[cm^2]
Left Ventricular Area, one area (by ellipse, Mitral Valve, trace or circle) Diastole Left Ventricular Area, one area (by ellipse, Mitral Valve, trace or circle) Systole Mitral Valve Maximum Orifice Area at Diastole Heart Rate (beats/ minute) one area (by ellipse, trace or circle) one 2 beat time interval
LVAMs=a1[cm^2]
MVOA=a1[cm^2]
HR[BPM]=120 [sec]/ 2 beat time [sec]
Cardiology 125
B-Mode Analysis Parasternal Short Axis (PSAX-PAP)
LVAPd
LVAPs
DIASTOLE
SYSTOLE
Illustration 415. PSAXPAP Measurements
Calc Mnemonic LVAPd
Calc Name
Input Measurements
Formula LVAPd=a1[cm^2]
Left Ventricular Area, one area (by ellipse, Papillary Muscles at trace or circle) Diastole Left Ventricular Area, one area (by ellipse, Papillary Muscles at trace or circle) Systole Heart Rate (beats/ minute) one 2 beat time interval
LVAPs
LVAPs=a1[cm^2]
HR
Table 58. Parasternal Short Axis - Papillary Muscles (PSAX-PAP)
Cardiology 126
B-Mode Analysis Apical 4 Chamber (AP-4CH)

RVLd RVAd LVLd LVAd LVMLd
RVMLd
Illustration 416. AP4CH Measurements (Diastole)
Calc Mnemonic LVAd LVLd
Calc Name Left Ventricle Area, Diastole Left Ventricular Length Dimension, Diastole Left Ventricular Medial-Lateral Dimension, Diastole Right Ventricle Area, Diastole Right Ventricular Length Dimension, Diastole Right Ventricular Medial-Lateral Dimension, Diastole
Input Measurements one area (by ellipse, trace or circle) one distance
Formula LVAd=a1[cm^2] LVLd=d1[cm or mm]
LVMLd
one distance
LVMLd=d1[cm or mm] RVAd=a1[cm^2] RVLd=d1[cm or mm]
RVAd RVLd
one area (by ellipse, trace or circle) one distance
RVMLd
one distance
RVMLd=d1[cm or mm]
Table 59. Apical 4 Chamber (AP-4CH) Diastole
Cardiology 127
B-Mode Analysis Apical 4 Chamber (AP-4CH) (contd)

RVLs RVAs LVLs LVAs
RVMLs TAML
LVMLs
Illustration 417. AP4CH Measurements (Ventricular Systole)
Calc Mnemonic LVAs LVLs
Calc Name Left Ventricle Area, Systole Left Ventricular Length Dimension, Systole Left Ventricular Medial-Lateral Dimension, Systole Right Ventricle Area, Systole Right Ventricular Length Dimension at Systole Right Ventricular Medial-Lateral Dimension, Systole Tricuspid Annulus Medial-Lateral Dimension, Systole
Formula LVAs=a1[cm^2] LVLs=d1[cm or mm]
LVMLs
one distance
LVMLs=d1[cm or mm] RVAs=a1[cm^2] RVLs=d1[cm or mm]
RVAs RVLs
RVMLs
one distance
RVMLs=d1[cm or mm] TAML=d1[cm or mm]
TAML
one distance
Table 60. Apical 4 Chamber (AP-4CH) Ventricular Systole
Cardiology 128
B-Mode Analysis Apical 4 Chamber (AP-4CH) (contd)
RADMLs RAAs RADSIs
LADMLs LAAs LADSIs
Illustration 418. AP4CH Measurements (Atrial Systole)
Calc Mnemonic LAA LADML
Calc Name Left Atrial Area, Systole Left Atrial MedialLateral Dimension, Systole Left Atrial Superior Inferior Dimension, Systole Right Atrial Area, Systole Right Atrial MedialLateral Dimension, Systole Right Atrial SuperiorInferior Dimension, Systole Heart Rate (beats/ minute)
Formula LAA=a1[cm^2] LADML=d1[cm or mm] LADSI=d1[cm or mm] RAAs=a1[cm^2] RADML=d1[cm or mm] RADSI=d1[cm or mm] HR[BPM]=120 [sec]/ 2 beat time [sec]
LADSI
one distance
RAA RADML
RADSI
one distance
HR
one 2 beat time interval
Table 61. Apical 4 Chamber (AP-4CH) Atrial Systole
Cardiology 129
B-Mode Analysis Apical 2 Chamber (AP-2CH)

LVLd LVAd LVMLd LVLs LVAs LVMLs
DIASTOLE
SYSTOLE
Illustration 419. AP2CH Measurements
Calc Mnemonic LVAd LVLd
Calc Name Left Ventricle Area, Diastole Left Ventricular Length Dimension, Diastole Left Ventricular Medial-Lateral Dimension, Diastole Left Ventricle Area, Systole Left Ventricular Length Dimension at Systole Left Ventricular Medial-Lateral Dimension, Systole Heart Rate (beats/ minute)
Formula LVAd=a1[cm^2] LVLd=d1[cm or mm]
LVMLd
one distance
LVMLd=d1[cm or mm] LVAs=a1[cm^2] LVLs=d1[cm or mm]
LVAs LVLs
LVMLs
one distance
LVMLs=d1[cm or mm] HR[BPM]=120 [sec]/2 beat time [sec]
HR
Table 62. Apical 2 Chamber (AP-2CH)
Cardiology 130
M-Mode Analysis Left/Right Ventricle (M-LV/RV)

RVAW RV IVSs LVIDs LVPWs IVS LV LVPW PCG ECG
RVDd IVSd LVIDd LVPWd
Illustration 420. M-LV/RV Measurements
Calc Mnemonic RVDd IVSd
Calc Name Right Ventricular Dimension, Diastole Interventricular Septal Thickness, Diastole Left Ventricular Interior Dimension, Diastole
Formula RVDd=d1[cm or mm] IVSd=d1[cm or mm]
LVIDd
one distance
LVIDd=d1[cm or mm]
LVPWd
Left Ventricular Pos- one distance terior Wall Thickness at Diastole Interventricular Septal Thickness, Systole Left Ventricular Posterior Wall Thickness at Systole Left Ventricular Interior Dimension at Systole Heart Rate (beats/ minute) one distance
LVPWd=d1[cm or mm] IVSs=d1[cm or mm]
IVSs
LVPWs
one distance
LVPWs=d1[cm or mm] LVIDs=d1[cm or mm]
LVIDs
one distance
HR
Table 63. Left/Right Ventricle (M-LV/RV)
Cardiology 131
M-Mode Analysis Left/Right Ventricle (M-LV/RV) (contd)

Calc Mnemonic IVS/PW Calc Name Interventricular Septum/Left Ventricle Posterior Ratio at Diastole Left Ventricle Internal Dimension Fractional Shortening Interventricular Shortening Left Ventricle Posterior Wall Shortening Left Ventricle Cardiac Mass Input Measurements two distances (IVSd & LVPWd) Formula IVS/PW[%]= IVSd/LVPWd x 100
FS
two distances (LVIDd & LVIDs)
FS[%]= [(LVIDd-LVIDs)/ LVIDd] x 100 %STIVS[%]= [(IVSs-IVSd)/IVSd] x 100 %STPW[%]= [(LVPWs-LVPWd)/ LVPWd] x 100 LVM[g]=1.04x[(IVSd +LVPWd+LVIDd)^3LVIDd^3]13.6
%STIVS
two distances (IVSd & IVSs) two distances (LVPWd & LVPWs) three distances (LVPWd, LVIDd & IVSd)
%STPW
LVM
Table 63. Left/Right Ventricle (M-LV/RV) (contd)
Cardiology 132
M-Mode Analysis Mitral Valve (M-MV)

RVAW RV
G E A D F C E
IVS LVOT AML LV LVPW PCG ECG
P R
Illustration 421. M-MV Measurements Input Measurements one distance one slope
Calc Mnemonic EPSS V_EF V_DE D_DE D_CE T_AC P-R HR A/E PR-AC
Calc Name E point Septal Separation Mitral Valve E-F Velocity Mitral Valve D-E Velocity Mitral Valve D-E Separation Mitral Valve C-E Separation Mitral Valve A-C Interval P-R Interval Heart Rate (beats/ minute) Mitral Valve A/E Ratio Mitral Valve PR-AC Interval
Formula EPSS=d1[cm or mm] V_EF=s1[cm/s] V_DE=s1[cm/s] V_DE=d1[cm or mm] D_CE=d1[cm or mm] T_AC=t1[msec or sec] P-R=t1[msec or sec] HR[BPM]=120 [sec]/ 2 beat time [sec] A/E[%]= (D_AC/ D_DE) x 100 PR-AC[msec or sec]=P-R - T_AC
one slope
one distance one distance one time interval one time interval one 2 beat time interval two distances (A-C & D-E)
two time intervals
.
t
Table 64. Mitral Valve (M-MV)
V_DE measurement calculates D_DE simultaneously. D_DE measurement calculates V_DE simultaneously. T_AC measurement calculates D_AC simultaneously. V_EF, V_DE, D_DE, D_CE and T_AC measurement results should be performed through the slope measurement.
Cardiology 133
M-Mode Analysis Aortic Valve (M-AV)

H G E F B K C D
Illustration 422. M-AV Measurements
Calc Mnemonic AOd
Calc Name Aortic Root Dimension, Diastole Aortic Valve Leaflet Seperation, Systole Left Atrium Dimension, Systole Right Ventricular Outflow Tract Diameter at Systole Left Ventricle PreEjection Period Left Ventricle Ejection Time Heart Rate (beats/ minute) LADs/AOd Ratio
Input Measurements one distance A-B one distance E-F one distance C-D one distance G-H
Formula AOd=d1[cm or mm]
ALSs
ALSs=d1[cm or mm]
LADs RVOTs
LADs=d1[cm or mm] RVOTs=d1[cm or mm]
LVPEP LVET HR LA/AO PEP/ET
one time interval Q-I one time interval I-K
LVPEP=t1[msec or sec] LVET=t1[msec or sec] HR[BPM]=120 [sec]/ 2 beat time [sec] LA/AO[%]=LADs/ AOd x 100 PEP/ET[%]= (LVPEP/LVET) x 100

two distances (LADs & AOd)
Left Ventricle Systole two distances Time Interval Ratio (LVPEP & LVET) Table 65. Aortic Valve (M-AV)
Cardiology 134
M-Mode Analysis Pulmonic Valve (M-PV)

G A B E D
PVAW PV PVPW
PCG
Q
ECG
Illustration 423. MPV Measurements
Calc Mnemonic PADs RVPEP RVET aWAVE HR PAAs PEP/ET
Calc Name Pulmonic Artery Diameter at Systole Right Ventricle Pre-Ejection Period Right Ventricle Ejection Time Pulmonic Valve a-Wave Amplitude Heart Rate (beats/ minute) Pulmonary Artery Area at Systole
Input Measurements one distance one time interval one time interval one distance one 2 beat time interval one distance (PADs)
Formula PADs=d1[cm or mm] RVPEP=t1[msec or sec] RVET=t1[msec or sec] aWAVE=d1[cm or mm] HR[BPM]=120 [sec]/ 2 beat time [sec] PAAs[cm^2]= (p/4)x(PADs) ^2 PEP/ET[%]= (RVPEP/RVET)x100
Right Ventricle two distances Systole Time Interval (RVPEP & RVET) Ratio Table 66. Pulmonic Valve (M-PV)
Cardiology 135
M-Mode Analysis Tricuspid Valve (M-TV)

E D F A C
RVOT ATL RA RAPW
P R
PCG ECG
Illustration 424. M-TV Measurements
Calc Mnemonic TV_EF TV_DE TV_CE TV_AC P-R HR TV-A/E
Calc Name Tricuspid Valve E-F Velocity Tricuspid Valve D-E Amplitude Tricuspid Valve C-E Amplitude Tricuspid Valve A-C Interval P-R Interval Heart Rate (beats/ minute) Tricuspid Valve A/E Ratio Tricuspid Valve PRAC Interval
Input Measurements one slope one distance one distance one time interval one time interval one 2 beat time interval one distance (TV<D-E>) two time intervals
Formula TV_EF=v1[cm/s or m/s] TV_DE=d1[cm or mm] TV_CE=d1[cm or mm] TV_AC=t1[msec or sec] P-R=t1[msec or sec] HR[BPM]=120 [sec]/ 2 beat time [sec] TV-A/E[%]= (D<TV_AC>/TV_DE) x 100 TPR-AC[ms or sec]= P-R - TV_AC
TPR-AC
.
Cardiology 136
Table 67. Tricuspid Valve (M-TV)
TV_AC measurement calculates D_AC simultaneously. TV_DE, TV_EF, TV_AC and TV_CE measurement results should be performed through the slope measurement.
Doppler Analysis Mitral Valve (D-MV)
Vp
2 2 s 1
P d
F e O R
Illustration 425. D-MV Measurements
Calc Mnemonic MVOA PFVMV PFVLA ET FVI PHT HR
Calc Name Mitral Valve Orifice Area at Diastole Peak Flow Velocity at the Mitral Valve Peak Flow Velocity at Left Atrium Ejection Time Flow Velocity Integral Pressure Half Time Heart Rate (beats/ minute)
Input Measurements one area (by ellipse, trace or circle) one velocity one velocity one time interval flow velocities one time interval one 2 beat time interval
Formula MVOA=a1[cm ^2] PFVMV=v1[cm/s or m/s] PFVLA=v1[cm/s or m/s] ET=t1[ms or sec] FVI[mm or cm]= sVdt PHT=t1[ms orsec] HR[BPM]=120 [sec]/ 2 beat time [sec]
Table 68. Mitral Valve (D-MV)
Cardiology 137
Doppler Analysis Mitral Valve (D-MV) (contd)

Calc Mnemonic AccT DecT PkFVI Calc Name Flow Acceleration Time Flow Deceleration Time Peak Flow Velocity Intergal Mean Flow Velocity Input Measurements one time interval one time interval one velocity, one time interval flow velocities, one area (by ellipse, trace or circle) flow velocities and one area (by ellipse, trace or circle) body surface area and SV flow velocities, one area (by ellipse, trace or circle) and one time interval body surface area and CO two velocities flow velocities Formula AccT[msec or sec]= t<PFV-MV>-ts<ET> DecT[msec or sec]= te<ET>-t<PFV-MV> PkFVI[cm/s or m/s]=1.14 x PFV-MV x ET/20+0.3 MeanFV [cm/s or m/s]= FVI/t<FVI> SV[ml]=FVI x MVOA
MeanFV
SV
Stroke Volume
SI CO
Stroke Volume Index Cardiac Output
SI[ml/m^2]=SV/BSA CO[1/min]= SVxHR/1000
CI MaxPG MeanPG
Cardiac Index Maximum Pressure Gradient Mean Pressure Gradient
CI[ml/min/m^2]= CO/BSA MaxPG[mmHg]= 4 x (PFV-MV^2) MeanPG[mmHg]= 4 x (V^2/n)

i=1 n
MVA
Mitral Valve Area
one time interval
MVA[cm^2]= 220/PHT
Table 68. Mitral Valve (D-MV) (contd)
Cardiology 138
Doppler Analysis Aortic Valve (D-AV)
Vp
2 AOPFV
d F
O R
LOPFV
Illustration 426. D-AV Measurements
Calc Mnemonic AOs FVI-AV
Calc Name Aortic Root Dimension, Systole Flow Velocity Integral at Aortic Valve Flow Velocity Integral at Left Ventricular Outflow Tract Peak Flow Velocity at Aortic Valve Peak Flow Velocity at Left Ventricular Outflow Tract Ejection Time Pressure Half Time Heart Rate (beats/ minute)
Input Measurements one distance flow velocities
Formula AOs=d1[cm or mm] FVI-AV[mm or cm]= sVdt FVI-LV[mm or cm]= sVdt
FVI-LV
flow velocities
PFVAV PFVLV
one velocity one velocity
PFVAV=v1[cm/s or m/s] PFVLV=v1[cm/s or m/s] ET=t1[ms or sec] PHT=t1[ms orsec] HR[BPM]=120 [sec]/ 2 beat time [sec]
ET PHT HR
one time interval SE one time interval one 2 beat time interval
Table 69. Aortic Valve (D-AV)
Cardiology 139
Doppler Analysis Aortic Valve (D-AV) (contd)

Calc Mnemonic AV-A Calc Name Aortic Valve Area by contEq Input Measurements one distance two velocities Formula AV-A[mm or cm]= LVOT-A x PFV-LV/ PFV-AV LVOTA[cm ^2]= x (LVOTs)^2 /4 AccT[msec or sec]= t<PFV-AV>-ts<ET> DecT[msec or sec]= te<ET>-t<PFV-AV> PkFVI[mm or cm]= 1.14 x PFVAV x ET/ 20+.03 MeanFV[cm/s or m/s]=FVI/t<FVI> QP:QS=CO(PV)/ CO(AV) MaxPG[mmHg]= 4 x (PFV-AV^2) MeanPG[mmHg]= 4 x (V^2/n)
i=1 n
LVOTA
Left Ventricular LVOTs of PLAX Outflow Tract Area at Systole Flow Acceleration Time Flow Deceleration Time Peak Flow Velocity Intergal Mean Flow Velocity QP:QS Ratio Maximum Pressure Gradient Mean Pressure Gradient two time intervals two time intervals one velocity, one time interval flow velocities, one time interval two CO two velocities flow velocities
AccT DecT PkFVI
MeanFV QP:QS MaxPG MeanPG
SV
Stroke Volume
flow velocities, one area (by ellipse or trace or circle)
AVA is calculated. SV[ml]=FVIAV x AVA else SV[ml]=FVIAV x (/4) X (AOs)^2 SI[ml/m^2]= SV/BSA CO[ml]= SVxHR/1000
SI CO
Stroke Volume Index Cardiac Output
body surface area and SV flow velocities, one area (by ellipse, trace or circle) and one time interval body surface area and CO
CI
Cardiac Index
CI[ml/min/m^2]= CO/BSA
Table 69. Aortic Valve (D-AV) (contd)
Cardiology 140
Doppler Analysis Pulmonic Valve (D-PV)

ROPFV PAPFV P
Vp
2
d F
O R
Illustration 427. D-PV Measurements
Calc Mnemonic PADs FVI-PV
Calc Name Pulmonary Artery Diameter at Systole Flow Velocity Integral at Pulmonic Valve Flow Velocity Integral at Pulmonic Aorta
Input Measurements one distance B-Mode one FVI
Formula PADs=d1[cm or mm] FVI-PV= sVdt FVI-PA= sVdt FVI-RV=sVdt
FVI-PA
one FVI
FVI-RV
Flow Velocity one FVI Integral at Right Ventricle Outflow Tract Peak Flow Velocity at Pulmonic Aorta Peak Flow Velocity at Right Ventricle Outflow Tract Ejection Time Pressure Half Time Heart Rate (beats/ minute) Pulmonic Valve Area by contEq Flow Acceleration Time Flow Deceleration Time one velocity one velocity
PFVPA PFVRV
PFVPA=v1[cm/s or m/s] PFVRV=v1[cm/s or m/s] ET=t1[ms or sec] PHT=t1[ms or sec] HR[BPM]=120 [sec]/ 2 beat time [sec] PV-A[cm^2]= (/4) x (PADs)^2 x PFV-PA/PFV-RV AccT[msec or sec]= t<PFV-PA>-ts<ET> DecT[msec or sec]= te<ET>-t<PFV-PA>
ET PHT HR PV-A
one time interval SE one time interval one 2 beat time interval one distance two velocities two time intervals two time intervals
AccT DecT
Table 70. Pulmonic Valve (D-PV)
Cardiology 141
Doppler Analysis Pulmonic Valve (D-PV) (contd)

Calc Mnemonic PkFVI Calc Name Peak Flow Velocity Integral Mean Flow Velocity QP:QS Ratio Cardiac Output Input Measurements one velocity and one time interval flow velocities and one time interval two CO flow velocities, one area (by ellipse, trace or circle) and one time interval body surface area and CO two velocities flow velocities Formula PkFVI[mm or cm]= 1.14 x PFV-PA x ET/20+0.3 MeanFV[mm or cm]= FVI/t<FVI> QP:QS=CO(PV)/ CO(AV) CO[ml]= SVxHR/1000
MeanFV QP:QS CO
CI MaxPG MeanPG
Cardiac Index Maximum Pressure Gradient Mean Pressure Gradient
CI[ml/min/m^2]= CO/BSA MaxPG[mmHg]= 4 x (PFV-PA^2) MeanPG[mmHg]= 4 x (V^2/n)

i=1 n
SV SI
Stroke Volume Stroke Volume Index
flow velocities, RVOTA of PLAX-AV body surface area and SV
SV[ml]=FVIRV x RVOTA SI[ml/m^2]=SV/BSA
Table 70. Pulmonic Valve (D-PV) (contd)
Cardiology 142
Doppler Analysis Tricuspid Valve (D-TV)
Vp
2
P d F e O R
Illustration 428. D-TV Measurements
Calc Mnemonic TAML
Calc Name Tricuspid Annulus Medial-Lateral Dimension, Systole Flow Velocity Integral Peak Flow Velocity at Tricuspid Valve Peak Flow Velocity at Right Atrial Ejection Time Pressure Half Time Heart Rate (beats/ minute) Flow Acceleration Time Flow Deceleration Time
Formula TAML=d1[cm or mm]
FVI PFVTV PFVRA ET PHT HR AccT DecT
flow velocities one velocity one velocity one time interval one time interval one 2 beat time interval two time intervals two time intervals
FVI[mm or cm]= sVdt PFVTV=v1[cm/s or m/s] PFVRA=v1[cm/s or m/s] ET=t1[ms or sec] PHT=t1[ms or sec] HR[BPM]=120 [sec]/ 2 beat time [sec] AccT[msec or sec]= t<PFVTV>-ts<ET> DecT[msec or sec]= te<ET>-t<PFVTV>
Table 71. Tricuspid Valve (D-TV)
Cardiology 143
Doppler Analysis Tricuspid Valve (D-TV) (contd)

Calc Mnemonic
PkFVI
Calc Name
Peak Flow Velocity Integral Mean Flow Velocity Maximum Pressure Gradient Mean Pressure Gradient
Input Measurements
one velocity, one time interval one velocity, one time interval two velocities flow velocities
Formula
PkFVI[cm/s or m/s]= 1.14 x PFVTV x ET/20+0.3 MeanFV[cm/s or m/s]=FVI/t<FVI> MaxPG[mmHg]= 4 x (PFV-TV^2) MeanPG[mmHg]= 4 x (V^2/n)
i=1 n
MeanFV MaxPG MeanPG
SV SI CO
Stroke Volume Stroke Volume Index Cardiac Output
flow velocities, one distance body surface area and SV flow velocities, one distance and one time interval body surface area and CO
SV[ml]=(/4) x FVI x (TAML)^2 SI[ml/m^2]= SV/BSA CO[1/min]= SVxHR/1000 CI[ml/min/m^2]= CO/BSA
CI
Cardiac Index
Table 72. Tricuspid Valve (D-TV) (contd)
Cardiology 144
Advanced Cardiac Reports

Overview
Two types of report formats are supported by the LOGIQ 400 Advanced Cardiac Calculation option. The first format is the standard display that shows a separate page for each of the first layer menu choices (i.e. Cubed Method, Bullet Method, PSAX-AV, D-MV, etc.). Along with the patient information are the measured values, their average and the calculated values. Two examples are shown in Illustration 429 and Illustration 430.
Illustration 429. Standard Cubed Method Report Page
Cardiology 145

Overview (contd)
Illustration 430. Standard PSAX-AV Report Page
The second report format is the list of measured and calculated values. When a measurement is made, it is entered into each report page that displays that measurement. If the standard report format is used, many unnecessary report pages could be generated. The List type of reporting can be customized to the users needs, eliminating unnecessary printing requirements. A List type report page is shown in Illustration 431.
Cardiology 146

Overview (contd)
Hospital Name Tech. ID: 1 2 3 4 10 / 18 / 93 NAME: Patient Name AGE: ### ID: Patient ID SEX: 1 HEIGHT: 123cm WEIGHT: 123.45kg BSA: 12.34m2 Ref MD: NOTE: [ B-Mode ] [ PSAX Aortic Valve ] ## / ## PADd ###.#mm (###.# ###.# ###.#) RVOTd ###.#mm (###.# ###.# ###.#) AOd ###.#mm (###.# ###.# ###.#) LAMLD ###.#mm (###.# ###.# ###.#) [ M-Mode ALSs RVOTs AOd LADs [ D-Mode TAML ET PHT FVI ] [ Aortic Valve ###.#mm ###.#mm ###.#mm ###.#mm ] [ Tricuspid Valve ###.#mm ###.#ms ###.#ms ###.#cm/s ] (###.# (###.# (###.# (###.# ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.#) ###.#) ###.#) ###.#) ] (###.# (###.# (###.# (###.# ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.# ###.#) ###.#) ###.#) ###.#)
COMMENTS:
[ RETURN ] Comments Area Operator Message Area
[ SRP ]
AUTOP
Illustration 431. List Type Report Page
Standard Report
The fifth line of the standard report page layout has three important areas of information. Main Menu Sub Menu Page Number Shows the main or first layer category (D-Mode) Shows the sub or second layer category (Aortic Valve) Shows present page number and total pages
Cardiology 147

Pop up Menus The Main and Sub Menus are pop-up menus that provide the ability to quickly display reports. To display a pop up menu, use the Trackball to move the highlight cursor to the main or Sub Menu area. Press Set. The pop up menu is displayed. While the pop up menu is displayed, use the up/down Trackball motion or the Up/Down arrow keys to select the desired menu item. Use the Set key to activate the menu choice. Page Numbers The page number area not only shows the Present Page/Total Pages, but this area is used to navigate through the display of available pages. Use the Trackball to move the arrow cursor to highlight the navigation arrows on either side of the page numbers. Press Set to display the previous or next page. Report Page Commands Four commands at the bottom of the report page allow the user to: List Edit SRP AutoP Change the report format to the LIST type. Allows for deleting measurement data on the report page. Used to select the titles and order of report page printing. Automatically prints out all reports, selected by the SRP function, in sequential order.
Use the Trackball to highlight the desired command and press Set.
Cardiology 148

List Type Reports
The List type report displays only those measurements or calculations actually performed. The section order of the list is the same that was programmed by the SRP command. The item order is the same as the standard report. All commands are the same as the standard report. The difference is the Return command. Selecting Return changes the display to the standard format.
Hints
When the amount of section information will not fit on one page, a new page is generated so that all will fit on the same page.
Select Reports (SRP)

The customization of the cardiac calculation reporting is accomplished with this function. Select SRP from any standard report display. The screen for selecting the report order is displayed as shown in Illustration 432.
Cardiology 149

Select Reports (SRP)
Illustration 432. Select Report Display Order
Commands at the bottom of this Select Report Display allow the user to: ORDER RESET SAVE EXIT Erases all previous print order numbers and starts the order selection process. Resets the print order to the factory default. Saves the chosen combination. Exits the SRP Process and changes to the previous screen.
Cardiology 150

Operation and Messages ORDER The ORDER command is used to erase all previous designations and commence the order selection process. Select the ORDER command from the bottom menu. The message displayed is: Reset? Press ESC to cancel. SET to confirm Set erases the old order and starts the order selection process. Esc causes nothing to happen. To designate a new order, use the Trackball to move the cursor to the desired selection. Press Set. The order number is placed to the left of the measurement group name. The highlighted cursor stays in its position until it is moved by the Trackball to the next selection. Continue this process until the desired selections have been made in the preferred order.
NOTE: If Apical 4 ChamberDiastole is selected, the same order number will be assigned to Apical 4 ChamberSystole and vice-versa. Measurement groups not selected will not be printed.
RESET The RESET command resets the displayed combination to the factory defaults. Prior to resetting, the following message is displayed: Reset? Press ESC to cancel. SET to confirm Set resets the order to factory defaults. Esc causes nothing to happen.
Cardiology 151

Operation and Messages SAVE The SAVE command will save the changes as the new report printing configuration. Prior to saving, the following message is displayed: Overwrite? Press ESC to cancel. SET to confirm Set saves the order changes. Esc causes nothing to happen. If the Order process was not completed, the following message is displayed: Complete the present set up first.
EXIT If the exit command is selected before choosing, completing or saving a new sequence program, the following message is displayed: Quit? Press ESC to cancel. SET to confirm Set exits from this screen. Esc causes nothing to happen. If a new sequence program was completed but not saved, the following message is displayed: Overwrite? Press ESC to cancel. SET to confirm Set saves the order changes and exits. Esc causes nothing to happen.
Cardiology 152
Index
Index
Symbols
Numbers
A
Index 1
Index
B
Index 2
Index
C
Index 3
Index
Index 4
Index
D
Index 5
Index
E
Index 6
Index
F
G
H
Index 7
Index
I
L
K
Index 8
Index
M
Index 9
Index
N
O
Index 10
Index
P
Index 11
Index
Index 12
Index
Q
S
R
Index 13
Index
Index 14
Index
U
T
Index 15
Index
V
W
Z
Index 16
GE Medical Systems
2177612-100
Revision 0
LOGIQt 400
Copyright
GE Medical Systems
Revision History
REV
0
DATE
March 6, 1997
REASON FOR CHANGE

Initial Release
PAGE NUMBER

REVISION NUMBER
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Revision History A
Revision History
Revision History B
Biopsy Procedures
Special Concerns Guidelines
The LOGIQ 400 probes currently available all have biopsy capabilities. This section describes some special concerns, biopsy kits and accessories as well as basic procedures for attaching a biopsy guide to the different types of probes. Please consult any documentation that comes with the probes or biopsy kits for more details.
Biopsy 1
Biopsy Procedures
Biopsy 2
Special Concerns
Precautions Concerning the Use of Biopsy Procedures
WARNING
Do not freeze the image during a biopsy procedure. The image must be live to avoid a positioning error. Biopsy guidelines are intended to assist the user in determining optimal probe placement and approximate the needle path. However, actual needle movement is likely to deviate from the guideline. Always monitor the relative positions of the biopsy needle and the subject mass during the procedure.
CAUTION
The use of biopsy devices and accessories that have not been evaluated for use with this equipment may not be compatible and could result in injury. Refer to the list of recommended accessories and supplies in Appendix D, Assistance. The invasive nature of biopsy procedures requires proper preparation and technique to control infection and disease transmission. Equipment must be cleaned as appropriate for the procedure prior to use.
S S S S
CAUTION
Follow the probe cleaning and disinfection procedures and precautions to properly prepare the probe. Follow the manufacturers instructions for the cleaning of biopsy devices and accessories. Use protective barriers such as gloves and probe sheaths. After use, follow proper procedures for decontamination, cleaning, and waste disposal.
CAUTION
Improper cleaning methods and the use of certain cleaning and disinfecting agents can cause damage to the plastic components that will degrade imaging performance or increase the risk of electric shock. Refer to probe safety and handling precautions on Probes 13.
Biopsy 3
Special Concerns
Accessories and Supplies

Required supplies
The following supplies are typically used for a biopsy procedure:
S S S
Pre-packaged biopsy procedure kit with hospital approved instrumentation. The probe to be used for the biopsy needle guidance. The mounting bracket, needle guides, and sterile probe sheath kits for the specific probe to be used.
Ordering replacement supplies

Refer to Appendix DAssistance for more information.
Biopsy 4
Guidelines
Biopsy Procedure
A typical biopsy examination might proceed as follows: 1. Ensure that all supplies for the biopsy procedure are on hand before beginning the imaging session. 2. Prepare the patient for the biopsy procedure according to accepted practices at your facility. 3. Explain the biopsy procedure to the patient, along with any other instructions. 4. Prepare the probe, biopsy guide, and probe sheath. 5. Follow the basic B-Mode scan procedures outlined in Basic Scan and B-Mode to locate the anatomical site to be biopsied. To display the Biopsy Guidelines:
Access Biopsy Lines from the B-Mode Sub Menu page two. Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display page two and highlight Biopsy Lines. Press the Biopsy Lines up or down arrow keys to display the guidelines. The menu selection is highlighted. Press the Biopsy Lines up or down arrow keys to disable the guidelines. The menu selection is not highlighted. The Biopsy Guidelines adjust along with image adjustments, such as image inversion/rotations, zoom and depth changes.
Biopsy 5
Guidelines
Biopsy Procedure (contd)
BX-3
.
Biopsy 6
Illustration 434. Biopsy Guide Zone Example
NOTE: The acceptable deviation is between 2 mm and 4 mm. If the deviation is greater than this, call Service.
Guidelines
Needle Guide Type Preset

A preset is provided in Set Up/Custom Display page 1 to choose the type of biopsy guide angle (guide zone) display to conform with desired target depth/location. Angle selection for respective probes is available from the chart below. Depth in cm at Center Channel FixedAngle Probe C364/CBF C551/CAE C721 C386 546L L764/LH 739L LA39 S317 T739 BX-1 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a 2.0 2.0 1.5 n/a 2.0 BX-2 n/a n/a 3.0 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a BX-3 8.0 7.0 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a 8.0 n/a MBX-1 4.0 4.0 n/a 4.0 4.0 n/a n/a n/a 4.0 n/a MultiAngle MBX-2 6.0 5.5 n/a 6.0 5.5 n/a n/a n/a 6.0 n/a MBX-3 8.0 7.0 n/a 8.0 7.0 n/a n/a n/a 8.0 n/a
Table 73. Biopsy Guide Attachment Selection
DANGER
Failure to match the preset to the guide may cause the needle to track a path outside the displayed lines. It is extremely important that when using the adjustable angle biopsy guides, the preset displayed on the screen (which is selected on Custom Display page 1) matches the angle set on the guide, otherwise the needle will not follow the displayed guide zone which could result in repeated biopsies or patient injury.
.
t
NOTE: Although the multi-angle guides are compatible with the Civco Ultrapro and Ultrapro II, it is recommended the multi-angle guides only be used with the Ultrapro II.
Biopsy 7
Guidelines
Needle Guide Type Preset (contd)
Illustration 435. Biopsy Guide Depth Selection
DANGER
When the biopsy guidelines are displayed, the message: Confirm BX type of Bracket is displayed at the bottom of the screen with the angle selected in the Custom Display Menu page 1. Ensure that the (M)BX type selected for each probe in each exam category for each preset is the same as the angle selected on the biopsy guide.
Biopsy 8
Guidelines
E721 Type Selection
When the E721 probe is attached and active, the needle guide type selection choices in Set Up/Custom Display page 1 are:
S S
TV0 Reusable metal guide with a 0 degree offset angle. TR5 Civco disposable guide with a 5 degree offset angle.
Illustration 436. TV0 Biopsy Guide
Illustration 437. TR5 Biopsy Guide
Biopsy 9
Guidelines
Biopsy Guide Attachment

Convex, Sector and Linear probes have optional biopsy guide attachments for each probe. The guide consists of a non-disposable bracket to attach to the probe, disposable needle clip to attach to the bracket, sheath, gel (sterile gel if necessary) and disposable needle barrels. The disposable needle barrels are available for a variety of needle sizes.
Fixed Needle Guide Assembly

Identify the appropriate biopsy guide bracket by matching the label on the bracket with the probe to be used.
Illustration 438. C551 Biopsy Guide Bracket
Biopsy 10
Guidelines
Fixed Needle Guide Assembly (contd)
Orient the bracket so that the needle clip attachment will be on the same side as the probe orientation mark (ridge).
Probe Orientation Mark
Bracket
Illustration 439. Probe/Bracket Alignment
Attach the biopsy bracket to the probe by sliding the bracket over the end of the probe until it clicks or locks in place.
Biopsy 11
Guidelines
Place an adequate amount of coupling gel on the face of the probe. Place the proper sanitary sheath over the probe and biopsy bracket. Use the rubber bands supplied to hold the sheath in place.
Illustration 440. Applying Sanitary Sheath
Biopsy 12
Guidelines
Snap the needle clip onto the biopsy guide bracket.
Sheath
Illustration 441. Needle Clip Attachment
Choose the desired gauge (size) needle barrel. Twist it back and forth to remove it from the plastic tree.
Illustration 442. Needle Barrels
Biopsy 13
Guidelines
Place the needle barrel into the needle clip with the desired gauge facing the needle clip and snap into place.
18
Illustration 443. Needle Barrel Installation
Biopsy 14
Guidelines
The Procedure
Place coupling gel on the scanning surface of the probe/sheath/biopsy guide assembly. Activate the biopsy guidelines on the system through the B-Mode Sub Menu page two. Press the Sub Menu Select arrow keys as necessary to display page two and highlight Biopsy Lines.
.
Post Biopsy
Scan to locate the target. Center the target in the electronic guideline path.
NOTE: Enabling color flow would allow for visualization of the vascular structure around the area to be biopsied.
Place the needle in the guide between the needle barrel and needle clip.
When the biopsy is complete, remove the needle barrel, needle clip and probe sheath. Properly dispose of these items in accordance with current facility guidelines. The biopsy bracket can be sterilized and reused.
Biopsy 15
Guidelines
E721 Probe Biopsy Guide

Preparation
To prepare the E721 for use: 1. Remove the probe from the box and carefully examine it for any damage. 2. If the biopsy guide is to be attached, use the filling removal tool (Illustration 445) to clean out the attachment area on the probe head.
.
Biopsy 16
Illustration 445. Attachment Filling Removal
3. Clean, then disinfect/sterilize the probe.
NOTE: Ensure that protective gloves are worn.
Guidelines
Preparation (contd)
. .
Install the sheath: 1. Remove the sheath from its package. Do not unroll the sheath.
NOTE: Remember to rinse all sanitary probe sheaths of powder before placing on the probe. Powder can degrade the displayed image.
2. Place a small amount of ultrasound gel inside the sheath tip (the gel is between the sheath inner surface and the probe aperture).
NOTE: Ensure that only acoustic coupling gel is used for this purpose.
3. Place the sheath tip over the probe aperture and then pull the sheath end toward the probe handle. 4. Inspect the sheath.
Illustration 446. Probe with Sheath
5. Place a rubberband/twist lock or clamp over the sheath end of the probe shaft (Illustration 446). Ensure the rubberband/twist lock or clamp is tight around the sheath. Rub a finger over the tip of the probe to ensure all air bubbles have been removed.
Biopsy 17
Guidelines
Preparation (contd)
Illustration 447. Reusable Metal Biopsy Guide 0 Degree Angle
6. If a biopsy is to be performed, snap the metal or plastic biopsy guide on to the probe over the sheath (Illustration 447). 7. Place a small amount of ultrasound gel on the gel-filled sheath tip outer surface.
Illustration 448. Civco Disposable Biopsy Guide 5 Degree Angle
Biopsy 18
Guidelines
Scanning
1. Scan the patient. The probe handle orientation mark indicates the image scan plane. Be sure that the Image Reverse function is Off.
Illustration 449. Probe and Guide Zone Alignment
2. Rotate, retract, or advance the probe, as necessary, to see all pertinent anatomy. 3. If a biopsy is being performed, activate the biopsy guidelines.
CAUTION
Scan the patient to determine the correct puncture depth and site before inserting the needle.
Biopsy 19
Guidelines
Post Biopsy
If the exam is over: 1. Remove the biopsy guide and twist lock/clamp. Remove and properly dispose of the sheath. 2. Thoroughly clean the probe and equipment. Refer to your institutions infection control guidelines for disinfection/sterilization protocols. 3. After sterilization, return the probe to its carrying case.
Biopsy 20
Guidelines
Biopsy Probes
Biopsy Guide Attachment Probe
C364 C551 C721 E721
Application
Abdominal, OB/GYN Abdominal, OB/GYN Neonatal Endocavitary
Biopsy Guide
Civco Civco Civco YMS Civco
Needle Sizes
14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 25 AWG 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 25 AWG 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 25 AWG Requires 25 cm needles 18 AWG 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 25 AWG 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 25 AWG 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 25 AWG 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 25 AWG
Procedure Repl. Kit

Civco UltraPro E8385LC Civco UltraPro E8385LC Civco Ultra Pro E8385LC H46222AD H4550BG Civco UltraPro E8385LC Civco Ultra Pro E8385LC Civco UltraPro E8385LC Civco UltraPro E8385LC
739L
Small Parts, Peripheral Vascular
Civco
L764 T739 LA39
Mammography Civco Small Parts Intra-operative Civco

Civco Small Parts Mammography
Multi Angle Biopsy Guide Attachment Probe

C364
Application
Abdominal, OB/GYN Abdominal, OB/GYN Small Parts, Peripheral Vascular Abdominal Cardiac
Biopsy Guide
Civco
Needle Sizes
(Not Included)
14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23AWG 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23AWG 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23AWG 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23AWG
Procedure Repl. Kit

Civco Ultra-Pro II Civco Ultra-Pro II Civco Ultra-Pro II Civco Ultra-Pro II
C386
Civco
546L
Civco
S317
Civco
Table 74. Probe Biopsy Charts
Biopsy 21
Guidelines
Biopsy 22
Probes
Probe Overview Probe Discussion
This section gives an overview and description of each probe available for the LOGIQ 400.
Probes 1
Probes
Probes 2
Probe Overview
Ergonomics
Probes have been ergonomically designed to:
S S S S
Handle and manipulate with ease Connect to the system with one hand Be lightweight and balanced Have rounded edges and smooth surfaces.
Cables have been designed to:

S S
Connect to system with appropriate cable length Stand up to typical wear by cleaning and disinfectant agents, contact with approved gel, etc.
Cable handling
Take the following precautions with probe cables:

S S S
Keep free from wheels Do not bend the cable acutely Avoid crossing cables between probes.
Probe orientation
Each probe is provided with an orientation marking (refer to Illustration 450). This mark is used to identify the end of the probe corresponding to the side of the image having the GE orientation marking.
Probes 3
Probe Overview
Ergonomics (contd)
Orientation Marking
Illustration 450. Orientation Marking on Probe
Labeling
Each probe is labeled with the following information:
S S S S S S
Sellers name and manufacturer Operating frequency GE part number Probe serial number Month and year of manufacture Probe designation Probe designation is provided on the probe grip and the top of the connector housing, so that it is easily read when mounted on the system and is also automatically displayed on the screen when the probe is selected.
Probes 4
Probe Overview
Labeling (contd)
GEMSAm GEMSE GEMSA
!
MANUFACTURED e.g. SEPTEMBER 1993
Also found on Probe Connector
Illustration 451. Probe Adapter Label
Illustration 452. Probe Handle Labels
Probes 5
Probe Overview
Labeling (contd)
3 GEMSAm GEMSE GEMSA
MANUFACTURED e.g. SEPTEMBER 1993
Also found on Probe Adapter
Illustration 453. Probe Connector Labels
Probe Orientation Marker
Active Probe
>
Illustration 454. Displayed Probe Information
Probes 6
Probe Overview
Applications
Below is a list of probes and their intended applications.
Probe Application Abdomen Small Parts Periph. Vasc. Obstetrics Gynecology Pediatrics Neonatal Urology Surgery Cardiac Endocavity Biopsy
= Main Application = Alternative Application = Option Kit available
B510
C364
C386
C551
C721
E721
I739
LA39
546L
Probe Application Abdomen Small Parts Periph. Vasc. Obstetrics Gynecology Pediatrics Neonatal Urology Surgery Cardiac Transcranial Biopsy
739L
L764
S220
S222
S317
S611
T739
CWD2
CWD5
= Main Application
= Alternative Application
= Option Kit available
Table 75. Probe Indications for Use
Probes 7
Probe Overview
Specifications
Probe Designation
B510 C364 C386 C551 C721 E721 I739 546L 739L
Principal Clinical Uses

Cardiac Radiology/ Obstetrics Abdom./OB/GYN Radiology/ Obstetrics Neonatal Transvaginal Transrectal Intraoperative Deep Vascular/ Small Parts Peripheral Vascular/Small Parts Mammo, PV & Small Parts Small Parts Cardiac Transcranial, Cardiac Cardiac/Abdom. Cardiac Intraoperative
Imaging Frequency Range (MHz)

5.0 3.3 3.5 5.0 6.6 6.6 6.7 5.2 6.7
Doppler Frequency (MHz)

4.0 2.5 2.5 4.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 4.0 5.0
L764 LA39 S220 S222 S317 S611 T739 B E L T = = = =
6.6 8.7 2.5 2.9 3.3 5.7 6.7
5.0 5.0 2.2 2.0 2.5 4.0 5.0
Bipolar Sector Endocavitary Linear Array Intraoperative Linear
C = Curved Array (Convex) I = Intraoperative Linear S = Phased Array Sector
Table 76. System Probe Definitions
Probes 8
Probe Overview
Specifications (contd)
Adapter Designation
PA 51
Adaptable Probe
CBF CAE LH MTZ
System Operates Probe As:

C364 C551 L764 E721 S220
5S
W Table 77. Probe Adapter Usage
Probe Name B510 C364 C386 C551 C721 E721 I739 546L 739L L764 LA39 S220 S222 S317 S611
Material of Headshell PU PES NORYL PES NORYL PES NORYL NORYL NORYL PES NORYL PES NORYL NORYL NORYL
Use Intercavity Abdom. Abdom./ OB/GYN Abdom. Neonatal Intercavity Intraop. Adom. Superficial Superficial Sm. Parts Superficial Cardiac Transcranial Cardiac/ Abdom. Cardiac/ Neonatal/ Pediatric
Type Biplane Sector Convex Convex Convex Convex Linear Linear Linear Linear Linear Sector Sector Sector Sector
Catalog Number H45202BT H45202CF H45202CC H45202CE H45202MT H45202JG H45202LE H45202LG H45202HP H45202LA H45202WG H45202TC H45202SD H45202SF
Mfg. by GEYMS GEYMS GEYMS GEYMS GEYMS GEYMS GEYMS GEYMS GEYMS GEYMS GEYMS GEYMS GEYMS GEYMS GEYMS
Probe Family (Headshell)
Part No. 2123593
CBF
P9607AB 21471872
CAE MTZ MTZ
P9607AD 2121267-2 P9607AF 21471892 21442662 2102991ADW
Convex H45202MN
LH W
2121377-2 21550782 2159263 21442682 21442672
Table 78. LOGIQ
t 400 Probe List
Probes 9
Probe Overview
Probe Name CWD2 CWD5 T739 CBF CAE MTZ LH W Material of Headshell NORYL NORYL NORYL PES PES PES PES PES Catalog Number H45202DB H45202DE H45202TG H46022CB H46022CA H46022MT H46022LH H4162C Probe Family (Headshell)
Use Cardiac Peripheral Vascular Intraop. Abdom. Abdom. Intercavity Sm. Parts Cardiac
Type Single CWD Single CWD Linear Convex Convex Convex Linear Sector
Mfg. by GEYMS GEYMS GEYMS GEYMS GEYMS GEYMS GEYMS GEYMS
Part No. 2123594 2123595 21471882 P9603AD P9603AE P9603AU P9601AC
Table 78. LOGIQ
t 400 Probe List
Probes 10
Probe Overview
Connecting and Disconnecting a Probe

When connecting or disconnecting a probe, the probe port should not be active. To ensure that the ports are not active, place the system in the image freeze condition. Ultrasound transmission is stopped until the system is unfrozen. When activating a probe, system preset parameters such as Depth, Focal Zone Number and Position, and image Rotation are also activated. Refer to Customizing Your System for more information.
Selecting a probe
Hints
Always start out with a probe that provides optimum focal depths and penetration for the patient size and application.
NOTE: Selecting a new probe unfreezes the image.
Probes 11
Probe Overview
Care and Maintenance

Inspecting probes
Inspect the probes lens, cable, and casing after each use. Look for any damage that would allow liquid to enter the probe. If any damage is found, do not use the probe until it has been inspected and repaired/replaced by a GE Service Representative. Keep a log of all probe maintenance, along with a picture of any probe malfunction.
After Each Use
Storing probes
After scanning and cleaning of the probe is completed, put the probe in its carrying case to ensure safe storage.
Transporting probes
Secure the probe in its holder for moving short distances. When transporting a probe a long distance, store it in its carrying case.
Environmental Requirements
Probes should be operated, stored, or transported within the parameters outlined below.
Operational Temperature Humidity Pressure

10 - 40 C 50 - 104 F 30-85% non-condensing 700-1060hPA
_ _
_ _
Storage
_ _ _ _
Transport
_ _ _ _
Table 79. Probe Environmental Requirements
Probes 12
Probe Overview
Probe Safety
Handling precautions WARNING
Ultrasound probes are highly sensitive medical instruments that can easily be damaged by improper handling. Use care when handling and protect from damage when not in use. DO NOT use a damaged or defective probe. Failure to follow these precautions can result in serious injury and equipment damage.
Electrical shock hazard Electrical Hazard

The probe is driven with electrical energy that can injure the patient or user if live internal parts are contacted by conductive solution:
S
DO NOT immerse the probe into any liquid beyond the level indicated by the immersion level diagram. Refer to Illustration 455 on Probes 17. Never immerse the probe connector or probe adaptors into any liquid. DO NOT drop the probes or subject them to other types of mechanical shock or impact. Degraded performance or damage such as cracks or chips in the housing may result. Inspect the probe before and after each use for damage or degradation to the housing, strain relief, lens, and seal. A thorough inspection should be conducted during the cleaning process. DO NOT kink, tightly coil, or apply excessive force on the probe cable. Insulation failure may result. Electrical leakage checks should be performed on a routine basis by GE Service or qualified hospital personnel. Refer to the service manual for leakage check procedures.
S S
Probes 13
Probe Overview
Mechanical hazards CAUTION
A defective probe or excessive force can cause patient injury or probe damage:
S S
Observe depth markings and do not apply excessive force when inserting or manipulating intercavitary probes. Inspect probes for sharp edges or rough surfaces that could injure sensitive tissue.
Special handling instructions

Using protective sheaths
CAUTION Biological Hazard
Protective barriers may be required to minimize disease transmission. Probe sheaths are available for use with all clinical situations where infection is a concern. Use of legally marketed, sterile probe sheaths is strongly recommended for intra-cavitary and intra-operative procedures. Use of legally marketed, sterile, pyrogen free probe sheaths is REQUIRED for neurological intra-operative procedures. Instructions. Custom made sheaths are available for each probe. Each probe sheath kit consists of a flexible sheath used to cover the probe and cable and elastic bands used to secure the sheath. Sterile probe sheaths are supplied as part of biopsy kits for those probes intended for use in biopsy procedures. In addition to the sheath and elastic bands, there are associated accessories for performing a biopsy procedure which are included in the kits. Refer to the biopsy instructions for the specific probes in the Discussion section of this chapter for further information. Reordering. To reorder sheaths, refer to Reordering Supplies in Appendix D.
CAUTION
Devices containing latex may cause severe allergic reaction in latex sensitive individuals. Refer to FDAs March 29, 1991 Medical Alert on latex products.
Probes 14
Probe Overview
Probe handling and infection control

This information is intended to increase user awareness of the risks of disease transmission associated with using this equipment and provide guidance in making decisions directly affecting the safety of the patient as well as the equipment user. Diagnostic ultrasound systems utilize ultrasound energy that must be coupled to the patient by direct physical contact. Depending on the type of examination, this contact occurs with a variety of tissues ranging from intact skin in a routine exam to recirculating blood in a surgical procedure. The level of risk of infection varies greatly with the type of contact. One of the most effective ways to prevent transmission between patients is with single use or disposable devices. However, ultrasound transducers are complex and expensive devices that must be reused between patients. It is very important, therefore, to minimize the risk of disease transmission by using barriers and through proper processing between patients.
CAUTION
Adequate cleaning and disinfection are necessary to prevent disease transmission. It is the responsibility of the equipment user to verify and maintain the effectiveness of the infection control procedures in use. Always use sterile, legally marketed probe sheaths for intra-cavitary and intra-operative procedures. For neurological intra-operative procedures, use of a legally marketed, sterile, pyrogen free probe sheath is REQUIRED. Probes for neuro surgical use must not be sterilized with liquid chemical sterilants because of the possibility of neuro toxic residues remaining on the probe.
Probes 15
Probe Overview
Probe Cleaning Process
To clean the probe: 1. After each use, disconnect the probe from the ultrasound console and remove all coupling gel from the probe by wiping with a soft cloth and rinsing with flowing water. 2. Wash the probe with mild soap in lukewarm water. Scrub the probe as needed using a soft sponge, gauze, or cloth to remove all visible residue from the probe surface. Prolonged soaking or scrubbing with a soft bristle brush (such as a toothbrush) may be necessary if material has dried onto the probe surface.
After Each Use
3. Rinse the probe with enough clean potable water to remove all visible soap residue. 4. Air dry or dry with a soft cloth. Special Cleaning Instructions for the E721(MTZ): When cleaning the E721(MTZ) probe, it is important to be sure that all surfaces are thoroughly cleaned. This probe has an adjustable two-part handle that must be disassembled to gain access to all surfaces. To disassemble the handle, completely remove the handle adjustment screw located mid-way between the cable entry and probe tip. the two handle halves and adjustment screw must be thoroughly cleaned along with the main probe shaft as described earlier in step 2. After rinsing and drying is completed, the probe handle can be loosely reassembled for the disinfection process.
Probes 16
Probe Overview
Probe Cleaning Process (contd)
C364/CBF C386 C551/CAE
C721
L764/LH 546L 739L LA39 S220/W S222 S317 S611
Fluid Level
Aperature
Contact face within Patient Environment
Illustration 455. Probe Immersion Levels
Probes 17
Probe Overview
Probe Cleaning Process (contd)
CWD5 E721/MTZ CWD2
I739
T739
Fluid Level
Aperature
Contact face within Patient Environment
Illustration 455. Probe Immersion Levels (contd)
Probes 18
B510
Probe Overview
Disinfecting probes
Ultrasound probes can be disinfected using liquid chemical germicides. The level of disinfection is directly related to the duration of contact with the germicide. Increased contact time produces a higher level of disinfection. 2% Glutaraldehyde-based solutions have been shown to be very effective for this purpose. Cidex is the only germicide that has been evaluated for compatibility with the material used to construct the probes. In order for liquid chemical germicides to be effective, all visible residue must be removed during the cleaning process. Thoroughly clean the probe, as described earlier before attempting disinfection. 1. Prepare the germicide solution according to the manufacturers instructions. Be sure to follow all precautions for storage, use and disposal. 2. Place the cleaned and dried probe in contact with the germicide for the time specified by the germicide manufacturer. High-level disinfection is recommended for surface probes and is required for endocavitary and intraoperataive probes (follow the germicide manufacturers recommended time). Probes for neuro surgical intra-operative use must NOT be sterilized with liquid chemical sterilants because of the possibility of neuro toxic residues remaining on the probe. Neurological procedures must be done with the use of legally marketed, sterile, pyrogen free probe sheaths. 3. After removing from the germicide, rinse the probe following the germicide manufacturers rinsing instructions. Flush germicide residue from the probe and allow to air dry.
After Each Use
CAUTION
Probes 19
Probe Overview
Disinfecting probes (contd)

Special Disinfecting Instructions for the E721(MTZ): To properly disinfect the E721(MTZ) probe, the probe handle can be reassembled loosely so that the entire probe with handle can be immersed in the germicide solution. The adjustment screw must be kept loose so that germicide can penetrate to all surfaces. After immersing, rotate and shake the probe while it is below the surface of the germicide to eliminate air pockets. Allow the germicide to remain in contact with the fully immersed probe, for high level disinfection, according to the germicide manufacturers recommended time. To remove all germicide residue, final rinsing should be done following the germicide manufacturers instructions. Remove excess water by shaking and allow to air dry. CREUTZFIELDJACOB DISEASE Neurological use on patients with this disease must be avoided. If a probe becomes contaminated, there is no adequate disinfecting means.
CAUTION Biological Hazard
Probes 20
Probe Overview
Disinfecting probes (contd) WARNING
Ultrasound transducers can easily be damaged by improper handling and by contact with certain chemicals. Failure to follow these precautions can result in serious injury and equipment damage.
S
Do not immerse the probe into any liquid beyond the level specified for that probe. Never immerse the transducer connector or probe adapters into any liquid. Avoid mechanical shock or impact to the transducer and do not apply excessive bending or pulling force to the cable. Transducer damage can result from contact with inappropriate coupling or cleaning agents:
S
Do not soak or saturate transducers with solutions containing alcohol, bleach, ammonium chloride compounds or hydrogen peroxide Avoid contact with solutions or coupling gels containing mineral oil or lanolin Avoid temperatures above 60 C.
S S S
Inspect the probe prior to use for damage or degeneration to the housing, strain relief, lens and seal. Do not use a damaged or defective probe.
Probes 21
Probe Overview
Coupling gels
Applying In order to assure optimal transmission of energy between the patient and probe, a conductive gel or couplant must be applied liberally to the patient where scanning will be performed. Coupling gels should not contain the following ingredients as they are known to cause probe damage:
S S S S S S
Precautions
Methanol, ethanol, isopropanol, or any other alcohol-based product Mineral oil Iodine Lotions Lanolin Aloe Vera
Planned Maintenance
CAUTION
The following maintenance schedule is suggested for the system and probes to ensure optimum operation and safety.
Do the Following
Inspect the Probes Clean the Probes Disinfect Probes
Daily
X
After Each Use

X X
Table 80. Planned Maintenance Program
Probes 22
Probe Discussion
Introduction
The LOGIQ
S
t 400 supports three types of probes:
Curved Array (Convex). Curved Array (Convex) probes, including micro convex, are usually designated by the prefix/suffix C; the endocavity probe is designated by the prefix/suffix E. Linear Array. Linear Array probes are designated by the prefix/suffix L. the linear intra-operative probes are designated by the prefix/suffix I or T. Phased Array Sector. Phased Array Sector probes are designated by the prefix/suffix S; the biplane TEE probe is designated by the prefix/suffix B. Continuous Wave Doppler. Continuous Wave Doppler probes are designated by the prefix/suffix CWD.
Probe naming conventions
C364L
Type
TYPE
*Type
Array Aperture (mm) Center Frequency
B Biplane TEE C Convex CWD Pencil CWD E I L S T Endo (TR/TV) Ishaped intraoperative Linear Sector Tshaped intraoperative
CWD2
Center Frequency Type * Type can be a prefix or a suffix
Table 81. Probe Naming Conventions
Probes 23
Probe Discussion
Curved Array (Convex) Probes

There are five convex probes for the system: the C364 (CBF), C386, C551 (CAE), C721, and E721 (MTZ).
Biopsy Guide Zone

The type of guide displayed for the convex probes is illustrated below.
Illustration 456. Typical Convex Probe Biopsy Guide Zone
Probes 24
Probe Discussion
C364 (CBF) Description
The C364 probe is a general purpose probe for obtaining B-Mode, Doppler, and Color Flow data for the intended uses described in the table below.
Intended Uses
General Purpose Radiology OB/GYN
S S S S S
Capabilities and Features

Wide field of view Penetration Good B-Mode Resolution CFM/Doppler detectability Ergonomics for scanning and cleaning
Table 82. C364 Intended Uses
Biopsy capability
The C364 is capable of biopsies with a reusable Biopsy Bracket and disposable needle barrels. Electronic guide zone show the needle path.
Accessories
Biopsy Guides Sterile Sheaths Disposable needle barrels for different size needles. Disposable sterile sheaths for infection prevention.
Illustration 457. C364 Probe
Probes 25
Probe Discussion
C386 Description
The C386 probe is a general purpose convex probe for obtaining B-Mode, Doppler and Color flow data for the intended uses described in the table below.
Intended Uses
OB/GYN General Abdominal
S S S S S

Wideband for B-Mode resolution & homogenity CFM/Doppler sensitivity Wide field of view Large radius for better surface contact Ergonomics for scanning and cleaning
Biopsy capability
The C386 is capable of biopsies with a reusable Bracket and disposable Needle Barrels. Electronic guidezone shows the needle path.
Accessories
Biopsy Guides Sterile Sheaths Disposable needle barrels for different size needles. The bracket is reuseable. Disposable sterile sheaths for infection prevention.
Probes 26
Probe Discussion
C551 (CAE) Description
Intended Uses
General Purpose Radiology Obstetrics and Gynecology
S S S S

Wide field of view Good B-Mode Resolution CFM/Doppler detectability Ergonomics for scanning and cleaning
Biopsy capability
Accessories
Probes 27
Probe Discussion
C721 Description
Intended Uses
Neonatal Pediatrics
S S S S S

Small Footprint Wide field of view Good B-Mode Resolution CFM/Doppler detectability Ergonomics for scanning and cleaning
Biopsy capability
Accessories
Probes 28
Probe Discussion
E721 (MTZ) Description
The E721 probe is an endocavitary probe for obtaining B-Mode, Doppler, and Color Flow data for the intended uses described in the table below.
Intended Uses
Transvaginal Transrectal
S S S S S S

Wide field of view Small headshell and probe shaft Adjustable handle angle Good B-Mode Resolution CFM/Doppler sensitivity Ergonomics for scanning and cleaning
Table 86. E721 Intended Uses
Biopsy capability
The E721 is capable of biopsies with a reusable biopsy guide. Electronic guide zone show the needle path.
Accessories
Biopsy Guides Non-disposable metal guide. (See biopsy kit user manual for cleaning and disinfection instructions.) Disposable sterile sheaths for infection prevention.
Sterile Sheaths
Illustration 461. E721 Probe
Probes 29
Probe Discussion
Linear Array Probes

There is currently six linear probe for the system: the 739L, L764 (LH), 546L, I739, T739 and LA39 probes.
Biopsy Guide Zone

The type of guide displayed for the linear probe is illustrated below.
Illustration 462. Typical Linear Probe Biopsy Guide Zone
Probes 30
Probe Discussion
I739 Description
The I739 probe is a linear probe intended for intra-operative applications as described in the table below:
Intended Uses
Intra-operative imaging Superficial imaging for organs with space constraints
S S S S S S

Low height I shaped micro-case Long and light probe cable Wideband for B-Mode resolution & homogenity Slant Scan CFM Doppler sensitivity Ergonomics for scanning and cleaning
Table 87. I739 Intended Uses
Biopsy capability
No biopsy guide or guide zone display is available.
Illustration 463. I739 Probe
Probes 31
Probe Discussion
546L Description
The 546L probe is a general purpose linear probe for obtaining B-Mode, Doppler and Color flow data for the intended uses described in the table below.
Intended Uses
Small Parts Deep vessel vascular General Abdominal and OB/GYN
S S S

Wide field of view Slant Scan Good penetration and resolution for deep vascular S Wideband for B-Mode resolution & homogenity S CFM Doppler sensitivity S Ergonomics for scanning and cleaning
Table 88. 546L Intended Uses
Biopsy capability
The 546L is capable of biopsies with a reusable Bracket and disposable Needle Barrels. Electronic guidezone shows the needle path.
Accessories
Illustration 464. 546L Probe
Probes 32
Probe Discussion
739L Description
The 739L probe is a general purpose probe for obtaining B-Mode, Doppler, and Color Flow data for the intended uses described in the table below.
Intended Uses
Small Parts Peripheral Vascular
S S S

Wide field of view Slant scan Wideband for B-Mode resolution & homogenity S CFM Doppler sensitivity S Ergonomics for scanning and cleaning
Table 89. 739L Intended Uses
Biopsy capability
The 739L is capable of biopsies with a reusable Biopsy Bracket and disposable needle barrels. Electronic guide zone show the needle path.
Accessories
Illustration 465. 739L Probe
Probes 33
Probe Discussion
L764 (LH) Description
The L764 probe is a general purpose probe for obtaining B-Mode, Doppler, and Color Flow data for the intended uses described in the table below.
Intended Uses
Mammography Small Parts Peripheral Vascular
S S S S

Wide field of view Good B-Mode Resolution CFM Doppler detectability Ergonomics for scanning and cleaning
Table 90. L764 Intended Uses
Biopsy capability
The L764 is capable of biopsies with a reusable Biopsy Bracket and disposable needle barrels. Electronic guide zone show the needle path.
Accessories
Illustration 466. L764 Probe
Probes 34
Probe Discussion
T739 Description
The T739 probe is a linear probe intended for intra-operative applications as described in the table below:
Intended Uses
S S S S S S

Low height T shaped micro-case Long and light probe cable Slant scan Wideband for B-Mode resolution & homogenity CFM Doppler sensitivity Ergonomics for scanning and cleaning
Table 91. T739 Intended Uses
Biopsy capability
The T739 is capable of biopsies with a reusable Bracket and disposable Needle Barrels. Electronic guidezone shows the needle path.
Accessories
Illustration 467. T739 Probe
Probes 35
Probe Discussion
LA39 Description
The LA39 probe is a general purpose linear probe for obtaining B-Mode, Doppler and Color flow data for the intended uses described in the table below.
Intended Uses
S S

Slant scan Wideband for B-Mode resolution & homogenity S CFM Doppler sensitivity S Ergonomics for scanning and cleaning
Table 92. LA39 Intended Uses
Biopsy capability
The LA39 is capable of biopsies with a reusable Bracket and disposable Needle Barrels. Electronic guidezone shows the needle path.
Accessories
Illustration 468. LA39 Probe
Probes 36
Probe Discussion
Sector Probes
There is currently five sector probes for the system: the S220 (W), S222, S317 and S611 and B510 probes.
Biopsy Guide Zone

The type of guide displayed for the sector probes is illustrated below.
Illustration 469. Typical Sector Probe Biopsy Guide Zone
Probes 37
Probe Discussion
S220 (W) Description
The S220 probe is a general purpose probe for obtaining B-Mode, Doppler, and Color Flow data for the intended uses described in the table below.
Intended Uses
Cardiology General Abdominal
S S S S S S

Small footprint Penetration Steerable Doppler Good B-Mode Resolution CFM/Doppler detectability Ergonomics for scanning and cleaning
Table 93. S220 Intended Uses
Biopsy capability
No biopsy guide or guide zone is available
Illustration 470. S220 Probe
Probes 38
Probe Discussion
S222 Description
The S222 probe is a general purpose probe for obtaining B-Mode, Doppler, and Color Flow data for the intended uses described in the table below.
Intended Uses
Transcranial Cardiology

S Small
footprint S Dedicated handle design for Transcranial S Wideband for B-Mode resolution & homogenity S CFM Doppler sensitivity S Ergonomics for scanning and cleaning
Biopsy capability
No biopsy guide or guidezone display is available.
Probes 39
Probe Discussion
S317 Description
The S317 probe is a general purpose sector probe for obtaining B-Mode, Doppler and Color flow data for the intended uses described in the table below.
Intended Uses
Cardiology General Abdomen
S S S

Small footprint Steerable Doppler Wideband for B-Mode resolution & homogenity S CFM Doppler sensitivity S Ergonomically designed micro-case for scanning and cleaning
Biopsy capability
The S317 is capable of biopsies with a reusable Bracket and disposable Needle Barrels. Electronic guidezone shows the needle path.
Accessories
Probes 40
Probe Discussion
S611 Description
The S611 probe is a general purpose sector probe for obtaining B-Mode, Doppler and Color flow data for the intended uses described in the table below.
Intended Uses
Cardiology, Pediatric and Neonatal Neonatal head
S S S

Small footprint Steerable Doppler Wideband for B-Mode resolution & homogenity S CFM Doppler sensitivity S Ergonomically designed micro-case for scanning and cleaning
Biopsy capability
Accessories
Sterile Sheaths Disposable sterile sheaths for infection prevention
Probes 41
Probe Discussion
B510 Description
The B510 probe is a Biplane Transesophageal probe for obtaining B-Mode, Doppler, and Color Flow data within the intended uses described in the table below.
Intended Uses
Cardiology from the Esophagus
S Small footprint S Biplane imaging S Steerable Doppler S Good B-Mode Resolution S CFM/Doppler sensitivity S Ergonomics for one hand
manipulation of the handle
Table 97. B510 Intended Uses
Biopsy capability
Accessories
Sterile Sheaths Disposable sterile sheaths for infection prevention.
.
Probes 42
Illustration 474. B510 Probe
NOTE: Refer to the User Manual that comes with the probe for details on handling, operation and cleaning.
Probe Discussion
CWD Probes
There is currently two pencil CWD probes for the system: CWD2 and CWD5 probes.
CWD2 Description
The CWD2 probe is a pencil CWD probe for obtaining Continous Wave Doppler data within the intended uses described in the table below.
Intended Uses
CW Doppler for Cardiology and Abdomen

S High
sensitivity S T-bar support for holding S Ergonomics for scanning and cleaning
Table 98. CWD2 Intended Uses
Illustration 475. CWD2 Probe
Probes 43
Probe Discussion
CWD5 Description
The CWD5 probe is a pencil CWD probe for obtaining Continous Wave Doppler data within the intended uses described in the table below.
Intended Uses
CW Doppler for Peripheral Vascular

S High
sensitivity S T-bar support for holding S Ergonomics for scanning and cleaning
Table 99. CWD5 Intended Uses
Illustration 476. CWD5 Probe
Probes 44
User Maintenance
Troubleshooting Operator Diagnostics Quality Assurance System Care and Maintenance
This section describes basic maintenance items available to the user. Error messages are described, diagnostic tests available to the user are outlined, suggested quality assurance checks are presented and routine system maintenance is detailed.
User Maintenance 1
User Maintenance
User Maintenance 2
Troubleshooting
Introduction
Listed in this section are problem or system messages that may be encountered, possible causes for the problem or message, and the appropriate action to take to correct the situation. If additional information or assistance is needed contact the local Applications, Sales or Service Representative.
User Maintenance 3
Troubleshooting
Who To Contact
For additional information or assistance, please contact the local distributor or the appropriate support resource listed below: USA
GE Medical Systems Ultrasound Service Engineering 4855 W. Electric Avenue Milwaukee, WI 53219 Customer Answer Center TEL: (1) 8004371171 FAX: (1) 4146474090
TEL: (1) 8006825327 or (1) 4145245255
CANADA
GE Medical Systems Ultrasound Service Engineering 4855 W. Electric Avenue Milwaukee, WI 53219 Customer Answer Center TEL: (1) 8006640732
TEL: (1) 8006825327 or (1) 4145245255
LATIN & SOUTH AMERICA

GE Medical Systems Ultrasound Service Engineering 4855 W. Electric Avenue Milwaukee, WI 53219 Customer Answer Center TEL: (1) 3057352304
TEL: (1) 8006825327 or (1) 4145245255
EUROPE
GE Medical Systems Europe European Support Center 283 rue de la miniere BP 34 78533 BUC CEDEX FRANCE TEL: (33) (1) 30.70.40.40 FAX: (33) (1) 30.70.42.50
ASIA
GE Medical Systems Asia Asia Support Center 674 Takakura cho, Hachioujishi Tokyo, 192 JAPAN TEL: (81) 426560033 FAX: (81) 426560053
User Maintenance 4
Troubleshooting
Who To Contact (contd)

AUSTRIA
GE GesmbH Medical Systems Austria Prinz Eugen Strasse 8/8 A1040 WIEN TEL: 0660 8651 toll free FAX: +43 1 505 38 74 TLX: 136314
BELGIUM
GE Medical Systems Benelux Gulkenrodestraat 3 B2160 WOMMELGEM TEL: +32 0 3 320 12 11 FAX: +32 0 3 320 12 59 TLX: 72722
DENMARK
GE Medical Systems Danmark Skovlytoften 4 DK2840 HOLTE TEL: +45 45 51 00 55 FAX: +45 42 42 59 89
FRANCE
GE Medical Systems 738 rue Yves Carmen F92658 BOULOGNE CEDEX TEL: +33 1 46 10 01 30 FAX: +33 1 46 10 01 20
GERMANY
GE Medical Systems Deutschland GmbH & Co. KG Praunheimer Landstrasse 50 D60488 FRANKFURT AM MAIN TEL: +49 69 9760 7380 FAX: +49 69 7682 237 TLX: 412002 GEGF D
GREECE
GE Medical Systems Hellas 41, Nikolaou Plastira Street G171 21 NEA SMYRNI TEL: +30 1 93 24 582 FAX: +30 1 93 58 414
ITALY
GE Medical Systems Italia Via Monte Albenza 9 I20052 MONZA TEL: +39 39 20 881 FAX: +39 39 73 37 86 TLX: 3333 28
NETHERLANDS
GE Medical Systems Nederland B.V. Atoomweg 512 NL3542 AB UTRECHT TEL: +31 304 79711 FAX: +31 304 11702
POLAND
GE Medical Systems Polska Krzywickiego 34 P02078 WARSZAWA TEL: +48 2 625 59 62 FAX: +48 2 615 59 66
User Maintenance 5
Troubleshooting
Who to Contact (contd)

PORTUGAL
GE Medical Systems Portuguesa S.A. Rua Sa da Bandeira, 585 Apartado 4094 P4002 PORTO CODEX TEL: +351 2 2007696/97 FAX: +351 2 2084494 TLX: 22804
RUSSIA
GE VNIIEM Mantulinskaya UI. 5A 123100 MOSCOW TEL: +7 095 956 7037 FAX: +7 502 220 32 59 TLX: 613020 GEMED SU
SPAIN
GE Medical Systems Espaa Hierro 1 Arturo Gimeno Poligono Industrial I E28850 TORREJON DE ARDOZ TEL: +34 1 676 4012 +34 1 676 4047 FAX: +34 1 675 3364 TLX: 22384 A/B GEMDE
SWEDEN
GE Medical Systems POBOX 1243 S16428 KISTA TEL: +46 87 50 57 00 FAX: +46 87 51 30 90 TLX: 12228 CGRSWES
SWITZERLAND
GE Medical Systems (Schweiz) AG Sternmattweg 1 CH6010 KRIENS TEL: +41 41 425577 FAX: +41 41 421859
TURKEY
GE Medical Systems Turkiye A.S. Mevluk Pehliran Sodak Yilmaz Han, No 24 Kat 1 Gayretteppe ISTANBUL TEL: +90 212 75 5552 FAX: +90 212 211 2571
UNITED KINGDOM
IGE Medical Systems Coolidge House 352 Buckingham Avenue SLOUGH Berkshire SL1 4ER TEL: +44 753 874000 FAX: +44 753 696067
Manufacturer
GE YOKAGAWA MEDICAL SYSTEMS
67-4 Takakura cho, Hachioujishi Tokyo, 192 JAPAN TEL: (81) 426-56-0033 FAX: (81) 426-56-0053
User Maintenance 6
Troubleshooting
Trouble images
The LOGIQ 400 has the capacity to store as many as eight trouble images. The trouble image files may be saved to MOD for archival or loaded back into the system hard drive for display and review. The trouble images on file can also be retrieved for analysis through Insite, the exclusive remote diagnostic capabilities of the LOGIQ family of products.
To Store a Trouble Image to the Hard Drive

Should the LOGIQ 400 ever have a problem imaging, the system has the capability of storing up to eight trouble images on the hard disk drive. To store a trouble image: 1. Freeze the trouble image. 2. Press the Ctrl, W keys simultaneously. The message In progress. Please wait. is displayed while the image is being saved to the hard drive. After the image has been saved, the message Input comment? y or n is displayed. Press n for no comments. Press y to add a maximum of 42 characters as comments to the trouble image file. Press Return after commenting is complete. After image number eight is saved, there is a warning to indicate the disk space is full. The ninth attempt to save a trouble image will require writing over the first image, etc. (first in, first out).
.
t
The message Overwrite the old image (DIAGIG00) ? y or n is displayed. Press y to replace the old trouble image with the new one. Press n to cancel the trouble image store action.
NOTE: Trouble images do not display Patient Name, ID or Hospital Name information. That portion of the image is blanked out and will not be shown when the file is recalled for display.
User Maintenance 7
Troubleshooting
To Save Trouble Images to MOD
To save trouble images to MOD:
S S
Select the Set Up Top menu. From the Set Up Sub-Menu, select Utility. The Utility Menu appears as shown in Illustration 477.
NOTE: MOD media used to save trouble images must first be initialized (formatted) in the utility menu selection 09 Media Initialization.
From the Utility menu select 03 Trouble Image Save/Load/Display . Enter menu number 03 and press Return.
User Maintenance 8
Troubleshooting
To Save Trouble Images to MOD (contd)
S
From the Trouble Image Save/Load/Display menu select 1: Save. Enter menu number 1 and press Return.
Illustration 478. Trouble Image Save/Load/Display Menu

S
A message will be displayed to place an MOD disk in the drive and press any key to continue. The system will read all trouble images from the hard drive and display the image menu in two pages of four files each. The line available under the file number, date/time and mode information is the 42 character comment line.
User Maintenance 9
Troubleshooting
Illustration 479. Saved Trouble Image Menu
Trouble image files must be saved one at a time.

S
Enter the number of the file (i.e. 01) and press Return. The message Saving now is displayed. The system will take a few moments to save the image file.
User Maintenance 10
Troubleshooting
After the save operation is complete, the message Press Y to continue, or Ctrl+R to return. is displayed. Pressing Y will prompt for another file menu number to be saved. Pressing Ctrl+R will return to the previous menu screen.
Illustration 480. Trouble Image Save Complete
User Maintenance 11
Troubleshooting
To Load Trouble Images from MOD
Trouble images can be loaded from the MOD to the hard drive. To load trouble images from the MOD:
S
From the Set Up/Utility menu select 03 Trouble Image Save/Load/Display . Enter menu number 03 and press Return. From the Trouble Image Save/Load/Display menu select 2: Load. Enter menu number 2 and press Return. A message will be displayed to place an MOD disk in the drive and press any key to continue. The system will read all trouble images from the MOD and display the image menu in two pages of four files each. The line available under the file number, date/time and mode information is the 42 character comment line. Trouble image files must be loaded one at a time.
S S
Enter the number of the file to be loaded (i.e. 01) and press Return. The message Loading now is displayed. The system will take a few moments to load the image file. After the load operation is complete, the message Press Y to continue, or Ctrl+R to return. is displayed. Pressing Y will prompt for another file menu number to be loaded. Pressing Ctrl+R will return to the previous menu screen.
To Display Trouble Images

Trouble images can only be displayed from the files stored on the hard drive.
S
From the Set Up/Utility menu select 03 Trouble Image Save/Load/Display . Enter menu number 03 and press Return. From the Trouble Image Save/Load/Display menu select 3: Display. Enter menu number 3 and press Return.
A menu of the trouble Image files on the hard drive is displayed in two pages of four files each if necessary.
User Maintenance 12
Troubleshooting
To Display Trouble Images (contd)
Illustration 481. Trouble Image Display Menu

S
Enter the number of the file to be displayed (i.e. 01) and press Return. The image will be displayed on the monitor for analysis.
Loose cables
If ECG cables are loose: 1. Check the ECG cable lead connection OR 2. Check the connection on the back panel. If peripheral cables are loose: 1. Check the connections on the back of the peripheral OR 2. Check the connection on the back panel.
User Maintenance 13
Troubleshooting
Display Messages
The LOGIQ 400 provides a variety of messages concerning the status of the systems operation.
S S
System Error Messages are displayed when a hardware problem is detected. Operation Error Messages are displayed when the user selects a control that is not appropriate to the current scan mode or function. Operation Guide Messages are displayed to inform the operator of a completed task or required action. Warning Messages are displayed for patient safety or system failure reasons. System Preparation Message is displayed when the system powers up.
S S S
These messages are displayed in the single line message area at the bottom of the display. The message display time varies depending on the type of message. Some messages may be accompanied by an audio tone. For Operation Error Messages, the user can choose to turn on/off the audio tone that accompanies the display in Set Up/System Parameters page 1. The User can turn on/off the recording of the error message line in Set Up/System Parameters page 4 (Maskline Record). The following tables outline the error messages, their possible cause and cure.
User Maintenance 14
Troubleshooting
System Error Message Description

Problem/ Message
SYS ERROR: BUS ERROR. PC: ######## AD: ######## SYS ERROR: FILE NOT FOUND. FILE: ############
Category
General
Possible Cause
Bus error detected.
Possible Corrective Action

*
Requested file not found.
SYS ERROR: BOARD Hardware board is non NON EXISTENT. existent. BOARD: ##### SYS ERROR: UNEXPECTED CPU EXCEPTION. SYS ERROR: ILLEGAL FILE FORMAT. FILE: ############ SYS ERROR: SCSI ERROR. DEVICE: ### CODE: ######## SYS ERROR: LOCAL CPU ERROR. BOARD: ##### SYS ERROR: INTERRUPT TIME OUT. BOARD: ##### VECTOR: ## Unexpected CPU exception is encountered. File format is illegal.
SCSI device error is encountered.
Local CPU error is encountered. Time out of waiting interrupt.
Table 100. System Error Message Description
* If a System Error Message occurs, record the message and contact a Service Representative. Be aware that the system may be operating at reduced capabilities, some functions inoperative or not operating at all.
User Maintenance 15
Troubleshooting
Operation Error Message Description

Problem/ Message
Register is filled.
Category
General
Possible Cause
Cannot register any more because registration function has reached its limit. Cannot delete any more because registration function is empty. System requires operator reaction to save some data. There is pre-existing customized data when saving. A key other than those specified was pressed. The data input is not correct.

*
Register is empty.
Save data? y or n.
Y to save data, N to not save data. Y to save changes, N to ignore changes. Enter Y or N. Enter correct data.
Overwrite existing data? y or n. Please Select y or n. Improper Data Selected.
Table 101. Operation Error Message Description
* If System Error Message occurs, record the message and contact a Service Representative. Be aware that the system may be operating at reduced capabilities, some functions inoperative or not operating at all.
User Maintenance 16
Troubleshooting
Operation Error Message Description (contd)

Problem/ Message Possible Cause
Paper in the printer is jammed. Something is wrong with the ribbon cassette or its setting. The paper cassette setting is wrong. The printer is out of paper. The top hatch of the printer is open. The bottom hatch of the printer is open.
Category

Locate and clear the paper jam. Remove ribbon and re-install. Remove cassette, set and re-install. Add paper. Open/shut top hatch. Open/shut bottom hatch. Remove casette, adjust and reinstall. Turn power off and on again.
Recording Check Printer. Paper Devices is jammed. Color Video Printer Check Printer. Ribbon Cassette error. Check Printer. Paper Cassette error. Check Printer, Paper Supply empty. Shut the top hatch of printer. Shut the bottom hatch of printer.
Check Printer, Paper is The placing of paper is incorrect. incorrect. Check Printer. There is no response from the printer.
Table 101. Operation Error Message Description (contd)
User Maintenance 17
Troubleshooting

Problem/ Message
Check M.I.C., No Exposures Left.
Category
Recording Devices Multi Image Camera
Possible Cause
The maximum number of prints have been made.

Reverse cassette or install a new cassette. Check all video connections. Turn power off, turn power on. Check all VCR controls. Insert tape.
Check M.I.C., No Video There is no video Input. signal being input to the M.I.C. Check M.I.C. There is no response from the M.I.C. There is no response from the VCR. The VCR has no tape.
Recording Devices VCR
Check VCR. Check VCR. No Cassette. This function is not available. Protected. Check Tape.
The function selected Perform from VCR is not available in some front panel. situations. This tape has been write protected. The system requires the operator to input measurement(s). The system requires the operator to press Freeze before completing measurements. The system no longer has correct data. The system cannot calibrate automatically because there is no barcode data on tape. Use non protected tape. Input necessary measurements. Freeze before all measurements.
Measurement & Calculation
Measurement(s) Required. Press FREEZE to complete.
No correct data left. Manual Calibration Required.
Enter new measurements. Reply Yes to manual calibration.
Barcode sum check error.
There is something Retry, use manual wrong with the barcode calibration. data.
User Maintenance 18
Troubleshooting

Problem/ Message
Transducer Not Recognized. Transducer Calibration in Process. Option Setting Option Not Available.
Category
Scanning Function
Possible Cause
An invalid probe has been connected.

Remove invalid probe.
Probe change is taking Wait for process to place. complete. The option to perform the requested function is not available. Improper data has been input. An invalid key has been pressed. The input data is too large. A key other than those specified was pressed. Improper data has been input. Install desired option.
New Patient, Invalid, Input a proper ID/Name Function data. Press RETURN to exit. Data range over, Input proper data. Please answer y or n. Improper Data Selected. Miscellaneous No function is defined.
Input valid data. Press Return. Numbers too large. Y for yes, N for no. Input proper data.
No function is defined Use setup menu to for the User Define key define. that was pressed. Operator Decision Requested Type in either Y or y for Yes N or n for No
(Y/N)
User Maintenance 19
Troubleshooting
Operation Guide Message Description

Problem/ Message
Data is saved.
Category
Preset & Setup Function
Possible Cause
The system completed saving the data that was requested. The operator can use the arrow keys to input the value.

NA
Input value by Rocker Button.
Use the Ellipse arrow keys. Type in characters.
Input character strings. The operator needs to input some character strings. Select an initial data. TRACKBALL and SET are available. The operator needs to select initial data. The operator can use the Trackball and Set key to operate the function. The system completed copying the data that was requested.
Input proper data. NA
Recommended value are copyed. Scan Guide
NA
Invalid CFM image was The PRF is changed, cleared. and invalid CFM image is cleared. In progress. Please wait. The system needs several seconds to do something.
NA
Miscellaneous
NA
Table 102. Operation Guide Message Description
User Maintenance 20
Troubleshooting
Operation Guide Message Description (contd)

Problem/ Message
Searching.
Category
VCR Search Guide
Possible Cause
The VCR is searching the tape.

NA NA Perform a system search.
Search was completed. The VCR search is completed. Requested information doesnt exist on the tape. Requested information doesnt exist in System. The patient image doesnt exist on the tape.
The information doesnt Check all patient exist on the hard drive. information. Yes to register new tape, No to cancel. Yes to retry, No to cancel. Press Play and Freeze. Yes to continue, No to cancel.
Can not read Tape ID. The tape ID cannot be Register the new tape? read. (y/n) Retry to read Tape ID? (y/n) Please play VCR image and freeze at the other frame. Save patient information on VCR Tape? (y/n) The tape ID cannot be read. The operator has retried to read the tape ID. The operator pressed the key for saving patient information on the VCR tape.
Save patient The operator pressed information to System? the key for saving (y/n) patient information on the hard drive. System ID = ##### Tape ID = ##### System ID = ##### New Tape ID = ##### The tape was mounted or the new tape was registered. The tape was mounted.
Yes to save, No to cancel.
NA
NA
Table 102. Operation Guide Message Description (contd)
User Maintenance 21
Troubleshooting
Warning Message Description

Problem/ Message
WARNING: Temperature error.
Category
Temperature Safety
Possible Cause
System internal temperature is at a maximum, but not caused by fan failure. System fan has stopped working properly. System internal temperature is at a maximum, caused by the fan not working properly. The High Voltage is abnormal.

Reduce room temperature.
WARNING
WARNING: Cooling Fan Failure. WARNING: Cooling Fan Failure. Temperature error.
Call service.
Reduce room temperature; call service.
WARNING: HV Abnormal. WARNING: Probe Temperature error. WARNING: NOW START THE POWER OFF PROCESS.
Call service.
The probe temperature Call service. is at a maximum. The system shutdown process has begun. Call service.
Table 103. Warning Message Description
User Maintenance 22
Operator Diagnostics
Introduction
Refer to Section 4-3 of the LOGIQ 400 Service Manual (2127661). The user is able to run diagnostic tests such as: System Test 1 (reduced version) Black & White Test Pattern Color Test Pattern Graphics Test Pattern The test patterns can be used to adjust the display monitor or peripheral displays. The system test provides a reduced (pass/fail) version of the diagnostic used to check the LOGIQ 400 software.
Probe Selection
Connect and select the C364 probe for diagnostic test purposes.
User Maintenance 23
Accessing Diagnostics
To access the available diagnostics, select the Set Up Top Menu. When Set Up is selected, the Set Up Sub Menu is displayed.
Illustration 482. Set Up Sub Menu
Select Diag. from the Set Up Sub Menu. The diagnostic test menu appears on the screen.
Illustration 483. Diagnostic Test-Menu
Type in the desired test number and press Return. The test begins running or the test pattern is displayed. EXE TIME is the test execution time. (The time needed to run the test.)
User Maintenance 24
System Test 1 (reduced)

Select number one from the diagnostic test menu. System Test 1 is a collection of 24 individual tests that are run in sequence. These are the full or reduced versions of the hardware tests. The diagnostics in System Test 1 are: TEST NUMBER 03 04 05 06 08 09 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 27 29 30 31 TEST NAME Beam Former Test 1 Beam Former Test 2 Log Test Frequency Characteristics Test Doppler Test 1 Doppler Test 2 Color Flow Test 1 Color Flow Test 2 TLMP Test (reduced) DDSC Test (reduced) CINE Test (reduced) VIDO Test (reduced) VIDO & VPBM Test (reduced) EXBO Test (reduced) RCTL Test (reduced) PIOP Test (reduced) Keyboard RAM Test (reduced) Power Supply & Thermal Test B-Mode Noise Floor Test D-Mode Noise Floor Test CFM Mode Noise Floor Test
Three possible messages will be displayed to the right of the test name. RUNNING FAILED PASSED The test is in progress. The test was not completed successfully for some reason. The test was run and completed successfully.
User Maintenance 25
System Test 1 (reduced) (contd)

Illustration 484 shows the screen display during system Test 1 operation.
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS System Test
03 Beam Former Test1 04 Beam Former Test2 05 Log Test 06 Frequency Characteristic Test 08 Doppler Test1 09 Doppler Test2 11 Color Flow Test1 12 Color Flow Test2 13 TLMP Test (Reduced) 14 DDSC Test (Reduced) 15 CINE Test (Reduced) 16 VIDO Test (Reduced) 17 VIDO & VPBM Test (Reduced) 18 EXBO Test (Reduced) 19 RCTL Test (Reduced) 20 PIOP Test (Reduced) 21 Keyboard RAM Test (Reduced) 27 Power Supply & Thermal Test 29 B Mode Noise Floor Test 30 D Mode Noise Floor Test 31 CFM Mode Noise Floor Test Running
03/21/94 01: 31: 50
Illustration 484. System Test 1 Screen Display
Should any test fail, consider that the system may be operating at reduced capabilities. Record the System Test 1 results and contact a local service representative. Total run time for System Test 1 is approximately 15 minutes.
Test Pattern Black & White

Select number two from the Diagnostic Test Menu. A black/white test pattern is displayed. This pattern can be used to adjust the LOGIQ 400 monitor or peripheral displays.
User Maintenance 26
Test Pattern Color

Select number three from the Diagnostic Test Menu. A color video test pattern is displayed. This pattern can be used to adjust the LOGIQ 400 or peripheral output devices.
Test Pattern Graphics

Select number four from the Diagnostic Test Menu. A graphic video test pattern is displayed. This checks the graphics generator of the LOGIQ 400 and can be used for monitors or peripheral devices.
User Maintenance 27
User Maintenance 28
Quality Assurance
Introduction
A good Quality Assurance Evaluation program consists of planned systematic actions that provide the user with adequate confidence that their diagnostic ultrasound system will produce consistently high quality images and quantitative information. Therefore, it is in the best interests of every ultrasound user to routinely monitor equipment performance. The frequency of Quality Assurance evaluations should be based on users specific needs and clinical practice. Periodic monitoring is essential in order to detect the performance changes that occur through normal aging of system components. Routine equipment evaluations may also reduce the duration of exams, number of repeat exams, and maintenance time required. Refer to the System Care and Maintenance section of this chapter for system and peripheral routine preventive maintenance instructions.
User Maintenance 29
Quality Assurance
Typical Tests to Perform

Quality assurance measurements provide results relating to system performance. Typically these are:
S S S S S S
Axial Measurement Accuracy Lateral Measurement Accuracy Axial and Lateral Resolution Penetration Functional & Contrast Resolution Gray Scale Photography.
With these tests, a performance baseline can be set at installation with the phantom in your department. Future test results can be compared to the baseline in order to maintain a record of system performance trends.
User Maintenance 30
Quality Assurance
Frequency of tests
Quality assurance tests are used to determine whether a scanner is providing the same level of performance from day to day.
Every 3 Months Or Every 400 Patients Or If system performance in question
The frequency of testing varies with the amount of system usage and modes to be tested. It is recommended that the user perform quality assurance tests at least every three months or every 400 patient studies. Tests should also be performed when a question about system performance exists.
A mobile system may require more frequent tests.

Image quality should also be tested immediately after the following events:
S S S
Service calls System upgrades/modifications Dropped probe, power surge, etc.
User Maintenance 31
Quality Assurance
Phantoms
Quality Assurance Evaluations should be done with phantoms and test objects that are applicable to the parameters being evaluated or to the users clinical practice. Typical phantoms are composed of material that acoustically mimic human tissue. Pins, anechoic and echogenic targets are physically positioned to provide information for a variety of tests. Doppler phantoms are currently expensive and complicated to deal with on the user level. If a problem with any Doppler parameters or measurement is suspected, contact a Service Representative for evaluation.
The RMI 430GS phantom is recommended. It is the most current one recommended to our field service personnel and will provide the necessary targets and extended life necessary for consistent system testing.
User Maintenance 32
Quality Assurance
Lateral Distance Measurement
Penetration 2 Axial Distance Measurement Contrast Resolution & Gray Scale Photography
6 4 3 2 1 8 Functional Resolution
10 Lateral Resolution
12
14
RMI 403GS
Axial Resolution
16
Illustration 485. Typical Phantom
User Maintenance 33
Quality Assurance
Baselines
An absolute necessity for a quality assurance program is establishing baselines for each test or check. Baselines are established after the system has been verified to be working properly at installation or after a repair. If a probe or major assembly is replaced, new baselines should be generated. Baselines can be made by adjusting system parameters to prescribed levels or to the best possible image. The key factor to remember is reproducibility. The same conditions must be reproduced for each periodic check. All system parameters not displayed on the monitor should be recorded for the permanent record.
Periodic Checks
Periodic checks are performed on a regular basis as previously recommended. For the data to be valid, periodic checks should mimic the baseline setup parameters. The resulting image, when scanning the phantom exactly as before, should be recorded and compared to the baseline. When a matching image is obtained, it can be assumed that the system performance has not degraded from the baseline. If a significant difference between the baseline and periodic check is noted, double check the system setup and repeat the test. If the difference between the baseline and periodic check persists, contact a local Service Representative.
Failing to reproduce the control settings as in the baselines will introduce errors in the data and potentially invalidate the results.
User Maintenance 34
Quality Assurance
Results
Lack of standardization among test instruments, the wide range of acceptance criteria, and incomplete knowledge regarding the significance of certain performance parameters prohibit the establishment of absolute performance criteria for these tests. Quality Assurance Evaluation results should be compared to previously-recorded results. Performance trends can then be detected. Unacceptable performance or diminishing trends should be identified for maintenance or repair before a malfunction or inappropriate diagnosis occurs. The user should determine the best method for recording and archiving the baseline and periodic checks. In most cases the choice is hard copy. It is important to maintain good consistent records for inspections that may arise, as well as to detect system performance trends.
User Maintenance 35
Quality Assurance
System Setup
The user should tailor the tests to their particular needs. It is certainly not necessary to make all checks with all probes. A representative example, with the probes used most often by the customer, should be adequate in judging system performance trends. Use a gray scale phantom as the scan object for the tests. Commercial phantoms are supplied with its own operator manual. Be familiar with proper phantom operating procedures prior to use for quality assurance evaluations. 1. Adjust image monitor. Brightness and contrast should be set to the normal viewing of a good gray scale image. 2. Check all recording devices for proper duplication of image monitor. Ensure that what is seen is what is recorded. Check the B/W or Color page printer, VCR, MIC, or Laser camera. 3. Annotate non-displayed image processing controls. 4. Set TGC slide pots to center (detent) position. 5. Place focal zone marker(s) in area of interest for an optimum image.
User Maintenance 36
Quality Assurance
Test Procedures
The following are recommended Quality Assurance tests. A brief description of the test, the benefit it provides and steps to accomplish the test are supplied. The importance of recording scan parameters and consistent record keeping cannot be stressed enough. Reproducibility to monitor system trends is the key to quality assurance evaluations. Using the systems dual image display format is often very convenient and saves recording media.
User Maintenance 37
Quality Assurance
Axial distance measurements
Description Benefit Axial measurements are the distance measurements obtained along the sound beam. The accurate measurement of the size, depth and volume of a structure is a critical factor in determining a proper diagnosis. Most imaging systems use depth markers and/or electronic calipers for this purpose. Axial distance should be measured in the near, mid and far fields as well as in zoom. If necessary, different depths or fields of view can be tested. To measure axial distance: 1. Scan a test phantom with precisely-spaced vertical pin targets. 2. Adjust all scan controls, as necessary, for the best image of the pin targets to typical depths for the probe being used. 3. Press Freeze to stop image acquisition. 4. Perform a standard distance measurement between the pins at different points in the image. Record all images for archiving. 5. Scan the vertical pins in zoom or at different depth/scale factors. 6. Press Freeze to stop image acquisition, repeat the distance measurements between pins and record the images for archiving. 7. Document the measurements for reference and future comparison.
Method
Procedure
User Maintenance 38
Quality Assurance
Axial distance measurements (contd)
Axial Distance Measurement
Illustration 486. Example of Axial Distance Measurement
Contact a Service Engineer if vertical measurements differ by more than 1.5% of the actual distance.
User Maintenance 39
Quality Assurance
Lateral distance measurements
Description Benefit Lateral measurements are distance measurements obtained perpendicular to the axis of the sound beam. The purpose is the same as vertical measurements. Precisely-spaced horizontal pin targets are scanned and results compared to the known distance in the phantom. Lateral distance should be measured in the near, mid and far fields as well as in zoom. If necessary, different depths of fields of view can be tested. To measure lateral distance: 1. Scan a test phantom with precisely-spaced horizontal pin targets. 2. Adjust all scan controls, as necessary, for the best image of the pin targets from side to side. 3. Press Freeze to stop image acquisition. 4. Perform a standard distance measurement between the pins at different points in the image. Record all images for archiving. 5. Scan the horizontal pins in zoom or at different depth/scale factors. 6. Press Freeze to stop image acquisition, repeat the distance measurements between pins and record the images for archiving. 7. Document the measurements for reference and future comparison.
Lateral Distance Measurement
Method
Procedure
Illustration 487. Example of Lateral Distance Measurement
Contact a Service Engineer if horizontal measurements differ by more than 3mm or 3% of that depth, whichever is greater.
User Maintenance 40
Quality Assurance
Axial resolution
Description Axial resolution is the minimum reflector separation between two closely-spaced objects to produce discrete reflections along the axis of the sound beam. It can also be monitored by checking the vertical size of known pin targets. Axial resolution is affected by the transmitting section of the system and the probe. Benefit In clinical imaging, poor axial resolution displays small structures lying close together as a single dot. This may lead to improper interpretation of the ultrasound image. To measure Axial resolution: 1. Scan a test phantom with precisely-spaced vertical pin targets. 2. Adjust all scan controls, as necessary, for the best image of the pin targets to typical depths for the probe being used. 3. Press Freeze to stop image acquisition. 4. Perform a standard distance measurement of the pin vertical thickness at different points in the image. Record all images for archiving. 5. Scan the vertical pins in zoom or at different depth/scale factors. 6. Press Freeze to stop image acquisition, repeat the vertical thickness measurements of the pins and record the images for archiving. 7. Document the measurements for reference and future comparison.
Procedure
User Maintenance 41
Quality Assurance
Axial resolution (contd)
Axial Resolution
1mm
Illustration 488. Example of Axial Resolution
Axial resolution should remain stable over time. Contact a Service Engineer if any changes are observed.
User Maintenance 42
Quality Assurance
Lateral resolution
Description Lateral resolution is the minimum reflector separation between two closely spaced objects to produce discrete reflections perpendicular to the axis of the sound beam. It can also be monitored by checking the horizontal size of known pin targets. Lateral resolution is dependent upon the beam width produced by the probe. The narrower the beam, the better the lateral resolution. The beam width is affected by the frequency, degree of focusing, and distance of the object from the face of the probe. Benefit Clinically, poor lateral resolution will display small structures lying close together as a single dot. This may lead to improper interpretation of the ultrasound image. To measure lateral resolution: 1. Scan a test phantom with precisely-spaced horizontal pin targets. 2. Adjust all scan controls, as necessary, for the best image of the pin targets from side to side. 3. Press Freeze to stop image acquisition. 4. Perform a standard distance measurement of the horizontal thickness of a pin at different points in the image. Record all images for archiving. 5. Scan the horizontal pins in zoom or at different depth/scale factors. 6. Press Freeze to stop image acquisition, repeat the horizontal thickness measurements of the pins and record the images for archiving. 7. Document the measurements for reference and future comparison.
Procedure
User Maintenance 43
Quality Assurance
Lateral resolution (contd)
Lateral Resolution 1mm
Illustration 489. Example of Lateral Resolution
Pin width should remain relatively constant over time ( 1mm). Dramatic changes in pin width may indicate beamforming problems. Contact a Service Engineer if beam width changes consistently over 2 to 3 periodic tests.
"
User Maintenance 44
Quality Assurance
Penetration
Description Penetration is the ability of an imaging system to detect and display weak echoes from small objects at large depths. Penetration can be affected by the systems:
S S S S S
Transmitter/receiver Degree of probe focusing Attenuation of the medium Depth and shape of reflecting object Electromagnetic interference from local surroundings.
Benefit
Weak reflecting echoes are commonly produced from the internal structure of organs. Definition of this tissue texture is important in the interpretation of the ultrasound findings. Scan a phantom to see how echoes begin to fade as depth is increased. The maximum depth of penetration is the point at which homogeneous material in the phantom begins to lose brightness. To measure penetration: 1. Set the front panel TGC slide pots to their center (detent) position. 2. Gain and acoustic output can be adjusted, as necessary, since these values are displayed on the monitor. 3. Scan a test phantom along the vertical pin targets to typical depths for the probe being used. 4. Perform a standard distance measurement from the top of the image displayed to the point at which homogeneous material in the phantom begins to lose brightness. 5. Document the depth measurement for reference and future comparison.
Method
Procedure
User Maintenance 45
Quality Assurance
Penetration (contd)
Penetration
Illustration 490. Example of Penetration
Contact a Service Engineer if the depth of penetration shifts more than one centimeter (1cm) when using the same probe and same system settings.
User Maintenance 46
Quality Assurance
Functional resolution
Description Functional resolution is an imaging systems ability to detect and display the size, shape, and depth of an anechoic structure, as opposed to a pin target. The very best possible image is somewhat less important than reproducibility and stability over time. Routine tests at the same settings should produce the same results. Benefit The data obtained will give a relative indication of the smallest structure the system is capable of resolving at a given depth. To measure functional resolution: 1. Set the front panel TGC slide pots to their center (detent) position. 2. Gain and acoustic output can be adjusted as necessary, since these values are displayed on the monitor. 3. Scan a test phantom with a vertical row of anechoic cyst targets to typical depths for the probe being used. 4. Evaluate the cysts at various depths for a good (round) shape, well-defined borders and no fill in. Remember, TGC slide pots are centered and should remain fixed. This may NOT provide optimal cystic clearing. 5. Document all results for future reference and comparison.
Procedure
Functional Resolution
.
t
Illustration 491. Example of Functional Resolution
Contact a Service Engineer if a greatly distorted image is obtained.
User Maintenance 47
Quality Assurance
Contrast resolution
Description Contrast resolution is the ability of an imaging system to detect and display the shape and echogenic characteristics of a structure. Specific values measured are less important than stability over time. Routine tests at the same settings should produce the same results. Benefit A correct diagnosis is dependent upon an imaging systems ability to differentiate between a cystic or solid structure versus echo patterns from normal surrounding tissue. A phantom with echogenic targets of different sizes and depths should be used. To measure contrast resolution: 1. Set the front panel TGC slide pots to their center (detent) position. Set dynamic range to 54 db. 2. Gain and acoustic output can be adjusted, as necessary, since these values are displayed on the monitor. 3. Scan a test phantom with echogenic targets at the depths available. 4. Evaluate the echogenic targets for contrast between each other and between the surrounding phantom material. Remember, TGC slide pots are centered and should remain fixed. This may NOT provide an optimal scan image. 5. Document all results for future reference and comparison.
Method Procedure
Contrast Resolution 4 3 2 1
Illustration 492. Example of Contrast Resolution
Contact a Service Engineer if the echogenic characteristics or shapes of the targets appear distorted.
User Maintenance 48
Quality Assurance
Gray Scale photography
Description Benefit Poor photography will cause loss of low level echoes and the lack of contrast between large amplitude echoes. When photographic controls and film processors are properly adjusted, weak echoes, as well as strong echoes, are accurately recorded on film. 1. Adjust the camera according to the manufacturers instructions until the hard copy and video display are equal. 2. Scan the phantom and its echogenic contrast targets. 3. Make a hard copy photograph of the display and compare it to the image on the video monitor for contrast and weak echo display. 4. Document all results for future reference and comparison.
Procedure
Gray Scale Photography 4 3 2 1
Illustration 493. Example of Gray Scale Photography
Contact a Service Engineer if camera cannot duplicate what is on the image monitor.
NOTE: Optimization of brightness/contrast controls on the display monitor is imperative in order to make sure that the hardcopy and monitor look alike. The display monitor is adjusted first. The hardcopy camera or printer is adjusted to match the display monitor.
User Maintenance 49
Quality Assurance
Setting up a Record Keeping System

Preparation
The following is needed:
S S S
Quality Assurance binder Magnetic photo pages for hard copy images OR Floppy disk holder for archived images Quality Assurance Checklists.
Display the following information while testing quality assurance:

S S S S S S
Acoustic Output Gain Depth Probe Dynamic Range Set up new patient to be the name of the test.
Annotate the following:

S S
Any control where its value is NOT displayed. Significant phantom information.
Record Keeping
Complete the following: 1. Fill out the Ultrasound Quality Assurance Checklist for each probe, as scheduled. 2. Make a hard copy or archive the image. 3. Compare images to baseline images and acceptable values. 4. Evaluate trends over previous test periods. 5. File hard copy/archive floppy and checklist in Quality Assurance binder.
User Maintenance 50
Quality Assurance
Ultrasound Quality Assurance Checklist

Performed By System Probe Type Phantom Model Acoustic Output Gray Map Monitor Settings Peripheral Settings Other Image Processing Control Settings Probe Model Serial Number Gain TGC Date Serial Number Serial Number Room Temperature Focal Zone Depth
Test Vertical Measurement Accuracy Horizontal Measurement Accuracy Axial Resolution Lateral Resolution Penetration Functional Resolution Contrast Resolution Gray Scale Photography
Baseline Value Range
Tested Value
Image Hard Copy/ Archived
Acceptable? Yes/No
Service Called (Date)
Date Resolved
User Maintenance 51
Quality Assurance
User Maintenance 52
System Care and Maintenance

Overview
Refer to Section 7 of the LOGIQ 400 Service Manual (2127661) for any additional maintenance guidance. Contact the local Service Representative for parts or planned maintenance inspections. It is recommended that planned maintenance be performed on the system every six months.
Inspecting the System

Examine the following on a monthly basis:
S S S S S
Connectors on cables for any mechanical defects. Entire length of electrical and power cables for cuts or abrasions. Equipment for loose or missing hardware. Control panel and keyboard for defects. Casters for proper locking operation.
DANGER
To avoid electrical shock hazard, do not remove panels or covers from console. This servicing must be performed by qualified service personnel. Failure to do so could cause serious injury. If any defects are observed or malfunctions occur, do not operate the equipment but inform a qualified service person. Contact a Service Representative for information.
Electrical Hazard
User Maintenance 53
Weekly Maintenance
The LOGIQ 400 system requires weekly care and maintenance to function safely and properly. Clean the following:
S S S S S S S
Three Air Filters System cabinet Monitor Operator control panel Foot switch Video Cassette Recorder (VCR) Video Page Printer
Failure to perform required maintenance may result in unnecessary service calls.
User Maintenance 54

Cleaning the system
Prior to cleaning any part of the system: 1. Turn off the system. System cabinet To clean the system cabinet: 1. Moisten a soft, non-abrasive folded cloth with a mild, general purpose, non-abrasive soap and water solution. 2. Wipe down the top, front, back, and both sides of the system cabinet.
NOTE: Do not spray any liquid directly into the unit.

To clean the monitor face and filter: Remove the monitor filter as shown in Illustration 494.
Monitor
Illustration 494. Monitor Filter Removal
1. Slide the filter clamps towards the monitor sides. 2. Pull the filter clamps out.
User Maintenance 55

Cleaning the system (contd)
Monitor (contd) Use a soft, folded cloth and a glass cleaner solution. Apply the glass cleaner to the cloth. Gently wipe the monitor face and filter.
CAUTION
. .
Do Not use a glass cleaner that has a hydrocarbon base (such as Benzene, Methyl Alcohol or Methyl Ethyl Ketone) on monitors with the filter (anti-glare shield). Prolonged use of such cleaners will damage the filter (anti-glare shield). Hard rubbing will also damage the filter. NOTE: When cleaning the monitor, make sure not to scratch the monitor.
After cleaning the monitor face and filter, re-install the filter on the monitor by reversing the removal procedure in Illustration 494. Insert the filter clamps and slide them inwards securely.
NOTE: Make sure that the filter is securely fixed by the filter clamps. These are important to prevent a hazard from the filter falling. A click sound will be heard when the filter clamp is secured by the lock mechanism.
User Maintenance 56

Operator Controls To clean the operator control panel: 1. Moisten a soft, non-abrasive folded cloth with a mild, general purpose, non-abrasive soap and water solution. 2. Wipe down operator control panel.
.
Foot Switch VCR
3. Use a cotton swab to clean around keys or controls. Use a toothpick to remove solids from between keys and controls.
NOTE: When cleaning the operator control panel, make sure not to spill or spray any liquid on the controls, into the system cabinet, or in the probe connection receptacle.
To clean the foot switch: 1. Moisten a soft, non-abrasive folded cloth with a mild, general purpose, non-abrasive soap and water solution. 2. Wipe the external surfaces of the unit then dry with a soft, clean, cloth. To clean the VCR: 1. Turn off the VCR power. If possible, disconnect the power cord. 2. Wipe the external surfaces of the unit with a soft, clean, dry cloth.
.
For more information
NOTE: Do not use a wet cloth or any cleaning fluid because it may enter and damage the unit.
3. Clean the record and playback heads with a soft, non-abrasive cleaning system, according to the manufacturers instructions. See the VCRs Operator Manual.
User Maintenance 57

Video Page Printer To clean the external surface of the video page printer: 1. Turn off the power. If possible, disconnect the power cord.
.
For more information
2. Wipe the external surfaces of the unit with a soft, clean, dry cloth. 3. Remove stubborn stains with a cloth lightly dampened with a mild detergent solution.
NOTE: Never use strong solvents, such as thinner or benzine, or abrasive cleansers because they will damage the cabinet.
No further maintenance, such as lubrication, is required. To clean the surface of the print head: 1. Run the cleaning sheet (provided with the printer) through the printer. Review the Video Page Printers Operator Manual for details.
User Maintenance 58
Other Maintenance
Cleaning the air filters
Clean the systems air filters to ensure that a clogged filter does not cause the system to overheat and reduce system performance and reliability.
Quarterly
Locating
The three air filters are located in the front and back of the system:
Accessory Panel For Foot Switch Connector
Store Foot Switch Here Console Air Filter Screen

1 ON
ON
Power Supply Air Filter
Illustration 495. Location of Air Filters
User Maintenance 59

0 OFF
LOGIQ 400

Removing To remove the console air filters: 1. Lift up on the Velcro tab securing the air filter. 2. Pull out the filter. To remove the power supply air filter: 1. Pull out and up on the filter cover. 2. Pull the filter screen out.
Illustration 496. Filter Screen Removal
Cleaning
To clean the filter: 1. Be sure to shake the filter in an area away from the system. 2. Wash the filter in a mild soapy solution, rinse and air dry or dry with a cloth.
NOTE: Allow wet filter to dry thoroughly before installing.

3. Slide the filter back into the system. 4. Secure the filter with the Velcro tab or cover.
User Maintenance 60

Planned Maintenance
The following maintenance schedule is suggested for the system and probes to ensure optimum operation and safety.
Do the Following
Inspect the Unit Clean Air Filters Clean Foot Switch Clean MIC Clean Monitor Clean Operator Control Panel Clean Page Printer Clean System Cabinet Clean VCR
Weekly
Monthly Quarterly
X X
X X X X X X X
Table 104. Planned Maintenance Program
User Maintenance 61

User Maintenance 62
Appendices
Bioeffects (A) System Data (B) Peripherals (C) Assistance (D) Warranties (E) OB Tables (F) Glossary (G) VCR Operation (H)
This section provides supplemental information about the LOGIQ 400. The Bioeffects sections contain acoustic output tables in the FDA and IEC formats.
Appendices 1
Appendices
Appendices 2
Bioeffects
Concerns Surrounding the Use of Diagnostic Ultrasound
During a diagnostic ultrasound examination, high frequency sound penetrates and interacts with tissue in and around the area of anatomy to be imaged. Only a small portion of this sound energy is reflected back to the probe for use in constructing the image while the remainder is dissipated within the tissue. The interaction of sound energy with tissue at sufficiently high levels can produce biological effects (aka bioeffects) of either a mechanical or thermal nature. Although the generation of bioeffect is intentional with therapeutic ultrasound, it is generally undesired in diagnostic applications and may be harmful in some conditions.
NOTE: The American Institute of Ultrasound in Medicine has published a document entitled Medical Ultrasound Safety. This three part document covers Bioeffects and Biophysics, Prudent Use and Implementing ALARA. Ultrasound users should order this document from the AIUM to become more familiar with Ultrasound safety.
In the USA, contact the AIUM by telephone at 1-800-638-5352. To write them concerning their publications, use the following address: AIUM 14750 Sweitzer Lane Suite 100 Laurel, MD, USA 207075906
Bioeffects A1
Bioeffects
Thermal Bioeffect
As with most forms of energy, ultrasound is attenuated as it passes through tissue and is converted to heat, which, if produced at sufficient rates, will increase tissue temperature to a point where tissue damage may result. Major factors contributing to thermal bioeffect can be categorized as tissue characteristics or control parameters:
S
Physical tissue characteristics like acoustic impedance, attenuation, absorption, and perfusion determine the rates of heat production and heat transfer. The susceptibility of some tissues to injury from heat, such as developing fetal tissue, further complicate the concern for long-term effects. The time-average density of available ultrasound energy is mainly determined by acoustic parameters like output frequency, pulse amplitude, pulse duration, duty cycle, beam shape, and beam motion. These parameters are controlled by the operator through equipment selections such as probe type, operating mode, focal depth, sample volume location, and output control settings. The operator also has significant influence by controlling probe motion and dwell time. These Control Parameters form the means through which the operator can minimize thermal bioeffect.
Bioeffects A2
Bioeffects
Mechanical Bioeffect
In a similar manner, the interaction of ultrasound energy with tissue can produce a number of non-thermal or mechanical effects. The most significant is cavitation which results from the action of the oscillating ultrasound pressure on tiny gas bubbles within the tissues. Cavitation has caused mechanical damage on a cellular level such as microscopic tears and hemorrhage in laboratory tests with small animals. The major contributing factors can again be categorized as either tissue characteristics or control parameters:
S
The physical characteristics of tissue such as the presence and size of microscopic gas bubbles and the sensitivity of the tissue to the effects of cavitation will influence the potential for and magnitude of cavitation. Acoustic field parameters like output frequency, peak pulse amplitudes, and perhaps pulse length are the primary parameters affecting the onset of cavitation. These are controllable by the operator through appropriate equipment selections.
Although it is generally accepted that no harmful biological effects have been demonstrated at the frequency, intensity, and exposure times used in diagnostic examinations, research into the potential for harmful effects continues. The operator is encouraged to survey the literature for future developments on bioeffects and to become familiar with the references at the end of this section.
Bioeffects A3
Bioeffects
Operator Awareness and Actions to Minimize Bioeffect

The operator must be aware of the particular conditions that exist during the examination to recognize the potential for bioeffect and then take appropriate action to reduce the risk. The recognition of potential harm comes from an understanding of tissue characteristics and a real-time knowledge of acoustic output. Taking appropriate action requires familiarity with equipment operation and examination skills like implementing alternative techniques for obtaining the same diagnostic information.
Bioeffects A4
Bioeffects
Tissue characteristics
Tissue characteristics vary considerably throughout the body. They influence the acoustic field and determine the heating/cooling rates and cavitation potential. Ultrasound energy dissipates as it passes through the tissue causing the deeper tissue to encounter much lower levels. Some tissues like bone readily convert ultrasound energy to heat, while others like blood and amniotic fluid pass the energy on to adjacent tissue relatively unattenuated. A particular situation that represents a tissue combination requiring extra precaution is a third trimester transabdominal fetal examination where there is a very thin abdominal wall and a long fluid path. The relative lack of attenuating tissue along the acoustic path will significantly increase the available energy in the fetal tissue. Additionally, fetal tissues are more susceptible to long term injury due to nature of developing tissue. Focusing the ultrasound beam on or near fetal bone further increases the risk. Other than fetal tissue, there is increased susceptibility for heating in any tissue that cannot easily conduct or distribute heat due to low blood perfusion. As the examination progresses, the operator must be aware of changing tissue conditions.
Bioeffects A5
Bioeffects
Acoustic output
Awareness of the acoustic output level can be a difficult task for the operator, especially when the objective is to obtain a quality image. Older ultrasound equipment had limited means, if any, for indicating the acoustic output level. In most cases, the operator had to be familiar with the output intensities as described in the operator manual. To improve operator awareness of acoustic output, this system incorporates an output display that directly indicates the potential for mechanical and thermal bioeffects as equipment controls are adjusted. The output display consists of four numeric index values that indicate the potential for producing bioeffects (three indices are for heating effect and one for cavitation). As the user changes equipment settings that alter the acoustic output, the output display indices are immediately updated to reflect the change in potential for producing bioeffect. The indices are based on mathematical models and each is normalized so that the potential for bioeffect becomes more significant as the indices reach a value 1.0 or larger. A mechanical index (MI) provides an indication of the potential for the possible onset of transient cavitation within tissue while the three thermal indices provide an indication of the potential for heat generation within tissue. The different thermal indices may be used depending on the type of tissue being examined:
S
Soft Tissue Thermal Index (TIS) is used as an indicator of the potential to generate heat within soft tissues. This is the most used thermal indicator. Bone Thermal Index (TIB) is used as an indicator of the potential to generate heat at the beam focus when focusing on or near bone that is adjacent to very sensitive tissue. This index is intended as a thermal indicator for second and third trimester fetal examination or transfontanelle neonatal cephalic exams. Cranial Bone Thermal Index (TIC) is used as an indicator of the potential to generate heat in the near-field when the beam passes through bone at the surface as with adult or pediatric cranial applications.
Bioeffects A6
Bioeffects
Acoustic output (continued)
Tissue heating is more of a concern when the acoustic beam is stationary, so the thermal index is likely to increase when Doppler or M-Modes are selected. The influence of specific operator controls on acoustic output is described along with the functional purpose of the control throughout the user manual and a summary is provided in Safety. The operator now has easy access to the status of acoustic output and, when combined with the knowledge of tissue characteristics and beam location, the risk of potential bioeffect can be readily assessed. This display conforms to the AIUM/NEMA Output Display Standard [1] for ultrasound imaging equipment.
Bioeffects A7
Bioeffects
Operator intervention
When conditions indicate a potential for harmful bioeffect, the operator should take action promptly to reduce the risk by changing equipment settings or altering procedural techniques:
S
Output display index values much greater than 1.0 represent an increased risk for tissues in particular beam locations. The potential for heating will normally only occur near the surface or at the focus, while the potential for cavitation is reduced away from the focus. Selecting non-scan operating modes such as PW or CW Doppler and M-Mode will significantly increase the thermal index because the beam is stationary. Optimize gain and other image enhancement features before increasing the acoustic output control or other equipment controls that significantly affect the output level. Become thoroughly familiar with all controls that affect output and observe the output display for results. Controls affecting output are described throughout the user manual.
Bioeffects A8
Bioeffects
Operator intervention (continued)
S
Develop and practice skills to localize anatomy and optimize image quality rapidly, then freeze the image as soon as the necessary diagnostic information is obtained. It takes time for tissue temperatures to increase, so reducing exposure time can significantly reduce the potential for injury. Avoid susceptible tissues, if possible, by changing probe position, entrance angles or probe type. Higher frequency probes will not penetrate as deep while linear probes have lower near-field energy density. Avoid focusing on bone or poorly perfused tissue. Do not allow the acoustic beam to penetrate or focus on or near the eye.
Although choices like probe selection, mode of operation and other control adjustments have a significant affect on output levels, the ability to change these selections is often restricted by the type of examination or clinical objectives. Therefore, some examinations may require relatively high output levels to achieve success. The decision to raise acoustic output to potentially harmful levels must include an assessment of the risk/benefit potential. Such decisions are routine with imaging modalities incorporating ionizing radiation such as Nuclear Medicine, X-ray and CT. The principle of ALARA is widely used in these modalities for minimizing the exposure risk and is now a recommended practice with high-level diagnostic ultrasound.
CAUTION
During each ultrasound examination, the clinical user is expected to weigh the medical benefit of the diagnostic information obtained against the risk of harmful effects. Once an optimal image is achieved the need for increasing acoustic output or prolonging the exposure can not be justified. It is important, therefore, for the user to be familiar with system controls that affect image quality as well as acoustic output. Complete descriptions of image optimization and acoustic output controls are provided in the user instructions.
Bioeffects A9
Bioeffects
Implementing ALARA Methods

The primary objective for any ultrasound examination is to obtain diagnostic information of sufficient quality to benefit the patient. Image quality can usually be improved by increasing the acoustic output or taking more time to refine the image. These same actions, however, will also increase the risk of harmful bioeffects when imaging sensitive tissues or when high output levels are used. The operator is therefore encouraged to use the lowest acoustic output setting necessary to produce clinically acceptable data. The principle of ALARA, which stands for As Low As Reasonably Achievable, is to keep the radiation exposure at the minimum level necessary to obtain the diagnostic information. This principle is widely practiced in medical x-ray protection where exposure at any level is potentially harmful. Historically, ALARA was initiated as a cautious approach for dealing with uncertain hazards but has since become the principle method for reducing the risk of injury from hazards that do not have safe minimum threshold. While no minimum thresholds for harmful bioeffects have been established with the use of diagnostic ultrasound, the principle of ALARA can be readily implemented on equipment incorporating an output display. As the operator adjusts the equipment to optimize the image quality, the display interactively updates to indicate the effect on output. Controls that have no noticeable impact on image quality should be set to minimize the output while controls that improve the image quality and also increase acoustic output should be set no higher than needed to achieve a diagnostic quality image. If the output display indicates values much greater than 1.0, the operator should reduce the exposure time and freeze the image as soon as possible. At very low levels (< 0.4), the display is inactive and the potential for harmful bioeffect is negligible. More detailed information concerning the use of ALARA in medical practice can be found in NCRP Report No. 1072.
Bioeffects A10
Bioeffects
Clinical instructions for fetal use

Following are illustrative examples of clinical instructions for fetal Doppler use which were prepared by Harold Schulman, M.D. and John Hobbins, M.D.3 Umbilical artery To obtain a signal: For continuous wave Doppler instrument, place the pencil probe with appropriate conducting gel on the maternal abdomen. The volume should be at a comfortable level and the power output and gain at a mid-setting. Slowly move the pencil probe by changing the angle or location on the maternal abdomen until the characteristic sound of the fetal umbilical flow can be heard. This is a swishing sound with a rate usually between 120 and 160 BPM. It should be lacking in discernible clicks or sounds similar to valve movement on cardiac auscultation. When the image is obtained, adjust the controls in order to optimize the image by reducing the power output to the lowest setting at which a good quality signal is obtained. The gain setting should also be reduced to make the signal appear crisp with minimal background noise. If diastolic flow signals are not obtained, the angle of the beam incident to the umbilical cord may be too high and another area of cord should be examined to determine whether diastolic flow is present. When a good quality signal is obtained all the way across the display screen, the image may be frozen. Prior to taking measurements, the signals should be examined to ensure that the variations in waveform size that may be caused by fetal breathing movements are not present. Fetal breathing movements will invalidate any measurements due to the variations they cause in umbilical flow.
Bioeffects A11
Bioeffects
Umbilical artery (contd) If a duplex Doppler system is being used, then the umbilical cord should be visualized and attempted to be seen in as much of its length as is feasible, considering its usual coiling. The sample volume of the pulsed Doppler or the sample line if a duplex continuous wave instrument is being used should be placed over one of the two smaller vessels in the umbilical cord. The sample volume size (gate) should be adjusted to encompass the entire vessel. If this vessel is being seen only in cross section, and diastolic flow is not seen, this may be an artifact caused by the angle between the beam and the vessel and another sampling site should be examined. When this cross sectional view is obtained, rotating the transducer 90 degrees may bring a greater length of the cord into view and permit examination of an area where the artery can be seen at a more advantageous angle. Indices of pulsatility, if calculated, should be determined for each of several heartbeats and averaged. Uterine artery For continuous wave Doppler systems, place the pencil probe in the lower lateral portion of the mothers abdomen, generally just above the groin and directed toward the cervix. Adjust the angle or position until the characteristic waveform of the uterine/arcuate artery is obtained. Without visualization, it is important to search carefully for the waveform with the greatest amount of diastolic flow as proximal vessels in the uterine system (internal iliac and hypogastric arteries) may have diminished diastolic flow compared to the systolic flow in a way that might appear abnormal if obtained from the uterine artery itself. The power and gain settings should be adjusted to the lowest levels at which adequate signals are obtained with a minimal amount of noise relative to the signal. The image may be frozen when the desired number of waveforms are present on the screen.
Bioeffects A12
Bioeffects
Uterine artery (contd) For pulsed Doppler systems, place the transducer in the lower outer portion of the maternal abdomen. The orientation should be towards the parametria with some parts of the amniotic sac visualized. The parametria area can then be examined by maneuvering the sample volume until the characteristic waveforms are obtained. Examination should be confined to the area that is composed of the myometrium and may be most fruitful close to the placenta. Indices of pulsatility, if calculated, should be determined for each of several heartbeats and averaged. Fetal heart Fetal cardiac Doppler studies can be performed only with duplex ultrasound systems. The fetal heart should be carefully examined in all standard planes to determine whether or not the anatomy is normal. These planes should include: four-chamber view, long axis left ventricles, short axis of the ventricles, short axis of the great vessels, aortic arch, and pulmonary artery-ductus views. The area for sampling should be visualized as clearly as possible with the anticipated flow direction at as low an angle as possible to the ultrasound beam. The sample volume should be placed in this area with an appropriate size selected to sample as desired. Power output control should be at the lowest setting compatible with obtaining an adequate image and the gain setting should be maintained to keep an adequate signal without excessive noise. Excluding the actual valves from the sample volume will help to minimize unnecessary noise from the signals obtained.
Bioeffects A13
Bioeffects
Efficacy of Fetal Doppler

The following are clinical obstetrical conditions where there are experimental data that demonstrate the efficacy of Doppler. Provided by John C. Hobbins, M.D. and Peter Burns, Ph.D.4 IUGR Many studies have shown a good correlation between abnormal waveform (or decreased blood flow) and increased perinatal mortality5, fetal hypoxia6,7,8, and neonatal events such as necrotizing enterocolitis (NEC), and interventricular hemorrhage (IVH).8 It must be pointed out that the Doppler studies initially designed to identify altered fetal growth had a predictably low sensitivity9 because the category of small for dates frequently includes genetically small but completely normal fetuses and neonates. Thus far, all studies have shown that the rare Doppler pattern of reverse diastolic flow in the umbilical artery has been very highly correlated with adverse outcome10,11 and may warrant immediate intervention. Conversely, a normal waveform in the umbilical artery has been rarely associated with stillbirth in a high risk pregnancy. Cardiac Anomalies Doppler has become an integral part of fetal echocardiographic studies. Its use has been directly derived from well-documented pediatric and adult Doppler research. The etiology and seriousness of fetal arrhythmias is relatively easy to determine with pulsed Doppler interrogation of ventricular diastolic filling patterns.1215 Benign patterns such as premature atrial extrasystoles can be more easily diagnosed with Doppler than with the older approach of M-Mode echocardiography. Doppler has proven useful as well in the understanding and interpretation of structural heart disease in the fetus. A close correlation has been found between atrioventricular valve regurgitation in the fetus with structural heart disease and the appearance of non-immune hydrops16. Improved diagnostic and prognostic ability has permitted more accurate counseling of parents whose fetuses have structural cardiac abnormalities.
Bioeffects A14
Bioeffects
Summary It is important to realize that current investigation DOES NOT support the concept that Doppler waveform analysis in the above obstetrical conditions provides information that is meant to replace other conventional tests, or the biophysical profile, also, it should not replace classical non-Doppler ultrasound scanning methods. Rather, it appears that Doppler is of value when used in conjunction with these other tests. Lastly, there is little data to suggest that an isolated Doppler examination of the fetus can be used as a screening tool in a low-risk population to identify the compromised fetus. As with the evolution of any new diagnostic technique, the indications for use may change when new experimental data become available.
Bioeffects A15
Bioeffects
Suggested Guidelines
Following are suggested guidelines prepared by Harold Schulman, M.D17 Overview There are two types of Doppler instruments, continuous wave (CW) and pulsed. Modern instruments use directional Dopplers, that is they portray forward and reverse flow on a split screen. The CW Doppler transverses the entire vessel diameter and summarizes a variety of reflections, including those from the vessel wall and neighboring vessels. The pulsed Doppler is focused and may sample the red cell flow in different loci within the radius, but has the advantage of rejecting extraneous signals from other vessels. Its disadvantage is in that some current instrumentation utilize output energies which exceed guidelines for safety on obstetric ultrasound.
Bioeffects A16
Bioeffects
Methodology Doppler studies on the umbilical arteries are carried out after manual palpation of the uterus and fetus. In pregnancies before 28 weeks, the fetus cannot be easily felt hence the probe is placed on the upper third of the uterus at the midline. The probe is gently rotated until the umbilical signal is heard and clearly identified on the screen. There should be 3-4 clear dense waveforms of equal amplitude. If there is fetal breathing, the waveforms will not be equal in intensity or frequency; hence, measurements must be postponed until the fetus is quiet. If there is tachycardia or bradycardia, the measurements have no clear meaning because now the waveform represents a complex mixture of resistance, cardiac output, and time needed to empty a vascular region. The image is frozen and the measurements are taken. We have found it useful to continuously record the examination on audiotape because the signal is immediately captured and not lost when the fetus or cord moves. This process is repeated at least twice more and the results from the three studies are averaged. Although the S/D ratio is, in theory, an angle-independent measurement, there may be differences in the ratio when the artery is studied near the abdomen or near the insertion in the placenta. When three different angle measurements are taken, we found an average experimental error of 6% and a maximum error of 16%. The uterine artery signals may be more difficult to obtain and require more training to develop expertise. The probe is directed in the lower quadrants at the paracervical area where the uterine artery enters the uterus. Three potential signals may be encountered, hence the examiner should be persistent until the correct waveform is identified. The mature waveform is generally present by 20 weeks, but should be achieved no later than 26 weeks. The pulse wave frequency should coincide with the maternal pulse and 4 equal and dense images should be seen on each side of the uterus. The results from both sides are averaged to give a single number. The S/D ratio appears to provide a simple and reproducible measurement, but a number of other calculations have also been proposed. Interobserver error with this technique is 4% with a maximum error of 10%.
Bioeffects A17
Bioeffects
Variance studies for fetal Doppler measurements

The following guidance17 is provided to help users assess the potential variation of results when performing fetal Doppler measurements among the same or between different users. In order to complete this assessment, each clinic intending to use this system for fetal Doppler should conduct a clinical trial to establish the intra- and inter-operator variances. The recommended protocol for such a clinical trial is: 1. Select at least 20 high-risk patients. 2. For each patient, select at least one Doppler waveform from the same fetal artery. 3. For each waveform, have each of at least three trained sonographers independently complete at least three repeat measurements for each of the Doppler calculations (e.g., S/D Ratio, PI, RI, etc.). 4. Perform an appropriate Analysis of Variance (ANOVA) over all 20 patient waveforms and also for each patient waveform separately. 5. Use the results of the ANOVA to estimate both intraand inter-operator error variance components. (The SAS procedure VARCOMP may be used.)
Bioeffects A18
Bioeffects
Training and User Assistance

Maintaining awareness of potentially harmful bioeffects and being able to recognize contributing conditions is essential to minimize the risk. Gaining experience with the system and becoming familiar with controls affecting output by observing the output display will improve the users confidence to determine the presence of risk and how to reduce it. The user manual instructions and applications training are the best methods for learning these basic skills. Get fully acquainted with the user manual and review it frequently. Contact a representative at any time to request additional training or assistance. As indicated by their titles, the following references are intended to provide additional detailed information concerning bioeffects. 1. Standard for Real-Time Display of Thermal and Mechanical Acoustic Output Indices on Diagnostic Ultrasound Equipment, AIUM/NEMA, 19921 2. Implementation of the Principle of As Low As Reasonably Achievable (ALARA) for Medical and Dental Personnel, National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurements (NCRP), Report No.107, December 31, 1990.2 3. Biological Effects of Ultrasound: Mechanisms and Clinical Implications, NCRP Report No. 74, December 30, 1983.18 4. Exposure Criteria for Medical Diagnostic Ultrasound: I. Criteria Based on Thermal Mechanisms, NCRP Report No. 113, June 1, 1992.19 5. Bioeffects Considerations for the Safety of Diagnostic Ultrasound, Journal of Ultrasound in Medicine, AIUM, September 1988.20 6. Geneva Report on Safety and Standardization in Medical Ultrasound, WFUMB, May 1990.21
Bioeffects A19
Bioeffects
Acoustic Output Tables

Maximum output summary
The following tables list the typical maximum acoustic output levels achievable with the LOGIQ 400 for all probes and operational modes. It is intended that this information be useful in making ALARA decisions and selecting the most appropriate probe for the application. In accordance with US FDA Guidelines, the overall maximum acoustic SPTA intensity for LOGIQ 400 is limited to 720 mW/cm2 and MI is limited to 1.9. Modes for which TI does not exceed 1.0 are indicated by <1.0.
B510
Mode
B-Mode M-Mode B/M-Mode Pulsed Wave Doppler B/Pulsed Wave Doppler B/Color Flow Doppler B/Color Flow Doppler/ Pulsed Wave Doppler M-Mode/Color M-Mode Color Flow with M Doppler CW Doppler
MI
0.61 0.61 0.61 0.76 0.76 0.61 0.76 0.81 0.81 < 0.1
TIS/TIB Scan
0.24 0.16 0.16 0.34 0.25
TIS Non-Scan
< 0.1 < 0.1 < 0.1 < 0.1 < 0.1 < 0.1 < 0.1 0.24
TIB Non-Scan
< 0.1 < 0.1 0.52 0.52 0.26 0.26 0.26 0.37
TIC
0.23 < 0.1 0.21 0.25 0.40 0.35 0.37 0.16 0.16 0.44
ISPTA.3
44.2 28.5 58.0 235.8 265.2 44.5 154.9 84.1 84.1 74.7
ISPPA.3
135.8 135.8 135.8 145.7 145.7 135.8 145.7 135.8 135.8
Table 105. B510 Maximum Acoustic Output Levels
CWD2
Mode
Color Flow with M Doppler
MI
< 0.1
TIS/TIB Scan
TIS Non-Scan
0.40
TIB Non-Scan
1.51
TIC
1.01
ISPTA.3
167.4
ISPPA.3
Table 106. CWD2 Maximum Acoustic Output Levels
Bioeffects A20
Bioeffects
CWD5
Mode
MI
< 0.1
TIS/TIB Scan
TIS Non-Scan
2.23
TIB Non-Scan
2.37
TIC
4.22
ISPTA.3
234.5
ISPPA.3
Table 107. CWD5 Maximum Acoustic Output Levels
C364
Mode
B-Mode M-Mode B/M-Mode Pulsed Wave Doppler B/Pulsed Wave Doppler B/Color Flow Doppler B/Color Flow Doppler/ Pulsed Wave Doppler M-Mode/Color M-Mode Color Flow with M Doppler
MI
0.64 0.64 0.64 0.87 0.87 1.30 1.30 0.64 0.64
TIS/TIB Scan
0.33 0.22 0.22 1.30 0.76
TIS Non-Scan
<0.1 <0.1 0.89 0.89 0.45 0.32 0.32
TIB Non-Scan
0.16 0.16 3.16 3.16 1.58 1.86 1.86
TIC
0.27 <0.1 0.25 1.78 1.96 2.30 2.13 0.66 0.66
ISPTA.3
16.1 52.8 63.5 665.4 676.1 86.2 381.2 674.9 674.9
ISPPA.3
155.7 155.7 155.7 148.0 155.7 155.7 155.7 155.7 155.7
Table 108. C364 Maximum Acoustic Output Levels
C386
Mode
MI
0.48 0.48 0.48 0.48 0.48 0.68 0.68 0.70 0.70
TIS/TIB Scan
0.30 0.20 0.20 1.45 0.83
TIS Non-Scan
<0.1 <0.1 0.19 0.19 <0.1 0.47 0.47
TIB Non-Scan
0.14 0.14 1.33 1.33 0.66 1.90 1.90
TIC
0.45 0.13 0.43 0.98 1.28 1.98 1.63 1.85 1.85
ISPTA.3
7.9 37.8 43.0 408.0 413.3 129.3 271.3 326.8 326.8
ISPPA.3
114.3 114.3 114.3 120.0 120.0 115.6 120.0 101.0 101.0
Bioeffects A21
Bioeffects
C551
Mode
MI
0.46 0.46 0.46 0.62 0.62 0.68 0.68 0.68 0.68
TIS/TIB Scan
0.26 0.17 0.17 2.09 1.13
TIS Non-Scan
<0.1 <0.1 0.84 0.84 0.42 1.77 1.77
TIB Non-Scan
<0.1 <0.1 1.91 1.91 0.96 1.85 1.85
TIC
0.31 <0.1 0.27 1.05 1.26 2.59 1.93 2.20 2.20
ISPTA.3
16.2 23.7 34.5 641.4 652.1 147.9 400.0 288.0 288.0
ISPPA.3
144.9 144.9 144.9 139.6 144.9 146.6 146.6 145.3 145.3
C721
Mode
MI
0.35 0.35 0.35 0.53 0.53 0.35 0.53 0.30 0.30
TIS/TIB Scan
0.16 0.11 0.11 0.39 0.25
TIS Non-Scan
0.02 0.02 0.20 0.20 0.10 0.28 0.28
TIB Non-Scan
0.01 0.01 0.16 0.16 0.08 0.30 0.30
TIC
0.13 0.01 0.01 0.20 0.28 0.36 0.32 0.27 0.27
ISPTA.3
2.64 3.33 5.09 54.10 55.86 19.06 37.46 83.60 83.60
ISPPA.3
43.70 43.70 43.70 106.30 106.30 43.70 106.30 33.60 33.60
Bioeffects A22
Bioeffects
E721
Mode
MI
0.49 0.49 0.49 0.43 0.49 0.49 0.49 0.49 0.49
TIS/TIB Scan
0.31 0.21 0.21 0.68 0.45
TIS Non-Scan
<0.1 <0.1 0.37 0.37 0.19 0.60 0.60
TIB Non-Scan
<0.1 <0.1 0.64 0.64 0.32 0.52 0.52
TIC
0.26 <0.1 0.22 0.44 0.61 0.73 0.67 0.68 0.68
ISPTA.3
19.6 19.7 32.8 245.2 258.3 21.9 140.1 102.2 102.2
ISPPA.3
140.2 140.2 140.2 111.7 140.2 140.2 140.2 140.2 140.2
Table 112. E721 Maximum Acoustic Output Levels
I739
Mode
MI
0.33 0.33 0.33 0.59 0.59 0.69 0.69 0.67 0.67
TIS/TIB Scan
0.14 <0.1 <0.1 0.52 0.31
TIS Non-Scan
<0.1 <0.1 0.35 0.35 0.17 0.43 0.43
TIB Non-Scan
<0.1 <0.1 1.21 1.21 0.60 0.78 0.78
TIC
0.13 <0.1 0.10 0.67 0.76 0.92 0.84 0.83 0.83
ISPTA.3
9.1 8.6 14.7 486.6 492.7 201.1 346.9 220.7 220.7
ISPPA.3
89.6 89.6 89.6 93.9 93.9 149.2 149.2 168.5 168.5
Table 113. I739 Maximum Acoustic Output Levels
Bioeffects A23
Bioeffects
546L
Mode
MI
0.65 0.65 0.65 0.58 0.65 0.69 0.69 0.82 0.82
TIS/TIB Scan
0.17 0.11 0.11 1.33 0.72
TIS Non-Scan
<0.1 <0.1 1.38 1.38 0.69 1.94 1.94
TIB Non-Scan
<0.1 <0.1 2.55 2.55 1.27 1.70 1.70
TIC
0.17 <0.1 0.15 1.74 1.85 1.29 1.57 1.89 1.89
ISPTA.3
16.2 31.7 42.6 472.2 483.0 444.6 463.8 275.0 275.0
ISPPA.3
130.1 130.1 130.1 123.1 130.1 168.4 168.4 171.7 171.7
Table 114. 546L Maximum Acoustic Output Levels
739L
Mode
MI
0.36 0.36 0.36 0.61 0.61 0.52 0.61 0.48 0.48
TIS/TIB Scan
0.16 0.10 0.10 0.82 0.46
TIS Non-Scan
<0.1 <0.1 0.47 0.47 0.24 0.74 0.74
TIB Non-Scan
<0.1 <0.1 0.98 0.98 0.49 0.61 0.61
TIC
0.13 <0.1 0.10 0.70 0.79 1.15 0.97 1.09 1.09
ISPTA.3
11.4 11.5 19.1 546.0 553.6 107.8 330.7 142.0 142.0
ISPPA.3
108.4 108.4 108.4 147.0 147.0 130.9 147.0 117.4 117.4
Table 115. 739L Maximum Acoustic Output Levels
Bioeffects A24
Bioeffects
L764
Mode
MI
0.78 0.78 0.78 0.43 0.78 0.78 0.78 0.70 0.70
TIS/TIB Scan
0.48 0.32 0.32 0.88 0.60
TIS Non-Scan
0.05 0.05 0.29 0.29 0.14 0.56 0.56
TIB Non-Scan
0.05 0.05 0.49 0.49 0.25 0.63 0.63
TIC
0.44 0.04 0.34 0.30 0.60 0.77 0.69 0.48 0.48
ISPTA.3
3.59 18.57 20.96 227.32 229.71 505.09 367.40 483.70 483.70
ISPPA.3
143.40 143.40 143.40 121.70 143.40 143.40 143.40 91.50 91.50
Table 116. L764 Maximum Acoustic Output Levels
LA39
Mode
MI
0.43 0.43 0.43 0.81 0.81 0.81 0.81 0.88 0.88
TIS/TIB Scan
0.20 0.13 0.13 1.17 0.65
TIS Non-Scan
<0.1 <0.1 0.20 0.20 0.10 0.98 0.98
TIB Non-Scan
<0.1 <0.1 1.16 1.16 0.58 1.49 1.49
TIC
0.11 <0.1 <0.1 0.35 0.42 0.71 0.57 1.60 1.60
ISPTA.3
8.7 12.9 18.7 629.1 635.0 638.4 636.7 179.6 179.6
ISPPA.3
122.3 122.3 122.3 166.5 166.5 172.6 172.6 172.4 172.4
Table 117. LA39 Maximum Acoustic Output Levels
Bioeffects A25
Bioeffects
S220
Mode
MI
0.88 0.88 0.88 1.05 1.05 1.07 1.07 1.07 1.07 <0.1
TIS/TIB Scan
0.42
TIS Non-Scan
0.07 0.07 0.65 0.65 0.33 0.33 0.33 1.18
TIB Non-Scan
0.20 0.20 1.91 1.91 0.96 1.84 1.84 1.69
TIC
0.59 0.10 0.49 2.74 3.13 1.47 2.30 1.08 1.08 2.07
ISPTA.3
132.62 35.23 123.64 426.40 514.81 294.71 404.76 457.80 457.80 332.30
ISPPA.3
57.80 57.80 57.80 187.50 187.50 111.70 187.50 105.70 105.70
0.28 0.28 1.26 0.77
Table 118. S220 Maximum Acoustic Output Levels
S222
Mode
MI
0.64 0.64 0.64 0.62 0.64 0.65 0.65 0.64 0.64 < 0.1
TIS/TIB Scan
4.96 3.31 3.31 6.04 4.67
TIS Non-Scan
< 0.1 < 0.1 0.58 0.58 0.29 0.28 0.28 1.64
TIB Non-Scan
0.20 0.20 3.43 3.43 1.72 2.13 2.13 4.04
TIC
0.41 0.14 0.41 2.31 2.58 3.52 3.05 1.16 1.16 3.18
ISPTA.3
49.9 43.6 76.9 543.5 576.8 350.7 463.7 595.1 595.1 573.9
ISPPA.3
148.0 148.0 148.0 171.5 171.5 148.0 171.5 148.0 148.0
Bioeffects A26
Bioeffects
S317
Mode
MI
0.56 0.56 0.56 0.67 0.67 0.56 0.67 0.39 0.39 <0.1
TIS/TIB Scan
0.14 0.10 0.10 0.73 0.41
TIS Non-Scan
<0.1 <0.1 0.12 0.12 <0.1 0.13 0.13 0.88
TIB Non-Scan
<0.1 <0.1 1.04 1.04 0.52 1.32 1.32 2.14
TIC
0.22 <0.1 0.18 0.47 0.62 0.83 0.72 0.48 0.48 1.60
ISPTA.3
19.2 25.6 38.4 390.8 403.6 85.0 244.3 524.9 524.9 421.9
ISPPA.3
176.0 176.0 176.0 166.7 176.0 176.0 176.0 100.3 100.3
S611
Mode
B-Mode M-Mode B/M-Mode Pulsed Wave Doppler B/Pulsed Wave Doppler B/Color Flow Doppler B/Color Flow Doppler/ Pulsed Wave Doppler M-Mode/Color M-Mode Color Flow with M Doppler CWD Mode
MI
0.54 0.54 0.54 0.59 0.59 0.54 0.59 0.36 0.36 < 0.1
TIS/TIB Scan
0.47 0.31 0.31 3.24 1.78
TIS Non-Scan
<0.1 <0.1 1.44 1.44 0.72 2.14 2.14 1.81
TIB Non-Scan
0.11 0.11 1.74 1.74 0.87 1.08 1.08 3.78
TIC
0.52 <0.1 0.40 1.41 1.76 3.21 2.48 2.10 2.10 3.63
ISPTA.3
112.2 39.6 114.4 574.7 649.5 167.3 408.4 222.4 222.4 705.9
ISPPA.3
137.8 137.8 137.8 125.0 137.8 137.8 137.8 51.9 51.9
Bioeffects A27
Bioeffects
T739
Mode
MI
0.46 0.46 0.46 0.50 0.50 0.68 0.68 0.73 0.73
TIS/TIB Scan
0.14 0.10 0.10 0.58 0.34
TIS Non-Scan
<0.1 <0.1 0.37 0.37 0.18 0.44 0.44
TIB Non-Scan
<0.1 <0.1 1.27 1.27 0.63 0.90 0.90
TIC
0.14 <0.1 0.11 0.71 0.81 1.02 0.92 0.85 0.85
ISPTA.3
16.0 12.9 23.6 542.8 553.5 255.2 404.4 226.8 226.8
ISPPA.3
150.9 150.9 150.9 111.1 150.9 163.0 163.0 165.6 165.6
Table 122. T739 Maximum Acoustic Output Levels
Bioeffects A28
Bioeffects
Summary of system control settings that yield maximum output Operating Mode
B-Mode M-Mode B/M-Mode CWD-Mode Pulsed Wave Doppler B/Pulsed Wave Doppler B/Color Flow Doppler
B510
Depth=5 Depth=5 Depth=5 Depth= 5.4
C364
Depth=10 Depth=10 Depth=10
C386
Depth=10 Depth=10 Depth=10 Depth=na
C551
C721
VelScale= 3.44 SV=2 Penet=Off VelScale= 3.44 SV=2 Penet=Off VelScale= 2.60 Penet=On ROI=Min PS=8 VelScale= 2.60 Penet=On ROI=Min PS=8 VelScale= 2.60 Penet=On ROI=Min Depth=8 PS=8 VelScale= 2.60 Penet=On ROI=Min Depth=8 PS=8
"
Depth= na
" " " " "
VelScale= 7.9 SV=2 Penet=Off VelScale= 7.9 SV=2 Penet=Off VelScale= 5.2 Penet=Off ROI=Min PS=16 VelScale= 5.2 Penet=Off ROI=Min PS=16 VelScale= 5.2 Penet=Off ROI=Min Depth=10 PS=16 VelScale= 5.2 Penet=Off ROI=Min Depth=10 PS=16
"
" " " " "
" " " " " "
Depth= na
VelScale= 1.72 SV=2 Penet=On VelScale= 1.72 SV=2 Penet=On VelScale= 0.57 Penet=On ROI=Min PS=16 VelScale= 0.57 Penet=On ROI=Min PS=16 VelScale= 0.74 Penet=On ROI=Min Depth=5 PS=16 VelScale= 0.74 Penet=On ROI=Min Depth=5 PS=16
" " " " " "
Depth= na
VelScale= 7.9 SV=1 Penet=On VelScale= 7.9 SV=1 Penet= On VelScale= 0.1 Penet=On ROI=Max PS=12 VelScale= 0.1 Penet=On ROI=Max PS=12 VelScale= 0.1 Penet=On ROI=Max Depth=6 PS=12 VelScale= 0.1 Penet=On ROI=Max Depth=6 PS=12
" " " " " "
B/Color Flow Doppler/ Pulsed Wave Doppler M-Mode/ Color M-Mode
Table 123. Maximum Output Control Settings (continued on next page)
Bioeffects A29
Bioeffects
Summary of system control settings that yield maximum output (contd) Operating Mode
E721
Depth=6 Depth=6 Depth=6 Depth= na
I739
546L
739L
L764
VelScale= 2.62 SV=2 Penet=On VelScale= 2.62 SV=2 Penet=On VelScale= 0.14 Penet=On ROI=Max PS=10 VelScale= 0.14 Penet=On ROI=Max PS=10 VelScale= 0.74 Penet=On ROI=Max Depth=4 PS=10 VelScale= 0.74 Penet=On ROI=Max Depth=4 PS=10
" " " " " "
Depth=na
Vel Scale= 9.1 SV=1 Penet=On Vel Scale= 9.1 SV=1 Penet=On Vel Scale= 1.3 Penet=On ROI=Min PS=16 Vel Scale= 1.3 Penet=On ROI=Min PS=16 Vel Scale= 1.3 Penet=On ROI=Min Depth=4 PS=16 Vel Scale= 1.3 Penet=On ROI=Min Depth=4 PS=16
" " " " " "
Depth=na
VelScale= 7.92 SV=3 Penet=On VelScale= 7.92 SV=3 Penet=On VelScale= 1.13 Penet=Off ROI=Min PS=12 VelScale= 1.13 Penet=Off ROI=Min PS=12 VelScale= 1.13 Penet=Off ROI=Min Depth=16 PS=12 VelScale= 1.13 Penet=Off ROI=Min Depth=16 PS=12
" " " " " "
Depth=na
" " " " " "
Depth= na
VelScale= 1.98 SV=1 Penet=On VelScale= 1.98 SV=1 Penet=On Vel Scale= 5.2 Penet=Off ROI=Min PS=16 Vel Scale= 5.2 Penet=Off ROI=Min PS=16 Vel Scale= 5.2 Penet=Off ROI=Min Depth=4 PS=16 Vel Scale= 5.2 Penet=Off ROI=Min Depth=4 PS=16
" "
" " " "
Table 123. Maximum Output Control Settings (contd)
Bioeffects A30
Bioeffects
LA39
S317
S611
S220
S222
Vel Scale= 9.1 SV=1 Penet=On Vel Scale= 9.1 SV=1 Penet=On VelScale= 0.57 Penet=On ROI=Min PS=16 VelScale= 0.57 Penet=On ROI=Min PS=16 VelScale= 0.74 Penet=On ROI=Min Depth=5 PS=16 VelScale= 0.74 Penet=On ROI=Min Depth=5 PS=16
" "
Depth=9.6
" " " " " "
Depth=4.5
" " " " " "
Depth=10
" " " " " "
Depth=5.4
" " " " " "
" " " "
Bioeffects A31
Bioeffects
T739
Vel Scale= 9.1 SV=1 Penet=On Vel Scale= 9.1 SV=1 Penet=On Vel Scale= 1.3 Penet=On ROI=Min PS=16 Vel Scale= 1.3 Penet=On ROI=Min PS=16 Vel Scale= 1.3 Penet=On ROI=Min Depth=4 PS=16 Vel Scale= 1.3 Penet=On ROI=Min Depth=4 PS=16
" " " " " "
Bioeffects A32
Bioeffects
Maximum Thermal Indices
Indices for probe/mode combinations not shown are less than 1.0 for all control settings. Refer to the Key to Tables on Bioeffects A66.
B510
Imaging Mode BMode MMode B/MMode Scanning Mode Scan NonScan Scan NonScan Pulsed Wave Doppler B/Pulsed Wave Doppler Color BMode Color BMode with Pulsed Wave Doppler MMode with Color M-Mode Color MMode with Pulsed Wave Doppler CW Doppler NonScan Scan Non-Scan Scan Scan Non-Scan Non-Scan Non-Scan Non-Scan Max TIS 0.24 < 0.1 0.16 < 0.1 < 0.1 0.16 < 0.1 0.34 0.25 < 0.1 < 0.1 < 0.1 0.24 Min of W.3(z1) ITA.3(z1) 2.99 0.66 1.99 0.66 2.92 1.99 2.92 4.69 3.34 1.46 2.33 2.33 5.30 Dimensions of Aaprt 1.08 1.08 1.08 1.08 1.08 1.08 1.08 1.08 1.08 1.08 1.08 1.08 0.40 FL Focal Zone 3.90 6.20 3.90 6.20 3.90 3.90 3.90 3.90 3.90 3.90 3.90 3.90 5.40
fc 4.99 4.76 4.99 4.76 5.03 4.99 5.03 4.17 4.17 5.03 4.17 4.17 3.99
W0 10.93 2.62 7.29 2.62 11.49 7.29 11.49 16.17 11.73 5.75 7.53 7.53 12.47
z1
zbp 1.76 1.76 1.76 1.76 1.76 1.76 1.76 1.76 1.76 1.76 1.76 1.76 1.08
Table 124. B510 Maximum Soft Tissue Thermal Index (TIS)
Bioeffects A33
Bioeffects
B510 (contd)
Imaging Mode Scanning Mode Max TIB fc W0 Zsp deq(Zsp) Dimension of Aaprt 1.08 1.08 1.08 1.08 1.08 1.08 1.08 1.08 1.08 1.08 1.08 1.08 0.40 deq @PIImax 0.48
BMode MMode B/MMode
Scan NonScan Scan NonScan
0.24 < 0.1 0.16 < 0.1 0.52 0.16 0.52 0.34 0.25 0.26 0.26 0.26 0.37
4.99 4.76 4.99 4.76 5.03 4.99 5.03 4.17 4.17 5.03 4.17 4.17 3.99
10.93 2.62 7.29 2.62 11.49 7.29 11.49 16.17 11.73 5.75 7.53 7.53 12.47
3.64 4.16 3.64 4.16 3.78 3.64 3.78 3.71 3.71 3.78 3.71 3.71 2.92
0.66 0.41 0.66 0.41 0.27 0.66 0.27 1.20 1.20 0.27 0.37 0.37 0.48
Pulsed Wave Doppler B/Pulsed Wave Doppler Color BMode Color BMode with Pulsed Wave Doppler MMode with Color M-Mode Color MMode with Pulsed Wave Doppler CW Doppler
NonScan Scan Non-Scan Scan Scan Non-Scan Non-Scan Non-Scan Non-Scan
Table 125. B510 Maximum Bone Thermal Index (TIB)
Imaging Mode BMode MMode B/MMode Pulsed Wave Doppler B/Pulsed Wave Doppler Color BMode Color BMode with Pulsed Wave Doppler MMode with Color M-Mode Color MMode with Pulsed Wave Doppler CW Doppler
Maximum TIC 0.23 < 0.1 0.21 0.25 0.40 0.35 0.37 0.16 0.16 0.44
fc 4.99 4.76 4.99 5.03 5.03 4.17 5.03 4.17 4.17 3.99
W0 10.93 2.62 9.91 11.49 18.78 16.17 17.48 7.53 7.53 12.47
Dimensions of Aaprt 1.08 1.08 1.08 1.08 1.08 1.08 1.08 1.08 1.08 0.40
FL Focal Zone 3.90 6.20 3.90 3.90 3.90 3.90 3.90 3.90 3.90 5.40
Table 126. B510 Maximum Cranial Bone Thermal Index (TIC)
Bioeffects A34
Bioeffects
C364
Imaging Mode BMode MMode B/MMode Scanning Mode Scan NonScan Scan NonScan Pulsed Wave Doppler B/Pulsed Wave Doppler Color BMode Color BMode with Pulsed Wave Doppler MMode with Color M-Mode Color MMode with Pulsed Wave Doppler CW Doppler NonScan Scan Non-Scan Scan Scan Non-Scan Non-Scan Non-Scan Non-Scan Max TIS 0.33 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 0.89 0.22 0.89 1.30 0.76 0.45 0.32 0.32 Min of W.3(z1) ITA.3(z1) 4.61 1.17 3.07 1.17 37.79 3.07 37.79 45.80 24.44 18.90 13.00 13.00 Dimensions of Aaprt 1.22 1.22 1.22 1.22 0.51 1.22 0.51 0.51 0.51 0.51 0.51 0.51 FL Focal Zone 4.20 4.20 4.20 4.20 2.30 4.20 2.30 2.30 2.30 2.30 2.30 2.30
fc 3.36 3.36 3.36 3.36 3.33 3.36 3.33 3.32 3.32 3.33 3.32 3.32
W0 13.42 3.43 8.94 3.43 57.30 8.94 57.30 77.22 43.08 28.65 22.35 22.35
z1
zbp 1.87 1.87 1.87 1.87 1.21 1.87 1.21 1.21 1.21 1.21 1.21 1.21
Table 127. C364 Maximum Soft Tissue Thermal Index (TIS)
Imaging Mode
Scanning Mode
Max TIB
fc
W0
Zsp
deq(Zsp)
Dimension of Aaprt 1.22 1.22 1.22 1.22 0.51 1.22 0.51 0.51 0.51 0.51 0.51 0.51
deq @PIImax
BMode MMode B/MMode
0.33 0.16 0.22 0.16 3.16 0.22 3.16 1.30 0.76 1.58 1.86 1.86
3.36 3.36 3.36 3.36 3.33 3.36 3.33 3.32 3.32 3.33 3.32 3.32
13.42 3.43 8.94 3.43 57.30 8.94 57.30 77.22 43.08 28.65 22.35 22.35
4.51 4.60 4.51 4.60 1.97 4.51 1.97 2.03 2.03 1.97 2.03 2.03
1.04 0.37 1.04 0.37 0.45 1.04 0.45 1.08 1.08 0.45 0.24 0.24
Table 128. C364 Maximum Bone Thermal Index (TIB)
Bioeffects A35
Bioeffects
C364 (contd)
Imaging Mode BMode MMode B/MMode Pulsed Wave Doppler B/Pulsed Wave Doppler Color BMode Color BMode with Pulsed Wave Doppler MMode with Color M-Mode Color MMode with Pulsed Wave Doppler CW Doppler Maximum TIC 0.27 <0.1 0.25 1.78 1.96 2.30 2.13 0.66 0.66 fc 3.36 3.36 3.36 3.33 3.33 3.32 3.33 3.32 3.32 W0 13.42 3.43 12.38 57.30 66.25 77.22 71.74 22.35 22.35 Dimensions of Aaprt 1.22 1.22 1.22 0.51 0.51 0.51 0.51 0.51 0.51 FL Focal Zone 4.20 4.20 4.20 2.30 2.30 2.30 2.30 2.30 2.30
Table 129. C364 Maximum Cranial Bone Thermal Index (TIC)
Bioeffects A36
Bioeffects
C386
Imaging Mode BMode MMode B/MMode Scanning Mode Scan NonScan Scan NonScan Pulsed Wave Doppler B/Pulsed Wave Doppler Color BMode Color BMode with Pulsed Wave Doppler MMode with Color M-Mode Color MMode with Pulsed Wave Doppler CW Doppler NonScan Scan Non-Scan Scan Scan Non-Scan Non-Scan Non-Scan Non-Scan Max TIS 0.30 <0.1 0.20 <0.1 0.19 0.20 0.19 1.45 0.83 <0.1 0.47 0.47 Min of W.3(z1) ITA.3(z1) 4.46 1.45 2.97 1.45 11.59 2.97 11.59 38.83 20.90 5.80 37.91 37.91 Dimensions of Aaprt 2.05 2.05 2.05 2.05 2.38 2.05 2.38 1.84 1.84 2.38 1.84 1.84 FL Focal Zone 7.80 7.80 7.80 7.80 7.80 7.80 7.80 6.00 6.00 7.80 6.00 6.00
fc 3.81 3.75 3.81 3.75 3.37 3.81 3.37 2.54 2.54 3.37 2.54 2.54
W0 29.26 8.41 19.51 8.41 68.24 19.51 68.24 122.27 70.89 34.12 113.88 113.88
z1
zbp 2.43 2.43 2.43 2.43 2.61 2.43 2.61 2.29 2.29 2.61 2.29 2.29
Imaging Mode
Scanning Mode
Max TIB
fc
W0
Zsp
deq(Zsp)
deq @PIImax 0.12 0.12 0.98 0.98 0.12 0.62 0.62
BMode MMode B/MMode
0.30 0.14 0.20 0.14 1.33 0.20 1.33 1.45 0.83 0.66 1.90 1.90
3.81 3.75 3.81 3.75 3.37 3.81 3.37 2.54 2.54 3.37 2.54 2.54
29.26 8.41 19.51 8.41 68.24 19.51 68.24 122.27 70.89 34.12 113.88 113.88
7.02 6.81 7.02 6.81 7.49 7.02 7.49 6.00 6.00 7.49 6.00 6.00
2.32 0.61 2.32 0.61 0.53 2.32 0.53 1.31 1.31 0.53 0.83 0.83
Bioeffects A37
Bioeffects
C386 (contd)
Imaging Mode BMode MMode B/MMode Pulsed Wave Doppler B/Pulsed Wave Doppler Color BMode Color BMode with Pulsed Wave Doppler MMode with Color M-Mode Color MMode with Pulsed Wave Doppler CW Doppler Maximum TIC 0.45 0.13 0.43 0.98 1.28 1.98 1.63 1.85 1.85 fc 3.81 3.75 3.81 3.37 3.37 2.54 3.37 2.54 2.54 W0 29.26 8.41 27.92 68.24 87.75 122.27 105.01 113.88 113.88 Dimensions of Aaprt 2.05 2.05 2.05 2.38 2.38 1.84 2.38 1.84 1.84 FL Focal Zone 7.80 7.80 7.80 7.80 7.80 6.00 7.80 6.00 6.00
Bioeffects A38
Bioeffects
C551
Imaging Mode BMode MMode B/MMode Scanning Mode Scan NonScan Scan NonScan Pulsed Wave Doppler B/Pulsed Wave Doppler Color BMode Color BMode with Pulsed Wave Doppler MMode with Color M-Mode Color MMode with Pulsed Wave Doppler CW Doppler NonScan Scan Non-Scan Scan Scan Non-Scan Non-Scan Non-Scan Non-Scan Max TIS 0.26 < 0.1 0.17 < 0.1 0.84 0.17 0.84 2.09 1.13 0.42 1.77 1.77 1.33 Min of W.3(z1) ITA.3(z1) 3.45 0.70 2.30 0.70 14.28 2.30 14.28 34.88 18.59 7.14 30.33 30.33 36.62 Dimensions of Aaprt 0.72 0.72 0.72 0.72 0.86 0.72 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.38 FL Focal Zone 4.20 4.20 4.20 4.20 4.20 4.20 4.20 4.20 4.20 4.20 4.20 4.20 11.90
fc 4.59 4.39 4.59 4.39 4.02 4.59 4.02 4.01 4.01 4.02 4.01 4.01 4.00
W0 11.77 2.43 7.84 2.43 44.13 7.84 44.13 108.14 57.99 22.07 92.25 92.25 69.43
z1
zbp 1.44 1.44 1.44 1.44 1.57 1.44 1.57 1.57 1.57 1.57 1.57 1.57 1.05
Imaging Mode
Scanning Mode
Max TIB
fc
W0
Zsp
deq(Zsp)
Dimension of Aaprt 0.72 0.72 0.72 0.72 0.86 0.72 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.00
deq @PIImax
BMode MMode B/MMode
0.26 < 0.1 0.17 < 0.1 1.91 0.17 1.91 2.09 1.13 0.96 1.85 1.85 0.00
4.59 4.39 4.59 4.39 4.02 4.59 4.02 4.01 4.01 4.02 4.01 4.01 0.00
11.77 2.43 7.84 2.43 44.13 7.84 44.13 108.14 57.99 22.07 92.25 92.25 0.00
4.29 4.07 4.29 4.07 4.23 4.29 4.23 4.05 4.05 4.23 4.05 4.05 0.00
1.19 0.40 1.19 0.40 0.32 1.19 0.32 1.12 1.12 0.32 0.72 0.72 0.00
Bioeffects A39
Bioeffects
C551 (contd)
Bioeffects A40
Bioeffects
C721
Imaging Mode BMode MMode B/MMode Scanning Mode Scan NonScan Scan NonScan Pulsed Wave Doppler B/Pulsed Wave Doppler Color BMode with Pulsed Wave Doppler MMode with Color M-Mode Color MMode with Pulsed Wave Doppler CW Doppler NonScan Scan Non-Scan Scan Non-Scan Non-Scan Non-Scan Non-Scan Max TIS 0.16 0.02 0.11 0.02 0.20 0.11 0.20 0.25 0.10 0.28 0.28 Min of W.3(z1) ITA.3(z1) 0.87 0.10 0.58 0.10 1.47 0.58 1.47 1.98 0.73 2.72 2.72 Dimensions of Aaprt 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.85 FL Focal Zone 3.30 3.30 3.30 3.30 3.80 3.30 3.90 3.80 3.90 3.80 3.80
fc 6.47 6.47 6.47 6.47 5.07 6.47 5.07 5.16 5.07 5.16 5.16
W0 5.26 0.60 3.51 0.60 8.32 3.51 8.32 9.16 4.16 11.30 11.30
z1
zbp 1.56 1.56 1.56 1.56 1.56 1.56 1.56 1.56 1.56 1.56 1.56
Imaging Mode
Scanning Mode
Max TIB
fc
W0
Zsp
deq(Zsp)
Dimension of Aaprt 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.85
deq @PIImax
BMode MMode B/MMode
0.16 0.01 0.11 0.01 0.16 0.11 0.16 0.25 0.08 0.30 0.30
6.47 6.47 6.47 6.47 5.07 6.47 5.07 5.16 5.07 5.16 5.16
5.26 0.60 3.51 0.60 8.32 3.51 8.32 9.16 4.16 11.30 11.30
4.12 4.12 4.12 4.12 4.84 4.12 4.84 4.14 4.84 4.14 4.14
2.51 0.65 2.51 0.65 0.56 2.51 0.56 1.34 0.56 0.57 0.57
Pulsed Wave Doppler B/Pulsed Wave Doppler Color BMode with Pulsed Wave Doppler MMode with Color M-Mode Color MMode with Pulsed Wave Doppler CW Doppler
NonScan Scan Non-Scan Scan Non-Scan Non-Scan Non-Scan Non-Scan
Bioeffects A41
Bioeffects
C721 (contd)
Imaging Mode BMode MMode B/MMode Pulsed Wave Doppler B/Pulsed Wave Doppler Color BMode with Pulsed Wave Doppler MMode with Color M-Mode Color MMode with Pulsed Wave Doppler CW Doppler Maximum TIC 0.13 0.01 0.10 0.20 0.28 0.32 0.27 0.27 0.00 fc 6.47 6.47 6.47 5.07 5.07 5.07 5.16 5.16 0.00 W0 5.26 0.60 4.11 8.32 11.83 13.32 11.30 11.30 0.00 Dimensions of Aaprt 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.00 FL Focal Zone 3.30 3.30 3.30 3.90 3.90 3.90 3.80 3.80 0.00
Bioeffects A42
Bioeffects
E721
Imaging Mode BMode MMode B/MMode Scanning Mode Scan NonScan Scan NonScan Pulsed Wave Doppler B/Pulsed Wave Doppler Color BMode with Pulsed Wave Doppler MMode with Color M-Mode Color MMode with Pulsed Wave Doppler CW Doppler NonScan Scan Non-Scan Scan Non-Scan Non-Scan Non-Scan Non-Scan Max TIS 0.31 <0.1 0.21 <0.1 0.37 0.21 0.37 0.45 0.19 0.60 0.60 Min of W.3(z1) ITA.3(z1) 2.44 0.39 1.63 0.39 4.35 1.63 4.35 4.37 2.18 6.89 6.89 Dimensions of Aaprt 0.82 0.82 0.82 0.82 0.61 0.82 0.614 0.61 0.61 0.61 0.61 FL Focal Zone 2.70 2.70 2.70 2.70 2.70 2.70 2.70 2.80 2.80 2.80 2.80
fc 6.17 5.99 6.17 5.99 5.09 6.17 5.09 5.08 5.09 5.08 5.08
W0 10.69 1.88 7.13 1.88 15.46 7.13 15.46 16.95 7.73 24.37 24.37
z1
zbp 1.54 1.54 1.54 1.54 1.32 1.54 1.32 1.32 1.32 1.32 1.32
Table 139. E721 Maximum Soft Tissue Thermal Index (TIS)
Imaging Mode
Scanning Mode
Max TIB
fc
W0
Zsp
deq(Zsp)
Dimension of Aaprt 0.82 0.82 0.61 0.82 0.61 0.82 0.61 0.61 0.61 0.61 0.61
deq @PIImax
BMode MMode B/MMode
0.31 <0.1 0.21 <0.1 0.64 0.21 0.64 0.45 0.32 0.52 0.52
6.17 5.99 6.17 5.99 5.09 6.17 5.09 5.08 5.09 5.08 5.08
10.69 1.88 7.13 1.88 15.46 7.13 15.46 16.95 7.73 24.37 24.37
3.48 3.47 3.48 3.47 3.64 3.48 3.64 3.55 3.64 3.55 3.55
1.32 0.41 0.41 0.33 0.33 1.32 0.33 1.98 0.33 0.67 0.67
Table 140. E721 Maximum Bone Thermal Index (TIB)
Bioeffects A43
Bioeffects
E721 (contd)
Imaging Mode BMode MMode B/MMode Pulsed Wave Doppler B/Pulsed Wave Doppler Color BMode with Pulsed Wave Doppler MMode with Color M-Mode Color MMode with Pulsed Wave Doppler CW Doppler Maximum TIC 0.26 <0.1 0.22 0.44 0.61 0.67 0.68 0.68 fc 6.17 5.99 6.17 5.09 5.09 5.09 5.08 5.08 W0 10.69 1.88 9.01 15.46 22.58 24.68 24.37 24.37 Dimensions of Aaprt 0.82 0.82 0.82 0.61 0.61 0.61 0.61 0.61 FL Focal Zone 2.70 2.70 2.70 2.70 2.70 2.70 2.80 2.80
Table 141. E721 Maximum Cranial Bone Thermal Index (TIC)
Bioeffects A44
Bioeffects
I739
Imaging Mode BMode MMode B/MMode Scanning Mode Scan NonScan Scan NonScan Pulsed Wave Doppler B/Pulsed Wave Doppler Color BMode Color BMode with Pulsed Wave Doppler MMode with Color M-Mode Color MMode with Pulsed Wave Doppler CW Doppler NonScan Scan Non-Scan Scan Scan Non-Scan Non-Scan Non-Scan Non-Scan Max TIS 0.14 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 0.35 <0.1 0.35 0.52 0.31 0.17 0.43 0.43 Min of W.3(z1) ITA.3(z1) 1.21 0.12 0.80 0.12 7.60 0.80 7.60 10.62 5.71 3.80 9.55 9.55 Dimensions of Aaprt 0.44 0.44 0.44 0.44 0.22 0.44 0.22 0.22 0.22 0.22 0.22 0.22 FL Focal Zone 2.10 2.10 2.10 2.10 1.60 2.10 1.60 1.60 1.60 1.60 1.60 1.60
fc 7.22 7.22 7.22 7.22 5.13 7.22 5.13 5.13 5.13 5.13 5.13 5.13
W0 3.94 0.39 2.63 0.39 14.18 2.63 14.18 20.30 11.46 7.09 17.68 17.68
z1
zbp 1.12 1.12 1.12 1.12 0.79 1.12 0.79 0.79 0.79 0.79 0.79 0.79
Table 142. I739 Maximum Soft Tissue Thermal Index (TIS)
Imaging Mode
Scanning Mode
Max TIB
fc
W0
Zsp
deq(Zsp)
deq @PIImax 0.45 0.45 0.45
BMode MMode B/MMode
0.14 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 1.21 <0.1 1.21 0.52 0.31 0.60 0.78 0.78
7.22 7.22 7.22 7.22 5.13 7.22 5.13 5.13 5.13 5.13 5.13 5.13
3.94 0.39 2.63 0.39 14.18 2.63 14.18 20.30 11.46 7.09 17.68 17.68
2.26 2.26 2.26 2.26 1.73 2.26 1.73 1.79 1.79 1.73 1.79 1.79
0.88 0.26 0.88 0.26 0.22 0.88 0.22 0.45 0.45 0.22 0.41 0.41
Table 143. I739 Maximum Bone Thermal Index (TIB)
Bioeffects A45
Bioeffects
I739 (contd)
Table 144. I739 Maximum Cranial Bone Thermal Index (TIC)
Bioeffects A46
Bioeffects
L764
Imaging Mode BMode MMode B/MMode Scanning Mode Scan NonScan Scan NonScan Pulsed Wave Doppler B/Pulsed Wave Doppler Color BMode with Pulsed Wave Doppler MMode with Color M-Mode Color MMode with Pulsed Wave Doppler CW Doppler NonScan Scan Non-Scan Scan Non-Scan Non-Scan Non-Scan Non-Scan Max TIS 0.48 0.05 0.32 0.05 0.29 0.32 0.29 0.60 0.14 0.56 0.56 0.00 Min of W.3(z1) ITA.3(z1) 3.59 0.38 2.39 0.38 3.83 2.39 3.83 4.57 1.92 4.36 4.36 0.00 Dimensions of Aaprt 0.63 0.63 0.63 0.63 0.70 0.63 0.70 0.70 0.70 0.70 0.70 0.00 FL Focal Zone 3.50 3.50 3.50 3.50 3.50 2.88 3.50 2.88 2.88 2.88 2.88 0.00
fc 6.43 6.43 6.43 6.43 5.25 6.43 5.25 6.49 5.25 6.49 6.49 0.00
W0 15.83 1.47 10.55 1.47 11.48 10.55 11.48 19.56 5.74 18.02 18.02 0.00
z1 0.00
zbp 1.34 1.34 1.34 1.34 1.42 1.34 1.42 1.42 1.42 1.42 1.42 0.00
Table 145. L764 Maximum Soft Tissue Thermal Index (TIS)
Imaging Mode
Scanning Mode
Max TIB
fc
W0
Zsp
deq(Zsp)
deq @PIImax 3.79 0.50 3.79 0.50 1.15 3.79 0.42 1.15 0.42 0.41 0.41 0.00
BMode MMode B/MMode
0.48 0.05 0.32 0.05 0.49 0.32 0.49 0.60 0.25 0.63 0.63 0.00
6.43 6.43 6.43 6.43 5.25 6.43 5.25 5.49 5.25 6.49 6.49 0.00
15.83 1.47 10.55 1.47 11.48 10.55 11.48 19.56 5.74 18.02 18.02 0.00
3.13 3.13 3.13 3.13 3.09 3.13 3.09 3.05 3.09 3.05 3.05 0.00
3.79 0.50 3.79 0.50 0.42 3.79 0.42 1.15 0.42 0.41 0.41 0.00
Table 146. L764 Maximum Bone Thermal Index (TIB)
Bioeffects A47
Bioeffects
L764 (contd)
Table 147. L764 Maximum Cranial Bone Thermal Index (TIC)
Bioeffects A48
Bioeffects
739L
Imaging Mode BMode MMode B/MMode Scanning Mode Scan NonScan Scan NonScan Pulsed Wave Doppler B/Pulsed Wave Doppler Color BMode Color BMode with Pulsed Wave Doppler MMode with Color M-Mode Color MMode with Pulsed Wave Doppler CW Doppler NonScan Scan Non-Scan Scan Scan Non-Scan Non-Scan Non-Scan Non-Scan Max TIS 0.16 <0.1 0.10 <0.1 0.47 0.10 0.47 0.82 0.46 0.24 0.74 0.74 Min of W.3(z1) ITA.3(z1) 1.14 0.14 0.76 0.14 6.03 0.76 6.03 10.14 5.45 3.02 9.69 9.69 Dimensions of Aaprt 0.63 0.63 0.63 0.63 0.22 0.63 0.22 0.22 0.22 0.22 0.22 0.22 FL Focal Zone 2.70 2.70 2.70 2.70 1.60 2.70 1.60 1.60 1.60 1.60 1.60 1.60
fc 7.25 7.21 7.25 7.21 6.67 7.25 6.67 6.62 6.62 6.67 6.62 6.62
W0 4.50 0.62 3.00 0.62 14.85 3.00 14.85 25.58 14.29 7.43 23.26 23.26
z1
zbp 1.35 1.35 1.35 1.35 0.79 1.35 0.79 0.79 0.79 0.79 0.79 0.79
Table 148. 739L Maximum Soft Tissue Thermal Index (TIS)
Imaging Mode
Scanning Mode
Max TIB
fc
W0
Zsp
deq(Zsp)
deq @PIImax
BMode MMode B/MMode
0.16 <0.1 0.10 <0.1 0.98 0.10 0.98 0.82 0.46 0.49 0.61 0.61
7.25 7.21 7.25 7.21 6.67 7.25 6.67 6.62 6.62 6.67 6.62 6.62
4.50 0.62 3.00 0.62 14.85 3.00 14.85 25.58 14.29 7.43 23.26 23.26
2.87 2.84 2.87 2.84 1.99 2.87 1.99 1.92 1.92 1.99 1.92 1.92
0.92 0.29 0.92 0.29 0.24 0.92 0.24 0.67 0.67 0.24 0.59 0.59
Table 149. 739L Maximum Bone Thermal Index (TIB)
Bioeffects A49
Bioeffects
739L (contd)
Imaging Mode BMode MMode B/MMode Pulsed Wave Doppler B/Pulsed Wave Doppler Color BMode Color BMode with Pulsed Wave Doppler MMode with Color M-Mode Color MMode with Pulsed Wave Doppler CW Doppler Maximum TIC 0.13 < 0.1 0.10 0.70 0.79 1.15 0.97 1.09 1.09 fc 7.25 7.21 7.25 6.67 6.67 6.62 6.67 6.62 6.62 W0 4.50 0.62 3.62 14.85 17.85 25.58 21.71 23.26 23.26 Dimensions of Aaprt 0.63 0.63 0.63 0.22 0.22 0.22 0.22 0.22 0.22 FL Focal Zone 2.70 2.70 2.70 1.60 1.60 1.60 1.60 1.60 1.60
Table 150. 739L Maximum Cranial Bone Thermal Index (TIC)
Bioeffects A50
Bioeffects
546L
fc 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 4.03 5.00 4.03 4.98 4.98 4.03 4.98 4.98
W0 7.14 1.80 4.76 1.80 71.93 4.76 71.93 55.94 30.35 35.97 81.86 81.86
z1
zbp 1.60 1.60 1.60 1.60 1.55 1.60 1.55 1.63 1.63 1.55 1.63 1.63
Table 151. 546L Maximum Soft Tissue Thermal Index (TIS)
Imaging Mode
Scanning Mode
Max TIB
fc
W0
Zsp
deq(Zsp)
deq @PIImax 0.42 0.42 0.63 0.63 0.42 0.45 0.45
BMode MMode B/MMode
0.17 <0.1 0.11 <0.1 2.25 0.11 2.25 1.33 0.72 1.27 1.70 1.70
5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 4.03 5.00 4.03 4.98 4.98 4.03 4.98 4.98
7.14 1.80 4.76 1.80 71.93 4.76 71.93 55.94 30.35 35.97 81.86 81.86
3.72 3.72 3.72 3.72 2.51 3.72 2.51 2.64 2.64 2.51 2.64 2.64
0.90 0.28 0.90 0.28 0.54 0.90 0.54 0.41 0.41 0.54 0.74 0.74
Table 152. 546L Maximum Bone Thermal Index (TIB)
Bioeffects A51
Bioeffects
546L (contd)
Table 153. 546L Maximum Cranial Bone Thermal Index (TIC)
Bioeffects A52
Bioeffects
LA39
fc 8.66 8.66 8.66 8.66 5.34 8.66 5.34 5.30 5.30 5.34 5.30 5.30
W0 4.85 0.48 3.24 0.48 7.83 3.24 7.83 43.72 23.48 3.91 35.81 35.81
z1
zbp 1.67 1.67 1.67 1.67 0.84 1.67 0.84 2.36 2.36 0.84 0.84 0.84
Table 154. LA39 Maximum Soft Tissue Thermal Index (TIS)
Imaging Mode
Scanning Mode
Max TIB
fc
W0
Zsp
deq(Zsp)
deq @PIImax 0.13 0.13 0.27 0.27 0.13 0.67 0.67
BMode MMode B/MMode
0.20 <0.1 0.13 <0.1 1.16 0.13 1.16 1.17 0.65 0.58 1.49 1.49
8.66 8.66 8.66 8.66 5.34 8.66 5.34 5.30 5.30 5.34 5.30 5.30
4.85 0.48 3.24 0.48 7.83 3.24 7.83 43.72 23.48 3.91 35.81 35.81
1.38 1.38 1.38 1.38 0.86 1.38 0.86 1.31 1.31 0.86 0.86 0.86
0.93 0.25 0.93 0.25 0.15 0.93 0.15 0.33 0.33 0.15 0.67 0.67
Table 155. LA39 Maximum Bone Thermal Index (TIB)
Bioeffects A53
Bioeffects
LA39 (contd)
Imaging Mode BMode MMode B/MMode Pulsed Wave Doppler B/Pulsed Wave Doppler Color BMode Color BMode with Pulsed Wave Doppler MMode with Color M-Mode Color MMode with Pulsed Wave Doppler CW Doppler Maximum TIC 0.11 <0.1 <0.1 0.35 0.42 0.71 0.57 1.60 1.60 fc 8.66 8.66 8.66 5.34 5.34 5.30 5.34 5.30 5.30 W0 4.85 0.48 3.72 7.83 11.06 43.72 27.39 35.81 35.81 Dimensions of Aaprt 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.24 0.24 1.95 0.24 0.24 0.24 FL Focal Zone 1.30 1.30 1.30 0.67 0.67 3.80 0.67 0.65 0.65
Table 156. LA39 Maximum Cranial Bone Thermal Index (TIC)
Bioeffects A54
Bioeffects
S220
Imaging Mode BMode MMode B/MMode Scanning Mode Scan NonScan Scan NonScan Pulsed Wave Doppler B/Pulsed Wave Doppler Color BMode with Pulsed Wave Doppler MMode with Color M-Mode Color MMode with Pulsed Wave Doppler CW Doppler NonScan Scan Non-Scan Scan Non-Scan Non-Scan Non-Scan Non-Scan Max TIS 0.42 <0.1 0.28 <0.1 0.65 0.28 0.65 0.77 0.33 0.98 0.98 0.45 Min of W.3(z1) ITA.3(z1) 14.41 4.30 9.60 4.30 30.93 9.60 30.93 21.42 15.46 24.13 24.13 39.41 Dimensions of Aaprt 3.28 3.28 3.28 3.28 2.87 3.28 2.87 3.28 2.87 3.28 3.28 1.23 FL Focal Zone 9.60 9.60 9.60 9.60 8.40 9.60 6.75 8.40 6.75 8.40 8.40 10.00
fc 2.41 2.41 2.41 2.41 2.49 2.41 2.49 2.31 2.19 2.31 2.31 2.48
W0 48.03 7.74 32.02 7.74 113.93 32.02 113.93 76.21 56.96 88.39 88.39 103.44
z1
zbp 3.07 3.07 3.07 3.07 1.56 3.07 1.56 3.07 1.56 3.07 3.07 1.88
Table 157. S220 Maximum Soft Tissue Thermal Index (TIS)
Imaging Mode
Scanning Mode
Max TIB
fc
W0
Zsp
deq(Zsp)
deq @PIImax 0.59 0.59 0.45 0.45 0.91
BMode MMode B/MMode
0.42 0.20 0.28 0.20 1.91 0.28 1.91 0.77 0.96 1.84 1.84 1.69
2.41 2.41 2.41 2.41 2.49 2.41 2.49 2.31 2.49 2.31 2.31 2.48
48.03 7.74 32.02 7.74 30.93 32.02 30.93 76.21 15.46 88.39 88.39 103.44
7.66 7.66 7.66 7.66 7.26 7.66 7.26 7.71 7.26 7.71 7.71 6.85
0.89 0.92 0.89 0.92 0.77 0.89 0.77 1.07 0.77 0.66 0.66 0.91
Table 158. S220 Maximum Bone Thermal Index (TIB)
Bioeffects A55
Bioeffects
S220 (contd)
Table 159. S220 Maximum Cranial Bone Thermal Index (TIC)
Bioeffects A56
Bioeffects
S222
Imaging Mode BMode MMode B/MMode Scanning Mode Scan NonScan Scan NonScan Pulsed Wave Doppler B/Pulsed Wave Doppler Color BMode Color BMode with Pulsed Wave Doppler MMode with Color M-Mode Color MMode with Pulsed Wave Doppler CW Doppler NonScan Scan Non-Scan Scan Scan Non-Scan Non-Scan Non-Scan Non-Scan Max TIS 4.96 < 0.1 3.31 < 0.1 0.58 3.31 0.58 6.04 4.67 0.29 0.28 0.28 1.64 Min of W.3(z1) ITA.3(z1) 8.36 3.04 5.57 3.04 48.86 5.57 48.86 70.01 37.79 24.43 23.26 23.26 72.88 Dimensions of Aaprt 2.15 2.15 2.15 2.15 2.46 2.15 2.46 2.46 2.46 2.46 2.46 2.46 0.92 FL Focal Zone 6.20 6.20 6.20 6.20 7.30 6.20 7.30 7.30 7.30 7.30 7.30 7.30 5.40
fc 3.07 2.86 3.07 2.86 2.50 3.07 2.50 2.50 2.50 2.50 2.50 2.50 2.50
W0 27.19 9.27 18.13 9.27 163.32 18.13 163.32 247.54 132.83 81.66 81.69 81.69 137.79
z1
zbp 2.48 2.48 2.48 2.48 2.65 2.48 2.65 2.65 2.65 2.65 2.65 2.65 1.63
Imaging Mode
Scanning Mode
Max TIB
fc
W0
Zsp
deq(Zsp)
deq @PIImax 0.61
BMode MMode B/MMode
4.96 0.20 3.31 0.20 3.43 3.31 3.43 6.04 4.67 1.72 2.13 2.13 4.04
3.07 2.86 3.07 2.86 2.50 3.07 2.50 2.50 2.50 2.50 2.50 2.50 2.50
27.19 9.27 18.13 9.27 163.32 18.13 163.32 247.54 132.83 81.66 81.69 81.69 137.79
5.88 5.81 5.88 5.81 6.96 5.88 6.96 7.36 7.36 6.96 7.36 7.36 4.33
1.22 0.72 1.22 0.72 0.67 1.22 0.67 1.16 1.16 0.67 0.48 0.48 0.61
Bioeffects A57
Bioeffects
S222 (contd)
Imaging Mode BMode MMode B/MMode Pulsed Wave Doppler B/Pulsed Wave Doppler Color BMode Color BMode with Pulsed Wave Doppler MMode with Color M-Mode Color MMode with Pulsed Wave Doppler CW Doppler Maximum TIC 0.41 0.14 0.41 2.31 2.58 3.52 3.05 1.16 1.16 3.18 fc 3.07 2.86 3.07 2.50 2.50 2.50 2.50 2.50 2.50 2.50 W0 27.19 9.27 27.40 163.32 181.45 247.54 214.50 81.69 81.69 137.79 Dimensions of Aaprt 2.15 2.15 2.15 2.46 2.46 2.46 2.46 2.46 2.46 0.92 FL Focal Zone 6.20 6.20 6.20 7.30 7.30 7.30 7.30 7.30 7.30 5.40
Bioeffects A58
Bioeffects
S317
Imaging Mode BMode MMode B/MMode Scanning Mode Scan NonScan Scan NonScan Pulsed Wave Doppler B/Pulsed Wave Doppler Color BMode Color BMode with Pulsed Wave Doppler MMode with Color M-Mode Color MMode with Pulsed Wave Doppler CW Doppler NonScan Scan Non-Scan Scan Scan Non-Scan Non-Scan Non-Scan Non-Scan Max TIS 0.14 <0.1 0.10 <0.1 0.12 0.10 0.12 0.73 0.41 <0.1 0.13 0.13 0.88 Min of W.3(z1) ITA.3(z1) 3.12 0.55 2.08 0.55 8.55 2.08 8.55 15.21 8.64 4.28 9.15 9.15 28.27 Dimensions of Aaprt 2.15 2.15 2.15 2.15 2.15 2.15 2.15 2.15 2.15 2.15 2.15 2.15 0.81 FL Focal Zone 6.20 6.20 6.20 6.20 6.20 6.20 6.20 6.20 6.20 6.20 6.20 6.20 9.60
fc 3.56 3.60 3.56 3.60 2.99 3.56 2.99 2.92 2.92 2.99 2.92 2.92 2.84
W0 14.39 2.49 9.59 2.49 31.24 9.59 31.24 55.14 32.37 15.62 31.74 31.74 64.85
z1
zbp 2.48 2.48 2.48 2.48 2.48 2.48 2.48 2.48 2.48 2.48 2.48 2.48 1.52
Imaging Mode
Scanning Mode
Max TIB
fc
W0
Zsp
deq(Zsp)
deq @PIImax 0.27 0.27 0.27 0.33 0.33 0.75
BMode MMode B/MMode
0.14 <0.1 0.10 <0.1 1.04 0.10 1.04 0.73 0.41 0.52 1.32 1.32 2.14
3.56 3.60 3.56 3.60 2.99 3.56 2.99 2.92 2.92 2.99 2.92 2.92 2.84
14.39 2.49 9.59 2.46 31.24 9.59 31.24 55.14 32.37 15.62 31.74 31.74 64.85
6.18 6.15 6.18 6.15 6.21 6.18 6.21 6.19 6.19 6.21 6.19 6.19 4.69
1.42 0.45 1.42 0.45 0.41 1.42 0.41 1.15 1.15 0.41 0.42 0.42 0.75
Pulsed Wave Doppler B/Pulsed Wave Doppler BMode Color BMode with Pulsed Wave Doppler MMode with Color M-Mode Color MMode with Pulsed Wave Doppler CW Doppler
Bioeffects A59
Bioeffects
S317 (contd)
Imaging Mode BMode MMode B/MMode Pulsed Wave Doppler B/Pulsed Wave Doppler Color BMode Color BMode with Pulsed Wave Doppler MMode with Color M-Mode Color MMode with Pulsed Wave Doppler CW Doppler Maximum TIC 0.22 <0.1 0.18 0.47 0.62 0.83 0.72 0.48 0.48 1.60 fc 3.56 3.60 3.56 2.99 2.99 2.92 2.99 2.92 2.92 2.84 W0 14.39 2.49 12.09 31.24 40.83 55.14 47.99 31.74 31.74 64.85 Dimensions of Aaprt 2.15 2.15 2.15 2.15 2.15 2.15 2.15 2.15 2.15 0.81 FL Focal Zone 6.20 6.20 6.20 6.20 6.20 6.20 6.20 6.20 6.20 9.60
Bioeffects A60
Bioeffects
S611
Imaging Mode BMode MMode B/MMode Scanning Mode Scan NonScan Scan NonScan Pulsed Wave Doppler B/Pulsed Wave Doppler Color BMode Color BMode with Pulsed Wave Doppler MMode with Color M-Mode Color MMode with Pulsed Wave Doppler CW Doppler NonScan Scan Non-Scan Scan Scan Non-Scan Non-Scan Non-Scan Non-Scan Max TIS 0.47 <0.1 0.31 <0.1 1.44 0.31 1.44 3.24 1.78 0.72 2.14 2.14 1.81 Min of W.3(z1) ITA.3(z1) 7.74 0.77 5.16 0.77 14.60 5.16 14.60 24.64 14.90 7.30 14.61 14.61 43.54 Dimensions of Aaprt 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.34 FL Focal Zone 3.70 3.70 3.70 3.70 4.50 3.70 4.50 7.50 7.50 4.50 7.50 7.50 4.50
fc 4.48 4.48 4.48 4.48 5.00 4.48 5.00 4.98 4.98 5.00 4.98 4.98 3.97
W0 22.40 2.24 14.93 2.24 60.71 14.93 60.71 138.22 76.58 30.36 90.64 90.64 95.59
z1
zbp 1.62 1.62 1.62 1.62 1.62 1.62 1.62 1.62 1.62 1.62 1.62 1.62 0.99
Imaging Mode
Scanning Mode
Max TIB
fc
W0
Zsp
deq(Zsp)
deq @PIImax 0.39 0.39 1.32 1.32 0.39 0.94 0.94 0.42
BMode MMode B/MMode
0.47 0.11 0.31 0.11 1.74 0.31 1.74 3.24 1.78 0.87 1.08 1.08 3.78
4.48 4.48 4.48 4.48 5.00 4.48 5.00 4.98 4.98 5.00 4.98 4.98 3.97
22.40 2.24 14.93 2.24 60.71 14.93 60.71 138.22 76.58 30.36 90.64 90.64 95.59
3.69 3.69 3.69 3.69 4.18 3.69 4.18 5.09 5.09 4.18 5.09 5.09 2.93
0.83 0.29 0.83 0.29 0.46 0.83 0.46 1.59 1.59 0.46 1.07 1.07 0.42
Pulsed Wave Doppler B/Pulsed Wave Doppler BMode Color BMode with Pulsed Wave Doppler MMode with Color M-Mode Color MMode with Pulsed Wave Doppler CW Doppler
Bioeffects A61
Bioeffects
S611 (contd)
Imaging Mode BMode MMode B/MMode Pulsed Wave Doppler B/Pulsed Wave Doppler Color BMode Color BMode with Pulsed Wave Doppler MMode with Color M-Mode Color MMode with Pulsed Wave Doppler CW Doppler Maximum TIC 0.52 <0.1 0.40 1.41 1.76 3.21 2.48 2.10 2.10 3.63 fc 4.48 4.48 4.48 5.00 5.00 4.98 5.00 4.98 4.98 3.97 W0 22.40 2.24 17.17 60.71 75.64 138.22 106.93 90.64 90.64 95.59 Dimensions of Aaprt 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.34 FL Focal Zone 3.70 3.70 3.70 4.50 4.50 7.50 4.50 7.50 7.50 4.50
Bioeffects A62
Bioeffects
T739
fc 7.16 7.16 7.16 7.16 5.13 7.16 5.13 5.13 5.13 5.13 5.13 5.13
W0 4.21 0.42 2.81 0.42 15.07 2.81 15.07 22.48 12.64 7.53 18.01 18.01
z1
zbp 1.12 1.12 1.12 1.12 0.79 1.12 0.79 0.79 0.79 0.79 0.79 0.79
Table 169. T739 Maximum Soft Tissue Thermal Index (TIS)
Imaging Mode
Scanning Mode
Max TIB
fc
W0
Zsp
deq(Zsp)
deq @PIImax 0.44 0.44 0.44
BMode MMode B/MMode
0.14 <0.1 0.10 <0.1 1.27 0.10 1.27 0.58 0.34 0.63 0.90 0.90
7.16 7.16 7.16 7.16 5.13 7.16 5.13 5.13 5.13 5.13 5.13 5.13
4.21 0.42 2.81 0.42 15.07 2.81 15.07 22.48 12.64 7.53 18.01 18.01
2.17 2.17 2.17 2.17 1.79 2.17 1.79 1.87 1.87 1.79 1.87 1.87
0.94 0.26 0.94 0.26 0.21 0.94 0.21 0.43 0.43 0.21 0.37 0.37
Table 170. T739 Maximum Bone Thermal Index (TIB)
Bioeffects A63
Bioeffects
T739 (contd)
Table 171. T739 Maximum Cranial Bone Thermal Index (TIC)
Bioeffects A64
Bioeffects
CWD2
Imaging Mode CW Doppler Scanning Mode Scan Non-Scan Max TIS 0.40 Min of W.3(z1) ITA.3(z1) 32.61 Dimensions of Aaprt 0.88 FL Focal Zone
fc 2.00
W0 42.67
z1
zbp 1.59
Table 172. CWD2 Maximum Soft Tissue Thermal Index (TIS)
Imaging Mode CW Doppler
Scanning Mode Scan Non-Scan
Maximum TIB 1.51
fc 2.00
W0 42.67
zsp 1.97
deq(zsp) 1.02
Dimensions of Aaprt 0.88
deq@PIIm
ax
1.02
Table 173. CWD2 Maximum Bone Thermal Index (TIB)
Maximum TIC 1.01
fc 2.00
W0 42.67
FL Focal Zone
Table 174. CWD2 Maximum Cranial Bone Thermal Index (TIC)
CWD5
Imaging Mode CW Doppler Scanning Mode Scan Non-Scan Max TIS 2.23 Min of W.3(z1) ITA.3(z1) 53.79 Dimensions of Aaprt 0.25 FL Focal Zone
fc 4.99
W0 95.45
z1
zbp 0.85
Table 175. CWD5 Maximum Soft Tissue Thermal Index (TIS)
Scanning Mode Scan Non-Scan
Maximum TIB 2.37
fc 4.99
W0 95.45
zsp 1.93
deq(zsp) 0.77
deq@PIIm
ax
0.77
Table 176. CWD5 Maximum Bone Thermal Index (TIB)
Maximum TIC 4.22
fc 4.99
W0 95.45
FL Focal Zone
Table 177. CWD5 Maximum Cranial Bone Thermal Index (TIC)
Bioeffects A65
Bioeffects
Key to Tables
Symbol
MI TISscan TISnon-scan TIB TIC ISPTA.3 ISPPA.3 ITA.3 PIImax W0 W.3(z1) Pr Pr.3 fc PD PRF deq(z) zsp z1 zbp ROC FL Aaprt
Units
n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a mW/cm2 W/cm2 mW/cm2 n/a mW mW MPa MPa MHz Mechanical Index
Description
Output Display Indices: Soft Tissue Thermal Index (scanning mode) Soft Tissue Thermal Index (non-scanning mode) Bone Thermal Index Cranial Thermal Index Spatial Peak-Temporal Average Intensity derated to 0.3 dB/cm /MHz Spatial Peak-Pulse Average Intensity derated to 0.3 dB/cm/MHz Time average Intensity, derated to 0.3 dB/cm/MHz Maximum free-field pulse intensity integral Ultrasonic Power Derated ultrasonic power at axial distance z1 Peak rarefactional pressure Peak rarefactional pressure, derated to 0.3 dB/cm/MHz Center Frequency Pulse Duration Pulse Repetition Frequency Equivalent beam diameter as a function of z, = [(4/p)(W0/ITA(z))]1/2 Axial distance to spatial peak Axial distance to the location of max[min(W.3(z), ITA.3(z) x 1 cm2)] where z zbp Break point depth = 1.69(Aaprt)1/2
Intensity, Power, and Pressure Parameters:
Transmit Parameters:
ms
kHz cm cm cm cm cm cm cm2
Distance/Depth and Area Parameters:
Radius of curvature Focal Length Area of Active Aperture Table 178. Index Tables Key
Bioeffects A66
Bioeffects
Measurement Precision and Uncertainty

Precision and measurement uncertainty of the system used to measure the acoustic output is provided in the following table. These values are determined in accordance with Section 6.4 of the Standard for Real-Time Display of Thermal and Mechanical Acoustic Output Indices on Diagnostic Ultrasound Equipment, AIUM/NEMA 1992 and the Acoustic Output Measurement Standard for Diagnostic Ultrasound Equipment, NEMA 1992. Peak Rarefactional Pressure
2.6% 6.0%
Center Frequency Precision Measurement Uncertainty

4.4% 10.0%
Acoustic Power
1.5% 3.4%
Acoustic Intensity
5.1% 11.6%
Table 179. Measurement Precision and Uncertainty
Acoustic Output Display Operation and Accuracy

The Acoustic Output display will show MI (Mechanical Index) while in B-Mode. When other modes are selected TIS, TIB or TIC will be displayed. The Setup/Custom Display menu page 8 will determine which value (TIS, TIB or TIC) is displayed. Display increments are 0.2 for values of one or less and 1.0 for values greater than one. Display accuracy is +100%/80% at a maximum display value. It is +60%/70% at mid-range display values.
Bioeffects A67
Bioeffects
Endnotes
1
Standard for Real-Time Display of Thermal and Mechanical Acoustic Output Indices on Diagnostic Ultrasound Equipment, AIUM/NEMA, 1992. Implementation of the Principle of As Low As Reasonably Achievable (ALARA) for Medical and Dental Personnel, National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurements (NCRP), Report No.107, December 31, 1990. FDA Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH), 510(k) Guidance for Diagnostic Ultrasound and Fetal Doppler Ultrasound Medical Devices, September 8, 1989 draft. FDA Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH), 510(k) Guidance for Diagnostic Ultrasound and Fetal Doppler Ultrasound Medical Devices, September 8, 1989 draft. Rochelson BL, Schulman H, Fleischer A, Farmakides G, Bracero L, Ducey J, Winter D, Penny B: The clinical; significance of Doppler umbilical artery velocimetry in the small for gestational age fetus. Am J Obstet Gynecol 156:1223-1226, 1987. Soothill PW, Nicolaides KH, Bilardo CM, Campbell S: Relation of fetal hypoxia in growth retardation to mean blood velocity in the fetal aorta. Lancet 2:1118-1119, 1986. Jouppila P, Kirkinen P: Increased vascular resistance in the descending aorta of the human fetus in hypoxia. R J Obstet Gynecol 91:853-856, 1984. Reuwer PJHM, Rietman GW, Sijmons EA, et al: Intrauterine growth retardation: Prediction of perinatal distress by Doppler ultrasound. Lancet 2:415-418, 1987. Copel JA, Grannum PA, Hobbins JC, Cunningham FG: Doppler Ultrasound in Obstetrics. In: Pritchard, MacDonald, GNT (eds) Williams Obstetrics Seventeenth Edition, Philadelphia, PA, Appleton & Lange, 1988, Supplement No. 16. Rochelson B, Schulman H, Farmakides G, et al: The significance of absent end-diastolic velocity in umbilical artery velocity waveforms. Am J Obstet Gynecol 156:1213, 1987. Woo JSK, Liang ST, Lo RLS: Significance of an absent or reversed end diastolic flow in Doppler umbilical waveforms. J Ultrasound Med 6:291, 1987. Kleinman CS, Weinstein EM, Copel JA: Pulsed Doppler Analysis of human fetal blood flow. Clin Diagnostic Ultrasound 17:173-185, 1986. Strasburger JF, Huhta JC, Carpenter RJ, et al: Doppler echocardiography in the diagnosis and management of persistent fetal arrhythmias. J Am Coll Cardiol 7:1386-1391, 1986. Steinfeld L. Rappaport HL, Rossbach HC, Martinez E: Diagnosis of fetal arrhythmias using echocardiographic and Doppler techniques. J Am Coll Cardiol 9:1425-1433, 1986. Reed KL, Sahn DJ, Marx GR, et al: Cardiac Doppler flows during fetal arrhythmias: Physiologic consequences. Obstet Gynecol 70:1-6, 1987. Silverman NH, Kleinman CS, Rudolph AM, et al: Fetal atrioventricular valve insufficiency associated with non-immune hydrops: a two-dimensional echocardiographic and pulsed Doppler ultrasound study. Circulation 72:825-832, 1985. FDA/CDRH, 510(k) Diagnostic Ultrasound Guidance Update of 1991, April 26, 1991 draft. Biological Effects of Ultrasound: Mechanisms and Clinical Implications, NCRP Report No. 74, December 30, 1983. Exposure Criteria for Medical Diagnostic Ultrasound: I. Criteria Based on Thermal Mechanisms, NCRP Report No. 113, June 1, 1992. Bioeffects Considerations for the Safety of Diagnostic Ultrasound, Journal of Ultrasound in Medicine, AIUM, September 1988. Geneva Report on Safety and Standardization in Medical Ultrasound, WFUMB, May 1990.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17 18 19
20
21
Bioeffects A68
IEC Acoustic Output Tables

Acoustical parameters represent the maximum values for a probe/mode combination; other parameters refer to the operating conditions which yield these maximum acoustic parameters.
Key to Tables
Parameter P_ Unit
(MPa)
Description
Peak-negative acoustic pressure in the plane perpendicular to the beam-alignment axis containing the maximum pulse-pressure-squared integral (or maximum mean square acoustic pressure for continuous wave systems) in the whole ultrasonic field. Spatial-peak temporal-average derived intensity in the whole ultrasonic field. Distance from the transducer output face to the point of maximum pulse-pressure-squared integral (or maximum mean square acoustic pressure for continuous wave systems). 6 dB pulse beam-width at the point of maximum pulse-pressure-squared integral (or maximum mean square acoustic pressure for continuous wave systems). These directions shall be parallel (||) and perpendicular ( ) to the reference direction. Pulse repetition rate for non-scanning modes. Scan repetition rate (srr) for scanning modes. Dimensions parallel and perpendicular to the reference direction. Arithmetic-mean acoustic-working frequency measured by a hydrophone placed at the point of maximum pulse-pressure-squared integral (or maximum mean square acoustic pressure for continuous wave systems). Acoustic power-up fraction. Acoustic initialization fraction.
Ispta Ip
mW/cm2 mm
wpb6 (||) ( ) prr srr Output Beam Dimensions fawf
mm
KHz Hz mm MHz
APF AIF
% %
Table 180. Key to IEC Table Value
Bioeffects A69
Bioeffects
Key to Tables (contd)
Parameter Maximum Power Unit
mW
Description
Maximum temporal-average power output. For scanning modes, this shall be the total power output of all the acoustic pulses. Output beam intensity. In systems in which the user defines the power-up mode, this shall be stated as either user defined or not applicable (n/a). In systems in which the user defines the initialization mode, this shall be stated as either user defined or not applicable (n/a). If the system has acoustic output freeze, then this shall be stated as yes; otherwise, it shall be stated as no.
Iob Power-up Mode
mW/cm2
Initialization Mode
Acoustic Output Freeze Itt Its

mm mm
Transducer to transducer-output-face distance. Typical value for the transducer stand-off distance. If the transducer assembly is normally used in contact with the patient, then this shall be specified contact system.
Table 180. Key to IEC Table Value (contd)
Bioeffects A70
Bioeffects
B510 Probe
Parameter P_ (MPa) Ispta (mW/cm2) Ip (mm) wpb6 (||) (mm) ( )(mm) prr (kHz) srr (Hz) Output Beam Dim. (||) (mm) ( )(mm) fawf (MHz) APF (%) (Acoustic Power up Fraction) AIF (%) (Acoustic Initialization Fraction) Maximum Power (mW) Iob (mW/cm2) Power-up Mode Initialization Mode Acoustic Output Freeze Itt (mm) Its (mm)
1.3 1.4 123 10.5 10.2 4.99 na 2.7 1.4 0.89 10.5 10.2 4.76 na 1.3 1.4 0.89 123 10.5 10.2 4.99 na 1.4 1.3 6.83 10.5 10.2 5.03 na 1.4 1.3 6.83 123 10.5 10.2 50.3 na
B
2.21 191.2 36.4
M
2.21 98.8 41.6
B+M
2.21 226.3 36.4
D
2.19 972.9 37.8
B+D
2.21 1100.4 37.8
na
na
na
na
na
10.93 10.17 na na yes 0.00 contact
Table 181. B510 IEC Acoustic Output Information
Bioeffects A71
Bioeffects
B510 Probe (contd)
1.6 1.6 5.20 43 10.5 10.2 4.17 na 1.6 1.6 5.20 43 10.5 10.2 4.17 na 1.6 1.6 5.20 10.5 10.2 4.17 na 1.6 1.6 5.20 10.5 10.2 4.17 na 4.4 1.8 10.5 3.8 3.99 na
B+rD
2.21 174.2 37.1
B+rD+D
2.21 637.3 37.1
M+cM
2.72 288.2 37.1
cM+D
2.72 288.2 37.1
cwD
0.08 194.2 29.2
na
na
na
na
na
Table 181. B510 IEC Acoustic Output Information (contd)
Bioeffects A72
Bioeffects
C364 Probe
Parameter P_ (MPa) Ispta (mW/cm2) Ip (mm) wpb6 (||) (mm) ( )(mm) prr (kHz) srr (Hz) Output Beam Dim. (||) (mm) ( )(mm) fawf (MHz) APF (%) (Acoustic Power up Fraction) AIF (%) (Acoustic Initialization Fraction) Maximum Power (mW) Iob (mW/cm2) Power-up Mode Initialization Mode Acoustic Output Freeze Itt (mm) Its (mm) B
1.84 45.7 45.1 1.9 2.6 68 10.2 12.0 3.36 na
M
1.84 154.6 46.0 1.8 2.5 0.89 10.2 12.0 3.36 na
B+M
1.84 185.1 45.1 1.9 2.6 0.89 68 10.2 12.0 3.36 na
D
1.91 1135.8 19.7 2.0 6.6 15.72 10.2 5.0 3.33 na
B+D
1.91 1166.3 19.7 2.0 6.6 15.72 68 10.2 5.0 3.33 na
na
na
na
na
na
Table 182. C364 IEC Acoustic Output Information
Bioeffects A73
Bioeffects
C364 Probe (contd)
Parameter P_ (MPa) Ispta (mW/cm2) Ip (mm) wpb6 (||) (mm) ( )(mm) prr (kHz) srr (Hz) Output Beam Dim. (||) (mm) ( )(mm) fawf (MHz) APF (%) (Acoustic Power up Fraction) AIF (%) (Acoustic Initialization Fraction) Maximum Power (mW) Iob (mW/cm2) Power-up Mode Initialization Mode Acoustic Output Freeze Itt (mm) Its (mm) B+rD
2.66 153.4 20.3 1.9 6.5 10.40 8 10.2 5.0 3.32 na
B+rD+D
2.66 659.8 20.3 1.9 6.5 10.40 8 10.2 5.0 3.32 na
M+cM
1.84 1120.1 20.3 1.9 6.5 10.40 10.2 5.0 3.32 na
cM+D
1.84 1120.1 20.3 1.9 6.5 10.40 10.2 5.0 3.32 na
na
na
na
na
Table 182. C364 IEC Acoustic Output Information (contd)
Bioeffects A74
Bioeffects
C386 Probe
1.93 51.7 70.2 1.8 2.2 29 12.0 17.1 3.81 na
M
1.93 220.9 68.1 1.9 2.4 0.89 12.0 17.1 3.75 na
B+M
1.93 573.9 70.2 1.8 2.2 0.89 29 12.0 17.1 3.81 na
D
1.75 2367.8 74.9 1.8 2.5 7.86 12.0 19.8 3.37 na
B+D
1.93 2720.7 74.9 1.8 2.5 7.86 29 12.0 19.8 3.37 na
na
na
na
na
na
Bioeffects A75
Bioeffects
C386 Probe (contd)
1.93 678.4 60.0 2.1 2.8 0.42 7 12.0 15.3 2.54 na
B+rD+D
1.93 1699.6 60.0 2.1 2.8 0.42 7 12.0 15.3 2.54 na
M+cM
1.84 1036.1 60.0 2.1 2.8 1.48 12.0 15.3 2.54 na
cM+D
1.84 1036.1 60.0 2.1 2.8 1.48 12.0 15.3 2.54 na
na
na
na
na
Bioeffects A76
Bioeffects
C551 Probe
1.69 83.1 42.9 1.7 2.5 102 9.0 8.0 4.59 na
M
1.69 79.1 40.7 1.7 3.1 1.03 9.0 8.0 4.39 na
B+M
1.69 134.5 42.9 1.7 2.5 1.03 102 9.0 8.0 4.59 na
D
1.91 1843.2 42.3 1.7 2.3 3.42 9.0 9.6 4.02 na
B+D
1.91 1898.6 42.3 1.7 2.3 3.42 102 9.0 9.6 4.02 na
na
na
na
na
na
Bioeffects A77
Bioeffects
C551 Probe (contd)
2.09 513.4 40.5 1.6 2.4 1.14 25 9.0 9.6 4.01 na
B+rD+D
2.09 1206.0 40.5 1.6 2.4 1.14 25 9.0 9.6 4.01 na
M+cM
2.07 864.5 40.5 1.6 2.4 1.48 9.0 9.6 4.01 na
cM+D
2.07 864.5 40.5 1.6 2.4 1.48 9.0 9.6 4.01 na
na
na
na
na
108.14 126.98 na na yes 0.00 contact
Bioeffects A78
Bioeffects
C721 Probe
1.82 10.49 41.20 0.01 0.02 27.00 0.01 0.02 6.47 na
M
1.82 18.97 41.20 0.01 0.02 7.10 6.47 na
B+M
1.82 25.96 41.20 0.01 0.02 7.10 27.00 0.01 0.02 6.47 na
D
2.62 258.60 48.40 0.02 0.02 2.98 5.07 na
B+D
2.62 265.59 48.40 0.02 0.02 2.98 27.00 0.01 0.02 5.07 na
na
na
na
na
na
Bioeffects A79
Bioeffects
C721 Probe (contd)
1.82 74.49 41.40 0.02 0.02 0.00 6.00 0.02 0.02 5.16 na
B+rD+D
2.62 170.04 41.40 0.02 0.02 0.00 6.00 0.02 0.02 5.16 na
M+cM
1.20 338.60 41.40 0.02 0.02 0.00 5.16 na
cM+D
1.20 338.60 41.40 0.02 0.02 0.00 5.16 na
na
na
na
na
Bioeffects A80
Bioeffects
E721 Probe
1.82 10.49 41.20 0.01 0.02 27.00 0.01 0.02 6.47 na
M
1.82 18.97 41.20 0.01 0.02 7.10 6.47 na
B+M
1.82 25.96 41.20 0.01 0.02 7.10 27.00 0.01 0.02 6.47 na
D
2.62 258.60 48.40 0.02 0.02 2.98 5.07 na
B+D
2.62 265.59 48.40 0.02 0.02 2.98 27.00 0.01 0.02 5.07 na
na
na
na
na
na
Table 186. E721 IEC Acoustic Output Information
Bioeffects A81
Bioeffects
E721 Probe (contd)
1.82 74.49 41.40 0.02 0.02 0.00 6.00 0.02 0.02 5.16 na
B+rD+D
2.62 170.04 41.40 0.02 0.02 0.00 6.00 0.02 0.02 5.16 na
M+cM
1.20 338.60 41.40 0.02 0.02 0.00 5.16 na
cM+D
1.20 338.60 41.40 0.02 0.02 0.00 5.16 na
na
na
na
na
Table 186. E721 IEC Acoustic Output Information (contd)
Bioeffects A82
Bioeffects
I739 Probe
1.46 31.2 22.6 0.9 1.3 56 6.0 7.3 7.22 na
M
1.46 26.0 22.6 0.9 1.3 0.86 6.0 7.3 7.22 na
B+M
1.46 190.4 22.6 0.9 1.3 0.86 56 6.0 7.3 7.22 na
D
2.39 880.6 17.3 1.5 1.7 18.12 6.0 3.7 5.13 na
B+D
2.39 1045.0 17.3 1.5 1.7 18.12 56 6.0 3.7 5.13 na
na
na
na
na
na
Table 187. I739 IEC Acoustic Output Information
Bioeffects A83
Bioeffects
I739 Probe (contd)
1.89 643.7 17.9 1.5 1.6 2.60 12 6.0 3.7 5.13 na
B+rD+D
2.39 844.3 17.9 1.5 1.6 2.60 12 6.0 3.7 5.13 na
M+cM
1.78 435.7 17.9 1.5 1.6 2.60 6.0 3.7 5.13 na
cM+D
1.78 435.7 17.9 1.5 1.6 2.60 6.0 3.7 5.13 na
na
na
na
na
Table 187. I739 IEC Acoustic Output Information (contd)
Bioeffects A84
Bioeffects
L764 (LH) Probe
3.33 12.05 3.13 1.20 1.10 34.00 1.20 1.10 6.43 na
M
3.33 69.86 3.13 1.20 1.07 809.00 6.43 na
B+M
3.33 77.90 3.13 1.20 1.10 809.00 34.00 1.20 1.10 6.43 na
D
1.99 658.85 3.09 1.05 1.27 3.93 5.25 na
B+D
3.33 666.89 3.09 1.05 1.27 3.93 34.00 1.20 1.10 5.25 na
na
na
na
na
na
Table 188. L764 (LH) IEC Acoustic Output Information
Bioeffects A85
Bioeffects
L764 (LH) Probe (contd)
3.33 165.56 3.05 0.87 1.08 10.40 26.00 0.87 1.08 6.49 na
B+rD+D
3.33 416.22 3.05 0.87 1.08 10.40 26.00 0.87 1.08 6.49 na
M+cM
2.76 2060.00 3.05 0.87 1.08 10.40 6.49 na
cM+D
2.76 2060.00 3.05 0.87 1.08 10.40 6.49 na
na
na
na
na
Table 188. L764 (LH) IEC Acoustic Output Information (contd)
Bioeffects A86
Bioeffects
546L Probe
2.64 51.7 37.2 0.8 2.1 28 6.0 14.9 5.00 na
M
2.64 129.5 37.2 0.8 2.1 0.93 6.0 14.9 5.00 na
B+M
2.64 480.1 37.2 0.8 2.1 0.93 28 6.0 14.9 5.00 na
D
1.71 847.8 25.1 10.5 1.9 7.86 6.0 13.9 4.03 na
B+D
2.64 1198.4 25.1 10.5 1.9 7.86 28 6.0 13.9 4.03 na
na
na
na
na
na
Table 189. 546L IEC Acoustic Output Information
Bioeffects A87
Bioeffects
546L Probe (contd)
2.64 1569.1 26.4 10.6 1.5 2.26 13 6.0 15.4 4.98 na
B+rD+D
2.64 1383.7 26.4 10.6 1.5 2.26 13 6.0 15.4 4.98 na
M+cM
2.48 781.2 26.4 10.6 1.5 2.26 6.0 15.4 4.98 na
cM+D
2.48 781.2 26.4 10.6 1.5 2.26 6.0 15.4 4.98 na
na
na
na
na
Table 189. 546L IEC Acoustic Output Information (contd)
Bioeffects A88
Bioeffects
739L Probe
1.67 38.9 28.7 0.8 1.4 56 6.0 10.6 7.25 na
M
1.67 48.8 28.4 0.8 1.4 0.92 6.0 10.6 7.21 na
B+M
1.67 74.7 28.7 0.8 1.4 0.92 56 6.0 10.6 7.25 na
D
2.24 1330.8 19.9 1.3 1.4 1.71 6.0 3.7 6.67 na
B+D
2.24 1356.7 19.9 1.3 1.4 1.71 56 6.0 3.7 6.67 na
na
na
na
na
na
Table 190. 739L IEC Acoustic Output Information
Bioeffects A89
Bioeffects
739L Probe (contd)
1.93 305.1 19.2 1.3 1.3 0.66 10 6.0 3.7 6.62 na
B+rD+D
2.24 830.9 19.2 1.3 1.3 0.66 10 6.0 3.7 6.62 na
M+cM
1.80 366.2 19.2 1.3 1.3 1.48 6.0 3.7 6.62 na
cM+D
1.80 366.2 19.2 1.3 1.3 1.48 6.0 3.7 6.62 na
na
na
na
na
Table 190. 739L IEC Acoustic Output Information (contd)
Bioeffects A90
Bioeffects
LA39 Probe
1.80 21.5 13.8 0.6 0.9 56 15.0 6.5 8.66 na
M
1.80 29.9 13.8 0.6 0.9 0.87 15.0 6.5 8.66 na
B+M
1.80 227.7 13.8 0.6 0.9 0.87 56 15.0 6.5 8.66 na
D
2.03 849.8 8.6 1.4 1.1 18.12 15.0 1.6 5.34 na
B+D
2.03 1047.6 8.6 1.4 1.1 18.12 56 15.0 1.6 5.34 na
na
na
na
na
na
Table 191. LA39 IEC Acoustic Output Information
Bioeffects A91
Bioeffects
LA39 Probe (contd)
1.93 1094.0 13.1 8.4 1.1 1.14 11 15.0 13.0 5.30 na
B+rD+D
2.03 1070.8 13.1 8.4 1.1 1.14 11 15.0 13.0 5.30 na
M+cM
2.12 234.2 8.6 1.3 1.1 1.70 15.0 1.6 5.30 na
cM+D
2.12 234.2 8.6 1.3 1.1 1.70 15.0 1.6 5.03 na
na
na
na
na
Table 191. LA39 IEC Acoustic Output Information (contd)
Bioeffects A92
Bioeffects
S220 (W) Probe
2.17 492.83 76.60 0.03 0.04 85.00 0.03 0.04 2.41 na
M
2.17 140.05 76.60 0.03 0.04 5.20 2.41 na
B+M
2.17 468.60 76.60 0.03 0.04 5.20 85.00 0.03 0.04 2.41 na
D
2.68 1340.90 72.60 0.03 0.04 3.42 2.49 na
B+D
2.68 1669.45 72.60 0.03 0.04 3.42 85.00 0.03 0.04 2.49 na
na
na
na
na
na
113.93 134.03 na na yes 0.00 contact
145.95 143.80 na na yes 0.00 contact
Table 192. S220 (W) IEC Acoustic Output Information
Bioeffects A93
Bioeffects
S220 (W) Probe (contd)
2.83 1074.25 77.10 0.03 0.04 6.83 45.00 0.03 0.04 2.31 na
B+rD+D
2.83 1371.85 77.10 0.03 0.04 6.83 45.00 0.03 0.04 2.31 na
M+cM
2.83 1606.50 77.10 0.03 0.04 6.83 2.31 na
cM+D
2.83 1606.50 77.10 0.03 0.04 6.83 2.31 na
cwD
0.21 1340.20 68.50 0.06 0.06 2.48 na
na
na
na
na
na
Table 192. S220 (W) IEC Acoustic Output Information (contd)
Bioeffects A94
Bioeffects
S222 Probe
2.1 2.7 82 12.0 17.9 3.07 na 2.1 2.7 0.86 12.0 17.9 2.86 na 2.1 2.7 0.86 82 12.0 17.9 3.07 na 2.2 3.4 1.71 12.0 20.5 2.50 na 2.2 3.4 1.71 82 12.0 20.5 2.50 na
B
1.72 151.9 58.8
M
1.72 144.2 58.1
B+M
1.72 245.4 58.8
D
1.75 1666.7 69.6
B+D
1.75 1768.0 69.6
na
na
na
na
na
Table 193. S222 IEC Acoustic Output Information
Bioeffects A95
Bioeffects
S222 Probe (contd)
1.9 3.4 5.96 19 12.0 20.5 2.50 na 1.9 3.4 5.96 19 12.0 20.5 2.50 na 1.9 3.4 5.96 12.0 20.5 2.50 na 1.9 3.4 5.96 12.0 20.5 2.50 na 4.4 3.1 12.0 7.7 2.50 na
B+rD
1.83 1235.4 73.6
B+rD+D
1.83 1501.7 73.6
M+cM
1.72 2117.6 73.6
cM+D
1.72 2117.6 73.6
cwD
0.21 1482.0 43.3
na
na
na
na
na
247.54 101.78 na na yes 0.00 contact
137.79 149.51 na na yes 0.00 contact
Table 193. S222 IEC Acoustic Output Information (contd)
Bioeffects A96
Bioeffects
S317 Probe
1.76 85.1 61.8 1.6 2.4 102 12.0 17.9 3.56 na
M
1.76 120.5 61.5 1.6 2.4 0.86 12.0 17.9 3.60 na
B+M
1.76 179.7 61.8 1.6 2.4 0.86 102 12.0 17.9 3.56 na
D
1.83 1556.9 62.1 1.7 2.6 6.83 12.0 17.9 2.99 na
B+D
1.83 1916.1 62.1 1.7 2.6 6.83 102 12.0 17.9 2.99 na
na
na
na
na
na
Bioeffects A97
Bioeffects
S317 Probe (contd)
1.76 600.7 61.9 1.7 2.6 6.84 38 12.0 17.9 2.92 na
B+rD+D
1.83 1258.4 61.9 1.7 2.6 6.84 38 12.0 17.9 2.92 na
M+cM
1.18 1836.4 61.9 1.7 2.6 6.84 12.0 17.9 2.92 na
cM+D
1.18 1836.4 61.9 1.7 2.6 6.84 12.0 17.9 2.92 na
cwD
0.26 1694.7 46.9 2.9 4.7 12.0 6.7 2.84 na
na
na
na
na
na
Bioeffects A98
Bioeffects
S611 Probe
1.97 333.1 36.9 1.2 2.1 137 8.0 11.4 4.48 na
M
1.97 135.3 36.9 1.2 2.1 0.87 8.0 11.4 4.48 na
B+M
1.97 397.9 36.9 1.2 2.1 0.87 137 8.0 11.4 4.48 na
D
3.09 2522.2 41.8 1.4 1.9 1.13 8.0 11.4 5.00 na
B+D
3.09 2784.4 41.8 1.4 1.9 1.13 137 8.0 11.4 5.00 na
na
na
na
na
na
Bioeffects A99
Bioeffects
S611 Probe (contd)
1.97 824.0 50.9 3.6 2.1 5.96 59 8.0 11.4 4.98 na
B+rD+D
3.09 1804.4 50.9 3.6 2.1 5.96 59 8.0 11.4 4.98 na
M+cM
1.46 1208.3 50.9 3.6 2.1 5.96 8.0 11.4 4.98 na
cM+D
1.46 1208.3 50.9 3.6 2.1 5.96 8.0 11.4 4.98 na
cwD
0.07 1830.0 29.3 3.0 2.6 3.97 na
na
na
na
na
na
138.22 151.84 na na yes 0.00 contact
106.93 117.47 na na yes 0.00 contact
Bioeffects A100
Bioeffects
T739 Probe
1.78 48.0 21.7 0.9 1.2 56 6.0 7.3 7.16 na
M
1.78 39.3 21.7 0.9 1.2 0.86 6.0 7.3 7.16 na
B+M
1.78 325.6 21.7 0.9 1.2 0.86 56 6.0 7.3 7.16 na
D
2.23 1040.5 17.9 1.6 1.6 18.12 6.0 3.7 5.13 na
B+D
2.23 1326.8 17.9 1.6 1.6 18.12 56 6.0 3.7 5.13 na
na
na
na
na
na
Table 196. T739 IEC Acoustic Output Information
Bioeffects A101
Bioeffects
T739 Probe (contd)
2.06 782.9 18.7 1.6 1.5 2.60 12 6.0 3.7 5.13 na
B+rD+D
2.23 1054.9 18.7 1.6 1.5 2.60 12 6.0 3.7 5.13 na
M+cM
2.13 457.4 18.7 1.6 1.5 2.60 6.0 3.7 5.13 na
cM+D
2.13 457.4 18.7 1.6 1.5 2.60 6.0 3.7 5.13 na
na
na
na
na
Table 196. T739 IEC Acoustic Output Information (contd)
Bioeffects A102
Bioeffects
CWD2 Probe
na na na na na na na na na na na
M
na na na na na na na na
B+M
D
B+D
na
na
na
na
na
na na na na yes 0.00 contact
Table 197. CWD2 IEC Acoustic Output Information
Bioeffects A103
Bioeffects
CWD2 Probe (contd)
B+rD+D
M+cM
na na na na na na na
cM+D
cwD
0.09 222.6 19.7 10.2 4.7 2.00
na
na
na
na
na
na
na
na
Table 197. CWD2 IEC Acoustic Output Information (contd)
Bioeffects A104
Bioeffects
CWD5 Probe
M
B+M
D
B+D
na
na
na
na
na
Table 198. CWD5 IEC Acoustic Output Information
Bioeffects A105
Bioeffects
CWD5 Probe (contd)
B+rD+D
M+cM
cM+D
cwD
0.13 571.2 19.3 6.0 3.0 4.99
na
na
na
na
na
na
na
na
Table 198. CWD5 IEC Acoustic Output Information (contd)
Bioeffects A106
System Data
Specifications
System Dimensions
S 51 inches High S 21 inches Wide S 37 inches Deep
Measurements
S Distance S Circumference (Ellipse/Trace) S Area (Ellipse/Trace) S Volume (Ellipsoid) S Angle Between Two Lines (B-Mode) S Time & Slope (M-Mode) S Single Velocity (Doppler) S Time Average Maximum Velocity
Display Monitor
S Single 12 B/W Display (Color option) S 512 Lines S NTSC & PAL Formats S Interlace
Operating/Display
S B-Mode S M-Mode S PW Doppler S Color Flow S Simultaneous B/D & B/CF S Colorized B & M Display S Steerable CW (Sector only) S Non-Imaging Single CW
Weight Approximately 320 lbs. (145 kg) for fully configured console. Image Processing
S 64 Displayed Gray Levels S Dynamic Range S Acoustic Zoom S Image Invert & Rotate S Independent Dual Image Displays
Doppler
S Steerable Sample Volume (SV) S Variable SV Sizing S Variable Spectral Scaling S Selectable Spectral Smoothing S Doppler Angle Correction with Calibrated
Linear Imaging
S Steerable B, Doppler, CF: S Slant Scan Imaging
"30_
S Independent B/CF Steering S 3.5 6.7 MHz
Velocity Scaling
S Variable Sample Size S Variable Wall Filter S Scrolling Memory
System Data B1
System Data
Convex Imaging
S Variable Angle: 20_ 80_ S Steerable Scan Angle S 3.5 5.0 MHz
Sector Imaging
S Variable Angle: 20_90_ S Steerable Scan Angle S Trapezoidal and Slant Scan Imaging S 3.3 7.5 MHz
Color Flow Doppler

S Selectable Wall Rejection S Variable FOV Size & Position S Selectable Color Maps S Color Baseline Shift S Color Velocity Tag S CINE Memory
Micro-Convex Imaging
S Variable Angle: 20_ 120_ S Steerable Scan Angle S 3.5 6.7 MHz
CINE Memory
S 8 Megabyte Frame Memory (std.) S Optional 40 megabyte Frame Memory S 8 megabyte Frame B + CF Memory S Dual Image CINE Display S Measurement/Calculation & Annotations
Calculations
S Heart Rate (BPM, M-Mode) S Fetal Age (GS, CRL, FL, BPD) S Estimated Fetal Weight S PI (Vascular) S RI (Vascular) S FVI (Vascular) S Percent Stenosis (Vascular) S Two-Velocity Ratio
on CINE
S Loop Editing S Variable Speed Display
Data Display
S Biopsy Guidelines with integrated
Electrical Power
S 120/220-240 VAC S 50/60 Hz S 1000 VA Max Power Draw
distance measure
S New Patient Data Entry S OB Summary Report S GYN Summary Report S LV Cardiac Summary Report S Vascular Summary Report S User Programmable Annotation Libraries
Transducer Types
S Phased Array Sector S Convex Array S Linear Array S Micro-Convex Endocavity (TV/TR) Array S Pencil CWD
for each application
System Data B2
System Data
LOGIQ 400 Clinical Measurement Accuracy

Basic Measurements
The following information is intended to provide guidance to the user in determining the amount of variation or measurement error that should be considered when performing clinical measurements with this equipment. Error can be contributed by equipment limitations and improper user technique. Be sure to follow all measurement instructions and develop uniform measurement techniques among all users to minimize the potential operator error. Also, in order to detect possible equipment malfunctions that could affect measurement accuracy, a quality assurance (QA) plan should be established for the equipment that includes routine accuracy checks with tissue mimicking phantoms. Please be advised that all distance and Doppler related measurements through tissue are dependent upon the propagation velocity of sound within the tissue. The propagation velocity usually varies with the type of tissue, but an average velocity for soft tissue is assumed. This equipment is designed for, and the accuracy statements listed below are based on, an assumed average velocity of 1540 m/s. The percent accuracy when stated applies to the measurement obtained (not the full scale range). Where the accuracy is stated as a percent with a fixed value, the expected inaccuracy is the greater of the two.
System Data B3
System Data
Basic Measurements (contd)
Limitations or Conditions
Measurement
Depth Distance: Axial Lateral Lateral Lateral Circumference: Trace Ellipse Area: Trace Ellipse Time Slope Doppler SV Position Velocity Point Velocity Doppler Angle Correction
Units
mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm2 mm2 s mm/s mm cm/s
Useful Range
Full Screen Full Screen Full Screen Full Screen Full Screen Full Screen Full Screen Full Screen Full Screen Timeline Display Timeline Display Full Screen From 0 to 100 cm/s From 100 to 130 cm/s From 0 to 60 From 60 to 80
cm/s cm/s
" 5 % or 1 mm " 5 % or 1 mm " 5 % or 2 mm " 5 % or 4 mm " 5 % or 4 mm " 10 % or 1 mm " 5 % or 1 mm " 5 % or 1 mm " 5 % or 1 mm " 5 % or 10 ms " 5 % or 1 mm/s " 2 mm ""10 % or 1 cm/s " 5 % or 1 cm/s " 50 % "5% " 12 %
2 2
Accuracy
Linear Probes Convex Probes Sector Probes
M or Doppler M-Mode Only Any Direction PW Doppler Color Flow Color Flow
Table 199. System Measurements and Accuracies
System Data B4
System Data
LOGIQ
t 400 Clinical Calculation Accuracy

The following information describes the method used to implement the stated clinical calculation and provides the user with an indication of error likely to be contributed by the equipment due to the system (computer) implementation of the stated formula or method. These accuracy statements assume that input values are correct. Estimate the overall inaccuracy of a combined measurement and calculation by including the stated inaccuracy from the basic measurement accuracy statements.
CAUTION
Diagnostic errors may result from the inappropriate use of clinical calculations. Review the referenced source of the stated formula or method to become familiar with the intended uses and possible limitations of the calculation. Calculation formulas and databases are provided as a tool to assist the user, but should not be considered an undisputed database, in making a clinical diagnosis. The user is encouraged to research the literature and judge the equipment capabilities on an ongoing basis in order to assess its utility as a clinical tool.
System Data B5
System Data
Fetal age measurements
Measurement
Gestational Sac (GS) Crown Rump Length (CRL)
User Input
Mean of 3 Distances
Range
10-60 mm
Accuracy
" 1 Wk " 1 Wk
Formula or Method
GS=(d1+d2+d3)/ 3+3.6225
Source
Hellman, AJOG, 103:789, 1969 Hadlock, Radiology, 182:501, 1992 Hadlock, JUM, 1:97, 1982
1 Distance
0.2-10.1 cm
Biparietal Diameter (BPD)
1 Distance
"0.8@12-18wk "1.39@18-24wk "1.34@24-30wk "2.0@30-36wk "3.6@36-42wk

SD= SD=1.18
" 0.3 Wk " 0.01 Wk " 0.1 Wk " 0.02 Wk
CRL=1.684969 + 0.315646 x d1 + 0.049306 x d12 + 0.004057 x d13 + 0.000120456 x d14 BPD=6.8954 + 2.6345 x d1 + 0.008771 x d13
Head Circumference (HC) Abdominal Circumference (AC) Femur Length (FL)
Circumference by 2 Distances, Trace, or Ellipse Circumference by 2 Distances, Trace, or Ellipse 1 Distance
HC=8.8 + 0.55 x c + 2.8 x 10-4x c3
Hadlock, AJR, 138:649, 1982 Hadlock, AJR, 139:367, 1982 Hadlock, AJR, 138:875, 1982
SD=1.2
AC=7.607 + 0.7645 x c + 0.00393 x c2
"9.5d@12-23wk "22d@23-40wk
SD=
FL=10.38 + 0.2256 x d + 0.001948 x d2
Table 200. Fetal Age Measurements
An AC of 9.9 cm calculates an age of 15.6 weeks; this should be out of range.
System Data B6
System Data
OB Calculations
Calculation
Heart Rate (HR) Biparietal Diameter (BPD) Uterine Systolic/ Diastolic Ratio (UT-S/D)
Formula
HR[BPM]=2beat time[sec]/ 120[sec] BPD=6.8954 + 2.6345 x d + 0.008771 x d3 UT-S/D=Vsystolic/ Vdiastolic
" 0.2 BPM " 0.3 Wk v " " u ) * " For vv100 cm/s, " 4% (v ="2%) For vu100 cm/s, )15% *13% (v ="7%) For vv100 cm/s, "2% For vu100 cm/s, "7% For vv100 cm/s, " 4% For vu100 cm/s," 15% For vv100 cm/s, " 4% (v ="2%) For vu100 cm/s, )15% *13% (v ="7%)
For v 100 cm/s, 4% (vacc= 2%) For v 100 cm/s, 15% 13% (vacc= 7%)
acc acc acc acc
Accuracy
Source
n/a Hadlock, JUM, 1:97,1982 n/a
Umbilical Cord Systolic/ Diastolic Ratio (CRD-S/D) Time Averaged Maximum Velocity (TAMAX) Pulsatility Index (PI)
UT-S/D=Vsystolic/ Vdiastolic
n/a
TAMAX=sum{Vt} from t1 to t2/ (t2 t1) PI=(Vmax Vmin)/ TAMAX
n/a
n/a
Resistivity Index (RI)
RI=(Vmax Vmin)/ Vmax
n/a
Table 201. Obstetric Formulas and Calculations
Timeline scale markers are accurate to
" 6.25%.
System Data B7
System Data
PV and Cardiac Calculations
Calculation
Right Exterior Carotid Artery Velocity (RT ECA) Right Common Carotid Artery Velocity (RT CCA) Right Carotid Artery Bifurca tion Velocity (RT BIFURC) Right Interior Carotid Artery Velocity (RT ICA) Right Interior Carotid Artery Velocity (RT ICA) Time Averaged Maximum Velocity (TAMAX) Right Interior Carotid Artery Velocity/ Common Carotid Artery Velocity Ratio (RT ICA/CCA) LT ECA, LT CCA, LT BIFURC, LT ICA, LT ICA/CCA Velocities Ratios (A/B RATIOS)
Formula
RT ECA=Input
Range
From 0 to 100 cm/s From 100 to 130 cm/s
"10 % or 1 cm/s " 5 % or 1 cm/s "10 % or 1 cm/s " 5 % or 1 cm/s "10 % or 1 cm/s " 5 % or 1 cm/s "10 % or 1 cm/s " 5 % or 1 cm/s "10 % or 1 cm/s " 5 % or 1 cm/s "10 % or 1 cm/s " 5 % or 1 cm/s "5%
Accuracy
RT CCA=Input
RT BIFURC=Input
RT ICA=Input
RT ICA=Input
TAMAX=sum{Vt} from t1 to t2/ (t2 t1) RT ICA/CCA=VICA/ VCCA
VCCA
10 cm/s
Same as above, for Left Carotid Artery
"10 % or 1 cm/s " 5 % or 1 cm/s "5%
A/B=V1/V2
Va
10 cm/s
Table 202. Peripheral Vascular Formulas and Calculations
System Data B8
System Data
PV and Cardiac Calculations (contd)
Calculation
Stenosis Ratio (% STENO) Systolic Velocity/ Diastolic Velocity Ratio (S/D RATIOS) Pulsatility Index (PULSE INDEX) Resistivity Index (RESIS INDEX) Heart Rate (HR)
Formula
% STENO=[1 (Aresidual/ Alumen Alumen)] x 100 S/D RATIOS=Vsystolic/ Vdiastolic
Vdiastole
u u
Range
20 mm2 10 cm/s
"5% "5% "5% "5% "5%
Accuracy
PULSE INDEX= (Vmax Vmin)/TAMAX RESIS INDEX= (Vmax Vmin)/Vmax HR[BPM]=2beat time[sec]/ 120[sec]
u 10 cm/s V u 10 cm/s 30 250 BPM

TAMAX
max
Table 202. Peripheral Vascular Formulas and Calculations (contd)
Timeline scale markers are accurate to
" 6.25%.
System Data B9
System Data
Gynecological
Calculation
Uterine Length (UT-L)
Formula
UT-L=Input
Range
Axial Full Screen Lateral Full Screen Lateral Full Screen Lateral Full Screen Same as UTL Same as UTL Same as UTL
" 5 % or 1 mm " 5 % or 2 mm " 5 % or 4 mm " 5 % or 4 mm

Same as UTL Same as UTL Same as UTL
Accuracy
Probes
Linear Convex Sector Same as UTL Same as UTL Same as UTL
Uterine Height (UT-H) Uterine Width (UT-W) Endometrial Thickness (ENDO) Left Ovarian Length (LT OV-L) Left Ovarian Height (LT OV-H) Left Ovarian Width (LT OV-W) Right Ovarian Length (RT OV-L) Right Ovarian Height (RT OV-H) Right Ovarian Width (RT OV-W) Left Ovarian Vessel Resistive Index (LT OV-RI) Uterine Vessel Resistive Index (UT-RI) Right Ovarian Vessel Resistive Index (RT OV-RI)
UT-H=Input UT-W=d1 ENDO=d1
LT OV-L=d1 LT OV-H=d1 LT OV-W=d1 RT OV-L=d1 RT OV-H=d1 RT OV-W=d1 LT OV-RI= (Vmax Vmin)/Vmax UT-RI= (Vmax Vmin)/Vmax RT OV-RI= (Vmax Vmin)/Vmax
Same as UTL Same as UTL Same as UTL Same as UTL Same as UTL Same as UTL Vmax
Same as UTL Same as UTL Same as UTL Same as UTL Same as UTL Same as UTL
Same as UTL Same as UTL Same as UTL Same as UTL Same as UTL Same as UTL
u 10 cm/s u 10 cm/s u 10 cm/s
"5% "5% "5%
Vmax
Vmax
Table 203. Gynecologic Formulas and Calculations
System Data B10
Peripherals
Peripheral Listing
CAUTION
DO NOT connect any probes or accessories without approval by GE. All peripherals are considered options to the console. Those listed in this section have been tested and verified to be compatible with the LOGIQ 400 system. Please refer to the local Sales or Field Service representative for the latest list of peripherals.
Type
VCR B&W Printer Color Printer
Manufacturer
Sony Sony Sony
Table 204. Approved Peripherals
Model
SVO-9500MD/MDP UP-890MD/CE UP-1850MD/EPM
Safety Precautions
WARNING
When using any peripheral device or accessory, observe all danger messages, warnings, and cautions given in peripheral operator manuals. Refer to the Service Manual (2127661) for more information.
Peripherals C1
Peripherals
Peripheral Configurations
Black/White Video Printer
The Sony UP-890MD/CE Black and White Video Page Printer is mounted on the left side of the LOGIQ 400 under the keyboard. The Sony connections are Video, AC power, and Remote Shutter (Expose).
LOGIQ 400
LOGIQ
B/W Page Printer
Illustration 497. B/W Page Printer Location
Peripherals C2
Peripherals
Black/White Video Printer (contd)
Illustration 498. Black/White Printer Connections
Peripherals C3
Peripherals
Color Video Printer
The Sony UP-1850MD/EPM color video page printer connections are Red, Green, Blue, Sync, and RS-232 Remote Control.
Illustration 499. Color Page Printer Connections
Peripherals C4
Peripherals
S-VHS Video Cassette Recorder
The Sony SVO-9500MD/MDP recorder takes advantage of all the advanced tracking features of the LOGIQ 400. The Sony SVO-9500MD/MDP connections are S-VHS Video In/Out, Audio In/Out, and RS-232 Remote Control.
Illustration 500. VCR Connections
Peripherals C5
Peripherals
Video Signal Specifications

Table 205 gives the video specifications of the Ultrasound system. This data may be needed when interfacing the system with OEM cameras or recording devices.
NTSC
Total Lines per Frame [line] Vertical Field Frequency [Hz] Horizontal Scanning Frequency [Hz] Displayed Image Pixels [mm] Total Horizontal Line Time [ms] Horizontal Display [ms] Front Porch Width [ms] Sync Pulse Width [ms] Back Porch Width [ms] Total Horizontal Blanking [ms] Vertical Blanking Interval [H] Vertical Front Porch Width [H] Vertical Sync Width [H] Vertical Back Porch Width [H] 525 60 15.733 207.0 by 157.3 63.56 49.54 2.76 4.73 6.53 14.02 31.50 6.5 3 22
Table 205. Video Signal Specifications
PAL
625 50 15.625 207.0 by 157.3 64.00 48.81 3.09 4.68 7.42 15.19 38.50 9.0 2.5 27
Maintenance
Consult the peripheral device operator manual for necessary routine maintenance.
Peripherals C6
Assistance
Clinical Questions
. . . . .
For information, call your local Applications, Sales or Service Representative. For USA Only GE Clinical Answer Center at 18006825327 or 4145245255.
Service Questions
For service, call your local Service Representative. For USA Only GE CARES at 18004371171
Literature
To request the latest GE Accessories catalog or equipment brochures, call your local Applications, Sales or Service Representative. For USA Only Response Center at 18006436439
Accessories
To place an order, call your local Applications, Sales or Service Representative. For USA Only GE Access Center at 18004723666. Refer to the User Maintenance (Volume 3) for additional information.
Assistance D1
Assistance
Supplies/Accessories
CAUTION
DO NOT connect any probes or accessories without approval by GE. The following supplies/accessories have been verified to be compatible with the LOGIQ 400 system:
CAUTION
The LOGIQ
t 400 ultrasound system complies with

, except Gel, Disinfectant,
regulatory requirements of Biopsy Kits, Sheath Sets.
Peripherals
Accessory
S-VHS VCR Tapes Sony VCR Model SVO-9500MD Sony B&W Printer Model UP-890 Sony Color Printer Model UP-1800 IIE Multi Image Camera Model IIE 460 Sony UP-1800 Paper Sony UP-890 Paper
Units
60 Minute S-VHS tape 126 Minute S-VHS tape Each Each Each Each Color B/W
Catalog Number
E7010GG E7010GF H4550MA E8310KA H4550MB H4550KF E8310JH E8310JJ E8310FA
Table 206. Peripherals and Accessories
Console
Accessory
Foot Switch Vinyl Cover Extended Cine Memory Each Each Kit
Units
Catalog Number
H40582L H40642L H40592L
Table 207. Console Accessories
Assistance D2
Assistance
Probes
Accessory
B510 C364 C386 C551 E721 I739 LA39 546L 739L C721 L764 S220 S222 S317 S611 T739 CWD2 CWD5 PA51 Adapter Probe Cable Arm Left Side Holder Special TV/TR Holder Each Each Each Each Each Each Each Each Each Each Each Each Each Each Each Each Each Each Each Each Each Each
Units
Catalog Number
H45202BT H45202CF H45202CC H45202CE H45202MT H45202JG H45202LA H45202LE H45202AG H45202MN H45202HP H45202WG H45202TC H45202SD H45202SF H45202TG H45202DB H45202DE H45202PA H40622L H40602L H40612L
Table 208. Probes and Accessories
Assistance D3
Assistance
Gel
Accessory
Thermasonic Gel Warmer Aquasonic 100 Scan Gel
Units
Holds three plastic bottles (250 ml or 8 oz). 5 liter jug 250 ml plastic bottles (12/case)
Catalog Numbers
E8365BH E8365AF E8365BA E8365BC E8365BD E8365BK
Scan Ultraound Gel
8 oz plastic bottles (12/case) 1 gallon plastic jug Four 1-gallon plastic jugs
Table 209. Gel
Disinfectant
Accessory
Cidex Activated Dialdehyde Di ld h d
Units
16/1 qt. bottles 4/1 gal. bottles 2/2.5 gal bottles
Table 210. Disinfectant
Catalog Number
E8386EB E8386EC E8386ED
Assistance D4
Assistance
Civco Biopsy Starter Kits (includes bracket)
Accessory
C364 Probe Biopsy Kit C551 Probe Biopsy Kit 739L Probe Biopsy Kit E721 Probe Biopsy Kit C721 Probe Biopsy Kit L764 Probe Biopsy Kit T739 Probe Biopsy Kit LA39 Probe Biopsy Kit Kit Kit Kit Kit Kit Kit Kit Kit Kit
Units
Catalog Number
E8385MD E8385MF E8385MC
(YMS) (Civco)
H46222AD H4550BG H40252L E8385LA H45262L E8385MM
Table 211. Probe Biopsy Brackets
Multi-Angle Brackets
Accessory
S317 Probe C364 Probe C386 Probe 546L Probe Each Each Each Each
Units
Catalog Number
E8385PD E8385PA E8385PB E8385PC
Table 212. Multi-Angle Brackets
Biopsy Replacement Kits
Accessory
Civco UltraPro Civco UltraPro II Civco Cleaning Brush for E721 Biopsy Guide Kit Kit
Units
Catalog Number
E8385LC E8385PE E8323GE
5 Brushes Per Set

Table 213. Biopsy Kits
Assistance D5
Assistance
Ultrasound Probe and Cord Sheath Sets
Accessory
Sterile Ultrasound Probe Sheath Set Sterile Ultrasound Cord Sheath Set Sanitary Rectal/Vaginal Probe Cover
Units
20 Per Set 20 Per Set 20 Per Set
Catalog Number
E8385CA E8385CB E8385CC E8385CE E8385CF
Sterile Combination 12 Per Set Probe & Cord Cover Set Sterile Ultrasound Probe Sheath Set for Wide (2.5 and 3.5) Aperture Sector Probes 20 Per Set
Table 214. Biopsy Sheath Kits
Physio Accessories
Accessory
Physio Input Panel ECG Cables PCG Sensor Kit Set Each
Units
Catalog Number
H40552L H40562L H40572L
Table 215. Patient ECG Lead Wires
Patient Electrodes
Accessory
Adult Pediatric Adult/off center Pediatric/off center Box/300 Box/300 Box/500
Units
Catalog Number
E8811EE E8811EN E8365DA E8365DB
Box/1000
Table 216. Patient ECG Electrodes
Contact the distributor, GE affiliate or sales representative for approved peripherals.
Assistance D6
Warranties
Scope and Duration of Warranties
Product warranties
GE warrants that the ultrasound products are: 1. Free from defects in material, workmanship, and title. 2. Conform to our published product specifications in effect on the date of shipment of the products. The product specifications are available on request.
Patent and copyright warranty

GE warrants that when delivered, the products will not be subject to any valid patent or copyright infringement claim. The warranty period for all warranties, except the warranty of title and the patent and copyright warranty, is limited in time as shown below: Ultrasound Part Ultrasound systems, components, modules, and upgrades Ultrasound probes and transducers Time Limit 12 Months
12 Months 3 Months
.
t
Ultrasound water path attachment kit
Table 217. Warranty Time Limits
NOTE: If a maintenance agreement is desired to extend coverage beyond the manufacturers warranty, please contact the local service or sales representative.
Warranties E1
Warranties
Patent and copyright warranty (contd)
The warranty period begins on the date the products are delivered. But, if GE assembles the products, the warranty period begins on the earlier of: 1. Five (5) days after the date GE notifies you that we have completed assembly and the products are operating in accordance with our published product specifications OR 2. The date you first use the products for patient use. If assembly is delayed for 30 days or more after the date of delivery for a reason beyond our reasonable control, the warranty period will begin on the thirtieth day after the date of delivery. The warranty period for any product or part furnished to correct a warranty failure will be the unexpired term of the warranty applicable to the repaired or replaced products.
Warranties E2
Warranties
Warranty Exclusions
These warranties are exclusive and in lieu of all other warranties, whether written, oral, expressed, implied, or statutory.
No warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose applies.

The warranties DO NOT cover: 1. Any defect or deficiency (including failure to conform to product specifications) which results, in whole or in part, from: a. Any alteration, improper storage, handling, use or maintenance, or any extraordinary use of the products, by anyone other than GE. b. Failure to follow any of GEs written recommendations or instructions. c. Combining the products with products of others or with incompatible GE products. d. Any of your designs, specifications or instructions. OR e. Any cause external to the products as furnished by GE or beyond our reasonable control. 2. Ultrasound supplies and accessories identified by catalog numbers which start with the letter E (which are covered by a separate printed warranty). 3. Products which are not listed in our price pages at the time of sale. Non-listed products are provided with the manufacturers warranties, if any, GE is permitted to pass on to you. Otherwise, non-listed products are provided AS IS. 4. The payment and reimbursement of any facility costs arising from repair or replacement of the products or parts.
Warranties E3
Warranties
Exclusive Warranty Remedies

Product warranties
If you promptly notify us of your warranty claim and make the product available for service, GE will at our option, repair, adjust, or replace (with new or exchange replacement parts) the non-conforming product or parts of the product. Warranty service will be performed without charge from 8:00 am to 5:00 pm, Monday through Friday, excluding our holidays, and outside those hours at our prevailing service rates and subject to the availability of personnel.
Patent and copyright warranty

GE will defend or settle any suit against you to the extent it is based on an infringement claim which would be a breach of the patent and copyright warranty. If the infringement claim is valid, GE will pay all damages and costs awarded against you due to the breach. In addition, GE will obtain a license for you to continue using the infringing product, provide a non-infringing replacement, alter the product so that it is non-infringing, or remove the infringing product and refund the price (less reasonable depreciation) and any return transportation costs paid by you. The above describes your exclusive remedies and our sole liability for any warranty claims. You agree that GE and our representatives have no liability to you for: 1. Any penal, incidental, or consequential damages such as lost profit or revenue. 2. Any assistance not required under our quotation. 3. Anything occurring after the warranty period ends.
Warranties E4
OB Tables
List of OB Tables
Table 1. BD : Berkowitz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2. BPD : Campbell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3. BD : Campbell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 4. CRL : Campbell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5. FL : Campbell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6. TAD : Eriksen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 7. AC : Hadlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 8. BPD : Hadlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 9. CRL : Hadlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 10. FL : Hadlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 11. HC : Hadlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 12. AC : Hansmann . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 13. BPD : Hansmann . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 14. CRL : Hansmann . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 15. FL : Hansmann . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 16. GS : Hansmann . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 17. HC : Hansmann . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 18. OFD : Hansmann . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 19. TAD : Hansmann . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 20. ThD : Hansmann . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 21. GS : Hellman . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 22. AC : Jeanty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 23. BD : Jeanty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 24. BPD : Jeanty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 25. CRL : Jeanty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 26. FL : Jeanty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 27. HC : Jeanty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 28. BPD : Kurtz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 29. CRL : Nelson . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 30. BPD : Osaka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 31. CRL : Osaka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 32. EFBW : Osaka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 33. FL : Osaka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 34. FTA : Osaka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 35. HL : Osaka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 36. BPD : Paris . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB Tables F3 OB Tables F3 OB Tables F4 OB Tables F4 OB Tables F5 OB Tables F5 OB Tables F6 OB Tables F6 OB Tables F7 OB Tables F7 OB Tables F8 OB Tables F9 OB Tables F10 OB Tables F11 OB Tables F12 OB Tables F12 OB Tables F13 OB Tables F13 OB Tables F14 OB Tables F14 OB Tables F15 OB Tables F15 OB Tables F16 OB Tables F16 OB Tables F17 OB Tables F17 OB Tables F18 OB Tables F18 OB Tables F19 OB Tables F19 OB Tables F20 OB Tables F20 OB Tables F21 OB Tables F22 OB Tables F22 OB Tables F23
OB Tables F1
OB Tables
OB Tables (contd)
Table 37. Table 38. Table 39. Table 40. Table 41. Table 42. Table 43. Table 44. Table 45. Table 46. Table 47. Table 48. Table 49. Table 50. Table 51. Table 52. Table 53. Table 54. Table 55. Table 56. Table 57. Table 58. Table 59. Table 60. Table 61. Table 62. Table 63. Table 64. Table 65. Table 66. CRL : Paris . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FL : Paris . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ft : Paris . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TAD : Paris . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BPD : Rempen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CRL : Rempen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GS : Rempen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CRL : Robinson . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC : Sostoa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BD : Sostoa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BPD : Sostoa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FL : Sostoa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HC : Sostoa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFD : Sostoa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BPD : Tokyo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CRL : Tokyo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FL : Tokyo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GS : Tokyo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LV : Tokyo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FL/HC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HC/AC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EFW : Tokyo Shinozuka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APTDxTTD (AxT): Tokyo Shinozuka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FL : Tokyo Shinozuka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC : Tokyo Shinozuka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BPD : Tokyo Shinozuka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CRL : Tokyo Shinozuka . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC : Australia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CRL : Australia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BPD : Australia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OB Tables F23 OB Tables F24 OB Tables F24 OB Tables F25 OB Tables F25 OB Tables F26 OB Tables F27 OB Tables F28 OB Tables F28 OB Tables F29 OB Tables F29 OB Tables F30 OB Tables F30 OB Tables F31 OB Tables F31 OB Tables F32 OB Tables F32 OB Tables F33 OB Tables F33 OB Tables F34 OB Tables F34 OB Tables F35 OB Tables F35 OB Tables F36 OB Tables F36 OB Tables F37 OB Tables F37 OB Tables F38 OB Tables F38 OB Tables F39
OB Tables F2
OB Tables
BD : Berkowitz Unit : BD (mm) Age (Day) SD (mm) BPD : Campbell Unit : Kings College Hosp. London (Am.J.obst.gynecol). Oct 1, 1982
BPD <20 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 Age n/a 80 82 84 86 89 91 93 96 98 100 103 105 107 110 112 114 117 119 121 124 126 128 131 133 135 138 140 142 145 147 149 152 154 156 159 161 163 166 168 170 SD 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 BPD 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 >97 Age 173 175 177 180 182 184 187 189 192 195 198 201 204 207 210 213 216 219 222 225 228 231 234 237 240 243 246 249 252 255 258 261 264 267 270 273 276 279 n/a SD 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
BPD (mm) Age (Day) SD (mm)
BD <13 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52
Age n/a 81 82 84 86 88 91 95 98 102 105 109 110 112 116 120 124 128 130 132 135 138 142 145 149 152 155 159 162 166 169 173 179 185 191 197 202 207 212 217 223
SD 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
BD 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 >59
Age 230 237 244 251 258 266 275 n/a
SD 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Table 1. BD : Berkowitz
Table 2. BPD : Campbell
OB Tables F3
OB Tables
BD : Campbell Unit : Kings College Hosp. London (Am.J.obst.gynecol). Oct 1, 1982
BD <14 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 Age n/a 81 84 87 90 93 96 99 102 105 108 111 114 117 120 123 126 129 132 135 138 141 145 148 151 154 157 160 163 166 170 175 181 186 192 198 203 209 215 222 230 SD 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 BD 54 55 56 57 58 59 >59 Age 237 245 252 260 267 275 n/a SD 0 0 0 0 0 0
BD (mm) Age (Day) SD (mm)
CRL : Campbell Unit : Kings College Hosp. London (Am.J.obst.gynecol). Oct 1, 1982
CRL <10 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 Age n/a 49 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 70 71 71 72 72 73 74 74 75 75 76 76 77 78 78 79 SD 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 CRL 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 >85 Age 79 80 81 81 82 82 83 83 84 85 85 86 86 87 88 88 89 89 90 90 91 92 92 93 93 94 95 95 95 96 96 96 97 97 97 98 n/a SD 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
CRL (mm) Age (Day) SD (mm)
Table 3. BD : Campbell
Table 4. CRL : Campbell
OB Tables F4
OB Tables
FL : Campbell Unit : Kings College Hosp. London (Am.J.obst.gynecol). Oct 1, 1982
FL <16 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 40 50 51 52 53 54 55 Age n/a 100 102 104 106 109 111 113 116 118 120 123 125 127 130 132 134 137 139 141 144 146 148 151 154 157 160 163 166 169 172 175 178 181 184 186 189 192 194 197 200 SD 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 FL 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 >76 Age 203 205 208 211 214 218 222 226 230 234 238 242 246 250 255 260 265 270 275 280 285 n/a SD 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
FL (mm) Age (Day) SD (mm)
TAD : Eriksen
Unit :
TAD (mm) Age (Day) SD (mm)
TAD <23 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62
Age n/a 91 93 95 97 99 101 103 105 107 109 111 113 115 117 119 120 122 124 126 128 130 132 134 136 138 140 142 144 146 148 150 152 154 156 158 161 163 165 167 169
SD 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
TAD 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
Age 171 173 175 177 179 182 184 186 188 190 192 195 197 199 201 203 206 208 210 212 214 217 219 221 223 225 228 230 232 234 236 239 241 243 245 247 250 252 254 256 259
SD 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
TAD 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 >112
Age 261 263 266 268 270 273 275 277 280 n/a
SD 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Table 5. FL : Campbell
Table 6. TAD : Eriksen
OB Tables F5
OB Tables
AC : Hadlock Hadlock, AJR, 139: 367,1982 Unit : AC (mm) Age (Week) SD (Week) BPD : Hadlock Hadlock, JUM, 1: 97,1982 Unit : BPD (mm) Age (Week) SD (Week)
AC <80 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120 125 130 135 140 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240 245 250 255 260 265 270 275
Age n/a 13.8 14.2 14.6 15.0 15.6 16.1 16.5 16.9 17.3 17.8 18.2 18.6 19.1 19.5 20.0 20.4 20.8 21.3 21.7 22.2 22.6 23.1 23.6 24.0 24.5 24.9 25.4 25.9 26.3 26.8 27.3 27.7 28.2 28.7 29.2 29.7 30.1 30.6 31.1 31.6
SD 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2
AC 280 285 290 295 300 305 310 315 320 325 330 335 340 345 350 355 360 365 >365
Age 32.1 32.6 33.1 33.6 34.1 34.6 35.1 35.6 36.1 36.6 37.1 37.6 38.1 38.7 39.2 39.7 40.2 40.8 n/a
SD 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2
BPD <20 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59
Age n/a 12.2 12.5 12.8 13.1 13.3 13.6 13.9 14.2 14.5 14.7 15.0 15.3 15.6 15.9 16.2 16.5 16.8 17.1 17.4 17.7 18.0 18.3 18.6 18.9 19.2 19.5 19.9 20.2 20.5 20.8 21.2 21.5 21.8 22.2 22.5 22.8 23.2 23.5 23.9 24.2
SD 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5
BPD 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100
Age 24.6 25.0 25.3 25.7 26.1 26.4 26.8 27.2 27.6 28.0 28.3 28.7 29.1 29.5 29.9 30.4 30.8 31.2 31.6 32.0 32.5 32.9 33.3 33.8 34.2 34.7 35.1 35.6 36.1 36.5 37.0 37.5 38.0 38.5 38.9 39.4 39.9 40.5 41.0 41.5 42.0
SD 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5
BPD >100
Age n/a
SD
Table 7. AC : Hadlock
Table 8. BPD : Hadlock
OB Tables F6
OB Tables
CRL : Hadlock Unit : CRL (mm) Age (Week) SD (Week) FL : Hadlock Hadlock, AJR, 138: 875,1982 Unit : FL (mm) Age (Week) SD (Week)
CRL <2 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
Age n/a 5.7 5.9 6.1 6.2 6.4 6.6 6.7 6.9 7.1 7.2 7.4 7.5 7.7 7.9 8.0 8.1 8.3 8.4 8.6 8.7 8.9 9.0 9.1 9.2 9.4 9.5 9.6 9.7 9.9 10.0 10.1 10.2 10.3 10.4 10.5 10.6 10.7 10.8 10.9 11.0
SD 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
CRL 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82
Age 11.1 11.2 11.2 11.3 11.4 11.5 11.6 11.7 11.7 11.8 11.9 12.0 12.0 12.1 12.2 12.3 12.3 12.4 12.5 12.6 12.6 12.7 12.8 12.8 12.9 13.0 13.1 13.1 13.2 13.3 13.4 13.4 13.5 13.6 13.7 13.8 13.8 13.9 14.0 14.1 14.2
SD 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6
CRL 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 >121
Age 14.2 14.3 14.4 14.5 14.6 14.7 14.8 14.9 15.0 15.1 15.2 15.3 15.3 15.4 15.5 15.6 15.7 15.9 16.0 16.1 16.2 16.3 16.4 16.5 16.6 16.7 16.8 16.9 17.0 17.1 17.2 17.3 17.4 17.5 17.6 17.7 17.8 17.9 18.0 n/a
SD 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8
FL <10 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56 58 60 62 64 66 68 70 72 74 76 78 80 82 >82
Age n/a 12.8 13.4 13.9 14.5 15.1 15.7 16.3 16.9 17.6 18.2 18.9 19.6 20.3 21.0 21.8 22.5 23.3 24.1 24.9 25.7 26.5 27.4 28.2 29.1 30.0 30.9 31.9 32.8 33.8 34.7 35.7 36.7 37.7 38.8 39.8 40.9 41.9 n/a
SD 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2
Table 9. CRL : Hadlock
Table 10. FL : Hadlock
OB Tables F7
OB Tables
HC : Hadlock Hadlock, AJR, 138: 649,1982 Unit : HC (mm) Age (Week) SD (Week)
HC <80 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120 125 130 135 140 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240 245 250 255 260 265 270 275
Age n/a 13.4 13.7 14.0 14.3 14.6 15.0 15.3 15.6 15.9 16.3 16.6 17.0 17.3 17.7 18.1 18.4 18.8 19.2 19.6 20.0 20.4 20.8 21.2 21.6 22.1 22.5 23.0 23.4 23.9 24.4 24.9 25.4 25.9 26.4 26.9 27.5 28.0 28.1 29.2 29.8
SD 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2
HC 280 285 290 295 300 305 310 315 320 325 330 335 340 345 350 355 360 >360
Age 30.3 31.0 31.6 32.2 32.8 33.5 34.2 34.9 35.5 36.3 37.0 37.7 38.5 39.2 40.0 40.8 41.6 n/a
SD 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2
Table 11. HC : Hadlock
OB Tables F8
OB Tables
AC : Hansmann Hansmann : M and AI : Geburtsh, u, Frauenheilk 39 : 656,1979 Unit : AC (mm) Age (Weeks/Days) SD (mm)
AC <53 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 Age n/a 11W1D 11W2D 11W2D 11W3D 11W3D 11W4D 11W4D 11W5D 11W6D 12W0D 12W1D 12W2D 12W2D 12W3D 12W3D 12W4D 12W5D 12W5D 12W6D 12W6D 13W0D 13W0D 13W1D 13W2D 13W2D 13W3D 13W3D 13W4D 13W4D 13W5D 13W6D 14W0D 14W1D 14W2D 14W2D 14W3D 14W3D 14W4D 14W5D 14W5D 14W6D 14W6D 15W0D 15W0D SD 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 AC 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 Age 15W1D 15W2D 15W2D 15W3D 15W4D 15W5D 15W5D 15W6D 16W0D 16W0D 16W1D 16W2D 16W3D 16W3D 16W4D 16W5D 16W6D 16W6D 17W0D 17W1D 17W2D 17W2D 17W3D 17W3D 17W4D 17W4D 17W5D 17W6D 18W0D 18W1D 18W2D 18W3D 18W3D 18W4D 18W5D 18W6D 18W6D 19W0D 19W1D 19W2D 19W2D 19W3D 19W3D 19W4D 19W4D SD 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 AC 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 Age 19W5D 19W6D 20W0D 20W1D 20W2D 20W2D 20W3D 20W3D 20W4D 20W4D 20W5D 20W6D 21W0D 21W1D 21W2D 21W2D 21W3D 21W3D 21W4D 21W4D 21W5D 21W6D 22W0D 22W1D 22W2D 22W3D 22W4D 22W5D 22W5D 22W6D 23W0D 23W1D 23W2D 23W2D 23W3D 23W3D 23W4D 23W4D 23W5D 23W6D 24W0D 24W1D 24W2D 24W3D 24W4D SD 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 AC 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 Age 24W5D 24W5D 24W6D 25W0D 25W1D 25W2D 25W2D 25W3D 25W4D 25W4D 25W5D 25W5D 25W6D 26W0D 26W0D 26W1D 26W2D 26W3D 26W3D 26W4D 26W5D 26W6D 26W6D 27W05 27W1D 27W2D 27W2D 27W3D 27W4D 27W4D 27W5D 27W5D 27W6D 28W0D 28W0D 28W1D 28W2D 28W3D 28W4D 28W5D 28W5D 28W6D 29W0D 29W1D 29W2D SD 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 AC 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 Age 29W2D 29W3D 29W3D 29W4D 29W4D 29W5D 29W6D 30W0D 30W1D 30W2D 30W3D 30W3D 30W4D 30W5D 30W6D 30W6D 31W0D 31W1D 31W2D 31W3D 31W3D 31W4D 31W5D 31W6D 31W6D 32W0D 32W1D 32W2D 32W2D 32W3D 32W3D 32W4D 32W4D 32W5D 32W6D 33W0D 33W1D 33W2D 33W3D 33W3D 33W4D 33W5D 33W6D 33W6D 34W0D SD 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 AC 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 >320 Age 34W1D 34W2D 34W2D 34W3D 34W3D 34W4D 34W4D 34W5D 34W6D 35W0D 35W1D 35W2D 35W3D 35W3D 35W4D 35W5D 35W6D 35W6D 36W0D 36W1D 36W2D 36W2D 36W3D 36W3D 36W4D 36W4D 36W5D 36W6D 37W0D 37W1D 37W2D 37W3D 37W3D 37W4D 37W5D 37W6D 37W6D 38W0D 38W1D 38W2D 38W4D 38W5D 39W0D 39W1D n/a SD 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Table 12. AC : Hansmann
OB Tables F9
OB Tables
BPD : Hansmann Unit : BPD (mm) 2SD = mm
BPD <14 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 Age n/a 10W0D 10W1D 10W2D 10W5D 10W6D 11W1D 11W3D 11W5D 12W0D 12W2D 12W4D 12W6D 13W1D 13W2D 13W4D 13W6D 14W1D 14W3D 14W4D 14W6D 15W2D 15W4D 15W6D 16W1D 16W3D 16W5D 17W0D 17W2D 17W4D 17W6D 18W1D 18W3D 18W5D 19W0D 19W2D 19W4D 19W6D 20W1D 20W3D 20W6D 21W1D 21W2D 21W4D 21W6D 2SD 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 5 5 5 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 BPD 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 >101
Age (Week/sDays)
2SD (mm or day) 2SD = day

Age n/a 9W1D 9W3D 9W5D 10W0D 10W2D 10W4D 10W6D 11W1D 11W3D 11W5D 12W0D 12W2D 12W4D 12W6D 13W1D 13W3D 13W5D 14W0D 14W2D 14W4D 15W0D 15W2D 15W4D 16W0D 16W2D 16W4D 17W0D 17W2D 17W4D 17W6D 18W1D 18W4D 18W6D 19W1D 19W3D 19W5D 20W0D 20W3D 20W5D 21W0D 21W3D 21W5D 22W0D 22W2D 2SD 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 8 7 8 8 9 9 8 9 8 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 10 10 10 10 10 10 11 10 10 9 9 BPD 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 Age 22W5D 23W0D 23W2D 23W4D 24W0D 24W2D 24W4D 24W6D 25W1D 25W3D 25W6D 26W1D 26W3D 26W5D 27W1D 27W3D 27W6D 28W1D 28W4D 28W6D 29W2D 29W5D 30W0D 30W3D 31W0D 31W2D 31W6D 32W2D 32W5D 33W2D 33W5D 34W2D 34W5D 35W1D 35W6D 36W5D 37W3D 38W3D 38W6D 39W0D 39W2D 39W3D 39W4D 39W5D 39W6D 2SD 9 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 11 12 10 10 10 12 11 13 12 12 13 13 15 16 15 15 15 16 17 17 18 20 19 19 19 25 24 21 19 22 25 22 20 22 20 20 19 BPD 103 104 105 >105 Age 40W0D 40W1D 40W2D n/a 2SD 19 19 17
Age 22W2D 22W4D 22W6D 23W1D 23W4D 23W6D 24W1D 24W4D 24W6D 25W1D 25W3D 25W5D 26W1D 26W3D 26W6D 27W1D 27W3D 27W6D 28W1D 28W4D 28W6D 29W2D 29W5D 30W0D 30W3D 30W5D 31W2D 31W5D 32W1D 32W4D 33W0D 33W3D 33W6D 34W3D 34W6D 35W3D 36W0D 36W3D 37W1D 37W6D 38W4D 39W3D 40W3D 41W3D n/a
2SD 5 5 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
BPD <14 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57
Table 13. BPD : HansmannKnown LMP (left)Unknown LMP (right)
OB Tables F10
OB Tables
CRL : Hansmann Unit : BPD (mm) 2SD = mm
BPD <13 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 Age n/a 7W4D 7W5D 8W0D 8W1D 8W2D 8W3D 8W4D 8W5D 8W6D 9W0D 9W1D 9W2D 9W3D 9W4D 9W4D 9W5D 9W6D 10W0D 10W0D 10W1D 10W2D 10W3D 10W3D 10W4D 10W5D 10W5D 10W6D 10W6D 11W0D 11W1D 11W1D 11W2D 11W2D 11W3D 11W3D 11W4D 11W4D 11W5D 11W5D 11W6D 11W6D 12W0D 12W1D 12W1D
2SD
Age (Weeks/Days)
2SD (mm or day) 2SD = day

2SD
BPD 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 99 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101
Age 12W2D 12W2D 12W3D 12W3D 12W4D 12W4D 12W5D 12W5D 12W6D 12W6D 13W0D 13W1D 13W1D 13W2D 13W3D 13W3D 13W4D 13W4D 13W5D 13W5D 13W6D 13W6D 14W0D 14W0D 14W1D 14W1D 14W2D 14W2D 14W3D 14W3D 14W4D 14W4D 14W5D 14W6D 14W6D 15W0D 15W0D 15W1D 15W2D 15W3D 15W3D 15W4D 15W4D 15W5D 15W5D
2SD
BPD 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146
Age 15W6D 15W6D 16W0D 16W1D 16W2D 16W2D 16W3D 16W3D 16W4D 16W4D 16W5D 16W5D 16W6D 17W0D 17W1D 17W2D 17W2D 17W3D 17W3D 17W4D 17W5D 17W5D 17W6D 18W0D 18W1D 18W1D 18W2D 18W2D 18W3D 18W4D 18W4D 18W5D 18W6D 19W0D 19W1D 19W1D 19W2D 19W3D 19W4D 19W4D 19W5D 19W5D 19W6D 20W0D 20W1D
BPD 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 >175
Age 20W2D 20W2D 20W3D 20W4D 20W4D 20W5D 20W5D 20W6D 21W0D 21W0D 21W1D 21W1D 21W2D 21W3D 21W3D 21W4D 21W4D 21W5D 21W6D 21W6D 22W0D 22W0D 22W1D 22W1D 22W2D 22W2D 22W3D 22W3D 22W4D n/a
2SD
BPD <6 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56 58 60 63 66 70 73 76 80 83
Age n/a 6W1D 6W2D 6W4D 6W6D 7W0D 7W2D 7W3D 7W4D 7W6D 8W0D 8W2D 8W3D 8W4D 8W5D 8W6D 9W0D 9W1D 9W2D 9W3D 9W5D 10W0D 10W2D 10W3D 10W5D 10W6D 11W1D 11W2D 11W3D 11W4D 11W6D 12W0D 12W1D 12W2D 12W3D 12W4D 12W5D 12W6D 13W0D 13W2D 13W3D 13W5D 13W6D 14W1D 14W2D
2SD
BPD 86 90 93 96 100 103 106 110 113 116 120 123 126 130 133 136 140 143 146 150 >150
Age 14W4D 14W6D 15W1D 15W3D 15W5D 16W0D 16W2D 16W4D 17W0D 17W2D 17W4D 18W0D 18W2D 18W6D 19W1D 19W4D 20W0D 20W3D 20W6D 21W3D n/a
2SD
0 0 0 0 0 0 7 7 8 8 10 10 11 11 11 11 11 12 12 12 12 12 13 13 13 13 13 13 14 14 14 14 14 14 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 16 16
16 16 16 16 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 12 12 12 12 12 11 11 11 11 11 10
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 11 11 11 11 11 12 12 12 12 12 13 13 13 13 13 14 14 14 14 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 16 16 16 16 16 17
17 17 17 17 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 10 10 10 11 11 11 12
12 12 12 12 12 13 13 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 15 16 16 16 16 15
Table 14. CRL : HansmannKnown LMP (left)Unknown LMP (right)
OB Tables F11
OB Tables
FL : Hansmann Unit : FL (mm) Age (Weeks/Days) 2SD (mm)
FL <12 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 Age n/a 13W4D 13W6D 14W1D 14W3D 14W5D 15W1D 15W2D 15W5D 16W0D 16W2D 16W4D 16W6D 17W2D 17W4D 17W6D 18W2D 18W4D 18W6D 19W2D 19W4D 20W0D 20W3D 20W5D 21W1D 21W3D 21W6D 22W1D 22W4D 22W6D 23W2D 23W5D 24W0D 24W3D 24W6D 25W2D 25W4D 26W0D 26W3D 26W6D 27W3D 2SD 0 0 0 0 5 5 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 FL 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 >75 Age 27W5D 28W1D 28W4D 29W0D 29W3D 29W6D 30W2D 30W5D 31W2D 31W5D 32W1D 32W5D 33W1D 33W5D 34W1D 34W5D 35W1D 35W5D 36W1D 36W5D 37W2D 37W6D 38W3D 39W0D n/a 2SD 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 5 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 7 7
GS : Hansmann Unit : Hansmann : M and AI : Geburtsh, u, Frauenheilk 39 : 656,1979

GS <10 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 Age n/a 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 58 59 SD 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 GS 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 >65
GS (mm) Age (Day) SD (mm)
Age 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 n/a
SD 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
Table 16. GS : Hansmann
Table 15. FL : Hansmann Known/Unknown LMP
OB Tables F12
OB Tables
HC : Hansmann Unit : HC (mm) Age (Weeks/Days) 2SD (mm)
HC <105 105 110 115 120 125 130 135 140 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240 245 250 255 260 265 270 275 280 285 290 295 300 Age n/a 14W0D 14W3D 14W6D 15W3D 15W5D 16W1D 16W4D 17W0D 17W3D 17W6D 18W1D 18W4D 19W0D 19W0D 19W3D 19W5D 20W1D 20W4D 21W0D 21W2D 21W5D 22W1D 22W4D 23W0D 23W3D 23W5D 24W1D 24W4D 25W0D 25W3D 25W6D 26W2D 26W5D 27W1D 27W4D 28W1D 28W5D 29W1D 29W5D 30W2D
2SD
OFD : Hansmann Unit : OFD (mm) Age : (Weeks/Days) 2SD (mm)

Age 30W5D 31W2D 32W1D 32W5D 33W3D 34W2D 35W1D 36W2D 37W6D n/a
2SD
HC 305 310 315 320 325 330 335 340 345 >345
OFD <34 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73
Age n/a 13W5D 14W0D 14W2D 14W4D 14W4D 14W6D 15W1D 15W3D 15W5D 16W0D 16W1D 16W3D 16W4D 16W6D 17W1D 17W3D 17W4D 17W6D 18W1D 18W2D 18W4D 18W6D 19W0D 19W2D 19W3D 19W5D 20W0D 20W1D 20W2D 20W4D 20W6D 21W0D 21W2D 21W4D 21W5D 22W0D 22W1D 22W3D 22W4D 22W6D
2SD
HC 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114
Age 23W1D 23W2D 23W4D 23W6D 24W1D 24W2D 24W4D 24W6D 25W1D 25W2D 25W4D 25W6D 26W1D 26W3D 26W5D 27W0D 27W2D 27W4D 27W6D 28W1D 28W3D 28W5D 29W0D 29W3D 29W5D 30W0D 30W3D 30W5D 31W1D 31W4D 32W0D 32W3D 32W6D 33W3D 33W6D 34W3D 35W0D 35W4D 36W2D 37W0D 38W0D
2SD
HC 115 >115
Age 39W0D n/a
2SD
0 0 14 14 14 14 14 14 15 15 16 16 16 16 16 16 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 19 19 19 19 19 19
19 19 19 20 20 20 20 20 20
0 0 0 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 7 7 7 7
7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
Table 17. HC : Hansmann Known/Unknown LMP
Table 18. OFD : Hansmann Known/Unknown LMP
OB Tables F13
OB Tables
TAD : Hansmann Unit : Hansmann : M and Al : Geburtsh, u, Frauenheilk
BPD <20 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 Age n/a 87 89 91 93 95 97 99 101 103 105 107 109 111 113 115 117 119 122 124 126 128 130 132 135 137 139 141 143 146 SD 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 BPD 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 Age 148 150 152 155 157 159 161 164 166 168 170 173 175 177 179 182 184 186 188 191 193 195 198 200 203 205 208 210 212 215 SD 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 58 24W1D 24W3D 7 7 99 100 38W4D 38W6D 11 11 59
TAD (mm) Age (Day) SD (mm)
ThD : Hansmann Unit : THQ (mm) Age (Weeks/Days) 2SD (mm)

SD 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 28 14W6D 15W1D 15W2D 15W4D 15W6D 16W2D 16W4D 16W5D 17W1D 17W3D 17W5D 18W1D 18W3D 18W5D 19W0D 19W3D 19W5D 19W6D 20W2D 20W4D 20W6D 2W12D 21W4D 21W6D 22W1D 22W4D 22W6D 23W1D 23W3D 23W6D 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 7 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 27W5D 28W0D 28W3D 28W5D 29W1D 29W3D 29W5D 30W1D 30W3D 30W5D 31W1D 31W3D 31W5D 32W1D 32W4D 32W6D 33W1D 33W4D 33W6D 34W2D 34W4D 35W0D 35W3D 35W5D 36W1D 36W3D 36W6D 37W1D 37W4D 38W1D 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 11 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 29 30 31 32 THQ <20 Age n/a 12W4D 12W6D 13W1D 13W3D 13W4D 13W6D 14W1D 14W3D
2SD
BPD 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
Age 217 220 222 225 227 230 232 235 237 240 242 245 247 250 252 255 258 261 264 267 270 273 276 279 282
THQ 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68
Age 24W6D 25W1D 25W3D 25W5D 26W1D 26W3D 26W5D 27W0D 27W3D
2SD
THQ 101 102 103 104 105 >105
Age 39W3D 39W6D 40W2D 40W5D 41W2D n/a
2SD
0 0 0 4 4 4 4 4
7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 8
12 14 14 14 14
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57
Table 19. TAD : Hansmann
Table 20. ThD : Hansmann Known/Unknown LMP
OB Tables F14
OB Tables
GS : Hellman Unit : GS (mm) Age (Week) SD (Week)
Age 8.8 8.9 9.0 9.2 9.3 9.5 9.6 9.7 9.9 10.0 10.2 10.3 10.5 10.6 10.7 10.9 11.0 11.2 11.3 11.5 11.6 11.7 11.9 12.0 12.2 n/a SD 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
( SD: Standard Deviation )

GS <10 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 Age n/a 5.0 5.2 5.3 5.5 5.6 5.8 5.9 6.0 6.2 6.3 6.5 6.6 6.8 6.9 7.0 7.2 7.3 7.5 7.6 7.8 7.9 8.0 8.2 8.3 8.5 8.6 SD 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 GS 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 >60
AC : Jeanty Jeanty : Radiology 143 : 513,1982

AC <50 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120 125 130 135 140 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 Age n/a 79 82 85 89 92 95 99 102 105 109 112 115 119 122 125 129 132 135 139 142 146 149 152 156 159 162 166 SD 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22
Unit :
AC (mm) Age (Day) SD (mm)

Age 169 172 176 179 182 186 189 192 196 199 203 206 210 214 218 222 226 230 234 239 244 249 254 259 265 272 279 n/a SD 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22
AC 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240 245 250 255 260 265 270 275 280 285 290 295 300 305 310 315 >315
Table 21. GS : Hellman
Table 22. AC : Jeanty
OB Tables F15
OB Tables
BD : Jeanty Jeanty : Radiology 143 : 513,1982
BD <15 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 Age n/a 73 77 81 85 89 93 97 102 106 110 114 118 122 127 131 135 139 143 147 152 156 160 164 168 172 177 SD 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Unit :

Age 181 185 189 193 197 201 206 210 214 218 222 226 231 235 239 243 247 251 256 260 264 268 272 276 281 n/a SD 0 0 0 0 0 0
BPD : Jeanty Jeanty : Radiology 143 : 513,1982

BPD <10 10 11 12 13 14 Age n/a 64 65 67 69 71 73 75 77 79 81 83 85 87 89 90 92 94 96 98 100 102 104 106 108 110 112 114 115 117 SD 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 BPD 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68
Unit :

BPD 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 >95 Age 187 189 192 195 198 201 204 206 209 212 215 218 221 224 227 230 234 237 240 244 247 251 254 257 261 264 268 n/a SD 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
BD 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 >65
Age 119 121 123 125 127 129 131 133 135 137 139 141 143 146 148 151 153 155 158 160 163 165 167 170 172 175 177 179 182 184
SD 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
15
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
0
29
0 0 0 0 0 0
30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38
Table 23. BD : Jeanty
Table 24. BPD : Jeanty
OB Tables F16
OB Tables
CRL : Jeanty Jeanty : Radiology 143 : 513,1982
CRL <5 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 Age n/a 44 45 46 48 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 67 67 68 SD 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 7 7 7 7
Unit :

Age 69 70 70 71 72 73 73 74 75 76 76 76 77 77 78 79 79 80 81 81 82 83 83 84 85 n/a SD 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
FL : Jeanty Jeanty : Radiology 143 : 513,1982

FL <10 10 11 Age n/a 88 90 92 95 97 100 102 104 107 109 112 114 116 119 121 124 126 128 131 133 136 138 141 144 SD 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 FL 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58
Unit :

FL 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 >80 Age 215 218 221 224 227 230 233 236 239 242 245 248 251 254 257 260 263 266 270 274 277 280 n/a SD 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
CRL 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 >54
Age 146 149 152 154 157 160 162 165 168 170 173 176 178 181 184 186 189 192 194 197 200 203 206 209 212
SD 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
7 7 7 7
Table 26. FL : Jeanty
Table 25. CRL : Jeanty
OB Tables F17
OB Tables
HC : Jeanty Jeanty : Radiology 143 : 513,1982
HC <80 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120 125 130 135 140 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 Age n/a 93 95 98 100 102 104 107 109 111 114 116 119 121 124 126 129 131 134 136 139 141 144 146 149 151 154 157 161 165 SD 15 16 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 19 19 19 19 19 20 20 20 20 20 21 21 21 21 22 22 22 22
Unit :
HC (mm) Age (Day) SD (mm)

Age 169 173 176 180 184 188 192 196 200 204 208 213 217 221 225 230 235 240 245 250 255 260 265 270 275 281 286 292 n/a SD 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22
BPD : Kurtz
Unit :

BPD 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 >98 Age 204 207 210 213 216 219 222 225 229 232 235 238 241 244 248 252 257 262 267 272 276 280 284 288 293 n/a SD 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
HC 225 230 235 240 245 250 255 260 265 270 275 280 285 290 295 300 305 310 315 320 325 330 335 340 345 350 355 360 >360
BPD <21 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
Age n/a 84 87 91 93 95 97 99 101 103 105 107 109 111 113 115 117 119 121 123 125 127 129 131 133 135 137
SD 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
BPD 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73
Age 139 141 143 145 147 149 151 153 155 157 160 162 165 168 170 173 175 178 181 183 186 188 191 194 196 199 201
SD 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22
40 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
22 22 22 22 22 22
41 42 43 44 45 46
Table 28. BPD : Kurtz
Table 27. HC : Jeanty
OB Tables F18
OB Tables
CRL : Nelson Unit : CRL (mm) Age (Day) SD (mm)
CRL 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 >73 Age 82 82 83 84 84 85 85 86 87 87 88 88 89 90 90 91 91 92 93 93 94 95 n/a SD 7 7 7 14 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 54 54 55 55 56 57 57 58 58 59 60 60 61 61 62 63 63 64 64 65 66 66 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 69 69 70 70 71 72 72 73 73 74 75 75 76 76 77 78 78 79 79 80 81 81 5 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 15 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 21 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 27 7 28 7 7 7 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 99 101 103 105 107 109 112 114 116 118 120 2.3 2.3 2.4 2.4 2.4 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.6 2.6 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 159 161 164 166 168 171 173 175 178 180 182 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.3 3.3 3.3 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 >94 234 237 238 245 249 254 259 265 273 280 n/a 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.8 3.8 3.8 3.8 3.9 3.9 98 2.3 56 157 3.0 84 230 3.7 96 2.3 55 154 3.0 83 227 3.6 22 23 24 25 26 86 88 90 92 94 2.1 2.1 2.2 2.2 2.2 50 51 52 53 54 143 145 148 150 152 2.9 2.9 2.9 3.0 3.0 78 79 80 81 82 212 214 217 220 224 3.5 3.6 3.6 3.6 3.6 84 2.1 49 141 2.9 77 209 3.5 16 17 18 19 20 75 77 78 80 82 1.9 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.1 44 45 46 47 48 130 132 135 137 139 2.7 2.8 2.8 2.8 2.8 72 73 74 75 76 195 198 200 203 206 3.4 3.4 3.5 3.5 3.5 73 1.9 43 128 2.7 71 193 3.4 71 1.9 42 126 2.7 70 190 3.4
BPD : Osaka
Unit :

BPD 68 69 Age 185 187 SD 3.3 3.3
CRL <3 3 4
Age n/a 53 53
SD 4 4
CRL 27 28 29
Age 67 67 68
SD 5 5 5
BPD <13 13
Age n/a 70
SD 1.9
BPD 40 41
Age 122 124
SD 2.6 2.7
Table 29. CRL : Nelson
Table 30. BPD : Osaka
OB Tables F19
OB Tables
CRL : Osaka Unit : CRL (mm) Age (Day) SD (mm) EFBW : Osaka Unit : EFBW (gram) Age (Day) SD (gram)
CRL <9 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
Age n/a 50 52 53 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 63 64 65 66 66 67
SD 1.7 2.0 2.2 2.5 2.6 2.8 2.9 3.1 3.2 3.4 3.5 3.7 3.7 3.8 4.0 4.1 4.1 4.3
CRL 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45
Age 68 69 69 70 71 71 72 73 73 74 74 75 76 76 77 77 78 79 79
SD 4.5 4.6 4.6 4.8 4.9 4.9 5.1 5.2 5.2 5.4 5.4 5.5 5.7 5.7 5.8 5.8 6.0 6.1 6.1
CRL 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 >63
Age 80 80 81 82 83 83 83 84 85 85 86 86 87 87 88 89 89 90 n/a
SD 6.3 6.3 6.4 6.6 6.7 6.7 6.7 6.9 7.0 7.0 7.2 7.2 7.3 7.3 7.5 7.6 7.6 7.8
EFBW <137 137 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 370 380 390 400 410 420
Age n/a 112 113 115 116 118 120 121 123 124 126 127 128 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147
SD 29 29 29 30 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 48 49 50 51 53 54 56 57 58 60
EFBW 430 440 450 460 470 480 490 500 510 520 530 540 550 560 570 580 590 600 610 620 630 640 650 660 670 680 690 700 720 740 760
Age 148 149 149 150 151 152 153 153 154 155 155 156 157 157 158 159 160 160 161 162 162 163 164 164 165 165 166 167 168 169 170
SD 61 63 63 65 66 68 69 69 71 73 73 74 76 76 78 80 81 81 83 85 85 87 89 89 91 91 92 94 96 98 100
EFBW 780 800 820 840 860 880 900 920 940 960 980 1000 1020 1040 1060 1080 1100 1120 1140 1160 1180 1200 1220 1240 1260 1280 1300 1320 1340 1360 1380
Age 171 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202
SD 102 106 108 110 112 114 116 118 120 123 125 127 131 133 135 138 140 142 144 146 149 151 153 153 155 158 160 162 164 167 169
Table 31. CRL : Osaka
Table 32. EFBW : Osaka
OB Tables F20
OB Tables
EFBW : Osaka (contd) EFBW (gram) Unit : Age (Day) SD (gram)
EFBW 1400 1420 1440 1460 1480 1500 1520 1540 1560 1580 1600 1620 1640 1660 1680 1700 1720 1740 1760 1780 1800 1820 1840 1860 1880 1900 1920 1940 1960 1980 2000 Age 203 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 216 217 218 219 220 220 221 222 223 224 224 225 226 227 228 SD 171 171 174 176 178 181 183 185 188 188 190 192 195 197 200 202 202 204 207 209 212 212 214 217 219 222 222 224 227 229 232 EFBW 2020 2040 2060 2080 2100 2120 2140 2160 2180 2200 2220 2240 2260 2280 2300 2320 2340 2360 2380 2400 2420 2440 2460 2480 2500 2520 2540 2560 2580 2600 2620 Age 229 229 230 231 232 233 233 234 235 236 236 237 238 239 240 241 241 242 243 244 245 245 246 247 248 249 249 250 251 252 253 SD 234 234 237 239 242 244 244 247 250 252 252 255 257 260 263 265 265 268 271 274 276 276 279 282 285 288 288 290 293 296 299 EFBW 2640 2660 2680 2700 2720 2740 2760 2780 2800 2820 2840 2860 2880 2900 2920 2940 2960 2980 3000 3020 3040 3060 3080 3100 3120 3140 3160 3180 3200 3220 >3220 Age 254 254 255 256 257 258 259 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 n/a SD 302 302 305 308 311 314 317 317 320 323 326 329 332 335 339 339 342 345 348 26 352 27 355 28 358 29 362 365 369 372 376 379 383 387 137 2.4 51 199 2.7 135 2.4 50 196 2.7 >71 n/a 132 2.3 49 193 2.7 71 279 3.2 130 2.3 48 190 2.7 70 274 3.1 FL <9 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Age n/a 91 93 95 97 99 102 104 106 108 110 113 115 118 120 122 125 127 SD 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.3 2.3 2.3 2.3 2.3 2.3 FL 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 Age 140 142 145 147 150 152 155 158 162 163 166 169 172 175 178 181 184 186 SD 2.4 2.4 2.4 2.4 2.4 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.6 2.6 2.6 2.6 2.6 2.6 2.6
FL : Osaka
Unit :
FL 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69
Age 202 205 209 212 216 220 223 227 230 235 239 242 247 250 255 258 260 269
SD 2.6 2.8 2.8 2.8 2.8 2.8 2.9 2.9 2.9 2.9 2.9 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.1 3.1
Table 33. FL : Osaka
Table 32. EFBW : Osaka (contd)
OB Tables F21
OB Tables
FTA : Osaka Unit : FTA (mm2) Age (Day) SD (mm2)
FTA 6200 6300 6400 6500 6600 6700 6800 6900 7000 7100 7200 7300 7400 7500 7600 7700 7800 7900 8000 8100 8200 8300 8400 8500 8600 8660 >8660 Age 231 233 235 237 238 240 242 244 246 248 250 252 254 256 258 260 262 264 265 268 270 273 274 276 279 280 n/a SD 710 720
HL : Osaka
Unit :
HL (mm) Age (Day) SD (mm)

Age 164 167 170 174 178 182 185 188 192 196 200 204 208 213 217 222 227 232 237 242 248 254 260 267 275 280 n/a SD 2.4 2.4 2.4 2.4 2.4 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.6 2.6 2.6 2.6 2.6 2.7 2.7 2.7 2.7 2.8 2.8 2.8 2.9 2.9 2.9
FTA <560 560 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 2100 2200 2300 2400 2500 2600 2700 2800 2900 3000 3100 3200
Age n/a 98 100 103 108 113 115 117 122 125 128 130 134 137 139 142 145 147 150 152 155 157 159 162 164 166 168 170 173
SD 120 120 130 150 160 170 170 190 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 330 330 340 350 360 370 380 390
FTA 3300 3400 3500 3600 3700 3800 3900 4000 4100 4200 4300 4400 4500 4600 4700 4800 4900 5000 5100 5200 5300 5400 5500 5600 5700 5800 5900 6000 6100
Age 175 177 179 181 183 185 187 189 191 193 195 197 199 201 203 205 207 209 211 213 215 216 218 220 222 224 226 227 229
SD 400 410 420 430 440 450 460 470 480 490 500 510 520 530 540 560 570 580 590 600 610 620 630 640 650 670 680 680
HL <10 10
Age n/a 91 93 96 98 100 103 105 108 110 113 115 117 121 123 126 129 132 134 137 140 143 145 149 151 155 158 161
SD 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.3 2.3 2.3 2.3 2.3 2.3 2.3 2.4
HL 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 >62
730
11
750
12
750
13
760
14
780
15
790
16
800
17
820
18
830
19
840
20
860
21
870
22
880
23
900
24
910
25
930
26
930
27
960
28
970
29
990
30
100 0 101 0 104 0 104 0
31 32 33 34 35 36
700
Table 35. HL : Osaka Table 34. FTA : Osaka
OB Tables F22
OB Tables
BPD : Paris Unit : BPD (mm) Age (Day) SD (mm)
BPD 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 >90 SD 187 189 192 194 197 199 202 204 207 210 213 217 220 224 227 231 234 238 242 247 252 256 261 266 287 n/a Age 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
CRL : Paris
Unit :

CRL 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 >85 Age 86 87 87 88 88 89 89 90 90 91 91 91 92 92 93 93 94 94 94 95 95 96 96 97 97 98 n/a SD 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
BPD <13 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38
Age n/a 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 87 89 91 93 95 97 100 102 104 106 108 110 113 115 117 119 121
SD 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
BPD 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65
Age 123 126 128 130 133 135 137 140 142 144 147 149 151 154 156 158 161 163 165 168 170 172 175 177 179 182 184
SD 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
CRL <5 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
Age n/a 42 43 44 46 47 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 63 63 64 65 66 66 67 68 69
SD 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
CRL 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59
Age 70 70 71 71 72 73 73 74 74 75 76 76 77 77 78 79 79 80 80 81 82 82 83 84 84 85 85 86
SD 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
Table 36. BPD : Paris
Table 37. CRL : Paris
OB Tables F23
OB Tables
FL : Paris Unit : FL (mm) Age (Day) SD (mm)
FL 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 >77 Age 213 217 219 221 224 231 234 238 241 245 248 252 255 259 262 266 271 276 281 287 n/a SD 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 24 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 126 128 131 134 137 139 142 145 148 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 186 189 192 194 197 200 203 206 210 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 25 5 26 5 27 5 28 5 29 5 5 30 31 32 33 135 137 140 142 4 4 4 4 52 53 54 55 188 190 193 196 4 4 4 4 74 75 >75 262 266 n/a 5 6 133 4 51 185 4 73 258 5 130 4 50 183 4 72 254 5 128 4 49 180 4 71 250 5 126 4 48 178 4 70 246 5 123 4 47 175 4 69 242 5 121 4 46 173 4 68 238 5
Ft : Paris
Unit :
Ft (mm) Age (Day) SD (mm)

FT 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 Age 199 202 205 208 211 215 218 221 224 227 231 234 SD 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5
FL <15 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
Age n/a 98 100 102 105 107 109 112 114 116 119 121 123
SD 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
FL 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
Age 150 153 156 159 161 164 167 170 172 175 178 181 183
SD 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
FT <13 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Age n/a 91 94 97 100 103 106 109 112 114 116 119
SD 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 4 4
FT 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45
Age 144 147 149 151 154 156 158 161 163 165 168 170
SD 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
Table 38. FL : Paris Table 39. Ft : Paris
OB Tables F24
OB Tables
TAD : Paris Unit : TAD (mm) Age (Day) SD (mm)
TAD 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 >96 Age 207 209 212 214 217 219 222 224 227 229 232 234 237 239 242 245 248 252 255 259 262 266 269 273 276 280 283 287 n/a SD 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
BPD : Rempen Age (Weeks/Days)
Unit : GS (mm) 2SD (mm or day)
TAD <10 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38
Age n/a 84 84 85 86 87 87 88 89 90 91 92 94 96 98 100 102 104 106 108 110 112 114 116 118 120 122 124 126 128
SD 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
TAD 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68
Age 131 133 136 138 141 143 146 148 151 153 156 158 161 163 166 169 171 174 176 179 181 184 186 189 191 194 196 199 201 204
SD 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2SD = mm
CRL <2 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 >24 Age n/a 6W2D 6W4D 6W6D 7W1D 7W4D 7W6D 8W1D 8W3D 8W5D 9W1D 9W3D 9W5D 10W0D 10W2D 10W5D 11W0D 11W2D 11W5D 12W0D 12W2D 12W4D 13W0D 13W2D na 2SD 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 CRL <3 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 >27
2SD = day
Age n/a 6W6D 7W1D 7W3D 7W5D 8W0D 8W2D 8W4D 8W6D 9W1D 9W3D 9W5D 10W0D 10W2D 10W4D 10W6D 11W1D 11W3D 11W5D 12W0D 12W2D 12W4D 12W6D 13W1D 13W3D 13W5D na 2SD 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
Table 40. TAD : Paris Table 41. BPD : Rempen Known LMP (left)Unknown LMP (right)
OB Tables F25
OB Tables
CRL : Rempen Unit : GS (mm) 2SD = mm
CRL <1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 Age n/a 5W5D 5W6D 6W0D 6W1D 6W2D 6W3D 6W4D 6W6D 6W6D 7W0D 7W2D 7W2D 7W4D 7W4D 7W5D 7W6D 8W0D 8W1D 8W2D 8W3D 8W4D 8W5D 8W6D 8W6D 9W0D 9W1D 9W2D 9W3D 9W4D 9W4D 9W5D 9W6D 10W0D 10W1D 10W1D 10W2D 10W3D 10W4D 10W4D 10W5D 10W6D 11W0D 11W0D 11W1D 2SD 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 CRL 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 >66
Age (Weeks/Days) 2SD (mm or day) 2SD = day

Age 11W2D 11W2D 11W3D 11W4D 11W4D 11W5D 11W6D 12W0D 12W0D 12W1D 12W2D 12W2D 12W3D 12W3D 12W4D 12W5D 12W5D 12W6D 13W0D 13W0D 13W1D 13W2D n/a 2SD 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 CRL <2 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 Age n/a 6W0D 6W1D 6W2D 6W3D 6W4D 6W5D 6W6D 7W0D 7W1D 7W2D 7W3D 7W4D 7W5D 7W6D 7W6D 8W0D 8W1D 8W2D 8W3D 8W4D 8W5D 8W5D 8W6D 9W0D 9W1D 9W2D 9W3D 9W3D 9W4D 9W5D 9W6D 9W6D 10W0D 10W1D 10W2D 10W2D 10W3D 10W4D 10W5D 10W5D 10W6D 11W0D 11W0D 11W1D 2SD 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 7 7 7 7 7 6 6 6 7 7 7 7 6 6 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 6 6 7 7 6 6 7 7 6 7 7 6 CRL 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 >78 Age 11W2D 11W2D 11W3D 11W4D 11W4D 11W5D 11W5D 11W6D 12W0D 12W0D 12W1D 12W1D 12W2D 12W3D 12W3D 12W4D 12W4D 12W5D 12W5D 12W6D 12W6D 13W0D 13W0D 13W1D 13W1D 13W2D 13W2D 13W3D 13W3D 13W4D 13W4D 13W4D 13W5D n/a 2SD 7 7 6 7 6 6 7 6 7 7 6 7 6 7 6 7 6 7 7 6 7 6 7 6 7 7 6 7 6 7 6 7 6
Table 42. CRL : RempenKnown LMP (left)Unknown LMP (right)
OB Tables F26
OB Tables
GS : Rempen Unit : GS (mm) 2SD = mm
GS <1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 Age n/a 4W4D 4W5D 4W6D 5W0D 5W0D 5W1D 5W2D 5W3D 5W3D 5W4D 5W5D 5W6D 6W0D 6W0D 6W1D 6W2D 6W3D 6W4D 6W5D 6W6D 6W6D 7W0D 7W1D 7W2D 7W3D 7W4D 7W5D 7W6D 8W0D 8W0D 8W1D 8W2D 8W3D 8W4D 8W5D 8W6D 9W0D 9W1D 9W2D 9W4D 9W5D 9W6D 10W0D 10W1D 2SD 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 GS 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 >60
Age (Weeks/Days) 2SD (mm or day) 2SD = day

Age 10W2D 10W3D 10W4D 10W6D 11W0D 11W1D 11W2D 11W4D 11W5D 12W0D 12W1D 12W2D 12W4D 12W5D 13W0D 13W1D n/a 2SD 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 GS <1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 Age n/a 4W5D 4W6D 5W0D 5W1D 5W2D 5W2D 5W3D 5W4D 5W5D 5W5D 5W6D 6W0D 6W1D 6W2D 6W2D 6W3D 6W4D 6W5D 6W6D 6W6D 7W0D 7W1D 7W2D 7W3D 7W4D 7W4D 7W5D 7W6D 8W0D 8W1D 8W2D 8W3D 8W3D 8W4D 8W5D 8W6D 9W0D 9W1D 9W2D 9W3D 9W4D 9W5D 9W6D 9W6D 2SD 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 GS 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 >73 Age 10W0D 10W1D 10W2D 10W3D 10W4D 10W5D 10W6D 11W0D 11W1D 11W2D 11W3D 11W4D 11W5D 11W6D 12W0D 12W1D 12W2D 12W3D 12W4D 12W5D 12W6D 13W0D 13W1D 13W2D 13W3D 13W4D 13W5D 14W0D 14W1D n/a 2SD 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
Table 43. GS : RempenKnown LMP (left)Unknown LMP (right)
OB Tables F27
OB Tables
CRL : Robinson Robinson : Robinson and AI BrJGynecol,82 702, 1975
CRL <7 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Age n/a 45 46 47 48 50 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 60 61 62 63 64 64 65 66 67 68 69 SD 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 7 CRL 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57
Unit :
AC : Sostoa Unit : Sostoa : Hospital de la Santa Cruzy San Pablo, serviejo de obst.ygynecol
SD 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
AC (mm) Age (Day) SD (mm)
Age 69 70 70 71 72 72 73 74 74 75 75 76 77 77 78 79 79 80 81 82 83 83 83 84 84 84
SD 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
CRL 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 >82
Age 85 85 86 86 87 88 89 90 90 90 91 91 91 92 92 93 93 93 94 94 95 95 96 97 98 n/a
AC <70 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120 125 130 135 140 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205
Age n/a 98 101 105 107 109 110 113 116 119 123 126 129 132 136 139 141 143 145 147 150 153 157 160 163 167 170 173 177
SD 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22
AC 210 215 220 225 230 235 240 245 250 255 260 265 270 275 280 285 290 295 300 305 310 315 320 325 330 335 340 344 >344
Age 180 184 187 190 194 197 200 204 207 210 214 217 220 223 229 233 236 239 242 245 248 251 256 261 266 271 276 280 n/a
SD 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22
Table 44. CRL : Robinson
Table 45. AC : Sostoa
OB Tables F28
OB Tables
BD : Sostoa Unit : Sostoa : Hospital de la Santa Cruzy San Pablo, serviejo de obst.ygynecol
BPD <23 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 Age n/a 119 122 126 128 130 133 136 140 143 147 150 154 157 161 164 168 175 182 185 SD 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 BPD 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 >60
BPD : Sostoa Unit : Sostoa : Hospital de la Santa Cruzy San Pablo, serviejo de obst.ygynecol
BPD <24 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 Age n/a 98 100 102 104 106 108 110 112 114 116 119 121 123 125 127 129 131 133 135 137 140 143 SD 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 BPD 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 Age 147 149 151 153 155 158 160 162 164 167 169 171 173 176 178 180 182 185 187 189 191 194 196 SD 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
Age 189 192 196 199 203 206 210 213 217 224 231 238 245 252 255 259 266 273 280 n/a
SD 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
BPD 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 >90
Age 198 200 203 206 209 212 215 218 221 224 227 230 233 236 239 242 245 252 259 266 273 280 n/a
SD 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
0
35
0
36
0
37
0
38
0 0 0
39 40 41 42 43 44 45
Table 46. BD : Sostoa
Table 47. BPD : Sostoa
OB Tables F29
OB Tables
FL : Sostoa Unit : Sostoa : Hospital de la Santa Cruzy San Pablo, serviejo de obst.ygynecol
FL <10 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 Age n/a 98 100 103 105 108 111 113 116 118 121 124 126 129 131 134 137 139 142 144 147 150 152 155 157 160 163 165 168 170 173 176 SD 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 FL 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 >70
HC : Sostoa
Unit :
HC (mm) Age (Day) SD (mm)
Age 178 181 183 186 189 192 196 199 203 206 210 213 217 220 224 227 231 234 238 241 245 248 252 255 259 263 267 271 275 280 n/a
SD 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
HC <93 93 95 100 105 110 115 120 125 130 135 140 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215
Age n/a 98 99 104 106 109 111 113 116 118 121 124 127 130 133 136 139 142 145 148 151 154 157 160 163 165 168
SD 15 15 17 18 19 19 20 21 21 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22
HC 220 225 230 235 240 245 250 255 260 265 270 275 280 285 290 295 300 305 310 315 320 325 330 335 340 343 >343
Age 171 174 177 180 183 186 189 192 195 198 201 204 207 210 215 219 224 228 233 240 247 254 261 268 275 280 n/a
SD 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22
Table 48. FL : Sostoa
Table 49. HC : Sostoa
OB Tables F30
OB Tables
OFD : Sostoa Unit : OFD (mm) Age (Day) SD (mm) BPD : Tokyo Unit : BPD (mm) Age (Day) SD (Day)
OFD <28 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
Age n/a 98 99 101 103 105 106 108 110 112 114 115 117 119 121 122 124 126 128 130 131 133 135 137 138 140 142 144
SD 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
OFD 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82
Age 146 147 149 151 153 154 156 158 160 162 163 165 167 169 170 172 174 176 178 179 181 183 185 186 188 190 192 194
SD 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
OFD 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 >109
Age 195 197 199 201 202 204 206 208 210 212 215 218 221 224 226 229 232 235 238 243 248 253 259 264 269 274 280 n/a
SD 0 0 0
BPD <20 20 21 22
Age n/a 85 87 89 92 94 96 98 100 102 102 106 108 110 112 114 116 118 120 123 125 127 129 131
SD 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
BPD 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67
Age 135 138 140 142 144 146 148 151 153 154 157 160 162 164 167 169 171 174 176 179 181 183 186 188
SD 5 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
BPD 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 >90
Age 194 196 199 201 204 207 210 213 216 218 221 225 228 231 234 238 241 245 249 253 258 262 n/a
SD 7 7 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
0 23 0 0 0 0 0 0 30 0 0 0 0 0 0 37 0 38 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 39 40 41 42 31 32 33 34 35 36 24 25 26 27 28 29
43
133
68
191
Table 51. BPD : Tokyo
Table 50. OFD : Sostoa
OB Tables F31
OB Tables
CRL : Tokyo Unit : CRL (mm) Age (Day) SD (Day) FL : Tokyo Unit : FL (mm) Age (Day) SD (Day)
CRL <13 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
Age n/a 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 68 69 70 71 72
SD 8 9 10 8 9 10 8 9 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
CRL 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 >50
Age 73 74 74 75 76 77 78 78 79 80 81 81 82 83 84 84 85 86 86 n/a
SD 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
FL <33 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52
Age n/a 143 146 149 153 156 159 162 166 169 172 175 178 181 185 188 191 194 197 200 204
SD 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
FL 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 >71
Age 207 210 214 217 220 224 228 231 235 239 243 247 251 256 260 266 271 278 286 n/a
SD 7 7 7 7 7 7 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 7 7 7 6
Table 52. CRL : Tokyo
Table 53. FL : Tokyo
OB Tables F32
OB Tables
GS : Tokyo Tokyo University Method 1986,6 by Univ. of Tokyo
GS <12 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Age n/a 31 32 33 34 36 37 38 40 41 42 43 44 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 SD 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 8 9 10 0X 0X 0X
Unit :
GS (mm) Age (Day) SD (Day)
LV : Tokyo
Unit :
LV (mm) Age (Day) SD (Day)
GS 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 >50
Age 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 n/a
SD 0X 0X 0X 0X 0X 0X 0X 0X 0X 0X 0X 0X 0X 0X 0X 0X 0X 0X 0X
LV <44 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65
Age n/a 154 157 159 161 163 166 168 171 173 176 178 181 183 186 189 192 195 198 201 204 207 210
SD 5 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 7 7 7 8 8 8 8 9 9 9 9 10 10
LV 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 >86
Age 213 217 220 224 227 231 234 238 241 245 249 252 256 260 264 267 271 275 278 282 285 n/a
SD 10 10 10 10 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
Table 54. GS : Tokyo
Table 55. LV : Tokyo
OB Tables F33
OB Tables
FL/HC GA (weeks) HC/AC GA (weeks)
GA <15 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
Min n/a 15.3 13.3 14.6 15.8 16.1 16.8 15.9 18.4 19.2 18.7 18.7 18.6 18.6 18.8
Max 17.1 16.5 17.6 18.0 18.3 19.8 20.3 20.2 20.8 20.9 20.3 20.4 20.4 20.6
GA 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 >42
Min 19.6 19.2 19.3 19.1 19.9 19.4 20.1 20.1 20.8 20.9 20.6 20.7 21.6 20.1 n/a
Max 20.8 21.4 21.3 21.3 21.5 21.8 22.3 22.1 22.6 22.7 23.4 22.5 23.2 23.9
GA <13 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 >41
Min n/a 1.14 1.05 1.07 1.09 1.06 1.05 1.04 1.05 0.99 0.96 0.96 0.93 0.92 0.87 0.93 n/a
Max 1.31 1.39 1.29 1.26 1.25 1.21 1.22 1.22 1.21 1.17 1.11 1.11 1.05 1.06 1.00
Table 56. FL/HC
Table 57. HC/AC
OB Tables F34
OB Tables
EFW : Tokyo Shinozuka Unit : EFW (grams) Age (Day) 1SD (grams)
EFW2 <250 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600 650 700 750 800 850 900 950 1000 1050 1100 1150 1200 1250 1300 1350 1400 1450 1500 1550 1600 1650 1700 1750 1800 1850 1900 1950 2000 2050 2100 2150 2200 Age n/a 19W3D 20W0D 20W4D 21W2D 21W5D 22W2D 22W6D 23W2D 23W6D 24W2D 24W5D 25W2D 25W5D 26W1D 26W4D 26W6D 27W2D 27W5D 28W0D 28W3D 28W5D 29W1D 29W3D 29W5D 30W0D 30W2D 30W5D 31W0D 31W2D 31W4D 31W6D 32W1D 32W3D 32W5D 32W7D 33W1D 33W3D 33W5D 34W0D 34W2D 1SD 45 51 58 66 71 78 85 90 98 103 109 116 122 128 134 138 145 151 155 162 166 173 177 181 186 191 197 202 207 211 216 221 226 231 236 238 243 248 253 258 EFW 2250 2300 2350 2400 2450 2500 2550 2600 2650 2700 2750 2800 2850 2900 2950 3000 >3000 Age 34W4D 34W6D 35W1D 35W3D 35W5D 35W7D 36W2D 36W4D 36W6D 37W2D 37W4D 37W6D 38W1D 38W4D 38W6D 39W2D n/a 1SD 264 269 274 279 284 290 295 301 306 314 320 325 331 340 345 354
APTDxTTD (AxT) : Tokyo Shinozuka Unit : APTDxTTD (mm) Age (Day) 1SD (cm2)
AxT <10 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56 58 60 62 64 66 68 70 72 74 76 78 80 82 84 86 88 Age n/a 16W1D 17W0D 17W6D 18W4D 19W3D 20W1D 20W6D 21W4D 22W2D 22W6D 23W4D 24W1D 24W5D 25W2D 25W6D 26W3D 27W0D 27W3D 28W0D 28W4D 29W0D 29W3D 30W0D 30W3D 31W0D 31W3D 31W6D 32W3D 32W6D 33W3D 33W6D 34W2D 34W6D 35W3D 35W6D 36W3D 37W0D 37W4D 38W1D 38W5D 1SD 2.5 2.7 2.9 3.1 3.4 3.6 3.8 4.0 4.3 4.4 4.7 4.9 5.1 5.3 5.5 5.7 6.0 6.1 6.4 6.6 6.8 7.0 7.2 7.4 7.7 7.9 8.1 8.4 8.6 8.8 9.1 9.3 9.6 9.9 10.1 10.2 10.7 11.0 11.3 11.7 AxT 90 >90 Age 39W2D n/a 1SD 12.0
Table 58. EFW : Tokyo Shinozuka
Table 59. APTDxTTD (AxT): Tokyo Shinozuka
OB Tables F35
OB Tables
FL : Tokyo Shinozuka Unit : (mm) Age (Day) 1SD (mm)
FL <20 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 Age n/a 16W1D 16W3D 16W6D 17W1D 17W3D 17W6D 18W1D 18W3D 18W6D 19W1D 19W4D 20W0D 20W2D 20W5D 21W1D 21W3D 21W6D 22W2D 22W5D 23W1D 23W4D 24W0D 24W3D 24W6D 25W3D 25W6D 26W2D 26W5D 27W5D 28W2D 28W5D 29W2D 29W5D 30W2D 30W5D 31W2D 31W6D 32W3D 32W3D 33W0D 1SD 2.6 2.7 2.7 2.7 2.7 2.7 2.7 2.7 2.7 2.7 2.8 2.8 2.8 2.8 2.8 2.8 2.8 2.9 2.9 2.9 2.9 2.9 2.9 2.9 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 FL 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 >70 Age 33W3D 34W0D 34W4D 35W1D 35W5D 36W2D 37W0D 37W4D 38W1D 38W5D 39W3D n/a 1SD 3.2 3.2 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.4 3.4 3.4 3.4
AC : Tokyo Shinozuka Unit : (cm) Age (Day) 1SD (cm)

AC <10 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 >33 Age n/a 15W3D 16W4D 17W4D 18W4D 19W4D 20W3D 21W3D 22W3D 23W3D 24W3D 25W3D 26W3D 27W3D 28W4D 29W4D 30W5D 31W6D 33W1D 34W2D 35W4D 37W0D 38W2D 39W6D 41W2D n/a 1SD 0.5 0.6 0.6 0.7 0.7 0.8 0.8 0.9 0.9 1.0 1.0 1.1 1.1 1.2 1.2 1.3 1.3 1.4 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.6 1.7 1.8
Table 60. FL : Tokyo Shinozuka
Table 61. AC : Tokyo Shinozuka
OB Tables F36
OB Tables
BPD : Tokyo Shinozuka Unit : (mm) Age (Day) 1SD (mm)
BPD <13 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 Age n/a 10W1D 10W3D 10W5D 11W0D 11W2D 11W4D 11W6D 12W1D 12W3D 12W6D 13W1D 13W3D 13W5D 14W0D 14W2D 14W4D 14W6D 15W1D 15W3D 15W5D 16W0D 16W2D 16W4D 16W6D 17W1D 17W4D 17W6D 18W1D 18W3D 18W5D 19W0D 19W2D 19W4D 20W0D 20W2D 20W4D 20W6D 21W1D 21W3D 21W6D 1SD 2.3 2.3 2.3 2.3 2.4 2.4 2.4 2.4 2.4 2.4 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.6 2.6 2.6 2.6 2.6 2.6 2.7 2.7 2.7 2.7 2.7 2.7 2.8 2.8 2.8 2.8 2.8 2.8 2.9 2.9 2.9 2.9 2.9 2.9 BPD 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 >90 Age 22W1D 22W3D 22W5D 23W1D 23W3D 23W5D 24W1D 24W3D 24W5D 25W1D 25W3D 25W5D 26W1D 26W3D 26W6D 27W2D 27W4D 28W0D 28W3D 28W5D 29W1D 29W4D 30W0D 30W3D 30W6D 31W2D 31W5D 32W1D 32W5D 33W1D 33W5D 34W2D 34W6D 35W3D 36W0D 36W5D 37W4D 38W3D n/a 1SD 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.4 3.4 3.4 3.4 3.4 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.6 3.6 3.6 3.6 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.8 3.8 3.9
CRL : Tokyo Shinozuka Unit : (mm) Age (Day) 1SD (mm)

CRL <5 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 Age n/a 6W3D 6W4D 6W6D 7W0D 7W1D 7W2D 7W3D 7W4D 7W5D 7W6D 8W1D 8W2D 8W3D 8W4D 8W5D 8W6D 9W0D 9W1D 9W2D 9W3D 9W4D 9W4D 9W5D 9W6D 10W0D 10W1D 10W2D 10W3D 10W4D 10W5D 10W6D 10W6D 11W0D 11W0D 11W1D 11W2D 11W3D 11W3D 11W4D 11W5D 1SD 1.1 1.3 1.6 1.7 1.9 2.0 2.2 2.3 2.5 2.6 2.9 3.1 3.3 3.4 3.6 3.7 3.9 4.0 4.2 4.3 4.5 4.5 4.6 4.8 4.9 5.1 5.2 5.4 5.5 5.7 5.9 5.9 6.0 6.0 6.2 6.3 6.5 6.5 6.6 6.8 CRL 45 46 47 48 49 50 >50 Age 11W6D 11W6D 12W0D 12W1D 12W1D 12W2D n/a 1SD 6.9 6.9 7.1 7.2 7.2 7.4
Table 62. BPD : Tokyo Shinozuka
Table 63. CRL : Tokyo Shinozuka
OB Tables F37
OB Tables
AC : Australia Unit : (mm) Age (Day) 2SD (Day) CRL : Australia Unit : (mm) Age (Day) 2SD (Day)
AC <35 35 46 57 69 80 92 103 114 126 137 149 160 171 183 194 206 217 228 240 251 263 274 285 297 308 320 331 342 354 365 377 >377
Age n/a 70 77 84 91 98 105 112 119 126 133 140 147 154 161 168 175 182 189 196 203 210 217 224 231 238 245 252 259 266 273 280 n/a
SD 8 8 8 8 9 9 9 9 10 10 10 10 10 10 12 12 12 14 14 14 14 14 16 16 18 18 18 18 20 20 20
CRL <2 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 22 23 24 25 26 27 29 30 31 33 34 36 37 38 40 41 43 45 46 48 50
Age n/a 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81
SD * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
CRL 51 53 55 57 58 60 62 64 66 68 70 72 74 76 78 80 82 >82
Age 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 n/a
SD * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
Table 64. AC : Australia
Table 65. CRL : Australia * : No Data
OB Tables F38
OB Tables
BPD : Australia Unit : (mm) Age (Day) 2SD (Day)
BPD <20 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59
Age n/a 84 86 88 90 92 94 95 97 99 101 103 105 107 109 111 113 115 117 119 121 123 126 128 130 132 134 136 139 141 143 145 147 149 152 154 157 159 161 164 166
2SD 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 7 7 7 7 8 8 8 8 9 9 9 9 9 10 10 10 10 11 11 11 11 12 12 12 12 13 13
CRL 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 >98
Age 169 171 173 176 178 181 183 186 188 191 193 196 199 201 204 206 209 212 214 217 220 222 225 228 231 234 237 240 244 247 251 255 259 264 270 276 284 292 301 n/a
2SD 13 13 13 14 14 14 14 15 15 15 15 16 16 16 16 17 17 17 17 17 18 18 18 18 19 * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
Table 66. BPD : Australia * : No Data
OB Tables F39
OB Tables
OB Tables F40
Glossary
List of terms
absolute maximum: The largest possible value of a specified quantity, either for an individual instrument or for all instruments of a given generic type. This value shall include effects of inaccuracies and imprecision of the measurement process(es) used to determine it. The smallest possible value of a specified quantity, either for an individual instrument or for all instruments of a given generic type. This value shall include effects of inaccuracies and impression of the measurement process(es) used to determine it. The process by which energy is deposited in the medium through which it propagates. The absorbed energy is ultimately converted to thermal energy (heat). The rate of change of velocity. Acceleration is a vector quantity measured in meters per second squared (m/s2). The qualifying adjectives acoustic and acoustical mean containing, producing, arising from, actuated by, related to or associated with sound. Acoustic is used when the term being qualified designates something that has the properties, dimensions, or physical characteristics associated with sound waves; acoustical is used when the term being qualified does not designate explicitly something that has such properties, dimensions, or physical characteristics. The reduction of intensity of an acoustic signal as it propagates through a material. It includes the effects of absorption, scattering, and beam divergence. Mechanical energy transported by an acoustic wave. The unit is the joule (J). A manifestation of increased acoustic signal amplitude returning from regions lying beyond an object which causes little or no attenuation of the sound beam. Contrasts with acoustic shadow. Acoustic enhancement is one type of sonographic artifact. The distribution of acoustic energy in space and time.
absolute minimum:
absorption:
acceleration: acoustic, acoustical:
acoustic attenuation:
acoustic energy: acoustic enhancement:
acoustic field:
Glossary G1
Glossary
acoustic impedance: The resistance that a material offers to the passage of a sound wave (colloquial). A property of a medium computed as the product of density and sound propagation speed (characteristic acoustic impedance). The ratio of the instantaneous acoustic pressure at a point to the instantaneous particle velocity (specific acoustic impedance). Discontinuities in acoustic impedance are responsible for the echoes on which ultrasound imaging and Doppler flow detection are based. The condition in which two contiguous media have equal or near equal characteristic acoustic impedances, thereby minimizing reflection of acoustic energy at the interface. See impedance ratio. The condition in which two contiguous media have different characteristic acoustic impedances, thereby providing a source for the production of ultrasonic echoes. See intensity. A lens used to focus or diverge a sound beam. An acoustic lens is usually made of plastic or epoxy and is mounted on the front of a transducer. An acoustic lens can be simulated by electronically delaying echo signals arriving at or emitted by various transducer elements. Acoustic energy transported per unit time (usually a temporal average is quoted) (see average acoustic power). The unit is the watt (W), where 1 watt = 1 joule per second. The instantaneous value of the total pressure minus the ambient pressure. The unit is the pascal (Pa), where 1 pascal = 1 newton per square meter. Sonographic appearance of reduced echo amplitude from regions lying beyond an attenuating object. It is important to distinguish between acoustic shadows and regions of low reflectivity. Contrasts with acoustic enhancement. Acoustic shadow is one type of sonographic artifact. A mechanical disturbance which propagates through a continuous medium. See waveform. The distance between any two adjacent points at which the phase, at the same instant, differs by 2p radians; it corresponds to the distance traveled by the wave during one cycle; l = c/f, where l is the wavelength, c is the speed of sound, and f is the frequency. For water or tissue at 1 MHz, the wavelength is approximately 1.5 mm. The region of a single transducer which is capable of being energized. The introduction of artifactual frequency components as a result of sampling a signal at a rate which is lower than twice the highest frequency component in that signal. For example, aliasing of a Doppler signal will result in an erroneous representation of the Doppler shift frequency.
acoustic impedance match:
acoustic impedance mismatch:
acoustic intensity: acoustic lens:
acoustic power:
acoustic pressure:
acoustic shadow:
acoustic wave: acoustic waveform: acoustic wavelength:
active element: aliasing:
Glossary G2
Glossary
ambient: amorphous tissue: Refers to the local environment surrounding an object. In the acoustical sense, tissue lacking echo-producing structures. These tissues include fluid-filled structures such as cysts, and other acoustically homogeneous regions. A device which magnifies the amplitude or power of its input signal. The property of appearing echo-free or without echoes on a sonographic image. A clear cyst appears anechoic. The angle between the axis of an acoustic beam encountering an interface, and the vector normal (perpendicular) to the interface. Having acoustic properties which vary according to the direction in which they are measured. A spatial arrangement of two or more transducers or transducer elements. The array may be a linear array (i.e., elements arranged in a line), a rectangular array (i.e., transducers arranged in a rectangular pattern), or may be formed in other patterns such as hexagonal, annular, circular, etc. An echo feature present or absent in a sonogram, which does not correspond to the presence or absence of a real target. Reverberations and shadowing are examples of such artifacts. The angle between the direction of movement of the reflector and the effective direction of the ultrasonic beam. Also known as Doppler angle. The decrease in intensity as sound travels through a material. Attenuation is due to three factors: absorption, scattering, and beam divergence. The quantitative measure of attenuation due to the medium and not to beam divergence. The relative change in the acoustic wave amplitude per unit path length in a medium. Commonly employed units are dB/cm, and neper/cm. The attenuation coefficient is specified for a given frequency. Electronic compensation for attenuation due to media losses and geometrical divergence of the acoustic beam along the propagation pathway, introduced to produce equivalent acoustic images of a reflector, that are independent of distance from the transducer. This is also called time gain compensation (TGC), depth compensation, or swept gain. See also ramp. A device or material which reduces the amplitude of a signal. A step attenuator is a device which can reduce the signal amplitude by specified stepwise amounts. The audible range of sound frequencies. Usually taken to be 20 Hz to 20 kHz. Ultrasonic B-Scan systems in which scanning is performed mechanically or electronically but not manually. These instruments include both real-time scanners and scanners whose frame rate is less than 15 frames per second.
amplifier: anechoic: angle of incidence: anisotropic: array:
artifact:
attack, angle of:
attenuation:
attenuation coefficient:
attenuation compensation:
attenuator:
audio range: auto-scanning system:
Glossary G3
Glossary
autocorrelation: average acoustic power: average intensity: axial resolution: See correlation. The power output from an acoustic transducer averaged over time. See intensity. The minimum separation between two equally reflecting point targets along the direction of sound travel, such that each can be separately distinguished on the display. (Same as depth resolution, longitudinal resolution, and range resolution). The minimum angular separation between two equally reflecting point targets at the same range such that each can be separately distinguished on the display. The resolution is limited by the beamwidth of the transducer at that range of the targets. See lateral resolution. A method of image display in which the amplitude of the echo signal is represented by modulation of the brightness of the corresponding image point. The position of the echo, displayed in the x-y plane, is determined from the position and angulation of the transducer and the transit time of the acoustic pulse. Scanning with B-Mode display. A misnomer for a B-Mode scan or image. Sound is scattered by small reflecting objects in all directions. Backscatter is that part of the scattered sound that travels back to the source transducer. The portion of the incident acoustic energy scattered back toward the source. The range of frequencies that a device is capable of passing (colloquial). The transmitted bandwidth is that portion of the frequency spectrum between upper and lower frequency bounds F1 and F2. The bounds F1 and F2 are often set at the points where the magnitude of the frequency spectrum is 71% (or -3 dB) of its maximum value. Bandwidth is usually specified in MHz. A control that allows the axis representing Doppler shift frequency on the spectral display to be allocated entirely to forward flow, reverse flow or a mixture of the two. The effect is to shift the zero frequency axis up or down. This procedure is useful when aliasing is present in a signal representing unidirectional flow. It does not affect the Nyquist limit. The directed acoustic field produced by a transducer. A straight line joining the points of maximum sound pressure amplitude, at increasing distances from the source in the far field, and extending back to the transducer assembly surface. In pulse-echo situations, the above points of maximum spatial pressure amplitude are replaced by the points of maximum pulse-echo response from a specific reflector.
azimuthal resolution:
B-Mode (brightness-mode):
B-scan: backscatter:
backscattered energy: bandwidth:
baseline shift (zero shift):
beam: beam axis:
Glossary G4
Glossary
beam cross-sectional area: The area of that portion of a surface, in a plane perpendicular to the beam axis, that is bounded by that contour of the pulse-echo amplitude from a specified point or line reflector which is 25% (-12 dB) of the maximum transducer signal in that plane. Transmitted beam cross-sectional area is the area on the surface of a plane perpendicular to the beam axis consisting of all points where the acoustic pressure is greater than 50% of the maximum acoustic pressure in that plane. The sound pressure amplitude distribution along a line perpendicular to the beam axis. See pulse-echo response profile. The full angle of beam spread in a particular plane containing the beam axis. The orientation of the plane must be specified. A description, often presented graphically, of the response of the transducer as a function of angle with respect to the direction of the transmitted or incident sound waves in a specified plane and at a specified frequency. A complete description of the beam pattern of a transducer would require a three-dimensional presentation. The beam pattern is often shown as the response relative to the maximum response. The transverse distance between points on a specified beam cross-sectional profile where the acoustic pressure is a specified fraction of the maximum acoustic pressure on the profile. This may also be expressed as the angle formed between lines from the location of these two points to the point of intersection of the beam axis and the surface of the transducer assembly. The reduction in pressure which accompanies an increase in velocity of fluid flow. The equation which states that the total fluid energy per unit volume along a streamline of fluid flow is constant. This is a form of the more general law of conservation of energy. A contraction of binary digit. A bit can assume one of two possible values usually represented by 0 and 1. The thin layer of stationary fluid in contract with the walls of the containing vessel. The name given to sounds sometimes associated with disturbed and turbulent flow. The arise from the periodic variation in shear stress on the vessel wall which causes it to vibrate. In acoustics, the process of scattering from an array of scatterers such that, through constructive and destructive interference, there results more sound energy in some directions and less in others. An echo display technique in which the brightness of a displayed echo varies with the echo amplitude.
beam cross-sectional profile: beam divergence: beam pattern:
beam width (transmission):
Bernoulli effect: Bernoulli equation:
bit: boundary layer: bruit:
Bragg diffraction:
brightness modulation:
Glossary G5
Glossary
calipers (electronic): Two electronic cursors generated on a display, which can be manipulated to coincide with echoes of interest on the screen. On an image, the distance between the cursors is calibrated to provide the dimensions of the structure of interest. On a M-Mode or Doppler display, calipers may be used to measure such quantities as time, frequency or velocity. The display tube used in an oscilloscope. A television picture tube is a special type of cathode-ray tube. In sonography, a CRT is an electron beam tube designed for two-dimensional display of signals as a function of their coordinates in space, time, or both. It consists of an electron source (gun), a means for deflecting the electron beam in the horizontal and vertical directions, and a phosphor-coated screen upon which the position of the electron beam is visible. The brightness of the display can be modulated by varying the current to the electron source, or the voltage on the grid of the CRT. A phenomenon produced by sound in liquid or liquid-like media involving the expansion and compression of bubbles or cavities containing gas or vapor. Steady oscillation of a bubble due to the passage of a sound wave. Mechanical movements, such as acoustic streaming, occur in the vicinity of the bubble. A short-lived cavitation event initiated by the negative pressure of the sound wave. The cavitation event is terminated by a rapid collapse of the bubble. This is accompanied by high localized pressure and temperature and the generation of a sonic shock wave. The average frequency over the bandwidth of a signal. The sound leaving a transducer in a pulse-echo system contains not one frequency, but a spectrum of frequencies. The center frequency is terminated by (F1 + F2)/2, where F1 and F2 are the frequencies used in defining bandwidth. For a symmetrical spectrum the center frequency is the frequency at which the amplitude is a maximum. A convenient indicator of the direction of a sound beam. The central axis is located at the center of an ultrasound beam and points in the direction of sound propagation.
cathode-ray tube (CRT):
cavitation (acoustically induced):
cavitation, stable:
cavitation, transient:
center frequency:
central axis:
characteristic acoustic impedance: See acoustic impedance. clipping: coarse gain: A form of limiting in which the amplitude of a signal exceeding a specific level is reset to that level. An operational control provided on some ultrasonic systems for gross adjustments of amplifier gain. Generally, it is supplemented by a fine gain control for more precise adjustment. The situation describing the degree of phase consistency among the signals making up a composite wave; if all the signals are in phase, the wave is said to be coherent. A reverberation type of sonographic artifact which appears as a dense tapering trail of echoes just distal to strongly reflecting structures.
coherence:
comet tail artifact:
Glossary G6
Glossary
compliance: The rate of change of volume of a distensible vessel with pressure (volume compliance); the rate of change of cross-sectional area with pressure (area compliance); or the rate of change of diameter with pressure (diameter compliance). An acoustic lens used to focus an acoustic beam at infinity, i.e., to produce plane parallel waves. In practice, collimators may provide weak focusing. The two-dimensional presentation of Doppler shift information superimposed on a real-time, gray-scale anatomic cross-sectional image. Flow directions toward and away from the transducer, i.e., positive and negative Doppler shifts, are presented as different colors on the display. A 2-dimensional echogram which combines at least two basic scanning motions on the same image. Usually, a persistence monitor or digitized frame memory is used to store the overlapping images corresponding to the different scanning motions. A wave motion which is characterized by changes of density in the medium. See longitudinal wave as an example. When a sound beam passes through a material, the molecules in some regions of the material are compressed while those in other regions expand. The regions of compressed molecules are called condensations. See also rarefactions. Acoustical coupling of a transducer by direct contact with the skin, using liquid or gel to exclude air from the space between the transducer and skin.
collimator:
color-flow Doppler:
compound scan:
compressional wave: condensations:
contact coupling:
continuous-wave (cw) ultrasound: A wave of constant or nearly constant amplitude which persists for a large number of cycles. contrast (display): contrast agent: contrast-detail detectability: The ratio of the brightness (or intensity) of a region of interest to the brightness (or intensity) of the surrounding or adjacent region. See contrast medium. Contrast-detail detectability at a specified control setting and range is the minimum diameter target which is just detectable, at a specified level of confidence, in a tissue-mimicking background as a function of the contrast of the target with the background. A material which when introduced into a region of interest results in a greatly increased or a greatly decreased echo signal. A contrast medium is used to enhance the difference in sonographic luminance between an anatomic structure and the surrounding tissue, thereby making the structure easier to detect. A measure of the ability of an imaging system to detect targets of different contrasts. Contrast resolution is expressed as the minimum detectable target size as a function of target contrast.
contrast medium:
contrast resolution:
Glossary G7
Glossary
contrast (target): control settings: The ratio of the backscattered intensity from within a target volume to the backscattered intensity from the background. The settings of the controls on an ultrasound instrument. Such controls would include the power output control, the focal zone control, the imaging range control, etc. Any plane perpendicular to a sagittal plane and parallel to the long axis of the body. Coronal planes run from left to right through the body. For ultrasound, a mathematical procedure which is used to quantify the similarity between two signals. autocorrelation: A mathematical procedure whereby a waveform is multiplied by successively time-shifted versions of itself. The autocorrelation method can be used to quantify periodicity or time variation in an ultrasound echo signal. cross-correlation: A mathematical procedure whereby one waveform is multiplied by successively time-shifted versions of another waveform. Cross-correlation of successive ultrasound echoes can be used to quantify movement of tissue, including blood. coupling: The formation of a transmission path for a sound wave between the transducer and the object being imaged. This is usually accomplished by replacing the air between the transducer and the object with a fluid. A medium used to enhance transmission of sound from the transducer into the body. The method by which ultrasound is transmitted from a transducer to the subject and vice versa. These methods include (1) contact coupling, (2) immersion coupling and (3) liquid coupling. A stenosis of sufficient diameter reduction that flow rate and pressure are significantly affected. Sometimes called hemodynamically significant stenosis. A display which presents echo data from a single plane within the body.
coronal plane:
correlation:
coupling agent: coupling method:
critical stenosis:
cross-sectional display:
cross-sectional echocardiography: See two dimensional echocardiography. CRT: crystal: Abbreviation for cathode-ray tube. A colloquial term for the piezoelectric element of the transducer. Most piezoelectric elements are made of crystalline materials, such as quartz and certain ceramics. Any mechanism which removes mechanical or electrical energy from the transducer. This can include internal absorption in the transducer as well as electrical or mechanical loading of a transducer to produce a more rapid decrease in the trailing edge of the transmitted acoustic pulse and the received echoes. Damping is used to improve axial resolution, usually at the expense of sensitivity.
damping:
Glossary G8
Glossary
dB: dead time: Abbreviation for decibel. The time interval between the start of the transmitter complex and the reception of the first identifiable echo. The dead time is determined by such factors as the ring-down time of the transducer and the recovery time of the receiving amplifier. Region close to the transducer in which imaging cannot be performed due to a echo arrival during dead time. A unit representing a ratio, used to express how much larger or smaller a quantity is with respect to a reference quantity. The precise definition is 10Slog10(I/Io) where I is the intensity of interest and Io is reference intensity. This unit can be used for other than intensity ratios, and is frequently used for defining the magnitude of echoes. Because sound amplitude is proportional to the square root of intensity, the formula for dB becomes 20Slog10(A/Ao) when comparing echo amplitudes. (A is the amplitude of interest and Ao is the reference amplitude.) The product of acoustic power and exposure time at the prescribed site. See energy per pulse. The removal of the carrier signal from a modulated wave to produce a signal representing the desired information (e.g., the Doppler shift or the amplitude of the echo). Mass per unit volume. The distance along the sound path from the point of entry into the patient, or other object being examined, to the point of interest. Distance along the time axis of the display is assumed to correspond proportionally to depth in the tissue. See attenuation compensation. The distance along the beam axis, for a focusing transducer assembly, from the point where the beam cross-sectional area first becomes equal to four times the focal area to the point beyond the focal surface where the beam cross-sectional area again becomes equal to four times the focal area. Alternatively it is the distance between the two points along the beam axis where intensity drops to 25% (-12 dB) of the value at the focal point. Measurement should be specified as to whether the depth of focus was done under one-way or round-trip (pulse-echo) conditions. See focal zone. The maximum distance from the transducer into the medium along the beam axis from which echoes can be detected. This distance will increase with ultrasound beam intensity and decrease with greater attenuation of the medium. See axial resolution. A device that gives a measurable response upon the receipt of energy and is used to detect the presence of a signal.
dead zone: decibel:
delivered acoustic energy: delivered acoustic pause energy: demodulation:
density: depth:
depth gain compensation: depth of focus:
depth of penetration:
depth resolution: detector:
Glossary G9
Glossary
differentiation: A mathematical operation for calculating the rate of change of a variable. In ultrasound imaging, differentiation is used to process signals to enhance edges of the structures. This is accomplished by using circuits whose output depends on the rate of change of the input. The relaxation period in the cardiac cycle in which the ventricles fill and the aortic and pulmonary valves are closed. Where visible in the velocity pulse, the dicrotic notch forms a convenient point making the beginning of diastole. The general term for various phenomena in which waves from different parts of a source add or subtract. A redistribution in space of the intensity of waves that result from the presence of inhomogeneities causing variations in the phase of the waves. For example, the ultrasonic field which appears in and near the geometric shadow of an obstacle typically has a complex spatial distribution which is explained by diffraction. The variation of transducer sensitivity as a function of direction. The mathematical description of the dependence of acoustic output of a transducer with direction. A beam pattern expressed in polar coordinates. The condition in which the speed of sound varies with frequency. Dispersion is responsible, to a small extent, for the changes in shape of a pulse waveform as it propagates. The manner in which information is presented to the diagnostician, e.g., A-Mode, B-Mode, C-Mode, etc. Deviations from laminar flow consisting of oscillatory variations in direction or the formation of vortices. Disturbance of blood flow may be caused by high velocities, by curving, branching and divergence of vessels or by projections in the vessel lumen. The continual widening of a sound beam as it travels. The angle between the direction of propagation of the ultrasound and the direction of flow. As an approximation, the angle between the axis of the ultrasound beam and the axis of the vessel lumen is generally used. An apparent change in observed sound frequency caused by relative motion between the sound source or reflector and the observer. The difference between the frequencies of transmitted and received waves. The shift in frequency is proportional to the velocity of relative motion between the transducer and the reflector. See pulsed Doppler.
diastole:
diffraction:
directional response: directivity function: directivity pattern: dispersion:
display format: disturbed flow:
divergence (beam): Doppler angle:
Doppler effect:
Doppler frequency shift:
Doppler, pulsed:
Glossary G10
Glossary
Doppler shift frequency, maximum: The highest Doppler shift frequency at a moment in time or in an individual Doppler spectrum. This corresponds to the fastest moving target in the Doppler sample volume. Because of the effect of noise, some form of signal conditioning is usually performed before the maximum frequency is measured. Doppler shift frequency, mean: Doppler shift frequency, median: Doppler shift frequency, mode: Doppler ultrasound: The average Doppler shift frequency in a given power spectrum. The Doppler shift frequency above and below which one-half of the total power in the spectrum resides. The Doppler shift frequency with the greatest power in a given spectrum. Application of the Doppler effect in ultrasound to detect movement of scatterers by the analysis of the change in frequency of the returning echoes. A signal whose instantaneous voltage is proportional to the instantaneous Doppler frequency shift, derived by a frequency-to-voltage conversion of the Doppler signal. The quantitative determination of the radiation dose. An ultrasound instrument that has real-time imaging capability and Doppler capability with either the imaging transducer or a separate transducer used to collect continuous-wave or pulsed Doppler signals, either simultaneously with imaging or sequentially. A method of changing the effective focal zone of a transducer assembly during reception of echoes following a single transmitted pulse. It is also used in a more general sense to refer to change in focusing as a function of time. Imaging of an object in motion, a technique which is frequently referred to as real-time imaging. The ratio of the largest undistorted signal to the smallest detectable signal in a system. The largest signal is usually limited by saturation of the electronics and the smallest by the background noise level. The ratio in decibels of the maximum to the minimum output signal which can be identified above the noise levels at a fixed gain. The ratio in decibels of the maximum input signal which can be displayed without reaching saturation to the smallest input signal which can be identified visually above the noise level. Acoustic signal received from scattering elements or a specular reflector. An echogram of the heart. See two-dimensional echocardiography. An instrument used to record an echocardiogram. Examination of the heart by diagnostic ultrasound.
Doppler velocity signal:
dosimetry: duplex scanner:
dynamic focusing:
dynamic imaging: dynamic range:
dynamic range (amplifier): dynamic range (display):
echo: echocardiogram: echocardiograph: echocardiography:
Glossary G11
Glossary
echoencephalography: echogenic: Examination of the brain by diagnostic ultrasound. Often this term is restricted to meanA-Mode echoencephalography. Describes a structure or medium (e.g., tissue) that is capable of producing echoes. Contrast with the terms hypoechoic, hyperechoic and anechoic, which refer to the paucity, abundance and absence of echoes displayed on the image. A record obtained using acoustic reflection techniques with any one of the various display modes. Any imagine method using reflected sound. See echo ranging. A misnomer for anechoic and/or transonic. Examination of the eye and orbit by diagnostic ultrasound. A method for echoencephalographic measurements of the cerebral ventricles, or measurement of other ventricles as appropriate in the field of application. A technique for measuring distances in materials of known acoustic velocity by measuring the transit time for the sound to propagate from the transducer to the target and return. Echo ranging techniques, in particular pulse-echo ultrasound, form the basis for most of the ultrasonic visualization systems. Image modification in which the echo waveform is changed using techniques such as limiting or differentiation. The magnitude of an echo. The resolution at right angles to the image plane. This is sometimes referred to as orthogonal resolution, vertical resolution or slice thickness resolution. An electrical pulse used to excite (or shock) an ultrasonic transducer. Frequently, the pulse is an impulse or spike whose rise time is short compared to the natural period for the fundamental resonant oscillations of the transducer. The ratio of the average acoustic power to the pulse repetition frequency, measured in joules. The dimensions of the beam cross-sectional area where the beam enters the patient. For contact transducers these dimensions can be taken as the dimensions of the radiating element. A continuous curve connecting the peaks of the successive cycles of a waveform. The total amount of time the transducer assembly is delivering ultrasonic energy to the subject. For a pulsed waveform, this includes the time between pulses. The focal length of a focused transducer divided by the diameter of its radiating surface. This ratio is a measure of the focusing power of the lens.
echogram: echography: echolucent: echo-ophthalmography: echoventriculography:
echo ranging:
echo (signal) shaping: echo strength: elevational resolution:
energizing pulse (transmitter pulse):
energy per pulse: entrance beam dimensions:
envelope: exposure time:
f-number
Glossary G12
Glossary
false echoes: far field (Fraunhofer zone): See artifact. The region of the ultrasound beam sufficiently far from the transducer so that wave fronts arriving from different regions of the transducer surface reinforce each other. An ultrasound beam is conveniently divided into two regions. The region farthest from the transducer in called the far field or sometimes the Fraunhofer zone. For an unfocused circular transducer assembly, the far field commonly is ascribed to range greater than r2/, where r is the radius of the transducer and is the acoustic wavelength in the medium. A rapid method for computing the Fourier transform of a function. The Fourier transform is a mathematical operation which decomposes a function into an equivalent group of sinusoidal functions of various frequencies and amplitudes. The amplitudes of the frequency components are often displayed as a plot of relative amplitude vs. frequency, known as the amplitude spectrum. The FFT is frequently used to compute the frequency components of the Doppler signal. See far field. See near field. A device or material used for suppressing acoustic or electromagnetic waves of certain frequencies while allowing others to pass. In digital computing, a filter is often an algorithm or program which is used to eliminate or modify specific types of information in a file while leaving the remaining data more or less intact. A device or material which allows a limited range of frequencies to pass. A device or material which allows high-frequency but not low-frequency signals to pass. An example is the electrical filter used in Doppler devices to eliminate low-frequency Doppler shifts caused by arterial wall motion. A device or material which allows low-frequency but not high-frequency signals to pass. By preferentially attenuating sound at higher frequencies, most tissues act as low-pass filters. A transducer whose focal length does not vary. The sound beam is focused by use of a plastic lens or by curving the transducer surface. Contrast with dynamic focusing. A visibly apparent brightness fluctuation due to a display frame rate that is too low for visual perception of continuous brightness. Typically this will occur when the frame rate is below 15 frames per second. The rate of transfer of volume of fluid with time. Measured in liters/second or milliliters/minute.
fast Fourier transform (FFT):
field, far: field, near: filter:
filter bandpass: filter, high-pass:
filter, low-pass:
fixed-focus transducer:
flicker:
flow rate:
Glossary G13
Glossary
flow separation: A phenomenon whereby a body of fluid travels at high velocity adjacent to fluid traveling at a lower velocity. At the flow separation boundary both a high velocity gradient and high shear stress are present. Flow separation often occurs just distal to a vessel stenosis. The area of the focal surface. See focal surface. The axial distance from the centroid of the radiating surface of a focusing transducer assembly to the focal surface. For a focused ultrasound transducer it is the distance from the surface of the transducer assembly to the narrowest point (focus) of the beam. See f-number. The surface containing the smallest of all beam cross-sectional areas of a focused transducer assembly. The volume lying within the depth of focus and the perimeters of the beam cross-sectional areas. The point of the axis of an ultrasonic beam where the width of the beam has a minimum value: generally, all the waves passing through the focus are in phase in relation to the surface of the transducer or to the electronic summing point of an electronically focused array. See depth of focus. A method for controlling the axial position of the focus of an ultrasonic beam: often realized by phase control of the signals detected by a transducer array. A transducer assembly for which the ratio of the smallest beam cross-sectional area (focal area) to radiating cross-sectional area of the transducer is less than 0.5. A mathematical technique for the representation of a periodic function (such as a time-varying waveform) as a sum of sinusoidal functions of different frequencies. Each of these constituent functions has a frequency that is an exact multiple of the same number, the fundamental frequency. Fourier analysis allows the presentation of a Doppler signal in terms of the relative amplitude of the various Doppler shift frequencies of which it is composed. A single complete image. This term is usually used to designate a single image in a sequence of many similar images. The rate at which pictures are refreshed on the display of a real-time system. This would normally correspond to the scan rate of the transducer. In some systems, such as television, a single frame is comprised of two interlaced fields. The frame rate of standard television is 30 frames per second. See scan repetition rate.
focal area: focal length:
focal ratio: focal surface: focal zone: focus (focal point):
focus, depth of: focusing, dynamic:
focus transducer assembly:
Fourier analysis:
frame: frame rate:
Glossary G14
Glossary
frequency: Number of cycles of a periodic process per unit of time, usually expressed in hertz (Hz), or multiples such as megahertz (1 MHz = 106 Hz). 1 Hz = 1 cycle per second. The difference between the frequencies of the transmitted wave and those of the echo received from a moving target. The frequency of the signal detected by the receiving transducer. The range of frequencies present in a signal at some time. The range of frequencies in a spectrum averaged over a (long) period of time. See near field. The ratio of the output to input of an amplifying system, generally expressed in decibels (dB). A device which can be switched electronically to control the passage of a signal. A gate may select a part of the signal based on frequency, amplitude of time interval during which the signal was received. For example, a range gate may be designed to accept signals only from a specific range, or an ECG triggered gate may pass signals from a specified portion of the cardiac cycle. Abbreviation for gigahertz, equal to one billion hertz. 1 GHz = 109 Hz. Unwanted beams of sound radiating in directions different from the primary beam resulting from the multielement structure of transducer arrays. The grating lobes may be responsible for introducing artifactual echoes into an ultrasound image. A display technique in which echo amplitude or intensity information is recorded as variations in brightness (shades of gray). An image transformation in which luminance on the display is not proportional to echo amplitudes. For a given magnitude of change in echo amplitude, gray scale stretching usually causes larger changes in display brightness for small echo amplitudes than for large echo amplitudes. See half-value layer. The distance an ultrasound pulse must travel in one direction in a medium to reduce its power to one-half of its original value. The half-value layer is a means for quantifying tissue attenuation. A permanent visual record stored on materials such as paper, radiographic film, or photographic film, as opposed to an image displayed on a video screen or stored on magnetic tape. A whole number multiple of the fundamental frequency of a periodic quantity. For example, the second harmonic of a 1-MHz piezoelectric element is at 2 MHz. (Subharmonics also are possible e.g., at 1/2, 1/3, etc. of the fundamental frequency.)
frequency, Doppler Shift: frequency, received: frequency spectrum, instantaneous: frequency spectrum, mean: Fresnel zone (near field): gain: gate:
GHz: grating lobes:
gray scale: gray scale stretching:
half-power distance: half-value layer:
hard copy:
harmonic:
Glossary G15
Glossary
hertz: holography: The standard unit of frequency equal to one cycle per second. A two-stage process of imaging. The object to be visualized is uniformly irradiated with ultrasound (or light) and the reflected or transmitted waves are sampled over a large area. The resulting image or hologram is generated by recording the sum of the reflected or transmitted waves and a reference wave or signal. This resulting image is an interference pattern where the contours are lines of constant phase. Although holograms contain three-dimensional data, they are usually reconstructed in acoustics so that only two dimensions are displayed. A transducer designed for underwater measurement of acoustic fields. The diameter of a hydrophone is usually smaller than the wavelength of ultrasound to be measured, and its bandwidth is large. An adjective describing a region in a sonographic image where the echoes are brighter than normal or brighter than surrounding structures. An adjective describing a region in a sonographic image where the echoes are not as bright as normal or less bright than surrounding structures. Abbreviation for hertz, the unit of frequency. One hertz is one cycle per second. A method of coupling an ultrasonic transducer to an object by placing both in a bath of the coupling medium. See acoustic impedance. See acoustic impedance. The ratio of pressure to flow rate expressed as a function of frequency in time-varying flow. Impedance summarizes the effect on flow rate of resistance, compliance, and inertia when the pressure varies with time. The ratio Z2/Z1 where Z1 and Z2 are the characteristic acoustic impedance of two contiguous media, respectively. A condition in which the component waves in a sound beam are not in phase. This occurs, for example, when several independent unsynchronized transducer outputs are combined to produce a sound beam. A condition in which the waves of a sound beam are synchronized such that all wave maxima occur simultaneously. Mathematically, the reverse of the process of differentiation. Integration of a mathematical function over an interval gives the area under the function between the upper and lower limits of the interval.
hydrophone:
hyperechoic:
hypoechoic:
Hz: immersion coupling: impedance: impedance, acoustic: impedance, fluid:
impedance ratio: incoherence:
in phase: integration:
Glossary G16
Glossary
intensity: The intensity (I) of a wave is the rate of energy flow (power) through a unit area perpendicular to the direction of propagation. The unit of intensity is watts per square meter or, more commonly, watts per square centimeter. The particular intensity intended should be specified as defined below. instantaneous intensity: The instantaneous acoustic power transmitted in a specified direction per unit area normal to this direction at the point considered. For measurement purposes, this point is restricted to where it is reasonable to assume that the acoustic pressure and particle velocity are in phase, viz, in the far-field or the area of the focus. Under such conditions, the instantaneous intensity can be expressed as: I = 2/pc where is the instantaneous acoustic pressure, p is the density of the medium, and c is the speed of sound in the medium. pulse-average intensity: The time-average of instantaneous intensity at a point in space, when averaged over the pulse duration. (May be calculated approximately as the ratio of the temporal average intensity to duty factor). spatial-average intensity: The same as the spatial-average temporal-average intensity. Generally, this parameter is used when specifying the intensity for continuous-wave (cw) ultrasound. spatial-average pulse- The pulse average intensity averaged over the beam crossaverage intensity (SAPA): sectional area. (May be calculated as the ratio of acoustic power to the product of duty factor and beam cross-sectional area). spatial-average temporal- The temporal average intensity averaged over the beam crossaverage intensity (SATA): sectional area in a specified plane. (May be calculated as the ratio of acoustic power to the beam cross-sectional area). spatial-peak pulse- The value of the pulse average intensity at the point in the average intensity (SPPA): acoustic field where the pulse average intensity is a maximum, or is a local maximum within a specified region. spatial-peak temporal- The temporal average intensity at the point in the acoustic field average intensity (SPTA): where this intensity is a maximum or is a local maximum within a specified region. spatial-peak temporal- The value of temporal peak intensity at the point in the acoustic peak intensity (SPTP): field where the temporal peak intensity is a maximum, or is a local maximum within a specified region. temporal average The time-average of instantaneous intensity at a point in space; intensity: this is equal to the mean value of the instantaneous intensity at the point considered. For non-auto-scanning systems, the instantaneous intensity is averaged over one or more scan repetition periods for a specified operation mode. temporal peak intensity: The peak value of the instantaneous intensity at the point considered. It is given by P2/c, where P is the peak instantaneous acoustic pressure, is the density of the medium, and c is the speed of sound in the medium. interface: A boundary between two materials. In acoustics, an interface is the surface forming the boundary between two media having different acoustic properties.
Glossary G17
Glossary
interference: interference, constructive: The phenomenon in which two or more waves add together or cancel each other, according to their amplitudes and phases. The phenomenon of interference in which the resultant wave has an amplitude greater than that of either of the two interfering waves alone. The phenomenon of interference in which the resultant wave has an amplitude less than that of either of the two interfering waves alone. Having nondirectional properties (i.e., physical properties that are independent of direction). For example, the speed of sound is not a function of the direction of propagation through an isotropic material. In contrast, the velocity of sound in muscle differs when propagating parallel to the fibers than when propagating at right angle to the fibers; thus, muscle is anisotropic. A region of very high blood flow velocity extending downstream from a vessel stenosis. Small rapid irregularities in the registration of the image display due to electronic noise, mechanical disturbance, supply voltage, changes in properties of components, etc. Abbreviation for one kilohertz (1000 Hz). Flow in which there is smooth and gradual variation of velocity with position. Flow may be thought of as comprising a series of individual laminae, each moving at one velocity, with viscous cohesion maintaining the flow of adjacent laminae at nearly the same velocity. The minimum separation between two equally reflecting point reflectors in a direction perpendicular to the beam axis at which the individual reflectors can be distinguished in the image display. See azimuthal resolution. A ferroelectric ceramic used for piezoelectric elements in transducer assemblies. PbNi03. A technique which does not permit a voltage level to exceed a specified value. This may be an inherent limitation of a component or a system rather than a technique, per se. An amplifier for which the output amplitude varies linearly with the input amplitude. The motion of a transducer at constant speed along a straight line at right angles to the beam. A transducer array in which the transducer elements are arranged in a single row. An amplifier for which the output is proportional to the logarithm of the ratio of an input voltage and a reference voltage. Logarithmic amplifiers selectively enhance the distinguishability of small echoes in gray scale displays.
interference, destructive:
isotropic:
jet: jitter:
kHz: laminar flow:
lateral resolution:
lead zirconate titanate: limiting:
linear amplifier: linear scan: linear transducer array: logarithmic amplifier:
Glossary G18
Glossary
longitudinal: Parallel with the beam axis, or with the long axis of the body or other object of interest. For example, longitudinal scan or longitudinal sound wave. Any image plane which passes through or which is parallel to the long axis of the body. Sagittal and coronal planes are both specific types of longitudinal image planes. See axial resolution. Wave motion for which the particle displacement in the medium is parallel to the direction of wave propagation. A method of display in which tissue interface position is displayed along one axis and time is displayed along the second axis. M-Mode is used frequently to display echocardiographic data in which heart wall motion and valve motion are displayed as functions of time. Abbreviation for one megahertz, or one million cycles per second. Any material through which a sound wave travels. Loss of directional resolution in a Doppler system employing phase-quadrature detection, resulting in a mirror image of the spectral display about the zero-frequency axis. The artifact may be seen when the signal level is too great or when the Doppler angle is near to 90. A multiple path reflection artifact in which the sonographic image of a structure is duplicated in a different location and appears as a mirror-image of the original. A device that combines two or more signals. In ultrasound instrumentation, mixers multiply two signals to obtain one signal which contains both the sum and the difference of the two input frequencies. An electrical circuit that produces a second pulse at a known delay following the application of a triggering pulse. An adjective referring to the ability of a device to pass only a very limited range of frequencies is a signal. The frequency spectrum usually consists of a single narrow peak. A transducer with a fractional bandwidth less than 15 percent. The region closest to the transducer is called the near field. In contrast to the far field, the near field is characterized by its great inhomogeneity in sound intensity. For a circular transducer, the transition from the near field to the far field occurs approximately at a range of r2/, where r is the radius of the transducer and is the wavelength. Amplification of echo signals arising from structures close to the transducer. These signals tend to be larger than those received from more distant structures because of attenuation in the propagating medium.
longitudinal image plane:
longitudinal resolution: longitudinal wave: M-Mode (motion-mode):
MHz: medium: mirror-image artifact (Doppler):
mirror-image artifact (imaging):
mixer:
monostable: narrowband:
narrowband transducer: near field (Fresnel zone):
near gain:
Glossary G19
Glossary
noise: noise, electrical: normal: Nyquist criterion: Unwanted, and usually random, signals. Noise signals arising within the electrical circuits. At right angles; perpendicular. The criterion that a continuously varying signal can only be unambiguously represented by instantaneous samples if the sampling rate is more than twice the maximum frequency present in the signal. The highest frequency in a sampled signal that can be represented unambiguously: equal to one-half of the sampling frequency. The duration of time that an acoustically coupled transducer is not emitting sound. See on-time. The time in which the transducer is actively emitting sound. The sum of pulse durations during the total time that the transducer is acoustically coupled to the subject or other object of interest. Contrasted with off-time which is the sum of intervals between pulses when the transducer is not electrically driven. Total time = on-time + off-time. Any one of the possible control settings for an operating mode. Any one of the possible imaging modes of an ultrasound instrument. Example are: A-Mode, M-Mode, B-scan, CW Doppler, and pulsed Doppler modes. At right angles; perpendicular. Those portions of a transient signal whose magnitudes are greater than the steady state value. A reflector or mirror that is curved such that all sound emanating from a central focal point will be reflected into a collimated beam leaving the mirror. The reflectors used in the head lamps of automobiles are parabolic mirrors. See sagittal plane. Any relatively small subdivision of matter, ranging in diameter from a few angstroms (as with gas molecules) to a few millimeters (as with large raindrops). In ultrasonics, the particle is usually taken to have homogeneous composition and a diameter which is much less than the wavelengths involved. The instantaneous velocity of a particle, with reference to the medium as a whole, due to the passage of a sound wave.
Nyquist limit: off-time: on-time:
operating condition: operating mode:
orthogonal: overshoot: parabolic mirror:
parasagittal plane: particle:
particle velocity:
peak compressional pressure (pc): The spatial-peak temporal-peak positive pressure amplitude. peak instantaneous intensity: peak intensity: peak rarefactional pressure (pr): See intensity and spatial peak. See intensity and spatial peak. The spatial-peak temporal-peak negative pressure amplitude.
Glossary G20
Glossary
phantom: A passive device which simulates some parameters of a human body, allowing measurements of ultrasound system parameters or visualization of simulated anatomical features. Phantoms are useful for assessing the clinical performance of a diagnostic or therapeutic ultrasound system. The difference between the phase of a sinusoidally varying quantity and the phase of a second quantity which varies sinusoidally at the same frequency. Also know as phase difference. Expressed in degrees or in radians. A signal-processing technique depending on an input signal being available both with its original phase and shifted through 90 degrees of phase angle. A change in the phase of a periodic quantity. The term can be applied to a pulsatile wave for which the phase shift can be approximated as an integral number of cycles of a sinusoidal wave. In passing through tissue, a phase shift can be interpreted as a delay. A transducer configuration which consists of several piezoelectric elements which can be excited independently. Using proper time delays of the excitations, a wavefront of the desired configuration can be synthesized. Phased arrays have been utilized for electronic beam steering and focusing. The property of certain crystals by which mechanical deformation produces an electrical voltage across the crystals, and vice versa. A contraction of picture element. It is the smallest spatial unit or cell size of a digitized, 2-dimensional array representation of an image. Each pixel has an address, or set of x- and y-coordinates corresponding to its position in the array, and a specific brightness level assigned to this position. A wave associated with a unique direction such that the values of the wave parameter (such as acoustic pressure) are identical on any mathematical plane perpendicular to that direction. The time rate of doing work. If one object does work on another, then energy flows to the other: thus, power is sometimes defined as the time rate of energy flow. The unit of power is the watt, and 1 watt = 1 joule per second. A graph showing the relative power of each frequency component contained in a signal. For a Doppler signal, the power spectrum gives the distribution of Doppler shift frequencies present in the signal. An electronic amplifier used prior to the main amplifier. In many instruments, the preamplifier is separated from the rest of the ultrasonic console and located in or near the transducer probe. This provides the shortest possible path from transducer to input circuit and is intended to achieve the best possible signal-to-noise ratio. See acoustic pressure.
phase angle:
phase-quadrature:
phase shift:
phased array:
piezoelectric effect:
pixel:
plane wave:
power:
power spectrum:
preamplifier:
pressure:
Glossary G21
Glossary
pressure waves: pseudo-color: Another name for acoustic waves. An addition of color coding in an image in which the color is artificially encoded rather than existing naturally. Encoding blood flow toward a transducer as red and that away as blue in Doppler flow displays is an example of pseudo-color. A parameter used to quantify the pulsatile nature of a time-varying waveform. Indices of pulsatility are usually ratios of Doppler shift frequencies and are hence independent of Doppler angle. The most common definition of pulsatility index (PI) of a waveform, such as that defined by the maximum Doppler shift frequency, is the difference between the maximum and minimum value divided by the mean value of the waveform over the cardiac cycle. See intensity. The time interval beginning when the absolute value of the acoustic pressure exceeds 31.6% (-10 dB) of the maximum absolute value of the acoustic pressure and ending at the last time the absolute value of acoustic pressure returns to this value. This term is preferable to pulse length. Graph of an echo signal parameter as a function of the position, relative to the transducer, of a well-defined reflector. See echo ranging. The time integral of intensity, for any specific point and pulse, integrated over the time in which the envelope of acoustic pressure or hydrophone signal for the specific pulse is nonzero. For a transducer assembly operating in a non-auto-scanning mode, this is equivalent to the product of temporal average intensity and pulse repetition period. See pulse duration. Particular type of autocorrelation processing in which signals obtained from successive pulses are correlated. The difference between the peak systolic and minimum diastolic pressures in the cardiac cycle. The repetition rate of the transmission pulses of a pulse-echo system; the inverse of the pulse repetition period. Typically, the PRF of a system may be in the range from 1 kHz to 5 kHz. The time interval between corresponding points on the waveform of two successive pulses. The same as pulse repetition frequency. Increase in pulse duration due, for example, to the imposition of a bandwidth limitation. The graphical record of the amplitude of a sound pulse as a function of time.
pulsatility index:
pulse average intensity: pulse duration:
pulse-echo response profile: pulse-echo technique: pulse intensity integral:
pulse length: pulse pair covariance: pulse pressure: pulse repetition frequency (PRF):
pulse repetition period: pulse repetition rate: pulse stretching: pulse waveform:
Glossary G22
Glossary
pulse Doppler (range gated Doppler): Doppler interrogation using a pulsed mode of transmission. Temporal gating of the returning echoes allows determination of the Doppler shift from within a specific region at a known distance from the transducer. This region is known as the sample volume. See lead zirconate titanate. The addition of a layer in front of a transducer with the thickness of the layer equalling one fourth of the acoustic wavelength within it. This layer is intended to result in the maximum transfer of acoustic power to and from the transducer, thus providing the greatest sensitivity. The impedance of the matching layer has to be the geometric mean of the transducer and tissue impedance for maximum power transfer. In more sophisticated transducers, two such layers are sometimes used for improved performance. A naturally occurring crystal with piezoelectric properties formerly used in the construction of transducers. A mode of vibration in a piezoelectric disc in which all particle motions are perpendicular to the axis of symmetry of the disk. It does not contribute to the desired acoustic output of the transducer. Therefore, it is regarded as a parasitic oscillation. The beam cross-sessional area at and parallel to the transducer face consisting of all points where the acoustic pressure is greater than 10 percent of the maximum acoustic pressure in that plane. The area of the active element of the transducer assembly may be taken as an approximation for the radiating cross-sectional area. A frequency within the range utilized in radio broadcasting, namely 10 kHz to 100,000 MHz. In ultrasonics, RF refers to the frequency(ies) of signals from the transducer before detection. Display of the radio frequency signals prior to signal processing. A linearly time varying waveform. For example, the linear time base for an oscilloscope is generated by a ramp. See time gain compensation. An information storage device which permits direct retrieval of any bit of the information. This is the type of memory utilized in a digital computer. See depth. The range of values of a variable over which a change in input produces a change in output. An electronic process in which all echo signals are ignored except for those occurring within a preselected window. This is accomplished using an appropriate time delay circuit to select for analysis a portion of an ultrasound signal according to its depth along the ultrasound beam. See axial resolution.
PZT: quarter wavelength matching:
quartz: radial mode:
radiating cross-sectional area:
radio frequency (RF):
radio frequency presentation: ramp:
random access memory:
range: range, dynamic: range gating:
range resolution:
Glossary G23
Glossary
rarefactions: When a sound beam passes through a medium, the material is compressed in some regions and expanded in other regions. Between the compressed regions, or molecular condensations, are expanded regions in which the molecules are sparse. These sparse regions are called rarefactions. The scanning and display of ultrasonic images at a sufficiently rapid rate that moving structures can be seen to move at their natural rate. Frame rates of 15 frames per second or greater are considered real-time. A display for which the image is continuously renewed, keeping pace with changes in the object, and in which storage or processing time does not delay appreciably the image presentation. Images are renewed at a rate of at least 15 frames per second. The high data rate characteristic of real-time displays results in the continuously updated image analogous to television, so that moving structures, such as the heart valves, can be visualized. The high frame rate is also useful when using the scanning system in the search mode. An ultrasound system providing a real-time display of ultrasonic images. A transducer dedicated to receiving sound. In pulse-echo systems, this device would receive returning echoes. A physical principle stating that transmission characteristics of any sound path are the same in either direction. One application of this concept is that the directivity pattern of a plane piston acting as a transmitting transducer is identical with its directivity pattern when it is acting as a receiving transducer. A multielement transducer array in which the piezoelectric elements are arranged in a rectangular pattern. The rectangular shaped image pattern resulting from a linear sequentially fired transducer array. An electronic processing technique in which all negative valued portions of a signal are made to equal zero. In some cases, the negative portions are included after an inversion in which all negative values are changed to positive ones. An in vivo phenomenon (observed in the chick embryo irradiated with cw ultrasound) wherein the erythrocytes within small vessels stop flowing and collect in the low pressure regions (nodes) of the standing wave field. (Judged not applicable to pulsed diagnostic ultrasound systems). See echo.
real-time:
real-time display:
real-time ultrasonic visualization system: receiving transducer: reciprocity:
rectangular array: rectangular scan format: rectification:
red cell stasis:
reflected acoustic pulse:
Glossary G24
Glossary
reflection: Change in the direction of propagation of a component of a wave that is propagating in one medium and encounters an extended interface with another medium of different acoustic properties. The amplitude of the reflected wave is related to the differences in the densities and speeds of sound of the two media. The angle of the reflection from a plane interface which is large compared to the acoustic wavelength is equal to the angle (between the wave vector and the normal to the interface) of the incident wave. The ratio, r, of the reflected to the incident wave pressure amplitudes for normal incidence on a smooth planar interface between two media. r = (Z2-Z1)/(Z2+Z1), where Z1 and Z2 are the characteristic acoustic impedance of the first and second media, respectively. The ratio, R, of the reflected to the incident wave intensities for normal incidence on a smooth planar interface between two media. R=(Z2-Z1)2/(Z2+Z1)2, where Z1 and Z2 the characteristic acoustic impedances of the first and second media, respectively. A technique which makes use of the reflected acoustic energy to produce the image. Also called echo ranging. The phenomenon of reflection of a wave by a flat, smooth surface large in relation to the wavelength. The capability of reflecting sound. The bending of sound waves as they cross interfaces or boundaries. The phenomenon of changing the direction of propagation as an obliquely incident acoustic wave propagates from a medium of one speed of sound to a second medium of different speed of sound. The ratio of speed of sound within an object to the speed in some reference material. In optics, refractive index is referred to the speed of light in a vacuum. In acoustics, there is no generally accepted reference standard and the immediate surround is usually utilized in calculating the refractive index. In the latter case it is more proper to call this the relative refractive index. A quality of the display related to the accuracy of representation of the position of acoustic targets. It generally refers to display errors produced by refraction, position sensing and computation devices for the B-Mode scanning arm, or inadequacy of the CRT spot in representing the location of echo-producing interfaces. A signal processing technique to improve the apparent signal-to-noise ratio by eliminating low amplitude signals from a display. This technique emphasizes strong echoes at the expense of noise and weaker echoes. A class of processes by which acoustic energy is absorbed in a medium. With steady flow, the resistance is the ratio of pressure drop to flow rate.
reflection coefficient (amplitude):
reflection coefficient (intensity):
reflection mode imaging: reflection, specular: reflectivity: refraction:
refractive index:
registration accuracy:
rejection:
relaxation: resistance, fluid:
Glossary G25
Glossary
resistance index: An index of pulsatility defined as the difference between the maximum and minimum Doppler shifts divided by the maximum. Also known as the Pourcelot index. A measure of the ability of a system to display distinguishable images of two closely spaced point structures as discrete targets. Also see azimuthal resolution, lateral resolution, axial (longitudinal) resolution. The phenomenon of multiple reflections within a closed system. This phenomenon causes echoes to be misplaced, thereby presenting false information. Multiple reflections may be identified in an image by moving the transducer relative to the object. The multiple reflections will move faster than the primary echoes because the primary echoes move a distance on the display which is equivalent to twice the incremental distance, while the first multiple reflection moves a distance equivalent to four times the increment. The square root of the mean value of the square of the wave amplitude. An index of pulsatility defined as the ratio of the maximum (usually the peak systolic) to the minimum (usually the end-diastolic) Doppler shift frequencies. Any one of a set of anterior-posterior planes parallel to the long axis of the body. Sagittal planes not passing through the center of the body are frequently called parasagittal planes. The region in space from which Doppler data are collected for analysis in pulsed/range-gated Doppler systems. The size of the sample volume is axially determined by the length of the transmitted acoustic pulse and the length of the range gate. The width is determined by the lateral width of the ultrasound beam. The angle of incidence between the direction of flow and the direction of sampling within the imaged plane. This angle may be estimated during the Doppler examination. See Doppler frequency shift. See specific absorption rate (SAR). Generally, the relationship between the input and output of a system. In ultrasound diagnosis, it commonly refers to the ratio of the displayed size of an object to the real size of the object. The moving of an acoustic beam to produce an image, for which the ultrasound beam and the display movements are synchronized in space and time. An instrument or memory device to transform pictorial information from one format into another. In diagnostic ultrasound instrumentation, the scan converter takes echo information at the rate and in the sequence that arrives from the transducer and converts and sorts out this information into the correct rate and spatial arrangement for display on a video or oscilloscopic screen.
resolution (spatial):
reverberation:
root mean square (RMS): s-d ratio:
sagittal plane:
sample volume:
sampling angle:
SAR: scale factor:
scan:
scan converter:
Glossary G26
Glossary
scan format: The two dimensional spatial pattern of a sonographic image display. Scan formats include rectangular, sector and trapezoidal types. A B-Mode presentation of the echoes received in a specified direction. B-Mode images are composed of many scan lines. In general, the more scan lines an image has, the more detail that can be portrayed. The repetition rate of a complete frame, sector, or scan. The term applies to automatic scanning systems only. See frame rate. A device that moves an acoustic beam relative to a target. This is accomplished mechanically or electronically using a multielement transducer array. The area, on the surface considered, consisting of all points occurring within the beam cross-sectional area of any beam passing through the surface during the scan. Any instrumentation which provides the ability to obtain ultrasound scans. Any directional change in all or part of an ultrasound beam due to the existence of inhomogeneity in density and/or speed of sound in the propagating medium. An object which causes scattering. See scatter. The production of scatter. See scatter. Optimizing the position and orientation of the scanning unit to visualize structures of interest. An area having the shape of a piece of pie. A system of scanning in which the transducer or transmitted beam is rotated through an angle. The pie- or sector-shaped image pattern resulting from a sector scan. See time gain compensation. An information storage device which requires the sequential interrogation of information in the device until the sought-after information is obtained. A magnetic tape is such a device. Compare to random access memory. Reduction in echo amplitudes distal to a strongly attenuating or reflecting structure. A stress in which the material on one side of a surface drags on the material on the other side of the surface with a force which is parallel to the surface. In a fluid, the name given to a force acting in the direction of flow, tending to change the velocity between adjacent laminae.
scan line:
scan repetition rate: scanner:
scan cross-sectional area (for auto-scanning systems): scanning system: scatter:
scatterer: scattering: search mode: sector: sector scan: sector scan format: sensitivity time control (STC): sequential access storage:
shadowing: shear stress:
Glossary G27
Glossary
shock excitation: A manner of transducer excitation in which a very short electrical impulse is applied to the transducer for the purpose of generating a short sound pulse. A parameter characterizing the degree of nonlinearity in the propagation of an ultrasound beam. A value of less than one would indicate a linear condition and a value above three would indicate a marked nonlinear condition. A cardiac scan in which the scanning plane is at right angles to the long axis of the heart (base to apex). The components of a signal whose frequencies are either above (upper sideband) or below (lower sideband) the frequency of the transmitted (carrier) signal. Secondary beam generated by a transducer and which deviates from the direction of the main beam. Usually the maximum intensity of the side lobe is significantly less than that of the main lobe. The presence of side lobes may be responsible for introducing artifactual echoes into an ultrasound image. That component of a varying electrical voltage or current which contains information, as opposed to containing noise. The ratio of the amplitude of a signal to that of noise. The larger the signal-noise ratio, the easier it is to detect and measure a signal. The sensitivity of any device is ultimately limited by the signal-noise ratio. The S/N ratio is usually expressed in decibels. A scan mode (in a static B-scanner) in which the transducer is passed only once over the tissue to be examined. This scan mode may be used where relative motion of tissue could be expected and where this motion would obscure the desired detail. The term sonar is the generic term for echo ranging. Acronym from sound navigation ranging. An adjective relating to sound. See echoencephalography. The pictorial record of an ultrasound examination. A highly skilled professional qualified by technological education to provide patient services using diagnostic ultrasound under the supervision of a doctor of medicine or osteopathy. Sonographers assist physicians in performing ultrasound examinations and gathering sonographic data necessary to reach diagnostic decisions. Any imaging method using sound and yielding an image or a graphical representation of the subject. This is a more inclusive term than echography in as much as transmission sonography is also included. A misnomer for transonic or anechoic.
shock parameter ():
short axis scan: sideband:
side lobe:
signal (electrical): signal-noise ratio (S/N):
single sweep scan:
sonar: sonic: sonoencephalograph: sonogram: sonographer:
sonography:
sonolucent:
Glossary G28
Glossary
sonopaque: sound: A misnomer for a region on a B-scan completely filled in with echoes. Vibrational energy that propagates through a medium. Liquids and gases support longitudinal (compressional) waves. Solids will support other vibrational modes in addition to longitudinal waves. The deviation from the ambient value of the pressure in a medium due to the presence of an acoustic wave. It usually refers to the peak instantaneous wave pressure, but also may be the general instantaneous, or root-mean-square (RMS) pressure. The pressure amplitude of an acoustic wave may be measured with a linear device such as a hydrophone. See speed of sound. The origin of the wave in question: for example, the transmitting transducer or the surface or object reflecting or scattering the wave. Refers to the value of wave intensity averaged over the beams cross-sectional area. An abbreviated form of spatial-average temporal-average intensity. Generally, this parameter is used when specifying a continuous waveform. See this entry under intensity.
sound pressure amplitude:
sound propagation speed: source:
spatial-average intensity:
spatial-average pulse-average intensity (SAPA):
spatial-average temporal-average See this entry under intensity. intensity (SATA): spatial-peak pulse average intensity (SPPA): spatial-peak temporal-average intensity (SPTA): spatial-peak temporal-peak intensity (SPTP): specific absorption rate (SAR): specific acoustic impedance: See this entry under intensity. See this entry under intensity. See this entry under intensity. The rate at which energy is absorbed per unit mass of tissue. SAR is expressed in units of watts per kilogram. The ratio of instantaneous acoustic pressure to instantaneous particle velocity. For a plane progressive wave in a lossless medium, the specific acoustic impedance is numerically equal to the characteristic acoustic impedance. The granular appearance of an ultrasound image due to the coherent addition (i.e., constructive and destructive interference) of detected echo signals arising from randomly distributed scatterers within a sample volume. The width of the Doppler spectrum on a sonogram display corresponds to the range of Doppler shift frequencies present at a given time. Spectral broadening will be seen when this range is increased. It occurs, for example, when laminar flow changes to turbulent flow.
speckle:
spectral broadening:
Glossary G29
Glossary
spectral width: spectrum: See bandwidth. The distribution of the amplitude (and sometimes phase) of the components of the wave as a function of frequency. The set of frequencies, wavelengths or related quantities involved in an ultrasonic pulse or electronic signal. Reflection of sound energy from a smooth surface which is large compared to the wavelength. In contrast to diffuse reflection from rough surfaces, specular reflection implies that the angle of reflection equals the angle of incidence. Distance traveled per unit of time. The speed at which sound travels through a material. The speed of sound is a property of a material. In a fluid medium, sound speed is determined by the properties of the propagation medium: c= (K/p), where p is the mean density of the medium and K is the adiabatic bulk modulus. Also called sound propagation speed.
specular reflection:
speed: speed of sound:
spherical wave: standing-wave field:
A wave which emanates from a point source and propagates evenly in all directions producing a spherical wave front. The occurrence in a medium of two sound waves of equal magnitude and frequency but traveling in opposite directions. This results in a pattern of stationary pressure peaks and nodes occurring at half wavelength intervals. In this situation, there is no net flow of acoustic energy. The stable existence of a situation stable enough to allow variations with time to be neglected. The local narrowing of a vessel lumen, usually as the result of a disease process. Pertaining to three-dimensional viewing. The change in shape of a structure due to an imposed stress. The strain is termed elastic if the material returns to its original shape after removal of the stress. The strain is called plastic if the material does not return to its original shape. A line which is everywhere parallel to the direction of fluid flow at a given instant. A principle stating that if a linear physical system is acted upon by a number of independent influences, the resultant response is the sum of the responses from each of the influences acting individually. The elimination of undesired noise from the desired signal. Rejection eliminates weak signals below a threshold level. Logarithmic amplification suppresses large signals relative to weak ones. Squaring the signals suppresses weak signals relative to strong ones.
steady state: stenosis: stereoscopic: strain:
streamline: super position principle:
suppression:
Glossary G30
Glossary
swept gain: The process by which the gain of a pulse-echo system is varied with time to compensate for the effects of attenuation; also see gain compensation or attenuation compensation. The pumping portion of the cardiac cycle during which the aortic valve is open. Identifiable from the Doppler waveform as the period from the foot of the velocity pulse to the dicrotic notch. See window, systolic. A scatterer or ensemble of scatterers giving rise to a signal within the effective ultrasonic beam. Pertaining to time. See this entry under intensity. See this entry under intensity. A simple device for the evaluation of one or more parameters of an ultrasound system. In distinction to a phantom it does not necessarily duplicate the acoustical properties of the human body. It usually contains wires and possible other targets giving rise to echoes in response to an ultrasonic pulse. See phantom. The speckle pattern arising from an area of interest in the body. The pattern depends primarily upon the transducer frequency and beam characteristics, and secondarily upon the structure of the scattering tissues. The computed angle subtended by two far field, off-axis points in a plane containing the beam axis, where the computed quantity (specify pressure, velocity or intensity) is at its first null (or some other specified value) of its axial magnitude; the angular beam width is computed on the basis of continuous excitation unless otherwise specified. Energy due to random molecular motion. The process of imaging by transmitting the sound pulse through the specimen and receiving the transmitted energy on a far surface or a receiving transducer or array. See holography and transsonogram. A device which moves the fluorescent spot repetitively across the screen of the cathode-ray tube. See time-gain compensation. The time required for a device or process to fall to 36.8% of its initial level following an excitation. Increase in receiver gain with time to compensate for loss in echo amplitude, usually due to attenuation, with depth. See depth compensation, ramp, attenuation compensation and swept gain.
systole:
systolic window: target: temporal: temporal average intensity: temporal peak intensity: test object:
texture pattern of echoes:
theoretical angular beam width:
thermal energy: through-transmission imaging:
time base: time-compensated gain: time constant: time-gain compensation (TGC):
Glossary G31
Glossary
time interval histogram: A kind of frequency spectral display in which the signal is displayed as a histogram representing the frequency of occurrence of a spectrum of bands of zero crossing frequencies. A material possessing acoustic propagation properties such as speed of sound, scatter and attenuation, similar to those of tissue. This type of material is often used in the construction of phantoms. Synonym for M-Mode. A method of imaging in which the contents of a tree-dimensional slice of the patient are portrayed as a two-dimensional image. Most contemporary ultrasound imaging is a form of tomopraphy. A transducer used both for transmission and reception of acoustic energy. This is the customary configuration in diagnostic ultrasonography. The ratio of the voltage amplitude of the energizing pulse to the resulting voltage amplitude corresponding to the echo from a perfect-planar reflector at a specified distance. A device capable of converting energy from one form to another. Specifically in ultrasonics, the device used to convert electrical energy to mechanical energy and, reciprocally, to convert mechanical energy to electrical energy. If the device is used only to transmit or to receive, the device should be referred to as the transmitting or receiving transducer. If, in the application, the device performs both functions, the term may be left unqualified, or called a transceiver. A group of transducers working together to form a functional unit. Arrays may be of several types, depending on the transducer configuration; linear, annular, rectangular, etc. The portion of a fully assembled ultrasonic diagnostic product which is designed to emit and/or receive ultrasonic radiation and which includes one or more ultrasonic transducers and any associated electronic circuitry and housing. A transducer assembly is attached to an ultrasound console by means of its cable. The ratio of ultrasonic output power from a transmitting transducer to the electrical input power. Also, the ratio of electrical output power from a receiving transducer to the ultrasonic input power. These ratios need not be equal. A piece of piezoelectric material in a transducer assembly.
tissue-mimicking material:
T-M mode: tomography:
transceiver:
transceiver voltage response:
transducer:
transducer array:
transducer assembly:
transducer efficiency:
transducer element:
Glossary G32
Glossary
transducer ring-down: The time course of the amplitude decay of oscillation of a shock-excited transducer. When an ultrasonic transducer is used in the pulsed mode, it is shock-excited by a voltage spike which puts energy into the resonant mechanical system of the transducer. This energy is dissipated by the combination of the viscous damping in the transducer, the acoustic load at the front and back of the transducer, and the dynamic damping provided by the trailing edge of the excitation. The resulting damped oscillation has been referred to by some authors as ring-down. The total damping provides for improved axial resolution by shortening the pulse duration. A mathematical formula used to characterized a system. It is the ratio of output frequency spectrum to input frequency spectrum and therefore permits the prediction of the output of any linear system for any given input. A pulsed, damped oscillation or other temporary phenomenon occurring in a system prior to reaching a steady-state condition. The spectral broadening that occurs as a consequence of the movement of scatterers through a Doppler sample volume. The smaller the sample volume, the greater the transit time broadening. That portion of the acoustic field between the Fresnel zone (near field) and the Fraunhofer zone (far field) which encompasses the last maximum occurring along the beam axis. The transition zone has no distinct boundaries but frequently is taken to be centered at the position of the last axial maximum. For a plane piston source, this position is given by r2/ where r is the transducer radius and is the acoustic wavelength in the medium. A general term implying passage of energy through a material. The production of an image by analysis of sound which completely traverses the body and is detected by a second transducer located on the opposite side. The acoustic pulse transmitted from the transducer into the medium following the application of an energizing pulse. The complex signal shown on an A-Mode display upon application of the energizing pulse; the beam being directed into a homogeneous medium such as degassed water. It includes effects such as those caused by receiver overload and reflections within the transducer assembly (transducer ring-down). See energizing pulse. A transducer dedicated to transmitting sound. Describes a region of a relatively unattenuating medium. A distinction should be made between a transonic region and a shadowing region; generally, this is done by observing the back boundary and underlying structures. See anechoic. Acoustic image obtained using a through-transmission method. Disorganized or chaotic fluid flow.
transfer function:
transient: transit time broadening:
transition zone:
transmission: transmission imaging:
transmitted acoustic pulse: transmitter complex:
transmitter pulse: transmitting transducer: transonic:
transsonogram: turbulence:
Glossary G33
Glossary
two-dimensional echocardiography: UCT: B-Mode imaging of the heart. An acronym for ultrasound computed tomography in which the image is reconstructed by computer in a manner analogous to conventional x-ray CT reconstruction. Pertaining to sound at frequencies higher than that which can be detected by the human ear. Usually refers to sound with a frequency greater than 20 kHz. A short burst of ultrasound which is transmitted into the body by a pulse echo ultrasound instrument. See acoustic shadow. A device that converts ultrasonic energy into an electrical signal and vice versa. See transducer. Any image obtained from ultrasonic examination methods. The term may be qualified by adjectives appropriate to the field of application. The term includes both echograms and transsonograms. Sound at frequencies above the range of human (conventionally, above 20 kHz). An ultrasonic method for the estimation of volume flow rate in single vessels. The average value of the product of the spatial mean velocity and the cross-sectional area is calculated over several cardiac cycles. A waveform which has either positive or negative excursions from the baseline but not both. A unipolar waveform can be produced by rectification of radio frequency signals. Quantity defined with both the magnitude and the direction. Velocity is a vector quantity: the Doppler shift frequency is determined by the magnitude of the component of the velocity vector along a line between the source and receiver of sound. A vector, the magnitude of which is speed of a moving object and the direction is that in which the object is moving. The flow velocity at which the Reynolds number attains its critical value and the onset of turbulence occurs. The rate of change of velocity with position. With steady laminar flow, this gradient is usually in a radial direction. The term velocity implies both direction and speed; the term speed of sound should be used where direction is of no concern. See speed of sound. The variation of velocity with radial position for flow in a tube. A modification of the parabolic flow profile which is commonly encountered in physiological circumstances. The central laminae move at almost one velocity.
ultrasonic:
ultrasonic pulse: ultrasonic shadow: ultrasonic transducer: ultrasonogram:
ultrasound: uniform insonation method:
unipolar pulse or waveform:
vector:
velocity: velocity, critical: velocity gradient: velocity of sound:
velocity profile: velocity profile, blunted:
Glossary G34
Glossary
velocity profile, parabolic: The form of the velocity profile found with idealized Poiseuillian flow. The parabolic flow profile has the special property that the average velocity across the vessel is exactly one-half of the maximum velocity in the center stream. The rectified and often filtered echo signals in an ultrasonic imaging system generally are referred to as video signals by analogy with television nomenclature. The tendency of a fluid to resist deformation, such as that required to maintain laminar flow. Viscous forces have their origin in the internal cohesion of the fluid. A flow with streamlines of finite length and having no ends (as in a whirlpool). Vortices are often seen in area of flow separation and disturbance. The rotating flow of a vortex comprises a wide range of velocities, aligned in both directions along a line passing through its center. Doppler shifts from a vortex are thus characterized by spectral broadening and simultaneous forward and reverse flow. A strong, low-frequency clutter signal tending to obscure the Doppler frequency spectrum of interest, arising from motion of the walls of a blood vessel. A filter in a Doppler system which rejects echo information from low-velocity reflectors such as stationary or slow-moving tissue. This filtering is needed to keep high-amplitude tissue echoes from saturating the Doppler receiver, masking very-low-amplitude echoes from flowing blood. A situation in which part or all of a technique is performed under water. The unit of power. 1 watt = 1 joule per second.
video signal:
viscosity:
vortex:
wall thump:
wall (thump) filter:
water immersion: watt (W):
watt per square centimeter (W/cm2): A unit of intensity. 1 W/cm2 =104 W/m2. wave: waveform: wavefront: wavelength: wave reflection: See acoustic wave. The graphical representation of an acoustical or electrical parameter as a function of time. An imaginary surface passing through all particles that are in the same phase of vibration within a propagating sound wave. See acoustic wavelength. As the velocity pulse of blood flow travels along the arterial tree, reflections, consisting of waves traveling in a proximal direction, occur at discontinuities of fluid impedance, mainly at branch points. The velocity of propagation of a pulse, here of pressure and velocity along the arterial tree. This velocity varies from about 5 m/s in the aorta to about 5 cm/s in small vessels.
wave velocity:
Glossary G35
Glossary
wideband: An adjective referring to the ability of a device to pass a very wide range of frequencies in a signal. Wideband also refers to a single which contains frequency components distributed over a wide range. A relatively single-free area between the arterial Doppler shift signal and the baseline during the systolic portion of a Doppler spectral display. The window tends to be obliterated by turbulent flow. An electrical circuit that detects the frequency at which the value of a time-varying signal crosses zero. Abbreviation for micrometer. This name is the preferred term and replaces the older term micron.
window, systolic:
zero-crossing counter:
mm:
Glossary G36
Video Cassette Recorder Operating Instructions

Operating Manuals
To use the LOGIQ 400 ultrasound system and video cassette recorder (VCR) safely and properly, read this appendix and the SVO-9500MD VCR Operating Manual.
Recording
When making important recordings, always make a trial recording in advance to ensure normal video and audio recording. GE Medical Systems is not responsible for compensation for a recording failure resulting from a problem in the VCR or video tape during its use.
Cassette tapes
Use S-VHS video cassette tapes.
VTRPB function
To use a search function in the LOGIQ 400 system, the optional VTR-PB function is required. For details of the VTR-PB function, contact the nearest GE Distributor, Affiliate or Sales Representative.
VCR Operation H1
VCR Operating Instructions

VCR Operation H2
Introduction of VCR Features

Remote Control Function
Allows the LOGIQ 400 to remote control the following VCR functions: 4. Ext Video (for switching between the scan image and video image modes) 5. Play (playback) 6. Stop 7. Pause 8. Record 9. FF (fast forward) 10. REW (rewind) 11. FWD SEARCH (fastforward search: forward speed is variable from 1/30 time to 10 times the normal playback speed) 12. REV SEARCH (reverse search: reverse speed is variable from 1/30 time to 10 times the normal playback speed) 13. FREEZE 14. FRAME SHIFT (frame forward/frame reverse)
Frameforward search
When VCR image playback is paused, each time FRAME SHIFT is pressed, the VCR will advance or rewind the paused playback image one frame.
Variablespeed search function

When VCR image playback is paused, holding down FRAME SHIFT allows the playback speed to vary from 1/30 time to 10 times the normal playback rate.
VCR Operation H3
Tape search function

Allows the search of a tape number based on a patient name or scan date. The VCR allows a maximum of 2,600 tapes to be registered or searched. The optional VTRPB function is required.
Image search function

Allows the advanced search of examination images based on a patient name, ID or scan date. The VCR allows a maximum of 39patient examination images in each video tape to be searched. The optional VTRPB function is required.
Saving of data to be searched

Writing the data to be searched to a video tape and saving it on a hard drive allows another LOGIQ 400 to perform an image search as well. The optional VTRPB function is required.
Playback with measurements

Images recorded by the LOGIQ 400 or LOGIQ 700 allow a variety of frozen-image measurements and calculations including the measurement of distance, area, circumference, and other factors.
Image processing
Allows the writing of comments or display of a body pattern on VCR playback images.
VCR Operation H4
Safety
Operating Precautions
Applicable VCR
The Sony SVO-9500 MD is the only VCR recommended by GE as a LOGIQ 400-connectable recording device. The Sony SVO-9500 MD requires an interface/metal fitting kit for installation on the CRT or console shelf. Commercially available VCRs do not have a dedicated interface kit; therefore, the LOGIQ 400 cannot support their remote control. For more information, contact a GE Distributor, Affiliate or Sales Representative.
Installation
The VCR must be properly installed in an approved configuration using the dedicated VCR metal fittings to prevent accidents such as the VCR falling over, and to prevent electromagnetic interference. Metal-fittings must be installed by a qualified service engineer.
Power supply
To power the VCR, plug the power cable supplied with the VCR into the power outlet for peripherals on the rear panel of the LOGIQ 400. Do not use a power cable other than the power cable supplied with the VCR. Do not plug in the power cable to an outlet other than the power outlet for peripherals.
VCR Operation H5

Connections
Always use the cables supplied with the VCR to connect the VCR to the LOGIQ 400. Do not use any other cables. When the VCR is connected to the LOGIQ 400, do not connect any VCR options, such as the remote control unit, indicator unit and microphone.
Prohibition of modifications
The video cassette recorder, metal-fittings, power cable and connection cables must not be modified in any way. Only the specified connections should be made.
Prevention of Electromagnetic Interference

The LOGIQ 400 and the recommended peripherals, which are approved by GEMS, will meet Voluntary Control for Interference electronics Medical equipment (VCIM) standards established by Electronic Industries Association of Japan (EIAJ) for interference waves generated from a medical electronic device, provided that they are properly installed and connected using the specified connection cables. Using the equipment under any other conditions may interfere with the receiving capability of radios, television sets and other equipment. The LOGIQ 400 and VCR must be properly operated and used in accordance with the LOGIQ 400 User Manual and VCR Operating Instructions.
Operation of the VCR

For the detailed operation of the VCR, see the SVO-9500MD Operating Manual provided for the VCR.
VCR Operation H6
Setting Up the VCR

VCR Part Names and Functions/Settings
Part Names and Functions of the VCR Front Panel
(2)
(22) (10) (11) (12)
(3)
(9)
(13)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(14) (15) (16)
(1)
(17), (18), (19), (20)
Illustration 501. VCR Front Panel
1. POWER switch. Setting fixed to ON. The POWER switch must always be in the ON position (recessed).
.
t
2. Cassette inlet. 3. EJECT button. Press this button to eject a video cassette tape from the VCR.
NOTE: The EJECT function cannot be remote controlled from the LOGIQ 400. To eject a video cassette tape from the recorder, press <EJECT> on the VCR front panel.
4. STOP button (remote control only).
VCR Operation H7
(21)

Part Names and Functions of the VCR Front Panel (contd)
5. REW (rewind) button/LED (light emitting diode) (remote control only). The REW LED lights up during rewinding. 6. PLAY (playback) button/LED (remote control only). The PLAY LED lights up during playback. 7. F FWD (fast forward) button/LED (remote control only). The F FWD LED lights up during fast-forward operation. 8. PAUSE button/LED (remote control only). The PAUSE LED lights up during pause. 9. REC (record) button/LED (remote control only). The REC LED lights up during recording. 10. MONITOR (Need not be set). 11. AUDIO (Setting fixed to HiFi). 12. HiFi (Setting fixed to ON). 13. TRACKING control (Setting fixed to FIXED). 14. REMOTE terminal (Disabled). 15. FOOT SWITCH terminal (Disabled). 16. MIC (microphone) terminal (Disabled). 17. REV SEARCH (reverse search) button/LED (remote control only). The REV SEARCH LED lights up during a reverse search. 18. FWD SEARCH (forward search) button/LED (remote control only). The FWD SEARCH LED lights up during a forward search. 19. BLANK SEARCH button (Disabled). 20. FREEZE button (remote control only). The FREEZE LED lights up during freezing. 21. PROGRAM switch (Setting fixed to OFF). 22. MARK IN A, B buttons (Disabled).
NOTE: If the setting of a switch is fixed, do not change it. Functions in 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 17, 18, and 20 above are the only functions available by remote control from the LOGIQ 400.
VCR Operation H8

Part Names and Functions of the VCR Front Panel (contd)
(23)
(24)
NOTE: If the setting of a switch is fixed, do not change it.

(25) (26) (27) (28)
Illustration 502. VCR Front Panel Indicators
23. Indicator block

Indicators Description Lights up when a video cassette tape is in the VCR. AUTO OFF Lights up if there is condensation in the VCR. If this indicator lights up, no cassette tape can be inserted into the recorder. Lights up when a video cassette tape is recorded or played back in the S-VHS mode. Lights up during an index marker recording.
S-VHS MARK
24. TAPE REMAIN (remaining volume of tape) indicator. Indicates the percentage of tape volume remaining. If almost 100% of a video cassette tape is recordable, all five indicators will light up. 25. CTL/MENU switch (Setting fixed to CTL). 26. INDEX LED. Lights up during a patient image search or index search. 27. Time counter display. Indicates taperunning time in hours, minutes, and seconds. 28. RESET button (Disabled).
VCR Operation H9

Part Names and Functions of the VCR Rear Panel
(1) (2) (4) (5) (6)
(10)
INDICATE
(9)
(7)
VCR Operation H10
(3)
(8)
Illustration 503. VCR Rear Panel
1. AUDIO IN (audio input) CH1/L and CH2/R terminals. Connect these terminals to the Video Out Audio terminals on the LOGIQ 400. 2. VIDEO IN (video input) terminals. Connect these terminals to the Video Out SVideo terminals on the LOGIQ 400. 3. 75W terminator switch (Setting fixed to ON). 4. AUDIO OUT (audio output) CH1/L and CH2/R terminals. Connect these terminals to the Video In Audio terminals on the LOGIQ 400. 5. MONITOR OUT (monitor output) terminal (Disabled). 6. VIDEO OUT (video output) terminals. Connect these terminals to the Video In SVideo terminals on the LOGIQ 400. 7. AC IN (AC power input) terminal. Connect this power inlet to a power outlet for peripherals on the rear panel of the LOGIQ 400 using the cable supplied with the VCR.
(11)
MONITOR OUT

Part Names and Functions of the VCR Rear Panel (contd)
8. Ground terminal (Disabled). 9. INDICATE (indicator) terminal (Disabled).
(11)
(10)
Illustration 504. VCR Rear Panel (RS232 Terminal & Dip Switch)
10. RS232C (remote control) terminal. Connect this terminal to the VCR/Color Printer Port A or B on the LOGIQ 400 rear panel. The proper port must be selected in the Set Up/System Parameters page 5 menu. 11. DIP switch (Settings fixed). When the VCR is connected to the LOGIQ 400 for use, do not change the settings of the DIP switch. Settings: SW1: SW2: SW3: SW4: SW5: SW6: OFF (down) OFF (down) OFF (down) OFF (down) ON (up) OFF (down)
.
t
Remote/local switch
NOTE: If the VCR is disconnected from the LOGIQ 400, set SW4 to ON (up).

VCR Operation H11

Connecting the VCR to the LOGIQ 400
Connect the cables from the VCR to the LOGIQ 400 by referring to the VCR Part Names and Functions/Settings in the previous section and the following connection diagram.
Illustration 505. VCR Connection Diagram
VCR Operation H12

Setting up the LOGIQ 400
After the VCR is connected to the LOGIQ 400, the LOGIQ 400 must also be set up. Select the top menu Set Up from the software menu and select System Parameters.
On page 5 of the System Parameters menu, set Port A or Port B to VCR. Then select SAVE to exit the menu.
NOTE: After changing the setting, turn OFF the system power switch, then restart the system.
For reference, see Customizing Your System in Volume 2 of the LOGIQ 400 User Manual.
Illustration 506. LOGIQ 400 System Parameters Menu Page 5
VCR Operation H13

VCR Operation H14
Starting the VCR
VCR Start-Up
NOTE: If an alphanumeric character (such as y and n) needs to be typed in during the VCR operation, the system must not be in the Blue Shift mode. If the Blue Shift key is lit up, press Blue Shift to cancel the Blue Shift mode.
After all connections and setups are completed, the VCR can be started and will be recognized. The operation flow from the moment the LOGIQ 400 Power/Stand-by switch is turned on to the moment the VCR is set is summarized as follows:
Checking Switches
POWER
Check that the LOGIQ 400 Power/Stand-by switch is in the Off/Stand-by position and that the VCR Power switch is in the ON (recessed) position. At this time, the VCR power will still be off. If the switch is lit, the VCR power cable has been connected to an outlet other than the power outlet for peripherals on the rear panel of the LOGIQ 400.
NOTE: For safety reasons, always connect the VCR power cable to the power outlet for peripherals on the rear panel of the LOGIQ 400.
VCR Operation H15

Power On
Turn the LOGIQ 400 system power on.
Status Icon Display

When the VCR has been correctly connected and set up, the VCR status icon EJECT ( ) will appear at the bottom left corner of the monitor upon completion of startup. If the VCR status icon has not appeared, check that the port setting in the LOGIQ 400 System Parameters menu page 5 has been set to VCR. If the stop status icon ( ) has appeared instead of the VCR status icon EJECT, a video tape is in the VCR. So that the system will recognize the tape ID, eject the tape from the recorder. The Ext Video key on the control panel will be partially lit. If Ext Video is fully lit, the VCR video mode has been selected. Press Ext Video to switch to the scan image mode. If Ext Video is not lit, the video tape or VCR has not been recognized. If a video tape has already been inserted, eject it from the recorder and check the tape. When using a new Tape, proceed to Registering a New Tape on page VCR Operation H25.
VCR Operation H16
As soon as the system power is turned on, power will be fed simultaneously to the VCR which will light up the VCR Power switch. Check to ensure the power switch on the VCR panel is lit. If not, check the following in order: 1. Check that the Power switch is in the ON (recessed) position. 2. Check that the power cable is properly connected.
NOTE: If power is still not being fed to the VCR after checking 1 and 2, the VCR may be defective. Contact an authorized service personnel.

Tape insertion
Insert a registered video tape into the VCR. When a tape has been inserted, the VCR automatically rewinds it up to the tape header so that the system can read and collate the tape ID. When rewinding is completed, the VCR will play it back to read the tape ID. When the tape ID has been verified, the following message appears at the bottom of the monitor.
System ID = #####, Tape ID = ##### After confirming the ID, the VCR automatically fast forwards the tape to the position of the tape when it was first inserted.
NOTE: The time required for ID recognition and collation will differ depending on the tape position upon insertion. It usually takes at least one and half minutes. Do not press any key until ID collation is completed.
Checking Pause/Record
When collation is completed, the Pause/Record key on the control panel is partially lit. If the Pause/Record key is not lit, the tape has not been recognized. The message: Cannot read Tape ID. Register the new tape?(y/n) appears at the bottom of the monitor. The inserted tape may be a new tape or unregistered tape. If it is a new tape, type in y and proceed to Registering a New Tape. See VCR Operation H25 for details. In all other cases, type in n and try to read the tape again.
VCR Operation H17

Start-Up Final Check
If all the steps have been successfully completed up to this point, the monitor and control panel status will be as follows: 1. Ext Video on the control panel is partially lit. 2. Pause/Record on the control panel is partially lit . 3. The monitor shows the stop VCR status icon ( ) and the VCR counter at the bottom left corner of the screen. If these conditions have not yet been established, verify the procedure in Starting the VCR again.
VCR Operation H18
VCR Status Icon

The VCR status icon will indicate the operation status of the VCR. The icons are displayed at the bottom left corner of the monitor screen. VCR STATUS ICON Tape Eject Stop Record DESCRIPTION A video tape has not yet been inserted Operation has stopped Recording in progress
Record & Pause Recording has been paused Fast Forward Rewind Fast forwarding Rewinding
During the display of a VCR playback image, the icon (q) indicating a recorded image appears on the monitor.
VCR Counter Display

The VCR counter display next to the status icon shows the following information:
M M
S F
S F
+ . . . + (PLUS) / (MINUS) H . . . HOUR M. . . MINUTE S . . . SECOND F . . . FRAME NUMBER
Illustration 507. VCR Counter Display
VCR Operation H19
VCR Operations
The keys used for remote control of the VCR are as follows:
"
.
Ext Video
Illustration 508. VCR Remote Control (Control Panel/Keyboard)
NOTE: A video tape is ejected from the recorder using the EJECT key on the front panel of the VCR.
Control Panel
Allows the selection of the video (VCR playback image) mode or scan image mode. When the video mode is activated, the image displayed on the monitor is switched from scan image to VCR image. The Ext Video key is fully lit in the video mode. Under the condition in which the video mode can be activated, Ext Video is partially lit. If the video mode cannot be activated, Ext Video is not lit. To return to the scan image mode, press Exit Video again. Pressing Exit Video when the VCR is recording stops the recording. Pressing Exit Video when the VCR is playing back a tape stops the playback and selects the scan image mode.
NOTE: A video tape must be inserted into or ejected from the recorder in the scan image mode. The Cine function cannot be activated in the video mode.
VCR Operation H20

Mic This is a microphone-activating switch. Press this key to simultaneously record anything spoken in the vicinity of the console during a recording. The microphone is located on the bottom right side of the monitor.
.
Stop/Play
NOTE: Doppler audio will be recorded even if the Mic key is not activated.
Used to begin VCR playback or stop VCR operation. Pressing the Stop/Play key while the VCR status icon is in a stop condition ( ) begins playback.
J "
.
Control Z
Pressing Stop/Play key while the VCR is operating stops the current VCR operation, changing the VCR status icon to . Stopping playback in the video mode (changing to eliminates the image from the monitor.
J)
NOTE: In the scan image mode, pressing Stop/Play to begin playback while the VCR status icon is selects the external video mode automatically.
If the heading function (service software) is turned OFF, the VCR tape counter can be reset by pressing Control Z. If the heading function is turned ON to enable other VCR controls, Control Z will NOT reset the counter
VCR Operation H21

Pause/Record Used to begin a recording or pause operation. In the scan image mode, pressing the Pause/Record key while the VCR status icon is starts the recording process.
. .
When recording starts, the tape position, patient name, patient ID, and date are recorded in the system as data to be searched.
NOTE: Recording is not possible in a system other than the system on which the tape was registered. (The Pause/Record key does not light up for any system other than the system on which the tape was registered.)
q Pressing Pause/Record while the VCR is recording pauses the recording. Pressing Pause/Record when the VCR recording is paused cancels the pause and resumes the recording.
NOTE: When a recording resumes, the tape position (index) and patient information will be re-recorded in the system. A single tape can record up to 39 indexes. It is recommended that recording not be paused (or stopped) unnecessarily to ensure effective utilization of a video tape.
Pressing Pause/Record while the VCR is operating pauses the recording or playback. Fast forward or rewind cannot be paused. (Fast-forward search/Reverse search can be paused.) Pressing Pause/Record when the VCR operation is paused cancels the pause and resumes the VCR operation.
VCR Operation H22

Freeze Enables or disables the freezing of a VCR playback image.
"A
In the scan image mode, pressing the Freeze key stops image acquisition. To perform VCR playback with measurements, press Freeze while a VCR image is being played back or VCR image playback is paused. This freezes the VCR image.
. .
Blue
NOTE: When a VCR image is frozen, Cine playback is not available.
Blue Shift (Blue Shift mode) To use the VCR control keys on the keyboard, press the Blue Shift key to activate the Blue Shift mode (LED is lit up).
NOTE: To register a new tape or enter patient information, the Blue Shift mode must be deactivated.
FF (Fast forward/fastforward search) Pressing the FF key while the VCR is stopped or rewinding will activate fast forward. A tape may also be fast forwarded in the scan image mode. To stop fast forward, press Stop/Play. Pressing FF while the VCR is playing, reverse searching or paused will activate a fast-forward search. To cancel the fast-forward search and return to normal playback, press FF again.
VCR Operation H23

Rev (Reverse/reverse search) Pressing the Rev key while the VCR is stopped or fast forwarding will begin reverse. Tape reverse is also possible in the scan image mode. To stop reverse, press Stop/Play. Pressing Rev while the VCR is playing, fast-forward searching or paused will activate a reverse search. To cancel the reverse search and return to normal playback, press Rev again. Frame Shift (frame forward/frame reverse) Pressing a Frame Shift key once when VCR playback is paused or fast-forward search/reverse search is paused will begin frame forward/frame reverse. Holding down Frame Shift while VCR playback is paused or fast-forward search/reverse search is paused changes the playback speed of fast-forward search/reverse search. Releasing the Frame Shift will return the image to the pause status. Record End Function (Rec-End) With the heading function turned ON (service software), the Rec-End function moves the tape to the position at the end of the last recording. If the heading function is turned OFF, recording can be started at any position on the tape.
VCR Operation H24
Registering a New Tape

To perform the image search functions described later with the LOGIQ 400 system, the video tape to be recorded must be registered in the system in advance. To register a new video tape:
Power on
Turn the LOGIQ 400 system power on.
Checking the scan mode

Check if the system is in the scan image mode. Check that the screen displayed on the monitor is a normal live image and that Ext Video on the control panel is partially lit. If Ext Video is fully lit, press Ext Video to select the scan image mode. If Ext Video is not lit, conduct a check in accordance with Starting the VCR on page VCR Operation H15.
When the VCR has been correctly connected and set up, the VCR status icon EJECT ( ) appears at the bottom left corner of the monitor upon completion of system start-up. If this status icon does not appear, conduct a check in accordance with Starting the VCR on page VCR Operation H15. If the stop status icon ( ) has appeared, there is a video tape in the VCR. Press <EJECT> to eject the tape from the recorder.
VCR Operation H25

Inserting a tape
Insert a new S-VHS tape into the VCR. The system automatically begins to play it back and attempts to read tape information to see if the inserted tape has been previously registered. In the case of a new tape, the system takes about 30 seconds to complete the check and display the following confirmation message, with a prompt to initiate registration procedures.
Cannot read Tape ID. Register the new tape? (y/n) Type in y at the new tape registration confirmation message. This causes the system ID number and the new tapes tape ID number to appear on the screen. System ID = #####, New Tape ID = #####
NOTE: New registration of a video tape takes about one and half minutes. The monitor displays nothing during this period. Wait until registration is completed.
Recording ID
This tape ID is the tape number that will be used for the tape search function. Always write it down on the label to be attached to the tape.
VCR Operation H26

New Tape Registration Complete
Upon completing a new registration, the screen will display the VCR status icon ( ) and VCR counter.
NOTE: The tape header contains the system ID and tape ID registration number recorded. Thus, no data is recorded on the tape header.
When all the steps up to this point have been successfully completed, the monitor and control panel status is as follows: 1. Ext Video on the control panel is partially lit. 2. Pause/Record on the control panel is partially lit. 3. The monitor shows the stop VCR status icon ( ) and VCR counter on the bottom left corner of the screen. If these conditions have not yet been established, conduct a check following the procedure in Registering a New Tape on page VCR Operation H25.
VCR Operation H27

VCR Operation H28
Recording/Playback/Image Search
In order to record, playback and image search, the Starting the VCR procedures must be completed. The monitor shows the stop VCR status icon ( ) and both the Ext Video and Pause/Record keys on the control panel being partially lit.
NOTE: Recording is available only on the system if the tape has been previously registered on that system.
Recording Procedure
Registering a new patient
When Ext Video is partially lit (the scan image mode), press the New Patient key to enter new patient information. The image search function, described later, enables tape search/image search based on a patient name/patient ID and scan date. Check the patient name/patient ID before starting each patient examination. Start the examination and scan the patient. Scanned images are displayed on the monitor.
Start recording
Press Pause/Record to begin recording. When recording begins:
S S S
The Pause/Record key is fully lit. The VCR status icon changes to recording (q). The VCR counter is updated to indicate the recording time. The patient information and tape position acquired at the beginning of a recording will be stored on the system hard drive.
VCR Operation H29

Start recording (contd)
If a paused recording restarts, the patient information and tape position will also be stored in the system hard drive. Therefore, each time the tape is paused/restarted or stopped/restarted, the index heading markers are generated with the current patient information. Tape searches and image searches are performed based on this information.
.
Recording audio
NOTE: A single video tape allows up to 39 index head search markers to be recorded. More than 39 index markers can be recorded, but the image search function can handle only up to 39 index markers.
Doppler audio can be recorded in stereo or monaural, while doing Pulsed or Color Doppler studies. The stereo/monaural selection is found in the Set Up/Preset program menu page two. If there is a need to add audio to the video tape while recording, press the Mic key. (Blue Shift key must be enabled.) Anything spoken in the vicinity of the console will be recorded. The microphone is located on the bottom right side of the monitor.
Recording Complete
Press the Stop/Play key to complete recording OR press the Pause/Record key to pause recording. When recording is stopped, the VCR status icon changes to stop ( ). For pause, the status icon changes to paused ). recording (
In both cases, press Pause/Record to restart recording.
VCR Operation H30

Ejecting the tape
When the recording is completed, stop the VCR (status icon changes to ), then press <EJECT> to eject the tape from the recorder. Attach a label marked with the tape ID to the tape for storage. Rewinding the tape before ejecting will allow quicker ID identification when the tape is reinserted.
Playback Procedure
VCR playback
To playback VCR images, press the Stop/Play key. When playback begins, the system automatically switches to the video mode, displaying a VCR playback image on the monitor. The Ext Video key is fully lit in the video mode. If nothing is recorded on the tape and/or during playback of non-recorded areas, the monitor displays nothing. Moreover, pressing Stop/Play during playback to stop VCR playback will make the screen display nothing. Audio volume control Use the Audio Volume control, in the Doppler/CFM section of the keyboard, to control the VCR playback volume.
Freezing a VCR image During the playback of VCR images, a VCR image can be frozen by pressing Freeze. When an image is frozen, playback with measurements is available.
VCR Operation H31

Blue Shift mode Pressing the Blue Shift key activates the Blue Shift mode. Remote control of the VCR using the keyboard (FF/Rev/ Frame Shift) is available only in the Blue Shift mode (Blue Shift key is fully lit). Frame-forward search and variable speed search While a playback image is paused, each time Frame Shift is pressed, the paused playback image advances or rewinds one frame. Holding down Frame Shift changes the search (playback) speed continuously from frame-shift speed to 10 times faster than playback speed. If Frame Shift is released, the playback image returns to the pause status.
Stopping playback
Press Ext Video to return to the scan image mode. When the system returns to the scan image mode, the monitor displays a scan image and the VCR playback automatically stops. Ext Video is partially lit.
VCR Operation H32
Playback with Measurements

Measurements of a frozen VCR playback image are possible. Press Freeze to stop image acquisition of a VCR playback image, then press Measurement to activate the measurement function. The following measurements of playback images are not available. 1. Echo-level measurement 2. CFM-point velocity measurement 3. Biopsy guide measurement 4. TAMAX Auto (Auto trace disabled) To measure the TAMAX value or to take measurements using the TAMAX value, the TAMAX value must be obtained using manual trace. Any measurements other than those above, can be taken in the same way as measurements of normal scan images.
.
t
Writing comments to a frozen image and display of a body pattern are available. Measurement results can also be reported in the same way as in normal scan.
NOTE: When a VCR playback image is frozen, Cine review is not available.
VCR Operation H33

Precautions for playback with measurements
For an examination using a scan date (such as determining the growth of a fetus), note that the scan date recorded on a VCR image differs from the current date. The measurement results of playback images can be output in report form. The patient information and examination category typed in using the New Patient function cannot be modified even when the VCR is started. Thus, press New Patient or ID/Name (depending on the patient information/examination category of the VCR playback images) to correct the patient information output in report form. If the message: Please play VCR image and freeze at the other frame appears when a measurement is being taken, this indicates that measurement scale data has not been read in that frame. In this case, advance the VCR image a few frames, then freeze the VCR playback image and attempt the measurement again.
VCR Operation H34
Advanced Search
Image search
Activating Image Search Pressing Ctrl and I with Ext Video On enables an image search based on patient information and the scan date.
[ IMAGE SEARCH MENU PT NAME : PT ID : DATE (MM / DD / YY) :
Operator Message Area
Illustration 509. Image Search Menu
The search conditions can be entered by typing in a patient name, patient ID, scan date, or all three.
.
t
(An attempt to make a search with no information specified for the search conditions, causes all the patient information on the tape to appear in a list of the relevant patients.)
NOTE: Image search requires the VTRPB function option. The image search function cannot be activated in the scan image mode.
VCR Operation H35

Entering the search conditions Use the Trackball or press Return to move the cursor to either the PT NAME, PT ID or DATE field, depending on the type of search being done. For a search based on a patient name, enter the patient name using the cursor in the PT NAME field of the image search menu. For a search based on a patient ID, enter the patient ID with the cursor in the PT ID field of the image search menu. For a search based on a scan date, enter a scan date with the cursor in the DATE field of the image search menu. Pressing Return when the cursor is to the right of the appropriate field begins a search.
NOTE: A search based on a combination of patient name, patient ID, and scan date is also possible.
VCR Operation H36

Displaying the relevant patients The system searches the data on the system hard drive and displays a list of the relevant patients recorded on the tape.
[ IMAGE SEARCH MENU
PT NAME : 12345678901234567890123456789 PT ID : 12345678901234 DATE (MM / DD / YY) : 12 / 31 / 93 NUMBER : NAME NNNNNNNNNNNNN . . . . . . . NNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNN . . . . . . . NNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNN . . . . . . . NNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNN . . . . . . . NNNNNNNNN ....... ....... ....... ....... 10 NNNNNNNNNNNNN . . . . . . . NNNNNNNNN 1 2 3 4 Ctrl+N Ctrl+Q : Next Page : Quit Ctrl+P Ctrl+C ID IIIIIIIIIIIIII IIIIIIIIIIIIII IIIIIIIIIIIIII IIIIIIIIIIIIII DATE ## / ## / ## ## / ## / ## ## / ## / ## ## / ## / ##
IIIIIIIIIIIIII
## / ## / ##
: Previous Page : Cancel
.
t
Illustration 510. List of relevant patients Screen
NOTE: The list displays the relevant patients in the order of the latest scan dates.
To return from the list screen to the Search Conditions Input Screen, press Ctrl and Q simultaneously.
VCR Operation H37

Selecting the relevant patient Select the relevant patient from the list, enter the number on the list and press Return. If the number of the relevant patients exceeds 10, press Ctrl and N to display the next page of the patient list. To return to the previous page of the patient list, press Ctrl and P. If no relevant patient exists, the message Requested information doesnt exist on the tape appears and the system returns to Image Search Menu (see Illustration 509 on VCR Operation H35. Selecting the patient If the patient is selected by entering the number or if only one patient is present, the system displays the patient name, patient ID, and scan date of the relevant patient. It then begins a search.
[ IMAGE SEARCH MENU
PT NAME : 12345678901234567890123456789 PT ID : 12345678901234 DATE (MM / DD / YY) : 12 / 31 / 93
Illustration 511. Definite Patient Screen
VCR Operation H38

Displaying the images When the search is completed, the message: Search was completed. appears and the VCR image playback of the relevant patient begins if a search was activated while the VCR was playing.
Hints
S S
In a search using a patient name, upper-case and lower-case letters are not differentiated. The system lists all search candidates whose names include the entered word. Example: Entering Yama as the patient name to conduct a search displays all names containing those letters such as YAMADA, yamamonto, and Nakayama as candidates in the list.
S S
To exit the search menu, press Ctrl and C to cancel the search function. Pressing Ctrl and Q returns to the previous entry screen. If a mistake is made in data entry, press Back Space the required number of times to erase any wrong characters, then re-enter the correct characters.
VCR Operation H39
Tape Search
Pressing Ctrl and T with Ext Video On enables a tape search to be initiated based on patient information and scan date.
[ TAPE SEARCH MENU
Illustration 512. Tape Search Menu
The search conditions are entered by typing in a patient name, patient ID, scan date, or all three.
(An attempt to conduct a search when no information is specified for the search conditions causes all patient information in the hard drive to appear in the list of relevant patients.)
NOTE: A tape search requires the optional VTR-PB function. The tape search function cannot be activated in the scan image mode.
VCR Operation H40

Entering the search conditions Use the Trackball or press Return to move the cursor. 1. For a search based on a patient name, enter the patient name with the cursor in the PT NAME field of the tape search menu. 2. For a search based on a patient ID, enter the patient ID with the cursor in the PT ID field of the tape search menu. 3. For a search based on a scan date, enter a scan date with the cursor in the DATE field of the tape search menu. Pressing Return when the cursor is to the right of the DATE field begins a search.
NOTE: A search based on a combination of patient name, patient ID, and scan date is also possible.
VCR Operation H41

Display of the relevant patients The system searches the data on the system hard drive and displays a list of the relevant patients recorded on the tape.
[ TAPE SEARCH MENU
PT NAME : 12345678901234567890123456789 PT ID : 12345678901234 DATE (MM / DD / YY) : 12 / 31 / 93 NUMBER : NAME NNNNNNNNNNNNN . . . . . . . NNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNN . . . . . . . NNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNN . . . . . . . NNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNN . . . . . . . NNNNNNNNN ....... ....... ....... ....... 10 NNNNNNNNNNNNN . . . . . . . NNNNNNNNN 1 2 3 4 Ctrl+N Ctrl+Q : Next Page : Quit Ctrl+P Ctrl+C ID IIIIIIIIIIIIII IIIIIIIIIIIIII IIIIIIIIIIIIII IIIIIIIIIIIIII
IIIIIIIIIIIIII
: Previous Page : Cancel
Illustration 513. List of Relevant Patients Screen
NOTE: The list displays the relevant patients in the order of the latest scan dates.
Re-entering the search conditions To return from the list screen to Tape Search Menu (see Illustration 512 on VCR Operation H40), press Ctrl and Q simultaneously.
VCR Operation H42

Selecting the relevant patient Select the relevant patient from the list, enter the number on the list and press Return. If the number of the relevant patients exceeds 10, press Ctrl and N to display the next page of the patient list. To return to the previous page of the patient list, press Ctrl and P. If no relevant patient exists, the message Requested information doesnt exist on the tape appears and the system returns to the Tape Search Menu (see Illustration 512 on VCR Operation H40). Selecting the patient If the patient is selected by entering the number or if only one patient is present, the system displays the patient name/patient ID/scan date of the relevant patient and begins a search.
VCR Operation H43

Displaying the search results When the search is completed, the system displays the message: Search was completed. as well as the system ID and tape ID of the relevant tape.
[ TAPE SEARCH MENU
SYSTEM ID XXXXX
TAPE ID XXXX
Ctrl + Q : Quit
Ctrl + C : Cancel
Illustration 514. Definite Tape ID
Hints
S S
In a search using a patient name, upper-case and lower-case letters are not differentiated. The system lists all search candidates whose names include the entered word. Example: Entering Yama as the patient name to conduct a search displays all names containing those letters such as YAMADA, yamamonto, and Nakayama as candidates in the list.
S S
To exit the search menu in mid-course, press Ctrl and C to cancel the search function. Pressing Ctrl and Q returns to the previous entry screen. If a mistake is made in data entry, press Back Space the required number of times to erase any wrong characters, then re-enter the correct characters.
VCR Operation H44
Saving/Reading the Data to be Searched

To conduct a search for a video tape recorded on another LOGIQ 400, the index, patient information, and scan date acquired when a recording is made are stored in the system hard drive whenever recording begins. Also, an index marker is recorded on the tape. When an image search is initiated, the system conducts a search of data in the system hard drive to determine the index number of the relevant image, and transfers it to the VCR. The VCR searches for the index marker on the tape in accordance with the transferred index number. Thus, an image search requires that the data being searched be stored in the hard disk drive.
NOTE: To conduct an image search on a system other than the system on which the relevant tape was registered, the data to be searched needs to be copied onto the system in which an image search is conducted.
In the LOGIQ 400 system, data in the system hard drive can be saved on a video tape, then a system on which an image search is to be conducted reads the data on the tape to copy the data to be searched.
Saving the data to be searched

To save the data in the hard drive on a video tape, press Ctrl and V simultaneously with Ext Video On. This causes the following message to appear: Save patient information on VCR Tape? (y/n). To save the data on the tape, type in Y. The system automatically rewinds the tape up to the tape header and records the data in the hard drive onto the tape in bar code. When the data has been saved onto the tape, the VCR stop (changing the status icon to ).
At this point, press Ext Video to place the system in the scan image mode and then eject the tape from the recorder.
VCR Operation H45

Reading the data to be searched
To store the data on a video tape in the system, press Ctrl and S simultaneously with Ext Video On. This causes the following message to appear: Save patient information to System? (y/n). To cancel this function, press N To read the data into the system, press Y. The system automatically rewinds the tape up to the tape header, reads the information on the tape and records it on the system hard drive. When saving on the hard drive is complete, the VCR stops (changing the status icon to ).
At this point, press Ctrl and I simultaneously to initiate an image search or Play to begin playback.
NOTE: Recording is available only on the system on which the relevant tape was registered. The data to be searched on a video tape cannot be written back into the system on which the tape was registered.
The original data on the system hard drive cannot be rewritten by rewriting the information (copied) on the tape. If a read fails or if an attempt is made to read the information from a video tape on which no data to be searched has been saved, the VCR plays for about 2 minutes, then rewind the tape to its initial point before stopping.
VCR Operation H46
Troubleshooting
Inspection Sequence
If trouble is suspected, conduct a check in the following order. 1. An operation guide/error message appears at the bottom of the system monitor. Refer to Operation Guide/Error Messages on VCR Operation H48. 2. Check the items in A List of Problems and How To Trouble Shoot Them on VCR Operation H51. 3. Check the VCR switch settings. Refer to Setting Up the VCR on VCR Operation H11. If the problem remains after conducting the above, contact a qualified service representative.
VCR Operation H47
Operation Guide/Error Messages

The table below shows each message and the appropriate action to take. The message column lists the operation guide/error messages displayed at the bottom of the monitor during VCR operation.
No. (1) Message Cannot read Tape ID. Register the new tape? (y/n) Possible Cause 1) An unregistered new tape was inserted into the VCR. 2) The tape ID could not be read. There is no signal input or response from the VCR. Possible Corrective Action Type y to register a new tape. Refer to Registering a New Tape on VCR Operation H25. Type n to proceed to message (08) to re-attempt reading the tape drive. 1) Check the VCR power cord and all the cable connections. 2) Check the settings of the LOGIQ 500 System Parameters menu page 5. Refer to Customizing Your System in LOGIQ 500 User Manual Volume 2. 3) Check the VCR switch settings. Refer to Setting Up the VCR on VCR Operation H11. Insert a tape into the VCR. Advance the tape a few frames, then freeze the image.
(2)
Check VCR.
(3) (4)
Check VCR. No Cassette. Please play VCR image and freeze at the other frame. Protected. Check Tape.
The VCR has no tape. The image information on a tape cannot be read.
(5)
This tape has been write protected.
Use an un-protected tape.
Table 67. Operation Guide/Error Messages
VCR Operation H48

No. (6) Message Requested information doesnt exist on the tape. Possible Cause The patient image is not on the tape. Possible Corrective Action 1) Verify search conditions and re-attempt, if necessary. 2) When an inappropriate tape is used, cancel image search and press Ctrl and T to activate a tape search. Find the tape on which the relevant patient detected by the tape search has been recorded. Insert the relevant tape into the VCR and re-attempt an image search. Refer to Advanced Search on VCR Operation H35. 1) Verify search conditions and re-attempt, if necessary. 2) When an inappropriate system is used, cancel tape search and re-attempt the search on the correct system. Refer to Tape Search on VCR Operation H40. y) Type y to re-attempt reading the tape ID. n) Type n to cancel reading the tape ID. y) Type y to save information on the tape. n) Type n to cancel the save. Refer to Saving/Reading the Data to be Searched on VCR Operation H45. y) Type y to save information on the hard drive. n) Type n to cancel the save. Refer to Saving/Reading the Data to be Searched on VCR Operation H45.
(7)
Requested information doesnt exist in System.
The patient information is not on the hard drive.
(8)
Reattempt to read Tape ID? (y/n) Save patient information on VCR Tape? (y/n)
The tape ID cannot be read.
(9)
The operator pressed Ctrl and V to save patient information on the VCR tape.
(10)
Save patient information on System? (y/n)
The operator pressed Control and S to save patient information on the hard drive.
Table 67. Operation Guide/Error Messages (contd)
VCR Operation H49

No. (11) Message Searching Possible Cause The VCR is searching the tape. Wait for the search to be completed. The VCR search is completed. Possible Corrective Action
(12)
Search was completed.
(13)
System ID = #####, Tape ID = ##### System ID = #####, New Tape ID = ##### This function is not available.
The tape was mounted.
(14)
A new tape was registered.
NOTE: Enter the tape ID on the label to be attached to the tape.
(15)
The function selected is not available for some reason (e.g., a function disabling another function from being activated simultaneously has been initiated). Table 67. Operation Guide/Error Messages (contd)
VCR Operation H50
A List of Problems and How To Troubleshoot Them

Problem Possible Cause Possible Corrective Action If a tape advances to an unregistered area as a result of playback or fastforward search, nothing will appear on the screen and the VCR counter will stop running. Even under this condition, the PLAY or FWD LED on the VCR is lit. Rewind the tape up to a recorded area. Check Ext Video. If it is fully lit, the system is in the video mode. Press Ext Video to select the scan image mode, or Press Play to begin VCR playback. Check the VCR connections and LOGIQ 500 settings, then re-start the system following the procedure in Starting the VCR on VCR Operation H15. Registration of a new tape takes about one and half minutes. During this time, the correct status icon doesnt appear. Refer to Registering a New Tape on VCR Operation H25.
The screen displays nothing. Unregistered area is being played back in the video image mode.
The screen displays nothing. The VCR has stopped in the video image mode.
VCR status icon doesnt appear.
The VCR has not been recognized.
The VCR status icon doesnt New tape is being regisappear. tered.

? ?
Table 68. Operation Guide/Troubleshooting Problems
VCR Operation H51

Problem Possible Cause Possible Corrective Action When a tape is inserted into the VCR, the system automatically rewinds it to the tape header to conduct tape ID check/collation. After checking/collating, the VCR automatically fast forwards it to the initial tape position when the tape was inserted. During this period, the correct status icon doesnt appear on the screen. Wait for the VCR to stop. When ID checking/collation has been completed, the message System ID = #####, Tape ID = ##### appears. Eject the tape from the VCR, turn the system power off, and re-start the system.
The VCR status icon doesnt System ID and tape ID are appear. being checked/collated.
ID collation is complete, but Ext Video doesnt light up.
Tape cannot be inserted into the VCR.
Tape cannot be inserted into the VCR.
VCR Operation H52
A VCR-related key was pressed during ID collation.
The VCR already has a tape.
Check the VCR for a tape.
Condensation has occurred in the VCR.
If the VCR indicator AUTO OFF is lit, condensation has occurred in the VCR. Wait for the AUTO OFF LED to go off.
Table 68. Operation Guide/Troubleshooting Problems (contd)
If the system has a problem or suffers a failure, contact a qualified service representative or a sales representative for assistance.
Helpful hints Hints

The following hints can help when using the VCR:
S S S S S S S S S
S-VHS video tapes must be used to take full advantage of the S-VHS features. Images taped on an S-VHS unit must be played back on an S-VHS unit. VHS recorded images can be played on an S-VHS unit. S-VHS recorded tapes will not playback on standard VHS recorders. VHS tapes can be used in an S-VHS unit; however, they will not work in S-VHS Mode. Break out tab to disable Record. Tape over hole to record again. For keyboard entries like Ctrl, I or to answer y/n questions, the Blue Shift key must be off. To use the VCR control keys, the Blue Shift key must be on.
CAUTION
The system can keep track of patient and tape information. The system can search a tape for patient images. However, the system CANNOT:
S S
Stop or indicate when it comes to the end of the last study on the tape. Prevent recording over previous studies if record is pressed while positioned in the middle of a study.
VCR Operation H53

VCR Operation H54
Index
Index
Symbols
Numbers
A
Index 1
Index
B
Index 2
Index
C
Index 3
Index
Index 4
Index
D
Index 5
Index
E
Index 6
Index
F
G
H
Index 7
Index
I
L
K
Index 8
Index
M
Index 9
Index
N
O
Index 10
Index
P
Index 11
Index
Index 12
Index
Q
S
R
Index 13
Index
Index 14
Index
U
T
Index 15
Index
V
W
Z
Index 16

GE Logic 400 User Manual

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

GE Logic 400 User Manual

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

GE Medical Systems

1997 By General Electric Co.

REASON FOR CHANGE

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

LOGIQ 400 User Manual 2177612100 Rev 0

LOGIQ 400 User Manual 2177612100 Rev 0

How This Book is Organized . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

How to Use This Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LOGIQ 400 Users Manual 2156967100 Rev 0

Relocating The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LOGIQ 400 Users Manual 2156967100 Rev 0

Equipment and Personnel Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Warning Label Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Reading the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LOGIQ 400 Users Manual 2156967100 Rev 0

LOGIQ 400 Users Manual 2156967100 Rev 0

LOGIQ 400 Users Manual 2156967100 Rev 0

Optimizing the Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Activating Doppler Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LOGIQ 400 Users Manual 2156967100 Rev 0

Optimizing the Timeline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LOGIQ 400 Users Manual 2156967100 Rev 0

Activating Color Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Optimizing the Color Flow Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CFM/PDI Enhancement (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Power Doppler Imaging (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Colorized Gray Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LOGIQ 400 Users Manual 2156967100 Rev 0

Index of Preset Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LOGIQ 400 Users Manual 2156967100 Rev 0

Exam Applications Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

User Define Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

User Data Back-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LOGIQ 400 Users Manual 2156967100 Rev 0

Doppler Mode Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gen. Meas/Calcs 15

M-Mode Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gen. Meas/Calcs 21

CFM B-Mode Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gen. Meas/Calcs 25

LOGIQ 400 Users Manual 2156967100 Rev 0

Urology Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Abdom/Small Parts 33

LOGIQ 400 Users Manual 2156967100 Rev 0

OB Measurements and Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LOGIQ 400 Users Manual 2156967100 Rev 0

Basic OBMultigestational (software option) . . . . . .

Data Management Center (DMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LOGIQ 400 Users Manual 2156967100 Rev 0

Vascular Summary Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Advanced Vascular (software option) . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LOGIQ 400 Users Manual 2156967100 Rev 0

Additional Cardiology Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LOGIQ 400 Users Manual 2156967100 Rev 0

Advanced Cardiac Calculations (AMCAL option) . .

LOGIQ 400 Users Manual 2156967100 Rev 0

LOGIQ 400 Users Manual 2156967100 Rev 0

LOGIQ 400 Users Manual 2156967100 Rev 0

LOGIQ 400 Users Manual 2156967100 Rev 0

Operator Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Maintenance 23

Quality Assurance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Maintenance 29

LOGIQ 400 Users Manual 2156967100 Rev 0

LOGIQ 400 Users Manual 2156967100 Rev 0

LOGIQ 400 Users Manual 2156967100 Rev 0

LOGIQ 400 Users Manual 2156967100 Rev 0

Video Cassette Recorder Operating Instructions

Introduction of VCR Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setting Up the VCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .